i2000-i2000SR Service Manual PDF

ARCHITECT i System Service and Support Manual
i2000 i2000SR
Manual Revision Number
96661-129
Front Matter Content Control Number
96706-129
© 2002, 2015 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL. All rights reserved.
Revision Log
Click for Chapter 4 Removal and Replacement and Chapter 5 Verification Procedure Revision History
All other revision history is located in the following table.
SECTIONS TSBs
REVISION DATE ISAs INCORPORATED
REVISED/ADDED INCORPORATED
96661- MAY/2015 ARCHITECT N/A N/A

129 i System Revision
96661-129
Change Listing
96661- APR/2015 ARCHITECT N/A N/A
96661-128
Change Listing
96661- JUN/2012 ARCHITECT N/A N/A

96661-127
Change Listing
96661- NOV/2010 ARCHITECT N/A N/A
96661-126
Change Listing
96661-125
Change Listing
96661- MAY/2010 ARCHITECT N/A N/A
96661-124
Change Listing
96661- MAR/2010 ARCHITECT N/A N/A
96661-123
Change Listing
96661-122
Change Listing
96661- SEPT/2009 ARCHITECT N/A N/A
96661-121
Change Listing
96661- AUG/2009 ARCHITECT N/A N/A
96661-120
Change Listing
96661-119
Change Listing
96661- FEB/2009 ARCHITECT N/A N/A
96661-118
Change Listing
96661- SEPT/2008 ARCHITECT N/A N/A
96661-117
Change Listing
96661-116
Change Listing
96661- OCT/2007 ARCHITECT N/A 115-131, 115-188, 115-204, 115-205A, 115-218, 115-
115 i System Revision 220, 116-068A
96661-115
Change Listing
96661- SEP/2007 ARCHITECT N/A N/A

96661-114
Change Listing
96661-113
Change Listing
96661-112
Change Listing
96661-111
Change Listing
96661-110
Change Listing
96661- MAR/2006 ARCHITECT 116-032C 115-187A, 116-025, 116-041, 116-047, 116-059, 116-066A,
109 i System Revision 116-072, 116-084, 116-099
96661-109
Change Listing

96661-108
Change Listing
96661- JAN/2005 ARCHITECT N/A N/A
96661-107
Change Listing
96661-106
Change Listing
96661- MAR/2004 ARCHITECT N/A 115-007; 115-009; 115-014A; 115-016A; 115-017; 115-032B;
105 i System Revision 115-041; 115-042; 115-047; 115-055; 115-058; 115-059; 115-
96661-105 062; 115-063; 115-066; 115-074; 115-075; 115-077A; 115-
Change Listing 082C; 115-084; 115-088; 115-090; 115-092; 115-096A; 115-
098; 115-100; 115-101; 115-104; 115-106; 115-107; 115-109;
115-110; 115-117A; 115-118; 115-120; 115-122; 115-123;
115-124; 115-126; 115-129; 115-132; 115-134; 115-138; 115-
141; 115-142; 115-148; 115-152; 115-163; 116-004; 116-007;
116-008; 116-010; 116-019; 116-020; 116-021; 116-022; 116-
023; 116-028A; 116-029; 116-033; 116-038; 116-045; 116-050
96661- MAY/2003 i2000SR Revision N/A N/A

104 96661-104
Change Listing
96661- JAN/2003 i2000SR Revision N/A N/A

103 96661-103
Change Listing
96661- DEC/2002 i2000SR Revision N/A N/A

102 96661-102
Change Listing
96661- SEP/2002 ALL (NEW N/A N/A

101 PUBLICATION)
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-129) • © 2002, 2015 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are
registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Proprietary Information
(Document Control Number 204669-102)
The information, documents and related graphics published herein (the "Information") are the sole property of Abbott Laboratories.
Permission to use the Information is granted, provided that
the copyright notice appears on all copies;

use of the Information is for operation of ABBOTT products by Abbott trained personnel or informational use only;
the Information is not modified in any way; and
no graphics are used separate from accompanying text.
Each person assumes full responsibility and all risks arising from use of the Information. The Information is presented "AS IS" and
may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Abbott Laboratories reserves the right to make additions, deletions, or
modifications to the Information at any time without any prior notification.
Qualifications:
All samples (printouts, graphics, displays, screens, etc.) are for information and illustration purposes only and shall not be
used for clinical or maintenance evaluations. Data shown in sample printouts and screens do not reflect actual patient
names or test results.
The information was developed to be used by Abbott Laboratories-trained personnel, by other persons knowledgeable or
experienced with the operation and service of the product identified, under the supervision and with cooperation from Abbott
Laboratories technical support or service representatives.
In no event shall Abbott Laboratories or its affiliates be liable for any damages or losses incurred in connection with or
arising from the use of the information by persons not fully trained by Abbott Laboratories. This limitation shall not apply to
those persons knowledgeable or experienced with the operation and service of the product identified, under the supervision
and with cooperation from Abbott Laboratories technical sales or service representatives.
No part of this media may be reproduced, stored, retrieved, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior
written permission of Abbott Laboratories.
No confidential relationship shall be established in the event that any user of the Information should make any oral, written
or electronic response to Abbott Laboratories (such as feedback, questions, comments, suggestions, ideas, etc.). Such
response and any information submitted therewith shall be considered non-confidential, and Abbott shall be free to
reproduce, publish or otherwise use such information for any purposes whatsoever including, without limitation, the research,
development, manufacture, service, use, or sale of products incorporating such information. The sender of any information to
Abbott is fully responsible for its content, including its truthfulness and accuracy and its non-infringement of any other
person's proprietary rights.
Abbott Laboratories is not engaged in rendering medical advice or services.
Updates to the Information may be provided in either paper or electronic format. Always refer to the latest documents for the
most current information.
All Abbott Laboratories product names and trademarks are owned by or licensed to Abbott Laboratories, its subsidiaries or affiliates.
No use of any Abbott trademark, trade name, trade dress, or product name may be made without the prior written authorization of
Abbott Laboratories, except to identify the product or services of Abbott Laboratories. All other trademarks, brands, product names,
and trade names are the property of their respective companies. All rights reserved.
Except as permitted above, no license or right, express or implied, is granted to any person under any patent, trademark, or other
proprietary right of Abbott Laboratories.
ABBOTT LABORATORIES MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WITH RESPECT
TO THE INFORMATION. ABBOTT LABORATORIES HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, CREATED BY LAW, CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN
NO EVENT SHALL ABBOTT LABORATORIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFIT) CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE EXISTENCE OR USE OF THE INFORMATION, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER ABBOTT LABORATORIES HAS BEEN ADVISED AS TO THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories
in various jurisdictions.
i4000, i6000, i8000, c4000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
i 2000 SR Revision 96661-102 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from 96661-101 to 96661-102 of the i 2000 SR Service and Support Manual.
Section Sections
Revision
Numbers Revised/Added
GLOBAL ALL Change "proceed to" to "go to" when going from one Step to another or to an Action
GLOBAL ALL Change Note "Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If leaks are seen, repeat the
installation procedure." to "Visually check for leaks...." becomes a Step, and "If leaks are seen..."
stays a Note.
GLOBAL ALL Change "Allen" to "hex"
GLOBAL ALL Delete links to P-70 (found in S1.04, S1.05)
Front Title Change Manual Revision Number from 96661-101 to 96661-102

Matter
Front Title Change Front Matter Document Control Number from 96706-101 to 96706-102
Matter
Front Title Add A1_8190

Matter
1 Change Section 1 Document Control Number from 96725-101 to 96725-102
1 1.2 Update A1_9270 and replace AMA-9115 with AMA-88238
1 1.3 Change "i 2000 Module Overview" to "i 2000 SR Module Overview"
1 1.3 Add "Temperature and Wash Aspirate Monitoring" to Links
1 1.3 Update A1_9296
1 1.3 In "immunoassy Processing Module" add A1_8190
1 1.3 In "immunoassy Processing Module" update AMA-9094
2 2.2 In "Card Cage Boards", "Card Cage Slot Location", add "Circuit Axis" and "Fuse" cols and content
2 2.2 In "Card Cage Boards" change "MODULE 0 (i 2000® only)" to "MODULE 0 Standard Sample
Handler (i 2000® only)"
2 2.2 In "Card Cage Boards" change "Bits 0-47 return to the CPU board.)" to "Bits 0-47 return to the
process module CPU board."
2 2.5 In "Jumpers", "Indexer Board (7617)", update table with add content
2 2.6 In "Fluid/Waste Diagrams", 1A_9292, change symbol used for Accumulator Tubing
2 2.6 In "Fluid/Waste Diagrams", AMA-9244 add Accumulator Tubing symbol

2 2.6 In "SCC Interconnect Diagram" change "IAHV2 Serial Cable" to "ARM Serial Cable"
3 Cable Locator Delete part number 94085
4 A1 Change Document Control Number from 96729-101 to 96729-102
4 A1.09 Add "(RV Loader Wheel Home)" to RR name and remove from part name
4 B1 Change Document Control Number from 96730-101 to 96730-102
4 B1.01 Change "Remove Sample Wash Station" Action to "Remove Sample and STAT (i 2000 SR) Wash
Station(s)"
4 B1.01 In "Remove Sample and STAT (i 2000 SR) Wash Station(s)" Action, delete "sample" from all Steps
4 B1.01 Replace "Remove Hopper and Hopper Baffle" Action with "Remove Hopper Baffle and RVs",
"Disconnect Cables", and "Remove Hopper" Actions from A1.01
4 B1.01 Insert "Remove STAT Diverter" Action from B2.19 after "Remove RV Loader" Action
4 B1.01 Change "Remove Three (3) Vortexers" Action to "Remove Vortexers" and add Note "This Action
covers the three (3) vortexers in the i 2000 instrument and the four (4) vortexers in the i 2000 SR
instrument."
4 B1.01 Change "Install Vortexers (3)" Action to "Install Vortexers" and add Note "This Action covers the
three (3) vortexers in the i 2000 instrument and the four (4) vortexers in the i 2000 SR instrument."
4 B1.01 Change "Install Sample Wash Station" Action to "Install Sample and STAT (i 2000 SR) Wash
Station(s)"
4 B1.01 In "Install Sample and STAT (i 2000 SR) Wash Station(s)" Action, delete "sample" from all Steps
4 B1.01 Insert "Install STAT Diverter" Action from B2.19 after "Install Sample and STAT (i 2000 SR) Wash
Station(s)" Action
4 B1.01 Replace "Install Hopper and Hopper Baffle" Action with "Verify Connections (i 2000)", "Install
Hopper", "Connect Cables", and "Install Hopper Baffle" Actions from A1.01
4 B2 Change Document Control Number from 96731-101 to 96731-102
4 B2.17 Change Allen refs to hex
4 B2.17 In Preparation, change Note from "...vortexer locations (VTX1, VTX2 or VTX3)." to "...vortexer
locations (VTX1, VTX2, VTX3 and VTXST)."
4 C1 Change Document Control Number from 96732-101 to 96732-102
4 C1.02 Change RR name to "BD,SENSOR #1 (Shutter)" and delete "(Shutter)" from part name
4 D2 Change Document Control Number from 96734-101 to 96734-102
4 D2.01 Add part "93777", "Cover,Reagent Carousel I2000SR"
4 E1 Change Document Control Number from 96735-101 to 96735-102
4 E1.05 Incoporated numerous changes

4 E2.01 Add part "94047", "Bd,Antenna,LLS,R2 (i 2000 SR)"
4 E2.01 Delete "Remove R2 LLS Antenna" Action
4 E2.01 Delete "Install R2 Reagent LLS Antenna Board" Action
4 E2.01 Change "Installouter Reagent Carousel" Action to "Install Outer Reagent Carousel"
4 E2.01 In "Install R1 Reagent LLS Antenna Board" Action, add "Verify proper antenna ground connection
by measuring the resistance between the antenna ground connection and comparing the reading
with a known good ground (pipettor frame, or process path mounting screw)." as last Step in Action
4 E2.02 Add part "94047", "Bd,Antenna,LLS,R2 (i 2000 SR)"
4 E2.02 Delete "Remove Antenna Flex Circuit" Action
4 E2.02 Delete "Remove R1 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action
4 E2.02 In "Remove R2 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action, change "Remove the four (4) screws that secure the
antenna flex circuit board to the mounting blocks." to "Remove the screws (four (4)-i 2000; ten (10)
i 2000 SR) that secure the antenna flex circuit board to the mounting blocks."
4 E2.02 In "Remove R2 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action, delete Step "Remove the screw that secures the R2
(single position) antenna flex cable."
4 E2.02 In "Remove R2 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action, add Step "Remove the foam 93871 foam plug."
4 E2.02 In "Remove R2 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action, delete Step "Grasp the R2 (single position) antenna
flex circuit near the antenna board connector J5."
4 E2.02 In "Remove R2 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action, delete Step "Grasp the R2 (single position) antenna
flex circuit."
4 E2.02 In "Remove R2 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action, delete Step "Grasp the LLS antenna board with other
hand and pull out the R2 (single position) antenna flex circuit from connector J5."
4 E2.02 In "Remove R2 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action, add Step "Slowly pull the antenna up to gain access
to the connectors."
4 E2.02 In "Remove R2 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action, add Step "Place a piece of tape around the cables to
hold them up."
4 E2.02 In "Remove R2 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action, add Step "Disconnect the following: J1 - W77 ANT, J3
- R2 ANT R48 SIGNAL (i 2000 SR only), J4 - W39 / W175 ANT PWR"
4 E2.02 In "Remove R2 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action, add Step "Disconnect the following: J1 - W77 ANT, J3
- R2 ANT R48 SIGNAL (i 2000 SR only), J4 - W39 / W175 ANT PWR"
4 E2.02 Delete "Install Reagent LLS Antenna Board" Action
4 E2.02 Delete "Install R1 Antenna Flex Circuit Board" Action
4 E2.02 THIS NEEDS TO MATCH THE NEW INSTALL -- THERE IS A CABLE NAMING QUESTION
OUTSTANDING
4 E2.05 In "Install RV1/2 and RV2 Antenna" Action, add "Verify proper antenna ground connection by
measuring the resistance between the antenna ground connection and comparing the reading with
a known good ground (pipettor frame, or process path mounting screw)." as last Step in Action
4 E3.05 Add "Verify Tubing/Ferrule Assembly" as first Replacement Action with "Perform P-XXX Tubing
Ferrule Verification
4 E3.05 In "Install Pump Tubing" Action, replace existing content with new content and graphic A1_8226
4 G1 Change Document Control Number from 96739-101 to 96739-102
4 G1.05 Add part "93882", "Manifold,WZ,ASM i200SR"

4 H1 Change Document Control Number from 96740-101 to 96740-102
4 H1.05 Add part "94154", "Manifold,Pre-Trig/Trig ASM, i2SR"
4 K1 Change Document Control Number from 96742-101 to 96742-102
4 K1.01 Add/rearrange parts "77798", "Vessel,Vacuum,Zone 2 ASM"; "96247", "Vessel,Vacuum,Zone 1

ASM, i200SR"; "96248", "Vessel,Vacuum,Zone 2 ASM, i200SR"
4 M1 Change Document Control Number from 96744-101 to 96744-102
4 M1.01 In "Disconnect All Connectors at Back of Card Cage" Action change "...connector [130 connectors]
from..." to "...connector [68 connectors] from..."
4 M1.01 In "Disconnect All Connectors at Back of Card Cage" Action, add "To access to the card cage hinge
and strain relief mounting screws, perform one of the following. If the right side panel card cage
rear access panel is accessible, don't cut the cable bundles from the cable strain relief bracket. If
the card cage rear access panel cannot be removed, cut the cable ties and remove the cables."
4 M1.01 In "Disconnect All Connectors at Back of Card Cage" Action, delete "Do not cut the cable bundles
from the cable strain relief bracket. " from Note
4 M1.01 Change "Remove Bracket" Action to "Remove Strain Relief Bracket with Cables"
4 M1.01 In "Remove Strain Relief Bracket with Cables" Action, change "Loosen the top, middle, and
bottom..." to "Loosen the top and bottom..."
4 M1.01 In "Remove Strain Relief Bracket with Cables" Action, add "Remove the two (2) middle screws."
4 M1.01 In "Remove Card Cage from Hinge" Action, change "Remove the five (5) middle hinge screws." to
"Remove the two (2) middle hinge screws."
4 M1.01 In "Install Card Cage" Action, change "Reattach the 5 middle hinge screws." to "Reattach the two
(2) middle hinge screws.."
4 M1.01 In "Install Cable Strain Relief Bracket (With All Cable Bundles Attached)" Action, change "Reattach
the 5 middle hinge screws." to "Reattach the other two (2) screws."
4 M1.01 In "Install Cable Strain Relief Bracket (With All Cable Bundles Attached)" Action, add "Reattach any
cables that were removed."
4 M1.01 Add "Verify Power Status" Action and Step "Verify that the power cord is connected to the power
source and that the switch is turned OFF."
4 M1.01 In "Transfer Each Board from Card Cage to Card Cage" Action, delete "Continue to repeat steps
until..."
4 M1.01 In "Transfer Each Board from Card Cage to Card Cage" Action, change "Place the boards in the
card cage in the same slot location as in the card cage." to "Place the boards in the new card
cage in the same slot location as in the old card cage."
4 M1.03 Add part "90370", "Bd,Indexer, i2000SR"
4 M1.06 Add part "78665", "Bd,Controller, i2000SR"; "78889 Wrist strap"
4 Q1.05 Change part number from "78801" to "78800"
5 5.1 Add (Document Control Number 96852-101)
5 5.1 Add 1245
5 5.1 In 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009, add in Time col "10 min"
5 5.1 In 2021, change "10 min" to "5 min"

5 5.1 In 3150, change "R or W (Init)" to "S, R, or W (Idle)"
5 5.1 In 3150, Scope, change "Diverters are homed and their sensor function is tested." to "Diverters are
moved 10 times. When testing the RV load diverter or STAT diverter 10 RVs are loaded from the
inner track to the outer track and moved to the RV access door to confirm 10 RVs were loaded."
5 5.1 In 3150, Options, delete "RV Load Shutter" and "All"
5 5.1 In 3150, Time, change "1 min" to "5 min"
5 5.1 In 3200, Special Tools, add "or Bar code calibration tool"
5 5.1 In 3220, Special Tools, delete "LQ bar code tool (7-91925-01)"
5 5.1 In 3401, replace content with "This procedure tests the carrier/tray sensors for priority and routine
bays."
5 5.1 Add 4080
5 5.1 Add 4090
5 5.1 Change 6000 to "Retrieve Test Counts"
5 5.1 Change 6200 to "CLI Terminal Simulator"
5 5.2 Change Document Control Number from 96756-101 to 96756-102
5 GLOBAL In "Log On as FSE" Action, remove Version 1.5 info in Note

5 5.2 P-02, change "25 min" to "10 min"
5 5.2 P-02, in "Select Modem" Action, delete " (this information is loaded during modem installation)"
5 5.2 P-02, in "Naming ARCHITECT Icon" Action, change "The remote icon displays." to "The new
remote icon displays."
5 5.2 P-03, in "Purpose", change "...ARM, Arch, Crash." to "...ARM, Arch, Unhandled, Application Event,
Temporary"
5 5.2 P-03, in "Purpose", add "Refer to the tables below for additional information regarding each option."
5 5.2 P-03, in "Retrieve Logs", add "Select the appropriate option. Refer to the tables below for additional
information."
5 5.2 P-03, in "Retrieve Logs", add "Error Messages" heading and content (table and text)
5 5.2 P-03, in "Retrieve Logs", log table, move LAS row after ARM
5 5.2 P-03, in "Retrieve Logs", log table, add rows for "Arch, Unhandled, Application Event, Temporary"
after Dr. Watson
5 5.2 P-03, in "Retrieve Logs", add "Copy Database to CD Option", "Copy Archive Logs to CD Option",
"Retrieve Memory Dump File Option (FSE only)"
5 5.2 P-07, Action, change "From the any ARCHITECT screen, select the Alt+Print Screen and verify that
the screen prints." to "From any ARCHITECT screen, select the Alt+Print Screen keys and verify
that the screen prints."
5 5.2 Add P-09 Wash Zone Cleaning
5 5.2 P-15, procedure rewritten
5 5.2 P-16, add "Log On" Action
5 5.2 P-16, changes in "pcAnywhere Settings" Action
5 5.2 P-16, "Verify/Configure to Automatic Startup and Start the Service", change "This occurs if a
modem is being installed on an existing SCC that was not originally installed with a modem." to
"This may occur if the service setting for pcAnywhere was changed from Automatic to Manual
start."
5 5.2 P-16, "Verify/Configure to Automatic Startup and Start the Service", delete "Start Service" Action
5 5.2 P-17, procedure rewritten
5 5.2 P-18, delete "(10% bleach solution)"
5 5.2 P-19, "Enter Modem Number" Action, add "Be sure to enter any necessary access codes (for
outside line, etc.)"
5 5.2 P-19, "Open Programs" Action, add "Click OK." and "Minimize the Task manager window."
5 5.2 P-20, "Restore Database" Action, change "...robo.cal and ish.cal files." to "...robo.cal and sample
handler.cal files."
5 5.2 P-26, "Rewrite C: Drive" Action, change "...computer reboots, NT loads and performs..." to
"...computer reboots, Windows loads and performs..."
5 5.2 P-26, "Restart SCC and Locate Backups" Action, change "When the Snapshot screen displays,
select the System icon..." to "When the Snapshot screen displays, log on as FSE (refer to P-01
Service Log On/Log Off Procedure)."
5 5.2 P-26, "Perform Control Run" Action, change "Calculate the mean, sd, and CVs. Verify that the CVs
are under 10%." to ""
5 5.2 P-28, "Power ON Processing Module" Action, change "The system control center power must be
ON prior to turning..." to "The system control center power must be ON with the Snapshot screen
displayed prior to turning..."
5 5.2 P-28, change "Verify Ion Fan" Action to "Verify LED Function (i 2000 only)"
5 5.2 P-30, change "Log In to Transfer File" Action to "Log In to Transfer File(s)"
5 5.2 P-30, "Log In to Transfer File(s)" Action, change "Enter administrator in the User Name field. Enter
architect in the Password field." to "Enter FSE in the User Name field. Enter fse in the Password
field." and add A1_8239
5 5.2 P-30, change "Locate File" Action to "Locate File(s)" and change file to file(s) in content
5 5.2 P-30, change "Transfer File" Action to "Transfer File(s)" and change file to file(s) in content
5 5.2 P-30, "Verify Transfer" Action, change file to file(s) in content
5 5.2 P-31, "Perform SCC Shutdown" Action, change "Press the power switch on the front of the central
processing unit (CPU) to power OFF the SCC." to "Press and hold the power switch on the front of
the central processing unit (CPU) for 10 seconds to power OFF the SCC."
5 5.2 Delete P-33 Ion Probe Cleaning
5 5.2 Add P-33 Override Processing Module Cover Interlocks

5 5.2 P-35, "Verify Disable CBT" Action, rewritten
5 5.2 P-35, "Verify CBT Operation" Action, rewritten
5 5.2 Delete P-40
5 5.2 P-42, "Module", add "c 8000, ci8200"
5 5.2 P-44, change "1040 CMIA OPTICS Normalization (v1.02 & v1.50)" to "1040 CMIA OPTICS
Normalization"
5 5.2 P-44, "Materials Required", delete Note
5 5.2 P-44, "Module", add "i 2000 SR"
5 5.2 P-44, delete Actions "Identify Installed Version of Diagnostic 1040 (Version 1.02 only)", "Load
Diagnostic 1040 (Version 1.02 only)", "Enter Default Database Values (Version 1.02 only)"
5 5.2 P-44, delete "(Versions 1.02 and 1.50)"
5 5.2 P-44, "Perform Diagnostic Procedure 1040 Optics Normalization" Action, add Note after Step 1
5 5.2 P-44, "Perform Diagnostic Procedure 1040 Optics Normalization" Action, change "When prompted,
load standard bottles..." to "When prompted, load normalization solution bottles..."
5 5.2 P-44, "Perform Diagnostic Procedure 1040 Optics Normalization" Action, add "To complete the
procedure, follow the instructions displayed in the diagnostic procedure." as last Step
5 5.2 P-44, "Procedure Wrap Up" Action, delete Note
5 5.2 P-44, "Store or Discard Normalization Solution" Action, delete first two Steps
5 5.2 Delete P-45
5 5.2 Delete P-47
5 5.2 P-48, "Materials Required", delete "The file generated..."
5 5.2 P-50, "System Configuration & Activities" Action, delete Note
5 5.2 Delete P-53
5 5.2 P-54, "Purpose", delete Note
5 5.2 P-56, "Purpose", delete Note
5 5.2 P-56, "Materials Required", delete "(10% bleach solution)"
5 5.2 P-56, "Prerequisite", change "...20 parts water -- 0.5% solution)." to "...20 parts water to make the
0.5% solution)."
5 5.2 Delete P-57
5 5.2 Delete P-58
5 5.2 P-63, change "Hardware Configuration (software version 1.60)" to "Hardware Configuration"
5 5.2 P-63, add "Log On as FSE"
5 5.2 P-63, "Configure Module 1" Action, add (c 8000)
5 5.2 P-63, "Configure Module 1 (c 8000)" Action, delete Note "This procedure..."
5 5.2 P-63, "Configure Module 1 (c 8000)" Action, change "Details" to "Configure"
5 5.2 P-63, "Configure Module 1 (c 8000)" Action, replace "Enter the Normalization value that..." with
"Select the ICT Module No option..."
5 5.2 P-63, "Configure Module 1 (c 8000)" Action, replace "Enter the Linearity value that corresponds..."
with "Select High concentration waste container"
5 5.2 P-63, acc "Configure Module 1 (i 2000 SR)" Action and content
5 5.2 P-63, "Configure Additional Module(s)" Action, change "Details" to "Configure"
5 5.2 P-64, "Purpose", change "...software version 1.60):" to "software version 2.00):"
5 5.2 P-64, "Select Language" Action, change "4J4NBOX1.86A.0040.P17" to "HV84510A.86A.0040P11"
5 5.2 P-64, "Select Language" Action, change "On the Setup main screen, use the arrow keys to select
the Language Option." to "On the Setup main screen, use the arrow keys to select the Language
Option, followed by [Enter]."
5 5.2 P-64, "Select Language" Action, replace the last Step with "Use the arrow keys to select English,
followed by [Enter]."
5 5.2 P-64, rewrite "Select Plug and Play Option and Set Up Peripheral Configuration" Action
5 5.2 P-64, change "Set Up Event Logging, POST Errors, and Power Management" Action to "Set Up
Power Management"
5 5.2 P-64, rewrite "Set Up Power Management" Action
5 5.2 P-64, rewrite "Set Up Boot Sequence" Action

5 5.2 P-64, add "Exit and save bios settings" Action
5 5.2 P-65, "Purpose", change "1.60" to 2.00"
5 5.2 P-65, "Install Software Image" Action, replace Step 1 with "Insert the appropriate ARCHITECT
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MEDIA VERSION 2.00 in the drive."
5 5.2 P-65, "Install Software Image" Action, change "Windows NT" to "Windows"
5 5.2 P-66, change "System Serialization (software version 1.60)" to "System Serialization"
5 5.2 P-66, "Purpose", change to "To be performed at installation."
5 5.2 P-66, "Complete the ARCHITECT SCC SN Label" Action, delete Reference col Note, add content
5 5.2 P-66, "Sample Handler Serial Number Configuration" Action, delete Note "The sample handler..."
5 5.2 P-67, change "Update BIOS (software version 1.60)" to "Update BIOS"
5 5.2 P-67, "Purpose", change "1.60" to 2.00"
5 5.2 P-67, change "BIOS Configuration Disk Version 2.0 (92999-103)" to "System SCC Platform C
BIOS Winnepeg Pentium IV, Version HV84510A.86A.0040.P11"
5 5.2 Delete P-68
5 5.2 Delete P-69
5 5.2 Delete P-70
5 5.3 In "CLI Commands", "GET_LLS_DATA V1", change "V1 = Pipettor, 0 = sample, 1 = R1, 2 = R2." to
"V1 = Pipettor, 0 = sample, 1 = R1, 2 = R2, 3 = STAT."
6 Change Document Control Number from 96757-101 to 96757-102
6 In "Planned Maintenance Checklist", add "Inspect the STAT Diverter Assembly (i 2000 SR)" after
"Inspect the Wash Zone Diverter Assembly"
6 In "Planned Maintenance Checklist", add "Inspect RSH Sample Bar Code Reader" after "Inspect
the SCC and Ethernet Communication"
6 In "Maintenance Guidelines", replace "Inspect the Wash Zones" Action content with "Perform P-09
Wash Zone Cleaning."
6 In "Maintenance Guidelines", delete "Inspect the Wash Zones (cont'd)" Action
6 In "Maintenance Guidelines", add "Inspect the STAT Diverter Assembly (i 2000 SR)" Action after
"Inspect the RV Load Diverter Assembly" Action
6 In "Maintenance Guidelines", add "Inspect RSH Sample Bar Code Reader" Action after "Diagnostic
Procedures Requiring Interpretation" Action
8 Change Document Control Number from 96759-101 to 96759-102
8 8.1 Change Document Control Number from 96789-101 to 96789-102

8 8.1 In Links, move "ARCHITECT ARM Installation (LN 8C95-01) - Direct Connect" after "System
Control Center Configuration"
8 i2000SR Add "Remove the shipping tape from the top of the shutter on the STAT wash zone diverter." after
System "Install STAT pressure monitor."
Installation (with
Retest Sample
Handler)
Checklist
8 i2000SR Delete "Perform 1 Step STAT Buffer Run"

System
Installation (with
Retest Sample
Handler)
Checklist
8 Process Module Add "Remove Shipping Tape from STAT Diverter" Action, content, and A1_2009 after "Prepare
Preparation Processing Module for Operation" Action
8 ARCHITECT In "Complete Connections" Action, replace content with "Connect the RS232 serial cable to the port
ARM Installation on the ARM. [5] and the other end to P5 on the Digi cable of the SCC."
(LN 8C95-01) -
Direct Connect
8 System Control In "Go to Next Procedure" Action, change content to a link to "System Control Center Configuration"
Center (SCC)
Unpack and
Installation
8 RSH In "3710 Keypad Test", change "Diagnostics, Sample Handler (Module 0), Utilities" to "Diagnostics,
Verification Sample Handler (Module 0), Modules"
8 RSH In "3400 Interlock Sensors Test", change "Diagnostics, Sample Handler (Module 0),
Verification Solenoids/Sensors" to "Diagnostics, Sample Handler (Module 1 or 2), Solenoids/Sensors"
8 Process Module In "6114 Install/Delete Assays", change "Install the 1 Step and 2 Step Assay Files from..." to "Install
Installation the 1 Step, 2 Step and 2 Step STAT Assay Files from..." and add "943_000.iae" to filenames list
Verification
8 Process Module In "P-15 1Step/2Step Service Test", add "943_000.iae" to filenames list and change "1 Step, 2Step
Installation Test" to "1 Step, 2 Step Test, 2 Step STAT"
Verification
8 Process Module In "6114 Install/Delete Assays" (second ocurrance), change "Delete the 1 Step Test, and 2 Step
Installation Test." to "Delete the 1 Step Test, 2 Step and 2 Step STAT Assays." and add "943" to assay
Verification numbers list
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-105) • Copyright 2002, 2004 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, and i 2000 SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, c 8000, ci8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Section Sections
Revision
Front Title Change "Manual Revision Number 96661-102" to "Manual Revision Number 96661-103"
Matter
Front Title Change "Front Matter Content Control Number 96706-102" to "Front Matter Content Control Number
Matter 96706-103"
Front Revision Log Add 96661-103 revision info to "Revision Log"

Matter
5 Change "Content Control Number 96756-102" to "Content Control Number 96756-103"
5 P-22 Change "...should be at least 2000 units (2 C (35.6 F) degrees)." to "should be at least 1250 units
(1.25 C (33.6 F) degrees)."
6 Change "Document Control Number 96757-102" to "Document Control Number 96757-103"
8 Delete "(Document Control Number 96789-102)"
8 Document Installation, "Document the Install" Action, change Note "While documenting the
installation, if no parts are used during install and no problems occurred, a failure code of 1100
should be used, if parts were used or problems encountered, a failure code of 1150 should be used
for the call." to "While documenting the installation, if no parts are used during install and no
problems occurred, a work done code of 11000 should be used, if parts were used or problems
encountered, enter the work done code that best describes the work performed."
8 Document Installation, "Document the Install" Action, change Note "Problems, parts used, and
consumables should be documented using the appropriate failure code, for example, use N999 for
the use of gloves & normal consumables." to "Problems, parts used, and consumables should be
documented using the appropriate parts failure code, for example, use N999 for the use of gloves &
normal consumables."
Section Sections
Revision
GLOBAL ALL Remove trademark symbols
Front Title Change "Manual Revision Number 96661-103" to "Manual Revision Number 96661-104"
Matter
Front Title Change "Front Matter Content Control Number 96706-103" to "Front Matter Content Control
Matter Number 96706-104"
Front Prop Info Update copyright info

Matter
Front Revision Log Add 96661-104 info

Matter
1 Change "(Document Control Number 96725-102)" to "(Document Control Number 96725-103)"
1 1.1 Overview; add "Reference" to Troubleshooting; changed And to &; added Verification to
Procedures; changed PM/Total Call to Planned Maintenance; added Interview & Inspection to
Pre-Site; changed Install & Setup to I 2000 SR Installation.
1 1.1 Hazard Signal Words, Introduction, add instrument names, delete "guide", "operators"
1 1.1 Lifting Hazard - change Symbol Description to "Identifies an activity where it may be required to lift
or move a heavy object"
1 1.1 Moving Parts - change Symbol Description to "Identifies an activity or area where moving parts
are present."
1 1.1 Chemical Hazard - change Symbol Description to "Identifies an activity or an area where
hazardous chemicals are present."
1 1.1 Chemical Hazard - change Safety Recommendation to "Wear safety glasses, chemical resistant
gloves, and a lab coat when handling the following solutions (Abbott cleaning solutions and
various reagents). These solutions may be potentially harmful. Refer to the Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) or package insert for specific safety information."
1 1.1 Splash/ Spray Hazard - change Symbol Description to "Identifies an activity or an area that may
present a physical or chemical hazard."
1 1.1 High Voltage - add Safety Recommendation "Follow precautionary measures as outlined in
Electrical Safety."
1 1.1 Laser Caution Labels; replaced with description of where labels are located on c System, I System
and RSH
1 1.1 Hot Surface - change Symbol Description to "Identifies an area where a hot surface is present"
1 1.1 Hot Surface - delete Safety Recommendation "The list part is very hot."
1 1.1 Add reagents/calibrators/controls or liquid consumables symbols and content

1 1.1 Delete "The following laser caution label is affixed to the reagent bar code reader cover."
1 1.1 Change, "...such as 0.5% sodium..." to "...such as 0.1% sodium..."
1 1.1 Replace all content in "Laser Caution Labels"
1 1.1 Sodium Hydroxide, change "ARCHITECT i Trigger Solution" to "ARCHITECT Trigger Solution"
2 2.2 Card Cage Boards; Card Cage Slot Location; add i2, i2SR and ci8200 card/slot info
2 2.2 Card Cage Boards; add "Indexer and Motor Driver Connections" sub head for table
2 2.2 Card Cage Boards; Indexer and Motor Driver Connections; add "Processing Module" sub head for
table
2 2.2 Card Cage Boards; Indexer and Motor Driver Connections; Processing Module; move "MODULE
0 Standard Sample Handler (i 2000® only)" as sub head for table and following content as new
table
2 2.2 Card Cage Boards; Indexer and Motor Driver Connections; Processing Module; move "MODULE
0 Retest Sample Handler (RSH)" as sub head for table and following content as new table
2 2.2 Card Cage Boards; CPU and CMIA Optics DIO; delete "BD & Slot #..."
2 2.2 Card Cage Boards; CPU and CMIA Optics DIO; change Note to "Bits 0-47 return to the process
module CPU board, in upper slot 14."
2 2.2 Card Cage Boards; CPU and CMIA Optics DIO; change Note to "Bits 48-95 return to the optics
board, in upper slot 12."
2 2.2 Card Cage Boards; change "DC Driver Board" to "Processing Module - DC Driver Board"
2 2.2 Card Cage Boards; Processing Module - DC Driver Board; change "PCB & Slot # - All solenoid
signal bits listed in this table return to the Solenoid DC Driver Board (Slot Lower 7)." to "Board
and Card Cage Location - All solenoid signal bits listed in this table return to the Solenoid DC
Driver Board (Lower Slot 7)."
2 2.2 Card Cage Boards; Sample Handler - DC Driver Board (i 2000® only); change "PCB & Slot # - All
solenoid signal bits listed in this table return to the Solenoid DC Driver Board (Slot Lower 7)." to
"Board and Card Cage Location - All solenoid signal bits listed in this table return to the Solenoid
DC Driver Board (Lower Slot 7)."
3 3.2 Delete section "Supplemental Tools and Supplies"
3 3.4 Delete section "Locator"
3 3.6 Delete section "ARCHITECT ARM™ Locator"
4 Title Change "(Document Control Number 96728-103)" to "(Document Control Number 96728-104)"
4 A1 Change "(Document Control Number 96729-102)" to "(Document Control Number 96729-103)"

4 Section Connect Cables; modify text and callouts
GLOBAL
4 Section Disconnect Cables; modify text and callouts

GLOBAL
4 Section Change "RV Mechanisms" to "Reaction Mechanisms"

GLOBAL
4 A1.01 Disconnect Cables/Connect Cables, delete "Ground wire...", change callout from "4" to "3" (graphic
A1_2031 modified)
4 A1.01 Connect Cables, modify callouts
4 A1.05 Startup; add Step "Log On as FSE."
4 A1.05 Verification; add MD 3140
4 A1.07 Prepare for Operation; delete Step "To change the status..."
4 A1.07 Verification; replace with modified Startup Action and MD 3140
4 A1.08 Verification; add Step "Log On as FSE." and add Step "Select Reaction Mechanisms..."
4 A1.10 Remove RV Loader Transport Assembly; change "Remove the non-captive screw on top
mounting flange..." to "Remove the non-captive screw on the top mounting flange..."
4 A1.10 Install RV Loader Transport Assembly; change "Install the three (3) screws on the bottom and top,
mounting flange of the RV..." to "Install the three (3) screws on the bottom and top mounting
flanges of the RV..."
4 A1.10 Install RV Loader Transport Assembly; change "Orient the RV loader such that the baseplate
feature and the loaders flange..." to "Orient the RV loader such that the baseplate feature and the
loader flange..."
4 A1.10 Verification; add MD 3140
4 A1.12 Install RV Loader Wheel Motor; change "...orient the RV loader such that the baseplate feature
and the loaders flange..." to "...orient the RV loader such that the baseplate feature and the
loader flange..."
4 A1.13 Install RV Loader Transport Assembly; change "Install the three (3) screws on the bottom and top,
mounting flange of the RV..." to "Install the three (3) screws on the bottom and top mounting
flanges of the RV..."
4 A1.13 Install RV Loader Transport Assembly; change "Orient the RV loader such that the baseplate
feature and the loaders flange..." to "Orient the RV loader such that the baseplate feature and the
loader flange..."
4 A1.14 Delete content - change to PLACEHOLDER
4 A1.15 Change "FAN,RV IONIZER" to "FAN,RV IONIZER (i 2000 SR only)"
4 A1.16 change "Disconnect cable W62 HOP SNSR from the sensor cable. [1]" to "Disconnect cable W62
HOP SNSR. [1]"
4 B1 Change "(Document Control Number 96730-102)" to "(Document Control Number 96730-103)"
4 B1.01 Install Vortexers; move callout [2]
4 B1.01 Connect Cables, modify callouts
4 B1.02 Delete "B1.02 HEATER,P PATH ZONE "

4 E1 Change "(Document Control Number 96735-102)" to "(Document Control Number 96735-103)"
4 E1 GLOBAL Change "..."to the park..." to "...to the home..." - E1.01, E1.02
4 E1.01 Preparation, Note, change to "...locations (R1, R2, S, or ST)"
4 E1.04 Parts, delete 94016
4 E1.04 Preparation, Note, change to "...locations (R1, R2, S, or ST)"
4 E1.04 Remove Probe Block, delete "Pause the assay module."
4 E3 Change "(Document Control Number 96737-102)" to "(Document Control Number 96737-103)"
4 E3.05 Update link to P-13
4 F1 Change "(Document Control Number 96738-101)" to "(Document Control Number 96738-102)"
4 F1.02 Install Wash Buffer Reservoir, delete "Slide the reservoir into the module."
4 G1.01 new content
G1.02 new content
G1.03 new content
G1.04 Time Required; add "15 min"
G1.04 Tools/Materials; add "#2 Phillips® screwdriver"
4 M1 Change "(Document Control Number 96744-102)" to "(Document Control Number 96744-103)"
4 M1.03 Install Jumpers; add Note "Perform Step 2 and Step 3 only if..."
4 M1.07 Parts, delete 94002
4 M1.09 Time, change to "45"
4 M1.09 Startup, delete "...to verify proper operation of the board"
4 M1.09 Add "Verification" Action and content
4 Q1 Delete section
4 R1.28 Remove ARCHITECT ARM™ Tubing; delete "from the module"
4 R1.28 Install ARCHITECT ARM™ Tubing; delete "from the module"
5 Section 5 Change "Content Control Number 96756-102" to "Content Control Number 96756-104"
5 5.1 Change "(Document Control Number 96852-101)" to "(Document Control Number 96852-102)"
5 5.1 1040 Optics Normalization, change "...solution) are dispensed into RVs, Pre-Trigger and Trigger
are added..." to "...solution) are dispensed into RVs. Pre-Trigger and Trigger are then added..."
5 5.1 1040 Optics Normalization, change time to "75"
5 5.1 1040 Optics Normalization, change "...stored at 10° C or colder for a period of 12 months. It may
be thawed and refrozen twice. Once thawed, Normalization solution will remain stable for 7 days
at 2-8° C (25.6-50° F)." to "...stored at -10° C or colder for a period of 12 months. It may be
thawed and refrozen twice. Once thawed, Normalization solution will remain stable for 7 days at
2-8° C (35.6-46.4° F)."
5 5.1 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration; Options; delete "None"
5 5.1 1251 Residual Volume WZ 1; Scope; change "Visual inspection:" to "Visual inspection: (No
special tools required)"
5 5.1 1251 Residual Volume WZ 1; Scope; change "...evidence of splashing the RV." to "...evidence of
splashing in the RV."
5 5.1 1251 Residual Volume WZ 1; Special Tools; delete "... (if available)"
5 5.1 1252 Residual Volume WZ 2; Scope; change "Visual inspection:" to "Visual inspection: (No
special tools required)"
5 5.1 1252 Residual Volume WZ 2; Scope; change "...evidence of splashing the RV." to "...evidence of
splashing in the RV."
5 5.1 1252 Residual Volume WZ 2; Special Tools; delete "... (if available)"
5 5.1 2021, 2022, 2023, 2024, 2025, 2026, 2027, 2029; Scope; change "Visual inspection:" to "Visual
inspection: (No special tools required)"
5 5.1 2021, 2022, 2023, 2024, 2025, 2026, 2027, 2029; Special Tools; delete "... (if available)"
5 5.1 Delete "6040 WZ Probe Cleaning - Automated"
5 5.1 3319; Scope; voice/tense change
5 5.1 3530; Scope; change "In addition, tap water..." to "Tap water..."
5 5.1 3530; Special Tools; add "WZ probe maintenance water bottle (LN 6E68)" and "Tap water"
5 5.1 5505; Scope & Options; change "land 1" to "lane 1"
5 5.1 Add "6041 Daily Maintenance" and content
5 5.1 6114; Scope; change "The procedure is also used to deleted selected assays" to "The procedure
is also used to delete selected assays"
5 5.1 6115; Scope; change "The procedure is also used to deleted selected procedures" to "The
procedure is also used to delete selected procedures"
5 5.2 GLOBAL Changed pcAnywhere to PCANYWHERE
5 P-03 Retrieve Current Logs Option; Capture Log When; change "Hardware, or Software for i System
and c 8000" to "Hardware or Software issues for i System and c 8000"
5 P-06 Add "ARCHITECT ARM Troubleshooting Information" and content
5 P-03 Log On as FSE; add Note "Enter the date code in reverse order."
5 P-08 Purpose; voice/tense change
5 P-09 Replace with "Use of Debug Cables for Troubleshooting" and content
5 P-11 Change "ARCHITECT ARM Verification" to "ARCHITECT ARM Installation and Verification" and
add new content
5 P-12 Change "External Waste Pump Verification Procedure" to "External Waste Pump Installation &
Verification" and add new content
5 P-13 Change "Tubing/Ferrule Assembly Verification" to "Tubing Connector Inspection" and replaced
existing with new content
5 P-15 Materials Required; add "1Step/2Step Service Kit"
5 P-15 Perform 6200 CLI Terminal Simulator; change "Perform utilities diagnostic procedures..." to
"Perform utilities diagnostic procedure..."
5 P-15 Order Calibration; change "Order a calibration for 1 Step assay test..." to "Order a calibration for 1
Step assay..."
5 P-15 Prepare and load 1 Step /2 Step reagent bottles; change "Fill reagent bottles 2/3 to..." to "Fill
1Step/2Step reagent bottles 2/3 to..."
5 P-15 Prepare and load 1 Step /2 Step reagent bottles; change "Load reagents into..." to "Load bottles
reagents into..."
5 P-15 Run Tests; replace content with new content
5 P-15 Perform 6114 Install/Delete Assays; move Action to end of procedure
5 P-15 Verify Acceptable Performance; chang Step "Calibrations fail..." to a Note
5 P-17 Purpose; new content
5 P-17 Materials Required; new content
5 P-17 Access HyperTerminal Windows; change "200 SR" to "i 2000 SR"
5 P-17 Access HyperTerminal Windows; add Note "Null-modem is required..."
5 P-17 Access HyperTerminal Windows; delete Step "Double click on scc.ht to..."
5 P-17 Access HyperTerminal Windows; add A1_1758
5 P-17 Access HyperTerminal Windows; change "...either the iahv.ht (for process module) or ish.ht..." to
"...either the iahv.ht (for processing module) or ish.ht..."
5 P-17 Access HyperTerminal Windows; delete "See highlighted areas in example at right."
5 P-17 Download Bootcode; new content
5 P-17 Reset the Controller Board; change "...simultaneously depressing the two momentary switches.."
to "...simultaneously pressing the two square switches..."
5 P-17 Reset the Controller Board; change "Watch the SH or i System window and verify..." to "Watch
the IAHV or ISH HyperTerminal window and verify..."
5 P-17 Verify Correct Controller Bootcode Version; rewrite Step 1
5 P-18 Inside Tub; change "Empty, Rinse bottom half..." to "Empty tub and rinse bottom half..."
5 P-19 Login; change to "Log In" and add new content
5 P-21 Purpose; change to "Use to interpret PM log data after performing procedure P-03 Log Retrieval
Procedure."
5 P-22 Purpose; change to "Use to interpret PM log data after performing procedure P-03 Log Retrieval
Procedure."
5 P-22 Change "...should be at least 2000 units (2 C (35.6 F) degrees)." to "should be at least 1250 units
(1.25 C (33.6 F) degrees)."
5 P-23 Replace with "Vacuum System Troubleshooting Information" and content
5 P-25 Replace with "Disable Keyboard Locale Hot Keys" and content
5 P-29 Add content
5 P-30 Delete "Log In to Transfer File(s)" Action
5 P-34 Switch 7; change "Loads & F0" to "Loads F0"
5 P-36 Measure Voltage with Breaker Closed (Power ON); change "...and record in the breaker on
section of the Pre-Installation Checklist." to "...and record in the Breaker Closed section of the
Pre-Site Checklist."
5 P-36 Measure Voltage with Breaker Closed (Power ON); delete bullets under WARNING
5 P-36 Measure Voltage with Breaker Closed (Power ON); add Step "Verify that the readings fall within..."
5 P-36 Measure Voltage with Breaker Open (Power OFF); change "With the assistance of the lab
personnel, locate the instrument breaker switch. Be sure the switch is properly identified as
controlling the Abbott instrument (see Pre-Installation Checklist Power Requirements for circuit
breaker identification and proper power line amperage). A 220V breaker requires a double
switch." to "Locate the instrument breaker switch. See the Pre-Installation Checklist Power
Requirements for circuit breaker identification and proper power line amperage. A 220V breaker
requires a double switch."
5 P-37 Materials Required; change "Spare Filter" to "Spare Filter from customer's accessory kit"
5 P-37 Remove Card Cage Fan Filter; combine Step "Locate card cage..." with Note "The filter is
located..."
5 P-37 Install Cleaned Filter; change "Insert a new or cleaned filter..." to "Insert a new or cleaned and dry
filter..."
5 P-37 Clean Filter; change "...available, vacuum the exposed side..." to "...available, vacuum the
normally exposed side..."
5 P-41 Log On as FSE; make consistent with standard
5 P-41 Log Off as FSE; change Note "The User Name field is displayed..." into Step
5 P-42 UPS Setup; add Note "The UPS stop/run switch must be in the RUN position..."
5 P-42 Power Supply Setup; change "Plug the ARCHITECT power cable..." to "Plug the opposite end of
the ARCHITECT power cable..."
5 P-42 Delete "Power ON UPS" Action
5 P-42 Verification; add A1_1330
5 P-44 Time; change to "75"
5 P-44 Perform Diagnostic Procedure 1040 Optics Normalization; change "...displayed in the diagnostic
procedure." to "...displayed on the screen"
5 P-44 Procedure Wrap Up; change "Remove and cap the standard bottles." to "Remove and cap the
normalization solution bottles."
5 P-44 Store or Discard Normalization Solution; change "Stability: Normalization solution may be stored
at 10 degrees C or colder for a period of 12 months. It may be thawed and refrozen twice. Once
thawed, verifier solution remains stable for seven days at 2-8 C (25.6-50 F)." to "Stability:
Normalization solution may be stored at -10 degrees C or colder for a period of 12 months. It may
be thawed and refrozen twice. Once thawed, verifier solution remains stable for seven days at 2-
8° C (35.6-44.4° F)."
5 P-44 Verification; change "...assay is outside the customers established 2 SD (standard deviations)
range, calibrate the assay and repeat the controls." to "...assay is outside or the customer's
established 2 SD (standard deviations) range, recalibrate the assay and repeat the controls."
5 P-54 Delete Reagent Kit; change "To delete an assay instead of just a reagent..." to "To delete an
assay instead of a reagent..."
5 P-55 Perform Optics Verification Procedure; update temps in Note
5 P-55 Connect Decon Manifold; change callouts
5 P-56 Disconnect Tubing for Decontamination; replace graphic with a1_1769
5 P-56 Connect Sensor Cable and Decon Jumper Tube; replace graphic with a1_1769
5 P-56 Perform Decontamination; change "Remove the concentrate wash buffer..." to "Remove the
concentrated wash buffer..."
5 P-56 Discard and Replace Used items, delete Reference text
5 P-63 Configure Module 1 (i 2000 SR); change "...correspond with..." to "...corresponds with..."
5 P-64 Exit and Save BIOS Settings; change Note content
5 P-65 Change all references to version numbers of abbott software to ".xx" format
5 P-65 Install Software Image; change "Windows NT" to "Windows 2000"
5 P-65 Install Software Image; change "...CONFIGURATION MEDIA VERSION 2.00 in the drive." to
"...CONFIGURATION MEDIA VERSION 2.00 disk in the drive."
5 P-66 Log On as FSE; add Note "Enter the date code..."
5 P-66 Processing Module Serial Number Configuration; change Note "After editing..." to Step
5 P-66 Power ON SCC; move Note to "Processing Module Serial Number Configuration"
5 P-66 Power ON SCC; delete Action
6 Change content
8 38.fm Change "Document Control Number 96759-103" to "Document Control Number 96759-104"
8 ALL Complete reorder and rewrite for most sections - numerous sections deleted or moved to other
manuals
GRAPHICS A1_2031 Deleted "3" ground wire, changed "4" callout to "3"
A1_9339 Change "10X Buffer Concentrate" to "Concentrated Wash Buffer Concentrate"
ARCHITECT i System Revision 96661-105 Change Listing
Section Sections
Revision
GLOBAL ALL Replace "click" with "select"
GLOBAL ALL Replace "right click" with "right-click"
GLOBAL ALL Replace "double click" with "double-click"
Front Title Change manual title to "ARCHITECT i System Service and Support Manual"
Matter
Front Title Update Manual Revision Number to "96661-105"

Matter
Front Title Update "Front Matter Content Control Number 96706-104" to "Front Matter Document Control
Matter Number 96706-105"
Front Prop Info

Matter
Front Revision Log

Matter
1 1.2 Replace "System Control Center Overview" with "ARCHITECT Automatic Reconstitution Module
(ARM) Overview" - (System Control Center Overview to SSC manual)
1 1.3 CMIA Optics; Overview; change content
1 1.3 Liquid Level Sense and Pressure Monitoring; Normal Aspiration Mode; change content
1 1.3 Power Distribution; change to "Power Distribution and Logic"
1 1.3 Power Distribution and Logic; AC Subsystem; change content
1 1.3 Power Distribution and Logic; add "Card Cage - Boards" and "Card Cage - I/O Signals
Distribution" from 1103
1 1.3 Reaction Vessel (RV) Loader; RV Loader Sensors; add AMA-3111
1 1.3 Reaction Vessel (RV) Loader; Normal Operation Mode; change content
1 1.3 Reaction Vessel (RV) Loader; add AMA-9246
1 1.3 Reaction Vessel (RV) Loader; add "Fast Load Mode" from 1103
1 1.3 Temperature and Wash Aspirate Monitoring; add "Reagent Cooling" from 1103
1 1.3 Reaction Vessel (RV) Loader; add AMA-9245
1 1.3 i 2000 SR Process Area; change to "i 2000/i 2000 SR Process Area"
1 1.4 System Control Center Overview; Document Control Number 96948-101

1 1.5 Add Standard Sample Handler Functional Description; Document Control Number 96935-101
1 1.5 Standard Sample Handler Functional Description; Hardware; change "The first is a c 8000 (where
four..." to "The first is an i 8000 (where four..."
2 Section Title Change Document Control Number to "96726-104"
2 2.8 Add SCC Troubleshooting; Document Control Number 96949-101; create by moving "DIGIBOARD
COM Ports", "SCC Cable Locator", 'SCC Interconnect Diagram"
2 2.9 Add SSH Troubleshooting; Document Control Number 96936-101; create by moving existing SSH
Troubleshooting content from current i2/i2SR manual - "Fuses", "LEDs", "Sensors and Switches",
"LAS Cable Reference", "Block/Functional Diagrams," and updating content
2 2.10 Move "Cable Locator" from Section 3
4 A1 Update to "Document Control Number 96729-104"
4 A1.05 Add Note "The 91373 RV loader is used..."
4 A1.05 Check RV Loader Mounting Foot; change content
4 A1.10 Del content; PLACEHOLDER
4 A1.15 Del content; PLACEHOLDER
4 B1 Update to "Document Control Number 96730-104"
4 B1.02 Change part # from "77977" to "77976"
4 B1.04 Remove STAT Diverter; change content
4 B1.04 Remove Wash Zone Diverter; change content
4 B1.04 Install Process Path Drive Motor; change content
4 B2 Update to "Document Control Number 96731-104"
4 B2.01 Remove STAT Diverter; change content
4 B2.01 Remove Process Path Drive Motor; change content
4 B2.02 Delete AMA-3239
4 B2.02 Replace Removal Actions with B2.01 up to Remove Process Path Disk
4 B2.02 Replace Replacement Actions with B2.01

4 B2.02 Remove RV Access Door; change content
4 B2.07 Remove RV Access Door; replace AMA-1028 with ama-3262
4 B2.08 Remove Diverter Load and Process Path Home Sensor Board #5; replace AMA-1028 with ama-
3262
4 B2.09 Remove RV Unloader; replace AMA-1028 with ama-3262

4 C1 Update to "Document Control Number 96732-103"
4 C1.02 Remove CMIA Reader from Processing Module; replace Steps and graphic with standard Steps
and graphic (for this Action) from C1.01
4 D1 Update to "Document Control Number 96733-102"
4 D2 Update to "Document Control Number 96734-103"
4 E1 Update to "Document Control Number 96735-104"
4 E2.05 Remove RV1/2 and RV2 Antenna; add spash cover removal steps
4 E2.05 Install RV1/2 and RV2 Antenna; add spash cover install steps
4 E2.06 Remove Appropriate Sample Handler LLS Antenna; replace AMA-1146 with A1_2044
4 E2.06 Install Sample Handler LLS Antenna; replace AMA-1146 with A1_2044
4 E2.07 Remove RV24 LLS Antenna; add spash cover removal steps
4 E2.07 Install RV24 LLS Antenna; add spash cover install steps
4 E3.03 Install Valve(s); change content
4 E3.05 Remove Pump Tubing; change content
4 E3.10 Remove Pump Tubing; change content
4 F1 Update to "Document Control Number 96738-103"
4 G1 Update to "Document Control Number 96739-104"
4 G1.02 Preparation; replace A1_1772 with A1_1785
4 G1.05 Install Valve(s); replace A1_1772 with A1_1785
4 H1 Update to "Document Control Number 96740-103"
4 H1.03 Install Valve(s); change content
4 H1.05 Parts; delete 94154
4 J1 Update to "Document Control Number 96741-102"
4 K1 Update to "Document Control Number 96742-103"
4 K1.05 Perform Pipettor Calibration; change content
4 K1.06 Remove Reagent Wash Cup Vacuum Vessel; change content
4 K1.06 Install Vacuum Vessel; change content
4 K1.06 Verification; change content
4 K1.07 Remove Vacuum Vessel; change content
4 K1.07 Verification; change content
4 L1 Update to "Document Control Number 96743-102"
4 L1 Install Power Connectors to Power Supply; change content
4 M1 Update to "Document Control Number 96744-104"
4 M1.02 Remove Fuse; change content
4 M1.04 Note; change content
4 M1.04 Install Motor Driver Board; change content

4 M1.08 Parts; change content
4 M1.08 Note; change content
4 M1.08 Determine if LLS Board Requires Jumpers; change content
4 Q1 & Q2 Add SCC R&R; Document Control Number 96950-101; create by moving RR Q1 & Q2, and
updateing content
4 Q1.04 Change content
4 S1 Update to "Document Control Number 96938-101"
4 V2 Update to "Document Control Number 96939-101"
5 Update to "Document Control Number 96756-105"
5 5.1 M&D Procedures; delete
5 P-06 Inlet Pressure LED Illuminated; change content
5 P-11 Add "Connect the ARCHITECT ARM Module Buffer output to the i 4000 processing modules
(Configuration Only)" and "Connect the ARCHITECT ARM Module Buffer output to the i 4000
processing modules (Configuration Only) (continued)" after "Connect ARCHITECT ARM Buffer
Output to Processing Module Buffer Inlet"
5 P-11 Connect Power; change content
5 P-12 Connect Polyvinyl Chloride (clear tubing from Waste 2 connector) to Waste Pump; change content
5 P-15 Perform 6114 Install/Delete Assays; change content
5 P-17 Verify Correct Controller Bootcode Version; change content

5 P-36 Measure Voltage with Breaker Closed (Power ON); replace graphic "A2_2503" with "A1_1782"
5 P-39 Add with old P-09 Wash Zone Cleaning
5 P-45 Remove Reagent Carousel Cover; change content
5 P-45 Remove Inner Reagent Carousel; change content
5 P-45 Install Inner Reagent Carousel; change content
5 P-57 Verify Sensor Mounting; change content
5 P-69 Change title
5 P-69 Verify Top Cover Switch; change content
5 5.3 Change content
5 5.4 Add SSC Procedure Locator and Procedure(s); Document Control Number 96953-101; create by
moving existing SCC Procedure content from current i2/i2SR manual and updating content
5 5.5 Add SSH Procedure Locator and Procedure(s); Document Control Number 96944-101; create by
moving existing SSH Procedure content from current i2/i2SR manual and updating content
6 Overview; change content
6 Recommended Available Parts; change content
6 Planned Maintenance (PM) Checklist; change content
6 Clean Process Path; change content
6 Inspect Level Sensors and Straws; change content
6 Inspect Retest Sample Handler; change Action to "Inspect and Lubricate Retest Sample Handler"
and change content
6 Inspect SCC and Ethernet Communication; change content
8 Update entire section
GRAPHICS AMA-1146 Revised to "b"
GRAPHICS AMA-3111 Updated as A1_1335a
GRAPHICS AMA-3138 Revised to "a"
GRAPHICS AMA-3111 Updated as A1_1335a
Section Sections
Revision

Matter
Front Title Update Front Matter Content Control Number to "96706-106"

Matter
Front Revision Log Add info for for 96661-106

Matter
8 Section Title Update to Document Control Number to "96759-106"
8 Calibration LAS Calibration; change Action "Perform a start up on the Sample Handler and Process Module"
to "Perform Sample Handler and Process Module Start Up"
8 Calibration LAS Calibration; Perform Sample Handler and Process Module Start Up; add Note
8 Calibration RSH Calibration; add Action "Perform Sample Handler and Process Module Start Up" and content
8 Calibration SSH Calibration; change Action "Perform a start up on the Sample Handler and Process Module"
to "Perform Sample Handler and Process Module Start Up"
8 Calibration SSH Calibration; Perform Sample Handler and Process Module Start Up; add Note
Section Numbers Sections Revised/Added Revision
Front Matter Title Update Manual Revision Number to "96661-107"
Front Matter Title Update Front Matter Content Control Number to "96706-107"
Front Matter Prop Info Move c 8000 to registered tm line of trademark statements
Front Matter Prop Info Change latest copyright date to "2005"
Front Matter Revision Log Add info for for 96661-107
5 SCC Procedures Update to Document Control Number to "96953-102"
5 P-226 Perform Bar Code Configuration; update content
5 P-226 Open Bar Code Cal File: update content
5 P-226 Edit Transition Value; update content
5 P-226 Restore Default File; update content
5 P-231 Update content
5 P-234 Architect System Number and SCC Serial Number Configuration; update content
7 Section Title Add "Document Control Number 96997-101"
7 7.1 Add "System Specifications" and content
8 RSH Installation Change content
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-107) • Copyright 2002, 2005 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, i 2000 SR, and c&nbsp8000 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, ci8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Section Sections
Revision

Matter
Front Prop Info Move ci8200 to registered trademark line

Matter

Matter

Matter
Sect 2 Section Title Update to Document Control Number to "96726-105"

Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; Links; add "Keypad Process Module (LUI)" link
Sect 2 GLOBAL Block/Functional Diagrams; Change "pippettor" to "pipettor"; "LLS and Pressure Monitoring (R1
Pipettor)", "LLS and Pressure Monitoring (R2 Pipettor)", "LLS and Pressure Monitoring (STAT
Pipettor)"
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; Cover and Door Switches; change to "Cover and Waste Chute"; update
to AMA-9250b
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; LLS and Pressure Monitoring; add "LLS and Pressure Monitoring
(Sample Pipettor)" and A1_9346a
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; LLS and Pressure Monitoring; delete AMA-1150
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; LLS and Pressure Monitoring; LLS and Pressure Monitoring (R1
Pipettor); update to AMA-9193a
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; LLS and Pressure Monitoring; LLS and Pressure Monitoring (STAT
Pipettor); update to A1_9291a
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; LLS and Pressure Monitoring; LLS Interconnect Information; update to
A1_9294b
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; R1 Pipettor; update to A1_9275a
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; Sample Pipettor; update to A1_9281a
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; add "Keypad Process Module (LUI)" and A1_9345a
Sect 2 Card Cage; Card Cage Backplane; i 2000 Card Cage Backplane and Test Points; del heading and
graphic (A1_9343)
Sect 2 Card Cage; Card Cage Backplane; i 2000 SR Card Cage Backplane and Test Points; del heading
and graphic (A1_9330)
Sect 2 Card Cage; Card Cage Backplane; replace link to "i 2000 Card Cage Backplane and Test Points"
with link to A1_9343.PDF
Sect 2 Card Cage; Card Cage Backplane; replace link to "i 2000 SR Card Cage Backplane and Test
Points" with link to A1_9330.PDF
Sect 2 Power Supply; Power Distribution From the Power Supply; update to AMA-9256a
Sect 2 SCC Troubleshooting; update to Document Control Number to "96949-102"
Sect 2 SCC Troubleshooting; SCC Cable Locator; change "HYPERTERMINAL" to "Hyper Terminal"
Sect 2 SCC Troubleshooting; SCC Cable Locator; change "See ARCHITECT i System Service and Support
Manual" to "See i 2000 SH Interconnect Diagram"
Sect 2 SSH Troubleshooting; update to Document Control Number to "96936-102"
Sect 2 SSH Troubleshooting; Keypad (LUI); change to "Keypad SSH (LUI)"; update to AMA-9251a
Sect 2 SSH Troubleshooting; add "Door Switch" and A1_9344
Sect 4 GLOBAL Disconnect Hopper Sensor Cables; del "IONIZER FAN" content; GLOBAL (A1.01, A1.04, A1.05,
A1.13, B1.01, B1.02, B1.04, B2.01, B2.02, E1.05)
Sect 4 GLOBAL Connect Hopper Sensor Cables and For STAT Pipettor Only, Connect Hopper Sensor Cables
(E1.05); del "IONIZER FAN" content; GLOBAL (A1.01, A1.04, A1.05, A1.13, B1.01, B1.02, B1.04,
B2.01, B2.02, E1.05)
Sect 4 GLOBAL Update A1_2031a to A1_2031b; GLOBAL (A1.01, A1.04, A1.05, A1.13, B1.01, B1.02, B1.04, B2.01,
B2.02, E1.05)
Sect 4 I2-A1 Section RV Loader Components (i2-A1); Update to Document Control Number to "96729-105"
Title
Sect 4 i2-B1 Section Process Path Track & Heaters (i2-B1); Update to Document Control Number to "96730-105"
Title
Sect 4 i2-B2 Section Process Path Cover Mechanisms (i2-B2); Update to Document Control Number to "96731-105"
Title
Sect 4 i2-E1 Section Theta-Z Pipettor (i2-E1); Update to Document Control Number to "96735-105"
Title
Sect 7 System Specifications (i 2000, i 2000 LAS, i 4000, i 6000, and i 8000); Environmental
Specifications; Approved Operating Altitude; change from "6500 ft. (1981.2 m) or lower." to "8500 ft.
(2590.7 m) or lower."
Sect 8 ci8200 Installation Checklist; add link "Retest Sample Handler (RSH) Installation on a ci8200
System (Add On i 2000 SR; Stand Alone c 8000)" after i 2000/i 2000 SR Processing Module
Preparation
Sect 8 RSH Installation; Retest Sample Handler (RSH) Installation on a c 8000 System; Install Left Ground
Strap; change "14494-410" to "14494-412"
Sect 8 RSH Installation; Retest Sample Handler (RSH) Installation on an i 2000 SR System; Secure Left
Ground Strap; change "14494-410" to "14494-412"
Sect 8 RSH Installation; Install Right Ground Strap; change "14494-410" to "14494-412"
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-108) • Copyright 2002, 2005 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, i 2000 SR, ci8200, and c&nbsp8000 are registered trademarks
of Abbott Laboratories. i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
This page lists the changes from 96661-108 to 96661-109 of the i2000SR Service and Support Manual.
Section Sections
Revision
GLOBAL ALL Change i 2000 to i2000, i2000SR to i2000SR, i 4000 to i4000, i 6000 to i6000, i 8000 to i8000, c
8000 to c8000 (except in existing graphics)

Matter

Matter
Front Prop Info Add "i System" to the trademark line

Matter

Matter
Sect 1 General Data Update to Document Control Number to "96725-105"

Section Title
Sect 1 Temperature and Wash Aspirate Monitoring; Process Path Heater; change "...27 VDC power..." to
"...27 VAC power..."
Sect 1 Temperature and Wash Aspirate Monitoring; Buffer Heater; change "...27 VDC power..." to
"...27 VAC power..."
Sect 1 Temperature and Wash Aspirate Monitoring; Pre-Trigger and Trigger Heater; change "...27 VDC
power..." to "...27 VAC power..."
Sect 1 Temperature and Wash Aspirate Monitoring; Functional Description; A1_9300; change "27 VDC" to
"27 VAC"
Sect 1 Liquid Level Sense and Pressure Monitoring; Pressure Monitoring; replace para "During any
movement..." with ISA 116-041 content
Sect 1 Liquid Level Sense and Pressure Monitoring; LLS Functional Description; change "50 mL" to "50
µL"
Sect 1 Liquid Level Sense and Pressure Monitoring; PM Functional Description; delete para "During any
movement..."
Sect 2 Troubleshooting Update to Document Control Number to "96726-106"

Section Title
Sect 2 Card Cage; Card Cage Backplane; switch link targets
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; RV Load; 1A_9279, Page 3 of 4; change "DIO 38 read Hopper is Full =
1" to "DIO 84 read Hopper is Full = 1"
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams; Sample Pipettor Syringe; 1A_9283, Page 2 of 2; Syringe Bd. - 37540;
change "Valve -" to "Valve +" and "Valve +" to "Valve -"
Sect 4 RR Section Update to Document Control Number to "96728-106"

Title
Sect 4 A1 Section Title RV Loader Components (i2-A1); update to Document Control Number to "96729-106"
Sect 4 A1 A1.01; Parts; change "Hopper ASM (i2000)" to "RV Hopper, No Fan"
Sect 4 A1 A1.01; Parts; change "Hopper Assembly, i2000SR (i2000SR)" to "Hopper Assembly, i2000SR"
Sect 4 A1 A1.02; Parts; change "Baffle,Hopper" to "Assy, Baffle Spring"
Sect 4 A1 A1.04; Parts; change "Sensor Kit,Hopper" to "Sensor Hopper Kit"
Sect 4 A1 A1.05; Parts; delete "78425, RV Loader ASM (i2000)"
Sect 4 A1 A1.05; Parts; change "RV Loader Assembly, i2000SR (i2000SR)" to "RV Loader Assembly,
i2000SR"
Sect 4 A1 A1.07; Parts; change "Belt,RV Load" to "Belt, RV Loader"
Sect 4 A1 A1.08; Parts; change "V-Wheel Repair Kit,RV Loader" to "V-Wheel, RV Loader, Repair Kit"
Sect 4 A1 A1.13; Parts; change "Bd,Sensor #6 (RV Transport)" to "RV Transport Sensor Board, Self
Calibrating"
Sect 4 A1 A1.16; Parts; change "Level Sensor, Hopper (i2000SR)" to "Level Sensor, Hopper, i2000SR"
Sect 4 B1 Section Title Process Path Track & Heaters (i2-B1); update to Document Control Number to "96730-106"
Sect 4 B1 B1.01; Parts; change "Process Path (i2000)" to "Path, Process"
Sect 4 B1 B1.01; Parts; change "Process Path (i2000SR)" to "Process Path Assembly, i2000SR"
Sect 4 B1 B1.06; Parts; change "Bd, Sensor #5 (P Path Home) 14494-014 Screws (2)" to "Sensor Board #5"
Sect 4 B2 Section Title Process Path Cover Mechanisms (i2-B2); update to Document Control Number to "96731-106"
Sect 4 B2 B2.01; Parts; change "Cover,P Path (i2000)" to "Cover, Process Path, Molded, IVDD"
Sect 4 B2 B2.01; Parts; change "Cover,P Path (i2000SR)" to "Cover, Process Path, i2000SR"
Sect 4 B2 B2.01; Parts; add Chemical Hazard
Sect 4 B2 B2.05; Parts; change "Diverter,WZ,ASM" to "Diverter, WZ ASM"
Sect 4 B2 B2.07; Parts; change "RV Load Diverter ASM" to "Load Diverter Solenoid, no stick Picker Arm"
Sect 4 B2 B2.08; Parts; change "Bd,Sensor #15 (Load Divert)" to "Sensor Bd #15"
Sect 4 B2 B2.09; Parts; change "RV Unloader,P Path" to "Unloader Solenoid, Metal Flag"
Sect 4 B2 B2.11; Parts; change "Bd,Sensor #9 (Reagent Carousel Cover) 14494-006 Screw (3)" to "Sensor
Board #9 (Reagent Carousel Cover)"
Sect 4 B2 B2.12; Parts; change "Bd, Sensor #16 (RV Unload)" to "Bd, Sensor #16 Unloader Flag"
Sect 4 B2 B2.15; Parts; change "Diverter,Unloader RV ASM" to "Diverter Unloader Assembly"
Sect 4 B2 B2.18; Parts; change "Board, Diverter, Stat (i2000SR)" to "Board, Diverter, STAT (i2000SR)"
Sect 4 B2 B2.19; Parts; change "Diverter Assembly, STAT (i2000SR)" to "Diverter Assembly, STAT"
Sect 4 C1 Section Title CMIA Reader, Shutter (i2-C1); update to Document Control Number to "96732-104"
Sect 4 C1 C1.03; Parts; change "Plunger,Shutter" to "Plunger, Optics Shutter"
Sect 4 C1 C1.04; Parts; change "78201 Not Orderable" to "78200"; "Bracket,Shutter" to "Shutter (Assy)"
Sect 4 C1 C1.05; Parts; change "Motor,Shutter" to "Motor, Shutter or W2"
Sect 4 C1 C1.07; Tools/Materials; change "7-92513-01 Optics Normalization Solutions" to "06F75-60 iSystem
Optics Verifier Kit"
Sect 4 C1 C1.07; Verification; change "P-44 1040 CMIA OPTICS Normalization" to "Perform Maintenance and
Diagnostic Procedure 1045 Optics Verification."
Sect 4 D1 Section Title Reagent Carousels (i2-D1); update to Document Control Number to "96733-103"
Sect 4 D1 D1.05; Parts; change "Kit, Sensor, Reagent Carousels" to "Kit, Sensor, Reagent Carousel"
Sect 4 D1 D1.12; Parts; change "Bd,Sensor #2 (Sensor Interface BD)" to "Bd, Sensor #2"
Sect 4 D2 Section Title Reagent Cooling (i2-D2); update to Document Control Number to "96734-104"
Sect 4 D2 D2.01; Parts; change "Cover,Reagent Carousel 14489-240 Screws (3)" to "Reagent Cover, with
Background Attenuator"
Sect 4 D2 D2.01; Parts; change "Cover,Reagent Carousel I2000SR 14489-240 Screws (3)" to "Cover,
I2000SR, Reagent Carousel"
Sect 4 D2 D2.03; Parts; change "Louver,Refrigerator,Rgnt" to "Louver, Refrigerator Reagent"
Sect 4 D2 D2.05; delete
Sect 4 D2 D2.05; Parts; change "Refrigerator,Rgnt" to "Refrigerator with Replaceable Fan"
Sect 4 E1 Section Title Theta-Z Pipettor (i2-E1); update to Document Control Number to "96735-106"
Sect 4 E1 E1.02; Parts; change "Tubing,Probe (i2000)" to "Probe Tubing"
Sect 4 E1 E1.02; Parts; change "Probe Tubing, STAT (i2000SR)" to "Probe Tubing, STAT"
Sect 4 E1 E1.02; add "Probe Stick" hazard
Sect 4 E1 E1.03; Parts; change "Cable,Pipettor,LLS & Z" to "Cable, Pipettor, LLS & Z"
Sect 4 E1 E1.04; Parts; change "Kit,Probe Block (Kit contains: 1 Contact Block; 1 Screw, Thumb; 1 Probe,
Stud; 1 Screw)" to "Probe Block Kit"
Sect 4 E1 E1.06; Parts; change "Bd,Sensor #12 (Z Home)" to "Bd, Sensor #12"
Sect 4 E1 E1.07; Parts; change "Boom Arm,ASM (i2000)" to "Boom Arm ASM"
Sect 4 E1 E1.07; Parts; change "Boom Arm,ASM, STAT (i2000SR)" to "Boom Arm Assembly, STAT"
Sect 4 E1 E1.08; Parts; change "BD,Sensor #13 (Theta Home)" to "BD, Sensor #13"
Sect 4 E2 Section Title LLS & Pressure Monitoring (i2-E2); update to Document Control Number to "96736-104"
Sect 4 E2 E2.01; Parts; change "Bd,Antenna,LLS,R1 (i2000)" to "Antenna, R1"
Sect 4 E2 E2.01; Parts; change "Bd,Antenna,LLS,R2 (i2000SR)" to "Bd, Antenna, LLS, R1/R2, i2000SR"
Sect 4 E2 E2.02; Parts; change "Bd,Antenna,LLS,R2 (i2000)" to "Antenna R2"
Sect 4 E2 E2.02; Parts; change "Bd,Antenna,LLS,R2 (i2000SR)" to "Bd, Antenna, LLS, R1/R2 i2000SR"
Sect 4 E2 E2.05; Parts; change "Bd,Antenna,LLS,RV1/2 (i2000)" to "LLS Antenna, RV 1-2 and STAT"
Sect 4 E2 E2.05; Parts; change "Bd,Antenna,LLS,RV1/2 and RV48 (i2000SR)" to "Bd, Antenna, LLS, R1/R2,
i2000SR"
Sect 4 E2 E2.08; Parts; change "Pressure Monitor" to "Monitor, Pressure"
Sect 4 E3 Section Title Wash Cups, Syringes, Tubing, Pumps (i2-E3); update to Document Control Number to "96737-105"
Sect 4 E3 E3.03; Parts; change "Valve, Syringe 64407 Gasket, Manifold Valve (2) 78012 Valve removal tool"
to "Valve, Syringe"
Sect 4 E3 E3.03; Parts; change "Valve, Manifold 64407 Gasket, Manifold Valve (2) 78012 Valve removal tool"
to "Valve, Manifold Kit"
Sect 4 E3 E3.05; Parts; change "Tubing Kit,Pump" to "Tubing, Pump Kit"
Sect 4 E3 E3.06; Parts; change "Tubing,Pump Rack,Kit" to "Tubing, Pump Rack Kit"
Sect 4 E3 E3.06; add "Probe Stick Hazard"
Sect 4 E3 E3.07; Parts; change "Tubing, Buffer Manifold to Buffer Reservoir" to "Tubing, Buffer Manifold /
Reservoir"
Sect 4 E3 E3.07; add "Probe Stick Hazard"
Sect 4 E3 E3.08; Parts; change "Tubing,Top Level Kit" to "Tubing, Pumps to Top Level"
Sect 4 E3 E3.10; Parts; change "77641, Pump,Buffer" to "96343, 100µL Buffer Pump"
Sect 4 E3 E3.10; Parts; change "77642, Pump,WZ" to "96346, 50µL Buffer Pump"
Sect 4 E3 E3.10; Parts; change "77648, Pump,Trigger" to "96345, Pre Trigger Pump"
Sect 4 E3 E3.10; Parts; delete "77759, Pump,Pre-Trigger"
Sect 4 E3 E3.10; add "Chemical Hazard"
Sect 4 F1 Section Title Bulk Buffer Components (i2-F1); update to Document Control Number to "96738-104"
Sect 4 F1 F1.04; Parts; change "Tubing, Buffer Transfer" to "Wash Buffer Transfer Tubing"
Sect 4 F1 F1.04; Preparation: update AMA-1188
Sect 4 F1 F1.08; Parts; change "Pump,Transfer" to "Pump,Transfer ASM"
Sect 4 F1 F1.08; Parts; change "Transfer Pump Tubing" to "Tubing, Transfer Pump"
Sect 4 F1 F1.10; Parts; change "Valve,Buffer" to "Valve, Inlet Buffer, with Bulk Tubing"
Sect 4 F1 F1.12; Parts; change "Switch, Buffer Flow ASM" to "Flow Switch ASM"
Sect 4 G1 Section CMIA Wash Zone (i2-G1); update to Document Control Number to "96739-105"
Title
Sect 4 G1 G1.02: Parts: change "Tubing/Sensor, temp, WZ" to "Tubing/Sensor, Temperature, WZ"
Sect 4 G1 G1.03: Parts: change "Motor,WZ,ASM (WZ Mechanism)" to "WZ Mechanism"
Sect 4 G1 G1.03: update procedure with content from ISA 116-025
Sect 4 G1 G1.05: Parts: delete "78328, Manifold, WZ ASM"
Sect 4 G1 G1.06: Parts: change "Heater,Buffer,WZ" to "Heater, WZ Buffer"
Sect 4 G1 G1.07: Parts: change "Manifold,WZ (WZ Manifold)" to "WZ Manifold, No Lift"
Sect 4 G1 G1.09: Parts: change "Probe/Tubing, Waste Arm" to "Waste Arm Probe and Tubing"
Sect 4 G1 G1.09: add Probe Stick hazard
Sect 4 G1 G1.10: Parts: change "Tubing,Drain,Manifold" to "Tubing, Drain Manifold"
Sect 4 G1 G1.10: Remove Manifold Drain Tubing; add Caution "Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger
and trigger solutions."
Sect 4 H1 Section Title Pre-Trigger/Trigger Fluidics (i2-H1); update to Document Control Number to "96740-104"
Sect 4 H1 H1.01: Parts: change "Sensor,Level,Pre-Trigger" to "Sensor Level, Pre-Trigger" and add "08C94-27"
Sect 4 H1 H1.01: Parts: change "Sensor,Level,Trigger" to "Sensor Level, Trigger" and add "08C94-26"
Sect 4 H1 H1.01: Remove Pre-Trigger or Trigger Level Sensor; add Caution "Avoid skin and eye contact with
pre-trigger and trigger solutions."
Sect 4 H1 H1.01: Remove Pre-Trigger or Trigger Level Sensor; add NOTE "08C94-27 and 08C94-26 sensors
use a new connector and may have a short adapter cable to mate with older cables. Release this
connector by pressing the release lever. [4]"
Sect 4 H1 H1.01: Remove Pre-Trigger or Trigger Level Sensor; add A3_8001
Sect 4 H1 H1.01: Install Pre-Trigger or Trigger Level Sensor; add Note "On sensor 08C94-27 and 08C94-26,
the arrow is on top of the vent."
Sect 4 H1 H1.01: Install Pre-Trigger or Trigger Level Sensor; add Note "Connectors are keyed to prevent
cross connection of trigger and pre-trigger sensors."
Sect 4 H1 H1.01: Install Pre-Trigger or Trigger Level Sensor; add Note "The tubing connects to the lower
fitting on the sensor. Do not remove the vent fitting [4] from the 08C94-26 and 08C94-27 sensors
(note vent path [5])."
Sect 4 H1 H1.01: Install Pre-Trigger or Trigger Level Sensor; add A3_8002
Sect 4 H1 H1.04: Parts: change "Heater/Tube,PreTrig/Trig" to "Heater/Tube,PreTrig"
Sect 4 H1 H1.05: Parts: change "Manifold,Pre-Trig/Trig ASM" to "Manifold, Pre-Trig / Trig ASM 11.9"
Sect 4 J1 Section Title Solid Waste Components (i2-J1); update to Document Control Number to "96741-103"
Sect 4 J1 J1.02: Parts: change "Waste,Chute ASM" to "Waste Chute Assembly, Extruded"
Sect 4 J1 J1.02: Access Solid Waste Chute; add Caution "Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger and
trigger solutions."
Sect 4 J1 J1.05: Parts: delete "77158 Not Orderable, Slide,Waste Chute"
Sect 4 J1 J1.05: Parts: add "95598, Waste Chute Assembly, Extruded"
Sect 4 H1 J1.05: Access Solid Waste Chute; add Caution "Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger and
trigger solutions."
Sect 4 J1 J1.06: Parts: change "Bd,Sensor #7 (Waste Chute)" to "BD, Sensor #7"
Sect 4 J1 J1.06: Parts: add Chemical Hazard Warning
Sect 4 J1 J1.06: Access Solid Waste Chute; add Caution "Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger and
trigger solutions."
Sect 4 J1 J1.08: Parts: change "Solid Waste Container" to "Container, Solid Waste"
Sect 4 K1 Section Title Liquid Waste And Vacuum Components (i2-K1); update to Document Control Number to "96742-
104"
Sect 4 K1 K1.02: Parts: change "Valve,Drain,Vacuum,Vessel (Vessel & Accumulator)" to "Valve, Drain,
Vacuum Vessel"
Sect 4 K1 K1.08: Parts: change "Accumulator,Vacuum" to "Accumulator, Vacuum ASM"
Sect 4 K1 K1.11: Parts: change "Waste Manifold" to "Manifold, Waste ASM"
Sect 4 L1 Section Title Power Supply Components (i2-L1); update to Document Control Number to "96743-103"
Sect 4 L1 L1.01: Parts: change "78700, Power Supply Power Supply Caddy" to "92694, Power Supply,
Artesyn"
Sect 4 L1 L1.03: Parts: change "92063, Bd,36V Module,PS" to "92695, Bd, 36V Module Artesyn PS"
Sect 4 L1 L1.05: Parts: change "92064, Bd,Quad Module,PS" to "92696, Bd, Quad Module, Artesyn PS"
Sect 4 L1 L1.06: Parts: change "92065, Voltage Jumper,Kit,PS" to "92693, Jumper Kit Artesyn PS"
Sect 4 L1 L1.07: Parts: change "92066, Bd,Heater,PS" to "92697, Bd Heater Artesyn P.S."
Sect 4 L1 L1.09: Parts: replace "92068, Relay Kit,Vacuum Pump and 92072, Relay Kit, Refrigerator" with
"92067, AC Input Module, PS"
Sect 4 L1 L1.11: Parts: change "92069, Power Cord, Kit" to "86098, Power Cord, Architect"
Sect 4 L1 L1.12: Parts: change "36V Module, ARTESYN Power Supply" to "Bd, 36V Module Artesyn PS"
Sect 4 L1 L1.13: Parts: change "Quad Module, ARTESYN Power Supply" to "Bd, Quad Module, Artesyn PS"
Sect 4 L1 L1.14: Parts: change "Fuse Replacement, PS (Includes five (5) of each)" to "Fuse Kit, Card Cage
Pwr. Supply and RSH"
Sect 4 L1 L1.15: Parts: change "AC Distribution Module, ARTESYN Power Supply" to "Bd, Heater, Artesyn
P.S."
Sect 4 L1 L1.16: Parts: change "AC Input Module, ARTESYN Power Supply" to "AC Input Module, Artesyn
PS"
Sect 4 L1 L1.17: Parts: change "AC Distribution Module, ARTESYN Power Supply" to "Dist. Module Artesyn
PS"
Sect 4 L1 L1.18: Parts: change "ARTESYN Power Supply" to "Power Supply, Artesyn"
Sect 4 M1 Section Card Cage, Fuses & Boards (i2-M1); update to Document Control Number to "96744-105"
Title
Sect 4 M1 M1.01: Parts: change "Card Cage, i2000SR, RSH (i2000SR)" to "Card Cage, i2000SR, RSH"
Sect 4 M1 M1.02: Parts: change "Fuse Replacement, CCage/PS (Includes five (5) of each)" to "Fuse Kit, Card
Cage Pwr. Supply and RSH"
Sect 4 M1 M1.03: Parts: change "Bd,Indexer 78889 Wrist strap" to "Bd, Indexer"
Sect 4 M1 M1.03: Parts: change "Bd,Indexer, i2000SR" to "Bd, Indexer"
Sect 4 M1 M1.04: Parts: change "Bd,Motor Driver (i2000) 78889 Wrist strap" to "Bd, Motor Driver"
Sect 4 M1 M1.04: Parts: change "Bd,Motor Driver (i2000SR) 78889 Wrist strap" to "Board, Motor Driver"
Sect 4 M1 M1.06: Parts: change "Bd,Controller (processing module, sample handler) 78889 Wrist strap" to
"Controller Board, All Modules"
Sect 4 M1 M1.06: Parts: delete "78665 Bd,Controller, i2000SR"
Sect 4 M1 M1.06: delete Note
Sect 4 M1 M1.07: Parts: change "Bd,DC Driver,I/O (i2000) 78889 Wrist strap" to "DC Driver Board with Fuses"
Sect 4 M1 M1.08: Parts: change "78565, Bd,Liquid Level Sense 78889 Wrist strap" to "92375, Bd, Liquid Level
Sense"
Sect 4 M1 M1.08: Parts: change "Board, PM Algorithm LLS" to "PM Algorithm LLS Brd"
Sect 4 M1 M1.08: Parts: delete Note content "These boards can be identified..."
Sect 4 M1 M1.10: Parts: change "Board, ESD (i2000SR) 78889 Wrist strap" to "Board, ESD"
Sect 4 Q1 Section SCC CPU (i2-Q1); update to Document Control Number to "96950-102"
Title
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.03: Parts: change "RAM, CPU,SCC" to "RAM, 256K,SCC (RAM 512K for Platform D)"
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.04: change "Hard Drive, System,CPU" to "Hard Drive, System,CPU (Platform C)"
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.04: Parts: change "Hard Drive,System,CPU" to "Hard Drive, CPU"
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.04: replace "Observe ESD precautions" with "Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)"
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.05: change "Hard Drive, Backup,CPU" to "Hard Drive, Backup,CPU (Platform C)"
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.05: Parts: change "78801, Hard Drive,Backup,CPU" to "78800, Hard Drive, CPU"
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.05: replace "Observe ESD precautions" with "Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)"
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.06: change "Floppy Disk,CPU" to "Floppy Drive,CPU (Platform A, B, and C)"
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.06: change Parts to "99023; Floppy Drive, D platform"

Sect 4 Q1 Q1.07: change "CD ROM Drive,CPU" to "CD ROM Drive,CPU (Platform B and C)"
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.08: change "DIGIBOARD & Cables,CPU" to "DIGIBOARD & Cables,CPU (Platform C)"
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.08: Parts: change "DigiBoard & Cable Kit, CPU" to "Serial Cables"
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.08: add content from ISA 115-134
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.09: add "Hard Drive, System,CPU (Platform D)" from ISA 116-047
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.10: add "Floppy Drive,CPU (Platform D)" from ISA 116-047
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.11: add "CD RW Drive (Platform D)" from ISA 116-047
Sect 4 Q1 Q1.12: add "Power Supply" from ISA 116-047
Sect 4 Q2 Q2.01: Parts: change "Keyboard Skin" to "Keyboard Skin, SCC"
Sect 4 Q2 Q2.03: Parts: change "Keyboard - English; Keyboard - French; Keyboard - German; Keyboard -
Italian; Keyboard - Spanish; Keyboard - Japanese" to "Keyboard, English; Keyboard, French;
Keyboard, German; Keyboard, Italian; Keyboard, Spanish; Keyboard, Japanese"
Sect 4 Q2 Q2.03: delete Biohazard
Sect 4 Q2 Q2.05: insert content from ISA 116-084
Sect 4 Q2 Q2.06: Parts: change "Printer" to "Printer 110V"
Sect 4 Q2 Q2.10: insert content from ISA 116-093
Sect 4 R1 Section Title Automatic Reconstitution Module (i2-R1); update to Document Control Number to "96748-103"
Sect 4 R1 R1.09: Parts: change "Input Pressure Sensor,ARM" to "Sensor, Input Pressure, ARM"
Sect 4 R1 R1.27: Parts: change "Cable,RS232,Kit,ARM" to "Kit, Cable, RS232, ARM"
Sect 4 R1 R1.28: Parts: change "78196, Kit,Tubing,ARM (ARCHITECT manifold)" to "92484, Tubing, ARM to
Instrument"
Sect 4 S1 Section Title LAS (i2-S1); update to Document Control Number to "96938-102"
Sect 4 S1 S1.01: Parts: change "LAS B Dual Sensor Board" to "Bd, LAS B modified Dual Sensor"
Sect 4 S1 S1.02: Parts: change "LAS Tension Arm Assembly" to "Tension Arm Assy"
Sect 4 S1 S1.03: Parts: change "LAS Carousel Pinion Motor" to "Motor Slide Assy"
Sect 4 S1 S1.04: Parts: change "Board, LAS LLS Antenna (general or Hitachi)" to "Bd, Antenna, LAS Track
General" (for 92940) and "LAS Track, Bd, Hitachi Antenna Bd" (for 90870)
Sect 4 S1 S1.05: Parts: change "Bracket, LAS LLS Antenna Board" to "Bracket, Sample LLS Bd"
Sect 4 S1 S1.05: add ESD hazard
Sect 4 S1 S1.06: Parts: change "LAS Drive Plate Assembly" to "Drive Plate assy"
Sect 4 S1 S1.07: Parts: change "LAS Carousel Home and Position Sensor" to "Carousel Home and Position
Sensor, LAS"
Sect 4 S1 S1.08: Parts: change "LAS Carousel Drive Gear" to "Carousel gear, Bearing and E-Ring"
Sect 4 S1 S1.09: Parts: change "Board, LAS Barcode Reader Power T" to "Bd, BCR T"
Sect 4 S1 S1.10: Parts: change "ARCHITECT LAS CPU Board" to "LAS CPU Board"
Sect 4 S1 S1.11: Parts: change "78240, Sensor, LAS Carousel Cover" to "77407, Micro Switch, Red Button"
Sect 4 S1 S1.12: Parts: change "Assembly, LAS Front Carousel Cover" to "LAS Front Cover Assy"
Sect 4 V2 Section Title Load Queue (i2-V2); update to Document Control Number to "96939-102"
Sect 4 V2 V2.02: Parts: change "BCR,SID,LQ" to "Barcode Reader SID"

Sect 4 V2 V2.05: Parts: change "Belt,Timing,LQ" to "Belts, Sample Handler Kit"
Sect 4 V2 V2.06: Parts: change "Belt,Pulley,LQ" to "Belts, Sample Handler Kit"
Sect 4 V2 V2.10: Parts: change "Sensor, LQ, Proximity" to "Sensor, LQ"
Sect 4 V2 V2.11: Parts: change "Bd,Sensor #2 (LQ)" to "BD, Sensor #2"
Sect 4 V2 V2.13: Parts: change "77350, BCR,SID LQ ASM" to "BCR, SID LQ. ASM"
Sect 4 V2 V2.14: Parts: change "77536, Closeout,LQ" to "77324, LQ ASM"
Sect 4 V3 Section Title Transfer 1 Mechanism (i2-V3); update to Document Control Number to "96940-102"
Sect 4 V3 V3.01: Parts: change "Transfer,Load" to "Transfer, Load ASM"
Sect 4 V3 V3.02: Parts: change "Motor,Transfer, Load/Unload" to "Motor, LQ / ULQ Transfer"
Sect 4 V3 V3.03: Parts: change "Belt,Transfer" to "Belts, Sample Handler Kit"
Sect 4 V3 V3.04: Parts: change "Bd,Sensor,#11 (Load Transfer)" to "Bd, Sensor, #11"
Sect 4 V3 V3.05: Parts: change "Bd,Sensor,#10 (Transfer Load)" to "Bd, Sensor, #10"
Sect 4 V3 V3.08: Parts: change "Solenoid, Carrier Stop, Transfer" to "Solenoid, Carrier Stop, X-Fer"
Sect 4 V3 V3.09: Parts: change "Switch,Micro,SH Kit" to "Switch, Micro, ISH Kit"
Sect 4 V3 V3.10: Parts: change "Pulley,Transfer" to "Pulley, X-Fer ASM"
Sect 4 V3 V3.13: Parts: change "Bd,Sensor (Load Transfer)" to "Bd, Sensor #2"
Sect 4 V4 Section Title Processing Queue (i2-V4); update to Document Control Number to "96941-102"
Sect 4 V4 V4.02: Parts: change "Proximity Sensor" to "Sensor, LQ"
Sect 4 V4 V4.05: Parts: change "Switch,Micro,SH Kit" to "Switch, Micro, ISH Kit"
Sect 4 V4 V4.12: Parts: change "Belt,Timing,PQ" to "Belt, Sample Handler Kit"
Sect 4 V4 V4.15: Parts: change "Star Wheel,PQ,ASM" to "Star Wheel, PQ"
Sect 4 V4 V4.20: Parts: change "Solenoid,Gate,PQ" to "Gate, Unload Solenoid ASM"
Sect 4 V5 Section Title Unload Transfer (i2-V5); update to Document Control Number to "96942-102"
Sect 4 V5 V5.01: Parts: change "Transfer, Unload,ASM" to "Transfer, Unload"
Sect 4 V5 V5.02: Parts: change "Motor,Transfer, Unload/Load" to "Motor, LQ / ULQ Transfer"
Sect 4 V5 V5.03: Parts: change "Belt, Transfer" to "Belts, Sample Handler Kit"
Sect 4 V5 V5.04: Parts: change "Bd, Sensor,#11 (Unload Transfer)" to "Bd, Sensor #11"
Sect 4 V5 V5.08: Parts: change "Solenoid, Carrier Stop, Transfer" to "Solenoid, Carrier Stop, X-Fer"
Sect 4 V5 V5.10: Parts: change "Pulley, Transfer" to "Pulley, X-fer ASM"
Sect 5 P-42 Replace content with content from ISA 115-187A
Sect 5 Section Title SCC Procedures; Update to Document Control Number to "96953-103"
Sect 5 P-203 Delete
Sect 5 P-204 Change "Log Retrieval Procedure (software version 2.02 or higher)" to "Log Retrieval Procedure"
Sect 5 P-211 Change "System Date, Time, and Time Zone (Software version 2.02 or higher)" to "System Date,
Time, and Time Zone"
Sect 5 P-218 Change "C: Drive Recovery Procedure (software version 2.02 and SCC Platform C)" to "C: Drive
Recovery Procedure"
Sect 5 P-218 Delete references to "version 2.02"
Sect 5 P-218 Insert CD and Restart SCC: change "...Configuration Media Version 2.02 (CD), Disk 1 of 2 in the
CD-ROM..." to "...Configuration Media in the CD-ROM..."
Sect 5 P-222 Delete
Sect 5 P-230 Change "D: Drive Recovery Procedure (Software version 2.02 and SCC Platform C)" to "D: Drive
Recovery Procedure"
Sect 5 P-230 Delete references to "version 2.02"
Sect 5 P-230 Insert CD and Restart SCC: change "...Configuration Media Version 2.02 (CD), Disk 2 of 2 in the
CD-ROM..." to "...Configuration Media in the CD-ROM..."
Sect 5 P-230 Rewrite D: Drive: change "...remove Disk 2 of 2 from the CD-ROM drive..." to "...remove the CD
from the CD-ROM drive..."
Sect 5 P-230 Rewrite D: Drive: delete Note "The changes made between software version 2.01 and 2.02..."
Sect 5 P-233 Change "Verify and Configure BIOS (Software version 2.02)" to "Verify and Configure BIOS
(Platform C)"
Sect 5 P-233 Purpose: change "...computer BIOS (ARCHITECT software version 2.02)." to "...computer BIOS."
Sect 5 P-233 Select Plug and Play Option and Set Up Peripheral Configuration: change "Legacy USB Support -
Enabled" to "Legacy USB Support - Disabled"
Sect 5 P-233 Set Up Power Management: change "After Power Failure - Last State" to "After Power Failure -
Stay Off"
Sect 5 P-233 Set Up Boot Sequence: delete "Scan User Flash Area - Disabled"
Sect 5 P-233 Set Up Boot Sequence: change "Fourth Boot Device: Disable" to "Fourth Boot Device: Disabled"
Sect 5 P-233 Set Up Boot Sequence: delete Step "Press the Esc key to return to the menu."
Sect 5 P-233 Exit and Save BIOS Settings: change Step "Use the arrow keys to select Exit, then select Yes." to
"Press F10 and Yes to save and exit."
Sect 5 P-233 Exit and Save BIOS Settings: change Note "To avoid system instability, perform this step even if no
parameters are changed." to "To avoid system instability, press F10 even if no parameters are
changed. The SCC reboots."
Sect 5 P-235 Delete
Sect 5 P-236 Delete
Sect 5 P-237 Change "System Time Zone (software version 1.60/1.61)" to "System Time Zone"
Sect 5 P-238 Change "C: Drive Recovery Procedure (Software version 1.60/1.61)" to "Hard Drive Recovery
Options"
Sect 5 P-238 Purpose: change "...system software (version 1.60/1.61) is suspect..." to "...system software is
suspect..."
Sect 5 P-238 Materials Required: change "ARCHITECT Software Configuration Media Version 1.60 (7-96244-
02)" to "ARCHITECT Software Configuration Media"
Sect 5 P-238 Materials Required: change "ARCHITECT System Software Version 1.61 (05F48-06)" to
"ARCHITECT System Software"
Sect 5 P-238 Incorporate content from TSB 116-032
Sect 5 P-239 Delete
Sect 5 P-240 Delete

Sect 5 P-241 Change "Temp Log Retrieval (ARCHITECT ARM, Host, LAS) (Software version 1.60/1.61)" to
"Temp Log Retrieval (ARCHITECT ARM, Host, LAS)"
Sect 5 P-241 Change "Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field." to "Enter the FSE logon date code
in reverse order in the password field."
Sect 5 P-241 Delete Note "For Version 1.50 (and higher), enter the date code in reverse order."
Sect 5 P-242 Delete
Sect 5 P-243 Change "Event Log Procedure (software version 1.60/1.61)" to "Event Log Procedure"
Sect 5 P-243 Change "Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field." to "Enter the FSE logon date code
in reverse order in the password field."
Sect 5 P-243 Delete Note "For Version 1.50 (and higher), enter the date code in reverse order."
Sect 5 P-244 Change "WINMSD Report (software version 1.60/1.61)" to "WINMSD Report"
Sect 5 P-246 Change "Verify and Configure BIOS (software version 1.60/1.61)" to "Verify and Configure BIOS
(Platform D)"
Sect 5 P-246 Change "...installation of the SCC computer BIOS (ARCHITECT software version 1.60):" to
"installation of the SCC computer BIOS."
Sect 5 P-246 Replace content with TSB 116-032
Sect 5 P-247 Delete
Sect 6 Overview Overview: replace interval specification with new content
Sect 6 Overview Overview: Suggested Tools and Supplies; change "...Syringe valve C/N 7-77030-01 and Wash
Zone valve C/N 7-77612-01)" to "...Syringe valve 77030 and Wash Zone valve 77612)"
Sect 6 Overview Overview: Recommended Available Parts: delete "Protocol" col
Sect 6 Overview Overview: Recommended Available Parts: delete "Lubricant, TEFLON Oil"
Sect 6 Overview Overview: Recommended Available Parts: delete "Processing Center filter"
Sect 6 Overview Overview: Recommended Available Parts: delete "...*This kit includes 1 Dispersion Ring"
Sect 6 Overview Overview: Recommended Available Parts: C/N or L/N: remove prefix/suffix characters/numbers
Sect 6 Overview Overview: Recommended Available Parts: change "LN08C94-028" to "08C94-28"
Sect 6 Overview Overview: Reference Procedures (as needed): delete "P-222 M&D Procedure Installation (software
version 2.02 or higher)"
Sect 6 Overview Overview: replace "Planned Maintenance (PM) Checklist" content
Sect 8 Section Title Delete locator table
Sect 8 Installation Delete locator table

Checklists
Sect 8 Installation Delete section & locator table

Checklists
Sect 8 c8000 Module Delete section & locator table

Installation
Sect 8 i2000/i2000SR Delete locator table

Module
Installation
Sect 8 LAS Installation Delete locator table

Sect 8 SCC Delete locator table
INSTALLATION
Sect 8 VERIFICATION Delete locator table
Sect 8 UPGRADE Delete locator table
Sect 8 RELOCATION Delete locator table
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-109) • Copyright 2002, 2006 • ARCHITECT, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Section
Sections Revised/Added Revision
Numbers

Matter

Matter
Front Prop Info Add "i System" to the trademark line

Matter
Front Revision Log Add info for 96661-110

Matter
Sect 2 Troubleshooting Section Title Update to Document Control Number to "96726-107"

Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams LLS and Pressure Monitoring; LLS Interconnect Information; update A1_9294
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams Fluidic/Waste Diagrams; replace "A1_9279" (1 of 4) with "AMA-9249" (Pre-
Trigger/Trigger) and "A1_9279" (3 of 4) with "1A_9293" (Waste)
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams ARM Fluidics Components, Flush Mode; replace "1A_9283" (1 of 2) with
"A1_9338"
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams Process Path; replace "A1_9279" (2 of 4) with "A1_9274" (1 of 4) and "A1_9279"
(4 of 4) with "A1_9274" (2 of 4)
Sect 2 Block/Functional Diagrams R1 Pipettor; replace "1A_9283" (2 of 2) with "1A_9275" (2 of 3) and "A1_9279" (4
of 4) with "A1_9274" (2 of 4)
Sect 4 RR Section Title Update to Document Control Number to "96728-107"
Sect 4 A1 Section Title RV Loader Components (i2-A1); update to Document Control Number to "96729-
107"
Sect 4 A1 A1.05; Parts; change "91373" to "93864"; change "RV Loader Assembly,
Convertible, i2000SR" to "RV Loader Assembly, Convertible"
Sect 4 E2 Section Title LLS & Pressure Monitoring (i2-E2); update to Document Control Number to
"96736-105"
Sect 4 E2 E2.05; Parts; del "94047"
Sect 6 Overview Overview; Recommended Available Parts; change "Type III Silicon compound",
"14237" to "Type III Silicone compound", "14237-010"
Sect 6 Overview Overview; Recommended Available Parts; add "Lubricant, Teflon Oil", "14237-
015", "1"
Sect 8 Installation Checklists Delete "Installation Checklists" heading
Sect 8 c8000 Installation Checklist Delete "SCC - Software Installation & Configuration"
Sect 8 i2000SR Installation Checklist Delete "SCC - Software Installation & Configuration"
Sect 8 ci8200 Installation Checklist Delete "SCC - Software Installation & Configuration"
Sect 8 i2000 - Standard Sample Delete "SCC - Software Installation & Configuration"
Handler (SSH) Installation
Checklist
Sect 8 i4000 - Standard Sample Delete "SCC - Software Installation & Configuration"
Handler (SSH) Installation
Checklist
Sect 8 SCC - Software Installation & Delete "After the SCC software has been installed..." and Links table
Configuration
Sect 8 Relocation Delete "i2000/i2000SR System Preparation for Relocation" and "Refer to the
Abbott ARCHITECT i System Operations Manual, Section 2, Relocation."
Sect 8 Relocation Change "i2000/i2000SR System Packing" to "i2000/i2000SR System Packing and
Relocation"
Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, iSystem, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Section Sections
Revision

Matter

Matter
Front Revision Log Add "i1000SR" to trademarks

Matter

Matter
Sect 4 RR Section Title Update to Document Control Number to "96728-108"
Sect 4 F1 Section Title Bulk Buffer Components (i2-F1); update Document Control Number to "96738-105"
Sect 4 F1.10 Unload and Remove Wash Buffer Reservoir; Replace "AMA-1188a" with "AMA-1188b"
Sect 4 F1.10 Change Action "Remove Buffer Valve" to "Remove Buffer Valve in Pump Bay" and add content
P-11 RS232 Connection; change Action to "RS-232 Connection" and change content to include i1000SR
P-15 Module; add "i1000SR"
P-15 Materials Required; change to "1 Step Test/2 Step Test Service Kit (5F96-02 Kit)"
P-15 Perform 6200 CLI Terminal Simulator; change content
P-15 Order Calibration; change content
P-15 Order Patients; change content
P-15 Prepare and load 1 Step /2 Step reagent bottles; change Action to "Prepare and Load 1 Step
Test/2 Step Test Reagent Bottles (i2000/i2000SR)" and change content
P-15 Add Action "Prepare and Load 1 Step Test/2 Step Test Reagent Bottles (i1000SR)"
P-15 Remove 1Step/2Step Reagent Bottles; change Action to "Remove 1 Step Test/2 Step Test

Reagent Bottles"
P-15 Perform 6114 Install/Delete Assays; change content
P-44 Delete procedure
P-55 Change procedure title from "3 Point Optics Verification Procedure (1045)" to "3 Point Optics
Verification Procedure"
P-55 Purpose; change "...1045 Optics Verification checks..." to "...1045 Optics Verification
(i2000/i2000SR) and 1047 Optics Verification (i1000SR) check..."
P-55 Module; add "i1000SR"
P-55 Change Action "Perform Optics Verification Procedure" to "Perform Optics Verification Procedure
(i2000/i2000SR)"
P-55 Add Action "Perform Optics Verification Procedure (i1000SR)"
P-204 Purpose: add i1000SR content
P-204 Error Messages; change "Perform P-230 D: Drive Recovery Procedure" to "Perform the appropriate
drive recovery procedure"
P-204 Retrieve Current Logs Option; add Log "Reagent Activity Log" and content after "Optics"
P-204 Retrieve Memory Dump File Option (FSE only); delete "Prior to retrieving the memory dump file,..."
to end of paragraph
P-206 Rename Architect Printer to Printer Product Name; Note - delete references to versions
P-206 Rename Architect Printer to Printer Product Name; change "HP LJ 1200 PS" to "OKI B4350"
P-206 Load Printer Driver; remove Note with version content
P-206 Delete Actions with version content: Set Paper Size (software version 2.02 or higher), Set Paper
Size (software version 1.60/1.61), Set Architect Printer as Default (software version 2.02 or higher),
Set Architect Printer as Default (software version 1.60/1.61)
P-206 Set Paper Size; replace content with content from "Set Paper Size (software version 2.02 or
higher)"
P-206 Set Architect Printer as Default; replace content with content from "Set Architect Printer as Default
(software version 2.02 or higher)"
P-226 Replace Action "Perform Bar Code Configuration" with "Perform 3253 Bar Code Configuration"
P-226 Open Bar Code Cal File; add "RSH (i1000SR) = C:\IPLS\iRSH\System" to folder list
P-226 Perform Diagnostic Procedure Bar Code Reader Test; add "RSH (i1000SR) - 3230 Bar Code
Reader Test" to list of MD procedures
P-229 Delete procedure
P-234 Complete ARCHITECT SCC SN Label; add i1000SR content to "SH Serial Number" and "PM
Serial Number" Steps
P-234 Complete ARCHITECT SCC SN Label; change "SH Serial Number" and "PM Serial Number"
Steps content to correct number format
P-245 Purpose; add "(for the i2000/i2000SR)" to Note
P-245 Log On as FSE; change "Power on date code..." to "Enter the FSE logon date code..."
P-245 Log On as FSE; delete Note
P-245 Change "Remove Reagent Kits from Module" Action and add links to appropriate Actions
P-245 Add Action "Remove Reagent Kits from Module (i2000/i2000SR)" and content
P-245 Add Action "Remove Reagent Kits from Module (i1000SR)" and content
P-245 Change "Stop Reagent Onboard Stability Timer" Action and add links to appropriate Actions
P-245 Add Action "Stop Reagent Onboard Stability Timer (i2000/i2000SR)" and content
P-245 Add Action "Stop Reagent Onboard Stability Timer (i1000SR)" and content
P-247 Incorporate new content
i2000/i2000SR Materials Required; change "7-78220-01" to "LN05F96-02"

Processing
Module
Verification
Abbott Laboratories. i1000SR, i4000, i6000, i8000, iSystem, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Front Matter Title Update Manual Revision Number to "96661-112"
Front Matter Title Update Front Matter Content Control Number to "96706-112"
Front Matter Revision Log Add info for 96661-112
Sect 6 Troubleshooting Section Title Update to Document Control Number to "96757-108"
Sect 6 Overview Added new row to Planned Maintenance (PM) Interval table.
Abbott Laboratories. i1000SR, i4000, i6000, i8000, iSystem, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Section Sections
Revision

Matter

Matter
Front Prop Info Move "i1000SR" from trademark info to registered trademark items
Matter
Front Prop Info Add "c16000" and "ci16200" to trademark items

Matter

Matter
Sect 4 R&R Update to Document Control Number to "96728-109"
Sect 4 E3 Title Pg Update to Document Control Number to "96737-106"
Sect 4 E3.10 Remove Appropriate Pump; change "1 - STP 10µl (i2000SR only)" to "1 - STP 100µl (i2000SR
only)"
Sect 4 E3.10 Prepare for Operation; change "Perform Maintenance Procedure 2130 Flush Fluids." to "Perform
2130 Flush Fluids."
Sect 4 E3.10 Verification for Wash Zone Pump; del "Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedure" from Steps
Sect 4 E3.10 Verification for Wash Zone Pump; change "Perform 2006 Wash Zone 1 Check." to "Perform 2006
Wash Zone 1 Check, or 2007 Wash Zone 2 Check."
Sect 4 E3.10 Verification for Pre-Trigger/Trigger Pumps; del "Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedure" from
Steps
Sect 4 E3.10 Add Action "Verify 100 µL Pumps" and content
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-113) • Copyright 2002, 2007 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 •
All rights reserved.
Section Sections
Revision

Matter

Matter
Front Prop Info Update Proprietary Information content

Matter

Matter
Sect 5 Section Title Update to Document Control Number "96756-109"
Sect 5 Section Title SCC Procedures; update to Document Control Number "96953-105"
Sect 5 P-15 Updated content
Sect 5 P-39 Perform Performance Verification; delete Action and move Step "Perform 2050 WZ Aspiration
Test." to Action "Perform Installation Verification"
Sect 5 P-226 Purpose; change "...the bar code type and number of characters..." to "...the bar code type,
presentation, or number of characters..."
Sect 5 P-226 Materials Required; change "...customer bar code labels" to "...customer bar code labels,
pretreatment tubes or other tubes with special labels."
Sect 5 P-226 Perform 3252 Bar Code Configuration; change "3252" to "3253"
Sect 5 P-226 Determine Number of Transitions; change Action to "Manually Set Number of Transitions
(Optional)"
Sect 5 P-226 Determine Number of Transitions; before Step "Using Bar Code Transitions, locate...", add Note
"The following steps are an optional method..."
Sect 5 P-226 Determine Number of Transitions; after Step "Determine the recommended number of transitions.",
add Note "Barcode types serve as examples. Special labels..."
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-114) • Copyright 2002, 2007 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 •
All rights reserved.
Section
Numbers
Front Title Update Manual Revision Number 96661-115, add i1000SR, c16000, ci16200,
Matter iSystem
1 General Data Update Document Control Number 96725-106
1 1.1 Update links table, update graphics and text, add additional step in Precautions,
delete note in Electrostatic Discharge(ESD)
1 1.2 Update graphic A1_9338b
1 1.4 Update Document Control Number 96948-102
1 1.4 Update content in Hardware Description
2 Troubleshooting Update Document Control Number 96726-108
2 2.6 Update table Block/Functional Diagrams
2 2.6 Add new text and graphic ARM Fluidics Components Flush Mode (Normal Start)
; A1_9347a
2 2.6 Update text and graphic to ARM Fluidics Components Flush Mode (After
Decontamination) ; A1_9338b
2 2.9 Update Document Control Number 96936-103
2 2.9 Update graphic AMA-9065b under 1200SH Interconnect Diagram
4 Removal and Replacement Update Document Control Number 96728-110
4 A1 Update Document Control Number 96729-108
4 A1.13 Delete Perform Startup, update text in Verification
4 B1 Update Document Control Number 96730-107
4 B1.01 Update graphics AMA-3148a, A1_2037a, and content in Install Process Path
Drive Motor
4 B1.01 Add graphic Caution: Chemical Hazard and ama-9112
Drive Motor
Drive Motor
4 B2 Update Document Control Number 96731-107
Drive Motor
Drive Motor
Drive Motor
4 B2.07 Update text and graphic callouts in Remove Process Path Load Diverter, and
add graphic AMA-3262 in Install Load Diverter
4 K1 Update Document Control Number 96744-106
4 K1 Update Document Control Number 96742-105
4 K1.02 Add text and graphics A1_1791, 3a_6022, 3a_6023 for Install Vacuum Vessel
Drain Valve
4 K1.04 Update procedure to incorporate ISA 115-204
4 M1 Update Document Control Number 96744-106
4 M1.06 Update content in Verify Jumper Configuration and Perform Diagnostic

Procedure 6008 Controller Configuration, add graphic 5a_1267a, updated
graphic AMA_3301b
4 SCC CPU (i2-Q1) Update Document Control Number 96950-103
4 Q1.02 Update text and graphics 3a_6028a, 3a_6029a to incorporate platform C, D, and
E
4 Q1.09 Update procedure to incorporate ISA 115-205A update access to hard drive and
part number
4 Q1.10 Update procedure to incorporate ISA 115-205A update part number and access
to floppy drive
4 Q1.11 Update procedure to incorporate ISA115-205A update part number
4 Q1.12 Update procedure to incorporate ISA 115-205A and 115-220 update part
number, install power supply, D and E platform
4 Q1.13 Add procedure with content from ISA 115-188
4 Q1.14 Add procedure with content from ISA 115-205A
4 Q1.15 Add procedure with content from ISA 115-205A
5 Procedures Update Document Control Number 96756-110
5 P-10 Update procedure to incorporate text and graphics from ISA 115-131
5 P-24 Update procedure to incorporate text and graphics from ISA 115-218
5 P-40 Update content for Prepare for Calibration , Return to Normal Operation, and
Verification
5 SCC Update Document Control Number 96953-106
5 P-226 Update content for grammatical accuracy
5 P-233 Update content for Platform D and E
5 P-249 Add procedure with content from ISA 116-068A and ISA 115-178A
6 Planned Maintenance Update Document Control Number 96757-109
6 Overview Update content in table Recommended Available Parts
6 PM 1 Procedures Update content in table PM 1 Procedures
6 Maintenance Guidelines Update text and added graphics in Inspect CMIA Optics and Shutter
6 Maintenance Guidelines Update text and graphics in Inspect Liquid Drain System
8 Installation & Setup Change Document Control Number 96759-112
8 i2000/i2000SR Processing Module Update Prepare Process Area and Install Sample Handler
Preparation
8 ARCHITECT LAS Module Update Install Boards

Installation
8 RSH Installation on a c8000 Change title from Retest Sample Handler to Robotic Sample Handler. Update
System content in Materials Required, Install Left Ground Strap, and Install Processing
Module Keypad
8 RSH Installation on an 1200SR Change title from Retest Sample Handler to Robotic Sample Handler. Update
System Purpose
8 RSH Installation on a ci8200 Change title from Retest Sample Handler to Robotic Sample Handler. Update
System (Stand Alone i2000SR; content in Purpose and install c8000 Keypad
Add on c8000)
8 RSH Calibration Update Perform Positions Setup/Calibration
8 RSH Calibration Update Checklist Completion
8 RSH Calibration Update Document Installation Completion
8 RSH Calibration Update Perform Processing Module Verification
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
Section Sections
Revision
FRONT TItle Change Manual Revision Number to 96661-116
FRONT TItle Change Front Matter Content Control Number to 96706-116
FRONT Prop Info Document Control Number 204669-101
FRONT Rev Log Add 96661-116 Change Listing
Chap 4 Functional Area Deleted Document Control Number 96729-108.

Headers
Chap 4 R&R Changed Document Control Number 96728-111
Chap 4 Locator table Parts and RR names will be pulled directly from approved records in FRU.
Chap 4 All RR Parts and verification information will be pulled directly from approved records in FRU. A note
procedures dynamically sourced from FRU, "Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and
replace if necessary.", has been added at the beginning of the RR. An additional verification
procedure, G110, has been added as the final verification of each RR.
Chap 5 Procedures Changed Document Control Number 96756-111
Chap 5 All VPs Two notes dynamically sourced from FRU, "Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not
expired and replace if necessary." and "At the completion of this VP: After repair is complete, verify
per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.", have been
added at the beginning of the procedure.
reserved.
Section Sections
Revision
FRONT Rev Log Add 96661-117 Change Listing
Chap 2 Troubleshooting Changed Document Control Number to 96726-109
Chap 2 2.1 Fuses Updated graphic A1_9343b and A1_9330b. Updated text in i2000 Card Cage Fuse table and added
new tables i2000 &i2000SR Backplane grid locators. Updated text on Fuse Location on Card Cage
Back Plane Board (i2000 & i2000SR)
Chap 2 LLS and Updated graphic A1_9294d. Added new graphic 3a_9350a, 3a_9353a, 3a_9356a, 3a_9347a,
Pressure 3a_9352a, 3a_9351a, 3a_9348a, 3a_9354a, 3a_9355a, 3a_9349a, 3a_9357a, and 3a_9358a
Monitoring
Chap 6 Planned Changed Document Control Number to 96757-110

Maintenance
Chap 6 PM 1 Updated Step 6 in PM 2 Procedures table
Chap 7 System Changed Document Control Number to 96997-103

Specification
Chap 7 System Deleted Note in Water and Waste Specification table

Specification
Chap 8 Installation & Changed Document Control Number to 96759-113

Setup
Chap 8 Installation & Updated text in ci8200 Installation Checklist

Setup
Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
Section Sections
Revision
FRONT Rev Status Update publication date and Revision Status for 96661-118
Chap 2 Troubleshooting Document Control Number, change to 96726-110
Cable Locator Updated several Cable Locator table part numbers
Chap 8 Installation & Document Control Number, change to 96759-114

Setup
Processing Added new task Check Buffer Filter Connections to Processing Module Preparation table.
Module
Preparation
Processing Added new text to the Preparation task in the Processing Module Calibration table.
Module
Calibration
Processing Added new task Perform Maintenance Procedure 2180 Internal Decontamination to Processing
Module Module Verification table and corrected spelling in Perform 1045 Optics Verification task.
Verification
reserved.
FRONT Title Change Manual Revision Number to 96661-119
FRONT Title Change Front Matter Content Control Number to 96706-119
Card Cage Updated text to Bit 9 in Slot 14
Changed Bit 92 to 94 in Slot 12
Changed Bit 94 to Bit 92 in Slot 12
Chap 5 CLI Commands In Table 5-12: V1, DIO Bit Identifiers for Processing Module updated Bit #9
Command Locator In Table 5-12, added Bit #68 – RV Unload Solenoid Sensor
In Table 5-12, updated text to Bit #71
In Table 5-12, changed Bit #93 to Bit #94
In Table 5-12, changed Bit #94 to Bit #95
reserved.
Process Path Updated graphics 1A_9274a Page 1 of 4 and 1A_9274a Page 3 of 4.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-120) • © 2002, 2009 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, ci8200 are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. c4000, ci4100, i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
Block/Functional Diagrams Moved STAT Pipettor and STAT Pipettor Syringe to correct order in table.
STAT Pipettor Updated graphic 1A_9282a, Page 2 of 3.
reserved.
2.10 Cable Locator Corrected text in Harness Cable #17 from Card Cage to Power Suppl
Section Sections
Revision
FRONT Title Change Manual Revision Number to 96661-123.
FRONT Title Change Front Matter Content Control Number to 96706-123.

FRONT Proprietary Change Manual Revision Number to 204669-102.
Information

Chap 1 General Data Document Control Number, change to 96725-107.
Updated Biological Hazard area, Precaution with new text references about reporting incidents.
Updated Sodium Azide information in Chemical Hazards.

Chap 8 Installation & Document Control Number, change to 96759-115.
Setup
Updated the text in Install Right Side Cover to include new style cover and added graphic
3a_9360a, 6a_9206a, & 6a_9207a in Robotic Sample Handler (RSH) Installation on an i2000
System.
3a_9360a, 6a_9206a, & 6a_9207a in Robotic Sample Handler (RSH) Installation on a ci8200
System (Stand Alone i2000SR; Add on c8000).
3a_9360a, 6a_9206a, & 6a_9207a in Robotic Sample Handler (RSH) Installation on a ci8200
System (Add On i2000SR; Stand Alone c8000).
Section
Numbers

1.2 ARCHITECT Automatic Reconstitution Updated Buffer Quality Error Indicator in the ARCHITECT ARM Keypad
Module (ARM) Overview table, to correct and clarify reversed mix error.
Section
Numbers

Chap 8 Installation Document Control Number, change to 96759-116.
Robotic Sample Handler (RSH) Installation Updated text in Check Card Cage Cable Connections and replaced
on a c8000 System graphic 6a_9205a with 3a_9362a.

Updated Laser Caution Labels.
Added additional information to the sodium azide statement.

Chap 1 General Data Change Front Matter Content Control Number to 96706-127.
Replaced "hot surface" safety icon.

Chap 6 Planned Maintenance Change document control number from "96757-110" to "96757-111".
Replacing procedures and checklist with a link to ISA 117-020 (current version).

Chap 8 Installation & Setup Change document control number from "96759-116" to "96759-117".
Updates to installation procedures per ER283046 to add attention activators.
Added electric shock hazard symbol to SCC Installation Verification.
Section Sections
Revision

Chap 8 Installation & Change document control number from "96759-117" to "96759-118".
Setup
Add note to i2000SR, c8000, ci8200, i2000 SSH and i4000 SSH Installation Checklists to verify
module serial numbers (S/N) configured in the SCC with S/N on instruments.
Section Sections
Revision

Chap 8 Installation & Setup Change document control number from "96759-118" to "96759-119".
Add attention activator and (See note below) to SCC - Software Installation &
Configuration to i4000 SSH Installation.
General Data
1.1 How to Use This Manual
Links
Biological Hazards
Chemical Hazards
Electrical Safety
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Hazard Signal Words
Laser Safety
Overview
Safety Symbols&Classification
Overview
The purpose of this manual is to provide information useful for servicing the ARCHITECT system and is composed of the following
sections:
Section Topic
General Data This section contains a product overview, information on manual usage, accident prevention symbols, and
system specifications.
Troubleshooting This section contains reference and normal operation information for the system. The information includes
Reference block and functional diagrams, mechanism and motor listings, and LED operating conditions.
Parts Lists This section provides lists of Supplemental Tools and Supplies, Customer and Field Service replaceable parts
which are indexed by item number and description.
Removal & This section contains Removal & Replacement procedures which are indexed by number to the Parts Lists.
Replacement
Verification This section contains configuration, adjustment, calibration, checks, and test procedures used to setup or verify
Procedures instrument operation. Procedures are also used to assist in troubleshooting.
Planned This section contains preventative maintenance (PM) recommendation checklists. These recommendations
Maintenance may be subject to change due to local business or regulatory needs.
Pre-Site This section includes the site specifications and a checklist that outlines the activities of the Field Service
Interview & Engineer/ Representative (FSE/FSR). An open action item summary is included in the checklist.
Inspection
i 2000 SR This section outlines the activities required to install or relocate a system.
Installation
Hazard Signal Words

Introduction
Operation, maintenance and servicing of i 2000, i 2000 SR, c 8000, and RSH systems may expose individuals to potential safety
and health hazards. All work must be performed in accordance with procedures described in Abbott Operations or Service
Manuals. This section describes the types and locations of potential hazards that could cause physical harm to service personnel.
Warnings are inserted throughout this manual to alert service personnel to potential hazards. Standard warning conventions,
including hazard signal words (example, Danger) and symbols are described below.
Definitions
Hazard signal word definitions are described below.
Signal
Definition
Word
DANGER Denotes an immediate hazard which, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. This signal word
represents the highest level of any hazardous situation.
WARNING Denotes a hazard which could result in moderate to serious personal injury.
Caution Denotes potential hazards that could result in minor injury. Also used for conditions or activities that could interfere
with proper functioning or performance of the instrument.
Note Denotes operator or service information.
Safety Symbols & Classification
Safety hazard symbols are used in this manual and on instrument labels to identify potentially dangerous conditions or situations. In
this manual and on some instrument labels, text accompanies the safety symbol to describe the hazard. For other instrument
labels, the operator is to refer to the manual for specific information; therefore, users of the instrument must be familiar with the
following safety symbols:
Symbol
Symbol Classification Safety Recommendation
Description
Caution Identifies an The (specific instrument or part) weighs (in kilograms or pounds).
Lifting activity where Obtain assistance when moving and/or use appropriate lifting
Hazard it may be devices.
required to lift
or move a
heavy object.
Caution Identifies an Possible injury may result from allowing part of your body to enter a
Moving activity or range of mechanical movement during instrument operation. Keep
Parts area where all protective covers in place when instrument is running.
moving parts
are present.
WARNING Identifies an Wear safety glasses, chemical resistant gloves, and a lab coat
Chemical activity or an when handling the following solutions (Abbott cleaning solutions
Hazard area where and various reagents). These solutions may be potentially harmful.
hazardous Refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or package insert
chemicals are for specific safety information.
present.
WARNING Identifies an Fluids may be under pressure. Follow procedures and wear
Splash/ activity or an appropriate personal protective equipment.
Spray area that may
Hazard present a
physical or
chemical
hazard.
Caution Identifies an The operator must wear a ground strap while servicing the system.
Electrostatic activity or
Discharge area where
operator must
wear a
ground strap
while
servicing the
system
Note Identifies the The operator should clip the ground strap to the location identified
Card Cage location on by this symbol.
Ground the card cage
where the
ground strap
is clipped
WARNING Identifies an Consider all clinical specimens, reagents, controls, etc., that contain
Potential activity or human blood, or blood components and surfaces or components
Biohazard area where that have come into contact with human blood and the above
operators may materials as potentially infectious. Wear gloves, lab coats, and
be exposed to safety glasses, and follow other biosafety practices as specified in
potentially the OSHA Bloodborne Pathogen Rule (29 CFR Part 1910.1030) or
infectious other equivalent biosafety procedures.
substances
WARNING Identifies the Turn off the power to the instrument and disconnect the power cord
Electrical possibility of before replacing fuses, printed circuit boards, (etc.). Replace only
Shock electrical the fuses that are externally accessible and labeled. Only use
Hazard shock if replacement fuses of the specified type and electrical rating.
procedural or
engineering
controls are
not observed
WARNING Identifies the The probe and aspiration probe are sharp. Avoid contact with the
Probe possibility of tip of the probe and aspiration probe.
Stick puncture in
Hazard noted activity
or at posted
location
DANGER Identifies high Identifies high voltage areas. Alerts the user to the possibility of
High voltage areas electrical shock in noted activity or at posted location in the power
Voltage over 600 volts supply. Follow precautionary measures as outlined below in
"Electrical Safety" Section.
Caution Identifies an Allow the labelled part to cool for (10) minutes prior to servicing or
Hot Surface area where a replacement. Use temperature-resistant gloves, if necessary.
hot surface is
present
Caution Warns against Denotes low-power visible lasers or laser systems. Because of
Class 2 direct viewing normal human aversion response (blinking, eye movement, etc.),
Laser into the bar they do not normally present a hazard to the eye. However, like
Radiation code laser many conventional light sources, they may present some potential
beam or for hazard if viewed directly for extended periods of time.
reflections
from the Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
beam than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser light
exposure. Remove power from Bar Code reader prior to cleaning or
replacement.
The labeling of ARCHITECT reagents/calibrators/controls or liquid consumables may include one or more of the following hazard
symbols. The symbols are used to convey particular properties of the chemical or chemical mixture, and to notify you that
precautions should be taken when working with the material. Always consult the specific package insert or Material Safety Data
Sheet for further information.
Hazard Symbol Definition / Description (with Standard Abbreviation)
Indicates that the material has Oxidizing (O) properties.
Indicates that the material has Highly Flammable (F) or Extremely Flammable (F +) properties.
Indicates that the material has Toxic (T) or Very Toxic (T +) properties.
Indicates that the material has Harmful (Xn) or Irritant (Xi) properties.
Indicates that the material has Corrosive (C) properties.
Indicates that the material has Dangerous for the environment (N) properties.
Electrical Safety
The ARCHITECT i 2000 SR does not pose uncommon electrical hazards to Operators if it is installed and operated without
alteration, and is connected to a power source that meets required specifications. Refer to Electrical Specifications in Section 4,
Performance Characteristics and Specifications for details.
Basic electrical hazard awareness is essential to the safe operation of any system. Only qualified personnel should perform
electrical servicing. Elements of electrical safety include, but are not limited to the following:
Periodically inspect electrical cabling into and on the ARCHITECT i 2000 SR for signs of wear and damage.
Turn the instrument OFF before disconnecting the power cord and before cleaning, servicing, or performing maintenance on
any electrical or internal component.
In the event of a blown fuse or thrown circuit breaker, determine the cause and correct the problem before attempting to
resume operation of the equipment. Replace only the fuses that are externally accessible and labeled. Only use replacement
fuses of the specified type and electrical rating.
Assure the power to the instrument is turned OFF. A high voltage charge may remain on the power supply with the power
OFF. Use an electrically insulated tool to disconnect the power supply and short (both male pins) to the instrument chassis.
Keep liquids away from all connectors of electrical or communication components. Unplug the instrument before clean-up of
major liquid spills. Clean spilled fluids immediately.
Do not touch any switches or outlets with wet hands.
Keep the floor dry and clean under and around the ARCHITECT i 2000 SR.
Use only approved power cords and electrical accessories, such as those supplied with the instrument, to protect against
electric shock. Connect power cords only to properly grounded outlets.
It is recommended that a ground fault circuit interrupter be used when working in a wet environment.
Only qualified personnel should perform electrical servicing.
Mechanical Hazards
The ARCHITECT i 2000 SR is an automated system. As with most automated equipment, there is potential for injury and bodily
harm from moving mechanical components whenever the instrument is in operation. The ARCHITECT i 2000 SR minimizes
mechanical hazards by providing guards to protect against accidental contact with moving components, and encoding the software
with safety features.
The ARCHITECT i 2000 SR requires you to accurately position of all samples, reagents, calibrators, controls, and consumables
before executing any program. It is never acceptable to reach into the Analyzer's working area when the instrument is in an
operating mode. Should intervention be necessary during a run, the run should be interrupted according to instructions defined in
Operating Instructions.
Basic elements of mechanical equipment safety include but are not limited to:
Never bypass or override a safety device.

Keep all protective covers and barriers in place.
Never perform manual tasks on the work surface of the ARCHITECT i 2000 SR
Never allow any part of your body to enter a range of mechanical movement during System operation.
Do not wear articles of clothing or accessories that could catch on the ARCHITECT i 2000 SR.
Keep pockets free of items that could fall into the System.
Be especially cautious when performing adjustment, maintenance, cleaning, or repair procedures.
Use caution when loading sample carriers and reagents.
In the event of an instrument malfunction or an unexpected sequence of movements, be aware that unexpected Operator
reflex actions could occur and may cause injury.
Laser Safety
The laser classification scheme is used to describe the capability of the laser or laser system to cause injury to personnel. The
higher the classification number, the greater the potential hazard. The lasers on this instrument include Class 2 lasers.
During normal operation, the protective covers (and access door) are to remain in place to prevent laser light exposure. The
protective covers (and access door) are to be removed only during the servicing by qualified personnel. Do not remove the
protective cover laser warning labels. They must remain legible. The protective housing label (label on instrument) is shown below.
The label consists of black lettering against a yellow background.
Laser Caution Labels
Do not remove, damage or obliterate any of the laser warning labels. If any of the labels become damaged and/or illegible, replace
them.
On the c System, this label is affixed to the covers for the reagent supply centers (R1 and R2) and the sample carousel.
On the i System, this label is affixed to the cover for the reagent carousel.
On the RSH (retest sample handler), this label is affixed above the sample bar code reader under the priority bay cover.
On the c System, this label is affixed to the sidewall of the processing module, to the right of R1 (reagent supply center 1).
On the i System, this label is affixed to the underside of the rear processing center cover.
Biological Hazards
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
The following activities may involve the presence of biological materials:
Handling samples, reagents, calibrators, and controls

Cleaning spills
Handling and disposing of waste
Moving the System
Performing maintenance procedures
Performing decontamination procedures
Performing component replacement procedures
Precautions
Consider all clinical specimens, reagents, controls, and calibrators that contain human sourced material and instrument surfaces or
components that have come in contact with human sourced material as potentially infectious. No known test method can offer
complete assurance that products derived from human sourced material or instrument components exposed to human sourced
material will not transmit infection. Therefore, all products derived from human sourced materials and instrument components
exposed to human sourced material should be considered potentially infectious. It is recommended that all potentially infectious
materials be handled in accordance with the OSHA Standard on Bloodborne Pathogens. Biosafety Level 2 or other appropriate
biosafety practices should be used for materials that contain or are suspected of containing infectious agents.
Precautions include, but are not limited to the following:
Wear gloves, lab coats, and protective eye wear when handling human sourced material or contaminated instrument
components.
Do not pipet by mouth.
Do not eat, drink, smoke, apply cosmetics, or handle contact lenses when handling human sourced material or contaminated
instrument components.
Clean spills of potentially infectious materials and contaminated instrument components with detergent followed by an
appropriate disinfectant such as 0.1% sodium hypochlorite or other suitable disinfectant.
Decontaminate and dispose of all specimens, reagents, and other potentially contaminated materials in accordance with
local, state, and federal regulations.
Note
Refer to EHS Policies/Guidance BioSafety.
If you are exposed to biohazardous or potentially infectious materials you should seek medical attention immediately and take the
following steps to cleanse the affected area:
Eyes-rinse with water for 15 minutes.

Mouth-rinse with water.
Skin-wash the affected area with soap and water.
Skin puncture or cut- wash with soap and water and allow to bleed freely.
Note
Report all accidents to your Manager and Workers' Compensation Administrator. For additional information see:
GCO EHS Incident Reporting and
Incident Investigation Report Instructions & Form.
Spill Clean-up
Clean spills in accordance with established biosafety practices. In general, safe work practices for cleaning spills include:
1. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment.
2. Absorb the spill with absorbent material.
3. Wipe the spill area with detergent solution.
4. Wipe the area with an appropriate disinfectant such as a 0.1% sodium hypochlorite (10% solution of chlorine bleach
containing at least 5% sodium hypochlorite).
5. Dispose of spilled and contaminated material in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations.
Instrument or Part Decontamination
Anyone handling or decontaminating spare parts for shipping or repair must take safety precautions as described in this document.
Any part subject to user handling, for instance; keyboards, printers, monitors, disk drives, front panels, etc. requires
decontamination prior to servicing or shipment. Perform the following steps (as needed).
Always wear appropriate personal protective equipment (protective eye wear, gloves, lab coat) while performing decontamination
activities.
1. Cycle (0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution) through the fluid pathway (including probe) that contacted the human sourced
material or products containing blood. Allow to set for a minimum of 10 minutes.
2. Cycle water or buffer through the system to rinse affected components.
3. Remove any liquid material from the instrument.
4. Rinse waste containers with 0.1% sodium hypochlorite solution or other suitable disinfectants prior to shipping or disposal.
5. Wipe down the surface of each instrument with a detergent solution followed by an appropriate disinfectant such as 0. 1%
sodium hypochlorite.
Note
Under normal circumstances, printed circuit boards do not require decontamination. Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
enclosed inside the skins of computer and peripheral equipment are not considered to be contaminated.
Decontamination may affect the performance of a printed circuit board or internal computer component.
Waste Handling and Disposal
Dispose of the following materials in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations:
Clinical specimens
Reagents
Controls
Calibrators
ARCHITECT liquid consumables
Other consumables that may be contaminated.
It is the responsibility of each facility to label all waste containers and to characterize its waste stream to ensure the waste is
disposed of in accordance with the appropriate waste disposal regulations.
Dispose of sharps in an appropriately labeled, puncture-resistant, and leakproof container before treatment and disposal.
Chemical Hazards
You may be exposed to hazardous chemicals when handling reagents, calibrators, controls, or liquid consumables. Exposure to
hazardous chemicals is minimized by following instructions provided in the assay-specific Package Inserts and Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS). Exposure levels are further reduced by the design features of the instrument when it is used properly.
Precautions
In general, observe the following precautions when handling chemicals:
Consult Material Safety Data Sheets for safe use instructions and precautions.
Avoid contact with skin and eyes. If contact with material is anticipated, wear impervious gloves and protective eyewear and
clothing.
Always maintain good housekeeping. Do not eat, drink, or store food and beverages in areas where chemicals are used.
If irritation or signs of toxicity occur after exposure, seek medical attention.
Hazard symbols that appear on ARCHITECT product labeling are accompanied by Risk (R) and Safety (S) numbers and represent
specific risk and safety phrases as defined by European Community Directives. The risk and safety phrases describe precautions to
be used when working with a particular chemical or chemical mixture. For all (R) and (S) numbers that appear on product labeling,
refer to the corresponding phrases indicated in the Package Insert or similar document.
Sodium Azide
Some products contain sodium azide. Observe the following precautions when using products that contain sodium azide:
Do not mix any chemical or product with a pH below 6 with solutions or residues that contain sodium azide (such as wash
buffer). Sodium azide releases hydrazoic acid, a very toxic and pungent-smelling gas when the pH is lower than 6.
Caution
The pre-trigger solution has a pH lower than 6. Allowing the pre-trigger solution to contact wash buffer or dried wash
buffer residue may result in the release of hydrazoic acid, a very toxic and pungent-smelling gas. Care must be taken
to clean up any spills or residue that may have occurred due to leaking components (ex. pumps in the pump bay)
identified during servicing of the instrument.
Flush drains thoroughly with water several times a day to prevent potentially explosive metal azides from forming on lead,
copper or brass components or on solder in laboratory plumbing if product and/or instrument waste is released to a drain.
Detailed information about azides in laboratory drains is available in Current Intelligence Bulletin No. 13 Explosive Azide
Hazard (August 16, 1976), a publication issued by the U.S. National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), at
cdc.gov/niosh.
A copy of the bulletin is also available on the Abbott Diagnostics Global internet site at abbottdiagnostics.com (select the
International region), under Support - Technical Library - Other Reference Documents, or by contacting your Abbott
representative.
Sodium Hydroxide
The ARCHITECT Trigger Solution contains Sodium Hydroxide, refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet for additional information.
Physical Hazards
Sharps and Probes
The probes are sharp and potentially contaminated with infectious materials. Avoid contact and handle cautiously to prevent injury.
Never reach into the instrument while it is in operation.
In general, use of sharps and glassware should be minimized. Use mechanical means to remove contaminated broken glassware.
Dispose of sharps in an appropriately marked, puncture-resistant, and leakproof container before treatment and disposal.
Heavy Objects
The system is heavy and has unsupported sections of the shell. Ensure that you have adequate help before attempting to move the
system.
Push only on solid sections of the housing; do not exert pressure on unsupported sections of the shell.
Use proper lifting techniques when moving the ARCHITECT i 2000 SR.
Exposure to Hot Objects

The buffer heaters may be hot. Before touching the hot surfaces, wait at least five minutes after turning the power OFF to allow for
cooling.
Use temperature-resistant gloves, if necessary.
Trip Hazard
The ARCHITECT i 2000 SR is equipped with a power cord and various computer connectors. To avoid a tripping hazard, ensure
cords in high traffic areas are properly stowed.
Many of the electronic components on the ARCHITECT system circuit boards are susceptible to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Static discharge of as little as 100 - 200 volts can damage or destroy a component. To put that in perspective, depending on the
floor covering, relative humidity and other factors, walking across a floor generates between 250 - 35,000 electrostatic volts in that
person. Attempts to ground oneself and remove the static charge by grasping the instrument chassis provides only momentary
resolution. Movement of arms, etc. again causes a static voltage potential.
Note
This symbol is placed on the card cage to identify the appropriate ground location.
Static Hazard
Static protective procedures are used during the manufacture of PC boards. Replacement PC board assemblies are also protected
by use of static protective packaging as well as boxed to prevent physical damage. Assemblies that have failed and are returned
for repair are also handled at the repair shop under static protection procedures.
Handling Guidelines - PC Subassemblies
These guidelines assure protection against failures created by static.
Retain spare PC board subassemblies in the static-protective bags.

Use an approved static-protective field service kit, or the ground strap shipped with the board, whenever a board is removed
from an instrument or protective bag.
Replace the defective PC board in the same protective bag to return for repair.
Continued use of the protective shipping boxes, both during shipping and storage, eliminates most failures caused by physical
damage.
Static Protective Service Kit
The static protective service kit is designed to keep the FSE/FSR, replacement part, work surface, and instrument at the same
ground level. Generally, an instruction set accompanies the kit, however, in the absence of specific instructions, follow ESD
Procedure.
Kit Parts
Static protective work surface
Wrist strap and attaching cable

Grounding clip or cable
ESD Procedure
Note
Use where ESD symbol is present and static protective equipment is not shipped with replacement part.
1. Place the work mat on a solid surface close to the instrument. Allow the ground strap to reach the instrument.
2. Attach the ground clip to the instrument chassis.
3. Attach the other end of the ground clip cable and the connector from the wrist strap to the work mat. (Exception: Some wrist
strap cables provide a clip to connect to the same ground source as the mat cable).
4. Attach wrist strap to your wrist, make sure the metallic button on the inside of the wrist strap is in direct contact with your
skin.
5. Place PC boards, removed from the instrument, on the work mat.
6. Replacement PC boards should be placed on the work mat before removing from the protective bag and remain on the mat
until installation.
7. Defective PC boards should be replaced in the static-protective bag before removal from the work mat area.
i2000/i2000SR Module Overview
Links
CMIA Optics
Fluidics and Vacuum
Immunoassay Processing Module
Liquid Level Sense and Pressure Monitoring
Power Distribution and Logic
Reagents - CMIA Technology
Reagent Management
Reaction Vessel (RV) Loader
Temperature and Wash Aspirate Monitoring
CMIA Optics
Overview
The ARCHITECT i System uses Chemiluminescent Microparticle Immunoassay (CMIA) Optics system consisting of three principle
assemblies which include the CMIA reader, the shutter assembly and the reader magnet assembly. The ARCHITECT i System
uses chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay technology to determine the presence of antigens, antibodies and analytes in
samples. A chemiluminescent reaction occurs through the use of paramagnetic microparticles coated with a capture molecule,
acridinium labeled conjugate, Pre-Trigger and Trigger solutions.
Hardware Description
The following main hardware components are used in the CMIA optics:
CMIA Reader Assembly

CMIA Optics Board
Controller Board
Indexer Board
Motor Driver Board
Reader Magnet
Shutter Assembly
CMIA Reader Assembly
The CMIA reader detects the luminescent emission from the reaction vessel and outputs data corresponding to the quantity of
emission detected.
Includes:
Photo multiplier tube

Light pipe
Shutter Assembly
The Shutter Assembly is required to block external light to the CMIA Reader during an optical read. When the shutter is open, the
reaction vessels are free to move in the process path. Once the shutter is activated (closed), the only entrance to this chamber is
the Trigger nozzle.
Includes:
Shutter
Motor
Sensor Board
Reader Magnet
During the CMIA read cycle, the magnetic microparticles contained in the reaction mixture are attracted to a wall of the reaction
vessel by means of the reader magnet.
Functional Description
Normal Read Process
The following is a sequence of events for a normal read process:
1. The RV to be processed is positioned at the read station.

2. The shutter closes to block out external light from the RV.
3. The high voltage to the PMT is turned on.
4. A background read is taken and the data is transferred to the CPU.
5. A foreground activated read is taken and the Trigger solution is dispensed into the reaction vessel. This initiates the
chemiluminescent reaction that results in the emission of photons of light.
6. The light pipe directs the emitted light to the PMT, which is in the CMIA optics.
7. The CMIA reader takes the activated read by collecting the emitted photons of light and converting them to counts. The PMT
output signal is interfaced through the CMIA optics board. The count data is transferred to the module controller. The count
data is used to calculate the relative light unit (RLU).
8. The high voltage to the PMT is turned off.
9. After a specified delay has occurred, a command to open the shutter assembly is generated by the module controller.
10. The next reaction vessel is indexed by the process path into the read position.
Fluidics and Vacuum
Overview
The fluidics system consists of two sub-systems, which are the liquid system and the vacuum system. Through the aspiration
process, the liquid system moves sample from sample containers and assay reagents from reagent bottles. These fluids are then
dispensed into reaction vessels. The liquid system also involves dispensing wash buffer for priming and flushing. Trigger and Pre-
Trigger solutions are also dispensed into a reaction vessel. Pipettor robotics positions the probe to the appropriate reaction vessel
for the aspiration and dispense process. Fluids are aspirated through the probe by a syringe and then dispensed in the same
manner by reversing the direction of the syringe plunger travel.
The vacuum system supplies vacuum to the instrument for the CMIA wash process to extract wash fluid waste from the system.
Vacuum is also supplied to the sample and reagent probe wash stations to remove waste from the wash cups. Vacuum is used to
aspirate liquid from the reaction vessel. The vacuum system is also designed to provide drainage for the instruments liquid waste.
The following main hardware components are used in fluidics and vacuum.
Pipettor Probes
Active wash cups
Passive wash cups
Wash zone assemblies
Syringe assemblies
Pumps
Waste aspirate arm with probe
Pre-Trigger/Trigger manifold assembly
Liquid waste manifold assembly
Buffer transfer pump assembly
Buffer transfer flow sensor
Vacuum accumulator assembly
Vacuum vessel assemblies
Vacuum pump with filter
Liquid waste pump
Reagent Pipettor Probes (R1 and R2)
The R1 and R2 pipettor probes, together with syringes and valves, are used to aspirate reagents from the reagent bottles and
dispense into a reaction vessel. The R1 and R2 probes are washed with wash buffer solution in the active wash cups.
Sample Pipettor Probe
The sample pipettor probe is used to aspirate sample from a sample container for dispense into a reaction vessel. The sample
pipettor probe is washed with wash buffer solution in a passive wash cup. For some assay protocols, the sample pipettor may also
be used to aspirate sample from one reaction vessel to another reaction vessel.
STAT Pipettor Probe
The STAT pipettor probe is used to aspirate sample from a sample container for dispense into a reaction vessel. The STAT
pipettor probe is washed with wash buffer solution in a passive wash cup.
Wash Zones
The two wash zones consist of a manifold with dispense nozzles and valves and wash aspirate probes. The wash zones are used
to dispense wash buffer into reaction vessels and to aspirate liquid from reaction vessels.
Waste Aspirate Probe
The waste aspirate probe is used to aspirate liquid from a reaction vessel prior to discarding into the solid waste.
Vacuum System
The vacuum system consists of the vacuum accumulator assembly, vacuum vessel assemblies and the vacuum pump with filter.
The vacuum system is used to supply vacuum to the active wash cups, wash zone aspirate probes and waste aspirate probe.
Vacuum is needed for removing liquid waste and is supplied utilizing a vacuum reservoir. Solenoid valves are opened, allowing the
vacuum to suction liquid from the reaction vessel. The liquid is drawn into a liquid separation vessel where it is held until the
vacuum cycle is complete. When the vacuum cycle is done, the solenoid valve closes and the liquid drains into the laboratory drain
or liquid waste reservoir.
Liquid Waste
The liquid waste is distributed to a wash manifold, which can be connected to an external liquid waste floor drain, waste 50 µL
pump, or container. If the liquid waste is saturated or blocked, the liquid is distributed to the solid waste container.
Syringes
The syringes are used to accurately aspirate and dispense liquid volumes by means of positive displacement of a plunger within a
barrel.
The sample/reagent probes are used to aspirate, contain and dispense samples, reagents, and wash fluid. The probes move these
fluids from sample containers and reagent bottles into reaction vessels on the process path. Reagent pipettor calibration properly
aligns reagent carousel positions with reagent pipettor access points, to achieve unobstructed access to all reagent positions.
There are two types of wash stations, passive and active. The passive wash stations are used by the sample and STAT pipettors
and provide tip washing only. The active wash stations are used by the reagent pipettors and provide full probe wash. Active wash
stations include vacuum drying capability and active external probe washing.
Aspiration and Dispense Process
1. The first action is to move the probe to the proper aspirate location and move down to the Liquid Level Sense (LLS)
position.
2. The probe continues downward Z motion until fluid contact.
3. At fluid contact, a fluid LLS sense signal is generated and the Z motion is halted.
4. The Z motion steps the probe into fluid and keeps the probe in fluid during the aspiration process.
5. The syringe begins the aspiration process until the volume is reached.
Note
During the aspiration, fluid contact is monitored by the LLS signal.
6. The robot then moves the probe from the aspiration well to the dispense well.
7. The probe is driven down in Z to the dispense height location.
8. The dispense process begins or continues.
9. When the dispense is completed (the syringe motor stopped), the robot moves the probe to the wash station.
10. The sample and STAT pipettors employ a passive wash and the reagent pipettors employ an active wash.
11. Once the washing process is complete, the probe is raised to the Z-clear height (Idle position).
12. The aspiration/dispense process is complete.
Immunoassay Processing Module
Processing Module Overview
The ARCHITECT System has two types of immunoassay processing modules, the i 2000 SR system and the i 2000 system. The
systems are similar, with the main difference being the i 2000 SR system offers STAT capabilities. The modules can be assembled
in several different configurations. A processing module can stand alone or in combination with other modules to create a multi-
module immunoassay system. An ARCHITECT i System module can also be combined with a clinical chemistry processing module
to create an integrated system (ci8200 system), that performs both immunoassay and chemistry tests from the same sample
container.
i 2000 i 2000 SR
Bar code readers are used for sample carrier identification, position identification and sample identification. The lasers located
within the bar code readers are Class I and Class II lasers.
The processing module can hold up to 25 reagents of any combination. Reagents are stored onboard at 2-8° C to prevent reagent
deterioration. This permits reagents to be used immediately after removal from a refrigerator. Reagents can be stored on board the
instrument for a total of 30 days, before they must be discarded. Reagents are also stored at 2-8° C prior to use on the module.
The processing module has a throughput of up to 200 tests per hour if running in the normal mode. If a system is running in the
STAT mode, the throughput is up to 100 tests per hour. The processing module provides onboard capacity for disposables and
consumables sufficient for a five hour run.
i 2000/i 2000 SR Process Area
Assay processing takes place in the process path, a covered circular track that provides proper incubation temperatures, liquid
dispense/aspiration points, and wash points as necessary for the supported assay protocols. The process path advances a reaction
vessel (RV) every 18 seconds and positions it at the designated positions according to the assay protocol, in order to execute the
CMIA reaction. The following components work with the process path to execute the CMIA reaction: the RV loader, pipettors,
mixers, wash zones, diverters, Pre-Trigger/Trigger manifold, RV unloader, waste arm and process path motor.
The ARCHITECT i System uses chemiluninescence detection technology with supported assay protocols. There are four different
assay protocols on the ARCHITECT i System module: one-step, two-step, pre-treatment and for the i 2000 SR STAT. All four
protocols are similar in that a sample is combined with microparticles, conjugate, Trigger solution and Pre-Trigger solution at
various times while moving around the path. Individual samples are incubated, mixed and washed at various points along the
process path during the chemiluminescence reaction. Reaction completion produces an activated read. Differences in the protocols
are in the number of wash cycles, incubation times, and testing time.
Calibrators, controls, priority patient samples, and routine patient samples are loaded onto a sample handler module that is coupled
to the processing module. The sample handler is a transport system that presents samples to the processing module for aspiration.
Liquid Level Sense and Pressure Monitoring
Overview
The Liquid Level sense (LLS) board enables the system's pipettors to detect fluid and monitor the quality of an aspiration by using
features that detect signals transmitted from the probe and monitoring the pressure in the fluid lines during aspiration. There is a
separate LLS board in the upper card cage for each pipettor. The board for the Sample Pipettor is located in upper slot #10,
reagent #1 in upper slot #8, and reagent #2 in upper slot #6. For the i2000SR system, the board for the STAT pipettor is located
in upper slot #4.
During aspirations, the LLS board sends commands to stop the Z motion of the pipettor when fluid is detected. The detection
system is comprised of conductive probes, low frequency data acquisition circuit boards, cables, and amplified antennas. The LLS
board develops a frequency that is routed to and transmitted from the pipettor probe and is received by amplified antennas that are
placed in aspiration locations. The LLS circuit has three detection modes of operation
LLS mode with Z stop (normal operation)

LLS mode with theta stop (Theta Train operation)
Ground Mode with Z and theta stop (ground feature train operation).
The LLS also has a sample delay mode (used for LLS training) and a diagnostic mode.
Normal Aspiration Mode
During normal aspiration operations, the robotics positions the probe over a vessel of fluid. As the pipettor lowers the probe, the
frequency transmitted from the probe is received by the antenna. When the probe contacts fluid the signal received by the antenna
increases abruptly and the change in amplitude and rate of change are then analyzed to determine if fluid has been contacted.
Once fluid is contacted, the downward movement (Z axis) of the pipettor stops. The pipettor then moves down and through fluid
surface to the desired in-depth. During aspiration, as the syringe draws fluid from the vessel, the pipettor Z axis moves the probe
down to keep the probe at the desired in-depth. During this mode, the LLS system also monitors for error conditions such as lost
LLS during aspiration, board failures or Z "probe crash" limit actuation. If the probe contacts a solid object, the movement of the
probe is detected by the Z Limit optical sensor board located at the end of arm. To reduce any interaction between simultaneous
pipettor LLS operations, the reagent 1, reagent 2 and sample probes transmit at different frequencies. On the i2000SR system, the
sample pipettor and the STAT pipettor never operate at the same time, therefore, they both transmit at the same frequency.
Probe Calibration
The LLS hardware is designed to require no mechanical adjustments. During probe calibration/training, the LLS system utilizes the
Theta Train mode. In this mode, the probe is moved near fixed markers (calibration targets) located on the process path, wash
stations and reagent carousels. The probe is lowered and steps toward the target by moving theta left/right direction. The targets
located on the wash cups, process path, and reagent carousels are grounded. If the probe touches one of these targets, the
contact shorts transmission signal and the target is detected. Targets that are located in sample carriers and reagent carousels are
detected by a signal increase (same as normal aspiration mode).
After detecting each target, mechanical offsets are saved in a system file. These system file parameters are loaded during system
initialization and assure that the pipettor is calibrated to the system.
Pressure Monitoring
The Pressure Monitoring (PM) system provides a level of confidence that fluid aspirations performed by the pipetting system are
without error. The system is comprised of pressure transducers (PT), pressure monitor boards, and cables. These measurements
are accomplished by placing a PT in the fluid line between the syringe and probe. Pressure Monitoring is used to detect clogged
probes, aspiration of air and foam, and other aspiration abnormalities. The pressure response is measured and analyzed during
aspiration. The Pressure Monitoring system used in the i2000SR detects clots and other aspiration errors on pipettors. The
Architect i System incorporates a pressure sensor to monitor the residual pressure in the working fluid after the aspiration is
complete. The results are used in an algorithm to detect clots or probe blockage. This system also provides an estimate of the
integrity of the aspirate operation. When aspiration anomalies are discovered, the associated sample result is suppressed.
Principles of Operation for the Pressure Monitor
The syringe component of the pipettor assures sample transport precision by employing the principle of positive displacement. The
volume aspirated remains accurate as long as the working fluid and the sample are homogeneous and non compressible. To
maintain this accuracy, introduction of elastic fluids must be avoided. Air, in particular, is a highly elastic fluid and will displace
sample fluid if present, decreasing the aspirate volume and degrading volumetric precision. The PM subsystem measures sample
volume integrity by detecting potential fluid flow inconsistencies, including the presence of air and clots. The subsystem performs its
check by measuring and analyzing the pressure profile signature of an unknown aspiration and comparing it to that of known good
aspiration under the same conditions. Minor dissimilarities are permitted, but when an upper threshold is exceeded, the aspiration
quality check fails.
The pressure monitor algorithm calculates three (four when using the enhanced PM/LLS board on a sample pipettor) indices
(called "scores") that provide information about the progress and quality of the aspiration process. Each score provides insight into
a different aspect of the aspiration success or failure. By thresholding each index, normal profiles can be distinguished from those
that are at risk for inaccurate volumetric recovery. The four indices calculated are:
Clot_Score - the degree of probe blockage as measured by residual vacuum pressure after the syringe has come to rest.
PSI_Discord - measures the sufficiency of the vacuum pressure developed by the syringe in support of aspirating the
requested fluid volume.
Shape_Score - the degree of pressure variation experienced by the sample during the syringe movement.
Slope_Score - (also called PM_Slope) a 9 point check of the pressure slope (sample pipettor only) that determines if a
sample has been aspirated cleanly. This last parameter is only checked with the enhanced PM/LLS board.
PM Scores are generated for every aspiration and must meet all pass/fail criteria before an associated assay result is reported.
Clot Detection (Clot_Score)
A typical pressure profile begins and ends at ambient pressure; however, when a clot is drawn into the pipette probe, a partial clog
is formed, preventing timely release of pressure back to ambient at the end of the syringe motion. A clot or other probe clog is
detected by comparing the pressure immediately before the syringe movement to afterwards. When the difference between them
exceeds a predetermined threshold, as aspiration fault is asserted.
Air-Only Aspiration Detection (PSI_Discord)
If the syringe motion begins and ends without any fluid entering the probe tip, the vacuum pressure produced will be far less than
that which is expected for a normal aspirate. Air-Only aspirations are detected by comparing the average pressure through the
duration of the aspirate to similar readings taken when aspirating air-only at the same volume. If the developed pressure is near
that of air, an aspiration fault is asserted.
Foam and Partial Aspirate Detection (Shape_Score)
Normal aspirate profiles exhibit a constant pressure while the syringe speed remains constant. Abnormalities in the pressure are
indicative that the fluid being aspirated is elastic (air) or non-homogeneous (particulate matter). This can be due to contamination,
aspiration of foam or soft clots, or loss of fluid contact with the probe part-way through the aspiration. These abnormalities are
usually associated with volumetric imprecision. Aspirate faults due to foam & partial aspiration are detected by checking for abrupt
pressure changes during a time when only low variations are expected. A metric of this characteristic is calculated, and if it
exceeds a threshold, an aspiration fault is asserted.
Aspiration Error (Slope_Score)
Note
Only used with the sample pipettor and the enhanced PM/LLS board.
The same data points used to calculate the Shape_Score are used to calculate the Slope_Score. Any abnormalities that occur
during the constant syringe sped portion of the aspiration event which cause the pressure to consistently increase (positive slope)
or decrease (negative slope) beyond a threshold will result in the assertion of an aspiration fault.
The following main hardware components are used in LLS and PM:
Liquid Level Sense Board

Receiver antennas
Conductive probes
Transmitter cable
Z Limit Board
Pressure monitors
Pressure monitor board
Pressure monitor cable
LLS/PM Hardware
The following hardware is used for LLS/PM functions:
The Liquid Level Sense Board is used in both LLS and PM functions. There is one board per pipettor and they are located
in the card cage
LLS Hardware
The following hardware is used for LLS functions:
Receiver antennas are used in LLS functions. There are five antennas on the i2000 system and six antennas for the
i2000SR. They are located at aspiration locations. The receiver antenna features low noise high bandwidth amplifiers and
coaxial cable connections.
There is one conductive probe per pipettor and it is located on each pipettor.
There is one transmitter cable per probe and it connects the conductive probe to the Liquid Level Sense Board.
There is one Z Limit Board per pipettor. They are located on the underside of each pipettor boom arm.
PM Hardware
The following hardware is used for PM functions:
A pressure monitor is a clear plastic flow-through design transducer with pressure limits of -200 to +200 psi. There is one
transducer per pipettor and they are connected inline with the pipettor tubing between the syringe and the probe.
Pressure monitor board - one board per pipettor, located on the structure near each pipettor
Pressure monitor cable - one cable per pressure monitor, connecting the pressure monitor board to the Liquid Level Sense
Board
LLS Antenna and PM Board Locations
LLS antennas are located at the aspiration points. Antennas for the sample pipettor are positioned at process path position 1,
process path position 24, and at the processing queue sample position. The antenna for the STAT pipettor is positioned at the
processing queue STAT position. The antenna for the R1 pipettor is located under each of the three reagent carousel rings at
process path position 2. The antenna for the R2 pipettor is located under each of the three reagent carousel rings at process path
position 48.
Pressure monitoring boards are mounted on the processing module structure near each pipettor.
LLS and PM Block Diagram
Note
This graphic is repeated for each LLS and Pressure Monitoring Board. Arrows represent the direction of data flow.
LLS Functional Description
The diagram below shows the design of the LLS analog transmit and receive design.
A signal is transmitted from the pipettor probe at a specific frequency. Because the Liquid Level Sense Board is identical for each
pipettor, the board must be told which pipettor it is servicing. When a Liquid Level Sense Board is inserted into the card cage, the
card cage design determines the address of the board through encoding three bits, and also sets the proper operating frequency
for the pipettor. The frequency selection is performed by the Field-Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA) located on the board. The
FPGA outputs the correct frequency 50% duty cycle TTL signal to the low pass filter. The low pass filter strips the higher order
harmonics from the TTL signal and the resulting signal is an approximate sine wave at the correct frequency. The signal is fed to
the variable gain transmit amplifier and also to a multiplier circuit. This variable gain transmit amplifier is controlled via software.
The output signal from the transmit amplifier is connected to the pipettor probe.
When the probe contacts a conductive fluid, the signal received by the antenna increases which results in an increase in the
output signal from the antenna. The output is fed to a variable gain receive amplifier, controlled by software. The output from the
amplifier is fed to the multiplier circuit that modifies the signal. The output signal of the multiplier when viewed on an oscilloscope is
the combination of a DC offset and a signal that is two times the frequency of the transmit signal. The low pass filter removes the
two times the frequency of the transmit signal component. This filtered output is then input to an A/D converter where it is digitized.
The digital signal is then fed into the Digital Signal Processor (DSP).
The difference between the previous reading and the current reading is calculated by the DSP and then compared to a threshold
value determined by software. The DSP waits for a set number of consecutive readings to discriminate between a good fluid sense
and a random event. When a good fluid sense is detected, an interrupt is sent to the appropriate motor indexer board to stop Z
axis motion for the pipettor.
Each type of fluid vessel has a minimum volume at which the LLS system is able to detect fluid.
Vessel Minimum Volume
Sample Tube 100 µL
Sample Cup 50 µL
Reaction Vessel 50 µL
Conjugate Bottle 0.770 mL
Microparticle Bottle 1.5 mL
Assay Specific Diluent Bottle 5 mL
If fluid is not detected by an expected minimum point set by the Z Limit Board, an interrupt is sent to the appropriate motor indexer
board in order to prevent a probe crash.
No special handling is performed by the LLS system during dispense operations.
LLS measurements are saved in an LLS log file on each processing module for use in troubleshooting if needed. For each pipettor,
the number of steps at which liquid was found is recorded in the log, along with the number of steps at which fluid contact was
broken or if liquid was never found.
PM Functional Description
The Pressure Monitoring system measures and analyzes the pressure response during aspiration in order to detect and
communicate aspiration errors. The pressure measurements are obtained by placing a pressure monitor in the fluid line between
the syringe and the probe. The pressure monitor board is used to condition and digitize the signal from the pressure monitor. The
digital signal is then sent to the appropriate Liquid Level Sense Board for analysis.
Error Handling
LEDs are used to display LLS status information on the Liquid Level Sense Board. Refer to LEDs for a completion description of
LEDs.
Power Distribution and Logic
Overview
The power system consists of the AC supply, the DC supply, and the heater drivers. The power supply receives external high-line
AC and routes the AC current through the combined power switch and circuit breaker to an Electromechanical Interference (EMI)
filter. Jumpers are used prior to system installation to set the incoming voltage and frequency. Power is then distributed from the
EMI filter to the AC and DC subsystems. The AC subsystem provides power and isolation to the refrigeration system, the vacuum
pump system, and heating system. The DC subsystem provides power to fans, stepper motors, valves, and other electronic
components. Five different DC voltages are provided by the DC subsystem.
Power System Hardware
Main Power Supply

Card Cage
Main Power Supply Functional Areas
Function Area
Power Entry, EMI Filter, Control & Monitor
Isolation Transformer
AC Subsystem
Heater Board 27 VAC
PFC Converter Boards
+36 VDC Module Boards
+36 VDC Sample Handler Board

DC Subsystem
Quad Output Board +5 VDC
+12 VDC
-12 VDC
+24 VDC
Fans
Power System Monitor & Control Input/Output Signals to Card Cage Backplane
Incoming AC power can be set at 200 VAC, 208 VAC, 220 VAC, 230 VAC, or 240 VAC. Additionally, the frequency of the incoming
power can be set at 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The incoming power is routed through the combined power switch and 30 Amp circuit breaker
to an EMI filter. The filter is used to prevent noise and switching transient signals generated by the power supply from passing into
the AC mains and vice versa. The output from the EMI filter is then distributed within the power supply.
AC Subsystem
An isolation transformer provides electrical isolation for the four AC loads within the system. Four AC loads are distributed to other
subsystems. The AC subsystem has over current protection as well as over temperature and over and under voltage monitors.
Load Voltage Over Current Protection Maximum Load
Reagent Cooler 230 VDC @ 60 Hz OR 200 VDC @ 50 Hz 7.5 Amp Circuit Breaker 750 W
Vacuum Pump 230 VDC @ 60 Hz OR 200 VDC @ 50 Hz 2.5 Amp Circuit Breaker 140 W
Heaters 27 VDC Fuse 725 W
The reagent cooler power is supplied to the reagent cooler through a relay located on the main power supply and a power cord.
The vacuum pump power is supplied through a relay and a power cord. The heater voltage is supplied to the six process path
heaters through cabling directly to the heaters.
DC Subsystem
Power factor correction (PFC) converters are used to convert from AC power to DC power. These PFC converters supply high
voltage DC for the DC-DC converters and also maintain the power factor at a nominal 0.99. Five different DC voltage levels are
provided to the system. The quality of the DC voltage being supplied is monitored by the system.
Load Voltage (VDC) Tolerance (VDC) Power (Amps) Source
+5 + 0.05 33 Quad Output Board
+12 + 0.12 4 Quad Output Board

Card Cage Backplane - Logic Boards
-12 + 0.12 3 Quad Output Board
Cooling Fans +24 + 0.24 2.25 Quad Output Board
Card Cage Backplane - Power Boards +36 + 0.36 40 +36 VDC Boards
The power for the logic boards is supplied through the card cage backplane, which has additional fuses for protection for the
various DC loads. The power for the power boards is also supplied through the card cage backplane, which has additional fuses
for protection for the various DC loads. The power for the cooling fans is supplied through direct wiring to the cooling fans.
Error Handling
The power supply verifies proper function through monitoring several signals. The following four signals are monitored for error
conditions by the module controller: AC Power Fail, Over-temperature, Under-voltage, and Over-voltage. The AC Power Fail signal
indicates that AC power is insufficient to maintain regulation of DC outputs. The Over-temperature signal indicates excessive AC-
DC converter temperatures. The Under-voltage signal indicates under-voltage conditions while the Over-voltage signal indicates
over-voltage conditions. If any of the conditions are detected for a period of 30-40 ms, the power supply is shut down.
Test points are provided on the power supply for each DC voltage for diagnostic purposes.
LEDs display voltage status information on the Power Supply. Refer to LEDs for a completion description of LEDs.
Card Cage - Boards
Refer to Card Cage Slot Location for a complete list of card cage slots and boards that populate them.
Card Cage - I/O Signals Distribution
The card cage I/O signals are routed from the backplane via cables throughout the system. There are cables connecting to stepper
motors, DC motors, solenoids, sensor boards, LLS/PM interface boards, CMIA Optics, thermistors, BCR Power T board (barcode
readers interface board) and ethernet connection to SCC. In addition, two debug ports (serial RS232 ports) are available at the
front of the card cage.
Reagents - CMIA Technology
Paramagnetic Microparticles
The paramagnetic particles used for the ARCHITECT i System consist of a mixture of metal oxides and organic polymers. The
metal oxides are iron, while the polymers are those typically found in non-magnetic latex microparticles. The functional groups that
are common for the latex particles are also found on the paramagnetic particles. Coupling of proteins to the paramagnetic particles
can occur through these functional groups as well as through adsorption to latex and magnetite. The iron oxide in the particles
causes them to be attracted to a magnet. Because the particles do not become magnetized, when the magnetic field is removed,
the particles re-disperse in solution. An advantage, therefore, of paramagnetic particles is ease of separation and washing. The
specific gravity of the particles is too high for them to be kept in suspension even by reagents which increase solution density, such
as sucrose. Therefore, active mixing is required to prevent settling.
Acridinium Label for Tracers and Conjugates
The ARCHITECT System uses an acridinium labeled conjugate. Upon exposure to basic pH and peroxide, the acridinium
undergoes a decomposition reaction with the release of a photon of light as a product (Chemiluminescence). This photon of light is
emitted at a wavelength between 400 and 500 nm. When this reaction occurs, a cyclic intermediate, is produced. The acridinium is
also no longer bound to the conjugate and is free in solution when light is emitted. The emitted light is collected by a "light pipe"
and directed to a photomultiplier tube where the signal is amplified and processed. To yield the Relative Luminescent Unit (RLU)
for the ARCHITECT i System, the signal is summed over a period of time, usually 2 - 3 sec., and given as the final read result.
The kinetics of the trigger and read step are shown for TSH calibrators in Calibration Curve Example.
Chemiluminescence
There are several advantages to using a chemiluminescent acridinium label:
Chemiluminescent signal detection is more sensitive relative to other reporter molecules and has a wide dynamic range.
Improved conjugate stability because the acridinium group is not subject to the same stability issues as an enzyme.
Acridinium conjugate is much smaller than enzyme conjugate and, therefore, not subject to the same steric hindrance
problems in finding the binding sites.
Coupling ratio of Ab (antibody) or Ag (antigen) to acridinium is determined from spectrophotometric analysis (unlike enzyme
conjugates in which coupling ratios are difficult to determine).
Calibration Curve Example
The acridinium label comes in a pre-activated form ready to conjugate to functional groups of protein carriers, such as antibodies
and antigens. Conjugates are defined as those molecules, such as antibodies, which can be coupled to acridinium under aqueous
conditions. Tracers are defined as those molecules to which acridinium is attached through organic chemistry processes.
Reagent Management
Overview
The i System processing module provides onboard storage for up to 75 reagent bottles. Physical positions for reagent bottles are
on two concentric rotatable carousels - outer and inner. The outer carousel has two rings - outer and middle; the inner carousel has
one ring - inner. Each ring can hold 25 reagent bottles. All positions on the middle ring can also be rotated to provide mixing action.
A self-contained cooling system provides temperature control within the area around the reagent carousels. This assures stability
for on-board reagents. A cover is provided over the reagent carousels to assist in temperature control and to prevent access to
reagents when the module is in the running state. A cover sensor allows the module to monitor whether the cover is open or
closed. A temperature sensor located within the carousels area allows the module to monitor temperature.
A bar code reader, located at the center of the carousels, is used for identifying reagents. The bar code reader is located at a fixed
axis and any ring position can be positioned in front of it for identification.
The following main hardware components are used in Reagent Management:
Reagent outer carousel

Outer carousel and dispersion drives
Reagent inner carousel
Inner carousel drive
Reagent refrigerator
Reagent bar code reader
Reagent Carousels, Carousel Drives and Dispersion Drive
The reagent outer carousel has two rings and the inner carousel has one ring. The outer and inner carousel drives allow carousels
to be rotated for positioning bottles on the rings at a desired location. The dispersion drive provides mixing function for bottles on
the middle ring.
Reagent Bar Code Reader
The reagent bar code reader uses visible laser light and can read bar codes and symbols printed on a variety of surfaces. On the
ARCHITECT i System module, it is used for identifying bottles on the carousels. The reagent bar code reader is capable of reading
both one-dimensional (1-D) and two-dimensional (2-D) bar code information. In comparison to one-dimensional bar coding, two-
dimensional bar coding allows a significantly greater amount of information density on a given label size.
Onboard Reagent Storage
The inner carousel has one inner ring with 25 storage positions. In addition to the reagent positions, the inner ring also has a 26th
position called the wedge position. The wedge position is a blank position that does not permit a reagent container to be placed in
it. The purpose of the wedge position is to provide unobstructed pathway between the bar code reader and the middle and outer
rings. Both carousels rotate around a reagent bar code reader located at the center of both carousels. In addition, each position of
the middle ring can rotate independently to provide mixing. Mixing facilitates microparticle suspension for reagents placed on the
middle ring.
The reagent refrigerator cools and recirculates air within the reagent carousels area. The lower portion of the reagent carousels
center area is a louvre terminated channel through which the reagent refrigerator blows cooled air. A temperature sensor, located
within the reagent carousels area, provides temperature feedback to the reagent refrigerator, allowing it to properly regulate
temperature within the reagent carousels area. The reagent refrigerator operates as needed to maintain temperature control within
2°-12° C range.
Routine access to reagents is through a hinged, insulated cover over one-half of the reagent carousels area. Each reagent
carousel can be rotated, to locate any given carousel position within the access area using software. The cover is equipped with a
sensor that is monitored by software during normal system operation. The user is alerted that the cover is open if the software
determines that it has been open for thirty minutes.
Reagent Identification
A bar code reader, located on top of the reagent refrigerator channel, is used to provide reagent identification. Two-dimensional bar
code labels can be used on bottles located on the middle ring. The bar code reader is located at a fixed axis relative to the reagent
carousels. Each of the 75 reagent positions can be located in front of the bar code reader for identification or acquisition of other
information contained on the bar code label. Information contained on the reagent bar code label allows the system to properly
apply an on-board reagent. Reagent bar code reader calibration properly aligns the reagent carousels with the bar code reader to
achieve unobstructed bar code readings at all reagent positions.
Reagent Presentation
Both reagent pipettors can access all three reagent rings at fixed locations for each ring. A reagent position is rotated to a pipettor
access location allowing aspiration by a reagent pipettor. System software coordinates presentation of reagents to pipettors by
assuring proper positioning of desired reagents for access.
Operational Modes
Module Initialization
Run Initialization
Running
Module Initialization
The following actions occur during module initialization:
1. Reagent carousel cover sensor is checked to verify that cover is closed.

2. Inner reagent carousel is initialized and home sensor is checked to verify that carousel is at home position.
3. Outer reagent carousel is initialized and home sensor is checked to verify that carousel is at home position.
4. Reagent Bar Code Reader is initialized.
Run Initialization
The following actions occur during run initialization:
1. Reagent carousel cover sensor is checked to verify that cover is closed.

2. Inner carousel home sensor is checked to verify that carousel is at home position.
3. Outer carousel home sensor is checked to verify that carousel is at home position.
4. Reagent carousels scanning is started to identify on-board reagents as follows:
Outer and middle ring positions are read.
Inner ring positions are read.
5. Inner carousel dispersion begins.
6. Inner carousel dispersion continues for five (5) minutes.
7. Running mode begins.
Running
The following actions occur during assay run:
1. Desired reagent on outer carousel is positioned at aspiration point for reagent pipettor 1.
2. Reagent aspiration is initiated.
3. Reagent aspiration is completed.
4. Desired reagent on middle carousel is positioned at aspiration point for reagent pipettor 1.
5. Dispersion is stopped.
8. Dispersion is started.
9. Desired reagent on inner carousel is positioned at aspiration point for reagent pipettor 2.
Reaction Vessel (RV) Loader
Overview
The RV Loader provides onboard storage for the reaction vessels (RVs), orients and places the RVs in the RV transport, and
inserts the RVs into the inner track on the process path.
Definitions
RV Immunoassay reaction vessels
Drop Point The position where the RV transfers from the RV loader wheel to the RV transport.
Load Point The position in the RV transport occupied just prior to delivery into the process path inner track.
Process Path Insertion Point The position in the process path inner track where an RV is loaded from the RV transport.
RV Loader subsystem consists of:
Hopper
RV Loader Wheel
RV Loader Transport
RV Loader sensors
RV Hopper Sensor
RV Loader Wheel Home Sensor
RV Loader Transport Home Sensor
Drop Point RV Sensor
Load Point RV Sensor
Process Path Insertion RV Sensor
Hopper
The hopper is an enclosed bin capable of holding 1200 RVs in any orientation.
RV Loader Wheel
The RV loader wheel picks up RVs from the hopper and orients them for loading into the RV transport.
RV Loader Transport
The RV loader transport receives the RV from the RV loader wheel and moves the RV into the inner track on the process path.
RV Loader Sensors
The sensors perform the following:
The hopper sensor detects when the RV inventory is empty.

The loader wheel home sensor detects when the RV loader wheel is home.
The loader transport home sensor detects when the transport is home.
The drop point sensor detects a RV at the drop point.
The load point sensor detects a RV at the load point.
The process path insertion RV sensor detects a RV at the insertion point on the inner process path.
The diagram below shows the design for the sensor and motor signals for the RV Loader.
Power Up Mode
The following actions occur during power up:

1. The RV loader transport is homed and the home sensor is verified.
2. The RV loader wheel is homed and the home sensor is verified.
3. The status of all RV sensors is verified.
Normal Operation Mode
The following actions occur during an assay run:
1. Process path insertion point is checked.

2. When a RV is not detected at the process path insertion point, the RV loader transport advances until a RV is one position
from the load point.
3. RV loader transport advances RV one position and the RV drops into the inner track of the process path.
RVs are inserted into the inner track whenever an empty slot appears at position 45 for i 2000 SR and position 46 for
the i 2000.
3 is performed while the process path is idle, in synchronization with the 18 second process path lock step.
4. After insertion is accomplished, the RV loader wheel is rotated 90 degrees in an attempt to fill the empty slot at the drop
point.
RV loader wheel picks a single RV, orients it, and drops it into the RV loader transport at the drop point.
After each attempt to pick a RV from the hopper, the RV loader wheel pauses to allow the picked RV to settle in the
RV loader transport.
Several attempts can be made to pick a RV during the 18 second lock step interval.
5. Drop point sensor is checked.
6. When a RV is detected at the drop point, the RV loader transport advances one position.
7. Load position sensor is checked.
8. When a RV is at the load point, the RV loader waits for the end of the lock step interval.
Error Handling
IF the RV loader wheel does not transfer an RV to the drop THEN, after inserting the RV, the transport backs up to the
point before the transport advances to place an RV into the empty position to keep the transport queue fully loaded.
process path.
Note
If more than one position on the transport is left vacant
during operation, the transport fills the vacant positions in
proper sequence.
IF the RV loader wheel transfers an RV to the drop point THEN the RV loader wheel pauses until the transport can
before the transport queue advances to place an RV into the advance.
process path.
Note
The RV loader wheel does not rotate if a RV is at the
drop point.
Normal Operation Mode Flow Chart

Fast Load Mode
During module initiation the fast load mode is used to quickly load the inner track on the process path with reaction vessels. The
module cannot process assays during fast load mode.
1. The load position is checked for the presence of an RV.

IF an RV is at the THEN an RV is loaded into the processing path following steps 2-4 of the Normal Operation mode.
load position If more than one position on the transport is left vacant during operation, the transport fills the
vacant positions in proper sequence.
IF an RV is not at THEN the RV loader wheel picks a single RV, orients it, and drops it into the RV loader transport at
the load position the drop point. The RV transport is advanced one position.
After each attempt to pick an RV, the RV loader wheel pauses to allow the picked RV to
settle in the transport queue.
A sensor is located at the drop point to verify an RV has been picked and placed into the RV
transport.
Multiple attempts are made to pick an RV. If an RV is not picked after a predetermined
number of attempts, the system errors out and pauses.
IF the inner process THEN fast load is completed.

path track is fully
loaded
IF the inner process THEN the process path is indexed 1 position. The fast mode process continues until the track is
path track is not loaded.
fully loaded
Fast Load Operation Flow Chart

Temperature and Wash Aspirate Monitoring
Overview
Temperature and Wash Aspirate Monitoring (WAM) functions are used to provide temperature control or monitoring in an i System
processing module. The areas with temperature control are the process path, wash zones and Pre-Trigger/Trigger manifold. The
areas with temperature monitoring are the wash aspirate, reagent refrigerator and ambient temperature in module enclosure.
Temperature control includes abilities to read and to adjust temperature to achieve desired set point. Temperature monitoring
provides ability to read temperature for reporting purposes, but without the means to adjust the temperature. Within the process
path, temperature control is used in six zones, to maintain proper incubation temperature. At both wash zones, temperature control
is used to assure that buffer solution introduced into reaction vessels in the process path does not adversely change incubation
temperature. At the Pre-Trigger/Trigger manifold, temperature control is used to assure that Pre-Trigger or Trigger solution
introduced into reaction vessels in the process path does not adversely change incubation temperature. Temperature monitoring is
used during wash aspiration to verify that adverse temperature change did not occur during the wash process. Reagent refrigerator
temperature monitoring is used by the module to verify that temperature control provided for the reagent carousels area is
functioning properly.
The following main hardware components are used in Temperature and Wash Aspirate Monitoring:
Temperature Controller Board

Heater Board
Process Path Heaters
Buffer Heater
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Heaters
Thermistors
Temperature Controller Board
This temperature controller board is located in the module card cage. Settings for temperature control are stored in the
temperature controller board. Its main function is to receive information from thermistors, process the information received and
issue heater control instructions to the heater board. The heater board receives instructions from the temperature controller board
and directs power to the applicable heaters.
Heater Board
The heater board is located in the module power supply. Its main function is to direct power (27 VAC) to the heaters as instructed
by the temperature controller board.
Process Path Heater
There are six heaters located on six zones underneath the process path. The main function of these heaters is to provide the heat
necessary to maintain the process path at incubation temperature. Each heater is independently controlled for better temperature
distribution around the process path. The 27 VAC power to drive these heaters comes from the heater board.
Buffer Heater
There are two buffer heaters located on the two wash zones on an ARCHITECT i System processing module. The main function of
these heaters is to preheat buffer before it is dispensed into reaction vessels for washing. Each heater is independently controlled.
The 27 VAC power to drive these heaters comes from the heater board.
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Heater

The Pre-Trigger and Trigger heaters are located on the Pre-Trigger/Trigger manifold on an i System processing module. This
single manifold has two separate fluidic paths for dispensing Pre-Trigger and Trigger into reaction vessels. The main function of
these heaters is to preheat Pre-Trigger or Trigger before they are dispensed into reaction vessels. The Pre-Trigger and Trigger
heaters are independently controlled. The 27 VAC power to drive these heaters comes from the heater board.
Process Path Heating and Control
The process path heaters and thermistors are used to maintain temperature within the process path. This provides proper
incubation environment for fluid contained in multiple reaction vessels as they are transported within the process path. Process path
heating and control is accomplished through six independently controlled zones. Each zone consists of a heater and thermistor,
embedded into the zone area, to provide temperature feedback. The thermistor sends temperature signals to a temperature
controller board in the card cage, which processes the signals and sends control signals to the heater board located in the power
supply assembly. The heater board, based on the control signal it receives, either increases or decreases power to the heater to
maintain temperature at a set range. The temperature range for each zone is programmable through system software.
Buffer Heating and Control
The buffer heaters and thermistors are used to heat and maintain buffer temperature prior to its introduction to wash zone
manifolds. This allows proper incubation environment to be maintained for multiple reaction vessels as they undergo the wash
process within the process path. Buffer heating and control is accomplished at two independently controlled wash zone heater
blocks. Each buffer heater is an assembly that consists of a molded tubing block, heating element, thermostat and thermistor. The
thermistor sends temperature signals to a temperature controller board in the card cage, which processes the signals and sends
control signals to the heater board located in the power supply. Based on the control signal it receives, the Heater Board either
increases or decreases power to the heater to maintain temperature at a set range. The temperature range for each buffer heater
is programmable through system software.
Pre-Trigger/Trigger Heating and Control
The Pre-Trigger/Trigger heaters and thermistors are used to heat and maintain Pre-Trigger and Trigger temperatures prior to their
introduction into a reaction vessel. This allows proper incubation environment to be maintained for reaction vessels when Pre-
Trigger or Trigger is introduced into them, within the process path. Pre-Trigger/Trigger heating and control is accomplished through
two independently controlled assemblies feeding into a single manifold assembly used to dispense both solutions. The Pre-Trigger
or Trigger heater is an assembly that consists of a tubing with integrated heating element and thermistor. The thermistor sends
temperature signals to a temperature controller board in the card cage, which processes the signals and sends control signals to
the heater board located in the power supply. The heater board, based on the control signal it receives, either increases or
decreases power to the heater to maintain temperature at a set range. The temperature ranges for Pre-Trigger and Trigger heaters
are programmable through system software.
Ambient Temperature Monitoring
Ambient temperature monitoring is used to measure temperature within module enclosure. There is no provision for temperature
control for the ambient temperature monitoring. It is intended to be an aid for troubleshooting temperature problems that may be
related to environment temperature. Ambient temperature monitoring is accomplished by measuring temperature of the air stream
entering the module above the base plate. A thermistor located within the air stream sends signals to the temperature controller
board in the card cage for processing. Ambient temperature measurements are not used in any active feedback or control on the
instrument.
Wash Aspirate Monitoring
Dispense of wash solution and its subsequent aspirations from reaction vessels are essential steps in the assay protocol. Wash
aspirate monitoring provides assurance that the wash fluid was dispensed and subsequently aspirated completely within the allotted
time. WAM determination is based on temperature measurements taken at 1millisecond intervals. The WAM thermistor is located
inside the waste tubing approximately 11 inches from the probe tip. A normal wash aspiration produces a temperature profile with
predictable characteristics.
As the wash aspiration probe descends into the reaction vessel, vacuum is applied causing ambient air to be drawn through the
tubing. This results in a small decrease in temperature sensed by the thermistor. As heated buffer is aspirated from the RV and
drawn into the tubing, the temperature sensed by the thermistor rises abruptly. When the RV is empty and the probe is clear, free-
flowing air over residual buffer droplets result in evaporative cooling. This is sensed by the thermistor as a drop in temperature.
In a normal aspiration, the magnitude of evaporative cooling is substantial. The resulting temperature drop, from evaporative
cooling, is compared to a pre-determined threshold. From this comparison, determination of failure or success of the aspiration is
made. Wash aspiration failure can be caused by probe or tubing blockage, vacuum system malfunction or buffer dispense system
malfunction.
WAM temperature measurements are saved in a WAM log file on the module, for use in troubleshooting. The information saved in
the WAM log includes peak temperature read during aspiration as well as the subsequent cooling magnitude. Temperature entries
in the log are reported in degrees Celsius.
Error Handling
Process Path Heating and Control Error Handling
The temperature controller board monitors the temperature of each zone for stability using temperature interrupts. A zone
generates temperature interrupts when its temperature is out of the range programmed into the temperature controller board. A
zone is unstable when ten temperature interrupts are received from it within two minutes. A message is generated if any process
path zone becomes unstable.
Buffer Heating and Control Error Handling
The temperature controller board monitors the temperature of each buffer heater for stability using temperature interrupts. A buffer
heater generates temperature interrupts when its temperature is out of the range programmed into the temperature controller
board. A buffer heater is unstable when ten temperature interrupts are received from it within two minutes. A message is generated
if any buffer heater becomes unstable.
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Heating and Control Error Handling
The temperature controller board monitors the temperature of the Pre-Trigger and Trigger heaters for stability using temperature
interrupts. Each heater generates temperature interrupts when its temperature is out of the range programmed into the temperature
controller board. The Pre-Trigger or Trigger heater is unstable when ten temperature interrupts are received from it within two
minutes. A message is generated if either the Pre-Trigger or Trigger heater becomes unstable.
Reagent Cooling
Air is re-circulated through a refrigerator unit and a reagent chamber, with the help of a blower fan inside the refrigerator unit.
The refrigerator unit contains a temperature sensor that is used to maintain proper temperature.
The refrigerator unit also contains a thermostat (in the return air stream) that will turn off the refrigerator unit compressor when the
temperature falls below 0° C.
The temperature is monitored with the help of a thermistor located in the reagent chamber and the Temperature Controller Board.
Lid Sensor
An optical sensor is used to indicate the open/close status of the reagent cover.
Refrigerator, Power
Power is supplied to the Reagent Cooler whenever the main power switch to the i2000 module is turned on.
Reagent Chamber, Temperature Monitoring
A separate thermistor, independent of the thermostat, is located inside the chamber to monitor temperature. After instrument
initialization, the software waits until it determines that the reagent lid sensor remains CLOSED for 60 minutes. After this time
elapses, the chamber is equilibrated and within specification. The temperature controller board (in the card cage) commences
measuring the thermistor at programmed intervals (4.0 seconds) and compares the readings to the acceptable range limits (2-12
deg C).
The chamber lid is equipped with a sensor which sends a LID OPEN signal to the module controller. If this signal is TRUE for 30
minutes, the user is alerted that the lid was left open.
Error Handling
The refrigerator cooling and control is self-controlled. Error handling is limited to a reporting function only. Each time a measured
temperature is outside of programmed limits, the module CPU is interrupted to indicate "temperature out of range". The
corresponding interrupt service routine measures the chamber temperature and writes it to the temperature log.
If the cooler temperature exceeds the programmed limits for longer than two hours, the shelf life of the reagents is threatened. This
is determined in software by keeping track of interrupts. If more than 430 interrupts occur within any half-hour period, a message is
sent to the SCC to alert the operator of a temperature control failure. Following this alert, further alerts are suppressed until after
the alert is reset and the equilibration timer expires.
1.2 ARCHITECT Automatic Reconstitution Module (ARM) Overview
Links
ARCHITECT ARM Connections
ARCHITECT ARM Electrical Connection Diagram
ARCHITECT ARM Fluidics Flush Mode
ARM Specifications
Electrical Components
Fluidics Components, Normal Operation Mode
Modes of Operation
Overview
Overview
The ARCHITECT ARM is designed to automatically dilute concentrated wash buffer to the correct concentration and to deliver it to
the wash buffer reservoir on the processing module. The module is connected to a DI water supply and is loaded with a 10 L
container of wash buffer. A single motor, operating at a constant speed geared to drive two pumps at a 9:1 ratio to each other,
pumps the necessary portions of water and concentrated wash buffer into a mixing chamber. The diluted wash buffer is then
delivered to the buffer valve on the inlet buffer assembly in the processing module. From the buffer valve, the diluted wash buffer
is delivered to the on board wash buffer reservoir.
In its current configuration, the ARCHITECT ARM can only be used as an automatic system controlled by system software.
However, previous versions of the module could be used in a manual mode to dilute buffer for manual loading and some of these
previous version units are still in use in the field.
Input pressure regulator Regulates the incoming DI water to 15 psig before entering Inlet Cell
Accepts up to 100 psig from the external DI source
Solenoid valve block Solenoids on the valve block control the flow of the incoming water after the inlet cell.
Inlet cell located within the DI water temperature is checked

valve block Inlet water quality is checked for a purity level >/= 1 mega ohm, compensated for temperature
Input pressure sensor Checks for low incoming DI pressure from the regulator
Gives a low pressure error if < 0.5 psig is detected to prevent damage to the dual head pump if
there is not enough DI water
Dual head FMI pump Provides a 9:1 ratio of DI water and concentrated buffer
Outlet cell Receives the 9:1 DI water to buffer concentrate ratio from the dual headed pump
Ensures the DI water and buffer concentrate mixture is thoroughly mixed before it is delivered to
the instrument
Sensor in the cell checks the DI water and mix quality
Sensor in the cell is temperature compensated during the DI and mix quality check
Outlet pressure sensor Stops the pump if pressure exceeds 15 psig between the ARCHITECT ARM and the processing
module.
Power Supply Supplies +5 VDC, +/-12 VDC, and 36 VDC
Main Board Provides all logic control of the ARCHITECT ARM system
Stepper Board Controls the rotation of the FMI Pump
Sensor Board Processes sensor information from the inlet cell, outlet cell, input pressure sensor, and output
pressure sensors
Keypad Provides a local interface for the operator to control the operation of the ARCHITECT ARM.
RS-232 Interface Provides an interface between the ARCHITECT ARM and the System Control Center (SCC)
ARCHITECT ARM Connections
ARCHITECT ARM Rear Connectors
The rear of the ARCHITECT ARM has five fluidics ports for input and output, and one communication port.
1 Diluted Wash Connection from the ARCHITECT ARM to the buffer

Buffer Output input on the rear left of the processing module for
transfer of diluted wash buffer to the wash buffer
reservoir
2 Decontamination Connection for flushing a 0.5% sodium hypochlorite

Port 1 solution through the ARCHITECT ARM (for
decontamination)
3 Water Inlet Connection from the ARCHITECT ARM to the

pressurized DI water system
4 Waste 1 Connection from the internal drip pan, located inside

(Pressurized) the ARCHITECT ARM, to the external waste pump or
Port floor drain
5 Waste 2 Connection from the internal drip pan, located inside

(Gravity) Port the ARCHITECT ARM, to the external waste pump or
floor drain
Note
The tubing must be routed downward and
vented to the atmosphere
6 RS-232 Port Connection for communication between the

ARCHITECT ARM and the SCC
Note
During normal installation and operation, all ports, except
Decontamination port 1, are connected.
ARCHITECT ARM Left Side Connectors
The left side of the ARCHITECT ARM has the connector for the power cord and the power switch.
1 Fuses
2 Fuse compartment
3 Power switch
4 Power cord
Note
When the ARCHITECT ARM arrives at the customer site, the
fuses are in a small bag taped on to the power cord. Refer to
illustration A1_1771 for correct insertion in the fuse holder. In
order to open the main compartment, the power cord must be
unplugged from the side of the module.
ARCHITECT ARM Top Connectors
During normal operation, a level sensor and pickup tubing is placed into a 10 L CUBITAINER of concentrated wash buffer.
Level sensor reading:
Silicone pressure sensor that converts head pressure reading to signal-conditioned voltage
Transmits signal to the main board in the ARCHITECT ARM through the level sensor cable
Software interprets the signal and the appropriate level LED indicator on the keypad is activated
1 Concentrated Connection that allows transfer of
Wash Buffer concentrated wash buffer to the mixing
Inlet chamber of the ARCHITECT ARM
2 Level Sensor Connection from the tubing assembly to

Cable the ARCHITECT ARM
3 Concentrated Provides concentrated wash buffer to

Wash Buffer the ARCHITECT ARM for dilution prior
(10 L Container) to delivery to the processing module
4 Level Sensor Detects the level of concentrated wash

buffer in the 10 L container
5 Decontamination Connection that for flushing the

Port 2 ARCHITECT ARM with DI water
(removes the 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
solution)
6 Tubing Holder for the tubing assembly when

Assembly replacing the concentrated wash buffer
Holder container
Note
During normal operation, Decontamination port 2 is not
used. The tubing assembly holder holds the level
sensor and pickup tubing during a 10 L container
change.
ARCHITECT ARM Keypad
The ARCHITECT ARM keypad provides input to the module and status information to the user including error condition notification.
1 Water Quality Illuminates red if the incoming water does not meet the NCCLS Type II resistivity standard
Error Indicator
Note
When this occurs, transfer of buffer stops.
2 Buffer Quality Illuminates red if the diluted buffer mixture is outside acceptable limits (the up arrow indicates too little
Error Indicator water (high conductivity); the down arrow indicates too much water. (low conductivity))
Note
When either occurs, the system stops transfer of buffer.
3 Flood Indicator Illuminates red if liquid is detected in the flood pan
Note
4 Water Illuminates red if incoming water temperature is outside the range of 15° - 37° C
Temperature
Indicator Note
5 Low Inlet Illuminates red if incoming water pressure or the flow rate is too low
Pressure
Indicator Note
6 High Outlet Illuminates red if the outgoing wash buffer pressure exceeds the pressure limit of the inlet valves
Pressure
Indicator Note
7 Inventory Level Indicates the volume of buffer remaining in the container.

Indicator
2 bars illuminate = mid (50%)
1 bar illuminates = low (20%)
No bar illuminates = empty (<2%). The red indicator illuminates and the ARCHITECT ARM stops.
8 Start Key
9 Decontamination
Key
10 Flush to Drain
Key
11 Bottle Load Key
12 Stop Key
ARM Specifications
Water Specification
The ARCHITECT ARM site water specification includes:
Type: Reagent grade type II water or better

Pressure: 8-100 psi
Flow rate: 100 L/hr if pressure is greater than 15 psig, or 132 L/hr or greater if pressure is 8-15 psig
During operation of the module, the water temperature must be between 14.7° C and 37.0° C. This is required for assay
performance on the processing module. The water quality, pressure, temperature, and flow are monitored by the module hardware
and if any of these requirements are not met, the hardware does not function.
Electrical Specification
The ARCHITECT ARM site electrical specification includes:
Line voltage: 90-132 VAC at 60 Hz or 180-264 VAC at 50 Hz
The system is shipped with power cords and fuses for both line voltages. The system has a maximum current rating of 1.5 Amps.
Modes of Operation
When power is applied to the ARCHITECT ARM the unit goes to a Stop Mode. This mode indicates that power is applied, but the
unit is not in operational mode and does not respond to buffer transfer requests. Whenever the Stop key is pressed, the system
stops all operations and the red indicator below the key illuminates.
During system installation, the buffer pickup assembly must be calibrated. This procedure is only needed when a buffer pickup
assembly is installed. The level sensor is connected while the buffer pickup assembly is hanging freely and not placed in liquid.
The Bottle Load key is pressed and the amber indicator below the key flashes. While the indicator is flashing, the level sensor
cable is disconnected.
Whenever a new 10 L container is loaded, the unit must be placed in Bottle Load Mode from the Stopped Mode. The buffer
pickup assembly is placed in the new 10 L container, the level sensor cable is connected, and the tubing is connected to the
concentrated wash buffer inlet. The bottle Load key is pressed and the amber indicator under the key illuminates. During this time,
the level of the tubing in the 10 L container is read and the buffer level is calibrated to full. The indicator under the Flush Key
illuminates briefly and then the green Start indicator illuminates.
The green Start Key is pressed to prepare the module to respond to buffer transfer requests. Once the key is pressed, the unit is
placed in Ready Mode and the green indicator below the Start Key illuminates. While in Ready Mode, the module responds to
buffer transfer requests.
The SCC generates a buffer transfer request when both of the following occur:
Buffer is being consumed during an auto flush or test processing

The lower or middle sensor on the buffer level sensor of the processing module changes state
Note
Selecting Update Supplies (Supply Status Screen) and Add Buffer also generates a transfer request.
Once a transfer request is received, the unit goes to Initialize Mode.
Initialize Mode (see Fluidics Components, Normal Operation Mode)
Valve 3 opens and DI water is flushed for 15 seconds to drain (indicated by the green line in Fluidics Components, Normal
Operation Mode).
Water pressure, temperature and resistance are checked.
If the checks pass, the pump begins to open valves 1 and 4 and closes valve 3 (indicated by the red line in Fluidics
Components, Normal Operation Mode).
The buffer is sent to the drain until the temperature, water, and buffer quality are correct.
The Green indicator below the Start key illuminates.
If all of the initialization checks pass, the ARCHITECT ARM transitions to Run Mode with no additional user input.
Run Mode (see Fluidics Components, Normal Operation Mode)
Buffer delivery request received from the System Control Center.

Buffer delivery mode entered by opening valve 2 and closing valve 4 (indicated by the blue line in Fluidics Components,
Normal Operation Mode).
All initialization checks pass.
Temperature, inlet pressure, outlet pressure, quality of buffer, flood, and CUBITAINER buffer level constantly monitored.
Green LED under the Start Key flashes (as buffer is being delivered to the ARCHITECT ARM).
Fluidics Components, Normal Operation Mode
Decontamination Mode (see ARCHITECT ARM Fluidics Flush Mode)
The decontamination mode provides a routine method to eliminate any microbial growth that may occur normally within the system.
Although the buffer contains an antimicrobial agent, the decontamination mode is still a beneficial part of routine maintenance. The
decontamination must be followed carefully to ensure that only properly diluted buffer is transferred to the i System.
Before entering the decontamination mode, the stop key is pressed and the diluted wash buffer output tubing is disconnected from
the rear of the ARCHITECT ARM. Additional tubing is used to connect the diluted wash buffer outlet port and decontamination
port 1, and to connect decontamination port 2 and the concentrated wash buffer inlet.
Both the Start and Decon keys are pressed at the same time.
The green LED under the Start key illuminates and the Decon LED blinks.
Valves 1, 2 and 4 open and the pump flushes water for 10 minutes.
Valves 3 and 4 are opened and the pump continues for an additional 5 minutes.
After 15 minutes, the Decon LED stops blinking and illuminates green.
The pump stops and all valves are closed.
To exit the decontamination mode, the tubing installed is removed, the normal operation tubing is reconnected, and Stop is
pressed.
ARCHITECT ARM Fluidics Flush Mode
Electrical Components
The electrical system is designed for simplicity with limited component replacement. Chassis ground cannot be used when
checking voltages on the circuit boards. When checking voltages on the circuit boards, the positive and negative test points on the
board must be used.
ARCHITECT ARM Electrical Connection Diagram

1.4 System Control Center Overview
The System Control Center (SCC) provides a centralized interface through which the operator can control the instrument and enter
the patient, calibrator or control sample information into the system. It is also the interface for entry and receipt of test order
information, either through operator entry or through a Laboratory Information System (LIS) interface.
The SCC is common to the i System modules and is comprised of components of a personal computer workstation. Software
resident in the SCC module performs data reduction and release of test results, and provides an interface to the sample handlers.
The SCC is shared by assay processing modules in multi-module instruments through networking hardware and software; there is
a single SCC per product configuration. An Ethernet controller on the controller boards allows the processing module and sample
handler communications with the SCC. Additional external SCC hardware components allow connectivity to a variety of products
via the Ethernet network. The additional SCC connectivity hardware is comprised of an external network hub and cables.
Note
The Ethernet network is only used for the Abbott components (modules). It is not intended for connecting to external
systems (i.e. to a LIS).
The following common components make up an SCC:
CPU Assembly
Touch screen Interface Monitor
Keyboard
Mouse
Network Hub
The following optional components are country specific.
Modem
Printer
Uninterruptible Power Supply
Bar Code Reader
Computer Cart (not used on i1000SR)
Speakers
SCC Input and Output
The SCC receives input from the keyboard, touch screen or bar code reader through serial, RS232 or Ethernet connection and
provides output to various devices. Multiple connections are available for this purpose.
1 Touchscreen Monitor 10 CPU COM1 (Serial Port)
2 Touchscreen Monitor Connector 11 CPU Video Out
3 Video In 12 CPU LPT1 (Parallel Port)
4 Modem 13 Printer
5 DIGIBOARD 14 Mouse
6 CPU Audio In 15 Ethernet Hub
7 CPU Audio Out 16 Keyboard
8 CPU Microphone In 17 Bar Code Scanner
9 Ethernet
Operating System and User Interface
The system runs under WINDOWS 2000 operating system. However the customer user interface is an Abbott proprietary software.
The customer does not have access to the underlying capabilities of the operating system. Abbott service personnel have access
to the system through a service password. The customer user interface utilizes the full display screen regardless of the monitor
size or resolution. The customer user interface is divided into three zones: Menu Bar, Information Area, and Function Bar Buttons.
These distinct areas allow the user to navigate and interact with the services and functions provided.
1 Menu Bar Icons provide navigational and status indication support. Each icon zone has a drop down menu that displays
when you select the icon.
2 Information Contains all information pertaining to a screen, including the screen name. Windows are used to provide
Area additional information, such as alert notifications.
3 Function Bar Contains function buttons associated with the screen currently displayed in the information area.
Buttons
Handheld Barcode Scanner Default
Default settings for the Handheld Barcode Scanner are:
Code Setting
Check Sum Digit Disabled

Code 39 Check Sum Digit Output Disabled
Start and Stop Character Match Disabled
Start and Stop Character Not Transmitted

Codabar Check Sum Digit Disabled
Check Sum Digit Not Transmitted
Check Sum Digit Disabled
Check Sum Digit Output Disabled

Code I 2 of 5 Code Length #1 = 10
Code Length #2 = 8
Code 128 Fixed Code Length Disabled

i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-115) • Copyright 2002, 2007• ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks
of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
1.5 Standard Sample Handler Functional Description
Overview
The standard sample handler (SSH) module is the portion of an integrated instrument system with which the operator interacts to
load and unload samples.
A conveyor based sample handling module moves samples from the load queue to each processing module throughout an
instrument system. When testing is complete, the samples are delivered to the unload queue for operator removal and storage.
There are two types of conveyor systems that work with the ARCHITECT i System:
The standard sample handler module

Third party laboratory automation systems
The size and complexity of the standard sample handler module varies to meet the volume of tests per day and the variety of tests
run by different customers.
Standard Sample Handler Operational Description
The operator places sample carriers in the load queue. Sample carriers may be placed in any unoccupied position in the
load queue.
Priority samples can be placed ahead of carriers already in the load queue by pausing the load queue and reversing the
load lane conveyor momentarily to create an opening at the front of the load lane.
Sample carriers are removed from the load queue one at a time by the load transfer device and transferred to the adjacent
processing module for processing.
The carrier ID label, sample tube barcode label, and sample position labels are read by the load queue SID barcode reader
as sample carriers are transferred from the load queue onto the processing queue conveyor.
The sample carrier then reaches the aspiration point of the first processing module. At this point, the processing queue
barcode reader reads the carrier ID label and sample position labels.
When sample aspiration is complete for all samples in a sample carrier at a particular processing module, the SSH
transports it to the next processing module in the system for further processing. A sample carrier barcode label is verified
each time a sample carrier is stopped for aspiration to insure proper sample processing.
When all tests for all samples in a given sample carrier have been aspirated, the carrier is placed in an unload queue for
operator pick-up.
Definitions
Master The processing module of a multiple module system which houses the standard sample handler (SSH) controls
Processing (including a dedicated CPU, motor indexer cards, and a cable harness connection point on the card cage
Module backplane).
Load An operator sample loading station.

Queue
Load A means of transferring carriers from the load queue to the processing module.
Transfer
Mechanism
Barcode A device used for sample identification and ID of sample carriers.

Readers
(BCR)
Processing A means of presenting the sample(s) to the processing module aspirate point(s).
Queue
Priority A means of allowing priority processing of samples.

Samples
Processing
Unload A means of transferring carriers from the last processing module to the unload queue.
Transfer
Mechanism
Unload An operator sample unloading station.

Queue
Motors Motors are used to drive the conveyors, transfer mechanisms, and indexer mechanism. They receive their power
from motor drivers, and are controlled by the indexer boards located in the SSH section of the electronics card cage
of the processing module.
Solenoids Solenoids are used for small, limited rotation, applications such as the carrier stop gate of the load queue, the
transfer mechanism carrier push arms, and the unload gate. They receive their power from, and are controlled by,
the DC driver IO board located in the master processing module power card cage. Actual control is directed by the
SSH CPU Board.
Carrier A position sensor is used to inform the standard sample handler controller about a carrier's position relative to the
Detection transfer device's ideal carrier transfer zone. This information may be used for timing and for generating error
Sensor signals.
Rotation These sensors are used to inform the standard sample handler controller about indexer rotation, conveyor belt
Sensors movement, and transfer mechanism home, and solenoid home. This information may be used for timing, and for
generating error signals.
Hardware
Standard sample handler subsystem consists of:
Sample carrier - allows loading of multiple samples and creates a stable tube holder for transporting various sizes and types
of sample containers.
Load queue assembly - for placement of sample carriers that are introduced to the processing modules.
Load transfer mechanism - transfers carrier from load queue to the adjacent processing module.
Load queue barcode reader - reads SID, carrier ID, and carrier position before carrier is transported to aspirate position.
Processing queue assembly - moves carriers to and from aspirate position.
Starwheel - positioning device at the aspirate position.
Processing queue barcode reader - reads carrier ID and carrier position at the aspirate position.
Unload transfer mechanism - transfers the carrier from the processing queue to the unload queue.
Unload queue assembly - accepts carriers that are transferred from the processing queue.
Unload Y-transfer motor - moves carriers into the unload queue assembly.
Standard sample handler keypad - allows user to start, pause, reverse, or stop the standard sample handler.
Standard sample handler sensors:
Load queue proximity sensor - senses load queue conveyor belt rotation.
Carrier present at load transfer mechanism sensor - senses when a carrier is ready to be transferred to processing module.
Processing queue proximity sensor - senses processing queue conveyor belt rotation.
BCR Full sensor - sensor that prevents further transferring of carriers from the load queue to the processing module.
Carrier present at BCR module sensor - senses when carrier is present and activates a processing queue BCR.
Starwheel home sensor - senses when the starwheel is at home position.
Processing queue full sensor - senses when no more carriers can be sent past the starwheel.
Carrier present at unload queue sensor - tells the system that a carrier is ready to be transferred to the unload queue.
Carrier present at gate for unload transfer sensor - if not activated, allows gate solenoid to open and carrier to proceed to
unload queue. When carrier is past this sensor, the solenoid arm of the unload transfer is activated to push carrier off of
sample queue and onto the unload queue.
Unload queue full sensor - senses when the unload queue is full and has to be emptied.
Functional Architecture:
The following two diagrams illustrate the architecture of the SSH subsystem. The first is an i 8000 (where four i 2000 module are
connected), while the second shows the i 2000 module load transfer and unload transfer mechanisms.
Standard Sample Handler Block Diagram:

Standard Sample Handler Module Controller
The standard sample handler module controller controls all activities of the standard sample handler module. It communicates with
the SCC to exchange barcode data for module assignments of same, and the processing modules to coordinate when to aspirate
and when to index to the next sample or carrier.
The SSH control electronics are located on printed circuit boards in the electronics card cage of the processing module. The SSH
control cable harness supplies power and control signals to all SSH components. In a multiple module system, the "master"
controlling module (farthest to the right) contains these boards (card slots are empty on subsequent processing modules) and is the
central location for the SSH control cable harness.
Description Qty
Load Queue Conveyor Motor 1/Lane
Load Queue Conveyor Home Sensor (belt motion detect proximity sensor) 1/Lane
Load Queue Gate Solenoid 1/Lane
Load Queue Gate Home Sensor 1/Lane
Load Queue Transfer Device Motor (T1) 1
Load Queue Transfer Device Home Sensor 1
Load Queue Transfer Gate Solenoid 1
Load Queue Transfer Gate Home Sensor 1
Carrier Detection Sensor 1/Lane
Barcode Reader-Load Queue 1
Load BCR Queue Full 1
Unload Gate Solenoid 1
Unload Gate Home Sensor 1

Unload Gate Carrier Detection Sensor 1
Unload Queue Transfer Device #2 Motor (T2) 1
Unload Queue Transfer Device #2 Home Sensor 1
Unload Queue Transfer Gate Solenoid 1
Unload Queue Transfer Gate Home Sensor 1
Unload Queue Transfer Device #3 Motor 1
Unload Queue Transfer Device #3 Home Sensor 1
Carrier Detection Sensor Queue Full 1/Lane
The SSH control cable harness is stored in an integral SSH cable tray with extra capacity to insure adequate room for the
minimum components listed above and up to four integrated modules with the following components times the number of
processing modules in the system:
Description Qty
Processing Queue Conveyor Motor 1
Processing Conveyor Sensor (belt motion detect proximity sensor) 1
Star Motor 1
Star Home Sensor 1
Process Queue Barcode Reader 1
BCR/Carrier Detection Sensor 1
Module Queue Full Sensor 1
Motors
Motors are used to drive the conveyors, transfer mechanisms, and indexer mechanism. They receive their power from motor
drivers, and are controlled by the motor indexer boards located in the SSH section of the electronics card cage of the processing
module.
Solenoids
Solenoids are used for small, limited rotation, applications such as the carrier stop gate of the load queue, the transfer mechanism
carrier push arms, and the unload gate. They receive their power from, and are controlled by, the solenoid/brushless DC motor
controller board located in the master processing module power card cage. Actual control is directed by the SSH controller CPU.
Carrier Detection Sensor
A position sensor is used to inform the standard sample handler controller about a carrier's position relative to the transfer device's
ideal carrier transfer zone. This information may be used for timing and for generating error signals.
Rotation Sensors
These sensors are used to inform the standard sample handler controller about indexer rotation, conveyor belt movement, and
transfer mechanism home, and solenoid home. This information may be used for timing, and for generating error signals.
Load Queue and Sample Queue Reader Defaults
Default settings for the Load Queue and Sample Queue readers are:
Code Setting
Code 39 Check Sum Digit Disabled

Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled
Fixed Code Length Disabled
Codabar Start and Stop Character Match Disabled

Start and Stop Character Transmitted
Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled
Fixed Code Length Disabled
Check Sum Digit Enabled - Modulus 16
Check Sum Digit Not Transmitted
Code I 2 of 5 Check Sum Digit Disabled

Code Length #1 = 10
Code Length #2 = 6
Code 128 Fixed Code Length Disabled
Operational Modes
Startup Mode
Normal Mode
Paused Mode
Startup Mode
Step Actions for a Startup
1 Check load queue barcode reader.
2 Check processing queue barcode reader.
3 Initialize load queue lane(s).
4 Sets active load lane (if in a multi-module configuration).
5 Initialize load transfer mechanism.
6 Initialize processing queue conveyors.
7 Initialize starwheel(s).
8 Initialize unload transfer mechanism.
9 Initialize unload queue lane(s).
10 Sets active unload queue lane.
11 Go to READY
Normal Mode
Step Actions For A Normal Run

1 The customer introduces sample carriers onto the load queue beginning in lane 1 and moving on to lane 2 if they are in a
multi-module system. This assumes that the customer has ordered their tests and input the sample carrier ID, sample
carrier position number, and the sample SID for each sample into the SCC or through a host computer. The customer
presses the RUN button on the standard sample handler keypad. RUN may also be selected from the SCC.
2 The first sample carrier in lane 1 is moved forward until it makes contact with the carrier present microswitch.
3 The system checks to see if the BCR Full sensor is activated. If it is not activated, the load transfer mechanism begins
the transfer of the sample carrier to the processing module. If it is activated, the transfer does not occur until the switch is
deactivated (sample carrier moves on to the aspirate position).
4 As the transfer mechanism moves the sample carrier from the load queue to the processing module, it passes the load
queue barcode reader. This barcode reader reads the sample carrier ID, the sample carrier position numbers and the SID
of each tube in the carrier. This information is then passed back to the SCC (System Control Center) to begin tracking the
sample carrier. This information is used to tell the instrument which sample goes to which module.
5 The sample carrier is then moved to the starwheel by the processing queue conveyor. Once at the starwheel, the carrier
present at the BCR sensor is activated.
If the processing queue full sensor is activated, the starwheel does not allow the carrier to move. Once sampling
begins from the carrier, all positions must complete.
If the processing queue full sensor is not activated, the starwheel moves to the beginning of a scan position and
then moves to the aspirate position. While doing this, the barcode was activated and the sample carrier ID was
scanned.
Then position 1 is sent through the barcode read procedure and the sample tube is presented at the aspirate point.
6 Once the sample tube is at the aspirate point, the SCC is checked to see if that sample carrier ID and carrier position ID is
to be sampled at that processing module.
If it is, sample aspiration occurs.

If it is not, that sample is skipped over.
7 The system then tells the starwheel to advance the sample carrier to the next beginning scan position and then moves the
sample carrier, reads the sample carrier position number, and positions sample tube #2 at the aspiration point. The SCC
verifies that this tube has tests to be run on this module.
If it does, sample aspiration occurs.

If it does not, that sample is skipped over.
This operation continues for all positions (five) on the sample carrier.
8 When the sample carrier has been processed completely at the aspiration point, it is ready to be moved to the unload
transfer mechanism. The carrier is stopped at the gate solenoid assembly. This assembly has two sensors. The first
sensor allows carrier advance and the second sensor tells the unload transfer mechanism to move the carrier to the
unload queue.
9 Once at the first gate solenoid sensor the instrument tells the solenoid arm to raise up and let the carrier pass through.
Once the carrier passes through, the first gate solenoid sensor becomes inactive causing the arm to be released, stopping
any other carrier from proceeding.
10 Once the carrier passes through, the second sensor on the gate solenoid is checked. This sensor is looking to see that it
is not activated (the carrier has passed through it). This then tells the unload transfer mechanism to open its arm and
push the carrier off the sample queue conveyor and onto the unload queue assembly. These two sensors are interrupt
driven so nothing further can happen until software resets their readings and begins the sequence again.
Paused Mode
Step Actions For Paused
1 The Load queue paused mode is initiated by one of the following:
The operator selected paused from the Snapshot screen by selecting the SSH graphic and pressing the F7 - Pause
key.
The operator selected the pause key on the SSH keypad.
Note
The paused mode is selected to allow the operator to insert a sample carrier containing priority samples.
Sixty (60) seconds has elaspsed without a carrier detected and scaned at the Load queue bar code scanner.
The sample unload queue are full.
All processing modules are unavailable for sample processing.
2 The Load queue motor will stop advancing the belt.
3 The SSH will remain the paused mode until the operator selects run, stop or turns off the system power.
Possible Standard Sample Handler Error conditions and the Error Recovery attempted
Mechanism Error Error Recovery
Stepper Motor Error Notify user of error.

Attempt to switch to other lane. If single lane configuration or other
lane is not ready, no more carriers can be loaded.
Carriers on sample queue or unload queue continue to be
processed.
SH waits until sample queue conveyors timeout and transitions
SSH to stopped state.
Carrier detect sensor does not Conveyor continues to run until conveyor timeout.
detect carrier On dual lane system switches to other lane and attempts to find
carriers.
If single lane configuration, no carriers are transferred to sample
queue.
Load Queue Carrier detect sensor detects Load queue conveyor is never turned on.
Lane Conveyor carriers all the time Attempts to transfer carrier to sample queue.
On dual lane system switches to other lane after carrier limit is
reached.
Load queue gate does not User is notified of error.

open/close Does not attempt to transfer carrier from load queue lane.
Attempts to switch to other lane.
If single lane configuration or other lane is not ready, no more
carriers can be loaded.
processed.

Does not transfer carrier to sample queue.
No more carriers are loaded.
processed.
Step Loss Error Notify user of error.

Detection occurs after mechanism moves to park.
Load Transfer Carriers on sample queue or unload queue continue to be
Mechanism processed.
Arm does not extend/retract Notify user of error.

Does not transfer carrier to sample queue.
processed.
No read or no barcode error on User is notified of error.

carrier ID No sample aspirations are performed on carrier.

position ID No sample aspirations are performed on carrier.

SID Barcode SID On auto assigned positions, sample aspirations are performed from
Reader that sample position if no barcodes were read.
No sample aspirations are performed on carrier.
Load BCR carrier detect sensor No carriers are transferred to sample queue.
detects carrier at all times
Load BCR carrier detect sensor Possible carrier jam condition if sensor is truly blocked.
never detects carrier
Sample Queue Stepper Motor Error Notify user of error.

Conveyor SH waits until sample queue conveyors timeout and transitions

No more aspirations are performed from carrier.

No more aspirations are performed from carrier.
Starwheel Carrier Detect sensor never No aspiration from carriers.

detects carrier
Carrier detect sensor detects Indexes starwheel and attempts to position non-existent carrier for
carrier at all times aspiration.
No barcode is scanned so an attempt is made to release carrier.
Sample queue full sensor never Possible carrier jam condition if carrier is blocking sensor.
detects carrier
Sample queue full sensor detects No aspiration from carriers.

carrier at all times
No read or no barcode error on Notify user of error.

carrier ID No sample aspirations are performed on carrier.
Aspirate
Barcode No read or no barcode error on Notify user of error.
Readers position ID No sample aspirations are performed from that sample position.

Does not transfer carrier to unload queue.
No more carriers are unloaded.
Carriers on sample queue or load queue continue to be processed.

Detection occurs after mechanism moves to park.
Unload Transfer Carriers on sample queue or load queue continue to be processed.
Mechanism SH waits until sample queue conveyors timeout and transitions
Arm does not extend/retract Notify user of error.

Does not transfer carrier to unload queue.

Attempts to switch to other lane.
If single lane configuration or other lane is not ready, no more
carriers can be unloaded.
Unload Queue
Lane Pusher
Lane Full Sensor does not detect Possible step loss error on either unload pusher or unload transfer
carrier arm once unload lane gets full of carriers.
Lane Full Sensor detects carriers Never attempts to transfer carrier to unload lane.
all the time. On dual lane system, switches to other lane if lane is not full.
Global Cover breach Notify user of error.

Allow any transfers (load or unload) in progress to complete.
Sample aspirations in progress (ACK to module aspiration request)
are allowed to complete.
Further aspirations are not allowed.
Troubleshooting
reserved.
Block/Functional Diagrams
Module Block Diagram
ARM ARM Electrical Connections

ARM ARM Fluidics Components, Decontamination Mode
ARM ARM Fluidics Components, Flush Mode (After Decontamination)
ARM ARM Fluidics Components, Flush Mode (Normal Start)

ARM ARM Fluidics Components, Normal Operation
i2000/i2000SR Buffer Delivery and Vacuum System
i2000/i2000SR Cover and Waste Chute
i2000/i2000SR Fluidic/Waste Diagrams
i2000/i2000SR Keypad Process Module (LUI)
i2000/i2000SR LLS and Pressure Monitoring
i2000/i2000SR Optics
i2000/i2000SR Power Distribution (78700 & 92694)
i2000/i2000SR Pre-Trigger and Trigger
i2000/i2000SR Process Module Controller
i2000/i2000SR Process Path
i2000/i2000SR R1 Pipettor
i2000/i2000SR R1 Pipettor Syringe
i2000/i2000SR R2 Pipettor
i2000/i2000SR R2 Pipettor Syringe
i2000/i2000SR Reagent Carousels
i2000/i2000SR RV Load
i2000/i2000SR Sample Pipettor
i2000/i2000SR Sample Pipettor Syringe
i2000/i2000SR Shutter
i2000SR STAT Pipettor (i2000SR)
i2000SR STAT Pipettor Syringe (i2000SR)
i2000/i2000SR Temperature Heater Control
i2000/i2000SR Vortexer (Base #76656)
i2000/i2000SR Vortexer (Base #78382)
i2000/i2000SR Wash Zone 1

i2000/i2000SR Wash Zone 2
reserved.
Buffer Delivery and Vacuum System
Buffer Delivery and Vacuum System
ARM Electrical Connections
ARM Fluidics Components, Decontamination Mode
ARM Fluidics Components, Flush Mode (Normal Start)
ARM Fluidics Components, Flush Mode (After Decontamination)

reserved.
ARM Fluidics Components, Normal Operation
Cover and Waste Chute
Fluidic/Waste Diagrams
Buffer
Pre-Trigger/Trigger
Waste
Legend
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-110) • Copyright 2002, 2006 • ARCHITECT, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Keypad Process Module (LUI)
LLS and Pressure Monitoring
LLS Interconnect Information

R1 LLS Block Diagram
R1 LLS Cable Diagram

R1 LLS Wiring Diagram
R2 LLS Block Diagram
R2 LLS Cable Diagram
R2 LLS Wiring Diagram
Sample LLS Block Diagram
Sample LLS Cable Diagram
Sample LLS Wiring Diagram
STAT LLS Block Diagram
STAT LLS Cable Diagram
STAT LLS Wiring Diagram
reserved.
Optics
Power Distribution (78700 & 92694)
Note
This diagram for 78700 only.
Note
This diagram for 92694 only.
Note
This diagram for 78700 and 92694.
Pre-Trigger and Trigger
Process Module Controller
Process Path
Process Path
Process Path
Process Path
reserved.
R1 Pipettor
R1 Pipettor
R1 Pipettor
Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, iSystem, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
R1 Pipettor Syringe
R1 Pipettor Syringe
R1 Pipettor Syringe
R2 Pipettor
R2 Pipettor
R2 Pipettor
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-118) • © 2002, 2009 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, and i 2000 SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, c 8000, ci8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
R2 Pipettor Syringe
R2 Pipettor Syringe
R2 Pipettor Syringe
Reagent Carousels
Reagent Carousels
Reagent Carousels
Reagent Carousels
RV Load
RV Load
RV Load
RV Load
Sample Pipettor
Sample Pipettor
Sample Pipettor
Sample Pipettor Syringe
Sample Pipettor Syringe

Shutter
Shutter
STAT Pipettor (i 2000 SR)
reserved.
STAT Pipettor Syringe (i 2000 SR)
STAT Pipettor Syringe (i 2000 SR)
Temperature Heater Control
Vortexer (Base #76656)
Wash Zone 1
Wash Zone 1
Wash Zone 1
Wash Zone 1
Wash Zone 2
Wash Zone 2
Wash Zone 2
Wash Zone 2
2.10 Cable Locator
Part Cable Block Diag

Location Ref Des Origin Cable Description/ Destination
# Ref # Ref Ref
W2 76551 Card Cage Outer and Inner Carousel Motor Reagent

- J277 Carousels
W49 76598 Card Cage Outer and Inner Carousel Encoders & Home Snsrs Reagent
- J201 Carousels
W72 76621 Card Cage R1 LLS Antenna - J1 R1 Pipettor

- J328
Harness, Cable
76963
#1 (i 2000 only) W73 76622 Card Cage R1 LLS Antenna Power - J4 & W147 Cable - J1 R1 Pipettor
- J325
W88 76637 Card Cage Buffer Bottle Sensor Buffer
- J110 Delivery and
Vacuum
System
W3 76552 Card Cage Dispersion Motor Reagent
- J279 Carousels
W6 76555 Card Cage R1 Pipettor Theta & R1 Pipettor Z Motor R1 Pipettor

- J375
W7 76556 Card Cage R1 Syringe Bd - J1 R1 Pipettor
- J376 Syringe
W10 76559 Card Cage Shutter Motor Shutter

- J378
W51 76600 Card Cage Dispersion Encoder Reagent
- J202 Carousels
W53 76602 Card Cage R1 Pipettor Theta Home Sensor Bd (Sensor Bd 13) - R1 Pipettor
- J300 J1 & Z Home Sensor Board (Sensor Bd 12) - J1
Harness, Cable W56 76605 Card Cage Shutter Home Sensor (Sensor Bd 1) - J1 Shutter
76964
#2 (i 2000 only) - J303
W71 76620 Card Cage 78537 Cable (R1 Probe LLS/Crash Sensor Cable - R1 Pipettor
- J329 Probe LLS half)
W74 76623 Card Cage R1 Pressure Monitor Board - JP2 R1 Pipettor
- J326
- J327 Crash Sensor half)
W93 76642 Card Cage Thermistor Processing Path Zone 6 Temperature
- J128 Heater
Control
W102,103 76901 Card Cage PMT Power, Signal and Cal Board Optics
- J150
W5 76554 Card Cage Sample Syringe Bd - J1 Sample
- J275 Pipettor
Syringe
W52 76601 Card Cage Sample Pipettor Theta Home Sensor - J1 & Sample Sample
- J203 Pipettor Z Home Sensor - J1 Pipettor
W66 76615 Card Cage 78537 Cable (Sample Probe LLS/Crash Sensor Cable Sample
- J229 - Probe LLS half) Pipettor
W67 76616 Card Cage Sample Antenna Bd - J1 (LLS) Sample

- J228 Pipettor
Harness, Cable
76965 W68 76617 Card Cage Sample Antenna Bd - J2 (Power) Sample
#3
- J225 Pipettor
W69 76618 Card Cage Sample Pressure Monitor Board - JP2 Sample
- J226 Pipettor
W70 76619 Card Cage 78537 Cable (Sample Probe LLS/Crash Sensor Cable Sample
- J227 - Crash Sensor half) Pipettor
W85 76634 Card Cage Assay Module Local User Interface Process
- J101 Module
Controller
W28 76577 Card Cage VTX #1 Sensor Bd - J3 (78382 Vortexor) or J2 (76656 Vortexer
- J180 Vortexor) (Base
#78382)
W32 76581 Card Cage RV Load Divert Solonoid, RV Load Divert Sensor Bd - Process Path
- J176 J1, RV Unload Solenoid & RV Unload Sensor Bd - J1
Harness, Cable
76966 W34 76583 Card Cage RV Load Divert Shutter Solenoid Process Path
#4 (i 2000 only)
- J178
W90 76639 Card Cage Thermistor Processing Path Zone 1 Temperature
- J125 Heater
Control
W15 76564 Card Cage RV Transport Motor, RV Wheel Motor RV Load
- J479
W59 76608 Card Cage RV Transport Home Sensor Bd - J1, RV Wheel Home RV Load
- J402 Sensor - J1
Harness, Cable W104 76904 Card Cage RV Sensor Bd - J1, Hopper Level Sensor Bd - J3 RV Load
76967
#5 (i 2000 only) - J152
N/A 92138 Power Ionizer Fan
Supply -
J927
W8 76557 Card Cage Wash Zone 2 Motor Wash Zone
- J377 2
- J181 Vortexor) (Base
#78382)
W36 76585 Card Cage Wash Zone 2 Valves 1 - 4, Wash Zone Vacuum Wash Zone
- J175 Vessel Top and Bottom Valves, Trigger Dispense 2
Main and Waste Valves, PreTrigger Dispense main
and Waste Valves.
W54 76603 Card Cage Wash Zone 2 Home Sensor - J1 Wash Zone
Harness, Cable
76970 - J301 2
#6 (i 2000 only)
W94 76643 Card Cage Wash Zone 2 Aspirate and Heater Thermisters, Temperature
- J129 Trigger and Pre-Trigger Thermisters Heater
Control
W127 76927 Power Trigger (Zone 7) and Pretrigger (Zone 8) Heater Temperature
Supply - Heater
J923 Control
W130 76930 Power Wash Zone 2 Buffer Heater Temperature

Supply - Heater
J926 Control
W9 76558 Card Cage Trigger Pump, Pretrigger Pump Pre-Trigger
- J379 and Trigger
W17 76566 Card Cage R1 Wash Cup Pump, R2 Wash Cup Pump R1 Pipettor
- J575 Syringe
W18 76567 Card Cage Sample Pipetter Pump, R1 Pipettor Pump R1 Pipettor
- J576 Syringe
W19 76568 Card Cage R2 Pipettor Pump R2 Pipettor

- J577 Syringe
W20 76569 Card Cage Wash Zone 1 Pump, Wash Zone 2 Pump Wash Zone
- J578 1
W40 76589 Card Cage R1 Wash Cup Valve, R2 Wash Cup Valve, Inlet Buffer R1 Pipettor
- J183 Valve Syringe
W55 76604 Card Cage Trigger Pump Home Sensor - J1, Pretrigger Pump Pre-Trigger
- J302 Home Sensor - J1 and Trigger
Harness, Cable
76971
#7 (i 2000 only) W61 76610 Card Cage R1 Wash Cup Pump Home Sensor Bd - J1, R2 Wash Sample
- J500 Cup Pump Home Sensor Bd - J1, Sample Pipetter Pipettor
Pump Home Sensor Bd - J1. R1 Pipetter Pump Home Syringe
Sensor Bd - J1
W63 76612 Card Cage R2 Pipetter Pump Home Sensor Bd - J1, Wash Zone R2 Pipettor
- J501 1 Pump Home Sensor Bd - J1, Wash Zone 2 Pump Syringe
Home Sensor Bd - J1
W144 76944 Card Cage Transfer Pump Motor Buffer
- J185 Delivery and
Vacuum
System
W154 76978 Card Cage 76979 (Drain Fluidics Assembly) Cable, Flow Switch Buffer
- J184,186 Assy Delivery and
Vacuum
System
W4 76553 Card Cage Sample Pipettor Theta Motor, Sample Pipetter Z Motor Sample
- J278 Pipettor
Harness, Cable
76972 W105 76905 Card Cage Waste Chute Sensor - J3, Trigger Bottle Level Pre-Trigger
#8 (i 2000 only)
- J153 Sensor, Pretrigger Bottle Sensor and Trigger
W91 76640 Card Cage Processing Path Zone 2 Thermistor, Processing Path Temperature
- J126 Zone 3 Thermistor Heater
Control
W98 76647 Card Cage Ambient Temperature Thermistor Temperature

- J133 Heater
Control
W108 76908 Card Cage Processing Queue Door Switch Sensor Board - J3 Cover and
Harness, Cable
76973 - J614 Door
#9
Switches
W109 76909 Card Cage Reagent Lid Sensor Bd - J1 Process Path

- J156
W125 76925 Power Processing Path Heater Zones 2, Processing Path Temperature
Supply - Heater Zone 3 Heater
J921 Control
W161 76464 Card Cage Wash Zone 1 Diverter Sensor Bd - J1 Wash Zone
- J204 1
W11 76560 Card Cage R2 Pipettor Theta Motor & R2 Pipettor Z Motor R2 Pipettor
- J475
W12 76561 Card Cage R2 Syringe Bd - J1 R2 Pipettor
- J476 Syringe
W57 76606 Card Cage R2 Pipettor Theta Home Sensor Bd - J1, Z Home R2 Pipettor
- J400 Sensor Bd - J1
Harness, Cable
- J429 Probe LLS half)
76974 #10 (i 2000
only) W79 76628 Card Cage R2 Pressure Monitor Board - JP2 R2 Pipettor
- J426
- J427 Crash Sensor half)
W107 76907 Card Cage Front and Rear Lid Sensor Bd - J3 Cover and
- J154 Door
Switches
W160 76959 Card Cage Wash Zone 1 Diverter Motor Wash Zone
- J280 1
W82 76631 Card Cage Power Supply - J908 (Card Cage +/- 12VDC) Power
- J51 Distribution
(78700 &
92694)
W84 76633 Card Cage Processing Module Ethernet - Lower Port Process
- J100 Module
Controller
W87 76636 Card Cage Power Supply - J909 Process

Harness, Cable
76975 - J103 Module
#11
Controller
W99 76648 Card Cage Power Supply - J930 Temperature

- J131 Heater
Control
W110 76910 Card Cage Sample Handler Ethernet - Upper Port Process
- J600 Module
Controller
W81 76630 Card Cage Power Supply - J907 (Cardcage 5V Power) Power
- J50 Distribution
(78700 &
92694)
W83 76632 Card Cage Power Supply - J900 (Cardcage 36V Power) Power
- J52 Distribution
(78700 &
92694)
W131 76931 Power Cardcage Fans Power

Harness, Cable
Supply - Distribution
76976 #12 (i 2000
J901 (78700 &
only)
92694)
W136 76936 Power Reagent Cooler - PWR Temperature

Supply - Heater
J940 Control
W140 76940 Power Emergency Power Switch Power

J928 (78700 &
92694)
W122 76922 RV24 Sample Antenna Bd - J3 Sample

Antenna Pipettor
Bd - J1
W123 76923 Sample RV 24 Antenna Bd - J2 Sample
Antenna Pipettor
Bd - J4
W145 76945 RV1 RV24 Antenna Bd- J3 Sample
Harness, Cable
Antenna Pipettor
76977 #13 (i 2000
Bd - J1
only)
W146 76946 RV2 R1 Antenna Bd - J3 R2 Pipettor
Antenna
Bd - J5
W147 76947 R1 RV Antenna Bd - J2 R1 Pipettor
Antenna
Bd -J1
W153 76906 Sample 76911 (W111) Cable Keypad (LUI)
Handler
LUI Bd
W135 76935 Power Back Corner Fan Power
J905 (78700 &
92694)
W143 76943 Lid Sensor Top Rear Lid Switch Cover and
Bd - J2 Door
Switches
N/A 76952 Lid Sensor Top Front Lid Switch Cover and
Bd - J1 Door
Switches
Cables, N/A 76953 Sample Sample Window Sensor Cover and
78224
Structure Window Door
Sensor Bd Switches
- J2
N/A 76960 Sol Cable Solenoid Extender Load Queue
and Load
Transfer
N/A 76961 Snsr Cable Sensor Extender Load Queue

and Load
Transfer
N/A 76979 77978 Reagent Vacuum Vessel Top Valve, Reagent Vacuum Buffer
Cable Vessel Bottom Valve, Liquid in Accumulator Sensor, Delivery and
(W154) Accumulator Vacuum Sensor, Accumulator Bottom Vacuum
Valve System

- J428
- J425
Harness, Cable W86 76635 Card Cage Reagent BCR Process

78762 - J102 Module
#14
Controller
W100 76649 Card Cage Reagent Cooler Thermistor Temperature

- J132 Heater
Control
W1 76550 Card Cage Process Path Motor Process Path

- J276
Harness, Cable - J182 Vortexor) (Base
78763
#15 #78382)
W48 76597 Card Cage Process Path Motor Encoder, Process Path Home Process Path
- J200 Sensor Bd - J1
W13 76562 Card Cage Wash Zone 1 Motor Wash Zone
- J477 1
W35 76584 Card Cage Wash Zone 1 Manifold Valves 1 - 4, Vacuum Vessel Wash Zone
- J177 Top Valve, Vacuum Vessel Valve Bottom Valve 1
W58 76607 Card Cage Wash Zone 1 Home Sensor Wash Zone
- J401 1
Harness, Cable W92 76641 Card Cage Wash Zone 1 Aspirate Thermisters, Wash Zone 1 Wash Zone
78764 - J127 Buffer Heater 1
#16
W126 76926 Power Wash Zone 1 Heater Temperature
Supply Heater
J922 Control
W129 76929 Power Process Path Heaters Zones 5 & 6 Temperature

Supply Heater
J925 Control
W124 76924 Power Heater Zones 1 and 6 Temperature

Supply - Heater
J920 Control
W132 76932 Power Waste Can Area Upper Fan Power

Harness, Cable J902 (78700 &
78765
#17 92694)
W133 76933 Power Waste Can Area Lower Fan Power

J903 (78700 &
92694)
N/A 92391 Card Cage 92392 Cable i 2000 SH

- J45 Interconnect
(IAHV Diagram
Debug
Port)
92392 92391 Digiboard Cable P7 i 2000 SH

Cable Interconnect
(IAHV) Diagram
92393 ICW 1 Null Modem Cable i 2000 SH

Debug Cable Kit
92394 Interconnect
Diagram
92391 Digiboard Cable P7 SCC

Cable Interconnect
(SSH) Diagram
Card Cage 92392 Cable SCC

- J46 (SSH Interconnect
Debug Diagram
Port)
N/A 92474 ARM PCB Mounted to Back of ARM (ARM RS232 Port)
ARM Pump - J12
Control (ARM
92476 92475 Arm RS232 Float Switch on Buffer Bottle
without ISA 115-
Port
032X)
W40 93935 P183 R1/R2 Wash Cup and Buffer Valves R1 Pipettor
Cardcage Syringe
W154 93934 P184, Drain Fluidics Cable Buffer

P186 Delivery and
Cardcage Vacuum
System
W144 93938 P185 Transfer Pump Buffer

Cardcage Delivery and
Vacuum
System
W55 93936 P302 Trigger/Pretrigger Pump Home Sensors Pre-Trigger

Cardcage and Trigger
W9 93767 P379 Trigger/Pretrigger Pump Motors Pre-Trigger

Cardcage and Trigger
W61 93937 P500 R1/R2 Wash Cup/ Smpl/ R1 Pump Hm Snsrs R1 Pipettor
Cardcage Syringe and
R2 Pipettor
94072 Harness Lower
Syringe
or Left, Pump Rack
93775 (i 2000 SR only) W63 93750 P501 R2/Stat/Wash1/Wash2 Pump Home Sensors R1 Pipettor
Cardcage Syringe
W17 93768 P575 R1/R2 Wash Cup Pump Motors R1 Pipettor

R2 Pipettor
Syringe
W18 93769 P576 Sample/R1 Pipettor Pump Motors R1 Pipettor

R2 Pipettor
Syringe
W19 93770 P577 R2/Stat Pump Motors R1 Pipettor

R2 Pipettor
Syringe
W20 93771 P578 Wash1/Wash 2 Pump Motors Wash Zone
Cardcage 1/Wash
Zone 2
W88 76637 P110 Buffer Bottle Sensor Buffer

Cardcage Delivery and
Vacuum
System
W49 76598 P201 Outer/ Inner Crsl Encoders & Home Sensors Reagent
Cardcage Carousels
94073 Harness Left
or Back Above 1 W2 76551 P277 Outer & Inner Carousel Motor Reagent
93912 (i 2000 SR only) Cardcage Carousels
W73 76622 P325 R1 LLS Antenna Power R1 Pipettor

Cardcage
W72 76621 P328 R1 LLS Antenna R1 Pipettor
Cardcage
W93 76642 P128 Thermistor Zone 6 Temperature

Cardcage Heater
Control
W102 76901 P150, PMT Pwr, Signal and Cal Bd Optics

W103 P151
Cardcage
W51 76600 P202 Dispersion Encoder Reagent
Cardcage Carousels
W3 76552 P279 Dispersion Motor Reagent

Cardcage Carousels
W53 76602 P300 R1 Pipettor Theta & Z Home Sensors R1 Pipettor

Cardcage
94074 Harness Left W56 76605 P303 Shutter Home Sensor Shutter
or Back Above 2 Cardcage
93913 ( i2000 SR only) W74 76623 P326 R1 Pressure Monitor Board R1 Pipettor
Cardcage
W75 76624 P327 R1 Probe Z Sensor R1 Pipettor
Cardcage
W71 76620 P329 R1 Probe LLS R1 Pipettor
Cardcage
W6 93766 P375 R1 Pipettor Motors R1 Pipettor
Cardcage
W7 76556 P376 R1 Syringe R1 Pipettor
Cardcage Syringe
W10 76559 P378 Shutter Motor Shutter

Cardcage
W90 76639 P125 Thermistor Zone 1 Temperature

Cardcage Heater
Control
W32 76581 P176 RV Diverter & Snsr, Unload Sol & Snsr Process Path
94075 Harness Left Cardcage
or Front 2 W34 76583 P178 Load Shutter Process Path
93914 ( i2000 SR only) Cardcage
W28 76577 P180 VTX 1 Motor and Sensor Vortexer
Cardcage (Base
#78382)
W94 76643 P129 Thermistors at Wash Area 2 Temperature

Cardcage Heater
Control
W36 76585 P175 Wash 2 Val, Vac Ves, Trig/Ptrig Val Wash Zone
Cardcage 2
W31 94068 P181 VTX 3 Motor & Sensor Vortexer

Cardcage (Base
#78382)
94076 Harness Left W54 76603 P301 Wash 2 Home Sensor Wash Zone
or Back Above 3 Cardcage 2
93915 ( i2000 SR only)
W8 76557 P377 Wash 2 Motor Wash Zone
Cardcage 2
W127 76927 P923 Trigger & Pretrigger Heater Temperature

Power Heater
Supply Control
W130 76930 P926 Wash Block 2 Heater Temperature

Power Heater
Supply Control
W105 76905 P153 Solid Wst, Trig, PreTrig Bottle Snsrs Pre-Trigger
94077 Harness Left Cardcage and Trigger
or Front 1 W4 93772 P278 Sample Pipettor Motors Sample
93916 ( i2000 SR only) Cardcage Pipettor
W107 76907 P154 Front and Rear Lid Sensor Cover and
Cardcage Door
Switches
W161 76464 P204 Bypass Flipper Home Sensor Wash Zone

Cardcage 1
W160 93749 P280 Bypass Flipper Motor Wash Zone

Cardcage 1
W57 76606 P400 R2 Pipettor Theta & Z Home Sensors R2 Pipettor

Cardcage
W79 76628 P426 R2 Pressure Monitor Bd R2 Pipettor
Cardcage
94078 Harness Right
or Back Above 1 W80 76629 P427 R2 Probe Z Sensor R2 Pipettor
93917 ( i2000 SR only) Cardcage
W76 76625 P429 R2 Probe LLS R2 Pipettor
Cardcage
W11 93773 P475 R2 Pipettor Motors R2 Pipettor
Cardcage
W12 76561 P476 R2 Syringe R2 Pipettor
Cardcage Syringe
W135 76935 P905 Back Corner Fan Power

Power Distribution
Supply (78700 &
92694)
W171 93971 Chassis Dispersion Motor Ground Wire Reagent
Ground Carousels
W147 76947 J1, R1 Ant R1 to RV1 & RV2 Antenna Power R1 Pipettor
Pwr
W175 93741 P1, R2 Ant R2 to RV47 & RV48 Antenna Power R2 Pipettor
Pwr
W145 76945 P1, RV1 RV1 to RV24 Antenna R1 Pipettor
94079 Ant
LLS Cables
or W122 76922 P1, RV24 RV24 to Sample Antenna Sample
( i2000 SR only)
93918 Ant Pipettor
W123 76923 P4, Smpl Sample to RV24 Antenna Power Sample

Ant Pwr Pipettor
W146 76946 P5, RV2 R1 to RV1 & RV2 Antenna R1 Pipettor

Ant
W174 93740 P5, RV48 RV48 to R2 Antenna Signal R2 Pipettor
Ant
W30 94067 P182 VTX 2 Motor and Sensor Vortexer
Cardcage (Base
#78382)
94080 Harness Right
W48 76597 P200 Process Path Encoder and HM Snsr Process Path
or Back Above 3
Cardcage
93919 ( i2000 SR only)
W1 93776 P276 Process Path Motor Process Path
Cardcage
W92 76641 P127 Wash Zone 1 Thermistors Wash Zone

Cardcage 1
W35 76584 P177 Wash Zone 1 Valves, Vac Ves Valves Wash Zone
Cardcage 1
W58 76607 P401 Wash Zone 1 Home Sensor Wash Zone

Cardcage 1
94081 Harness Right W13 76562 P477 Wash Zone 1 Motor Wash Zone
or Back Above 4 Cardcage 1
93920 ( i2000 SR only)
W126 76926 P922 Heater Zones 4 & 5 Temperature
Power Heater
Supply Control
W129 76929 P925 Wash Block 1 Heater Wash Zone

Power 1
Supply
W60 92657 P111 RV Loader Sensor Cal Cable RV Load
Cardcage
W104 93929 P152 RV Loader Sensors RV Load
Cardcage
W59 93926 P402 RV Transport and Orienter Sensors RV Load
94082 Harness Right Cardcage
or Front STAT1 A
W29 93743 P526 STAT Pressure Monitor STAT
93921 ( i2000 SR only)
Cardcage Pipettor
(i 2000 SR)
W41 93747 P705 STAT Diverter and Sensors STAT

Cardcage Pipettor
(i 2000 SR)
W37 93746 P179 STAT Vortexer (VTX 4) Mtr and Snsr Vortexer
Cardcage (Base
#78382)
W16 93765 P305 STAT Pipettor Sensors STAT

Cardcage Pipettor
(i 2000 SR)
W33 93744 P380, STAT Pipettor Motors STAT

P478 Pipettor
94083 Harness Right (i 2000 SR)
or Front STAT2
93922 ( i2000 SR only) W15 93774 P479 RV Transport and Orient Motors RV Load
Cardcage
W14 93745 P480 STAT Syringe PCB STAT
Cardcage Pipettor
Syringe
(i 2000 SR)
W62 93816 P731 Hopper Reflective Sensor Cable RV Load

Cardcage
W86 76635 P102 Reagent BCR Process

Cardcage Module
Controller
W100 76649 P132 Refrigerator Thermistor Temperature

94084 Harness Right Cardcage Heater
or Back Above 2 Control
93923 ( i2000 SR only) W39 93742 P425 R2 and RV47-48 Antenna Pwr Cable R2 Pipettor
Cardcage
W77 94066 P428 R2 LLS Antenna Cable R2 Pipettor
Cardcage
W97 93739 P525 STAT Probe LLS Ant Power STAT

Cardcage Pipettor
(i 2000 SR)
W43 93714 P527 STAT Probe Z Crash Sensor STAT

Cardcage Pipettor
Harness Right (i 2000 SR)
94069 Front STAT1 B W64 93738 P528 STAT Probe LLS Ant Signal STAT
( i2000 SR only) Cardcage Pipettor
(i 2000 SR)
W42 93713 P529 STAT Probe LLS STAT

Cardcage Pipettor
(i 2000 SR)
W150 76994 Structure RV1 LLS Bd,PPath,Inner/Outer Crsls,Disp. Mtrs. Gnd LLS and
Ground (5) Wires Pressure
points Monitoring
N/A 92380 RV Loader RV Loader Transport Motor

Ground
Point
N/A 92381 Outer Inner Pump Rack Drawer Ground Point

Pump Rack
Drawer
Ground
Point
N/A 92406 Wash Zone Structure Ground Point

1 Bypass
N/A Structure
Motor
Inner Pump Structure Ground Point

Rack
Drawer
Ground
Point
RV Loader RV Loader Wheel Motor

Ground
Point
RV Loader Struccture Ground Point

Transport
Motor
reserved.
Card Cage
Links
Card Cage Backplane

Card Cage Boards
Cable Connections
Card Cage Boards
Card Cage Slot Location
Slot i2000 i2000SR ci8200

Upper Slot #1 Indexer #1 (SH - i4000, i6000, i8000) SPARE SPARE
Upper Slot #4 SPARE LLS #3 (STAT Pipettor) LLS #3 (STAT Pipettor)
Lower Slot #1 Motor Driver #0 (SH - i4000, i6000, i8000) SPARE SPARE
Cable Connections
Indexer and Motor Driver Connections
Processing Module
Motor Home
Motor Power Sensor
Motor Description BD & Cardcage Slot # Circuit
# Fuse
Axis
Cable Conn Cable Conn
0 Process Path W1 J276 W48 J200 X
1 Reagent CRSL W2 J277 W49 J201 Y

(Outer)
2 Reagent CRSL W2 J277 W49 J201 Z

(Inner)
3 Dispersion CRSL W3 J279 W51 J202 T

Indexer 0 in Slot Motor Driver 0 in Slot
4 Sample Pipettor, W4 J278 W52 J203 U F5
Upper 11 Lower 6
Theta
5 Sample Pipettor, Z W4 J278 W52 J203 V
6 Sample Syringe W5 J275 W5 J275 R
7 Wash 1 Switch W160 J280 W35 J204 S

Diverter
8 R1 Pipettor, Theta W6 J375 W53 J300 X

9 R1 Pipettor, Z W6 J375 W53 J300 Y
10 R1 Syringe W7 J376 W7 J376 Z
11 Wash Zone #2 W8 J377 W54 J301 T
12 Trigger Pump W9 J379 W55 J302 Indexer 1 in Slot Motor Driver in Slot U F6
Upper 9 Lower 5
13 Pre-trigger Pump W9 J379 W55 J302 V
14 Shutter W10 J378 W56 J303 R
15 STAT Pipettor Theta W133 J380 W16 J305 S

Axis
16 R2 Pipettor, Theta W11 J475 W57 J400 X
17 R2 Pipettor, Z W11 J475 W57 J400 Y
18 R2 Syringe W12 J476 W12 J476 Z
19 Wash Zone #1 W13 J477 W58 J401 T

Indexer 2 in Slot Motor Driver 2 in Slot F7
20 RV Orientor W15 J479 W59 J402 U
Upper 7 Lower 4
21 RV Transport W15 J479 W59 J402 V
22 STAT Pipettor W33 J478 W16 J480 R

Syringe
23 STAT Pipettor Z Axis W14 J480 W14 J480 S F6
24 R1 Washcup Pump W17 J575 W61 J500 X
25 R2 Washcup Pump W17 J575 W61 J500 Y
26 Sample Pipettor W18 J576 W61 J500 Z

Pump
27 R1 Pipettor Pump W18 J576 W61 J500 T

Indexer 3 in Slot Motor Driver 3 in Slot
28 R2 Pipettor Pump W19 J577 W63 J501 U F8
Upper 5 Lower 3
29 STAT Probe Buffer W19 J577 W63 J501 V
Pump
30 Wash Zone #1 Pump W20 J578 W63 J501 R
31 Wash Zone #2 Pump W20 J578 W63 J501 S
MODULE 0 Standard Sample Handler (i2000 only)
Motor Power Home Sensor

Motor Motor
BD & Cardcage Slot # Circuit
# Description Fuse
Cable Conn Cable Conn Axis
0 Inner Load W21 J678 W114 J606 X F10

Queue
1 Load Transfer W21 J678 W114 J606 Y F10
2 Unload W22 J679 W115 J607 Z F10

Transfer
3 Inner Unload W22 J679 W115 J608 T F10

Queue
SH
4 Outer Load W23 J680 W118 W610 SH Motor U F11
Indexer 0
Queue Driver 0 in
in Slot
Slot Lower
5 Outer Unload W23 J680 W155 Upper 2 V
2 (card in
Queue (card in
right
right
module of
6 Process W24 J681 W117 J609 module of R F10
multi-
Queue #1 multi-
module
(right module module
systems)
in multi- systems)
module
systems)
7 Star Wheel #1 W242 J681 W117 J609 S F10

(right module
in multi-
module
systems)
8 Process W25 J775 W119 J611 X F11
Queue #2 (in
a multi-
module
system, this is
the second
module from
the right)
9 Star Wheel #2 W25 J775 W119 J611 Y F11

(in a multi-
module
system, this is
the second
module from
the right)
10 Process Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 Z

Queue #3 (in and i8000 and i8000 and i8000 and i8000
a multi- system system system system
module configuration configuration configuration configuration
system, this is documentation documentation documentation documentation
the third SH
module from SH Motor
Indexer 1
the right) Driver 1 in
in Slot
Slot Lower
Upper 1
11 Star Wheel #3 Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 1 (card in T
(card in
(in a multi- and i8000 and i8000 and i8000 and i8000 right
right
module system system system system module of
module of
system, this is configuration configuration configuration configuration multi-
multi-
the third documentation documentation documentation documentation module
module
module from systems)
systems)
the right)
12 Process Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 U

Queue #4 (in and i8000 and i8000 and i8000 and i8000
a multi- system system system system
module configuration configuration configuration configuration
system, this is documentation documentation documentation documentation
the fourth
module from
the right)
13 Star Wheel #4 Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 Refer to i6000 V
(in a multi- and i8000 and i8000 and i8000 and i8000
module system system system system
system, this is configuration configuration configuration configuration
the fourth documentation documentation documentation documentation
module from
the right)
14 Not Used R
15 Not Used S
MODULE 0 Retest Sample Handler (RSH)
Motor Power Home Sensor

Motor Motor
BD & Cardcage Slot # Circuit
# Description Fuse
Cable Conn Cable Conn Axis
0 Not Used X
1 Carrier W560 J678 W510 via RSH J701 via Y

Transport X cables W571 SIB J6>J2
Axis (c8000) W572
(ci8200)
W573
(i2000SR)
2 Carrier W570 via RSH J679 W520 via RSH J702 via Z
Transport Theta cables W571 cables W571 SIB J6>J3
Axis (c8000) W572 (c8000) W572
(ci8200) (ci8200)
W573 W573
(i2000SR) (i2000SR)
3 Carrier W570 via RSH J679 W520 via RSH J702 via T
Transport Z cables W571 cables W571 SIB J6>J3
Axis (c8000) W572 (c8000) W572 Indexer 0 in Motor Driver 0
(ci8200) (ci8200) Slot Upper 2 in Slot Lower 2
W573 W573
(i2000SR) (i2000SR)
4 Carrier W580 via RSH J680 W520 via RSH J702 via U
Postiioner cables W581 cables W610 SIB J6>J3
Module 1 (c8000) W582 (c8000) W611
(ci8200) (ci8200)
W583 W610
(i2000SR) (i2000SR)
5 Carrier W580 via RSH J680 W520 via RSH J702 via V
Postiioner cables W583 cables W610 SIB J6>J3
Module 2 (i2000SR) (i2000SR)
6 Not Used R
7 Not Used S
CPU and CMIA Optics DIO
Sensor Active
DIO Bit #
Descpription Cable Conn Logic Action Fuse
Note
Bits 0-47 return to the process module CPU board, in upper slot 14.
0 AC FAIL W87 J103 1 NO AC INPUT F1
1 OVER VOLTAGE W87 J103 1 AC INPUT TOO HIGH F1
2 UNDER VOLTAGE W87 J103 1 AC INPUT TOO LOW F1
3 OVER TEMPERATURE 1 POWER SUPPLY IS HOT

4 STAT DIVERTER SENSOR W41 J705 0 DIVERTER IS EXTENDED F4
8 RV LOAD DIVERTER SHUTTER W34 J178 0 SHUTTER IS ACTIVATED F1
9 WASH ZONE BYPASS DIVERTER W161 J204 0 DIVERTER IS ACTIVATED F5
13 SPI COMM ERROR 1 COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED
16 MODULE ID (LSB) X 0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN MODULES
17 POWER BOARD FAULT 1 FAULT COND ON PWR PCB
18 MODULE ID (MSB) X 0 = 1 OR 2, 1 = 3 OR 4 MODL.
19 BUFFER FULL W88 J110 0 LEVEL IS FULL
20 BUFFER LOW W88 J110 0 LEVEL IS LOW
21 BUFFER EMPTY W88 J110 0 LEVEL IS EMPTY
22 VACUUM LOW W89 J186 1 VACUUM IS TOO LOW
23 LIQUID IN VACUUM W89 J186 0 DETECTED LIQUID
24 POWER SUPPLY ALL OFF W87 J103 0 P0WER OFF F1
25 VACUUM ON/OFF W87 J103 1 VACUUM PUMP ON F1
27 HEATER OFF W87 J103 0 DISABLED HEATER PWR F1
31 SPI DECODE 0 X ADDRESS ...
32 SPI DECODE 1 X REGISTER ...
33 SPI DECODE 2 X DECODE ...
34 SPI DECODE 3 X LOGIC ...
Note
Bits 48-95 return to the optics board, in upper slot 12.
48 TRIGGER 2 PMP (TRIGGER) W55 J302 1 PUMP AT HOME POSITION
49 TRIGGER 1 PMP (PRETRIGGER) W55 J302 1 PUMP AT HOME POSITION
50 R1 WASHCUP PUMP W61 J500 1 PUMP AT HOME POSITION F8
51 R2 WASHCUP PUMP W61 J500 1 PUMP AT HOME POSITION F8
52 SAMPLE PROBE PUMP W61 J500 1 PUMP AT HOME POSITION F8
53 R1 PROBE PUMP W61 J500 1 PUMP AT HOME POSITION F8
54 R2 PROBE PUMP W63 J501 1 PUMP AT HOME POSITION F8
55 STAT BUFFFER PUMP W63 J501 1 PUMP AT HOME POSITION F8
56 WASH 1 PUMP W63 J501 1 PUMP AT HOME POSITION F8
57 WASH 2 PUMP W63 J501 1 PUMP AT HOME POSITION F8
62 RV AT END OF RV TRANSPORT W104 J152 0 RV DETECTED F4
63 RV AT RV TRANSPT DROP POINT W104 J152 0 RV DETECTED F4
64 RV IN PLACE IN STAGING LANE W104 J152 0 RV DETECTED F4

65 HOPPER LEVEL LOW W104 J152 1 CHECK RVs IN HOPPER F2
66 RV LOAD DIVERTER W32 J176 0 DIVERTER EXTENDED F2
68 RV UNLOAD SOLENOID W32 J176 0 RV UNLOAD SOL ACTIVATED F2
69 FRONT LID W107 J154 0 LID IS OPEN F4
70 REAR LID W107 J154 0 LID IS OPEN F4
71 LIQUID WASTE SENSOR W154 J186
72 REAGENT CAROUSEL LID W109 J156 1 LID IS OPEN F4
73 WASTE CHUTE W105 J153 1 WASTE CONTAINER IS OUT F4
84 HOPPER REFLECTIVE SENSOR (i2000SR) W62 J731 1 HOPPER IS FULL F2
85 FUSE, BACKPLANE +12 VDC 0 FUSE OPENED
86 FUSE, BACKPLANE -12 VDC 1 FUSE OPENED
87 FUSE, ASSAY MODULE 5 VDC 0 FUSE OPENED
91 AIR IN TRSFER PMP FLUID LINE 0 DETECTED AIR IN FLD LINE
92 TRIGGER LEVEL LOW W105 J153 0 LEVEL IS LOW F4
94 PRETRIGGER LEVEL LOW W105 J153 0 LEVEL IS LOW F4
95 OVERTEMP FROM MTR DRVRS 1 MTR DRVR PCB(S) HOT
Processing Module - DC Driver Board
Board and Card Cage Location - All solenoid signal bits listed in this table return to the Solenoid DC Driver Board (Lower Slot 7).
.
Solenoid Active
SOL
Bit #
Descpription Cable Conn Logic Action Fuse
0 SAMPLE SYRINGE VALVE W5 J275 1 OPEN VALVE F5
1 R1 SYRINGE VALVE W7 J376 1 OPEN VALVE F6
2 R2 SYRININGE VALVE W12 J476 1 OPEN VALVE F7
3 R1 WASHCUP VALVE W40 J183 1 OPEN VALVE
4 R2 WASHCUP VALVE W40 J183 1 OPEN VALVE
5 STAT SYRINGE VALVE W14 J480 1 OPEN VALVE F7
9 WASH 1 DISPENSE VALVE # 1 W35 J177 1 OPEN VALVE
12 WASH 1 WASTE VALVE (# 4) W35 J177 1 OPEN VALVE

16 WASH 2 WASTE VALVE (# 4) W36 J175 1 OPEN VALVE
17 TRIGGER DISPENSE VALVE W36 J175 1 OPEN VALVE
18 TRIGGER WASTE VALVE W36 J175 1 OPEN VALVE
19 PRETRIGGER DISPENSE VALVE W36 J175 1 OPEN VALVE
20 PRETRIGGER WASTE VALVE W36 J175 1 OPEN VALVE
24 TRANSFER PUMP ON/OFF W144 J185 0 TURN ON PUMP
25 TRANSFER PUMP DIRECTION W144 J185 1 LOAD BUFFER TO

SYSTEM
27 TRANSFER 1 SOLENOID ACTUATOR (LOAD TRANSFER) W44 J674 1 ARM EXTENDED

(i2000 only)
28 TRANSFER 2 SOLENOID ACTUATOR (UNLOAD W45 J675 1 ARM EXTENDED

TRANSFER) (i2000 only)
29 UNLOAD TRANSFER GATE SOLENOID ACTUATOR (i2000 W46 J676 1 GATE RETRACTED
only)
30 LOAD LANE 1 SOLENOID (I4000 ONLY) (i2000 only) W47 J677 1 GATE OPEN
30 WASH 1 VACUUM VESSEL W35 J177 1 APPLY VACUUM F1
31 WASH 2 VACUUM VESSEL W36 J175 1 APPLY VACUUM F2
32 RV LOAD DIVERTER SHUTTER W34 J178 1 LIFT UP THE F4

ARM/FLIPPER
34 STAT RV DIVERTER W41 J705 1 DIVERTS AND OPENS F4

SHUTTER
35 WASH 1 DRAIN VACUUM VESSEL DRAIN THE VACUUM F1
36 RV UNLOADER DIVERTER W32 J176 1 UNLOAD RV F4
37 WASH 2 DRAIN VACUUM VESSEL W36 J175 1 DRAIN THE VACUUM

VESSEL
38 R1 & R2 VACUUM VESSEL W42 J184 1 APPLY VACUUM to
Washcups
39 R1 & R2 VACUUM VESSEL DRAIN W42 J184 1 DRAIN THE VACUUM

VESSEL
41 BUFFERMATIC VALVE W40 J183 1
42 RV LOAD DIVERTER W32 J176 1 LOAD RV TO OUTER F4

PATH.
43 WASTE - LIQUID-AIR SEPERATOR W89 J186 1 Drain Vacuum

Accumulator
Sample Handler - DC Driver Board (i2000 only)
Board and Card Cage Location - All solenoid signal bits listed in this table return to the Solenoid DC Driver Board (Lower Slot 7).
Solenoid Active
SOL Bit #
Descpription Cable Conn Logic Action
27 TRANSFER 1 SOLENOID ACTUATOR (LOAD TRANSFER) W44 J674 1 ARM EXTENDED
28 TRANSFER 2 SOLENOID ACTUATOR (UNLOAD TRANSFER) W45 J675 1 ARM EXTENDED
29 UNLOAD TRANSFER GATE SOLENOID ACTUATOR W46 J676 1 GATE RETRACTED
30 LOAD LANE 1 SOLENOID (I4000 ONLY) W47 J677 1 GATE OPEN
Additional Optics and Fluidics
Description Cable Card Cage
DRAIN FLUIDICS W154 J184
TRANSFER PUMP W144 J185
PMT POWER W102 J150
PMT SIGNAL W103 J151
Vortexer Power
Solenoid
PCB & Slot #
Descpription Cable Conn
Vortexer # 1 (DC MOTOR 0) Sample W28 J180
Vortexer # 2 (DC MOTOR 3) R2 W30 J182
Vortexer # 3 (DC MOTOR 4) R1 W31 J181 DC Driver I/0 Bd in Slot Lower 7
Vortexer ST (DC MOTOR 2) STAT W37 J179
LLS
Description Cable Conn. PCB & Slot #
SAMPLE PROBE LLS (PIPETTOR 1) W66 J229
SAMPLE LLS ANTENNA W67 J228
SAMPLE LLS ANTENNA POWER W68 J225
SAMPLE PRESSURE MONITOR W69 J226
SAMPLE Z SENSOR W70 J227 LLS Bd #0 in Slot Upper 10

RV24 TO SAMPLE LLS ANTENNA W122
RV24 TO SAMPLE LLS ANTENNA POWER W123

RV1 TO RV24 LLS ANTENNA W145
R1 PROBE LLS (PIPETTOR 2) W71 J329
R1 LLS ANTENNA W72 J328
R1 LLS ANTENNA POWER W73 J325
R1 PRESSURE MONITOR W74 J326

LLS Bd #1 in Slot Upper 8
R1 PROBE Z SENSOR W75 J327
RV2 TO R1 LLS ANTENNA W146
RV2 TO R1 LLS ANTENNA POWER W147
R2 PROBE LLS (PIPETTOR 3) W76 J429
R2 LLS ANTENNA W77 J428
R2 LLS RV 48 TO R2 (i2000SR) W174
W78 J425
R2 LLS ANTENNA POWER W175 (i2000SR) J425
R2 PRESSURE MONITOR W79 J426
R2 PROBE Z SENSOR W80 J427
STAT PROBE LLS (PIPETTOR 4) W42 J529
STAT LLS ANTENNA W64 J528
STAT LLS ANTENNA POWER W97 J525

STAT PRESSURE MONITOR W29 J526
STAT PROBE Z SENSOR W43 J527
Temperature
Thermistors
THERMISTOR ZONE 1 W90 J125
THERMISTOR ZONE 2 AND 3 W91 J126
THERMISTOR ZONE 5 W94 J129 Temperature Controller PCB in Slot Upper 13
AMBIENT THERMISTOR W98 J133
COOLER THERMISTOR W100 J132
HEATERS RELAY CONTROL CABLE W99 J131
Heater Power
ZONE 1 AND 6 W124 J920
TRIGGER AND PRE-TRIGGER W127 J923 Main Power Supply Backplane
WASH 1 HEATER BLOCK W129 J925
WASH 2 HEATER BLOCK W130 J926
Temperature Board Channel Identifiers (TCB Output, Error Messages)
Row # Chan # Description Row # Chan # Description
1 0 Mux 0 Reference 5 16 Trigger
1 1 Mux 1 Reference 5 17 PreTrigger
1 2 Mux 2 Reference 5 18 WZ 2, Probe 1, Clog 3
1 3 Mux 3 Reference 5 19 Spare
2 4 PPath Zone 1, (Therm 0) 6 20 Not Used
2 5 PPath Zone 2, (Therm 1) 6 21 WZ 1 Buffer Heater
2 6 WZ 1, Probe 1, Clog 0 6 22 WZ 2, Probe 2, Clog 4
2 7 Reagent Cooler 6 23 Spare
3 8 PPath Zone 3, (Therm 2) 7 24 WZ 2 Buffer Heater
3 9 PPath Zone 4, (Therm 3) 7 25 Spare
3 10 WZ 1, Probe 2, Clog 1 7 26 WZ 2, Probe 3, Clog 5
3 11 Spare 7 27 Spare
4 12 PPath Zone 5, (Therm 4) 8 28 Ambient Temp
4 13 PPath Zone 6, (Therm 5) 8 29 Spare
4 14 WZ 1, Probe 3, Clog 2 8 30 Spare
4 15 Spare 8 31 Spare
Power Connectors
CARDCAGE 5 VDC W81 J50
CARDCAGE 12 & -12 VDC W82 J51

CARDCAGE 36 VDC W83 J52
Card Cage Interface
INSTRUMENT LUI W85 J101
REAGENT BAR CODE READER W86 J102
INSTRUMENT ETHERNET (IAHV) W84 J100
INSTRUMENT ETHERNET (ISH) W110 J600
Card Cage Backplane
Links
i2000 Card Cage Backplane and Test Points A1_9343.PDF

i2000 SR Card Cage Backplane and Test Points A1_9330.PDF
reserved.
i2000 CARD CAGE BACKPLANE and TEST POINTS
To find connector select Card Cage, Use CONTROL F and enter connector number.
FLUDICS OPTICS LLS TEMP POWER SMP HDLR RV ROBOTIC OTHER ROBOTIC
J100 J110 J125 J150 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

F9 F11
F10 F13
J126
J101 J606
J425 J610
J225 J300 J325 J400
J151 J200 J500
J102 J111
J127 J600 J611
J426 J607
J226 J326
J152 J201 J301
J103 J601 J625
J401
J128 J302 J427 J612
J227 J327 J608
J132 J153 TP7 +5V Sense
J129
J602
J51 J228 J328 J402 J428 J501 J609
J202 J303 J613 TP8 +5V Sense
J133 J154 TP9 POS 36V

J130
J229 J329 J429 TP10 36V Sense Return
J304
J134 J131 J155 J203 MOD4
J50 F15
J604 MOD3
J53
J156 J618
J204 J603 MOD2 TP1 VCC
J617
F14 F12 J674 MOD1 TP2 +12V
J52 J619
J614 J605 J676 TP3 SIG GND
J179 J475 J675
J476 TP4 -12V
J180 J275 J276 J375 J376 J678
J615 TP5 +36V
J677
TP6 DGND
J175
J776
J176 J277 J278 J616
J181 J182 J377 J378
J575
J477
J479 J576 J679 J775 J777
J279
J177 J178 J183 J184
J280
J379 J380 J478
J186 J577 J578 J680 J681 J778

J185
Test Point Value Test Point Value Test Point Value

TP1 +5V TP5 +36V TP9 +36V Sense
TP2 +12V TP6 Digital Ground TP10 +36V Sense Return
TP3 SIG/Analog Ground TP7 +5V Sense
TP4 -12V TP8 +5V Sense A1_9343b
i2000SR CARD CAGE BACKPLANE and TEST POINTS
To find connector select Card Cage, Use CONTROL F and enter connector number.
FLUDICS OPTICS LLS TEMP POWER SMP HDLR RV ROBOTIC OTHER ROBOTIC
J100 J110 J125 J150 3A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A J525 F9

7.5A 2A F11
F F F F F F F F 2A 2A F13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 F10
J325
J425
J101 J126 J151 J500 J610
J225 J300
J200 J400 J606 J611
J111 J326
J102 J226 J301 J426
J152
J201 J401
J127 J607 J625
J526
J227 J302
J103 J427
J327
J402 TP1 +36V
J228 J328
J129 J153 J501 J608
J128 J303 J428 J528
J612 TP2 +5V VCC
J132 J202 JU9 JU7 JU6 JU12
J157 J158 J609 TP3 GND
JU10 JU8 JU5 JU11
J705 J304
J613 TP4 SIG GND
J51 J133 J130 J154 J229 J329 J429 J527 J529 J600 MOD1 JU1
MOD2 JU2
F F
7.5 1 10 1 MOD3 JU3
J131 J155 J203 A 2 A 5 J724 J723 J722 J721 J617 J53 J602 J701 J702
J134 J601 MOD4 JU4
J50 J55
J710 J618 TP5 +12V
J156 J731
J204 F 2 F 2 J614
1 A 1 A TP6 DIG GND
4 6 J619
J52 J603
J305 J725 J726 TP7 -12V
J179 J730
J615 J604 TP8 +36V
J706 J707 J475 J476 J674
J275 J276 J375 J376 J678
J180 J776
J605
J575 J675
J712 J703 J621
J175 J709
J616
J676
J708 J277 J278
J176 J711 J377 J378 J477 J479 J775
J576 J677 J777
J181 J713
J620
J182
J714 J679
J279 J379 J380 J680 J681 J622 J778
J183 J184
J280
J478
J186
J185
J177 J178 J480 J577 J578
Test Point Value Test Point Value

TP1 +36V Sense TP5 +12V
TP2 +5V VCC TP6 DIG GND
TP3 GND TP7 -12V
TP4 SIG GND TP8 +36V
A1_9330a
2.1 Fuses
Sections
Fuse Location on Card Cage Back Plane Board (i 2000 only)

Fuse Location on Card Cage Back Plane Board (i 2000 SR only)
Fuse Location for Power Supply

i 2000 Backplane Grid Locator
i 2000 Card Cage Fuse
Connector # /
Fuse Value Voltage PCB Type/ # Destination
Cable I.D.#
J101/ W85 LUI

J102/ W86 Reagent BCR
PM CONTROLLER
J103/ W87 Pwr Supply I/O
F1 3A 5V LGC
J175/ W36 Wash Zone #2
DC DRIVER I/O J177/ W35 Wash Zone #1
LLS# 0 J226/ W69 Smpl Pip Press Mntr
LLS# 1 J326/ W74 R1 Pip Press Mntr

12V
F2 2A LLS# 2 J426/ W79 R2 Pip Press Mntr
LGC
CMIA/ OPTICS J150/ W102 PMT
F3 2A N12V CMIA/ OPTICS J150/ W102 PMT

LGC
J152/ W104 RV Loader Transport Snsr Bd, RV Hopper Lvl Snsr

J153/ W105 Solid Wst, Trig Bot, Pre-trig Bot Snsr
CMIA/ OPTICS
J154/ W107 LID Snsrs
F4 2A 5V LGC PM CONTROLLER J614/ W108 Process Q Window Snsr
CMIA/ OPTICS J156/ W109 Reagent LID Snsr
DC DRIVER I/O J176/ W32 RV Unload Snsr + Sol, RV Load Diverter + Snsr
J226/ W69 Smpl Pip Press Mntr
LLS# 0 J227/ W70 Smpl Probe Crash Snsr
J200/ W48 Proc Path, Encoder & Snsr
J201/ W49 In/Out Crsl Mtrs, Snsr

F5 2A 5V LGC J202/ W51 Disp Mtr Snsr
INDEXER# 0 J203/ W52 Smpl Pip Theta, Z Snsrs
J204/ W161 Wash Zone Bypass Diverter Home Snsr
J275/ W5 Smpl Syringe
J326/ W74 R1 Pip Press Mntr

LLS# 1 J327/ W75 R1 Probe Crash Snsr
J300/ W53 R1 Pip Theta, Z Snsrs

J301/ W54 Wash Zone #2 Snsr
F6 2A 5V LGC J302/ W55 Trig/Pre-trig, Pump Snsrs
INDEXER# 1
J303/ W56 CMIA Optics Shtr Snsr
J304/ WSpare
STEPR MTR DRVR# 1 J376/ W7 R1 Syringe

J400/ W57 R2 Pip Theta Snsr
F7 2A 5V LGC J401/ W58 Wash Zone #1 Snsr
INDEXER# 2
J402/ W59 RV, Wash 1 Snsrs
STEPR MTR DRVR# 2 J476/ W13 R2 Pip Theta, Z mtr, R2 Syringe
J500/ W61 R1+R2 Wash Cup Pump Snsr, Smpl Pip Pump Snsr, R1
Pip Pump Snsr
F8 2A 5V LGC INDEXER# 3
J501/ W63 R2 Pip Pump Snsr, Wash Zone 1,2 Pump Snsrs
J601/ W111 LQ LUI
F9 7.5A 5V LGC SSH CONTROLLER J604/ WSpare
SSH CONTROLLER (Carrier Present J606/ W114 LQ1, T1 (Load Transfer) Snsr, BCR Full, Carrier Present at
Only), INDEXER# 0 LQ
J607/ W115 Unload Gate, T1 (Unload Transfer) Snsr

F10 2A 5V LGC INDEXER# 0 J608/ W116 T3 (Unload Queue) Snsr, Unload Queue Full
SSH CONTROLLER (PQ Full Only), J609/ W117 SQ1 (Process Queue) Snsr, Star 1, Proximity Snsr, Carrier
INDEXER# 0 Present at PQ BCR, PQ Full
INDEXER# 1 J625/ W65 T4 (Unload Queue) Home Snsr
SSH CONTROLLER J610/ W118 LQ 2 Snsr

J611/ W119 SQ (Process Queue) 2, Star 2 Snsrs, Carrier Present at
PQ BCR, Proximity Snsr

F11 2A 5V LGC INDEXER# 1 PQ BCR, Proximity Snsr

PQ BCR, Proximity Snsr
STEPR MTR DRVR# 0, INDEXER# 0 J674/ W44 T1 (Load Transfer) Sol, T1 Sol Snsr
DC DRIVER I/O, INDEXER# 0 J675/ W45 T2 (Unload Transfer) Sol, T2 Sol Snsr
J180/ W28 Vortexer #1
5V J181/ W31 Vortexer #3

F12 2A DC DRIVER I/O
PWR
J614 Sample Q Window SNSR Mod 1

F13 2A 5V LGC SSH CONTROLLER J617 Sample Q Window SNSR Mod 4
J618 Bypass Q
J619 Outer Load Que
F14 7.5A 36V SSH CONTROLLER J615 LQ Lane 1 Sol

PWR
F15 2A 36V SSH Bar Code T Board J53/W156 BCR PWR TBOARD
PWR
Fuse Location on Card Cage Back Plane Board (i 2000 SR only)

i 2000 SR Backplane Grid Locator
i 2000 SR Card Cage Fuse
Connector # / Cable
I.D.#
J101/ W85 LUI
J102/ W86 Reagent BCR

PM CONTROLLER
J103/ W87 Pwr Supply I/O
F1 3A 5V LGC
J175/ W36 Wash Zone #2
DC DRIVER I/O J177/ W35 Wash Zone #1
LLS# 0 J226/ W69 Smpl Pip Press Mntr

F2 2A 12V LGC
LLS# 3 J526/ W29 STAT Pip Press Mntr
CMIA/ OPTICS J150/ W102 PMT
F3 2A N12V CMIA/ OPTICS J150/ W102 PMT

LGC
J152/ W104 RV Loader Transport Snsr Bd, RV Hopper Lvl Snsr

J153/ W105 Solid Wst, Trig Bot, Pre-trig Bot Snsr
CMIA/ OPTICS
J154/ W107 LID Snsrs
F4 2A 5V LGC PM CONTROLLER
CMIA/ OPTICS J156/ W109 Reagent LID Snsr

DC DRIVER I/O J176/ W32 RV Unload Snsr + Sol, RV Load Diverter + Snsr, STAT Diverter +
Snsr
J226/ W69 Smpl Pip Press Mntr
LLS# 0 J227/ W70 Smpl Probe Crash Snsr
J200/ W48 Proc Path, Encoder & Snsr
J201/ W49 In/Out Crsl Mtrs, Snsr

F5 2A 5V LGC J202/ W51 Disp Mtr Snsr
INDEXER# 0 J203/ W52 Smpl Pip Theta, Z Snsrs
J204/ W161 Wash Zone Bypass Diverter Home Snsr
J275/ W5 Smpl Syringe

LLS# 3 J526/ W29 STAT Pip Press Mntr
J300/ W53 R1 Pip Theta, Z Snsrs
F6 2A 5V LGC
J302/ W55 Trig/Pre-trig, Pump Snsrs
INDEXER# 1
J303/ W56 CMIA Optics Shtr Snsr
J305/ W16 STAT Pipettor - Theta Axis
STEPR MTR DRVR# J376/ W7 R1 Syringe
1
J400/ W57 R2 Pip Theta Snsr

F7 2A 5V LGC J402/ W59 RV, Wash 1 Snsrs

INDEXER# 2
J480/W14 STAT Pipettor Syringe
J305/ W16 STAT Pipettor Z Axis

STEPR MTR DRVR# J476/ W13 R2 Pip Theta, Z mtr, R2 Syringe
2
J500/ W61 R1+R2 Wash Cup Pump Snsr, Smpl Pip Pump Snsr, R1 Pip Pump
Snsr
F8 2A 5V LGC INDEXER# 3
J501/ W63 R2 Pip Pump Snsr, Wash Zone 1,2 Pump Snsrs
J601/ W111
J701/W510
RSH Keypad
F9 7.5A 5V LGC RSH CONTROLLER J702/W520
J603/W540 RSH Bar Code Reader
J701/W510 Carrier Positioner #1, Carrier Transport X Axis, Rail Guide

F11 2A 5V LGC INDEXER# 1 J702/W520 Carrier Positioner #2, Carrier Transport Z and Theta Axis
J179/ W37 Vortexer ST

F12 2A 5V PWR DC DRIVER I/O J181/ W31 Vortexer #3

F13 2A 5V LGC LLS BOARD #3 J527/ W43 STAT Pipettor Crash Limit Sensor
F16 10A 5V LGC RSH SIB J703/W500 Sensor Interface Board, RSH
Original Power Supply
ARTESYN Power Supply

Heater Zone Description Fuse Heater Zone Description Fuse
1 Process Path Zone 1 5A 125V 7 Trigger 1.33A 125V

2 Process Path Zone 2 5A 125V 8 Pre-Trigger 1.33A 125V
3 Process Path Zone 3 5A 125V 9 NOT USED 1.33A 125V

4 Process Path Zone 4 5A 125V 10 Wash Zone #1 Buffer 1.33A 125V
5 Process Path Zone 5 5A 125V 11 Wash Zone #2 Buffer 1.33A 125V

6 Process Path Zone 6 5A 125V 12 Ion Fan (NOT USED) 5A 125V
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-117) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
2.5 Jumpers
Controller Board (76165)
Controller Board (78665)
Note
No jumper changes are required to configure this board for processing module or sample handler operation for software
version 1.50 and higher.
Indexer Board (76170)

Liquid Level Sense/PM Board (78565)
Note
If JU5 through JU11 are on the board, they should not have jumpers.
Card Cage (78625) (i 2000 only)

BCR T Board - SH (79085)
Card Cage (93727) (i 2000 SR only)

2.3 LEDs
Location Board
Using Device FMI Pump

Using Device In-Track Vortexer (VTX)
Using Device Pressure Monitor Board
Using Device RV Loader
Using Device RV Unloader Sensor Board
Using Device Optics Shutter Mechanism
Using Device Solid Waste -- Sensor, Chute Door
Card Cage Board CMIA Reader PCB
Card Cage Board CPU PCB
Card Cage Board CPU Board Diagnostic Self-Test Summary
Card Cage Board LLS/PM
Card Cage Board LED Condition Indicators
Card Cage Board Solenoid/Motor Driver
Card Cage Board Stepper Motor Driver PCB
Card Cage Board Stepper Motor Indexer PCB
Card Cage Board Temperature Controller
CMIA Reader PCB
LED Identifier Color LED Description
DS6 GRN PMT Test
DS5 GRN Mode
DS4 GRN Pass, Illuminated when all diagnostics passed
DS3 GRN Hv, Illuminated when supply voltage to PMT is ON
DS2 GRN Diagtest
DS1 YEL Fail, Illuminated when failure detected
CPU PCB
LED
Color LED Description
Identifier
DG4 GRN
DG3 GRN
CPU Diagnostic Response DG4 - DG1 (0 = OFF; 1 = ON). See "CPU Board
DG2 GRN Diagnostic Self-Test Summary".
DG1 GRN
JAB1 YEL LED is lit when a JABBER condition is present on the twisted pair port.
TX1 GRN When transmit activity is detected, the LED flashes at a rate of 10hz. LED is in a
solid lit condition when no activity is present.
RX1 GRN When receive activity is detected, the LED flashes at a rate of 10hz. LED is in a
CLL1 YEL When collision activity is detected, the LED flashes at a rate of 10hz. LED is in a
LNK1 GRN When link integrity fails, the LED turns ON. Twisted pair link integrity.
PLR1 ORN In STANDBY, the LED is lit. If the TPAPCE (twisted pair automatic polarity
correction enable) is high and wires connected to the twisted pair receiver inputs
(TPRX+ and TPRX-) are reversed, this LED is off (low).
PWR GRN LED is lit when voltages are applied. If in RESET mode, LED is not lit.
SW1 Abort When pressed, causes the CPU to go into debug mode.
SW2 Soft When pressed, generates a soft reset which only resets the microprocessor.
Reset
SW1/SW2 Hard When pressed simultaneously, resets the entire controller board.
Reset
CPU Board Diagnostic Self-Test Summary
Test LED Pattern DG4 -DG1

Device Under Test Diagnostic
Time 0=OFF 1=ON
Note
Any errors on this board should exhibit the following unique CPU debug LED pattern. A message is sent to the debug
port.
Dual Port RAM Pattern Read/Write <1 sec 0 0 0 0
DRAM Marching B Pattern <120 0 0 0 1

sec
RISC Timers Terminal Event Recognition <15 sec 0 0 1 0
Periodic Interrupt Timer Terminal Event Recognition <1 sec 0 0 1 1
General Purpose Timers Terminal Event Recognition <1 sec 0 1 0 0
Flash Erase/Write/Erase <10 sec 0 1 0 1
SMC2 UART (debug port) Internal UART Loopback <1 sec 0 1 1 0
SMC2 UART Internal UART Loopback <1 sec 0 1 1 1
SCC1 & Ethernet Ethernet Loopback <2 sec 1 0 0 0

Controller
SCC2 UART Internal UART Loopback <1 sec 1 0 0 1

SFI Internal Loopback <1 sec 1 1 0 0
FPGA DIGIO Loopback & FPGA Register Read/Write Loobpack, Interrupt <1 sec 1 1 0 1
IRQ Combinations
FMI Pump
LED Identifier Color Position Description
GRN Home Sensor
State Home LED Normal Operating Condition Description
1 ON or OFF When Power is first applied to Assay Module and POST (Power On Self Test) is running.
2 ON When Assay Module initialization has been performed and module is at Ready.
3 ON or OFF When Assay Module is running assays and pump is sequencing while dispensing fluid.
In-Track Vortexer (VTX)
LED Identifier Color Description
DS-1 GRN Cup Home LED lights when cup is not engaging an RV. (fully down position)
State LED DS Cup UP Condition Normal Operating Condition Description
1 ON On Power Up POST (Power On Self Test)
2 ON When Assay Module Initiation occurs
3 OFF When VTX is engaging an RV
4 ON When VTX is not engaging an RV
LED Condition Indicators
Light Function (from top of 1st No Works Fine

LED Bootup Crashed
board) Test Detect (Detect)
DS9 PWR Power ON ON ON ON ON ON
DS8 Z LIM Z/Limit Crash - - - ON -
DS7 LLS LLS on/Theta Sig - ON - ON ON

TH
DS6 Z STP Z stop to Indexer - - - ON ON Blinks, then OFF
DS5 TH Theta Stop - - - - -

STP
DS4 FMI Over/Under Pressure - - - - -

STP
DS3 PM Press Monitor Failed ON ON ON ON ON

P/F
DS2 STA LLS Self Test Passed - ON ON ON ON Test passed on boot

P/F up
DS1 STB Press Mon Self Test ON ON ON ON ON Test passed on boot

P/F up
Note
A "-" indicates the LED is OFF.
LLS/PM
LED Device
Identifier Description
DS9 PWR GRN LED is lit when +5V is applied.
DS8 Z LIM GRN LED is lit when Z crashes or hits training block.
DS7 LLS GRN LLS signal is amplified when theta training block or liquid is hit
TH causing LED to be lit.
DS6 Z GRN In Z direction, when a liquid level is hit, LED is lit; Z motor stops.
STP
DS5 TH GRN In theta direction, when training block is hit, LED is lit and signal
STP goes to GROUND.
DS4 FMI GRN LED is lit when pressure is under or over range.
STP
DS3 PM GRN LED is lit when a failed condition is detected on the pressure
P/F monitor.
DS2 STA GRN LED is lit when LLS passes self-test initiated at bootup.
P/F
DS1 STB GRN LED is lit when PM passes self-test initiated at bootup.
P/F
Optics Shutter Mechanism
DS1 GRN LED is lit when the Plunger flag breaks the sensor beam in either the up or down position
State LED Plunger up/down, DS1, Condition Normal Operating Condition Description
1 ON or OFF During Module initialization
2 ON Sitting at READY
3 ON or OFF While running an assay
4 ON When flag breaks sensor beam in up or down position
5 OFF When flag is out of sensor beam
Pressure Monitor Board
DS1 YEL Implemented have no function
DS2 YEL Implemented have no function
DS3 PWR YEL When +5V applied, LED is lit.
DS4 PWR YEL When +12V applied, LED is lit.
RV Loader
Color Description
GRN Home Sensor, Orientation Wheel, On when flag is in sensor
GRN Home Sensor, Transport Motor, On when flag is in sensor
GRN RV Sense at Drop Point, On when RV is in drop point
GRN RV Sense at Load Point, On when RV is at load point
GRN RV Sense in Process Path, On when RV is in process path
GRN RV Low in Hopper, On when RV breaks beam of emitter
Normal Operating LED Orient. LED Transport LEDRV at LEDRV at LEDRV in LEDRV Low CAL
Condition Description Wheel Home Motor Home Drop Point 1 Load Point 2 Proc. Path 3 in Hopper LED
Power ON of Assay ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF OFF

Module
Initialization of Module ON ON ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF OFF
Hopper full of RVs, ON ON ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF ON OFF

Module initialized
Hopper empty of RVs, ON ON ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF OFF OFF

Module initialized
RV is located at the Load, ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

Drop, or Proc. Path
Fast Load Sequence in Pulses ON & Pulses ON & Pulses ON & Pulses ON & Pulses ON & ON OFF
Progress OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
During assay run mode Pulses ON & Pulses ON & Pulses ON & Pulses ON & Pulses ON & ON OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
RV Loader Bd #6 ON or OFF ON or OFF * * * ON or OFF **

Calibration
* During calibration, initally OFF; cycles ON during calibration
** On at completion of calibration
RV Loader Board #6
RV Unloader Sensor Board
DS1 GRN RV unloaded from track
State Unload LED DS1 Condition Normal Operating Condition Description
1 ON or OFF Power On of Assay Module
2 ON or OFF Initialization of Assay Module
3 ON RV Unloader in Normal (not turned) position
4 OFF RV Unloader in Unload (turned) position
Solid Waste -- Sensor, Chute Door
DS1 GRN Solid Waste Chute door sensor (LED lights when door is closed)
State LED DS1 Chute Door Condition Normal Operating Condition Description
1 OFF Power ON of Assay Module
2 OFF Initialization of Assay Module
3 OFF Solid waste receptacle in place
4 ON Solid waste receptacle missing
Solenoid/Motor Driver
LED Device
DS17 - GRN If -12V applied, LED is lit.

12V
DS16 GRN If +12V applied, LED is lit.

+12V

VCC
DS14 YEL If an internal reset occurs, LED is lit.

PWRST
DS13 YEL If the CPU institutes a software reset, LED is OFF.

SWRST
DS12 YEL Enable bit generated by CPU High State is enabled, LED is lit.
EN
DS11 YEL
SEL0
DS10 YEL SPI Address - Inverted - SPI SEL0 LED is ON.

SEL1 Operation
DS9 YEL These LEDs represent a 4-bit binary combination with the MSB
SEL2 being SEL3 and the LSB being SEL0. If a select line goes high or
binary 1 the LED is lit.
DS8 YEL
SEL3
DS7 YEL SPI Miscommunication LED goes OFF.

ERR
DS6 YEL Over current condition is SOLENOID/MTR. DRIVE LED goes OFF.
FAULT
DS5 YEL
FLT_1 The fault LEDs are connected to Pin11 of the SL9979CS, which
dictates that at least one of the following conditions exist:
DS4 YEL
FLT_2
Controller Disabled
DS3 YEL Undervoltage Lockout
FLT_3
Invalid Commutation
DS2 YEL Sensor Code Shutdown
FLT_4 Over Current Shutdown
Represents a switch to low state
FLT_4 corresponds to MTR DRIVER #4 and this continues with

respect to FL5_3 through FLT_1.
DS1 GRN LED is lit when +36V is applied.

+36V
Stepper Motor Driver PCB
Note
DS103, DS203, DS303, DS403, DS503, DS603, LED Device
DS703 and DS803 can be found behind the edge Identifier Description
LEDs.
DS2 GRN POWER Lit when power is applied to

board
DS3 YEL OVTMP Bit error 95

Lit when temperature in card
cage has exceeded specifications.
DS4 ORN SHORT If the DS4 SHORT LED is lit, it

indicates a motor driver PCB
fault. DS103, DS203, DS303,
DS403, DS503, DS603, DS703 or
DS803 light to indicate which axis
is faulty. These LEDs can be
found behind the edge LEDs.
DS803 YEL X_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in X Axis
DS703 YEL Y_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in Y Axis
DS603 YEL Z_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in Z Axis
DS503 YEL T_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in T Axis
DS403 YEL R_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in R Axis
DS303 YEL S_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in S Axis
DS203 YEL U_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in U Axis
DS103 YEL V_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in V Axis
DS1 YEL RESET Lit when a RESET is occurring
DS802 ORN X_STEP Lit when X Axis motor Microstep

pulses
DS801 GRN X_PWM Lit when X Axis motor Current

goes from standby to running
levels
DS800 YEL X_DIR Lit when X Axis motor Direction

signal is sent
DS702 ORN Y_STEP Lit when Y Axis motor Microstep
pulses
DS701 GRN Y_PWM Lit when Y Axis motor Current

levels
DS700 YEL Y_DIR Lit when Y Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS602 ORN Z_STEP Lit when Z Axis motor Microstep

pulses
DS601 GRN Z_PWM Lit when Z Axis motor Current

levels
DS600 YEL Z_DIR Lit when Z Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS502 ORN T_STEP Lit when T Axis motor Microstep

pulses
DS501 GRN T_PWM Lit when T Axis motor Current

levels
DS500 YEL T_DIR Lit when T Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS402 ORN R_STEP Lit when R Axis motor Microstep
pulses
DS401 GRN R_PWM Lit when R Axis motor Current

levels
DS400 YEL R_DIR Lit when R Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS302 ORN S_STEP Lit when S Axis motor Microstep

pulses
DS301 GRN S_PWM Lit when S Axis motor Current

levels
DS300 YEL S_DIR Lit when S Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS202 ORN U_STEP Lit when U Axis motor Microstep
pulses
DS201 GRN U_PWM Lit when U Axis motor Current

levels
DS200 YEL U_DIR Lit when U Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS102 ORN V_STEP Lit when V Axis motor Microstep

pulses
DS101 GRN V_PWM Lit when V Axis motor Current

levels
DS100 YEL V_DIR Lit when V Axis motor Direction is

sent
TP1 ORG +36 VDC
TP2 BLK Ground
TP3 RED +5 VDC
PWR LED RESET OVTEMP SHORT STEP LED PWM LED DIR LED
Normal Operating Conditions State
(GRN) LED (YEL) LED (YEL) LED (ORN) (ORN) (GRN) (YEL)
When Power is first turned on (POST) ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
When Module Initialization occurs ON ON OFF OFF PULSE PULSE PULSE
Ready to run state ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Running Assays ON OFF OFF OFF PULSE PULSE PULSE
Overtemperature in Card Cage ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Short is Detected in one of the using ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
devices the board handles
Stepper Motor Indexer PCB
LED
Color Device Description LED Description
Identifier
DS10 GRN Power ON Lit when power is present to the board

PWR
DS9 GRN Ready Lit when PCB is initialized and ready to

RDY operate
DS11 YEL Reset Lit when PCB is in process of being reset

RST
DS12 ORN Fault Lit when PCB has a problem

FLT
DS8 XH GRN X Home Sensor X Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS7 YH GRN Y Home Sensor Y Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS6 ZH GRN Z Home Sensor Z Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS5 TH GRN T Home Sensor T Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS4 UH GRN U Home Sensor U Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS3 VH GRN V Home Sensor V Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS2 RH GRN R Home Sensor R Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS1 SH GRN S Home Sensor S Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS13 YEL Cosine component Lit when Cosine component of X encoder

XC of X encoder is sent a signal to move
DS14 XS YEL Sine component of Lit when Sine component of X encoder is

X encoder sent a signal to move
DS15 YEL Cosine component Lit when Cosine component of Y encoder

YC of Y encoder is sent a signal to move
DS16 YS YEL Sine component of Lit when Sine component of Y encoder is

Y encoder sent a signal to move
DS17 ZC YEL Cosine component Lit when Cosine component of Z encoder is

of Z encoder sent a signal to move
DS18 ZS YEL Sine component of Z Lit when Sine component of Z encoder is

encoder sent a signal to move
DS19 TC YEL Cosine component Lit when Cosine component of T encoder is
of T encoder sent a signal to move
DS20 TS YEL Sine component of T Lit when Sine component of T encoder is

TP1 BLK +5 VDC
TP2 RED Ground
Normal Operating PWR LED RESET LED READY LED FAULT LED HOME LED ENCODER LED
Conditions State (GRN) (YEL) (GRN) (YEL) (GRN) (YEL)
When Power is first turned ON PULSE OFF ON OFF OFF

on (POST)
When Module Initialization ON OFF OFF OFF PULSE PULSE

occurs
Ready to run state ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
Running Assays ON OFF ON OFF PULSE PULSE
FAULT is detected ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

Temperature Controller
LED Description
LED is lit when power is applied to

board.
In IDLE state, LED is OFF. In

CONTROL state, LED is blinking.
Note
GREEN LEDs -- When LED
is lit the heater is "heating
up". Pulsing indicates heater
is within specified range. LED
is not lit during BOOTUP
mode (b/c/ heater is not in its
specified range of values).
Note
ORANGE LEDs -- LED is lit
when the heater is active and
running (heating up). LEDs
are not lit when heater is not
running. LEDs blink when
heater temperature is outside
of specified range and the
heater is attempting to
maintain the specified range.
LEDs are lit during BOOTUP
mode.
2.4 Power Supply
Minimum Card Cage and Power Supply Cable Connections
Note
For the power supply to remain ON, the following cables must be connected to the power supply: J907, J909, J928, and
J930.
From To Cable Part # Description
Power Supply J907 Card Cage P-50 W81 76630 +5 VDC
Power Supply J909 Card Cage P-103 W87 76636 Power Supply I/O
Power Supply J928 Front Panel Switch W140 76940 Emergency Power Switch
Power Supply J930 Card Cage P-131 W99 76648 Heater Relay Control
Process module rear panel lower Ethernet port Card Cage P-100 W84 76633 Process Module Ethernet
Note
Ethernet cable W85 is only required for communication with the SCC. With this additional cable, and the processing module
CPU (Upper Slot 14) and CMIA Optics (Upper Slot 12), the system boots to the stopped status.
Power Distribution From the Power Supply

2.7 Sensors and Switches
Sensor Boards
Sensor
Catalog
Board Where Used Description
Number
#
1 7-76210-01 CMIA Optics Shutter Sensor Single on-board sensor narrow optical slotted switch with no provision for
off-board sensors.
RV Loader Wheel Home
Sensor
RV Loader Transport Home
Sensor
Wash Zone Home Sensor
2 7-76215-01 Reagent Carousels Sensor Single on-board sensor narrow optical slotted with provisions for 2 off-
Interface Board board sensors.
Load Queue Sensor Board
Unload Queue Sensor
Board
Load Transfer Sensor Board
Unload Transfer Sensor
Board
Star Wheel Sensor Board
Processing Queue Sensor
Board
3 Can Not be Old Stlye Vortexer Home No on-board sensor; provision for 1 off-board sensor.
Ordered Sensor
(76455)
4 7-76460-01 Crash Sensor (Z Limit) Single on-board sensor narrow optical slotted switch with no provision for
Sensor Bd off-board sensors.
5 7-76465-01 Process Path Home Sensor Single on-board sensor narrow optical slotted switch with no provision for
WZ 1 Divert Home Sensor off-board sensors.
6 7-76470-01 RV Loader Transport Triple on-board wide optical sensors with no provision for off-board
Sensor Board sensors.
7 7-76475-01 RV Hopper Level Sensor No on-board sensor; provision for single off-board sensor.
Board Waste Chute Sensor
Board
8 7-76480-01 FMI Pump Home Sensor Single on-board sensor narrow optical slotted switch with no provision for
off-board sensors.
9 7-76485-01 Reagent Carousel Cover Single on-board wide optical sensor with no provision for off-board
Sensor sensors.
10 7-78650-01 Transfer Solenoid Sensor This board is one-half of a board pair created to integrate its slotted
Board (Load & Unload) optical switch and solenoid with a flex cable to a differential line driver
(see type #11).
11 7-78655-01 Transfer Solenoid Actuator Single on-board sensor (narrow optical slotted switch) with provision for
Sensor Board (Load & off-board sensor.
Unload)
12 7-76500-01 Pipettor Z Axis Home Single on-board sensor (narrow optical slotted switch) with no provision
Sensor for off-board sensors.
13 7-76510-01 Pipettor Theta Home Single on-board sensor (narrow optical slotted switch) with no provision
Sensor for off-board sensors.
14 7-78660-01 RV Load Divert Shutter Single on-board sensor (wide optical slotted switch) with no provision for
Sensor off-board sensors.
15 7-78725-01 RV Load Divert Sensor Single on-board sensor (narrow optical slotted switch) with no provision
for off-board sensors.
16 7-78020-01 RV Unloader Sensor Single on-board sensor (wide optical slotted switch) with no provision for
off-board sensors.
17 CURRENTLY NOT USED Single on-board sensor (wide optical slotted switch) with no provision for
off-board sensors.
18 Can not be New Style Vortexer Home Single on-board sensor (wide optical slotted switch) with no provision for
ordered Sensor off-board sensors.
(92440)
2.8 SCC Troubleshooting
Links
DIGIBOARD COM Ports

SCC Cable Locator
SCC Interconnect Diagram
SCC Interconnect Diagram
Reference Table for Serial Cable Connection
Identifier Device Identifier Device
1 Hand Held Bar Code Reader (optional) / Keyboard 5 Printer
2 Touchscreen Serial Connector (Com 1) 6 Enthernet Port
3 Monitor Video 7 Speakers (optional)
4 Mouse
DIGIBOARD COM Ports
Note
The DIGIBOARD occupies a slot [5] next to the modem connection [4].
DIGIBOARD Connections
COM DigiCable
Device Notes
Port Identifier
1 N/A Touchscreen Com 1 is a 9-pin male connector located on the back of the SCC computer.
2 N/A Not Used
3 P1 SCC Terminal Window Loopback to P6 via a 25-pin Null Modem adapter
4 P2 Modem
5 P3 LIS
6 P4
7 P5 ARM Serial Cable
8 P6 SCC Terminal Window Loopback to P1 via a 25-pin Null Modem adapter
9 P7 IAHV1 Terminal Window and Used with debug cables to interface with a process module controller board
Serial Debug Cable (Card Cage J45) to IAHV1 terminal window.
10 P8 ISH Terminal Window and Used with debug cables to interface with a sample handler module controller
Serial Debug Cable board (Card Cage J46) to ISH terminal window.
SCC Cable Locator

N/A 92391 Card Cage - J45 (IAHV 92392 Cable See i 2000 SH Interconnect
Debug Port) Diagram
92392 92391 Cable (IAHV) Digiboard Cable P7 (IAHV.HT See i 2000 SH Interconnect
Hyper Terminal) Diagram
92393 ICW Null Modem Cable See i 2000 SH Interconnect

Debug
92394 Diagram
Cable Kit
92392 92391 Cable (SH) Digiboard Cable P8 (ISH.HT Hyper SCC Interconnect Diagram
Terminal)
92391 Card Cage - J46 (SH 92392 Cable SCC Interconnect Diagram
Debug Port)
SCC to Module Debug Cables
2.9 SSH Troubleshooting
Links

Fuses Fuse Location for Power Supply
CPU PCB
LEDs Standard Sample Handler (i 2000 only)
Sensor Boards
Sensors and Switches Switches (i 2000 only)
ARCHITECT LAS Cable Connection Reference
ARCHITECT LAS Cable Locator

LAS Cable Reference
ARCHITECT LAS Locator
Door Switch
i 2000 SH Interconnect Diagram
LAS Block Diagram
Load Queue and Load Transfer

Block/Functional Diagrams Load Queue/Processing Queue BCR
Processing Queue
SH Overview
Solenoids and Switches - SSH Module
Unload Transfer and Unload Queue
reserved.
LEDs
Location Board
Card Cage Board CPU PCB

Card Cage Board CPU Board Diagnostic Self-Test Summary
Card Cage Board Solenoid/Motor Driver
Card Cage Board Standard Sample Handler (i 2000 only)
Card Cage Board Stepper Motor Driver PCB
Card Cage Board Stepper Motor Indexer PCB
Sample Handler Device Standard Sample Handler (i 2000 only)
Fuses
Sections


Connector # /
Cable I.D.#
J601/ W111 LQ LUI

F9 7.5A 5V LGC SSH CONTROLLER J604/ WSpare
SSH CONTROLLER (Carrier J606/ W114 LQ1, T1 (Load Transfer) Snsr, BCR Full, Carrier
Present Only), INDEXER# 0 Present at LQ
J607/ W115 Unload Gate, T1 (Unload Transfer) Snsr

F10 2A 5V LGC INDEXER# 0 J608/ W116 T3 (Unload Queue) Snsr, Unload Queue Full
SSH CONTROLLER (PQ Full J609/ W117 SQ1 (Process Queue) Snsr, Star 1, Proximity Snsr,
Only), INDEXER# 0 Carrier Present at PQ BCR, PQ Full
INDEXER# 1 J625/ W65 T4 (Unload Queue) Home Snsr
SSH CONTROLLER J610/ W118 LQ 2 Snsr
J611/ W119 SQ (Process Queue) 2, Star 2 Snsrs, Carrier

Present at PQ BCR, Proximity Snsr

INDEXER# 1 Present at PQ BCR, Proximity Snsr
F11 2A 5V LGC
Present at PQ BCR, Proximity Snsr
STEPR MTR DRVR# 0, J674/ W44 T1 (Load Transfer) Sol, T1 Sol Snsr
INDEXER# 0
DC DRIVER I/O, INDEXER# 0 J675/ W45 T2 (Unload Transfer) Sol, T2 Sol Snsr
F12 2A 5V DC DRIVER I/O

PWR

F13 2A 5V LGC SSH CONTROLLER J617 Sample Q Window SNSR Mod 4
J618 Bypass Q
J619 Outer Load Queue
F14 7.5A 36V SSH CONTROLLER J615 LQ Lane 1 Sol

PWR
F15 2A 36V SSH Bar Code T Board J53/W156 BCR PWR TBOARD
PWR

CPU PCB
LED
Identifier
DG4 GRN
DG3 GRN
CPU Diagnostic Response DG4 - DG1 (0 = OFF; 1 = ON). See CPU Board
DG2 GRN Diagnostic Self-Test Summary.
DG1 GRN
JAB1 YEL LED is lit when a JABBER condition is present on the twisted pair port.
TX1 GRN When transmit activity is detected, the LED flashes at a rate of 10hz. LED is in a
RX1 GRN When receive activity is detected, the LED flashes at a rate of 10hz. LED is in a
CLL1 YEL When collision activity is detected, the LED flashes at a rate of 10hz. LED is in a
LNK1 GRN When link integrity fails, the LED turns ON. Twisted pair link integrity.
PLR1 ORN In STANDBY, the LED is lit. If the TPAPCE (twisted pair automatic polarity
correction enable) is high and wires connected to the twisted pair receiver inputs
(TPRX+ and TPRX-) are reversed, this LED is off (low).
PWR GRN LED is lit when voltages are applied. If in RESET mode, LED is not lit.
SW1 Abort When pressed, causes the CPU to go into debug mode.
SW2 Soft When pressed, generates a soft reset which only resets the microprocessor.
Reset
SW1/SW2 Hard When pressed simultaneously, resets the entire controller board.
Reset
Test LED Pattern DG4 -DG1

Device Under Test Diagnostic
Time 0=OFF 1=ON
Note
Any errors on this board should exhibit the following unique CPU debug LED pattern. A message is sent to the debug
port.
Dual Port RAM Pattern Read/Write <1 sec 0 0 0 0
DRAM Marching B Pattern <120 0 0 0 1

sec
RISC Timers Terminal Event Recognition <15 sec 0 0 1 0
Periodic Interrupt Timer Terminal Event Recognition <1 sec 0 0 1 1
General Purpose Timers Terminal Event Recognition <1 sec 0 1 0 0
Flash Erase/Write/Erase <10 sec 0 1 0 1
SMC2 UART (debug port) Internal UART Loopback <1 sec 0 1 1 0
SMC2 UART Internal UART Loopback <1 sec 0 1 1 1
SCC1 & Ethernet Ethernet Loopback <2 sec 1 0 0 0

Controller

SFI Internal Loopback <1 sec 1 1 0 0
FPGA DIGIO Loopback & FPGA Register Read/Write Loobpack, Interrupt <1 sec 1 1 0 1
IRQ Combinations
LED Device
DS1 GRN LED is lit when +36V is applied.

+36V
DS2 YEL
FLT_4 The fault LEDs are connected to Pin11 of the SL9979CS, which
dictates that at least one of the following conditions exist:
DS3 YEL
FLT_3
Controller Disabled
DS4 YEL Undervoltage Lockout
FLT_2
Invalid Commutation
DS5 YEL Sensor Code Shutdown
FLT_1 Over Current Shutdown
Represents a switch to low state
FLT_4 corresponds to MTR DRIVER #4 and this continues with

respect to FL5_3 through FLT_1.
DS6 YEL Over current condition is SOLENOID/MTR. DRIVE LED goes OFF.
FAULT
DS7 YEL SPI Miscommunication LED goes OFF.

ERR
DS8 YEL
SEL3
DS9 YEL SPI Address - Inverted - SPI SEL0 LED is ON.

SEL2 Operation
DS10 YEL These LEDs represent a 4-bit binary combination with the MSB
SEL1 being SEL3 and the LSB being SEL0. If a select line goes high or
binary 1 the LED is lit.
DS11 YEL
SEL0
DS12 YEL Enable bit generated by CPU High State is enabled, LED is lit.
EN
DS13 YEL If the CPU institutes a software reset, LED is OFF.

SWRST
DS14 YEL If an internal reset occurs, LED is lit.

PWRST

VCC

+12V
DS17 - GRN If -12V applied, LED is lit.

12V
Standard Sample Handler (i 2000 only)
Color Description Position
GRN Home Sensor Load Queue
GRN Home Sensor Transfer 1
GRN Carrier Present Load BCR
GRN Carrier Present Sample BCR
GRN Home Sensor Sample Queue
GRN Queue Full Sample Queue
GRN Home Sensor Star Wheel
GRN Position Sensor Gate
GRN Position Sensor Unload gate
GRN Carrier Present at gate Transfer 2
GRN Queue Full Unload Queue
LED Home Sensor, Load LED Home Sensor, LED Carrier Present, Load Normal Operating
State
Queue, Condition Transfer 1, Condition BCR, Condition Condition Description
1 TBD TBD TBD At Power ON of Sample

Handler
2 TBD TBD TBD Initialize Sample Handler
3 TBD TBD TBD During running of assays
Note
DS103, DS203, DS303, DS403, DS503, DS603, LED Device
DS703 and DS803 can be found behind the edge Identifier Description
LEDs.
DS2 GRN POWER Lit when power is applied to

board
DS3 YEL OVTMP Bit error 95

Lit when temperature in card
cage has exceeded specifications.
DS4 ORN SHORT If the DS4 SHORT LED is lit, it

indicates a motor driver PCB
fault. DS103, DS203, DS303,
DS403, DS503, DS603, DS703 or
DS803 light to indicate which axis
is faulty. These LEDs can be
found behind the edge LEDs.
DS803 YEL X_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in X Axis
DS703 YEL Y_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in Y Axis
DS603 YEL Z_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in Z Axis
DS503 YEL T_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in T Axis
DS403 YEL R_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in R Axis
DS303 YEL S_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in S Axis
DS203 YEL U_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in U Axis
DS103 YEL V_SHORT Lit when over current (short

circuit) is sensed in V Axis
DS1 YEL RESET Lit when a RESET is occurring
DS802 ORN X_STEP Lit when X Axis motor Microstep

pulses
DS801 GRN X_PWM Lit when X Axis motor Current

levels
DS800 YEL X_DIR Lit when X Axis motor Direction

signal is sent
DS702 ORN Y_STEP Lit when Y Axis motor Microstep
pulses
DS701 GRN Y_PWM Lit when Y Axis motor Current

levels
DS700 YEL Y_DIR Lit when Y Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS602 ORN Z_STEP Lit when Z Axis motor Microstep

pulses
DS601 GRN Z_PWM Lit when Z Axis motor Current

levels
DS600 YEL Z_DIR Lit when Z Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS502 ORN T_STEP Lit when T Axis motor Microstep

pulses
DS501 GRN T_PWM Lit when T Axis motor Current

levels
DS500 YEL T_DIR Lit when T Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS402 ORN R_STEP Lit when R Axis motor Microstep
pulses
DS401 GRN R_PWM Lit when R Axis motor Current

levels
DS400 YEL R_DIR Lit when R Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS302 ORN S_STEP Lit when S Axis motor Microstep

pulses
DS301 GRN S_PWM Lit when S Axis motor Current

levels
DS300 YEL S_DIR Lit when S Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS202 ORN U_STEP Lit when U Axis motor Microstep
pulses
DS201 GRN U_PWM Lit when U Axis motor Current

levels
DS200 YEL U_DIR Lit when U Axis motor Direction is

sent
DS102 ORN V_STEP Lit when V Axis motor Microstep

pulses
DS101 GRN V_PWM Lit when V Axis motor Current

levels
DS100 YEL V_DIR Lit when V Axis motor Direction is

sent
TP1 ORG +36 VDC
TP2 BLK Ground
TP3 RED +5 VDC
PWR LED RESET OVTEMP SHORT STEP LED PWM LED DIR LED
Normal Operating Conditions State
(GRN) LED (YEL) LED (YEL) LED (ORN) (ORN) (GRN) (YEL)
When Power is first turned on (POST) ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
When Module Initialization occurs ON ON OFF OFF PULSE PULSE PULSE
Ready to run state ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Running Assays ON OFF OFF OFF PULSE PULSE PULSE
Overtemperature in Card Cage ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Short is Detected in one of the using ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
devices the board handles
LED
Color Device Description LED Description
Identifier
DS10 GRN Power ON Lit when power is present to the board

PWR
DS9 GRN Ready Lit when PCB is initialized and ready to

RDY operate
DS11 YEL Reset Lit when PCB is in process of being reset

RST
DS12 ORN Fault Lit when PCB has a problem

FLT
DS8 XH GRN X Home Sensor X Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS7 YH GRN Y Home Sensor Y Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS6 ZH GRN Z Home Sensor Z Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS5 TH GRN T Home Sensor T Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS4 UH GRN U Home Sensor U Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS3 VH GRN V Home Sensor V Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS2 RH GRN R Home Sensor R Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS1 SH GRN S Home Sensor S Home sensor is lit when home flag
breaks sensor beam
DS13 YEL Cosine component Lit when Cosine component of X encoder

XC of X encoder is sent a signal to move
DS14 XS YEL Sine component of Lit when Sine component of X encoder is

X encoder sent a signal to move
DS15 YEL Cosine component Lit when Cosine component of Y encoder

YC of Y encoder is sent a signal to move
DS16 YS YEL Sine component of Lit when Sine component of Y encoder is

Y encoder sent a signal to move
DS17 ZC YEL Cosine component Lit when Cosine component of Z encoder is

of Z encoder sent a signal to move
DS18 ZS YEL Sine component of Z Lit when Sine component of Z encoder is

DS19 TC YEL Cosine component Lit when Cosine component of T encoder is
of T encoder sent a signal to move
DS20 TS YEL Sine component of T Lit when Sine component of T encoder is

TP1 BLK +5 VDC
TP2 RED Ground
Normal Operating PWR LED RESET LED READY LED FAULT LED HOME LED ENCODER LED
Conditions State (GRN) (YEL) (GRN) (YEL) (GRN) (YEL)
When Power is first turned ON PULSE OFF ON OFF OFF

on (POST)
When Module Initialization ON OFF OFF OFF PULSE PULSE

occurs
Ready to run state ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
Running Assays ON OFF ON OFF PULSE PULSE
FAULT is detected ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

Sensors and Switches
Sensor Boards
Sensor
Catalog
Board Where Used Description
Number
#
2 7- Reagent Carousels Sensor Single on-board sensor narrow optical slotted with provisions for 2 off-board
76215- Interface Board sensors.
01 Load Queue Sensor Board
Unload Queue Sensor Board
Load Transfer Sensor Board
Unload Transfer Sensor
Board
Star Wheel Sensor Board
Processing Queue Sensor
Board
10 7- Transfer Solenoid Sensor This board is one-half of a board pair created to integrate its slotted optical
78650- Board (Load & Unload) switch and solenoid with a flex cable to a differential line driver (see type
01 #11).
11 7- Transfer Solenoid Actuator Single on-board sensor (narrow optical slotted switch) with provision for off-
78655- Sensor Board (Load & board sensor.
01 Unload)
Switches (i 2000 only)
Part # Name Where Used & Description Reference
77407 Micro Switch Red PQ Full Sensor Hall effect switch with red Actuator
Button PQ BCR Full Sensor button.
ULQ Full Sensor
Output = Normally ON
77479 Micro Switch Straight PQ Gate Sensor Hall effect switch with black
Arm Actuator button.
Output = Normally OFF
77579 Micro Switch Black Carrier at Load Queue (inner Hall effect switch with black
Button & outer). Actuator button.
PQ Unload Sensor Output = Normally OFF

Carrier Present at PQ BCR
14118- Micro Switch, MOM Front Lid Switch Hall effect switch with red Actuator
247 15 ma button.
Rear Lid Switch
Output = Normally ON
Waste Chute Switch
PQ Door Switch
LAS Cable Reference
Links

Cable Cable Name Part# From To
W96 RV1/LAS Antenna Power Cable 92974 J2 LAS Track, General J4 RV 1/2 LLS Antenna Board
Antenna Board
W95 RV1/LAS Antenna Signal Cable 92975 J1 LAS Track, General J3 RV 1/2 LLS Antenna Board
Antenna Board
W67 Spl Pip LLS Ant Signal Cable 76616 J1 LLS Antenna Board P228 Card Cage Backplane
W68 Spl Pip LLS Ant Power Cable 76617 J2 LLS Antenna Board P225 Card Cage Backplane
W122 RV24/Spl LLS Ant Signal Cable 76922 J3 LLS Antenna Board J1 RV24 Antenna Board
W123 RV24/Spl LLS Ant Power Cable 76923 J4 LLS Antenna Board J2 RV24 Antenna Board
W106 LAS BCR Cable 92439 Barcode Reader J3 BCR PWR T Board
P1 BCR PWR T Board 76912 J1 BCR PWR T Board P53, P602, P603 Card Cage
Backplane
P1 of the Carousel Home J1 LAS B Dual Sensor Board

W156 Sensor Cable (90775)
LAS Carousel Home and Position Sensor
92408 P2 of the Carousel Home J2 LAS B Dual Sensor Board
Cable Assembly
Sensor Cable (90775)
LAS Carousel Sensor Cable 93754 J3 LAS B Dual Sensor Board P609 Card Cage Backplane
(90775)
W134 Ground Cable 92380 Hanger Frame LAS Carousel Motor
Ground Strap 90818 Hanger Frame Processing Module, Right Side
W128 LAS Carousel Motor 92407 LAS Carousel Motor P681 Card Cage Backplane
W148 Unload 1Q Full Sensor Cable 76951 Front Cover Access Door J2 Sensor Board (76475)
Sensor
LUI Cable, LAS Short 94029 Keypad W111 LQ LUI Interface Cable
W111 LQ LUI Keypad Cable 76911 LUI Cable, LAS Short P601 Card Cage Backplane
Part Ref Cable Block Diag

Location Origin Cable Description/ Destination
# Ref Des # Ref Ref
W21 76570 Card Cage - J678 Inner Load Que Motor, Load Transfer Motor Load Queue
and Load
Transfer
W44 76593 Card Cage - J674 Load Transfer Solonoid Sensor Bd - J2 Load Queue
and Load
Transfer
Cables, i2000 W47 76596 Card Cage - J677 Load Que Gate Solonoid (on Inner LQ only) Load Queue
76980 and Load
LQ
Transfer
W111 76911 Card Cage - J601 Sample Handler Local User Interface
W114 76914 Card Cage - J606 Inner Load Queue Sensor Bd - J3, Load Load Queue
Transfer Home Sensor Bd - J3 and Load
Transfer
W22 76571 Card Cage - J679 Unload Transfer Motor, Inner Unload Queue Unload
Motor Transfer and
Unload
Queue
W45 76594 Card Cage - J675 Unload Transfer Solenoid Sensor Bd - J2 Unload
Transfer and
Unload
Queue
W46 76595 Card Cage - J676 PQ Unload Gate Solenoid Processing

Cables, i2000
76981 Queue
ULQ
W115 76915 Card Cage - J607 Unload Transfer Sensor Bd - J3 Unload
Transfer and
Unload
Queue
W116 76916 Card Cage - J608 Inner Unload Queue Sensor Bd - J3 Unload
Transfer and
Unload
Queue
W24 76573 Card Cage - J681 Processing Queue Motor, Star Wheel Motor i 2000 SH
(Right Module or single module system) Interconnect
Diagram
W156 76912 Card Cage - J53, J602, BCR Power T Bd - J1 (right module or singlr Processing
Cables, i2000
76982 J603 module system) Queue
PQ
W117 76917 Card Cage - J609 Star Wheel Sensor Bd - J3, Processing i 2000 SH
Queue Sensor Bd - J3 (Right Module or Interconnect
single module system) Diagram
W25 76574 Card Cage - J775 Processing Queue Motor, Star Wheel Motor i 4000 SH
(Left Module, multi module system) Interconnect
Diagram
W119 76919 Card Cage - J611 Star Wheel Sensor Bd - J3, Processing i 4000 SH
Cables, i4000 Queue Sensor Bd - J3 (left module, multi Interconnect
76983
PQ module system only) Diagram
W157 76956 Card Cage - J617 Processing Queue Window Sensor (left i 4000 SH
module, multi module system only) Interconnect
Diagram
W26 76575 J776 Sample Que 3 & Star Wheel 3 Motor
Cables, i6000 W120 76920 J612 Sample Que 3 Sensors

76984
PQ
W158 76957 J618 Sample Que3 Window Snsr
W27 76576 J777 Sample Que 4 & Star Wheel 4 Motor
Cables, i8000 W121 76921 J613 Sample Que 4 Sensors

76985
PQ
W159 76958 J619 Sample Que 4 Window Snsr
W23 76572 J680 Load Que 2 and Transfer 4 Motor
W65 76614 J625 Transfer 4 Home Sensor
W118 76918 J610 Load Que 2 Sensors
N/A 76988 J678 i8000 LQ 1, T1 Mtrs.

Cables, i8000
76986 N/A 76989 J606 i8000 LQ 1, T1 Snsrs.
LQ
N/A 76990 J674 i8000 T1 Sol, T1 Sol Snsr
N/A 76991 J677 i8000 Load Lane 1 & 2 Sol
N/A 76992 J601 i8000 Sample Handler LUi
W142 76942 Cable can be used in i 2000 SH

following 3 places: Gate Interconnect
Sol, PQ Full, Star Wheel Diagram
N/A 76949 Load Transfer Sensor Bd Processing Queue BCR Full Sensor (Single Processing
- J1 Module System) Queue
N/A 76950 Gate Solenoid Sensor Bd Processing Queue Gate Sensor Processing
- J1 Queue
N/A 76954 BCR T Bd - J3 Processing Queue BCR i 2000 SH

Interconnect
Diagram
N/A 76962 Load Transfer Sensor Bd Processing Queue BCR Full Sensor (Multi i 4000 SH
- J1 Module System) Interconnect
Diagram
W149 76993 BCR T Bd (Left Module) - BCR Power T Bd (right module) - J2 i 4000 SH
78221 Cables, Sample J1 (Multimodule system (Multimodule system only) Interconnect
only) Diagram
W156 76995 Snsr Bd 2 - P2 Unload Snsr Switch # 2 i 2000 SH

Interconnect
Diagram
76949 Processing Queue Sensor Carrier Present at Processing Queue BCR i 2000 SH
Bd - J1 Sensor (Star Wheel) Interconnect
Diagram
76942 Star Wheel Sensor Bd - Processing Queue Full Sensor i 2000 SH

J1 Interconnect
Diagram
76942 Waste Chute Sensor Bd - Waste Chute Sensor Cover and
J2 Door
Switches
W113 76913 BCR T Bd - J4 Load Queue BCR i 2000 SH

Interconnect
Diagram
N/A 78649 Transfer Solenoid Sensor Transfer Solenoid Actuator Bd - J1 i 2000 SH

Bd - J2 Interconnect
Diagram
78222 Cables, Load N/A 91929 Inner Load Queue Sensor Carrier Present at (Inner) Load Queue Load Queue
Bd - J1 Switch and Load
Transfer
N/A 91939 Outer Load Queue Sensor Carrier Present at (Outer) Load Queue Load Queue
Bd - J1 Switch and Load
Transfer
W148 76951 Inner Unload Que (T3) Inner Unload Que Full Sensor Unload
Sensor Bd (Snsr Bd 2) - Transfer and
J1 Unload
Queue
W155 76955 Inner Unload Que (T3) Outer Unload Que 2 Full Snsr Unload
Sensor Bd (Snsr Bd 2) - Transfer and
78223 Cables, Unload J2 Unload
Queue
N/A 78649 (Load and Unload) Flex Cable/ (Load and Unload) Transfer Unload
Transfer Solenoid Sensor Solenoid Actuator Sensor Bd (Sensor Bd 11) Transfer and
Bd (Snsr Bd 10) - J1 - J1 (single module system only) Unload
Queue
N/A Multi Module N/A 76899 (Load and Unload) Flex Cable/ (Load and Unload) Transfer i 4000 SH
Load Transfer Transfer Solenoid Sensor Solenoid Actuator Sensor Bd (Sensor Bd 11) Interconnect
assy. (77385) Bd (Snsr Bd 10) - J1 - J1 (single module system only) Diagram
N/A Multi Module N/A 76899 (Load and Unload) Flex Cable/ (Load and Unload) Transfer i 4000 SH
Transfer assy. Transfer Solenoid Sensor Solenoid Actuator Sensor Bd (Sensor Bd 11) Interconnect
77553 Bd (Snsr Bd 10) - J1 - J1 (multi module system only) Diagram
N/A Load Transfer N/A 76948 Load Queue Sensor Bd - Carrier Present at (Inner) Load Queue Load Queue
Assy. (Single J1 Switch and Load
Module ) Transfer
Catalog Ordering
Part Name VP/Diagnostic Procedure R&R Comments
# Info
Cable, 76912 FRU Verification is performed by an onsite Abbott Removal and replacement
Sample trained repair person according to their steps are left to the discretion
Queue BCR training, experience, and Abbott approved of the Abbott trained repair
documentation. person.
Cable, 76917 FRU Verification is performed by an onsite Abbott Removal and replacement
Sample trained repair person according to their steps are left to the discretion
Queue 1 training, experience, and Abbott approved of the Abbott trained repair
Sensor documentation. person.
RV1/LAS 92974 FRU P-248 Startup and Shutdown Removal and replacement
Antenna 1118 LAS Pipettor Calibration (adjust gain, if steps are left to the discretion
Power Cable necessary of the Abbott trained repair
W95 3600 LLS Test person.
P-15 1Step/2Step Service Test
RV1/LAS 92975 FRU P-248 Startup and Shutdown Removal and replacement
Antenna 1118 LAS Pipettor Calibration (adjust gain, if steps are left to the discretion
Signal Cable necessary of the Abbott trained repair
W96 3600 LLS Test person.
P-15 1Step/2Step Service Test
LAS 92407 FRU P-248 Startup and Shutdown Removal and replacement
Carousel 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration steps are left to the discretion
Motor Cable 3225 LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration of the Abbott trained repair
W128 P-15 1Step/2Step Service Test person.
Assembly, 92419 FRU Verify that all ground-straps are installed Removal and replacement
Left Sample correctly. steps are left to the discretion
Cover Verify that all fastening hardware for the of the Abbott trained repair
replaced part is installed correctly and that the person.
part is fully seated.
Panel, Left 92418 FRU P-248 Startup and Shutdown Removal and replacement
Side Metal 3600 LLS Test steps are left to the discretion
P-15 1Step/2Step Service Test of the Abbott trained repair
person.
Unload 1 Q 76951 FRU P-248 Startup and Shutdown Removal and replacement
Full Sensor 3400 Interlock Sensors Test steps are left to the discretion
Cable, W148 of the Abbott trained repair
person.
W134, LAS 93754 FRU P-248 Startup and Shutdown Removal and replacement
Carousel 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration steps are left to the discretion
Sensor Cable 3225 LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration of the Abbott trained repair
P-15 1Step/2Step Service Test person.
Cable, 76906 FRU P-248 Startup and Shutdown Removal and replacement
Interface LUI 3225 LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration steps are left to the discretion
person.
Cable, LUI 76911 FRU P-248 Startup and Shutdown Removal and replacement
Interface 3225 LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration steps are left to the discretion
person.
Block/Functional Diagrams
SSH Cover and Waste Chute
SSH Door Switch
SSH i 2000 SH Interconnect Diagram
SSH i 4000 SH Interconnect Diagram
SSH Keypad SSH (LUI)
LAS LAS Block Diagram
SSH Load Queue and Load Transfer
SSH Load Queue/Processing Queue BCR
SSH Processing Queue
SSH SH Overview
SSH Solenoids and Switches - SSH Module
SSH Unload Transfer and Unload Queue
Door Switch
i 4000 SH Interconnect Diagram, Module 1 (left module)
Processing Queue
Item Description Item Description
A Process Queue Conveyor Home Sensor (Proximity Sensor) G Processing Queue BCR (77441)
B Carrier Present at PQ BCR Hall Sensor H BCR Full Sensor
C Process Queue Full Snsr (Hall) J Load Queue BCR (77327)
D Star Wheel Motor K not used
E BCR Power T Board (79085) L Board,Sensor #7 (76475)
F Processing Queue Motor (SQ2) M Board, Sensor #2 (76215)
i 4000 SH Interconnect Diagram, Module 1 (left module)

Load Transfer Mechanism Load Queue(s)
A Load Queue #2 Conveyor Home Sensor (Q1) (Proximity G Load Transfer Solenoid
Sensor)
B Load Q1 Motor H Carrier Present at Load Transfer Mechanism (Lane

1)
C Load Q2 Motor J Carrier Present at Load Transfer Mechanism (Lane

2)
D Load Queue #1 Conveyor Home Sensor (Q2) (Proximity K not used

Sensor)
E Load Transfer T1 Motor L not used

F Sensor Board #10 (78650) M Board, Sensor #2 (76215)
i 4000 SH Interconnect Diagram, Module 2 (right module)
Processing Queue
A Process Queue Conveyor Home (Proximity Sensor) G Hall Sensor
B Carrier Present at PQ BCR Hall Sensor H Gate Solenoid Sensor
C Process Queue Full Snsr (Hall) J Carrier Present at Gate Hall Sensor
D Star Wheel Motor K Processing Queue BCR (77441)

E BCR Power T-board L Board,Sensor #7 (76475)
F Processing Queue Motor (SQ1) M Board, Sensor #2 (76215)
i 4000 Sample Handler, Connection Map, Module 2 (right module)
Unload Transfer Mechanism Unload Queue(s)
A Unload Queue Full Sensor (Inner Lane T3) G Unload Transfer Solenoid
B Unload T3 Motor H not used
C Unload T4 Motor J not used

D Unload Queue Full Sensor (Outer Lane T4) K not used
E Unload Transfer Motor (T2) L not used
F Sensor Board #10 (78650) M Board, Sensor #2 (76215)
LAS Block Diagram
LAS Block Diagram
Load Queue/Processing Queue BCR
Processing Queue
Right Module/Single Module)

Processing Queue
Left Module/Multi-Module Only

Processing Queue
Processing Queue
Processing Queue

Processing Queue

SH Overview
i 2000
Solenoids and Switches - SSH Module
Sample handler switches and solenoids bits names and numbers. (All of the commands below require SET_MODULE 0.)
Note
Items 1, 5, and 7 are solenoids and can be set to ON (1) or OFF (0). Items 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, and 9 are switches and
can only read the status.
1 DIO 27 (Transfer 1 solenoid actuator) Set (1 to extend).

=
2 DIO 0 (Carrier present at load queue) Read (0 when switch is activated).

=
3 EIEIO 1 (Carrier present at load queue bar code) Read (1 when switch is activated).
=
4 DIO 1 (Carrier present at gate for unload transfer) Read (1 when switch is activated).
=
5 DIO 29 (Unload transfer gate solenoid) Set (1 to extend).

=
6 DIO 15 (Carrier present at unload queue) Read (0 when switch is activated).

=
7 DIO 2 (Carrier present at PQ bar code) Read (0 when switch is activated).

=
8 EIEIO 4 (Sample queue full) Read (1 when switch is activated).

=
9 DIO 28 (Transfer 2 solenoid actuator) Set (1 to extend).

=
Not Shown
DIO 14 (Window sensor switch, above # 8) Read (1 when switch is activated).

EIEIO 2 (Unload queue 1 full, loacted at the left-end of unload queue) Read (1 when switch is activated).
Unload Transfer
Inner Unload Queue

Outer Unload Queue

Keypad (LUI)
Outer LQ
Inner LQ

reserved.
Standard Sample Handler (i 2000 only)
Color Description Position
GRN Home Sensor Load Queue
GRN Carrier Present Load BCR
GRN Carrier Present Sample BCR
GRN Home Sensor Sample Queue
GRN Queue Full Sample Queue
GRN Home Sensor Star Wheel
GRN Position Sensor Gate
GRN Position Sensor Unload gate
GRN Carrier Present at gate Transfer 2
GRN Queue Full Unload Queue
LED Home Sensor, Load LED Home Sensor, LED Carrier Present, Load Normal Operating
State
Queue, Condition Transfer 1, Condition BCR, Condition Condition Description
1 TBD TBD TBD At Power ON of Sample

Handler
2 TBD TBD TBD Initialize Sample Handler
3 TBD TBD TBD During running of assays
A1.01 HOPPER ASM Version - 96728-111_210_2
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number Description
7-92799-01 RV Hopper, No Fan
7-93968-01 Hopper Assembly, i2000SR
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
A1.01 HOPPER ASM
15 min
Time Required
#2 Phillips screwdriver
Tools/Materials
7-100526-01 ESD Safe Work Mat Kit
Caution
Electrostatic Discharge
Removal
Action Steps Reference
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section
1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
1. The processing module
must be in Stopped, or
Offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the
processing module.
2. Lift the appropriate
processing center
cover(s) to access the
hopper.
Note
Refer to the
processing center
map for the
hopper location
(RVL).
Remove
STAT Note
Pressure User proper ESD
Monitor tools when
Board handling boards to
(i2000SR) prevent damage.
1. Disconnect the pipettor

sensor cable, PRESS
MNTR from JP2 on the
STAT pressure monitor
board on the front of the
hopper. [1]
2. Slide the board up and

out of its bracket. [2]
3. Disconnect W29 STAT (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
PRESSURE MONITOR
cable from JP1 on the Note
pressure monitor Video contains no audio sound.
board. [3]
4. Place the board in a

static protection bag or
on the ESD Work Matt
when not in use.
Remove
Hopper
1. Remove the hopper
Baffle and
baffle by lifting up and
RVs
out of the module.
2. Remove all RVs from the
hopper and place the
RVs in a lint free
container.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Note
Video contains no audio sound.
Disconnect
Hopper
1. Disconnect the following
Sensor
cables:
Cables
i2000
W104 RV
HOP LVL
SNSR from
connector
J3 the
hopper
sensor
board [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP
SNSR at
top left side
of
hopper. [2]
Remove
Hopper Note
Use caution when
loosening the screws;
they are not secured to
the RV loader or hopper
assembly.
1. Loosen (do not remove)

the two (2) screws (non-
captive) securing the
hopper to the RV
loader. [3]
Note
Inside the hopper,
at the bottom of
the RV loader
opening, there is a
plastic foot [2] that
is engaged with
the RV loader.
2. Pull the bottom left wall

of the hopper away from
the RV loader while lifting
the hopper out of the
process module.
Note
The loosened
screw and washer
must clear the
keyholes in the
hopper. [1]
Replacement
Verify
Connections
1. Verify that the emitter
(i2000 only)
and detector cables [2]
are connected to the
hopper sensor board.
Install
Hopper
1. Slide the hopper
keyholes [1] on the
screws [3] on the center
plate of the RV loader
assembly.
Note
Verify that the
captive washers
are between the
screw and the
hopper wall and
are not caught
behind the wall.
2. Push the hopper down Note

and engage the bottom Video contains no audio sound.
securing features. [2]
3. Visually verify that the

plastic foot (at the
bottom of the hopper) is
properly engaged inside
the RV loader. [3]
4. Verify that the hopper is

mounted flush against
the RV Loader
assembly.
5. Tighten the two (2)

screws (non-captive). [4]
Connect
Hopper
1. Connect the following
Sensor
cables:
Cables
i2000
W104 RV
HOP LVL
SNSR from
connector
J3 the
hopper
sensor
board. [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP
SNSR at
top left
side of
hopper. [2]
Install
Hopper
1. Slide the baffle through
Baffle
the groove located in the
hopper.
2. Verify the baffle sits
flush with the top of the
hopper.
Note
Failure to install
the baffle can
result in jamming
the RV loader.
Install STAT
Pressure
1. Connect W29 STAT
Monitor
PRESSURE MONITOR
Board
cable to the STAT
(i2000SR)
pressure monitor
board. [3]
2. Slide the board into the

bracket on the front of
the hopper. [2]
3. Connect the pipettor
pressure sensor cable,
PRESS MNTR, into the
JP2 connector. [1]
Note
Prepare for For information on loading RVs, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
Operation Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: Setup and Consumables Inventory.
1. Load the hopper with
RVs.
2. Update the RV
inventory.
3. Close the processing

center cover(s).
4. Power ON the
processing module.
Note
The system
control center
power must be
ON and at the
Snapshot screen
prior to powering
ON the
processing
module for proper
initialization.
5. Perform Startup
procedure to change the
status of the processing
module and sample
handler from Stopped to
Ready.
Verification Procedures
Order VP Description VP Detail / Note Expected Results
1 P-248 Startup and Shutdown Verify and document the following:
Verify processing modules and sample
handler come to a Stopped status without
errors.
handler come to Ready status without errors
when Startup is selected.
2 3125 - Hopper Level Sensor Test
3 3800 - Pressure Monitoring Test
N/A G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2014 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
A1.02 BAFFLE, HOPPER Version - 96728-111_232_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92959-01 Assy, Baffle Spring
A1.02 BAFFLE, HOPPER
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations

Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
1. The processing module must be in
Stopped, or Offline status.
Preparation
1. Lift the appropriate processing center
cover(s) to access the hopper.
Note
Refer to the processing center
map for the hopper location
(RVL).
2. Locate the hopper baffle in the

hopper. [1]
Remove
Hopper
1. Remove the hopper baffle by lifting
Baffle
the baffle up and out of the module.
2. Remove RVs from the hopper and
place in a lint free container.
Replacement
Install
Hopper
1. Slide the baffle through the
Baffle
groove located in the hopper.
2. Verify the baffle sits flush with
the top of the hopper.
Note
Failure to install the
baffle can result in
jamming the RV loader.
Prepare For information on loading RVs, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
for Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: Setup and Consumables
1. Load the hopper with RVs.
Operation Inventory.
2. Update the RV inventory.
3. Close the processing center
cover(s).

errors.
A1.03 BD,SENSOR #7 Version - 96728-111_243_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76475-01 BD, Sensor #7
7-76475-02 Bd, Sensor #7 (RoHS)
A1.03 BD,SENSOR #7
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System

Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
System status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the processing module.
2. Lift the front processing center cover to
access sensor board #7 located on the
hopper.
3. Locate sensor board #7 on the
hopper. [1]
Note
map for the hopper location
(RVL).
Remove Hopper
Sensor Board # Note
7 Use caution when removing screws;
they are not secured to sensor board
#7.
1. Disconnect cable W104 RV HOP LVL

SNSR from connector J3 on the sensor
board. [1]
2. Disconnect the emitter and detector
cables from J1 and J2 on the sensor
board. [2]
3. Remove the three (3) screws (non-
captive) from the board. [3]
4. Remove the board from the module.
Replacement
Install
Hopper
1. Place sensor board #7 on the hopper
Sensor
aligning the screw holes.
Board #7
2. Install the three (3) screws. [1]
3. Connect the detector (3 wire connector) to
J2 on the sensor board. [2]
4. Connect the emitter (2 wire connector) to
J1. [3]
5. Connect cable W104 RV HOP LVL SNSR
to connector J3 on the sensor board. [4]
Prepare for For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
Operation System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Close the processing center cover(s).
Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
2. Power ON the processing module.
Note
The system control center power
must be ON prior to turning on the
processing module for proper
initialization.
3. To change the status of the processing

module and sample handler from Stopped
to Ready, perform the Startup procedure.
A1.04 SENSOR KIT, HOPPER (i2000) Version - 96728-111_255_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78433-01 Sensor, Hopper Kit
A1.04 SENSOR KIT, HOPPER (i2000)
25 min.
Time Required
#2 Phillips Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Removal

System status.
Preparation
access the hopper.
Remove Hopper
Baffle and RVs
1. Remove the hopper baffle by lifting up
and out of the module.
2. Remove all RVs from the hopper and
place the RVs in a lint free container.
Disconnect Hopper
Sensor Cables
1. Disconnect the following cables:
i2000
W104 RV HOP LVL SNSR

from connector J3 the
hopper sensor board [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP SNSR at top left

side of hopper. [2]
Remove Hopper
Note
Use caution when loosening the screws;
they are not secured to the RV loader or
hopper assembly.
1. Loosen (do not remove) the two (2)

screws (non-captive) securing the hopper
to the RV loader. [3]
Note
Inside the hopper, at the bottom of
the RV loader opening, there is a
plastic foot [2] that is engaged with
the RV loader.
2. Pull the bottom left wall of the hopper

away from the RV loader while lifting the
hopper out of the process module.
Note
The loosened screw and washer
must clear the keyholes in the
hopper. [1]
Remove Hopper
Emitter, Detector
1. Disconnect the electrical connections
Sensor, and Sensor
from J1 and J2 connectors on the sensor
Cables
board. [2]
2. Remove the non-captive screw from
each sensor.
Note
DO NOT drop the screw into the
module.
3. Pull the sensor cables up through the

hole in the bottom of the hopper.
Replacement
Install
Emitter
1. Feed the sensor cable though the hole in
Sensor
the bottom left of the hopper.
2. Place the sensor on the mount, verifying
proper orientation.
Note
The sensor must be oriented
correctly for the sensor to work
properly.
3. Install the screw.

4. Connect the sensor cable to the hopper,
sensor board connector at J1. [4]
Install
Detector
1. Feed the sensor cable though the hole in
Sensor
the bottom right of the hopper.
2. Place the sensor on the mount, verifying
proper orientation.
Note
The sensor must be oriented
correctly for the sensor to work
properly.

4. Connect the sensor cable to the hopper,
sensor board connector at J2. [4]
Verify
Connections
1. Verify that the emitter and detector
(i2000)
cables [2] are connected to the hopper
sensor board.
Install
Hopper
1. Slide the hopper keyholes [1] on the
screws [3] on the center plate of the RV
loader assembly.
Note
Verify that the captive washers are
between the screw and the hopper
wall and are not caught behind the
wall.
2. Push the hopper down and engage the

bottom securing features. [2]
3. Visually verify that the plastic foot (at the
bottom of the hopper) is properly engaged
inside the RV loader.
4. Verify that the hopper is mounted flush
against the RV Loader assembly.
5. Tighten the two (2) screws (non-
captive). [3]
Connect
Hopper
1. Connect the following cables:
Sensor
Cables i2000

hopper sensor board. [1]
Install
Hopper
1. Slide the baffle through the groove
Baffle
located in the hopper.
2. Verify the baffle sits flush with the top of
the hopper.
Note
Failure to install the baffle can
result in jamming the RV loader.
Prepare for For information on loading RVs, refer to the ARCHITECT System
Operation Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
Setup and Consumables Inventory.
For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
Note Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
initialization.


errors.
A1.05 RV LOADER,ASM Version - 96728-111_199_2
List/Part Numbers
7-91373-02 RV Loader Assembly, i2000SR,
7-93864-01 RV Loader Assembly, Convertible
7-93865-03 Wheel, RV Loader Orienter
A1.05 RV LOADER,ASM
20 min.
Time Required
Tools/Materials
1/8" hex wrench
ESD Safe Work Kit 7-100526-01
Caution
Note
The 91373 RV loader is used on both the i2000 and the i2000SR.
Removal

Preparation For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
maintenance, Subsection: Component replacement.
2. Lift the front processing center cover
to access the RV loader assembly.
3. Locate the RV loader assembly.
Note
map for the RV loader
assembly location (RVL).
4. Remove the appropriate internal

components cover(s).
Remove
STAT Caution
Pressure Before continuing, take the
Monitor appropriate electrostatic
Board discharge (ESD) precaution.
(i2000SR) Use the static protective
service kit (work mat, Wrist
strap and Grounding clip or
cable) and do not wear gloves.
Not following these precautions
may damage or destroy the
electronic circuitry of the board.
1. Disconnect the pipettor sensor cable
from the STAT pressure monitor
board on the front of the hopper. [1]
2. Disconnect W29 STAT PRESSURE
MONITOR cable. [2]
3. Slide the board up and out of its
bracket. [3]
4. Place the board in a static protection
bag.
Remove
Hopper Video Note:
1. Remove the hopper baffle by lifting Video demonstrates removal of Hopper Baffle and Hopper .
Baffle and
up and out of the module.
Disconnect
Hopper 2. Remove all RVs from the hopper and
Sensor place the RVs in a lint free container.
Cables 3. Disconnect the following cables:
i2000
W104 RV HOP LVL
SNSR from connector
J3 the hopper sensor
board [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP SNSR at top
left side of hopper. [2]
Note
Remove
Hopper Note
Use caution when loosening the
screws; they are not secured to the
RV loader or hopper assembly.

screws (non-captive) securing the
hopper to the RV loader. [3]
Note
Inside the hopper, at the
bottom of the RV loader
opening, there is a plastic
foot [2] that is engaged with
the RV loader.

away from the RV loader while lifting
the hopper out of the process
module.
Note
The loosened screw and
washer must clear the
keyholes in the hopper. [1]
Remove RV
Loader
1. Remove the ground cable from the
Assembly
process path. [1]
Note
On some systems, the ground
cable is screwed on, on
others, a slip-on connector is
used.
2. With a hex wrench, loosen the

thumbscrew (captive) securing the
RV loader assembly to the process
path. [2]
Note
On some systems a Phillips (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
head screw is used to secure

Note
the RV loader
3. Securing the top of the RV loader, tilt
it away from the process path so that
the securing tabs are freed from the
baseplate feature. [3]
4. Disconnect the RV loader wheel

home sensor cable W59 RV ORIENT
SNSR and remove it from the routing
clips on the RV loader. [4]
5. Disconnect the RV sensor board

cable W104 RV SNSR BOARD. [5]
6. Disconnect the RV loader transport

home sensor cable W59 RV TRANS
SNSR. [6]
7. Lift the RV loader assembly up and
tilt toward the process path to access
the two (2) motor assemblies.

motor cable W15 RV TRANS
MTR. [7]
Note
When removing the motor
connector note the orientation
of the cable connection to the
motor connection.
Note
To assist in removal of the
connector, grasp the sides of
the connector and move back
and forth to disconnect.

motor cable W15 RV ORIENT
MTR. [8]
Check RV
Loader
1. At the RV loader transport end of the
Mounting
assembly is the mounting foot that
Foot
has two holes that engage with the
alignment pins on the process path.
For the 91373 RV loader, the hole
close to the front is slotted. For the
78425 RV loader the rear hole is
slotted.
Note
If a 78425 RV loader is
installed on an i2000SR, the
loader will not sit properly on
the process path and process
path jams will occur.
2. If required, the mounting foot can be

removed from the failed part an
installed on the new loader.
Replacement
Install RV
Loader
1. Install the RV loader wheel motor
Assembly
cable W15 RV ORIENT MTR. [8]
Note
Verify the cable connector is
fully seated onto the motor.
2. Install the RV loader transport motor

cable W15 RV TRANS MTR. [7]
Note
fully seated onto the motor.
3. Install the RV loader transport home

sensor cable W59 RV TRANS (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
SNSR. [6]
4. Orient the RV loader assembly so Note
that the securing tabs and the Video contains no audio sound.
baseplate capture feature are aligned.
5. Lower the RV transport end of the
loader and align it with the process
path guide pins. [9]
6. Tighten the thumbscrew (captive). [2]
7. Install the RV sensor board cable
W104 RV SNSR BOARD. [5]
8. Install the RV loader wheel home
sensor cable W59 RV ORIENT
SNSR [4] and place the cable in the
routing clips.
9. Install the ground cables to the
process path. [1]
Verify
Connections
1. Verify that the emitter and detector
(i2000)
cables [2] are connected to the
Install
Hopper and Video Note:
1. Slide the hopper keyholes [1] on the Video demonstrates replacement of Hopper Baffle and Hopper .
connect
screws [3] on the center plate of the
Hopper
RV loader assembly.
Sensor
Cables Note
Verify that the captive washers
are between the screw and the
hopper wall and are not caught
behind the wall.
2. Push the hopper down and engage

the bottom securing features. [2]
3. Visually verify that the plastic foot (at

the bottom of the hopper) is properly
engaged inside the RV loader.
4. Verify that the hopper is mounted

flush against the RV Loader
assembly. (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
5. Tighten the two (2) screws (non- Note

captive). [3] Video contains no audio sound.
i2000
W104 RV HOP LVL
SNSR from connector
board [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP SNSR at top
Install
Hopper
1. Slide the baffle through the groove
Baffle
located in the hopper.
2. Verify the baffle sits flush with the top
of the hopper.
Note
result in jamming the RV
loader.
Install STAT
Pressure Caution
Monitor Before continuing, take the
Board appropriate electrostatic
(i2000SR) discharge (ESD) precaution.
Use the static protective
service kit ( work mat, Wrist
strap and Grounding clip or
cable) and do not wear gloves.
Not following these precautions
may damage or destroy the
electronic circuitry of the board.
1. Connect W29 STAT PRESSURE

MONITOR cable to the STAT
pressure monitor board. [1]
2. Connect the pipettor pressure sensor

cable. [2]
3. Slide the board into the bracket on

the front of the hopper. [3]
Prepare for For information on loading RVs, refer to the ARCHITECT System
Operation Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: Setup
and Consumables Inventory.
3. Install the appropriate internal
Note
The system control center
power must be ON prior to
turning on the processing
module for proper initialization.

errors.
3 3140 - RV Load/Unload Test
A1.06 COVER, BELT, RV LOAD Version - 96728-111_266_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78089-01 Cover, Belt, RV Load
A1.06 COVER, BELT, RV LOAD
15 min
Time Required
# 2 Phillips screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Removal
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
1. The processing module must be
in Stopped, or Offline status.
Preparation For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the ARCHITECT
System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and maintenance, Subsection:
1. Power OFF the processing
Component replacement.
module.
2. Lift the appropriate processing
center cover(s) to access the
RV loader assembly.
3. Locate the RV loader belt cover
on the RV loader assembly. [1]
Note
Refer to the processing
center map for the RV
loader location (RVL).

Remove RV
Loader Belt Note
Cover Use caution when removing
screws; they are not secured to
the RV loader belt cover.
1. Remove the three (3) screws

(non-captive). [1]
2. Lift out the RV loader belt
cover.
Replacement
Install RV
Loader
1. Place the RV loader belt cover over the
Belt
RV loader wheel.
Cover
2. Install the three (3) screws (non-
captive). [1]
Prepare For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT

for System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Install the appropriate internal components
Operation Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
cover(s).
Note
initialization.


errors.
A1.07 BELT, RV LOAD Version - 96728-111_277_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78166-01 Belt, RV Loader
A1.07 BELT, RV LOAD
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal


module.
center cover(s) to access the RV
loader assembly.
3. Locate the RV loader belt cover
on the RV loader assembly. [1]
Note
center map for the RV
loader location (RVL).

Remove RV
Loader Belt Note
Cover Use caution when removing
the RV loader belt cover.

(non-captive). [1]
2. Lift out the RV loader belt cover.
Remove RV
Loader
1. Disconnect cable W59 RV
Wheel
ORIENT SNSR from the sensor
Sensor
board.
2. Remove the non-captive screw
and washer securing the sensor
to the wheel.
Note
Do not drop either the
screw or washer into the
module.
3. Remove the sensor from the

module.
Remove RV
Loader
1. While pressing the RV loader
Wheel Belt.
wheel motor away from the wheel
release the belt tension lever.
2. Slide the motor toward the wheel.
3. Remove the RV loader belt. [1]
Replacement

Install RV
Loader
1. Route the belt around the wheel and motor pulley.
Belt
Note
The belt sits in a grove on the wheel. Verify
correct orientation of the belt.
2. Manually pull the RV loader wheel motor away from

the wheel to put tension on the belt. Then, using the
tension lever, rotate the lever and lock in its indent.
No further tensioning of the belt is required.
Install RV
Loader
1. Place the sensor on the sensor mount ensuring
Wheel
proper orientation.
Sensor
2. Install the screw, with washers.
Note
Verify the plastic washer is between the
captive washer and the board.
3. Connect cable W59 RV ORIENT SNSR to the

sensor board
Install RV
Loader
1. Place the RV loader belt cover over the RV loader
Belt
wheel.
Cover
2. Install the three (3) screws (non-captive). [1]
Prepare For information on the startup procedure, refer to the

for ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
1. Install the appropriate internal components cover(s).
Operation Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause,
and shutdown.
Note
The system control center power must be ON
prior to turning on the processing module for
proper initialization.

errors.
A1.08 V-WHEEL REPAIR KIT, RV LD Version - 96728-111_288_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78443-02 V-Wheel, RV Loader, Repair Kit
A1.08 V-WHEEL REPAIR KIT, RV LD
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

1. The processing module must be in Stopped,
System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
cover(s) to access the RV loader.
Remove RV
Loader Belt Note
Cover Use caution when removing screws; they are
not secured to the RV loader belt cover.

captive). [1]
Remove RV
Loader Wheel
1. Disconnect cable W59 RV ORIENT SNSR
Sensor
from the sensor board.
2.
Remove the non-captive screw and washer
securing the sensor to the RV loader wheel.
Note
Do not drop either the screw or
washer into the module.
3. Remove the sensor from the module.
Remove RV
Loader Wheel
1. While pressing the RV loader wheel motor
Belt
away from the RV loader wheel release the
belt tension lever.
2. Slide the motor toward the wheel.
3. Remove the belt.
Remove RV
Loader Wheel
1. Remove the non-captive screw and washer
in the center of the wheel.
Note
Do not drop either the screw or
washer into the module.
2. Remove the wheel from the module.
Replacement
Install RV
Loader
1. Place the wheel onto the RV loader.
Wheel.
2. Install the screw and washer.
3. Tighten the screw.
Install
Belt
Note
2. Manually pull the RV loader wheel motor away from

the wheel to put tension on the belt. Then, using the
tension lever, rotate the lever and lock in its indent.
No further tensioning of the belt is required.
Install RV
Loader
Wheel
proper orientation.
Sensor
Note
sensor board
Install RV
Loader
Belt
wheel.
Cover

and shutdown.
Note
3. To change the status of the processing module and

sample handler from Stopped to Ready, perform the
Startup procedure.
A1.09 BD, SENSOR #1 (RV Loader Wheel Home) Version - 96728-111_299_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76210-01 BD, Sensor #1
7-76210-02 BD, Sensor #1 (RoHS)
A1.09 BD, SENSOR #1 (RV Loader Wheel Home)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

Preparation
center cover(s) to access the RV
loader.
Remove RV
Loader Wheel
1. Disconnect cable W59 RV ORIENT
Sensor
SNSR from the sensor board.
2. Remove the non-captive screw and
washer securing the sensor to the
wheel.
Note
Do not drop either the screw
or washer into the module.
3. Remove the sensor from the

module.
Replacement
Install RV
Loader
1. Place the sensor on the sensor mount
Wheel
ensuring proper orientation.
Sensor
Note
Verify the plastic washer is
between the captive washer and
the board.
3. Connect cable W59 RV ORIENT SNSR to

the sensor board.
Note
initialization.

A1.11 SHIELD, RV TRANSPORT Version - 96728-111_317_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78417-01 Shield, RV Transport
A1.11 SHIELD, RV TRANSPORT
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal

Preparation
cover(s) to access the RV loader
assembly.
Note
map for the RV loader location
(RVL).
2. Locate the RV transport shield [1] on

the RV loader.
Remove RV
Transport
1. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the
Shield
shield to the RV loader bracket. [2]
2. Remove the shield from the module.
Replacement
Install RV
Transport Shield
1. Insert the tabs on the shield into the slots in
the RV loader transport assembly. [1]
2. Slide the shield toward the RV loader.
3. Tighten the thumbscrew to secure the shield
to the RV loader bracket. [2]
Note
The thumbscrew should be hand
tightened only.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
A1.12 MOTOR, WHEEL, RV LOAD Version - 96728-111_318_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78431-01 Motor, Wheel, RV Loader
A1.12 MOTOR, WHEEL, RV LOAD
12 min
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

1. The processing module must be in Stopped, or
System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s) to
access the RV loader.
Remove
RV Loader Note
Belt Cover Use caution when removing screws; they are not
secured to the RV loader belt cover.
1. Remove the three (3) screws (non-captive). [1]

Remove
RV Loader
1. Disconnect cable W59 RV ORIENT SNSR from
Wheel
the sensor board.
Sensor
2. Remove the non-captive screw and washer
securing the sensor to the wheel.
Note
Do not drop either the screw or washer into
the module.
Remove
RV Loader
1. While pressing the RV loader wheel motor away
Wheel Belt
from the wheel release the belt tension lever, slide
the motor toward the wheel.
2. Remove the belt.
Remove
RV Loader
1. Loosen the captive thumbscrew securing the RV
Wheel
loader transport mechanism to the process path.
Motor
2. Lift the RV loader slightly at the point where the
thumbscrew was loosened and push the RV loader
toward the process path of the processing module.
This frees the tabs of the RV loader, which are
captured under a baseplate feature.
Note
Removing the RV loader from the baseplate
allows you to remove the motor.
3. Slide the motor away from the wheel and remove it

from the module.
Replacement
Install RV
Loader
1. With the motor properly oriented, slide the motor in
Wheel
the groves, on the RV loader, toward the wheel.
Motor
2. While securing the motor in place, orient the RV
loader such that the baseplate feature and the loader
flange are aligned.
3. Slide the loader toward the baseplate feature to seat
it.
Note
Verify the flange is caught under this feature.
Once the loader is in place, the motor is
secure.
4. Tighten the captive thumbscrew of the RV loader to

secure the loader to the process path.
Install
Belt
Note
2. Manually pull the motor, away from the wheel to put

tension on the belt. Then using the tension lever,
rotate the lever and lock in its indent. No further
tensioning of the belt is required.
Install RV
Loader
Wheel
proper orientation.
Sensor
Note

sensor board.
Install RV
Loader
Belt
wheel.
Cover

and shutdown.
Note

Startup procedure.

errors.
A1.13 BD, SENSOR #6 Version - 96728-111_319_2
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
A1.13 BD, SENSOR #6
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
access the RV loader assembly.
Remove
Hopper
1. Remove the hopper baffle by lifting up and out of
Baffle and
the module.
RVs
2. Remove all RVs from the hopper and place the
RVs in a lint free container.
Disconnect
Hopper
Sensor
Cables i2000
W104 RV HOP LVL SNSR from
connector J3 the hopper sensor
board [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP SNSR at top left side of

hopper. [2]
Remove
Hopper Note
Use caution when loosening the screws; they are
not secured to the RV loader or hopper assembly.
1. Loosen (do not remove) the two (2) screws (non-

captive) securing the hopper to the RV loader. [3]
Note
Inside the hopper, at the bottom of the RV
loader opening, there is a plastic foot [2]
that is engaged with the RV loader.
2. Pull the bottom left wall of the hopper away from

the RV loader while lifting the hopper out of the
process module.
Note
The loosened screw and washer must clear
the keyholes in the hopper. [1]
Remove
RV
1. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the shield to the
Transport
RV loader bracket. [2]
Shield
2. Remove the shield from the module. [1]
Remove
RV Loader
1. Disconnect the cable RV TRANS SNSR W59 from
Transport
the transport motor home sensor board.
Assembly
2. Disconnect the cable RV SNSR BD W104P1 from
RV loader sensor board #6.
3. Loosen the captive thumbscrew securing the RV
loader to the process path.
4. Lift the RV loader slightly at the point where the
thumbscrew was loosened and push the RV loader
toward the process path of the processing module.
This frees the tabs of the RV loader, which are
captured under a baseplate feature.
Note
Removing the RV loader from the baseplate
allows easier access to RV transport loader
assembly.
5. Remove the two (2) screws (non-captive) on the

bottom mounting flange of the RV transport loader
assembly.
6. Remove the non-captive screw on top mounting
flange of the RV transport loader assembly.
7. Disconnect the cable RV TRANS MTR W15 from
the transport motor.
8. Remove the transport assembly [1] from the
module.
Remove
RV Loader
1. Remove RV loader sensor board #6 from the
Sensor
transport mechanism by removing the two (2)
Board #6
screws. [1]
Replacement
Connect RV
Loader
1. Connect the RV loader sensor board #6 to
Sensor
the transport mechanism by installing the two
Board #6
(2) screws.
Install RV
Loader
1. Connect the cable RV TRANS MTR W15 to
Transport
the transport motor.
Assembly
2. Slide the transport assembly into the notch in
the RV loader bracket.
3. Install the three (3) screws on the bottom and
top mounting flanges of the RV transport
loader assembly to secure the assembly to
the bracket.
4. Orient the RV loader such that the baseplate
feature and the loader flange are aligned.
5. Slide the loader toward the baseplate feature
to seat it.
Note
Verify the flange is caught under this
feature.
6. Tighten the captive thumbscrew of the RV

loader to secure the loader to the process
path.
7. Connect the cable RV TRANS SNSR W59 to
the transport motor home sensor board.
8. Connect the cable RV SNSR BD W104P1 to
the sensor board.
Install RV
Transport
1. Insert the tabs on the shield into the slots in
Shield
the RV loader transport assembly. [1]
2. Slide the shield toward the RV loader.
3. Tighten the thumbscrew to secure the shield
to the RV loader bracket. [2]
Note
The thumbscrew should be hand
tightened only.
Verify
Connections
1. Verify that the emitter and detector cables [2]
(i2000)
are connected to the hopper sensor board.
Install
Hopper
loader assembly.
Note
between the screw and the hopper wall
and are not caught behind the wall.

5. Tighten the two (2) screws (non-captive). [3]
Connect
Hopper
Sensor
Cables i2000
W104 RV HOP LVL SNSR from

connector J3 the hopper sensor
board. [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP SNSR at top left side

of hopper. [2]
Install
Hopper
1. Slide the baffle through the groove located in
Baffle
the hopper.
2. Verify the baffle sits flush with the top of the
hopper.
Note
Failure to install the baffle can result in
jamming the RV loader.
Prepare for For information on the startup procedure, refer to the

Operation ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Note
The system control center power must
be ON prior to turning on the
initialization.

module and sample handler from Stopped to
Ready, perform the Startup procedure.

errors.
A1.16 LEVEL SENSOR, HOPPER (i2000SR) Version - 96728-111_221_1
List/Part Numbers
7-94006-01 Level Sensor, Hopper, i2000SR
A1.16 LEVEL SENSOR, HOPPER (i2000SR)
5 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
2. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s)
to access the hopper.
3. Remove all RVs from the hopper and place in
a lint free container.
Remove
Hopper Level
1. Disconnect cable W62 HOP SNSR. [1]
Sensor
2. Locate the cable routing clip on the outside
left face of the hopper. [2]
Note
Use caution when removing the screws;
they are not secured to the RV loader
or hopper assembly.
3. Remove the screw that secures the routing

clip. [2]
4. Remove the screw that secures the hopper
level sensor to the inside left face of the
hopper. [3]
Note
Do not to drop the nut on the opposite
side of the hopper wall. [4]
Replacement
Install
Hopper
1. Place the alignment pin in the left hole and
Level
align the sensor's screw with the larger
Sensor
right hole. [3]
2. Use the screw and nut [4] to secure the
sensor to the hopper wall.
Note
Do not to drop the nut on the
opposite side of the hopper wall. [4]
3. Place the cable mount routing clip [2] on

the new sensor cable.
4. Secure the cable mountrouting clip, with
the screw, to the outside left hopper wall.
5. Route the sensor cable thought the notch
at the top of the hopper.
6. Connect cable W62 HOP SNSR. [1]
Prepare For information on loading RVs, refer to the ARCHITECT System

for Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
Operation Setup and Consumables Inventory.
Note
initialization.

errors.
B1.01 PROCESS PATH Version - 96728-111_143_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77912-03 Path, Process
7-77912-04 Path, Process, IVDD
7-77925-01 Process Path Track, i2000
7-94086-01 Path, Process, i2000SR
7-94086-02 Process Path Assembly, i2000SR
B1.01 PROCESS PATH
4.0 hrs
Time Required
Tools/Materials Not Assessed
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
CAUTION
Chemical Hazard

Removal

System status.
Preparation
cover(s) to access the reagent carousel.
2. Open the reagent carousel cover, remove
all the reagents. Rotate the reagent
carousel, if necessary. Store the reagents
in the refrigerator.
Flush Pre-trigger Or For further information on performing maintenance

Trigger Level Caution: Chemical Hazard procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Sensor with Air Avoid skin and eye contact with pre- Manual, Section 9: Service and Maintenance, Subsection:
trigger and trigger solutions. As-needed maintenance procedures.
1. Open the supply and waste center door.

2. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray out.
3. Unscrew and pull up on the level sensors
for pre-trigger and trigger.
4. Angle both sensors (pre-trigger/trigger) in
their containers so that the assembly is
out of the solution.
5. Select the As needed category from the
maintenance screen under the system
icon.
6. Perform maintenance procedure 2133 Air
Flush.
Extend Shutter for

Removal
1. Perform Maintenance and Diagnostic
Procedure 1030 Shutter option 3 (extend)
to move the shutter mechanism into the
down position.
Note
The shutter mechanism cannot be
removed if the shutter is in the up
position. If the diagnostic
procedure fails to move the
shutter, manually push the shutter
down until it is out of the process
path.
Prepare to Remove
Process Path Note
Confirm that the shutter mechanism is in
the down position before powering off the
module.

2. Remove the front top covers.
3. Remove back right and left access panels
to gain rear access.
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover Note
Use caution when removing screws; they
are not secured to the carousel cover.
1. Locate the reagent carousel cover. [1]

captive) that secure the reagent carousel
cover in place. [2]
3. Remove the reagent carousel cover by
using the handle and lifting the cover up
and out of the module. [3]
Note
Be careful not to damage other
parts when removing the cover.
Remove Sample
and STAT
(i2000SR) Wash
wash station to the wash station mount.
Station(s)
2. Grasp the wash station and gently rock
side to side while lifting to free it from the
guide pin.
3. Set the wash station aside.
Remove STAT
Pressure Monitor
1. Disconnect the pipettor sensor cable from
Board (i2000SR)
the STAT pressure monitor board on the
front of the hopper. [1]
MONITOR cable. [2]
bracket. [3]
4. Place the board in a static protection bag.
Remove Hopper
Baffle and RVs
Disconnect Hopper
Sensor Cables
i2000

i2000SR

side of hopper. [2]
Remove Hopper
Note
hopper assembly.

Note
the RV loader.

Note
hopper. [1]
Remove RV Loader
Assembly
process path. [1]
Note
cable is screwed on, on others, a
slip-on connector is used.

thumbscrew (captive) securing the RV
loader assembly to the process path. [2]
3. Securing the top of the RV loader, tilt it
away from the process path so that the
securing tabs are freed from the
4. Disconnect the RV loader wheel home
sensor cable W59 RV ORIENT SNSR
and remove it from the routing clips on
the RV loader. [4]
5. Disconnect the RV sensor board cable
6. Disconnect the RV loader transport home
sensor cable W59 RV TRANS SNSR. [6]
7. Lift the RV loader assembly up and tilt
toward the process path to access the
two (2) motor assemblies.
8. Disconnect the RV loader transport motor
Note
connector note the orientation of
the cable connection to the motor
connection.
Note
connector, grasp the sides of the
connector and move back and
forth to disconnect.
9. Disconnect the RV loader wheel motor

Remove STAT
Diverter
1. Use tape to secure the shutter to the
assembly. [1]
2. Disconnect sensor board connector W41
STAT DIVERT. [2]
3. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews securing
STAT diverter to the process path. [3]
4. Lift STAT diverter and remove it from the
module.
Remove Wash
Zone Mechanism
Assembly from
the wash zone mechanism assembly to
Wash Zone 1
the wash zone.
2. While lifting up on the buffer heater,
grasp the wash zone mechanism
assembly and gently rock it side-to-side
while lifting to free it from the guide pins.
Note
A guide pin is located under the
thumbscrew of the wash zone
buffer heater.
3. Gently set the wash zone mechanism

assembly out the back of the module.
Remove Wash
Zone 1
1. Loosen the two (2) captive screws
securing the wash zone manifold to the
process path.
2. Grasp the wash zone manifold and gently
rock it side-to-side while lifting to free it
from the guide pins.
3. Set the wash zone with the wash zone
mechanism assembly aside.
Access Wash Zone For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to
Diverter the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9:
Service and maintenance, Subsection: Component
cover to access the wash zone diverter
replacement.
assembly.
2. Locate the wash zone diverter assembly.
Note
Refer to the processing center map
for the wash zone diverter
assembly location (WZD).

Remove Wash
Zone Diverter
BYP FLIPPER SENSOR. [1]
2. Disconnect the wash zone diverter motor
cable W160 BYPASS DIV MTR. [2]
Note
connector and move back and
forth to disconnect.

wash zone 1 (WZ1) to the process
path. [3]
Note
The wash zone diverter assembly
is secured under wash zone 1.
Only one thumbscrew is shown in
graphic.
4. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews [4]

securing the wash zone diverter to the
process path.
5. While lifting wash zone 1, lift the wash
zone diverter and remove it from the
module.
Remove Process
Path Drive Motor
1. Remove the two (2) screws (non-captive)
securing the motor to the process path.
2. Set the motor aside.
3. Set the process path drive motor shim
aside.
Remove Wash
Zone Mechanism
1. Loosen the two thumbscrews securing
Assembly with
the wash zone mechanism assembly to
Wash Aspirate Arm
the wash zone.
from Wash Zone 2
buffer heater to the wash zone manifold.
assembly and gently rock it side-to-side
while lifting to free it from the guide pins.
Note
buffer heater.

Remove Wash
Zone 2
1. Loosen the three (3) captive screws
process path.
2. Grasp the manifold and, while lifting,
gently rock it side-to-side to free it from
the guide pins.
3. Gently place the wash zone out the back
of the module.
Remove CMIA
Reader from
1. Loosen the two (2) silver thumbscrews
Processing Module
mounting the CMIA reader to the process
path. [1]
2. Pull back approximately 1/2" (1.5cm) or
more to clear the path and alignment
guide pins. [2]
3. Once the CMIA reader is clear of the
path place a black cover over the light
pipe.
Note
The black cover is shipped in the
maintenance kit.
4. Lift up on the CMIA reader, but do not

remove.
5. Disconnect the PMT and remove the
power connector from the bottom of the
CMIA reader.
6. Remove the CMIA reader from the
module.
Remove Shutter
Mechanism
1. Loosen the two (2) black thumbscrews.
2. Carefully pull back the shutter.
3. Disconnect cable SHUTTER SNSR W56.
4. Disconnect cable SHUTTER MTR W10.
5. Remove the shutter from the module.
Remove Pre-
Trigger/Trigger WARNING
Manifold Protective eyewear must be worn for
this step.
1. Disconnect the valve cables V1, V2, V3,

V4.
2. Disconnect the pre-trigger and trigger
heater/tubing.
Note
Verify each heater/tubing is labeled
so they can be replaced in the
correct position on the manifold.

drain tubing.
the manifold in place.
5. Grasp the manifold and gently rock it
side-to-side while lifting to free it from the
guide pins.
6. Remove the manifold from the module.
Remove RV
Diverter, Unloader
1. Disconnect W32 RV LOAD DVRT cable
Assembly
from the load diverter solenoid. [1]
2. Disconnect W32 RV UNLOAD SOL cable
from the unloader. [2]
3. Disconnect W32 RV UNLOADER SNSR
cable from the RV unloader sensor
board. [3]
4. Disconnect W32 RV LOAD SNSR from
the load diverter sensor board. [4]
5. Disconnect SOLENOID cable from the
load diverter shutter. [5]
6. Disconnect SENSOR CABLE from the
load diverter shutter sensor board. [6]
the diverter,unloader assembly to the
process path. [7]
8. Remove the diverter,unloader assembly
from the module.
Remove Vortexers
Note
This Action covers the three (3) vortexers
in the i2000 instrument and the four (4)
vortexers in the i2000SR instrument.
Note
To access vortexer 2, remove the power
supply panel.
1. Disconnect the vortexer cable by pulling

the tabs on the connector away from the
connector. [1]
2. While pressing on top of the green knob,
turn the knob clockwise to disengage the
locking tab from the process path. [2]
3. Lift the vortexer to disengage the vortexer
from the processing path.
4. Pull the vortexer away from the pins on
the processing path and then lower the
vortexer to disengage the vortexer cup
from the bottom of the process path. [3]
5. Remove the vortexer from the module.
6. Repeat for each vortexer.
Disconnect the
Following Cables
1. Reagent carousel cover sensor
REAGENT LID SNSR W109.
2. Heater cables (6).
3. Thermistor cables (6).
Remove Process
Path Assembly
captive) securing the process path to the
frame.
2. Remove the process path assembly from
the module.
Note
Replacement
Install Process
Path Assembly
1. Align the guide pins and place the process
path assembly into the module.
2. Install the three (3) screws mounting the
process path to the baseplate.
Connect and
Verify Cable
Connections
3. Reagent carousel cover sensor REAGENT
LID SNSR W109.
Install Vortexers
Note
This Action covers the three (3) vortexers in
the i2000 instrument and the four (4)
1. Grasp the green knob and slide the vortexer

cup under the process path. [1]
2. Lift the vortexer up as high as it can go so
that the vortexer cup fits into the process
path hole.
3. Push the vortexer toward the process path
and align the mounting pins on the process
path with the mounting holes on the
vortexer.
4. Push down on the vortexer to seat the
vortexer fully into the pins on the process
path.
5. Press down on the green knob [2] and turn
counterclockwise so that the arrow on the
knob points toward the process path. This
sets the locking tab.
6. Connect the vortex cable by aligning the
arrows on the connector. Verify the tabs of
the connector are locked in place. [3]
Install RV
Diverter,
1. Insert the diverter,unloader assembly, align
Unloader
the guide pins, and place the assembly on
Assembly
the process path.
2. Tighten the two (2) thumbscrews. [1]
3. Connect W32 RV LOAD DVRT cable to the
load diverter solenoid. [2]
4. Connect W32 RV UNLOAD SOL cable to
the unloader. [3]
5. Connect W32 RV UNLOADER SNSR cable
to the RV unloader sensor board. [4]
6. Connect W32 RV LOAD SNSR to the load
diverter sensor board. [5]
7. Connect SOLENOID cable to the load
diverter shutter. [6]
8. Connect SENSOR CABLE to the load
diverter shutter sensor board. [7]
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
1. Grasp the manifold, align the guide pins and
Manifold
seat it on the process path cover.
2. Tighten the two (2) thumbscrews to secure
the manifold to the process path.
3. Connect the pre-trigger and trigger
heater/tubing.
Note
Once the heater/tubing is connected,
verify each is connected to the correct
port on the manifold.
4. Connect the pre-trigger and trigger drain

tubing.
5. Place the drain tubing in the drain hole.
6. Connect the valve cables V1, V2, V3, V4.
Note
Once the valve cables are connected,
verify each cable is connected to the
correct valve.
Install Shutter
Mechanism
1. Verify that the bottom of the shutter plunger
is pushed down to where it is just above the
sensor board.
2. Connect cable SHUTTER SNSR W56.
3. Connect cable SHUTTER MTR W10.
4. Attach the shutter mechanism mounting
bracket to the process path.
Note
The plunger may not be held in place,
use both hands when attaching the
mechanism to the process path.
5. Manually move the shutter plunger to the up

position, while carefully aligning the fins of
the shutter plunger with the holes in the
bottom of the process path.
6. Tighten the two (2) black thumbscrews.
Install CMIA
Reader
1. Connect the PMT and power connectors.
2. Remove the black light pipe cover and store
it in the maintenance kit.
3. Slide the light pipe end into the process
path. [2]
Note
Verify there are no cables/tubing,
pinched between the reader and
housing.
4. Align the guide pins.

5. Screw the (2) two thumbscrews into
place. [1]
Note
Do not use excess force when
installing.
Install Wash
Zone 2
1. Place the wash zone drain tubing into the
drain hole.
Note
Failure to fully install the drain tube
can cause additional system failures.
2. Grasp the wash zone, align the guide pins

and seat it on the process path.
3. With mounting screws loose, push the
manifold towards the outer edge of the
process path. If the manifold does not move
it is properly seated.
4. Tighten the three (3) screws securing the
wash zone to the process path.
Install Wash
Zone 2 Wash
1. While lifting up on the buffer heater, grasp
Zone Mechanism
the wash zone mechanism assembly, align
Assembly with
the guide pins and place it on the wash zone
Wash Arm
manifold seat.
Note
thumbscrew of the wash zone buffer
heater.
2. Verify that the wash zone mechanism

assembly is fully seated.
3. Tighten the two thumbscrews to attach the
4. Tighten the thumbscrew to attach the buffer
heater to the wash zone manifold.
Install Process
Path Drive Motor
1. Discard the process path drive motor spacer
[4] if one is present.
2. Connect the process path drive motor cable
PROC PATH MTR W1. [1]
Note
Verify the cable connector is fully
seated into the motor.
3. On the under side of the motor body, mount

the adhesive PP motor shim [5] along the
motor edge aligned with the motor cable
connector.
4. Orient the motor so the encoder and motor
cables face the back of the module and
insert into the process path.
Note
This places the shim on the side of
the motor to the rear of the process
path so that the motor shafts tilts
slightly away from the process path
disk. This allows for the expansion of
the process path disk.
5. Place the ground cable between the screw
and the process path motor.
6. Install the two (2) screws (non-captive).
7. Connect the process path drive motor
encoder cable PROC PATH MTR ENCOD
W48 by aligning the arrows on the
connector. Verify the tabs of the connector
are locked in place. [3]
Install Wash
Zone Diverter
1. Insert the wash zone diverter assembly, align
Assembly
the process path.
2. Tighten the two (2) thumbscrews securing
the wash zone diverter assembly to the
process path. [1]
3. Connect sensor board connector W161 BYP
FLIPPER SENSOR. [2]
4. Connect the wash zone diverter motor cable
W160 BYPASS DIV MTR. [3]
Note
Install Wash
Zone 1
drain hole.
Note

3. Verify the wash zone is fully seated.
4. Tighten the two (2) screws securing the
manifold to the process path.
Install Wash
Zone 1 Wash
Zone Mechanism
Assembly with
Wash Arm
manifold seat.
Note
heater.

Install Pre-
Trigger and
1. Place the level sensors into the pre-trigger
Trigger Level
and trigger containers and tighten the caps.
Sensors
2. Slide the tray into place.
3. Close the supply and waste center door.
Install Sample
and STAT
1. Grasp the wash station, align the guide pins
(i2000SR) Wash
and seat it on the wash station mount.
Station(s)
2. Tighten the thumbscrew securing the wash
station to the mount.
Install STAT
Diverter
1. Align the guide pins and then place the
(i2000SR)
assembly on the process path.
2. Remove the tape securing the shutter. [1]
3. Verify that the shutter is seated flush on the
diverter assembly.
the diverter to the process path.
5. Check to ensure the shutter [1] is properly
seated.
Install RV Loader
Assembly
1. Install the RV loader wheel motor cable W15
RV ORIENT MTR. [8]
Note
seated onto the motor.
2. Install the RV loader transport motor cable

W15 RV TRANS MTR. [7]
Note
3. Install the RV loader transport home sensor

cable W59 RV TRANS SNSR. [6]
4. Orient the RV loader assembly so that the
securing tabs and the baseplate capture
feature are aligned.
5. Lower the RV transport end of the loader
and align it with the process path guide
pins. [9]
7. Install the RV sensor board cable W104 RV
SNSR BOARD. [5]
8. Install the RV loader wheel home sensor
cable W59 RV ORIENT SNSR [4] and place
the cable in the routing clips.
9. Install the ground cables to the process
path. [1]
Verify
Connections
(i2000)
Install Hopper
loader assembly.
Note
wall.

Connect Hopper
Sensor Cables
i2000

from connector J3 the hopper
sensor board. [1]
i2000SR

side of hopper. [2]
Install Hopper
Baffle
the hopper.
hopper.
Note
Failure to install the baffle can result
in jamming the RV loader.
Install Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Install the reagent carousel cover and tighten
the three (3) non-captive screws. [1]

Operation ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause,
and shutdown.
Note
initialization.

5. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids to remove air from
the tubing.
Note
Check for leaks while performing the
flush.

errors.
4 1111 - Sample Pipettor Calibration
7 1117 - STAT Pipettor Calibration
2 1030 - Shutter
3 2130 - Flush Fluids
5 1112 - R1 Pipettor Calibration
8 3520 - Temperature Status Normal temperature Ranges:
Process path: 36.4° C-37.6° C
Triggers: 32.0° C-37.6° C
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
Reagent cooler: 2.0° C-12.0° C
9 1045 - Optics Verification
B1.02 HEATER, PROCESS PATH Version - 96728-111_178_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77976-01 Heater, P Path Zone 1
7-93959-01 Heater,P Path Zone3,i2000SR
7-93960-01 Heater,P Path Zone4,i2000SR
7-94086-01 Path, Process, i2000SR
7-94086-02 Process Path Assembly, i2000SR
B1.02 HEATER, PROCESS PATH
Time Required
Minimum 4 foot square work area

Tools/Materials
Any alcohol based cleaning solution
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
cover(s) to access the reagent carousel.
Flush Pre-trigger Or For further information on performing maintenance

Trigger Level Caution procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Sensor with Air Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger Manual, Section 9: Service and Maintenance, Subsection:
and trigger solutions. As-needed maintenance procedures.
their containers so that the assembly is
out of the solution.
icon.
Flush.
Extend Shutter for

Removal
Procedure 1030 Shutter option 3 (extend)
to move the shutter mechanism into the
down position.
Note
position. If the diagnostic procedure
fails to move the shutter, manually
push the shutter down until it is out
of the process path.
Prepare to Remove
Process Path Note
1. Power OFF the processing module. Confirm that the shutter mechanism is in the down
2. Remove the front top covers. position before powering off the module.
3. Remove back right and left access panels
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover Note

cover in place. [2]
Note
Remove Sample
and STAT
(i2000SR) Wash
wash station to the wash station mount.
Station(s)
guide pin.
Remove STAT
Pressure Monitor
Board (i2000SR)
MONITOR cable. [2]
bracket. [3]
Remove Hopper
Baffle and RVs
1. Remove the hopper baffle by lifting up and
out of the module.
Disconnect Hopper
Sensor Cables
i2000

i2000SR

side of hopper. [2]
Remove Hopper
Note
hopper assembly.

Note
the RV loader.

Note
hopper. [1]
Remove RV Loader
Assembly
process path. [1]
Note
cable is screwed on, on others, a
slip-on connector is used.

loader assembly to the process path. [2]
3. Securing the top of the RV loader, tilt it
away from the process path so that the
securing tabs are freed from the baseplate
feature. [3]
4. Disconnect the RV loader wheel home
sensor cable W59 RV ORIENT SNSR and
remove it from the routing clips on the RV
loader. [4]
5. Disconnect the RV sensor board cable
6. Disconnect the RV loader transport home
sensor cable W59 RV TRANS SNSR. [6]
toward the process path to access the two
(2) motor assemblies.
8. Disconnect the RV loader transport motor
Note
connector note the orientation of
the cable connection to the motor
connection.
Note
connector and move back and forth
to disconnect.
9. Disconnect the RV loader wheel motor

Remove STAT
Diverter
assembly. [1]
STAT DIVERT. [2]
module.
Remove Wash
Zone Mechanism
1. Loosen the two thumbscrews securing the
Assembly from
wash zone mechanism assembly to the
Wash Zone 1
wash zone.
the wash zone mechanism assembly and
gently rock it side-to-side while lifting to
free it from the guide pins.
Note
buffer heater.

Remove Wash
Zone 1
process path.
3. Set the wash zone with wash zone
Access Wash Zone For further information on removal of internal covers, refer
Diverter to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9:
cover to access the wash zone diverter
replacement.
assembly.
2. Locate the wash zone diverter assembly.
Note
for the wash zone diverter

Remove Wash
Zone Diverter
Note
to disconnect.

wash zone 1 (WZ1) to the process
path. [3]
Note
The wash zone diverter assembly
is secured under wash zone 1.
Only one thumbscrew is shown in
graphic.

process path.
5. While lifting wash zone 1, lift the wash
zone diverter and remove it from the
module.
Remove Process
Path Drive Motor
aside.
Remove Wash
Zone Mechanism
Assembly with
Wash Aspirate Arm
wash zone.
from Wash Zone 2
gently rock it side-to-side while lifting to
free it from the guide pins.
Note
buffer heater.

Remove Wash
Zone 2
process path.
gently rock it side-to-side to free it from
the guide pins.
3. Gently place the wash zone out the back
of the module.
Remove CMIA
Reader from
Processing Module
path. [1]
more to clear the path and alignment
guide pins. [2]
3. Once the CMIA reader is clear of the path
place a black cover over the light pipe.
Note
The black cover is shipped in the
maintenance kit.

remove.
5. Disconnect the PMT and remove the
power connector from the bottom of the
CMIA reader.
6. Remove the CMIA reader from the
module.
Remove Shutter
Mechanism
Remove Pre-
this step.

V4.
heater/tubing.
Note

drain tubing.
5. Grasp the manifold and gently rock it side-
to-side while lifting to free it from the guide
pins.
Remove RV
Diverter, Unloader
Assembly
board. [3]
4. Disconnect W32 RV LOAD SNSR from
process path. [7]
from the module.
Remove Vortexers
Note
This Action covers the three (3) vortexers
in the i2000 instrument and the four (4)
Note
supply panel.
1. Disconnect the vortexer cable by pulling

the tabs on the connector away from the
connector. [1]
the processing path and then lower the
Disconnect the
Following Cables
LID SNSR W109.
Remove Process
Path Assembly
captive) securing the process path to the
frame.
the module.
Note
Remove Defective
Heater
1. Clear work area for process path. To
prevent damage to the guide pins and
place a 4' (1.25 m) square section of card
board on the surface.
2. Place process path upside down on the
covered work surface.
3. Remove the defective heater pad.
4. Using any alcohol based cleaning solution,
remove any residual adhesive.
Replacement
Install Heater
1. Align the new heater on the open area of the
process path.
Note
Using the wrong heater will effect
system prefomance.
2. Remove the protective cover over the

adhesive material.
3. Carefully align the heater as it placed on the
process path.
4. Ensure that the heater has a firm contact by
pressing firmly along the length of the
heater.
Install Process
Path Assembly
Connect and
Verify Cable
Connections
LID SNSR W109.
Install Vortexers
Note

path hole.
vortexer.
path.
Install RV
Diverter,
Unloader
Assembly
the process path.
the unloader. [3]
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
Manifold
heater/tubing.
Note

tubing.
Note
correct valve.
Install Shutter
Mechanism
sensor board.
Note

Install CMIA
Reader
path. [2]
Note
housing.

place. [1]
Note
installing.
Install Wash
Zone 2
drain hole.
Note

Install Wash
Zone 2 Wash
Zone Mechanism
Assembly with
the guide pins and place it on the wash
Wash Arm
zone manifold seat.
Note
heater.

Install Process
Path Drive Motor
Note

connector.
Note
path so that the motor shaft tilts
disk. This allows for expansion of the
process path disk.

Install Wash Zone

Diverter
1. Insert the wash zone diverter assembly,
Assembly
align the guide pins, and place the assembly
on the process path.
process path. [1]
FLIPPER SENSOR. [2]
Note
Install Wash
Zone 1
drain hole.
Note

Install Wash
Zone 1 Wash
Zone Mechanism
Assembly with
the guide pins and place it on the wash
Wash Arm
zone manifold seat.
Note
heater.

Install Pre-Trigger
and Trigger Level
Sensors
Install Sample
and STAT
(i2000SR) Wash
Station(s)
Install STAT
Diverter
(i2000SR)
diverter assembly.
seated.
Install RV Loader
Assembly
RV ORIENT MTR. [8]
Note

Note

pins. [9]
SNSR BOARD. [5]
path. [1]
Verify
Connections
(i2000)
Install Hopper
loader assembly.
Note
wall.

Connect Hopper
Sensor Cables
i2000

sensor board. [1]
i2000SR

side of hopper. [2]
Install Hopper
Baffle
the hopper.
hopper.
Note
Install Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Install the reagent carousel cover and
tighten the three (3) non-captive screws. [1]

and shutdown.
Note
initialization.

5. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids to remove air
from the tubing.
Note
flush.

errors.
2 1030 - Shutter
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
B1.03 THERMISTOR,P PATH Version - 96728-111_322_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77991-01 Thermistor, P Path
B1.03 THERMISTOR,P PATH
15 min.
Time Required
Thermistor removal wrench

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function,
Subsection: System status.
Offline status.
Preparation For further information on removal of internal covers, refer

to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9:
replacement.
access the process path thermistor.
3. Locate the process path thermistor to be replaced.
Note
Process path thermistor #2 is accessible for
replacement by Field Service only.
4. Remove the appropriate internal components

cover(s).
Remove
Process
1. Access the appropriate thermistor.
Path
Thermistor Note
Process path thermistor #2 is accessible for
replacement by Field Service only.
To access thermistors 1, 3 or 4 go to Step3.

To access thermistor 5, open the rear
processing center access panel and continue
with Step3.
To access thermistor 6, the reagent syringe 1
(R1S) must be removed. Continue with
Step2.
2. Press in on the syringe clamp securing the syringe

to the module frame and lift the reagent syringe 1
(R1S) up and away from the mounting bracket. Set
the syringe on the process path.
3. Disconnect the thermistor electrical cable. [1]
4. Use the thermistor removal wrench to unscrew the
thermistor from the process path. [2]
5. Remove the thermistor from the processing module.
Replacement
Install
Thermistor
1. Screw the thermistor into the process
path. [1]
Note
The thermistor should turn easily. If
it does not, the thermistor is cross
threaded. Remove and reinstall.
2. Secure the thermistor to the process path
using the thermistor removal wrench.
Note
Install the thermistor until all the
threads are seated into the process
path.
3. Connect the thermistor electrical cable. [2]

4. If reagent syringe 1 (R1S) was removed,
slide the syringe onto the mounting
bracket.
5. If the rear processing center access panel
is open, close it.

cover(s).
Note
initialization.

Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
B1.04 MAGNET,READER OR MAGNET,WASH Version - 96728-111_323_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78028-01 Magnet, Wash
7-78029-01 Magnet, Reader
B1.04 MAGNET,READER OR MAGNET,WASH
4.0 hrs
Time Required
WARNING
Electric Shock Hazard
CAUTION
Removal

System status.
Preparation
cover(s) to access the reagent carousel
cover.
all the reagents, rotate the reagent
carousel, if necessary. Store the reagents in
the refrigerator.
Flush Pre-Trigger For further information on performing maintenance

and Trigger Level Caution procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Sensor with Air Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger Manual, Section 9: Service and Maintenance, Subsection:
and trigger solutions. As-needed maintenance procedures.
their containers so that the assembly is out
of the solution.
maintenance screen under the system icon.
Flush.
Extend Shutter for

Removal
Procedure 1030 Shutter to move the shutter
mechanism into the down position.
Note
position. If the diagnostic procedure
fails to move the shutter, manually
push the shutter down until it is out
Prepare to
Remove Reagent Note
1. Power OFF the processing module. Confirm that the shutter mechanism is in the down
Carousel Cover
2. Remove the front top cover by removing position before powering off the module.
the four (4) screws (non-captive) from each
cover bracket.
Note
Do not drop the screws into the
module. Covers must be supported
when removing the screws.
3. Disconnect the waste outlet tube.

4. Remove back right and left, access panels
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover Note

2. Remove the three (3) screws (non-captive)
that secure the reagent carousel cover in
place. [2]
Note
Be careful not to damage other parts
when removing the cover.
Remove Sample
and STAT
1. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the wash
(i2000SR) Wash
station to the wash station mount.
Station(s)
2. Grasp the wash station and gently rock side
to side while lifting to free it from the guide
pin.
Remove STAT
Pressure Monitor
Board (i2000SR)
MONITOR cable. [2]
3. Slide the board up and out of its bracket. [3]
Remove Hopper
Baffle and RVs
1. Remove the hopper baffle by lifting up and
out of the module.
2. Remove all RVs from the hopper and place
the RVs in a lint free container.
Disconnect
Hopper Sensor
Cables
i2000

sensor board [1]
i2000SR

side of hopper. [2]
Remove Hopper
Note
hopper assembly.
1. Loosen (do not remove) the two (2) screws

(non-captive) securing the hopper to the
RV loader. [3]
Note
the RV loader.
2. Pull the bottom left wall of the hopper away

from the RV loader while lifting the hopper
out of the process module.
Note
hopper. [1]
Remove RV
loader
1. Loosen the captive thumbscrew mounting
the RV loader transport mechanism to the
process path.
2. Lift the RV loader slightly at the point where
the thumbscrew was loosened and push
the RV loader toward the process path of
the processing module. This frees the tabs
of the RV loader, which are captured under
a baseplate feature.
3. Place the RV loader to the side of the
module away from the process path.
Remove STAT
Diverter
assembly. [1]
STAT DIVERT. [2]
module.
Remove Wash
Zone Mechanism
Assembly from
the wash zone mechanism assembly to the
Wash Zone 1
wash zone.
gently rock it side-to-side while lifting to free
it from the guide pins.
Note
heater.

Remove Wash
Zone 1
1. Loosen the two (2) captive screws securing
the wash zone manifold to the process
path.
3. Set the wash zone with wash zone
Remove Wash
Zone Diverter
Note
to disconnect.

wash zone 1 (WZ1) to the process path. [3]
Note
The wash zone diverter assembly is
secured under wash zone 1. Only
one thumbscrew is shown in graphic.

process path.
5. While lifting wash zone 1, lift the wash zone
diverter and remove it from the module.
Remove Process
Path Drive Motor
aside.
Remove Wash
Zone Mechanism
Assembly with
Wash Aspirate
wash zone.
Arm From Wash
2. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the buffer
Zone 2
gently rock it side-to-side while lifting to free
Note
heater.

Remove Wash
Zone 2
process path.
2. Grasp the manifold and, while lifting, gently
rock it side-to-side to free it from the guide
pins.
3. Gently place the wash zone out the back of
the module.
Remove CMIA
Reader from
Processing
Module
path. [1]
more to clear the path and alignment guide
pins. [2]
3. Once the CMIA reader is clear of the path
Note
The black cover is stored in the
maintnenace kit.

remove.
5. Disconnect the PMT and remove the power
connector from the bottom of the CMIA
reader.
6. Remove the CMIA reader from the module.
Remove Shutter
Mechanism
Remove Pre-
this step.

V4.
heater/tubing.
Note
3. Disconnect the pre-trigger and trigger drain

tubing.
5. Grasp the manifold and gently rock it side-
to-side while lifting to free it from the guide
pins.
Remove RV
Diverter, Unloader
Assembly
board. [3]
4. Disconnect W32 RV LOAD SNSR from the
load diverter sensor board. [4]
5. Disconnect SOLENOID cable from the load
6. Disconnect SENSOR CABLE from the load
process path. [7]
from the module.
Remove Vortexers
Note
Note
supply panel.
1. Disconnect the vortexer cable by pulling the

tabs on the connector away from the
connector. [1]
4. Pull the vortexer away from the pins on the
processing path and then lower the vortexer
to disengage the vortexer cup from the
bottom of the process path. [3]
Disconnect
Process Path
Cables
LID SNSR W109.
Remove Process
Path
securing the process path to the frame.
the module.
Remove Magnet
1. Locate the appropriate magnet.
securing the magnet to the process path.
3. Through the opening in the process path
cover use a small screwdriver and push the
magnet from its seat in the process path.
4. Remove the magnet from the process path.
Replacement
Install Magnet
1. Align the guide pins and place the magnet
into the process path.
2. Install the two (2) screws mounting the
magnet to the process path.
Install Process
Path Assembly
Connect and
Verify Cable
Connections
LID SNSR W109.
Install Vortexers
Note

path hole.
vortexer.
path.
Install RV
Diverter,
Unloader
Assembly
the process path.
the unloader. [3]
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
Manifold
heater/tubing.
Note

tubing.
Note
correct valve.
Install Shutter
Mechanism
sensor board.
Note
Install CMIA
Reader
path. [2]
Note
housing.

place. [1]
Note
installing.
Install Wash
Zone 2
drain hole.
Note

Install Wash
Zone 2 Wash
Zone Mechanism
Assembly with
Wash Arm
manifold seat.
Note
heater.

Install Process
Path Drive Motor
Note

connector.
Note
path so that the motor shaft tilts
disk. This allows for expansion of the
process path disk.
Install Wash Zone

Diverter
1. Insert the wash zone diverter assembly,
Assembly
align the guide pins, and place the assembly
process path. [1]
FLIPPER SENSOR. [2]
Note
Install Wash
Zone 1
drain hole.
Note

Install Wash
Zone 1 Wash
Zone Mechanism
Assembly with
Wash Arm
manifold seat.
Note
heater.

Install Pre-Trigger
and Trigger Level
Sensors
Install Sample
and STAT
(i2000SR) Wash
Station(s)
Install STAT
Diverter
(i2000SR)
diverter assembly.
seated.
Install RV Loader
Assembly
RV ORIENT MTR. [8]
Note

Note

pins. [9]
SNSR BOARD. [5]
path. [1]
Verify
Connections
(i2000)
Install Hopper
loader assembly.
Note
wall.

Connect Hopper
Sensor Cables
i2000

sensor board. [1]
i2000SR

side of hopper. [2]
Install Hopper
Baffle
the hopper.
hopper.
Note
Install Reagent
Carousel Cover

and shutdown.
Note
initialization.

from the tubing.
Note
flush.

errors.
2 1030 - Shutter
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
B1.05 BD,SENSOR #5 Version - 96728-111_324_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76465-02 BD, Sensor #5
7-76465-04 BD, Sensor #5 (RoHS)
B1.05 BD,SENSOR #5
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal


module.
2. Lift the rear processing center
cover to access the process path
home sensor board #5.
3. Remove the power supply access
panel.
cover(s).
5. Locate the process path home
sensor board #5. [1]
Remove Process
Path Home Note
Sensor Board #5 Use caution when removing
the process path home sensor
board #5.
1. Disconnect the process path

sensor cable PROC PATH SNSR
W48 from the connector. [1]
2. Remove the two (2) screws (non-
captive) securing the sensor board
to the process path. [2]
3. Remove the board.
Replacement
Install Process
Path Home
1. Place the sensor board on the process
Sensor
path and align the screw holes.
Board #5
2. Install the two (2) screws (non-
captive). [1]
3. Connect the process path sensor cable
PROC PATH SNSR W48 to sensor
board #5. [2].
2. Close the power supply access panel.
Note
must be ON prior to turning on
the processing module for proper
initialization.

module and sample handler from
Stopped to Ready, perform the Startup
procedure.

errors.
B1.06 Process Path Cover Version - 96728-111_4707_2
B1.06 PROCESS PATH COVER
2.0 hrs
Time Required
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
CAUTION
Chemical Hazard

Removal

System status.
Preparation
cover(s) to access the reagent
carousel.
2. Open the reagent carousel cover,

remove all the reagents. Rotate the
reagent carousel, if necessary. Store
the reagents in the refrigerator.
Prepare to Remove
Process Path Cover
2. Remove the front top covers.
3. Remove back right and left access

panels to gain rear access.
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover Note
Use caution when removing screws;
they are not secured to the carousel
cover.

captive) that secure the reagent
carousel cover in place. [2]
3. Remove the reagent carousel cover
by using the handle and lifting the
cover up and out of the module. [3]
Note
Remove STAT
Pressure Monitor Board
1. Disconnect the pipettor sensor cable
Connections (i2000SR)
from the STAT pressure monitor
board on the front of the hopper. [1]

MONITOR cable. [2]
Remove Hopper Baffle

and RVs
Disconnect Hopper
Sensor Cables
i2000
W104 RV HOP LVL
SNSR from connector
board [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP SNSR at top

Remove Hopper
Note
Use caution when loosening the
screws; they are not secured to the
RV loader or hopper assembly.

screws (non-captive) securing the
hopper to the RV loader. [3]
Note
Inside the hopper, at the
bottom of the RV loader
opening, there is a plastic
foot [2] that is engaged with
the RV loader.

away from the RV loader while lifting
the hopper out of the process module.
Note
The loosened screw and
washer must clear the
keyholes in the hopper. [1]
Remove RV Loader
Assembly
process path. [1]
Note
cable is screwed on, on others,
a slip-on connector is used.

loader assembly to the process
path. [2]
3. Holding the top of the RV loader, tilt it
away from the process path so that
the securing tabs are freed from the
home sensor cable W59 RV ORIENT
SNSR and remove it from the routing
clips on the RV loader. [4]
5. Disconnect the RV sensor board
cable W104 RV SNSR BOARD. [5]
home sensor cable W59 RV TRANS
SNSR. [6]
toward the process path to access the
two (2) motor assemblies.
motor cable W15 RV TRANS
MTR. [7]
Note
connector note the orientation
of the cable connection to the
motor connection.
Note

motor cable W15 RV ORIENT
MTR. [8]
Remove STAT Diverter

assembly. [1]
2. Disconnect sensor board connector
W41 STAT DIVERT. [2]
3. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews
securing STAT diverter to the process
path. [3]
4. Lift STAT diverter and remove it from
the module.
Remove Wash Zone 1
securing the wash zone manifold to
the process path.
2. Grasp the wash zone manifold and
gently rock it side-to-side while lifting
to free it from the guide pins.
3. Set the wash zone with the wash
zone mechanism assembly aside.
Access Wash Zone For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to
Diverter the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9:
cover to access the wash zone
replacement.
diverter assembly.
2. Locate the wash zone diverter

assembly.
Note
map for the wash zone diverter

components cover(s) if needed.
Remove Wash Zone

Diverter
securing the wash zone diverter to
the process path.
2. Lift the wash zone diverter and set it

aside.
Remove Process Path

Drive Motor
captive) securing the motor to the
process path.
Remove Wash Zone

Mechanism Assembly
1. Loosen the three thumbscrews
with Wash Aspirate
securing the wash zone mechanism
Arm from Wash Zone 2
assembly to the wash zone.

buffer heater to the wash zone
manifold.

assembly and gently rock it side-to-
side while lifting to free it from the
guide pins.
Note
A guide pin is located under
the thumbscrew of the wash
zone buffer heater.

Remove Wash Zone 2

securing the wash zone manifold to
the process path.
gently rock it side-to-side to free it
3. Gently place the wash zone out the
back of the module.
Remove Pre-
Trigger/Trigger Manifold WARNING
Protective eyewear must be worn
for this step.

securing the manifold in place.
2. Grasp the manifold and gently rock it

side-to-side while lifting to free it from
the guide pins.
3. Rotate manifold 90° and set on optics.
Remove RV Diverter,
Unloader Assembly
1. Disconnect W32 RV LOAD DVRT
cable from the load diverter
solenoid. [1]
2. Disconnect W32 RV UNLOAD SOL

cable from the unloader. [2]
3. Disconnect W32 RV UNLOADER

SNSR cable from the RV unloader
sensor board. [3]
4. Disconnect W32 RV LOAD SNSR

from the load diverter sensor
board. [4]


Note
Thumbscrew retainer "C" clips
may be missing, causing
thumbscrews to come from
unloader assembly.
securing the diverter,unloader
assembly to the process path. [7]
8. Remove the diverter,unloader

assembly from the module.
Disconnect the
Following Cables
1. Reagent carousel cover sensor
REAGENT LID SNSR W109.
Remove Process Path

Assembly
1. Grasp edge of the process path cover
from the back of instrument and left of
guide pins.
Note
Gently rock cover until it is
clear of all guide pins.
2. Move work cover gently over Sample
and STAT (if equipped) wash cup
targets and lift out through front of
instrument.
Replacement
Install Process
Path Assembly
path cover assembly into the module.
Note
Cover should sit flat on process path
disk and make a solid sound when
tapped lightly.
Connect and
Verify Cable
1. Connect W109, Reagent Lid Sensor.
Connections
Install RV
Diverter,
Unloader
Assembly
the process path.
the unloader. [3]
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
Manifold

Install Wash
Zone 2
drain hole.
Note

Install Wash
Zone 2 Wash
Zone Mechanism
Assembly with
Wash Arm
manifold seat.
Note
heater.

3. Tighten two (2) thumbscrews to secure

manifold to process path.
4. Place wash zone mechanism on manifold

and secure using three (3) thumbscrews.
5. Mount buffer heater on manifold and secure.
Note
Ensure wash probe arm is tight and
probe is in hole.
Install Process
Path Drive Motor
Note

connector.
Note
path so that the motor shafts tilts
disk. This allows for the expansion of
the process path disk.
Install Wash
Zone Diverter
1. Insert the wash zone diverter assembly, align
Assembly
the process path.
process path. [1]
FLIPPER SENSOR. [2]
Note
Install Wash
Zone 1
drain hole.
Note


Note
If Power Supply Drip Protection TSB
is completed, drain hose is replaced
by fixed funnels on process path.
Install STAT
Diverter
(i2000SR)
diverter assembly.
seated.
Install RV Loader
Assembly
Note
RV Loader has to be in the general
area where it mounts to connect
cables.
RV ORIENT MTR. [8]
Note

Note


pins. [9]

SNSR BOARD. [5]


path. [1]
Verify
Connections
(i2000)
Install Hopper
loader assembly.
Note
wall.

Connect Hopper
Sensor Cables
i2000

sensor board. [1]
i2000SR

side of hopper. [2]
Install Hopper
Baffle
the hopper.
hopper.
Note
Install Pressure
Monitor
1. Connect Monitor Sensor RJ42 [1] connector
Connection (i2SR
to PM1B on hopper.
only)
2. Connect PM1B Power / Data cable to PM1B
(W29). [2]
Install Reagent
Carousel Cover
and shutdown.
Note
initialization.

5. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids to remove air from
the tubing.
Note
flush.
1 G10 - Covers / Doors / Panels Verify cover/door/panel(s) are correctly
installed and securely fastened and/or
open/close freely.
B2.01 COVER,P PATH Version - 96728-111_325_2
List/Part Numbers
7-202480-01 Cover, Process Path, i2000SR, Molded
7-93733-01 Cover, Process Path, i2000SR
B2.01 COVER,P PATH
1 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal
Offline status.
Preparation
processing center
reagent carousel cover.
2. Open the reagent

carousel cover, Remove
the all the reagents.
Rotate the reagent
carousel, if necessary.
Store the reagents in
the refrigerator.
3. Scan the reagent
carousel to preserve the
reagent times.
4. Remove all probes from
the pipettors.
Note
Removing the
probes will keep
them from
damage during
the component
removal and
replacement.
Flush Pre- For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to the
Trigger or Caution ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and Maintenance,
Trigger Level Avoid skin and eye Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
Sensor with contact with pre-trigger
Air and trigger solutions.
1. Open the supply and

waste center door.
2. Slide the pre-

trigger/trigger tray out.
3. Unscrew and pull up on

the level sensor for pre-
trigger and trigger.
4. Angle both sensors

(pre-trigger/trigger) in
their container so that
the assembly is out of
the solution.
5. Select the As needed

category from the
maintenance screen
under the system icon.
6. Perform maintenance
procedure 2133 Air
Flush.
Note
If this step is
missed then
bottle solution
may continually
leak when the
pre-trigger and
trigger manifold
tubing is
removed.
Prepare To
Remove
1. Power OFF the
Process Path
processing module.
Cover
2. Remove the back right
and left, access panels
to gain rear access
.
Remove
Reagent Note
Carousel Use caution when
Cover removing screws; they
are not secured to the
carousel cover.
1. Locate the reagent

carousel cover. [1]
2. Remove the three (3)

screws (non-captive)
that secure the reagent
carousel cover in
place. [2]
3. Remove the reagent

carousel cover by using
the handle and lifting
the cover up and out of
the module. [3]
Note
Be careful not to
damage other
parts when
removing the
cover.
Remove
STAT Note
Pressure Use proper ESD
Monitor Board tools when
(i2000SR) handling boards
to prevent
damage.
sensor cable from the
board on the front of Note
the hopper. [1] Click the icon above to access the video in E2.09 BD, PRESSURE
MONITOR action section: "Remove pressure monitor board".
2. Disconnect W29 STAT
PRESSURE MONITOR
cable. [2]

static protection bag.
Note
Place Pressure
Monitor Board on
the ESD Work
Matt or into a
static protected
bag when not in
use.
Remove
Hopper Baffle
and
Disconnect
out of the module.
Hopper
2. Remove all RVs from
the hopper and place
the RVs in a lint free
container.
cables: Note
Click the icon above to access the video in A1.01 HOPPER ASM action
i2000 section: "Remove Hopper Baffle and RVs".
W104 RV
HOP LVL
SNSR
from
connector
J3 the
hopper
sensor
board [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP
SNSR at
top left
side of
hopper. [2]
Remove
Hopper Note
Use caution when
assembly.
the two (2) screws
(non-captive) securing
the hopper to the RV
loader. [3]
Note
Inside the
hopper, at the
bottom of the RV
loader opening,
there is a plastic
foot [2] that is
engaged with the
RV loader.

the RV loader while
lifting the hopper out of
the process module.
Note
The loosened
screw and
washer must
clear the
keyholes in the
hopper. [1]
Remove RV
Loader
1. Remove the ground
Assembly
cable from the process
path. [1]
Note
On some
systems, the
ground cable is
screwed on, on
others, a slip-on Note
connector is Click the icon above to access the video in A1.05 RV LOADER, ASM action
used. section: "Remove RV Loader Assembly".
2. With a hex wrench,

loosen the thumbscrew
(captive) securing the
RV loader assembly to
the process path. [2]
Note
Some systems
use a Phillips
head screw to
secure the RV
loader.
3. Securing the top of the
RV loader, tilt it away
from the process path
so that the securing
tabs are freed from the
4. Disconnect the RV
loader wheel home
sensor cable W59 RV
ORIENT SNSR and
remove it from the
routing clips on the RV
loader. [4]
sensor board cable
W104 RV SNSR
BOARD. [5]
loader transport home
sensor cable W59 RV
TRANS SNSR. [6]
7. Lift the RV loader

assembly up and tilt
toward the process path
to access the two (2)
motor assemblies.
loader transport motor
cable W15 RV TRANS
MTR. [7]
Note
When removing
the motor
connector note
the orientation of
the cable
connection to the
motor
connection.
Note
To assist in
removal of the
connector, grasp
the sides of the
connector and
move back and
forth to
disconnect.
loader wheel motor
cable W15 RV ORIENT
MTR. [8]
Remove
STAT Diverter Note
For the STAT
Diverter with the
non-captive
shutter, place
tape over the
shutter to secure
it prior to
removing the
diverter
assembly. [1] Note
Click the icon above to access the video in B2.19 DIVERTER, ASSEMBLY,
1. Disconnect sensor STAT action section: "Remove STAT Diverter".
board connector W41
STAT DIVERT. [2]
2. Loosen the two (2)

thumbscrews securing
STAT diverter to the
process path. [3]
3. Lift STAT diverter and

remove it from the
module.
Remove
Wash Zone 1
Mechanism
captive screws securing
Assembly
the wash zone manifold
to the process path.
2. Grasp the wash zone
manifold and gently rock
it side-to-side while
lifting to free it from the
guide pins.
3. Set the wash zone with

wash zone mechanism
assembly aside.
Note
Ensure cables,
tubing, and WZ
probes are
undamaged.
Remove
Wash Zone
Diverter
the wash zone diverter
2. While lifting wash

zone 1, lift the wash
zone diverter and set it
aside in the module.
Note
Remove
Process Path
1. Remove the two (2)
Drive Motor
securing the motor to
the process path.
2. Set aside the motor,

motor shim (if present),
and screws.
Note
Remove
Waste Arm
1. Slide the clip on the
and Tubing
waste probe
(WZ2 only)
counterclockwise to free
the probe.
2. Pull the probe up and

out from the waste arm
and set it aside.
3. Loosen the waste arm

screw on the top of
WZ2 Mechanism
Assembly.
4. Remove the waste arm.
Remove
Wash Zone
1. Loosen the two
Mechanism
the wash zone
mechanism assembly to
the wash zone.
2. Loosen the thumbscrew

securing the buffer
heater to the wash zone
manifold.
3. While lifting up on the

buffer heater, grasp the
wash zone mechanism
assembly and gently
rock it side-to-side while
guide pins.
Note
A guide pin is
located under the
thumbscrew of
the wash zone
buffer heater.
4. Gently set the wash

zone mechanism
assembly out the back
of the module.
Remove Pre-
Manifold Protective eyewear
must be worn for this
step.
1. Disconnect the valve

cables V1, V2, V3, V4.
2. Disconnect the pre-

trigger and trigger Note
heater/tubing. Click the icon above to access the video in H1.05 MANIFOLD, PRE-
Note TRIG/TRIG ASM action section: "Remove Pre-Trigger/Trigger Manifold".
Verify each
heater/tubing is
labeled so they
can be replaced
in the correct
position on the
manifold.

trigger and trigger drain
tubing.

5. Grasp the manifold and

gently rock it side-to-
side while lifting to free
6. Remove the manifold

from the module.
Remove RV
Diverter,
1. Disconnect W32 RV
Unloader
LOAD DVRT cable from
Assembly
the load diverter
solenoid. [1]
UNLOAD SOL cable
3. Disconnect W32 RV Note

UNLOADER SNSR Click the icon above to access the video in B2.15 DIVERTER, UNLOADER
cable from the RV RV ASM action section: "Remove RV Diverter, Unloader Assembly".
unloader sensor
board. [3]
LOAD SNSR from the
load diverter sensor
board. [4]
5. Disconnect SOLENOID
cable from the load
6. Disconnect SENSOR
CABLE from the load
diverter shutter sensor
board. [6]

thumbscrews securing New Style Unloader Diverter Assembly
the diverter,unloader
assembly to the process
path. [7]
8. Remove the
diverter,unloader
assembly from the
module.
Old Style Unloader Diverter Assembly
Disconnect
Reagent Lid Note
1. Reagent carousel cover Video shows removal of reagent lid cable and process path cover (next step).
Cable
sensor REAGENT LID
SNSR W109.
Note
Remove
Process Path
1. Grasp the process path
Cover
cover and gently rock it
side-to-side while lifting
to free it from the guide
pins.
Note
Be careful not to
damage other
parts when
removing the
cover.
Replacement
Install Process
Path Cover Note
1. Place the process path Video shows replacement of reagent lid cable and process path cover (next
cover on the process step).
path aligning the guide
pins.
Note
Refer to figure for
proper
orientation.
Note
Connect
Reagent Lid
1. Reagent carousel cover
Cable
sensor REAGENT LID
Connections
SNSR W109.
Install RV
Diverter,
1. Insert the
Unloader
diverter,unloader
Assembly
assembly, align the
guide pins, and place
the assembly on the
process path.

thumbscrews. [1]
Note
3. Connect W32 RV LOAD Click the icon above to access the video in B2.15 DIVERTER, UNLOADER
DVRT cable to the load RV ASM action section: "Install RV Diverter, Unloader Assembly".
diverter solenoid. [2]
4. Connect W32 RV
UNLOAD SOL cable to
the unloader. [3]
5. Connect W32 RV
UNLOADER SNSR
cable to the RV
unloader sensor
board. [4]
6. Connect W32 RV LOAD

SNSR to the load
diverter sensor
board. [5]
7. Connect SOLENOID
cable to the load New Style Unloader Diverter Assembly
8. Connect SENSOR
CABLE to the load
board. [7]

Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
1. Grasp the manifold,
Manifold
align the guide pins and
seat it on the process
path cover.

thumbscrews to secure
the manifold to the
process path.
3. If the manifold was:. Note
Set to the side Click the icon above to access the video in H1.05 MANIFOLD, PRE-
then check tubing TRIG/TRIG ASM action section: "Install Pre-Trigger/Trigger Manifold".
and cable are
conencted and
tubing is free
from kinks.
Removed,
connect the
heater/tubing [1]
and drain tubing
[2].
Note
Once the
heater/tubing is
connected, verify
each is
connected to the
correct port on
the manifold.
4. Connect the pre-trigger

drain tubing [2] and
heater/tubing [1].
Note
Once the
heater/tubing and
drain tubing are
connected, verify
each is
connected to the
correct port on
the manifold.
5. Place the drain tubing in

the drain hole to prevent
leaks.
6. Connect the valve

Note
Once the valve
cables are
connected, verify
each cable is
connected to the
correct valve.
Install Wash
Zone 2
1. Seat the waste arm into
Assembly
the slot on the top of
Waste Arm
the WZ2 Mechanism
and Probe
Assembly.
(WZ2 only)
2. Insert the probe into the
waste arm.

waste probe clockwise
to secure the probe.
Note
Ensure the waste
tubing is routed
so the wash
zone assembly
moves without
restrictions and
errors.
Install Wash
Zone 2 Wash Note
Zone For older style
Mechanism WZ Manifold,
Assembly ensure the wash
zone drain tubing
is connected and
the tubing
inserted into the
wash drain prior
to installing the
manifold to
prevent leaks.
1. Ensure the manifold

drain is over the drain
funnel. [2]

buffer heater grasp the
wash zone mechanism
assembly, align the
guide pins and place it
on the wash zone
manifold seat.
Note
A guide pin is
located under the
thumbscrew of
the wash zone
buffer heater.
3. Verify that the wash

zone mechanism
Note
The manifold is
properly seated if
it is stable when
pushed towards
the outer edge of
the process path
prior to securing
the screws.
4. Tighten the two
thumbscrews to attach
the buffer heater to the
wash zone manifold.
5. Tighten the thumbscrew

to attach the buffer
manifold.
6. Check the tubing is free
from kinks and cables
are connected securely.
Install Process
Path Drive
1. Discard the process
Motor
path drive motor spacer
Note
Verify the cable
connector is fully
seated into the
motor.
2. Orient the motor so the

encoder and motor
cables face the back of
the module and insert
3. Place the ground cable Note
between the screw and Video contains no audio sound.
the process path motor.
4. Install the two (2)

screws (non-captive).
Install Wash
Zone Diverter
1. Insert the wash zone
Assembly
diverter assembly, align
the guide pins, and
place the assembly on
the process path.

path. [1]
Note
Verify the cable
connector is fully (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
seated into the
motor. Note
Install Wash
Zone 1 Wash Note
zone drain tubing
is connected and
the tubing
inserted into the
wash drain prior
to installing the
manifold to
prevent leaks.

funnel. [2]
wash zone mechanism
assembly, align the
on the wash zone
manifold seat.
Note
A guide pin is
located under the
thumbscrew of
the wash zone
buffer heater.

zone mechanism
Note
The manifold is
properly seated if
it is stable when
pushed towards
the outer edge of
the process path
prior to securing
the screws.
4. Tighten the two
the wash zone manifold.

are connected securely
Install Pre-
trigger and
1. Place the level sense
Trigger Level
assemblies into the pre-
Sense
trigger and trigger
Assemblies
containers and tighten
the caps.
2. Press in on the pre-

trigger/trigger tray locks
and slide the tray back
into place.
3. Close the lower left

access door.
Install STAT
Diverter
1. Align the guide pins and
(i2000SR)
then place the assembly
2. Verify that the shutter is

seated flush on the
diverter assembly.

thumbscrews to secure Note
the diverter to the Click the icon above to access the video in B2.19 DIVERTER, ASSEMBLY,
process path. [3] STAT action section: "Install STAT Diverter".
4. Attach the sensor board

connector W41 STAT
DIVERT. [2]
Note
For the STAT
Diverter with the
non-captive
shutter, remove
the tape securing
the shutter to the
diverter and
ensure it is
seated properly.
[1]
Install RV
Loader
1. Install the RV loader
Assembly
wheel motor cable W15
RV ORIENT MTR. [8]
Note
Verify the cable
connector is fully
seated onto the
motor.
Note
2. Install the RV loader Click the icon above to access the video in A1.05 RV LOADER, ASM action
transport motor cable section: "Install RV Loader Assembly".
W15 RV TRANS
MTR. [7]
Note
Verify the cable
connector is fully
seated onto the
motor.

transport home sensor
cable W59 RV TRANS
SNSR. [6]
4. Orient the RV loader

assembly so that the
securing tabs and the
baseplate capture
5. Lower the RV transport

end of the loader and
align it with the process

(captive). [2]
7. Install the RV sensor

board cable W104 RV
SNSR BOARD. [5]

wheel home sensor
cable W59 RV ORIENT
SNSR [4] and place the
cable in the routing
clips.
9. Install the ground cables

Verify
Connections
(i2000)
Install Hopper
and connect
1. Slide the hopper
Hopper
keyholes [1] on the
Sensor
Cables
assembly.
Note
Verify that the
captive washers
are between the Note
screw and the Click the icon above to access the video in A1.05 RV LOADER, ASM action
hopper wall and section: "Install Hopper and Install Hopper Baffle".
are not caught
behind the wall.
2. Push the hopper down

and engage the bottom

the RV loader.

the RV Loader
assembly.

screws (non-
captive). [3]
cables:
i2000
W104 RV
HOP LVL
SNSR
from
connector
J3 the
hopper
sensor
board. [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP
SNSR at
top left
side of
hopper. [2]
Install Hopper
Baffle
the groove located in
the hopper.
hopper.
Note
Failure to install
the baffle can
result in jamming
the RV loader.
Install STAT
Pressure 1. Connect the sensor
Monitor Board cable into the pressure
(i2000SR) monitor board JP1
connector. [3]
2. Slide the pressure

monitor board into the
mounting feature
located on the wall of
the processing center.
[2] Note
Click the icon above to access the video in E2.09 BD, PRESSURE
3. Connect the pressure MONITOR action section: "Install Pressure Monitor Board".
monitor cable, PRESS
MNTR, into the JP2
connector. [1]
Install
Reagent
1. Install the reagent
Carousel
carousel cover and
Cover
tighten the three (3)
non-captive screws. [1]
Prepare for For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT System
Operation Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
1. Replace the probes on
pause, and shutdown.
each pipettor.

RVs.
3. Update the RV
inventory.
4. Power ON the
processing module.
Note
The system
control center
power must be
ON and at the
Snapshot screen
prior to powering
on the
processing
module for
proper
initialization.
5. Perform the Startup

module and sample
Ready.
6. Perform 2130 Flush

Fluids to Remove the
air from the tubing.
Note
Check for leaks
while performing
the flush.

center cover(s).

errors.
B2.02 DISK,P PATH Version - 96728-111_326_2
List/Part Numbers
7-76349-01 Disk, P Path
B2.02 DISK,P PATH
1 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal
Offline status.
Preparation
processing center
reagent carousel cover.
2. Open the reagent

carousel cover, Remove
the all the reagents.
Rotate the reagent
carousel, if necessary.
Store the reagents in
the refrigerator.
3. Scan the reagent
carousel to preserve the
reagent times.
4. Remove all probes from
the pipettors.
Note
Removing the
probes will keep
them from
damage during
the component
removal and
replacement.
Flush Pre- For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to the
Trigger or Caution ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and Maintenance,
Trigger Level Avoid skin and eye Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
Sensor with contact with pre-trigger
Air and trigger solutions.
1. Open the supply and

waste center door.
2. Slide the pre-

trigger/trigger tray out.
3. Unscrew and pull up on

the level sensor for pre-
trigger and trigger.
4. Angle both sensors (pre-

trigger/trigger) in their
container so that the
assembly is out of the
solution.
5. Select the As needed

category from the
maintenance screen
procedure 2133 Air
Flush.
Note
If this step is
missed then
bottle solution
may continually
leak when the
pre-trigger and
trigger manifold
tubing is
removed.
Prepare To
Remove
1. Power OFF the
Process Path
processing module.
Cover
2. Remove the back right
and left, access panels
to gain rear access
.
Remove
Reagent Note
Carousel Use caution when
Cover removing screws; they
are not secured to the
carousel cover.
1. Locate the reagent

carousel cover. [1]
2. Remove the three (3)

that secure the reagent
carousel cover in
place. [2]
3. Remove the reagent

carousel cover by using
the handle and lifting the
cover up and out of the
module. [3]
Note
Be careful not to
damage other
parts when
removing the
cover.
Remove
STAT Note
Pressure Use proper ESD
Monitor Board tools when
(i2000SR) handling boards
to prevent
damage.

sensor cable from the
board on the front of the Note
hopper. [1] Click the icon above to access the video in E2.09 BD, PRESSURE
MONITOR action section: "Remove pressure monitor board".
2. Disconnect W29 STAT
PRESSURE MONITOR
cable. [2]

static protection bag.
Note
Place Pressure
Monitor Board on
the ESD Work
Matt or into a
static protected
bag when not in
use.
Remove
Hopper Baffle
and
Disconnect
out of the module.
Hopper
2. Remove all RVs from
the hopper and place
the RVs in a lint free
container.
cables: Note
Click the icon above to access the video in A1.01 HOPPER ASM action
i2000 section: "Remove Hopper Baffle and RVs".
W104 RV
HOP LVL
SNSR from
connector
J3 the
hopper
sensor
board [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP
SNSR at
top left
side of
hopper. [2]
Remove
Hopper Note
Use caution when
assembly.
the two (2) screws (non-
captive) securing the
hopper to the RV
loader. [3]
Note
Inside the hopper,
at the bottom of
the RV loader
opening, there is
a plastic foot [2]
that is engaged
with the RV
loader.

the RV loader while
lifting the hopper out of
the process module.
Note
The loosened
screw and washer
must clear the
keyholes in the
hopper. [1]
Remove RV
Loader
1. Remove the ground
Assembly
cable from the process
path. [1]
Note
On some
systems, the
ground cable is
screwed on, on
others, a slip-on Note
connector is Click the icon above to access the video in A1.05 RV LOADER, ASM action
used. section: "Remove RV Loader Assembly".
2. With a hex wrench,

loosen the thumbscrew
(captive) securing the
RV loader assembly to
Note
Some systems
use a Phillips
head screw to
secure the RV
loader.
3. Securing the top of the
RV loader, tilt it away
from the process path so
that the securing tabs
are freed from the
loader wheel home
sensor cable W59 RV
ORIENT SNSR and
remove it from the
routing clips on the RV
loader. [4]
sensor board cable
W104 RV SNSR
BOARD. [5]
loader transport home
sensor cable W59 RV
TRANS SNSR. [6]
7. Lift the RV loader

assembly up and tilt
toward the process path
to access the two (2)
motor assemblies.
loader transport motor
cable W15 RV TRANS
MTR. [7]
Note
When removing
the motor
connector note
the orientation of
the cable
connection to the
motor connection.
Note
To assist in
removal of the
connector, grasp
the sides of the
connector and
move back and
forth to
disconnect.
loader wheel motor
cable W15 RV ORIENT
MTR. [8]
Remove
STAT Diverter Note
For the STAT
Diverter with the
non-captive
shutter, place
tape over the
shutter to secure
it prior to
removing the
diverter assembly.
[1] Note
Click the icon above to access the video in B2.19 DIVERTER, ASSEMBLY,
1. Disconnect sensor board STAT action section: "Remove STAT Diverter".
connector W41 STAT
DIVERT. [2]

STAT diverter to the
process path. [3]
3. Lift STAT diverter and

remove it from the
module.
Remove
Wash Zone 1
Mechanism
captive screws securing
Assembly
the wash zone manifold

manifold and gently rock
it side-to-side while
guide pins.
3. Set the wash zone with

wash zone mechanism
assembly aside.
Note
Ensure cables,
tubing, and WZ
probes are
undamaged.
Remove
Wash Zone
Diverter
2. While lifting wash

zone 1, lift the wash
zone diverter and set it
aside in the module.
Note
Remove
Process Path
1. Remove the two (2)
Drive Motor
securing the motor to
the process path.
2. Set aside the motor,
motor shim (if present),
and screws.
Note
Remove
Waste Arm
and Tubing
waste probe
(WZ2 only)
counterclockwise to free
the probe.
2. Pull the probe up and

out from the waste arm
and set it aside.
3. Loosen the waste arm

screw on the top of WZ2
Mechanism Assembly.
Remove
Wash Zone
1. Loosen the two
Mechanism
Assembly
the wash zone
the wash zone.

securing the buffer
manifold.

wash zone mechanism
assembly and gently
rock it side-to-side while
guide pins.
Note
A guide pin is
located under the
thumbscrew of
the wash zone
buffer heater.
4. Gently set the wash

zone mechanism
assembly out the back
of the module.
Remove Pre-
Manifold Protective eyewear
must be worn for this
step.
1. Disconnect the valve


trigger and trigger Note
heater/tubing. Click the icon above to access the video in H1.05 MANIFOLD, PRE-
Note TRIG/TRIG ASM action section: "Remove Pre-Trigger/Trigger Manifold".
Verify each
heater/tubing is
labeled so they
can be replaced
in the correct
position on the
manifold.

trigger and trigger drain
tubing.

5. Grasp the manifold and

gently rock it side-to-
side while lifting to free it
6. Remove the manifold

from the module.
Remove RV
Diverter,
Unloader
LOAD DVRT cable from
Assembly
the load diverter
solenoid. [1]
UNLOAD SOL cable
3. Disconnect W32 RV Note

UNLOADER SNSR Click the icon above to access the video in B2.15 DIVERTER, UNLOADER
cable from the RV RV ASM action section: "Remove RV Diverter, Unloader Assembly".
unloader sensor
board. [3]
LOAD SNSR from the
load diverter sensor
board. [4]
5. Disconnect SOLENOID
cable from the load
6. Disconnect SENSOR
CABLE from the load
board. [6]

thumbscrews securing New Style Unloader Diverter Assembly
the diverter,unloader
path. [7]
8. Remove the
diverter,unloader
assembly from the
module.
Disconnect
Reagent Lid
Cable
sensor REAGENT LID
SNSR W109.
Note
Click the icon above to access the video in B2.01 COVER, P PATH action
section: "Disconnect Reagent Lid Cable and Remove Process Path Cover
".
Remove
Process Path
1. Grasp the process path
Cover
cover and gently rock it
side-to-side while lifting
to free it from the guide
pins.
Note
Be careful not to
damage other
parts when
removing the
cover.
Remove
Process Path
1. Remove and discard any
Disk
RVs present in the
process path disk.
2. Carefully, lift the process

path disk up and out of
the module.
3. Clean the process path
and disk (if not replacing
it) using only tap water
and lint-free tissue or
cotton swabs to remove
any dried residue.
Note (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Only use cleaning
tools to ensure Note
the process path Video contains no audio sound.
coating remains
intact.
Replacement
Install Process
Path Disk
1. Slide the process path
disk into the process
path home sensor board
and place it onto the
process path so it lays
flat.
Note
The process path
disk does not
need to be
aligned.
2. Install 5-10 clean RVs
into the inner and out
disk track.
3. Gently, manually move Note
the process path disk Video contains no audio sound.
only in the forward
direction and test for
smooth RV movement at
the following locations.
Load/Unload
Diverter
STAT Diverter
(i2000SR only)
Trigger/PreTrigger
Manifold
Wash Zone
Diverter
Note
Clean any are
where RV
jumping is seen.
If the process
path is unable to
be cleaned
sufficiently to
prevent RV
jumping and/or if
process path
damage is
present then
replace the
process path to
prevent process
path movement
errors during
operation.
Install Process
Path Cover
1. Place the process path
cover on the process
path aligning the guide
pins.
Note
Refer to figure for
proper orientation.
Note
Click the icon above to access the video in B2.01 COVER, P PATH action
section: "Install Process Path Cover and Connect Reagent Lid Cable
Connections " (also covers next action section for Reagent lid cable).
Connect
Reagent Lid
Cable
sensor REAGENT LID
Connections
SNSR W109.
Install RV
Diverter,
1. Insert the
Unloader
diverter,unloader
Assembly
assembly, align the
guide pins, and place
the assembly on the
process path.

thumbscrews. [1]
Note
3. Connect W32 RV LOAD Click the icon above to access the video in B2.15 DIVERTER, UNLOADER
DVRT cable to the load RV ASM action section: "Install RV Diverter, Unloader Assembly".
4. Connect W32 RV
UNLOAD SOL cable to
the unloader. [3]
5. Connect W32 RV
UNLOADER SNSR
cable to the RV
unloader sensor
board. [4]
6. Connect W32 RV LOAD

SNSR to the load
diverter sensor
board. [5]
7. Connect SOLENOID
cable to the load diverter New Style Unloader Diverter Assembly
shutter. [6]
8. Connect SENSOR
CABLE to the load
board. [7]
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
1. Grasp the manifold,
Manifold
align the guide pins and
seat it on the process
path cover.

thumbscrews to secure
the manifold to the
process path.
Note
3. If the manifold was: Click the icon above to access the video in H1.05 MANIFOLD, PRE-
Set to the side TRIG/TRIG ASM action section: "Install Pre-Trigger/Trigger Manifold".
then check tubing
and cable are
connected and
tubing is free from
kinks.
Remove, connect
the trigger
heater/tubing [1]
and drain tubing
[2].
Note
Once the
heater/tubing is
connected, verify
each is connected
to the correct port
on the manifold.
4. Connect the pre-trigger

drain tubing [2] and
heater/tubing [1].
Note
Once the
heater/tubing and
drain tubing are
connected, verify
each is connected
to the correct port
on the manifold.
5. Place the drain tubing in

the drain hole to prevent
leaks.
6. Connect the valve

Note
Once the valve
cables are
connected, verify
each cable is
connected to the
correct valve.
Install Wash
Zone 2
1. Seat the waste arm into
Assembly
the slot on the top of the
Waste Arm
WZ2 Mechanism
and Probe
Assembly.
(WZ2 only)
2. Insert the probe into the
waste arm.

waste probe clockwise to
secure the probe.
Note
Ensure the waste
tubing is routed
so the wash zone
assembly moves
without
restrictions and
errors.
Install Wash
Zone 2 Wash Note
zone drain tubing
is connected and
the tubing
inserted into the
wash drain prior
to installing the
manifold to
prevent leaks.
funnel. [2]

buffer heater grasp the
wash zone mechanism
assembly, align the
on the wash zone
manifold seat.
Note
A guide pin is
located under the
thumbscrew of
the wash zone
buffer heater.

zone mechanism
Note
The manifold is
properly seated if
it is stable when
pushed towards
the outer edge of
the process path
prior to securing
the screws.
4. Tighten the two

the buffer heater to the
wash zone manifold.

to attach the buffer
manifold.
are connected securely.
Install Process
Path Drive
1. Discard the process
Motor
path drive motor spacer
Note
Verify the cable
connector is fully
seated into the
motor.
2. Orient the motor so the

encoder and motor
cables face the back of
the module and insert
3. Place the ground cable Note
between the screw and Video contains no audio sound.
the process path motor.
4. Install the two (2) screws

(non-captive).
Install Wash
Zone Diverter
1. Insert the wash zone
Assembly
diverter assembly, align
the guide pins, and
place the assembly on
the process path.

path. [1]
Note
Verify the cable
connector is fully (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
seated into the
motor. Note
Install Wash
Zone 1 Wash Note
zone drain tubing
is connected and
the tubing
inserted into the
wash drain prior
to installing the
manifold to
prevent leaks.

funnel. [2]
wash zone mechanism
assembly, align the
on the wash zone
manifold seat.
Note
A guide pin is
located under the
thumbscrew of
the wash zone
buffer heater.

zone mechanism
Note
The manifold is
properly seated if
it is stable when
pushed towards
the outer edge of
the process path
prior to securing
the screws.
4. Tighten the two

are connected securely
Install Pre-
trigger and
1. Place the level sense
Trigger Level
assemblies into the pre-
Sense
trigger and trigger
Assemblies
containers and tighten
the caps.
2. Press in on the pre-

trigger/trigger tray locks
and slide the tray back
into place.
3. Close the lower left

access door.
Install STAT
Diverter
1. Align the guide pins and
(i2000SR)
then place the assembly
2. Verify that the shutter is

seated flush on the
diverter assembly.

thumbscrews to secure Note
the diverter to the Click the icon above to access the video in B2.19 DIVERTER, ASSEMBLY,
process path. [3] STAT action section: "Install STAT Diverter".
4. Attach the sensor board

connector W41 STAT
DIVERT. [2]
Note
For the STAT
Diverter with the
non-captive
shutter, remove
the tape securing
the shutter to the
diverter and
ensure it is
seated properly.
[1]
Install RV
Loader
Assembly
wheel motor cable W15
RV ORIENT MTR. [8]
Note
Verify the cable
connector is fully
seated onto the
motor.
Note
2. Install the RV loader Click the icon above to access the video in A1.05 RV LOADER, ASM action
transport motor cable section: "Install RV Loader Assembly".
W15 RV TRANS
MTR. [7]
Note
Verify the cable
connector is fully
seated onto the
motor.

transport home sensor
cable W59 RV TRANS
SNSR. [6]
4. Orient the RV loader

assembly so that the
securing tabs and the
baseplate capture
5. Lower the RV transport

end of the loader and
align it with the process

(captive). [2]
7. Install the RV sensor

board cable W104 RV
SNSR BOARD. [5]

wheel home sensor
cable W59 RV ORIENT
SNSR [4] and place the
cable in the routing
clips.
9. Install the ground cables

Verify
Connections
(i2000)
Install Hopper
and connect
1. Slide the hopper
Hopper
keyholes [1] on the
Sensor
Cables
assembly.
Note
Verify that the
captive washers
are between the Note
screw and the Click the icon above to access the video in A1.05 RV LOADER, ASM action
hopper wall and section: "Install Hopper and Install Hopper Baffle".
are not caught
behind the wall.
2. Push the hopper down

and engage the bottom

the RV loader.

the RV Loader
assembly.

screws (non-captive). [3]
cables:
i2000
W104 RV
HOP LVL
SNSR from
connector
J3 the
hopper
sensor
board. [1]
i2000SR
W62 HOP
SNSR at
top left
side of
hopper. [2]
Install Hopper
Baffle
the groove located in the
hopper.

hopper.
Note
Failure to install
the baffle can
result in jamming
the RV loader.
Install STAT
Pressure 1. Connect the sensor
Monitor Board cable into the pressure
(i2000SR) monitor board JP1
connector. [3]

monitor board into the
mounting feature located
on the wall of the
processing center. [2]
Note
3. Connect the pressure Click the icon above to access the video in E2.09 BD, PRESSURE
monitor cable, PRESS MONITOR action section: "Install Pressure Monitor Board".
MNTR, into the JP2
connector. [1]
Install
Reagent
1. Install the reagent
Carousel
carousel cover and
Cover
tighten the three (3)
non-captive screws. [1]
Prepare for For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT System
Operation Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
1. Replace the probes on
each pipettor.

RVs.
3. Update the RV
inventory.
4. Power ON the
processing module.
Note
The system
control center
power must be
ON and at the
Snapshot screen
prior to powering
on the processing
module for proper
initialization.

module and sample
Ready.
6. Perform 2130 Flush

Fluids to Remove the air
from the tubing.
Note
Check for leaks
while performing
the flush.

center cover(s).

errors.
B2.03 DOOR,RV ACCESS Version - 96728-111_327_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77913-01 Door, RV Access
B2.03 DOOR,RV ACCESS
10 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. The processing module may be in any
status except Running.
Preparation
cover(s) to access the RV access door.
Remove RV
Access Door
1. Remove the non-captive screw [1]
securing the RV access door to the
process path.
Note
Do not drop the screw into the
module.
2. Remove the access door.

Replacement
Install RV Access Door

1. Place the access door on the process path aligning the hole.
Prepare for Operation

open/close freely.
B2.04 MOTOR,DRIVE P PATH Version - 96728-111_328_2
List/Part Numbers
7-76114-01 Motor, Drive P Path
B2.04 MOTOR,DRIVE P PATH
13 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal


2. Lift the rear processing center cover
to access the process path drive
motor.
3. Locate the process path drive

motor. [1]
Note
center map for the process
path drive motor, location
(PPM).

5. Remove the power supply panel to

access the motor easier.
VIDEO -
Remove
Note
Process Path
Drive Motor
Remove
Process Path Note
Drive Motor Use caution when removing screws;
they are not secured to the process
path drive motor.
1. Disconnect the drive motor encoder

cable PROC PATH MTR ENCOD
W48 by pulling the tabs on the
connector away from the
connector. [1]
2. Disconnect the drive motor cable

Note
If cable is difficult to remove
then lift motor to disconnect.
Note
3. Remove the two (2) non-captive

screws securing the motor to the
process path. [3]
4. Remove the drive motor from the

module.
Replacement
VIDEO -
Remove
Note
Process
Path Drive
Motor
Install
Process
1. Discard the process path drive motor
Path Drive
spacer [4] if one is present.
Motor
2. Place the ground cable between the
screw and the process path motor.
3. Insert the 2 screws and secure the

motor to the process path [3].

cable PROC PATH MTR W1. [2]
Note
fully seated into the motor.
5. Orient the motor so the encoder and

motor cables face the back of the
module and insert into the process
path.

encoder cable PROC PATH MTR
ENCOD W48 by aligning the arrows
on the connector. Verify the tabs of
Note
A tie wrap maybe added to the
encoder connector to secure it.
Note
power must be ON and at the
Snapshot screen prior to
powering on the processing
module for proper initialization
to occur.
4. Perform the Startup procedure to

change the status of the processing
Stopped to Ready.

errors.
2 5110 - Pipettor & Syringe Motor Tests
B2.05 DIVERTER,WZ,ASM Version - 96728-111_329_2
List/Part Numbers
7-201949-01 WZ Divertor Base
7-77961-01 Diverter, WZ ASM
7-94134-01 Wash Zone Diverter ASM, SR
B2.05 DIVERTER,WZ,ASM
15 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal


cover to access the wash zone
diverter assembly.

assembly.
Note
map for the wash zone diverter

Remove
Wash Zone Note
1 Assembly The wash zone diverter
assembly is secured under
wash zone 1.
1. Loosen two (2) screws securing the

Wash Zone 1 (WZ1) Assembly to the
process path. [1]
2. Carefully set WZ1 Assembly aside.
Remove
Wash Zone
Diverter
W161 BYP FLIPPER SENSOR. [1]
2. Disconnect the wash zone diverter

motor cable W160 BYPASS DIV
MTR. [2]
Note

process path. [3] (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
4. While lifting wash zone 1, lift the wash Note

zone diverter and Remove it from the Video contains no audio sound.
module.
Replacement
Install
Wash
1. Place the wash zone diverter assembly
Zone
on the process path and align it with
Diverter
the guide pins.
Assembly
2. Tighten the two (2) thumbscrews
securing the wash zone diverter
assembly to the process path. [1]
3. Connect sensor board connector W161

4. Connect the wash zone diverter motor

Note
fully seated into the motor. (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Note
Install
Wash Note
Zone 1 The WZ1 Assembly is secured
Assembly over the WZ Diverter.
1. Align the WZ1 Assembly on the

process path guide pins and over the
drain funnel. [2]
Note
If WZ1 Assembly style contains
a drain tip then ensure the drain
tip tubing is seated securely
inside the drain to prevent leaks.
2. Tighten the two (2) screws securing

the Wash Zone 1 (WZ1) Assembly to
the process path.
3. Check and ensure all cables are

connected and tubing is free from
kinks.

Note
powering on the processing
3. Perform the system start up procedure

to change the status of the processing
Stopped to Ready.
1 3150 - Diverter Test
B2.06 SHUTTER, LOAD DIVERT ASM Version - 96728-111_330_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77957-01 Shutter, Load Divert ASM
B2.06 SHUTTER, LOAD DIVERT ASM
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
2. Lift the front processing center cover(s) to
access the RV load diverter shutter.
Remove RV
Load Diverter
1. Disconnect W34 LOAD SHUTTER SNSR
Shutter
cable from the shutter sensor board.
2. Disconnect W34 LOAD SHUTTER
SOLENOID cable from the shutter solenoid.
3. Disconnect W32 LOAD DIVERTER SNSR
cable from the sensor board.
4. Disconnect W32 LOAD DIVERTER
SOLENOID cable from the load diverter
solenoid.
5. Disconnect W32 RV UNLOAD SNSR cable
from the RV unload sensor board.
6. Disconnect W32 RV UNLOAD SOLENOID
cable from the RV unload solenoid.
7. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews (captive)
securing the load divert/unloader manifold to
the process path.
8. Remove the manifold assembly from the
process path.
Replacement
Install RV Load
Diverter Shutter
1. Install the manifold assembly into the process path and tighten the thumbscrews.
2. Connect W34 LOAD SHUTTER SNSR cable to the shutter sensor board.
3. Connect W34 LOAD SHUTTER SOLENOID cable to the shutter solenoid.
4. Connect W32 LOAD DIVERTER SOLENOID cable to the load diverter solenoid.
5. Connect W32 LOAD DIVERTER SNSR cable to the sensor board.
6. Lift up on the load diverter shutter and press the load diverter solenoid shaft to the
rearmost position.
7. Verify the shutter solenoid flag passes between the shutter solenoid sensors.
8. Verify the load diverter flag travels smoothly between the load diverter sensors.
9. Connect W32 RV UNLOAD SOLENOID cable to the RV unload solenoid.
10. Connect W32 RV UNLOAD SNSR cable to the RV unload sensor board.
11. Rotate the R1 and sample pipettors through the load divert/unload manifold area and
verify the probes do not contact the cables.


errors.
B2.07 RV LOAD DIVERTER ASM Version - 96728-111_331_1
List/Part Numbers
7-205671-01 Diverter, Load and Unload
7-78437-02 RV Diverter, Load ASM
7-78437-03 Load Diverter Solenoid, no stick Picker Arm
B2.07 RV LOAD DIVERTER ASM
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
cover(s) to access the RV loader diverter.
Remove Process
Path Load
1. Disconnect W34 LOAD SHUTTER SNSR
Diverter
cable from the shutter sensor board. [6]
2. Disconnect W34 LOAD SHUTTER
SOLENOID cable from the shutter
solenoid. [5]
SNSR cable from the sensor board. [4]
SOLENOID cable from the load diverter
solenoid. [1]
5. Disconnect W32 RV UNLOAD SNSR
cable from the RV unload sensor board.
[3]
6. Disconnect W32 RV UNLOAD
SOLENOID cable from the RV unload
solenoid. [2]
7. Remove the two (2) thumbscrews [7]
securing the load diverter assembly to
the process path.
8. Remove the load diverter assembly.
Replacement
Install Load
Diverter
1. While lifting up on the shutter, insert the load
diverter into the mounting position.
Note
Verify the top of the shutter flag rests on the
diverter assembly mount.
2. Secure the load diverter with two (2) thumbscrews

3. Lift up on the load diverter shutter and press the
load diverter center shaft all the way to the back.
Note
Verify the load diverter flag passes smoothly
through the sensor posts.
4. Connect W34 LOAD SHUTTER SNSR cable to the

shutter sensor board. [6]
5. Connect W34 LOAD SHUTTER SOLENOID cable
to the shutter solenoid. [5]
6. Connect W32 LOAD DIVERTER SOLENOID cable
to the load diverter solenoid. [1]
7. Connect W32 LOAD DIVERTER SNSR cable to the
sensor board. [4]
8. Connect W32 RV UNLOAD SOLENOID cable to
the RV unload solenoid. [2]
9. Connect W32 RV UNLOAD SNSR cable to the RV
unload sensor board. [3]
10. Rotate the R1 and sample pipettors through the
load divert/unload manifold area and verify the
probes do not contact the cables.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
List/Part Numbers
7-78725-01 Sensor Bd #15
7-78725-02 Sensor Bd #15
B2.08 BD,SENSOR #15
13 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

Preparation
cover(s) to access the sensor board.
Remove Diverter
Load and Process
1. Disconnect the sensor board cable.
Path Home Sensor
2. To remove:
Board #5
the process path home sensor and
wash zone 1 diverter sensor, go to
Step3.
the load diverter sensor, go to
Step4.

securing the sensor board to the mounting
bracket, and Remove the sensor board.
Note
The screws are not captive.
4. Carefully lift up on the sensor board until it

disengages from the plastic retainers on
the load diverter mount [1], and Remove
the sensor board.
Replacement
Install Diverter Load &

Process Path Home
1. To Install the :
Sensor Board #5
the process path home sensor and wash zone 1 diverter sensor, go to Step2.
the load diverter sensor, go to Step4.
2. Place the sensor board on the mounting bracket and align the screw holes.
3. Install the two (2) screws to secure the sensor board to the mounting bracket and
process path. Go to Prepare for Operation.
4. Align the three (3) mounting holes on the sensor board to mounting posts on the load
diverter solenoid mount. The sensor portion of the board goes on the R1 pipettor side.
Press down on the sensor board until the retainers engage.
5. Lift up on the load diverter shutter and push the load diverter center shaft all the way
back. Verify the flag on the diverter passes smoothly between the sensor posts.
6. Connect sensor board cable.


errors.
B2.09 P PATH,RV UNLOADER Version - 96728-111_334_2
List/Part Numbers
7-77910-01 RV Unloader, P Path
7-77910-02 Unloader Solenoid, Metal Flag
7-77910-03 Solenoid, Unload Divertor
B2.09 P PATH,RV UNLOADER
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

Preparation
cover(s) to access the RV unloader.
2. Locate the RV unloader.
Note
map for the RV unloader location
(UL).
Remove
RV Note
Unloader Use caution when removing screws;
they are not secured to the RV
unloader.
1. Disconnect the RV unloader connector,

RV UNLOAD SOL W32.
2. Remove the four (4) screws (non-
captive) that secure the RV unloader in
place. [1]
Replacement
Install RV
Unloader
1. Place the RV unloader in its mounting
guide.
Note
Orient the unloader so that the cable
is closest to its connection.
2. Align the holes for the four (4) screws

3. Install the four (4) screws.
4. Connect the RV unloader connector, RV
UNLOAD SOL W32.
5. Rotate the R1 and sample pipettors through
the load divert/unload manifold area and
verify the probes do not contact the cables.

2. Power ON the processing module
Note
initialization.


errors.
B2.10 VORTEXER, P PATH (written to be customer–replaceable with
Version - 96728-111_335_4
Abbott assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-76656-01 Vortexer, Metal Cup
7-76656-02 Vortexer, Stabilized
7-78382-02 Vortexer, P Path
B2.10 VORTEXER, P PATH (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
12 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite The processing module must be in Stopped For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
or Offline status. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Note
For Abbott Trained Personnel, you
may use M&D 5715 Turn 36V Power
Off and On to remove power instead
of powering OFF the process module.

cover(s) to access the vortexer.
3. Locate the vortexer to be replaced.
Note
map located on the top covers
for vortexer locations (VTX1,
VTX2 or VTX3\VTX ST).
Note
Vortexer #3 is accessible for
replacement by Field Service
only.

VIDEO
Remove Note
RV Video contains no audio sound.
Vortexer
Note
STAT Vortexer shown.
Remove
Vortexer Note
To access vortexer 2, Remove the
power supply panel.
1. Disconnect the vortexer cable by

pulling the tabs on the connector
away from the connector. [1]
2. While pressing on top of the green

knob, turn the knob clockwise to
disengage the locking tab from the
process path. [2]
3. Lift the vortexer to disengage the

vortexer from the process path.
4. Pull the vortexer away from the pins
on the process path and then lower
the vortexer to disengage the vortexer
cup from the bottom of the process
path. [3]
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Note
Vortexer Video contains no audio sound.
Note
STAT Vortexer shown.
Install
Vortexer
1. Grasp the green knob and slide the
vortexer cup under the process path. [1]
2. Lift the vortexer up as high as it can go

so that the vortexer cup fits into the
process path hole.
3. Push the vortexer toward the process
path and align the mounting pins on the
process path with the mounting holes on
the vortexer.

the process path and then lower the
5. Press down on the green knob and turn

counterclockwise so that the arrow on
the knob points toward the process
path. This sets the locking tab. [2]
arrows on the connector. Verify the tabs
of the connector are locked in place. [3]

2. Close the processing module door(s).
Note
initialization.

procedure.
1 3115 - Vortexer Test
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2015 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are trademarks of Abbott
B2.11 BD, SENSOR #9 (written to be customer–replaceable with Abbott
Version - 96728-111_336_2
assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-76485-01 BD, Sensor #9, i2000 only
7-76485-02 Sensor Board #9
7-76485-03 Sensor Board #9 (RoHS)
B2.11 BD, SENSOR #9 (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
12 min.
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal


2. Lift the front processing center
cover to access sensor board #9.
3. Locate sensor board #9 (reagent
carousel cover) to be replaced. [1]
Remove
Sensor Note
Board #9 Use caution when removing screws;
they are not secured to sensor
board #9.

captive) securing the sensor board
to the process path cover. [1]
2. Disconnect the sensor cable. [2]
3. Remove the board from the
processing module.
Replacement
Install
Sensor
1. Connect the sensor cable. [1]
Board #9
2. Place sensor board #9 on the process
path cover aligning the screw holes.
3. Install the two (2) screws. [2]
cover(s).
Note
initialization.

1 3400 - Interlock Sensor Test
B2.12 BD, SENSOR #16 Version - 96728-111_337_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78020-01 Bd, Sensor #16 Unloader Flag
7-78020-02 Bd, Sensor #16 Unloader Flag
7-78020-03 Bd, Sensor #16 Unloader Flag (RoHS)
B2.12 BD, SENSOR #16
12 min.
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
cover(s) to access the RV access door.
Remove RV
Unload Sensor
1. Disconnect the sensor board connector. [2]
Board
2. Remove the two (2) non-captive screws
securing the RV unload sensor board to the
process path. [1]
Note
Do not drop the screw into the
module.
3. Remove the sensor board.
Replacement
Install RV
Unload
1. Place the sensor board on the process
Sensor
path and align the holes.
Board
2. Install the screws. [1]
3. Connect the sensor board connector. [2]
Note
initialization.


errors.
List/Part Numbers
7-76465-02 BD, Sensor #5
7-76465-03 Sensor Board #5
7-76465-04 BD, Sensor #5 (RoHS)
B2.13 BD,SENSOR #5
15 min.
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal


module.
center cover to access the wash
zone diverter assembly.
assembly.
Note
center map for the wash
zone diverter assembly
location (WZD).

Remove
Diverter
1. Disconnect sensor board
Sensor
connector W161 BYP FLIPPER
Board
SENSOR. [1]
captive) securing the sensor
board.
Replacement
Install
Diverter
1. Place the sensor board on the path cover
Sensor
and align the holes.
Board
3. Connect the sensor board connector W161

cover(s).
Note
initialization.

Ready perform the system start up
procedure.

errors.
B2.15 DIVERTER,UNLOADER RV ASM Version - 96728-111_339_4
List/Part Numbers
7-77963-02 Divertor, Unloader, RV, ASM
7-77963-03 Diverter, Unloader, RV, ASM
7-77963-04 Diverter Unloader Assembly
7-77963-05 Diverter Unloader Assembly
B2.15 DIVERTER, UNLOADER RV ASM
20 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

in STOPPED, WARMING, or
READY status.

module.
center cover to access the RV
diverter/unloader assembly.

4. Locate the RV diverter/unloader

assembly.
VIDEO – Remove
RV Diverter,
Note
Unloader
Assembly
Note
The New Style RV Unloader
Diverter is shown in the video.
Note
Note
The Older Style RV Unloader
Remove RV
Diverter, Unloader
1. Disconnect W32 RV LOAD
Assembly
DVRT cable from the load
2. Disconnect W32 RV UNLOAD

SOL cable from the
unloader. [2]
UNLOADER SNSR cable from
the RV unloader sensor
board. [3]
4. Disconnect W32 RV LOAD
SNSR from the load diverter New Style Unloader Diverter Assembly
sensor board. [4]
5. Disconnect SOLENOID cable

from the load diverter
shutter. [5]
6. Disconnect SENSOR CABLE

from the load diverter shutter
sensor board. [6]

thumbscrews securing the
diverter,unloader assembly to
8. Remove the diverter,unloader
assembly from the module.
Replacement
VIDEO –
Install RV
Note
Diverter,
Unloader
Assembly Note
The New Style RV Unloader
Note
Note
The Older Style RV Unloader
Install RV
Diverter,
1. Insert the diverter,unloader
Unloader
assembly, align the guide pins, and
Assembly
place the assembly on the process
path.

thumbscrews. [1]
3. Connect W32 RV LOAD DVRT

cable to the load diverter
solenoid. [2]
4. Connect W32 RV UNLOAD SOL

cable to the unloader. [3] New Style Unloader Diverter Assembly
5. Connect W32 RV UNLOADER

SNSR cable to the RV unloader
sensor board. [4]
6. Connect W32 R LOAD SNSR to

7. Connect SOLENOID cable to the

8. Connect SENSOR CABLE to the

load diverter shutter sensor
board. [7]
9. Rotate the R1 and sample pipettors

through the load divert/unload
manifold area and verify the probes Old Style Unloader Diverter Assembly
do not contact the cables.

Note
module for proper
initialization.
3. To change the status of the

processing module and sample
handler from Stopped to Ready,
perform the Startup procedure.

errors.
B2.17 VORTEXER PIN Version - 96728-111_343_2
List/Part Numbers
7-78117-01 Vortexer Pin Kit
B2.17 VORTEXER PIN
17 min
Time Required
Small hex wrench

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation For further information on removal of internal covers, refer

replacement.
access the vortexer.
3. Locate the vortexer to be replaced.
Note
Refer to the processing center map for
vortexer locations (VTX1, VTX2, VTX3 and
VTXST).
Note
Vortexer #3 is accessible for replacement
by Field Service only.

cover(s).
Remove
Sample
1. Press in on the syringe clamp securing the
Syringe
sample syringe to the module frame [1] and lift the
(Vortexer 1
sample syringe up and away from the mounting
only)
bracket. [2]
2. Set the sample syringe on the process path.
Remove
Vortexer Note
To access vortexer 2, Remove the power supply
panel.
1. Disconnect the vortexer cable by pulling the tabs

on the connector away from the connector. [1]
2. While pressing on top of the green knob, turn the
knob clockwise to disengage the locking tab from
3. Lift the vortexer to disengage the vortexer from the
process path.
4. Pull the vortexer away from the pins on the
process path and then lower the vortexer to
disengage the vortexer cup from the bottom of the
process path. [3]
Remove
Vortexer
1. Locate the hex screw in the center of vortexer
Cup and Pin
cup. Remove the top -screw from the vortexer
cup.
2. Below the first screw is a second screw that
secures the pin in the ramp. While holding the cup
place, loosen the second screw until the pin is
free (less than two full turns).
Note
Do not completely Remove the screw.
3. Remove the broken pin by pushing it out with a

small hex wrench.
Replacement
Install
New Pin
1. Insert the new pin through the ramp and hole in the
and
motor shaft.
Vortexer
2. While holding the pin in place (centered in ramp
Cup
with fingers) tighten the hex screw until it just makes
contact with pin. Tighten the screw approximately
1/8 turn to secure it.
Note
The pin is damaged if you over tighten the
screw.
3. Verify pin is centered on motor shaft and doesn't

protrude from ramp.
4. Insert the second screw into cup and screw it in until
it is just below or even with the cup bottom.
Note
If you screw it in too far, it will fall loose in
the cup and you will have to remove the pin
to retrieve it.
Install
Vortexer
1. Grasp the green knob and slide the vortexer cup
under the process path. [1]
2. Lift the vortexer up as high as it can go so that the
vortexer cup fits into the process path hole.
3. Push the vortexer toward the process path and align
the mounting pins on the process path with the
mounting holes on the vortexer.
4. Push down on the vortexer to seat the vortexer fully
into the pins on the process path.
5. Press down on the green knob and turn
counterclockwise so that the arrow on the knob
points toward the process path. This sets the locking
tab. [2]
6. Connect the vortex cable by aligning the arrows on
the connector. Verify the tabs of the connector are
locked in place. [3]
Install
Sample
1. Slide the sample syringe onto the mounting bracket
Syringe
and press down until the syringe clamp locks into
place. [1]

1. Install the appropriate internal components cover(s).
and shutdown.
Note
Startup procedure.
1 3115 - Vortexer Test
B2.18 BOARD, DIVERTER, STAT Version - 96728-111_156_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93962-01 Board, Diverter, STAT
7-93962-02 Board, Diverter, STAT
B2.18 BOARD, DIVERTER, STAT
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

module.
STAT diverter assembly.
3. Locate the STAT diverter
assembly.
Note
center map for the STAT
diverter assembly location
(STD).

Remove
STAT
Diverter
connector J1 W41 STAT
Board
DIVERT. [1]
connector J2 STAT diverter
solenoid. [2]
3. Remove the two (2) screws
securing STAT diverter board to
the assembly. [3]
4. Lift STAT diverter board and
Remove the it from the
module. [4]
Replacement
Install
STAT
1. Place the new STAT diverter board on the
Diverter
assembly. [1]
Board
2. Connect STAT diverter solenoid connector to
sensor board J2. [2]
3. Connect W41 STAT DIVERT cable to sensor
board connector J1. [3]
4. Check that the shutter is seated flush on the
diverter assembly.
5. Secure the board to the assembly using the
two (2) screws. [4]
cover(s).
Note
initialization.

Ready perform the system start up
procedure.
B2.19 DIVERTER, ASSEMBLY, STAT Version - 96728-111_145_3
List/Part Numbers
7-205670-01 Diverter, STAT
7-205670-02 Diverter, STAT - Moulded Base
7-93761-01 Shutter, Diverter, Stat
7-93963-01 Diverter Assembly, STAT
B2.19 DIVERTER, ASSEMBLY, STAT
15 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal


cover(s) to access the STAT diverter
assembly.
3. Locate the STAT diverter assembly.
Note
map for the STAT diverter
assembly location (STD).

VIDEO –
Remove
Note
STAT
Diverter
Note
The STAT Diverter with the captive
shutter is shown in the video.
Note
Note
The STAT Diverter with the non-
captive shutter is shown in the video.
Remove
STAT Note
Diverter For the STAT Diverter with the
non-captive shutter, place tape
over the shutter to secure it
prior to removing the diverter
assembly. [1]

W41 STAT DIVERT. [2]

securing STAT diverter to the process
path. [3]
3. Lift STAT diverter and Remove it from

the module.
Replacement
VIDEO –
Install
Note
STAT
Diverter
Note
The STAT Diverter with the captive
Note
Note
The STAT Diverter with the non-captive
Install
STAT
Diverter
2. Verify that the shutter is seated flush on
the diverter assembly.
3. Tighten the two (2) thumbscrews to

secure the diverter to the process path
[3].
4. Attach the sensor board connector W41

STAT DIVERT. [2]
Note
For the STAT Diverter with the
non-captive shutter, remove the
tape securing the shutter to the
diverter and ensure it is seated
properly. [1]

components cover(s), if present.
Note
must be ON and at the Snapshot
screen prior to powering on the
initialization.
4. Perform the system start up procedure

to change the status of the processing
Stopped to Ready.
C1.01 SHUTTER Version - 96728-111_353_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78200-01 Shutter
C1.01 SHUTTER
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Extend
Shutter for
1. Perform Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedure
Removal
1030 Shutter option 3 (extend) to move the
shutter mechanism into the down position.
Note
position. If the diagnostic procedure fails
to move the shutter, manually push the
shutter down until it is out of the process
path.
Preparation
Note
module.
2. If required, move instrument away from the wall.
access the CMIA reader.
5. Remove back access panel to gain rear access
to the CMIA reader.
Remove
CMIA Reader
1. Loosen the two (2) silver thumbscrews mounting
from
the CMIA [1] reader to the process path.
Processing
2. Pull back approximately 1/2" (1.5cm) or more to
Module
clear the path and alignment guide pins. [2]
Note
Once the CMIA reader is clear of the path
3. Lift up on the CMIA reader, but do not remove.

connector from the bottom of the CMIA reader.
Remove
Shutter
Mechanism
Replacement
Install
Shutter
1. Verify that the bottom of the shutter plunger is
Mechanism
pushed down to where it is just above the
sensor board.
4. Attach the shutter mechanism mounting bracket
Note
The plunger may not be held in place, use
both hands when attaching the
position, while carefully aligning the fins of the
shutter plunger with the holes in the bottom of
the process path.
Install
CMIA
Reader
2. Remove the black light pipe cover and store it in
the maintenance kit.
3. Slide the light pipe end into the process path. [2]
Note
Verify there are no cables/tubing, pinched
between the reader and housing.

5. Screw the (2) two thumbscrews into place. [1]
Note
Do not use excess force when installing.

1. Reconnect the waste outlet tubing (insert the
instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and
other end of the tubing into the baseplate drain
shutdown.
hole).
2. Install the back access panel.
Note
The system control center power must be
ON prior to turning on the processing
5. To change the status of the processing module

and sample handler from Stopped to Ready,

errors.
2 1030 - Shutter
4 5100 - PP & Carousel Motor Tests
C1.02 BD,SENSOR #1 (Shutter) Version - 96728-111_362_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76210-01 BD, Sensor #1
7-76210-02 BD, Sensor #1 (RoHS)
C1.02 BD,SENSOR #1 (Shutter)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Extend
Shutter for
Removal
1030 Shutter to move the shutter mechanism into
the down position.
Note
path.
Preparation
Note
module.

to the CMIA reader.
Remove
CMIA Reader
from
the CMIA reader to the process path.
Processing
Module
clear the path and alignment guide pins.
Note

Remove
Shutter
Mechanism
Remove
Shutter
Sensor
securing the sensor board to the shutter bracket.
Board #1
Replacement
Install
Shutter
1. Align the sensor board on the shutter assembly
Sensor
so the screw holes are aligned.
Board #1
2. Install the two (2) screws that secure the board
to the shutter assembly.
Install
Shutter
Mechanism
sensor board.
Note

the process path.
Install
CMIA
Reader
Note

Note

shutdown.
hole).
Note


errors.
2 1030 - Shutter
C1.03 SHUTTER,PLUNGER Version - 96728-111_367_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78202-01 Plunger, Optics Shutter
C1.03 SHUTTER,PLUNGER
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Extend
Shutter for
Removal
the down position.
Note
path.
Preparation
Note
module.
to the CMIA reader.
Remove
CMIA Reader
from
Processing
Module
Note

Remove
Shutter
Mechanism
Remove
Shutter
1. Remove the non-captive screw securing the
Plunger from
plunger in place.
Bracket
2. Slide the plunger off of the motor shaft.
Replacement
Install
Shutter
1. Slide the shutter plunger onto the shutter motor
Plunger
shaft.
2. Install the screw securing plunger to the motor
shaft.
3. Verify the shutter plunger is all the way in the
down position.
4. Verify the flag coming off of the plunger is
positioned in the home sensor.
Install
Shutter
Mechanism
sensor board.
Note

the process path.
Install
CMIA
Reader
Note

Note

shutdown.
hole).
Note


errors.
2 1030 - Shutter
C1.04 SHUTTER,BRACKET Version - 96728-111_368_1
C1.04 SHUTTER,BRACKET
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Extend
Shutter for
Removal
the down position.
Note
path.
Preparation
Note
module.

to the CMIA reader.
Remove
CMIA Reader
from
Processing
Module
Note

Remove
Shutter
Mechanism
Remove
Shutter
Plunger from
plunger in place.
Bracket
Remove
Shutter Motor
from Bracket
securing the motor to the shutter bracket.
Replacement
Install Shutter
Motor onto
1.
Place the shutter motor onto the shutter
the Shutter
bracket, aligning the screw holes.
Bracket
2. Install the two (2) screws.
Install Shutter
Plunger
shaft.
2. Install the screw securing the plunger to the
motor shaft.
down position.
Install Shutter
Mechanism
sensor board.
Note

the process path.
Install CMIA
Reader
2. Remove the black light pipe cover and store it
in the maintenance kit.
path. [2]
Note
housing.

Note

and shutdown.
hole).
Note
be ON prior to turning on the processing


errors.
2 1030 - Shutter
C1.05 SHUTTER,MOTOR Version - 96728-111_369_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78851-01 Motor, Shutter or WZ
C1.05 SHUTTER,MOTOR
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Extend
Shutter for
Removal
the down position.
Note
path.
Preparation
Note
module.
to the CMIA reader.
Remove
CMIA Reader
from
Processing
Module
Note

Remove
Shutter
Mechanism
Remove
Shutter
Plunger from
plunger in place.
Bracket
Remove
Shutter Motor
from Bracket
securing the motor to the shutter bracket.
Replacement
Install
Shutter
1. Place the shutter motor onto the shutter bracket,
Motor on
Shutter
Bracket
Install
Shutter
Plunger
shaft.
2. Install the screw securing the plunger to the
motor shaft.
down position.
Install
Shutter
Mechanism
sensor board.
Note

the process path.
Install CMIA
Reader
Note

Note

and shutdown.
hole).
Note


errors.
2 1030 - Shutter
C1.07 CMIA READER Version - 96728-111_370_2
List/Part Numbers
7-201909-01 CMIA Reader, Metal Case, Tested
7-201909-02 CMIA Reader, Metal Case, Tested (RoHS)
7-78262-02 CMIA Reader
7-78262-03 CMIA Reader, Dry Calibrated
C1.07 CMIA READER
15 min
Time Required
06F75-60 iSystem Optics Verifier Kit

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation

to access the CMIA reader.
3. Remove the rear cover panel above the pump

bay to gain access to the CMIA reader.
Remove CMIA
Reader from
Processing
mounting the CMIA [1] reader to the process
Module
path.
2. Pull back approximately 1/2" (1.5cm) or more
to clear the path and alignment guide pins.
Note
Once the CMIA reader is clear of the
path place a black cover over the light
pipe. The black cover is shipped in the
maintenance kit.

remove.
connector from the bottom of the CMIA
reader.
Replacement
Preparation
1. Remove the CMIA reader from its protective
packaging.
Note
If changing reader types (plastic case to
metal or metal case to plastic) install the
proper optics cable W102 first. For the same
type, continue to the next section.
Install
CMIA
Reader
Note

Note

1. Install the rear access panel.
Note and shutdown.
Notice the "Normalization" or "Linearity"
values printed on the CMIA reader label.
Write them down. Values may be positive or
negative.
3. Log on as FSE, then confirm proper optics values

or enter values if the module has been changed.
Use the following sequence to confirm or change:
System tab and Configuration
System Settings radio button
highlight Modules then Configure F6
Select proper module and confirm serial
number
Verify or enter Normalization or Linearity
values as previously noted from CMIA
reader label
Note
Values may be positive or negative.
Enter the minus (-) sign if shown on
the label. Plus (+) sign is not
required.
Select Done
Reboot and confirm settings remain entered
properly.
Note

errors.
4 P-24 Precision Run Confirm the precision results are acceptable
using the Total %CV value listed in the
appropriate assay package insert.
D1.01 BARCODE READER, REAGENT, ASM (written to be customer–
Version - 96728-111_371_3
replaceable with Abbott assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-76836-01 Barcode Reader, Reagent
7-99210-01 Reagent Bar Code Reader, Tested
7-99210-02 Reagent BCR, Bracket, Microscan (Tested)
7-99210-03 Reagent BCR, Bracket, Microscan, Tested
D1.01 BARCODE READER, REAGENT, ASM (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
16 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials #2 Phillips screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
cover.
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover Note

place. [2]
Note
Remove
Refrigerator Note
Temperature Use caution when removing the screw; it is
Sensor not secured to the refrigerator temperature
sensor.
1. Locate the refrigerator temperature

sensor. [1]
2. Use the #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove
the non-captive screw securing the sensor
to the bar code bracket. [2]
3. Lift the sensor out of the bar code reader
bracket and set it to the side.
Remove Reagent
Bar Code Reader
1. Disconnect the bar code reader connector,
Assembly
W86 REAGENT BCR by unscrewing the
connector from the reader. [1]
2. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews that
secure the bar code reader bracket in
place. [2]
3. Lift the bar code reader and bracket out of
the module.
Replacement
Install Reagent
Bar Code
1. Place the bar code reader and bracket
Reader
on the reagent refrigerator diffuser.
Assembly
3. Connect the bar code reader connector
W86 REAGENT BCR to the reader. [2]
connector to the reader.
Install
Refrigerator
1. Place the sensor on the reagent bar
Temperature
code bracket and install the screw. [1]
Sensor
Note
Orient the sensor so the sensor
cable is next to the connector.
Install Reagent
Carousel
Cover
tighten the three (3) non-captive
screws. [1]
Note
initialization.

procedure.
2 3200 - Reagent Bar Code Reader Test
1 3210 - Reagent Bar Code Calibration
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2011 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. •
Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
D1.02 CAROUSEL, INNER (written to be customer–replaceable with
Version - 96728-111_372_3
Abbott assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-77828-01 Carousel, Inner
7-77828-02 Carousel, Inner, Reinforced
D1.02 CAROUSEL, INNER (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
20 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Ready, or Warming status.
Preparation For information on loading reagents, refer to the ARCHITECT i System

Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
Reagent inventory management.
carousel cover.
remove all the reagents, rotate the
Note
Remove cover if necessary
prior to removing reagents.
Remove
Reagent Note
Carousel Use caution when removing screws;
Cover they are not secured to the carousel
cover.

Note
Remove
Inner
1. Locate the inner carousel. [1]
Reagent
2. Turn the motor lever (green) clockwise
Carousel
until the lever handle stops over the
inner carousel. [2]
3. While pushing the v-wheel release
(green) [3] back, lift and remove the
inner reagent carousel from the
module.
Note
Replacement
Install
Inner
1. Push the v-wheel release (green) and
Reagent
place the rim of the carousel into the
Carousel
groove of each v-wheel. [1]
2. Turn the motor lever (green)
counterclockwise until the lever handle
stops. [2]
Note
Install
Reagent
Carousel
tighten the three (3) screws (non-
Cover
captive). [1]
Prepare For information on loading reagents, refer to the ARCHITECT i System
for Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
Operation Reagent inventory management.
Note
The system control center power For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
must be ON prior to turning on System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
the processing module for Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.

procedure.
3. Reload the reagents into the reagent
carousel.
1 3000 - Reagent Carousel Test
D1.03 CAROUSEL,OUTER Version - 96728-111_373_2
List/Part Numbers
7-202413-01 Carousel, Outer Reagent, Gear Drive, Reinforced
7-202413-02 Carousel, Outer Reagent, Gear Drive, Reinforced
7-77829-02 Carousel, Outer Reagent
D1.03 CAROUSEL,OUTER
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Aqua Lube Grease 7-14233-01
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal


carousel cover.
Note
If necessary, remove the
cover prior to removing
reagents.
Remove
Reagent Note
Carousel Use caution when removing screws;
Cover they are not secured to the carousel
cover.
1. Locate the reagent carousel

cover. [1]
Note
Be careful not to damage
other parts when removing
the cover.
Remove
Inner
Reagent
Carousel
clockwise until the lever handle
stops over the inner carousel. [2]
(green) [3] back, lift and remove the
inner reagent carousel from the
module.
Note
Remove
Outer
1. Push the two (2) motor lever handles
Reagent
(green) back. [1]
Carousel
(green) back, lift and remove the
outer reagent carousel from the
module. [2]
Note
Remove
Reagent
1. At each locking position on the
Bottle Guide
reagent bottle guide, release the lock
(optional)
by pressing out on the reagent bottle
guide. [1]
Note
Locking tabs are located at
positions 1, 25, 17 and 9.
2. Remove the reagent bottle guide

from the module.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Align the small hole on the guide,
Bottle Guide
near position1, with the reagent
(if removed
probe calibration target.
previously)
2. Lock each tab into place. [1]
Note
Locking tabs are located at
positions 1, 25, 17, and 9.
Grease Outer
Reagent
1. Using the grease (aqua lube)
Carousel
capsule shipped with the new
carousel, place a 1/8" (3.18mm) dot
of grease on every other small
gear. [1]
2. Rotate the metal ring gear five (5)

times. [2]
Install Outer
Reagent
1. Pull the v-wheel release (green)
Carousel
back and place the rim of the
carousel into the groove of each v-
wheel. [1]
2. Engage the two (2) motor lever

handles. [2]
Note
Install Inner
Reagent
1. Push the v-wheel release (green)
Carousel
and place the rim of the carousel
into the groove of each v-wheel. [1]

counterclockwise until the lever
handle stops. [2]
Note
Install
Reagent
1. Install the reagent carousel cover
Carousel
and tighten the three (3) screws
Cover
(non-captive). [1]
Note
The system control center For information on loading RVs, refer to the ARCHITECT System
power must be ON prior to Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: Setup
turning on the processing and Consumables Inventory.
module for proper
initialization.

Stopped to Ready, perform the
Startup procedure.
3. Reload the reagents into the

reagent carousel.

cover(s) and scan reagents.
D1.04 MOTOR,CAROUSEL,DUAL ASM Version - 96728-111_374_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77499-02 Release Mechanism Kit, Dual Motor Assembly
7-77857-02 Dispersion Drive Release Lever Kit
7-77932-01 Motor, Carousel, Dual ASM
D1.04 MOTOR,CAROUSEL,DUAL ASM
30 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Note
Removing and replacing the buffer bottle can damage the carousel motor sensor board.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation For information on loading reagents, refer to the

ARCHITECT i System Operations Manual, Section 5:
Operating instructions, Subsection: Reagent inventory
management.
cover.
all the reagents, rotate the reagent
Note
Remove cover if necessary prior to
removing reagents.
Remove Wash Buffer

Reservoir to Gain
1. If the wash buffer reservoir volume is
Access to Carousel
greater than 10 liters, unload buffer.
Motor Sensors
Select the As needed category
from the maintenance screen
Perform maintenance procedure
2185 Wash Buffer Unload.
2. Grasp the hand holds on the side of the

buffer reservoir and slide it out. Place the
reservoir outside the module on the floor.
Note
Removing and replacing the wash
buffer reservoir can damage the
carousel motor sensor board.
Remove with caution.
Prepare to Remove
Reagent Carousel
Cover
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover Note

cover in place. [2]
Note
Remove Inner
Reagent Carousel
until the lever handle stops over the inner
carousel. [2]
(green) back, lift and remove the inner
reagent carousel from the module. [3]
Remove Outer
Reagent Carousel
1. Push the motor lever handles back.
2. While pushing the v-wheel level handle
back, lift and remove the outer reagent
carousel from the module.
Remove Dual
Carousel Motor
1. Disconnect outer and inner carousel
Assembly
motor home sensor cables from the
carousel motor sensor board located on
the left wall of the wash buffer reservoir
area.
2. Remove the four (4) screws (non-captive)
from the dual carousel motor mount on
the baseplate.
3. While pressing the two (2) motor gears
together, pull up on the motor assembly,
but do not remove from the module.
4. Disconnect carousel motor encoders
OUTER CRSL MOTOR ENCODER W49
and INNER CRSL MOTOR ENCODER
W49.
5. Disconnect carousel motor cables
OUTER CAR MTR W2 and INNER CAR
MTR W2.
6. Loosen the two (2) non-captive screw
securing the ground straps and slide the
connector away from the screw.
Replacement
Install Dual
Carousel
1.
Slide the two (2) ground strap spade
Motor
connectors under the screws on the
Assembly
motor assembly and tighten the screw.
2. Connect motor cables OUTER CAR
MTR W2 and INNER CAR MTR W2.
3. Connect carousel motor encoders
OUTER CRSL MOTOR ENCODER
W49 and INNER CRSL MOTOR
ENCODER W49.
4. Feed all cables through the opening in
the baseplate.
5. While squeezing the two motor gears
together insert the motor assembly into
the baseplate and align the guide pins.
6. Verify that the motor assembly is fully
seated.
Note
Verify the motor lever is located
to the left of the reagent
refrigerator diffuser.
7. Install the four (4) screws securing the

motor assembly to the baseplate.
8. Connect two (2) carousel motor home
sensor cables to the sensor interface
board.
Install Outer
Reagent
1. Pull the v-wheel release (green) back
Carousel
and place the rim of the carousel into
the groove of each v-wheel.
2. Engage the two (2) motor lever
handles.
Install Inner
Reagent
Carousel
stops. [2]
Install Wash
Buffer
1. Lift and slide the wash buffer reservoir
Reservoir
into the module.
Note
The system control center power For further information on loading wash buffer, refer to the
must be ON prior to turning on ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
the processing module for proper instructions, Subsection: Setup and Consumable inventory
initialization. management.

procedure.
3. Load wash buffer if previously removed.
carousel.

errors.
D1.05 KIT, SENSOR, REAGENT CAROUSELS Version - 96728-111_375_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77931-01 Kit, Sensor, Reagent Carousel
7-77931-02 Home Sensor Kit, Reagent Carousels (RoHS)
D1.05 KIT, SENSOR, REAGENT CAROUSELS
30 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Note
Removing and replacing the buffer bottle can damage the carousel motor sensor board.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
cover.
Note
removing reagents.
Remove Wash Buffer

Reservoir to Gain
1. If the wash buffer reservoir volume is
Access to Carousel
greater than 10 liters, unload buffer.
Motor Sensors

reservoir outside the module on the floor.
Note
Removing and replacing the wash
buffer reservoir can damage the
carousel motor sensor board.
Remove with caution.
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover Note

cover in place. [2]
Note
Remove Inner
Reagent Carousel
until the lever handle stops over the inner
carousel. [2]
(green) back, lift and remove the inner
reagent carousel from the module. [3]
Remove Outer
Reagent Carousel
2. While pushing the v-wheel level handle
Remove Dual
Carousel Motor
1. Disconnect outer and inner carousel
Assembly
motor home sensor cables from the
carousel motor sensor board located on
the left wall of the wash buffer reservoir
area.
from the dual carousel motor mount on
the baseplate.
together, pull up on the motor assembly,
but do not remove from the module.
4. Disconnect carousel motor encoders
OUTER CRSL MOTOR ENCODER W49
and INNER CRSL MOTOR ENCODER
W49.
5. Disconnect carousel motor cables
OUTER CAR MTR W2 and INNER CAR
MTR W2.
6. Loosen the two (2) non-captive screw
securing the ground straps and slide the
connector away from the screw.
Remove Sensors
1. Remove the screws that secure the
sensors.
2. Remove the sensors.
Note
The outer sensor has a washer, or
washers under it. Note the number
of washers removed.
Replacement
Install
Sensors
1. Install the sensors. Place a washer
(14519-003) under the outer sensor.
Note
Install the same number of
washers that were removed.
Install Dual
Carousel
1. Slide the two (2) ground strap spade
Motor
connectors under the non-captive
Assembly
screws on the motor assembly and
tighten the screw.
2. Connect motor cables OUTER CAR
MTR W2 and INNER CAR MTR W2.
3. Connect carousel motor encoders
OUTER CRSL MOTOR ENCODER
W49 and INNER CRSL MOTOR
ENCODER W49.
the baseplate.
5. While squeezing the two motor gears
together insert the motor assembly into
the baseplate and align the guide pins.
seated.
Note
Verify the motor lever is located
to the left of the reagent
7. Install the four (4) screws securing the

8. Connect two (2) carousel motor home
sensor cables to the sensor interface
board.
Install Outer
Reagent
Carousel
2. Engage the two (2) motor lever handles.
Install Inner
Reagent
Carousel
stops. [2]
Install
Reagent
Carousel
Cover
captive). [1]
Install Wash For further information on loading wash buffer, refer to the
Buffer ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
Reservoir instructions, Subsection: Setup and Consumable inventory
into the module.
management.
2. Load wash buffer if previously removed.
Note
initialization.

procedure.
carousel.

errors.
2 G63 - Tubing / Fitting / Filter Verify tubing / fitting / filter is securely installed
and does not obstruct instrument components.
Ensure no leaks and/or bubbles are in the
tubing / fitting / filter.
D1.06 MOTOR,CAROUSEL,OUTER Version - 96728-111_376_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77834-01 Motor, Carousel, Outer
D1.06 MOTOR,CAROUSEL,OUTER
30 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

1. The processing module must be in Ready, or
System status.
Warming status.
Preparation
to access the reagent carousel cover.
2. Open the reagent carousel cover, remove all
the reagents, rotate the reagent carousel, if
necessary. Store the reagents in the
refrigerator.
Note
removing reagents.

Remove
Reagent Note
Carousel Cover Use caution when removing screws; they are
not secured to the carousel cover.

2. Remove the three (3) screws (non-captive) that
secure the reagent carousel cover in place. [2]
3. Remove the reagent carousel cover by using
the handle and lifting the cover up and out of
the module. [3]
Note
Remove Inner
Reagent
Carousel
2. Turn the motor lever (green) clockwise until the
lever handle stops over the inner carousel. [2]
3. While pushing the v-wheel release (green)
back, lift and remove the inner reagent
carousel from the module. [3]
Remove Outer
Reagent
Carousel
2. While pushing the v-wheel level handle back,
lift and remove the outer reagent carousel from
the module.
Remove Outer
Carousel Motor
1. Remove the four (4) screws (non-captive) from
Assembly
the dual carousel motor mount.
together, pull up on the motor assembly, but do
not remove it from the module.
3. Disconnect inner carousel motor encoder
OUTER CRSL MOTOR ENCODER W49.
4. Disconnect motor cable OUTER CAR MTR
W2.
securing the outer carousel motor to the dual
carousel mount.
Note
A ground strap is connected to one of
the 4 motor screws. The ground strap is
removed when the screw is removed.
Replacement
Install
Outer
1. Place the outer carousel motor on the dual
Carousel
carousel motor mount and replace the four (4)
Motor
screws.
Assembly
Note
Slide the ground strap spade connector
under a screw securing the outer carousel
motor to the dual carousel motor mount
before the screw is tightened completely.
2. Connect motor cable OUTER CAR MTR W2.

3. Connect inner carousel motor encoder OUTER
CRSL MOTOR ENCODER W49.
4. Feed all cables through the opening in the
baseplate.
5. While squeezing the two (2) motor gears together
insert the motor assembly into the baseplate and
align the guide pins.
6. Verify that the motor assembly is fully seated.
Note
Verify the motor lever is located to the left of
the reagent refrigerator diffuser.
7. Replace the four (4) screws securing the motor

assembly to the baseplate.
Install
Outer
1. Pull the v-wheel release (green) back and place
Reagent
the rim of the carousel into the groove of each v-
Carousel
wheel.
Install Inner
Reagent
1. Push the v-wheel release (green) and place the
Carousel
rim of the carousel into the groove of each v-
wheel. [1]
2. Turn the motor lever (green) counterclockwise until
the lever handle stops. [2]
Install
Reagent
1. Install the reagent carousel cover and tighten the
Carousel
three (3) screws (non-captive).
Cover

Note and shutdown.

sample handler from Stopped to Ready, perform
the Startup procedure.
3. Reload the reagents into the reagent carousel.

errors.
D1.07 MOTOR,CAROUSEL,INNER Version - 96728-111_378_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77835-01 Motor, Carousel, Inner
D1.07 MOTOR,CAROUSEL,INNER
30 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Warming status.
Preparation
refrigerator.
Note
removing reagents.

Remove
Reagent Note
Carousel Use caution when removing screws; they are
Cover not secured to the carousel cover.

the module. [3]
Note
Remove Inner
Reagent
Carousel
back, lift and remove the inner reagent carousel
from the module. [3]
Remove Outer
Reagent
Carousel
2. While pushing the v-wheel level handle back,
lift and remove the outer reagent carousel from
the module.
Remove Inner
Carousel Motor
1. Remove the four (4) screws (non-captive) from
Assembly
the dual carousel motor mount.
together, pull up on the motor assembly, but do
not remove it from the module.
3. Disconnect inner carousel motor encoder
INNER CRSL MOTOR ENCODER W49.
4. Disconnect motor cable INNER CAR MTR W2.
securing the inner carousel motor to the dual
carousel mount.
Note
A ground strap is connected to one of
the four (4) motor screws. The ground
strap is removed when the screw is
removed.
Replacement
Install Inner
Carousel
1. Place the inner carousel motor on the dual
Motor
carousel motor mount and replace the four (4)
Assembly
screws.
Note
Slide the ground strap spade connector
under a screw securing the inner carousel
motor to the dual carousel motor mount
before the screw is tightened completely.
2. Connect motor cable INNER CAR MTR W2.

3. Connect inner carousel motor encoder INNER
CRSL MOTOR ENCODER W49.
4. Feed all cables through the opening in the
baseplate.
5. While squeezing the two (2) motor gears together
insert the motor assembly into the baseplate and
align the guide pins.
6. Verify that the motor assembly is fully seated.
Note
Verify the motor lever is located to the left of
the reagent refrigerator diffuser.
7. Replace the four (4) screws securing the motor

assembly to the baseplate.
Install
Outer
1. Pull the v-wheel release (green) back and place
Reagent
the rim of the carousel into the groove of each v-
Carousel
wheel.
Install Inner
Reagent
1. Push the v-wheel release (green) and place the rim
Carousel
of the carousel into the groove of each v-wheel. [1]
Install
Reagent
Carousel
three (3) screws (non-captive). [1]
Cover

Note and shutdown.


errors.
D1.08 MOTOR,DISPERSION ASM Version - 96728-111_379_1
List/Part Numbers
7-200213-03 Dispersion Motor Assembly, Chain, Plastic Sprocket
7-77933-01 Motor, Dispersion ASM
D1.08 MOTOR,DISPERSION ASM
30 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Warming status.
Preparation
access the reagent carousel cover.
2. Open the reagent carousel cover, remove all the
reagents, rotate the reagent carousel, if
necessary. Store the reagents in the refrigerator.
Note
removing reagents.

Remove
Reagent Note
Carousel Use caution when removing screws; they are not
Cover secured to the carousel cover.

3. Remove the reagent carousel cover by using the
handle and lifting the cover up and out of the
module. [3]
Note
Remove Inner
Reagent
Carousel
3. While pushing the v-wheel release (green) back,
lift and remove the inner reagent carousel from
the module. [3]
Remove
Outer
Reagent
2. While pushing the v-wheel level handle back, lift
Carousel
and remove the outer reagent carousel from the
module.
Remove
Dispersion
1. Remove the screw securing the R1 LLS flex
Motor
circuit to allow removal of the dispersion motor.
Assembly
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the motor
to the baseplate.
3. Pull up on the motor gear. Do not remove from
the module.
4. Disconnect motor encoder cable DISP MOTOR
ENCODER W51.
Note
Once the cables are removed from the
motor, secure them to the baseplate so
they do not fall through the opening.
5. Disconnect motor cable DISP MTR W3.

6. Loosen the non-captive screw securing the
ground strap and slide the connector away from
the screw.
7. Remove the motor assembly from the module.
Replacement
Install
Dispersion
1. Slide the ground strap spade connector
Motor
under the screw on the motor assembly
Assembly
and tighten the screw.
2. Connect motor encoder cable DISP
MOTOR ENCODER W51.
3. Connect motor cable DISP MTR W3.
the baseplate.
5. Insert the motor assembly into the
baseplate and aligning the guide pins.
seated.
Note
Verify the motor lever is located to
the left of the flex circuit mount.
7. Install the two (2) screws securing the

8. Align the R1 LLS flex circuit on the
mounting block and install the screw.
Install Outer
Reagent
1. Pull the v-wheel release (green) back and
Carousel
groove of each v-wheel.
Install Inner
Reagent
Carousel
stops. [2]
Install
reagent
carousel
cover
screws. [1]
Prepare for For information on loading reagents, refer to the ARCHITECT

Operation i System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Verify the position of the sample pipettor
Subsection: Reagent inventory management.
allows loading of the reagents.
Note System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
The system control center power Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
initialization.
carousel.

errors.
D1.09 V-WHEEL,6-PACK Version - 96728-111_380_1
List/Part Numbers
7-64293-01 V-Wheel, 6 Pack
D1.09 V-WHEEL,6-PACK
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Warming status.
Preparation For information on loading reagents, refer to the ARCHITECT

i System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
refrigerator.
Note
removing reagents.

Remove
Reagent Note

the module. [3]
Note
Remove
Inner
Reagent
Carousel
back, lift and remove the inner reagent
Remove
Outer Note
Reagent If the v-wheel being replaced is for the outer
Carousel carousel remove the outer carousel. If not, go
to Remove Appropriate V-Wheel.
1. Push the motor lever handles (green) back.

Remove
Appropriate Note
V-Wheel Use caution when removing screws, they are
1. Remove the non-captive screw securing the v-

wheel in place.
2. Remove the v-wheel from the module.
Replacement
Install V-
Wheel
1. Place the v-wheel on its mount and install
the screw.
Install
Outer Note
Reagent If the outer carousel was not removed, go
Carousel to Install Inner Reagent Carousel.

Install
Inner
Reagent
Carousel
stops. [2]
Install
Reagent
Carousel
Cover
captive). [1]

Note
The system control center power For information on loading RVs, refer to the ARCHITECT System
must be ON prior to turning on the Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
processing module for proper Setup and Consumables Inventory.
initialization.

carousel.
D1.10 LEVER,V-WHEEL,CRSL,INNER Version - 96728-111_381_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77836-01 Lever, V-Wheel, Crsl, Inner
D1.10 LEVER,V-WHEEL,CRSL,INNER
30 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Warming status.
Preparation
refrigerator.
Note
removing reagents.

Remove
Reagent Note

the module. [3]
Note
Remove Inner
Reagent
Carousel
the module. [3]
Remove Outer
Reagent
Carousel
module.
Remove Inner
Carousel V-
Wheel Lever
release assembly to the baseplate.
Note
The reagent refrigerator diffuser may be
removed to allow easier access when
removing the release assembly.

release spring to the baseplate.
Replacement
Install Inner
Carousel V-
1. Place the spring and screw on the
Wheel Lever
baseplate and tighten.
2. Connect the release spring to the release
assembly.
3. Place the release assembly on the
baseplate.
4. Install the screw and tighten.
Note
Install the reagent refrigerator
diffuser if previously removed.
Install Outer
Reagent
Carousel
Install Inner
Reagent
Carousel
stops. [2]
Install
Reagent
Carousel
Cover
captive).
initialization.

carousel.

errors.
D1.11 LEVER,V-WHEEL,CRSL,OUTER Version - 96728-111_382_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77837-01 Lever, V-Wheel, Crsl, Outer
D1.11 LEVER,V-WHEEL,CRSL,OUTER
30 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Warming status.
Preparation
refrigerator.
Note
removing reagents.

Remove
Reagent Note

the module. [3]
Note
Remove Inner
Reagent
Carousel
Remove Outer
Reagent
Carousel
module.
Remove Outer
Carousel V-
Wheel Lever
release assembly to the baseplate.
release spring to the baseplate.
Replacement
Install Outer
Carousel V-
1. Place the spring and screw on the
Wheel Lever
baseplate and tighten.
2. Connect the release spring to the release
assembly.
3. Place the release assembly on the
baseplate.
4. Install the screw and tighten.
Install Outer
Reagent
Carousel
Install Inner
Reagent
Carousel
stops. [2]
Install
Reagent
Carousel
Cover
captive).
initialization.

carousel.

errors.
D1.12 BD,SENSOR #2 Version - 96728-111_383_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76215-01 BD, Sensor #2
7-76215-02 BD, Sensor #2 (RoHS)
D1.12 BD,SENSOR #2
5 min
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation For information on loading reagents, refer to the

management.
cover.
all the reagents, rotate the reagent carousel,
if necessary. Store the reagents in the
refrigerator.
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover Note

place. [2]
Note
Remove Sensor
Board #2 (Sensor
1. Disconnect outer and inner carousel motor
Interface Board)
home sensor cables.
2. Disconnect carousel home sensor cable,
W49 CRSL SENSOR.
3. Slide the sensor board up and out of the
mounting feature.
Note
The mounting feature is located on
the back wall of the buffer reservoir
compartment.
Replacement
Install Sensor
Board #2
1. Slide the sensor board into the
(Sensor
mounting feature.
Interface board)
2. Connect carousel home sensor cable,
W49 CRSL SENSOR.
3. Connect outer and inner carousel motor
home sensor cables.
Install Outer
Reagent Note
Carousel If the outer carousel was not removed,
go to Install Inner Reagent Carousel.
1.
Pull the v-wheel release (green) back
Install Inner
Reagent
Carousel
stops. [2]
Install Reagent
Carousel Cover
captive). [1]
Install Wash
Buffer Reservoir
into the module.

Note
The system control center power For information on loading RVs, refer to the ARCHITECT System
must be ON prior to turning on Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
the processing module for proper Setup and Consumables Inventory.
initialization.

procedure.
carousel.
4. If wash buffer was previously unloaded,
replenish wash buffer.
1 5110 - Pipettor & Syringe Motor Tests
D1.13 MOTOR, CAROUSEL, DISPERSION Version - 96728-111_384_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77971-01 Motor, Carousel, Dispersion
D1.13 MOTOR, CAROUSEL, DISPERSION
13 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Warming status.
Preparation
reagents, rotate the reagent carousel, if
Note
removing reagents.
Remove
Reagent Note

module. [3]
Note
Remove Inner
Reagent
Carousel
the module. [3]
Remove
Outer
Reagent
Carousel
module.
Remove
Dispersion
1. Remove the screw securing the R1 LLS flex
Motor
circuit to allow removal of the dispersion motor.
Assembly
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the motor
to the baseplate.
3. Pull up on the motor gear. Do not remove from
the module.
4. Disconnect motor encoder cable DISP MOTOR
ENCODER W51.
Note
Once the cables are removed from the
motor, secure them to the baseplate so
they do not fall through the opening.
5. Disconnect motor cable DISP MTR W3.

6. Loosen the non-captive screw securing the
ground strap and slide the connector away from
the screw.
7. Remove the motor assembly from the module.
Remove
Carousel
1. Remove the four (4) screws securing the
Dispersion
dispersion carousel motor to the mount.
Motor
2. Pull the motor and gear up through the mount to
remove it.
Replacement
Install
Carousel
1. Place the dispersion motor on the
Dispersion
dispersion motor mount and replace the
Motor
four (4) screws.
Install
Dispersion
1. Slide the ground strap spade connector
Motor
under the screw on the motor assembly
Assembly
and tighten the screw.
2. Connect motor encoder cable DISP
MOTOR ENCODER W51.
3. Connect motor cable DISP MTR W3.
the baseplate.
5. Insert the motor assembly into the
baseplate and aligning the guide pins.
seated.
Note
Verify the motor lever is located to
the left of the flex circuit mount.

8. Align the R1 LLS flex circuit on the
mounting block and install the screw.
Install Outer
Reagent
Carousel
Install Inner
Reagent
Carousel
stops. [2]
Install
Reagent
Carousel
Cover
screws. [1]
Install Wash
Buffer
Reservoir
into the module.
Note
initialization.

carousel.
4. If wash buffer was previously unloaded,
replenish wash buffer.

errors.
D1.14 Dispersion Carousel Gear and Support Wheels Version - 96728-111_6075_1
D1.14 Dispersion Carousel Gear and Support Wheels
Time Required 15 min

Tools/Materials Aqua Lube Grease 7-14233-01
Standard Tool Kit
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

in Ready, or Warming status.

1. Unload all reagents and store
them in a refrigerator.
Note
If necessary, remove the
cover prior to removing
reagents.
Note
If a hardware issue exists,
unload the reagents
manually.

module.
Remove
Reagent Note
Carousel Cover Use caution when
removing screws; they are
not secured to the
carousel cover.
1. Locate the reagent carousel

cover. [1]
(non-captive) that secure the
reagent carousel cover in place.
[2]
3. Remove the reagent carousel

cover.
Note
Prevent damage to other
parts when removing the
cover.
VIDEO
Remove Inner Note
Reagent Click the video and arrow icon in
Carousel the reference section to access
the video in D1.02 Inner
Reagent Carousel action section:
"VIDEO Remove Inner Reagent
Carousel."
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access
and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as
outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Remove Inner
Reagent
Carousel
clockwise until the lever handle
stops over the inner carousel. [2]
3. While pushing the v-wheel

release (green) [3] back, lift and
remove the inner reagent
VIDEO
Remove Outer Note
Reagent Click the video and arrow icon in
Carousel the reference section to access
the video in D1.03 OUTER
CAROUSEL action section:
"VIDEO Remove Outer Reagent
Carousel."
Note
Remove Outer
Reagent
1. Push the two (2) motor lever
Carousel
handles (green) back. [1]
2. While pushing the v-wheel

release (green) back, lift and
remove the outer reagent
VIDEO
Remove Note
Reagent Bottle Video contains no audio sound.
Guide and
Remove
Dispersion
Station/ Gear
(Only)
Note
Remove
Reagent Bottle
1. Push out from the inside on the
Guide
reagent bottle guide at positions
1, 25, 17, and 9 to release the
locking tabs. [1]
2. Remove the reagent bottle guide

from the module.
Remove
Dispersion
1. Turn the carousel upside down to
Station/ Gear
access the gear. [1]
(Only)
2. Identify the gear(s) unable to turn
smoothly.
Note
Ensure components are
free from corrosion and
bottle stations (gears) spin
freely 2 -3 seconds then
slow to a smooth stop.
Note
Damaged bearings and
corroded components can
cause step loss errors.
3. Remove the gear screw. [2]
4. Lift the Gear [1] off the bottle seat

shaft by pulling it straight up.
5. Turn the carousel over and

remove the Bottle Seat or cup. [3]
Note
The bottle Seat may fall
out when the gear is
removed.
6. Remove the top bearing [4] using

a small bolt head then push out
the bottom bearing [4] from the
opposite side of the carousel.
Note
Tips to removing the
bearing:
Tap on the end of

the bottle seat shaft
gently to free the
bearing if stuck.
Work the Bearings

out gently to avoid
damage to the
bearing carousel
area.
A small flat blade

may be used
carefully to remove
the top bearing.
Replace the outer

carousel if the
bearing area is
damaged during to
prevent errors.
Remove
Support Wheels Note
(Only) If the support wheels are
damaged, the gear ring
may fall out when the
carousel Is removed.
1. Turn the carousel upside down to

access the gear.
2. Remove support wheels screws.
3. Remove gear ring. [1]
4. Remove support wheels (3). [2]
Replacement
Install Support
Wheels (Only)
1. Install 1 support wheel. [1]
2. Insert and position the gear

ring. [2]
3. Install the 2 remaining

support wheels.
Note
Check the support
wheels spin freely.
VIDEO
Install Dispersion Note
Station/ Gear (Only) Video contains no audio
And Grease Outer sound.
Reagent Carousel
And Install Reagent
Bottle Guide
Note
Dispersion Station
Replacement
1. Insert top and bottom bearing
pressing in on the metal,
outer area of the bearing
using only your fingers to
snap it fully into place.
Note
Ensure the bearings
seats so the rim rests
on the outer carousel.
Note
Use only finger
pressure on the outer
bearing metal, race
area to prevent inner
dust shield damage.
2. Turn the carousel upside

down so the bottom side is
up exposing the gear ring.
3. Insert the bottle seat shaft

through both bearings.
4. Align the gear [1] so the flat

side is down.
5. Slide the gear on the bottle

seat shaft so until the keyed
inner flat area of the gear [2]
and the shaft [3] matches.
The gear will seat flush to
the carousel bearing.
Note
Be sure to place the
gear onto the shaft
with the countersink
recess on the hub
facing up or errors
may occur.
Note
The gear has a "D"
shaped bore or inner
area [2] which is
keyed to match flat
area on the dispersion
bottle seat shaft. [3]
6. Insert a screw into the bottle

seat shaft [4] and tighten it to
the gear. Tighten the screw
until it is flush with the gear
hub. [5]
Note
Use only the screw
from the kit to ensure
the screw stays
securely tightened.
7. Spin the replaced bottle seat

position and ensure it spins
freely and quietly.
Note
If the bottle seat is
loose or wobbles
when spinning then
perform remove and
repeat steps 4-7.
Grease Outer
Reagent Carousel
1. Place a 1/8" (3.18mm) dot of
Aqua Lube or green grease
on every fifth gear. [1]
2. Rotate the metal ring gear 3

to 5 times. [2]
Install Reagent
Bottle Guide
1. Align the small hole on the
guide, near position 1, with
the reagent probe calibration
target.
2. Push down to lock the 4 tabs

into place. [1]
Note
Locking tabs are
located at positions 1,
25, 17, and 9.
VIDEO
Install Outer Note
Reagent Carousel Click the video and arrow
icon in the reference section
to access the video in D1.03
OUTER CAROUSEL action
section: "VIDEO - Install
Outer Reagent Carousel."
Note
Install Outer
Reagent Carousel
1. Pull the v-wheel release
(green) back and place the
rim of the carousel into the
2. Engage the two (2) motor

lever handles. [2]
VIDEO
Install Inner Reagent Note
Carousel Click the video and arrow
icon in the reference section
to access the video in D1.02
Inner Reagent Carousel
action section: "VIDEO
Install Inner Reagent
Carousel."
Note

Carousel
1. Push the v-wheel release
(green) [3] and place the rim
of the carousel into the

counterclockwise until the
lever handle stops. [2]
Install Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Install the reagent carousel
cover and tighten the three
(3) screws (non-captive). [1]
1. Power ON the processing
module.
For information on loading Reagents, refer to the ARCHITECT System
Note
The system control
center power must be
ON and at the
Snapshot screen prior
to turning on the
processing module for

module and sample handler
from Stopped to Ready.
3. Reload the reagents into the

reagent carousel.
4. Close the reagent cover.

cover and scan reagents.
1 3000 - Reagent Carousel Test Note: Check for smooth operation with the
Reagent
D2.01 COVER,REAGENT CAROUSEL Version - 96728-111_385_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203500-01 Reagent Cover- i2SR- Grey
7-76849-02 Cover, Reagent Carousel, IVDD
7-76849-03 Reagent Cover, with Background Attenuator
7-93777-01 Cover, i2000SR, Reagent Carousel
7-93777-02 Reagent Cover, with Background Attenuator (SR)
D2.01 COVER,REAGENT CAROUSEL
12 min
Time Required
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Reagent Note

place. [2]
the module. [3]
Note
Replacement
Install Reagent
Carousel Cover
captive). [1]
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
D2.03 LOUVER,REFRIGERATOR,RGNT Version - 96728-111_386_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203398-01 Louver- Reagent Cooler- Grey
7-76872-01 Louver, Refrigerator Reagent
D2.03 LOUVER,REFRIGERATOR,RGNT
10 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Reagent Note

2. Use the # 2 screwdriver to remove the three (3)
screws (non-captive) that secure the reagent
the module. [3]
Note
Remove
Reagent
1. Slide the louvers (2) out of the reagent
Refrigerator
refrigerator diffuser. [1]
Louver
Replacement
Install Reagent
Refrigerator Louver
1. Install the reagent refrigerator louver by
sliding it into the grooves on the
diffuser. [1]
2. Visually inspect to verify the louver is
properly seated.
Install Reagent
Carousel Cover
captive). [1]
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
D2.04 SENSOR,TEMP,REFRIGERATOR Version - 96728-111_387_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76867-01 Sensor, Temp, Refrigerator
D2.04 SENSOR,TEMP,REFRIGERATOR
13 min
Time Required
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
cover.
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover Note
Use caution when removing screws; they are

place. [2]
the module. [3]
Note
Remove
Refrigerator Note
Temperature Use caution when removing the screw; it is
Sensor not secured to the refrigerator temperature
sensor.
1. Locate the refrigerator temperature

sensor. [1]
2. Disconnect the refrigerator thermistor cable
W100 REFRIG THERM from the temperature
sensor. [2]
3. Use the # 1 screwdriver to remove the screw
(non-captive) securing the sensor to the bar
code reader bracket. [3]
Replacement
Install
Refrigerator
1. Place the sensor onto the reagent bar
Temperature
code bracket and install the screw. [1]
Sensor
Note
Orient the sensor so the sensor
cable is next to the connector.
2. Connect the refrigerator thermistor cable

W100 REFRIG THERM to the
temperature sensor. [2]
Install
Reagent
Carousel
Cover
captive). [1]
Note
initialization.

procedure.
carousel.
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
D2.06 DIFFUSER,REFRIGERATOR,RGNT (i2000 only) Version - 96728-111_390_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76878-01 Diffuser, Refrigerator, Rgnt
D2.06 DIFFUSER,REFRIGERATOR,RGNT (i2000 only)
30 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
refrigerator.
Note
removing reagents.

Remove
Reagent Note
Carousel Cover Use caution when removing screws; they are

place. [2]
the module. [3]
Note
Prepare Diffuser
for Removal
1. Disconnect the refrigerator thermistor cable
W100 REFRIG THERM from the temperature
sensor.
2. Locate the reagent bar code reader board
and loosen the two (2) thumbscrews to gain
access to the connector.
3. Lift the connector and slide the locking
mechanism to release the connector.
4. Disconnect the bar code reader cable W86
REAGENT BCR from the reader.
5. Using the #2 screwdriver, remove the three
(2) screws (non-captive) that secure the
diffuser in place.
Remove
Reagent Bar
1. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews that secure
Code Reader
the bar code reader bracket in place. [1]
Assembly
2. Lift the bar code reader and bracket out of
the module.
Remove
Reagent
1. Lift the diffuser up and out of the module.
Refrigerator
Diffuser
Replacement
Install Reagent
Refrigerator
1. Place the diffuser in the opening in the
Diffuser
center of the backplate, aligning the
screw holes.
2. Install the three (3) screws and tighten.
Install Reagent
Bar Code
1. Place the bar code reader and bracket
Reader
on the reagent refrigerator diffuser.
Assembly
3. Connect the bar code reader connector
Connect
Refrigerator
Temperature
Sensor
temperature sensor.
Install Reagent
Carousel
Cover
captive). [1]
Note
initialization.

procedure.
carousel.

errors.
2 3210 - Reagent Bar Code Calibration
D2.07 REFRIGERATOR,RGNT Version - 96728-111_391_2
List/Part Numbers
7-204847-01 Cooler Lift Kit - Depot
7-76850-01 Refrigerator, Rgnt
7-76850-02 Refrigerator with Replaceable Fan
7-76850-03 Refrigerator with Replaceable Fan (RoHS)
D2.07 REFRIGERATOR,RGNT
30 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Lifting Hazard
Note
The refrigerator weighs approximately 45 lb. (20 kg), obtain assistance when lifting or use an appropriate lifting device.
Removal

Preparation
Prepare to
Remove
1. Remove the power supply access
Reagent
panel.
Refrigerator
2. Remove the pump bay panel and
open the pump bay rack.
Remove
Reagent
1. Disconnect the power cable (220V)
Refrigerator
on the right side of the refrigerator
located in the pump bay area.
2. Lower the locking lever to the
bottom.
3. Place your foot on the left or right

extension on the locking lever to
secure the lever when pulling out
the refrigerator. [3]
4. Gently lift the handle so the back
wheels slide onto the locking lever
then pull out the unit, and remove
it from the module.
Caution
The unit is heavy and rolls Note
on four wheels. Video contains no audio sound.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Lift the refrigeration unit and roll it into
Refrigerator
the module.
2. Lock the cooling unit by lifting up the

locking lever so it is seated flush and
locks at the top.
3. Connect power cable (220V).
4. Close the pump bay.
5. Install the power supply access panel.
6. Install the pump bay panel.
Note
Note

Stopped to Ready.

errors.
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
E1.01 PROBE
Version - 96728-111_392_1
Part Number Description
08C94-42 Probe
Time Required 20 min.

Tools/Materials #2 Phillips screw driver (optional)
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal
Prerequisite 1. The processing module must be in For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Warming, or Ready status. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Preparation 1. Lift the appropriate processing center For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to
cover(s) to access the probe(s). the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10:
2. Locate the probe to be replaced on the Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
appropriate pipettor.
Refer to the processing center Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
map for pipettor locations (R1, R2,
S, or ST).
3. Verify the probe is over the wash station.

To move the reagent probe over
the wash station, perform a Startup
on the appropriate module, and go
to Remove Probe.
To move the sample probe over
the wash station, go to Step4.
4. Select the Pipettors category from the
diagnostic screen under the system icon.
5. Initiate diagnostic procedure 1160 Pipettor
Move to move the sample probe over the
wash station.
Remove 1. Place an absorbent towel under the
Probe probe tubing connection.
2. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe and
remove the probe tubing from the
probe. [1]
3. Carefully loosen the screw (captive) on
top of the probe clamp until resistance is
felt. [2]
Note
A #2 Phillips screwdriver can be
used to loosen the screw.
Note
Loosening the captive screw
beyond the point of resistance can
cause the clip to fall apart.
4. Push up on the blue button located under

the boom arm. [3]
5. Swing the probe free of the clip, lift the
probe and remove it from the boom
arm. [4]
Replacement
Install 1. Slide the probe into the boom

Probe arm. [1]
2. Swing the probe to the probe clip
and snap it in place under the
clip. [2]
3. Tighten the screw (captive) on top
of the probe clamp. [3]
Note
A #2 Phillips screwdriver may
be used to tighten the screw.
Do not overtighten as
stripping may result.
4. Connect the probe tubing to the

probe and finger tighten the probe
fitting. [4]
5. To return the sample pipettor to the
home position, complete diagnostic
procedure 1160 Pipettor Move.
Prepare 1. Select As Needed category from the For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to the
for maintenance screen under the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
Operation system icon. Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
2. Perform maintenance procedure
2130 Flush Fluids, to remove any
air that may be present.
3. Visually check for leaks while
performing the flush.
Note
If leaks are seen, repeat the
installation procedure.
4. Remove the absorbent towel.

cover(s).
Verification
Option Description Order VP Description VP Detail VP Note
released Operation and Service Procedures.
If the system/instrument produces results,
E1.02 TUBING,PROBE Version - 96728-111_410_1
List/Part Numbers
03M77-49 Probe Tubing, STAT
08C94-49 Probe Tubing
7-78538-01 Tubing, Probe
7-93967-01 Probe Tubing, STAT
E1.02 TUBING,PROBE
10 min.
Time Required
Tools/Materials None
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

System status.
Warming, or Ready status.
Preparation For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer

Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
cover(s) to access the probe(s).
2. Locate the desired probe tubing on the
appropriate pipettor.
System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
Note Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
for pipettor locations (R1, R2, S, or For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the
ST). ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
3. Verify the probe is over the wash station.
To move the reagent probe over

the wash station, perform a Startup
on the appropriate module, and go
to Remove Probe Tubing.
To move the sample or STAT
probe over the wash station, go to
Step4.
4. Select the Pipettors category from the

diagnostic screen under the system icon.
5. Initiate diagnostic procedure 1160 Pipettor
Move to move the sample probe over the
wash station.
Remove
Probe
1. Place an absorbent towel under the probe
Tubing
tubing connection.
remove the probe tubing from the
probe. [1]
3. Drain any fluid from the probe tubing onto
an absorbent towel.
4. Unclip the probe tubing from the tubing
routing clips. [2]
5. Place an absorbent towel near the tubing
connection at the pressure monitor. [3]
6. Remove the pressure monitor from the
clips on the pipettor.
7. Disconnect the tubing connection at the
pressure monitor. [3]
8. Remove the probe tubing from the module.
Replacement
Install
Probe
1. Place the tubing into the routing
Tubing
clips. [1]
Note
Support the boom arm when
replacing the tubing to
prevent it from moving.

pressure monitor. [2]
3. Place the pressure monitor onto the
clips on the pipettor.
4. Connect the opposite end of the
probe tubing to the probe and finger
tighten the probe fitting. [3]
5. To return the sample, or STAT
pipettor to the home position,
complete diagnostic procedure 1160
Pipettor Move.
Prepare For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to the

for ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. Select As Needed category from the
Operation Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
maintenance screen under the
system icon.
2130 Flush Fluids, to remove any air
that may be present.
Note

cover(s).
reserved.
E1.03 CABLE,PIPETTOR,LLS & Z Version - 96728-111_399_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78537-01 Cable, Main Pipettor, LLS and Z
7-93958-01 Cable,STAT Pipettor,LLS and Crash Det
E1.03 CABLE,PIPETTOR,LLS & Z
20 min
Time Required
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to

the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9:
replacement.
access the pipettor(s).
3. Locate the LLS& Z pipettor cable (on the
appropriate pipettor). [1]
Note
pipettor locations (R1, R2, or S).

cover(s).
Remove
LLS and Z
1. While supporting the front of the boom arm and
Pipettor
probe clip, use the #1 Phillips screwdriver to
Cable
loosen (do not remove) the screw (non-captive)
securing the LLS spade connector, and slide the
LLS spade connector away from the screw. [1]
2. Locate and disengage the connector on the Z
limit board (underneath the boom arm). [2]
3. Remove the black, snap-in molded piece from
the top of the boom arm. [3]
4. With the cable on top of the boom arm, guide
the connector up through the hole in the boom
arm.
5. Disconnect the LLS and Z limit cables at the
rear of the pipettor. [4]
Note
To disconnect the LLS cable slightly
separate the connector tabs (in the
vertical direction) and pull apart (in the
horizontal direction).
6. Unclip the cable from the routing clips on the

pipettor and boom arm. [5]
7. While supporting the boom arm, remove the LLS
and Z limit cable from the pipettor.
Replacement
Install LLS
and Z
1. Loop the LLS and Z cable around the pipettor
Pipettor
aligning the silver bands on the cable to the
Cable
cable clips on the pipettor and boom arm. [1]
2. Clip the cable to the pipettor routing clips. [2]
3. Connect the LLS and Z limit cables to the rear
of the pipettor. [3]
4. Clip the cable to the boom arm routing
clips. [4]
5. Guide the cable connector through the hole in
the boom arm.
6. Place the snap-in molded piece into the top of
the boom arm. [5]
7. Support the front of the boom arm and probe
clip and press on the black, snap-in molded
piece until it seats properly in place on the
boom arm.
8. Orient the Z limit connector with the locking
mechanism facing down and slide the
connector into place. [6]
9. Slide the LLS spade connector between the
washer and the probe clip, and tighten the
screw. [7]

for ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
Operation instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
cover(s).
Note
initialization.

1 3600 - LLS Test
reserved.
E1.04 KIT,PROBE BLOCK Version - 96728-111_388_2
List/Part Numbers
7-78225-01 Probe Block Kit
7-94016-01 Board, Z-Limit, STAT
E1.04 KIT,PROBE BLOCK
20 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

Preparation For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting
and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
cover(s) to access the probe(s).
2. Locate the probe to be replaced on For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
the appropriate pipettor. System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
Note
map for pipettor locations (R1,
R2, S, or ST).
3. Verify the probe is over the wash
station to prevent leaks.
To move the reagent probe

over the wash station, perform
a Startup on the appropriate
module, and go to Remove
Probe.
To move the sample probe

over the wash station, go to
Step4.
4. Select the Pipettors category from

the diagnostic screen under the
system icon.
5. Initiate diagnostic procedure 1160

Pipettor Move to move the sample
probe over the wash station.
Remove
Probe
1. Place an absorbent towel under the
probe tubing connection.
.
2. Carefully loosen the screw (captive)
on top of the probe clamp until
resistance is felt. [2]
Note
A #2 Phillips screwdriver can
be used to loosen the screw.
Note
Loosening the captive screw
beyond the point of resistance
can cause the clip to fall apart.
3. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
and remove the probe tubing from Note
the probe. [1] Video contains no audio sound.
Note
4. Push up on the blue button (blue
Video shows R2 probe.
thumbscrew) located under the boom
arm. [3]
5. Swing the probe free of the clip, lift

the probe and remove it from the
boom arm. [4]
Remove
Pipettor
1. Loosen the LLS ground strap or
Arm
cable screw and slide the ground
wire free.
2. Remove the top 2 screws (non-

captive) securing the arm and lift the
arm off the pipettor. [1]
Remove
Probe
1. Turn the arm upside down.
Block
2. Loosen and remove the probe block
blue thumbscrew. [1]
3. Hold the probe block in place on the

top and bottom of the arm and turn
the arm to the side.
4. Covering the bottom of the probe

block area with one finger to prevent
parts from falling out. [2]
5. Slide the probe block up and out of

the arm.
Note
If the bottom of the probe
block is left open when it is
removed, the spring and flag
will fall out freely.
6. Remove the contact block (crash

flag) and spring. [3]
Note
The spring will slide out when
the flag is removed.
Replacement
Install
Probe
1. Hold the arm so the opening for the
Block
probe block is horizontal.[1]
2. Insert the spring into the bottom. [2]
3. Insert the contact block so the crash

flag slides into the sensor. [3]
Note
The flag should insert upward
and into the sensor.
4. Install the probe block through the top

of the arm opening.
5. Tighten the blue thumbscrew on the

bottom of the probe block to prevent
loosening. [4]
Note
Note Video contains no audio sound.
The Blue thumbscrew should be Note
flat at the bottom of the arm. Video shows R2 probe.
Install
Pipettor
1. Place the arm on the pipettor.
Arm
2. Secure the arm with 2 screws and
includes screw contains tubing
guide. [1]
3. Place the star washer then the flat

washer on the ground strap screw then
insert the screw into the side LLS
ground screw location. [2]
4. Insert the LLS cable ground or spade

lug for the LLS cable between the flat
washer and the probe clip. Tighten the
screw.
Install
Probe
1. Slide the probe into the boom arm. [1]
2. Swing the probe to the probe clip and

snap it in place under the clip. [2]
3. Tighten the screw (captive) on top of

the probe clamp. [3]
Note
A #2 Phillips screwdriver may be
used to tighten the screw.
Note
Over-tightening the LLS ground
screw may cause LLS errors.
4. Connect the probe tubing to the probe

and finger tighten the probe fitting. [4]
5. To return the sample pipettor to the

home position, complete diagnostic
procedure 1160 Pipettor Move.
Prepare For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to

for the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
icon.
2. Perform maintenance procedure 2130

Flush Fluids, to remove any air that
may be present.

Note
1 3600 - LLS Test
reserved.
E1.05A PIPETTOR (i2000) Version - 96728-111_393_3
List/Part Numbers
7-201734-01 Umbrella, R2 pipettor
7-78479-02 Pipettor
E1.05A PIPETTOR (i2000)
1.0 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials #2 Phillips screwdriver - minimum 13" (33cm) length
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation For further information on performing diagnostic

procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
Subsection: System diagnostics.
2. Locate the pipettor.
Note For further information on removal of internal covers, refer

Refer to the processing center map for to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9:
pipettor locations (R1, R2, S, or ST). Service and maintenance, Subsection: Component
replacement.
3. Verify the probe is over the wash station. If it is
not over the wash station, move it to that position.
cover(s).
Remove
Probe
1. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tubing
connection.
2. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe and remove
the probe tubing from the probe. [1]
3. Carefully loosen the screw (captive) on top of the
probe clamp until resistance is felt. [2]
Note
A #2 Phillips screwdriver can be used to
loosen the screw.
Note
Loosening the captive screw beyond the
point of resistance can cause the clip to fall
apart.
4. Push up on the blue button located under the

boom arm. [3]
5. Swing the probe free of the clip, lift the probe and
remove it from the boom arm. [4]
Remove
Probe
1. Drain any fluid from the probe tubing onto an
Tubing
absorbent towel.
2. Unclip the probe tubing from the tubing routing
clip on top of the boom arm.
connection at the pressure monitor.
4. Disconnect the tubing connection at the pressure
monitor.
Unclip
Pressure
1. Remove the pressure monitor from the clip on the
Monitor
pipettor.
2. Remove the pressure monitor cables from the
routing clip.
Remove
LLS and Z
Pipettor
Cable
3. Remove the black, snap-in molded piece from the
top of the boom arm. [3]
4. With the cable on top of the boom arm, guide the
connector up through the hole in the boom arm.
5. Disconnect the LLS and Z limit cables at the rear
Note
separate the connector tabs (in the vertical
direction) and pull apart (in the horizontal
direction).

Remove
Boom Arm
1. While supporting the pipettor under the boom
Assembly
arm, remove the two (2) screws (non-captive) that
secure the boom arm and cable routing features
to the pipettor.
Note
Do not drop the screws into the module.
2. Lift and remove the boom arm from the pipettor.
Remove
Pipettor
1. Disconnect the Theta and Z home sensor cables
Assembly
and remove from the routing clip.
2. Loosen the four (4) screws (captive) securing the
pipettor to the baseplate.
Note
A ground strap is connected to one of the
four (4) screws. Remove the ground strap
when the screw is loosened.
3. Lift the pipettor off the two guide pins.

4. Disconnect the Theta and Z motor cables.
Note
Do not let the Theta and Z motor
connectors fall into the module.
5. Remove the pipettor from the module.
Replacement
Install
Pipettor
1. Connect the Theta and Z motor cables.
Assembly
2. Feed the cables into the pipettor mount and
position the pipettor on the two guide pins.
3. Align and tighten the four securing screws and
ground strap.
4. Connect the Theta and Z home sensor cables
and place the cable in the routing clip.
Install
Boom Arm
1. Place the screws in the cable routing clips and
Assembly
in the boom arm holes.
2. While supporting the pipettor, place the boom
arm on the pipettor and tighten the screws.
Install LLS
and Z
1. Loop the LLS and Z cable around the pipettor
Pipettor
aligning the silver bands on the cable to the
Cable
cable clips on the pipettor and boom arm. [1]
2. Clip the cable to the pipettor routing clips. [2]
3. Connect the LLS and Z limit cables to the rear
4. Clip the cable to the boom arm routing clips. [4]
5. Guide the cable connector through the hole in
the boom arm.
6. Place the snap-in molded piece into the top of
the boom arm. [5]
probe clip, press on the black snap-in molded
piece until it seats properly in place on the
boom arm.
mechanism facing down and slide the
connector into place. [6]
9. Slide the LLS spade connector between the
washer and the probe clip, and tighten the
screw. [7]
Install
Probe
1. Place the tubing into the routing clips. [1]
Tubing
2. Connect the probe tubing to the pressure
monitor. [2]
Install
Probe
2. Swing the probe to the probe clip and snap it in
place under the clip. [2]
3. Tighten the screw (captive) on top of the probe
clamp. [3]
Note
A #2 Phillips screwdriver may be used to
tighten the screw.
4. Connect the probe tubing to the probe and

finger tighten the probe fitting. [4].

Note

3. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids and visually check
for leaks before removing the absorbent towel.
cover(s).
reserved.
E1.05B Pipettor (i2000SR) Version - 96728-111_4839_1
List/Part Numbers
7-201734-01 Umbrella, R2 pipettor
7-78479-02 Pipettor
E1.05B PIPETTOR (i2000SR)
1.0 hr
Time Required
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation For further information on performing diagnostic

Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
2. Locate the pipettor.
Note For further information on removal of internal covers, refer

Refer to the processing center map for to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9:
pipettor locations (R1, R2, S, or ST). Service and maintenance, Subsection: Component
replacement.
3. Verify the probe is over the wash station. If it is
not over the wash station, move it to that position.
cover(s).
Access
Probe
1. Access the desired probe.
If STAT, go to Remove STAT Pressure

Monitor Board (i2000SR).
If R1, R2, or S, go to Remove Probe.
Remove
STAT
1. Disconnect the pipettor sensor [1] cable from the
Pressure
STAT pressure monitor board on the front of the
Monitor
hopper.
Board
2. Disconnect W29 STAT PRESSURE MONITOR
cable. [3]
3. Slide the board up and out of its bracket. [2]
Remove
Hopper
1. Remove the hopper baffle by lifting up and out of
Baffle and
the module. [1]
RVs
2. Remove all RVs from the hopper and place the
RVs in a lint free container.
Disconnect
Hopper
1. Disconnect the W62 HOP SNSR at top left side
Sensor
of hopper. [2]
Cables
Remove
Hopper Note
Use caution when loosening the screws; they are
not secured to the RV loader or hopper
assembly.
1. Loosen (do not remove) the two (2) screws (non-

captive) securing the hopper to the RV loader. [3]
Note
Inside the hopper, at the bottom of the RV
loader opening, there is a plastic foot (2)
that is engaged with the RV loader.
2. Pull the bottom left wall of the hopper away from

the RV loader while lifting the hopper out of the
process module.
Note
The loosened screw and washer must
clear the keyholes in the hopper. [1]
Remove
Probe
connection.
2. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe and remove
the probe tubing from the probe. [1]
3. Carefully loosen the screw (captive) on top of the
probe clamp until resistance is felt. [2]
Note
loosen the screw.
Note
point of resistance can cause the clip to fall
apart.

boom arm. [3]
5. Swing the probe free of the clip, lift the probe and
remove it from the boom arm. [4]
Remove
Probe
1. Drain any fluid from the probe tubing onto an
Tubing
absorbent towel.
clip on top of the boom arm.
connection at the pressure monitor.
4. Disconnect the tubing connection at the pressure
monitor.
Unclip
Pressure
1. Remove the pressure monitor from the clip on the
Monitor
pipettor.
2. Remove the pressure monitor cables from the
routing clip.
Remove
LLS and Z
Pipettor
Cable
3. Remove the black, snap-in molded piece from the
4. With the cable on top of the boom arm, guide the
connector up through the hole in the boom arm.
5. Disconnect the LLS and Z limit cables at the rear
Note
separate the connector tabs (in the vertical
direction) and pull apart (in the horizontal
direction).
Note
If removing the STAT pipettor, do not
remove W42 STAT LLS and W43 STAT
PROBE CRASH at this time.

Remove
Boom Arm
Assembly
arm, remove the two (2) screws (non-captive) that
secure the boom arm and cable routing features
to the pipettor.
Note
Remove
Pipettor
Assembly
Note

Note
Remove
Grounding
1. Ground gaskets are between the base of the
Gaskets
pipettor and its mounting surface on the process
path.
Replacement
Install Grounding
96188 Gaskets
1. Remove all residue from the previous
gaskets.
2. Use DI water to clean the process area
mounting surface.
3. Dry the mounting surface.
4. Peel off the adhesive surface cover from a
new 96188 gasket.
5. With the adhesive surface down, center
the gasket over the hole for the mounting
screw and press it firmly into place.
6. Repeat for the three other mounting holes.
Install Pipettor
Assembly
1. Connect the Theta and Z motor cables.
2. Feed the cables into the pipettor mount
and position the pipettor on the two guide
pins.
3. Align and tighten the four securing screws
and ground strap.
4. Connect the Theta and Z home sensor
cables and place the cable in the routing
clip.
Install Boom Arm
Assembly
1. Place the screws in the cable routing clips
and in the boom arm holes.
2. While supporting the pipettor, place the
boom arm on the pipettor and tighten the
screws.
Install LLS and Z

Pipettor Cable
1. Loop the LLS and Z cable around the
pipettor aligning the silver bands on the
cable to the cable clips on the pipettor
and boom arm. [1]
2. Clip the cable to the pipettor routing
clips. [2]
3. Connect the LLS and Z limit cables to the
rear of the pipettor. [3]
4. Clip the cable to the boom arm routing
clips. [4]
5. Guide the cable connector through the
hole in the boom arm.
6. Place the snap-in molded piece into the
7. While supporting the front of the boom
arm and probe clip, press on the black
snap-in molded piece until it seats
properly in place on the boom arm.
8. Orient the Z limit connector with the
locking mechanism facing down and slide
the connector into place. [6]
9. Slide the LLS spade connector between
the washer and the probe clip, and tighten
the screw. [7]
Install Probe
Tubing
1. Place the tubing into the routing clips. [1]
2. Connect the probe tubing to the pressure
monitor. [2]
Install Probe
2. Swing the probe to the probe clip and
snap it in place under the clip. [2]
3. Tighten the screw (captive) on top of the
probe clamp. [3]
Note
A #2 Phillips screwdriver may be
used to tighten the screw.
4. Connect the probe tubing to the probe

and finger tighten the probe fitting. [4].
For STAT
Pipettor Only,
Install Hopper
loader assembly.
Note
wall.

5. Tighten the two (2) screws (non-
captive). [3]
For STAT
Pipettor Only,
1. Connect the W62 HOP SNSR at top left
Connect Hopper
side of hopper. [2]
Sensor Cables
For STAT
Pipettor Only,
1. Slide the baffle through the groove located
Install Hopper
in the hopper.
Baffle
2. Verify the baffle sits flush with the top of
the hopper.
Note
result in jamming the RV loader.
Install STAT
Pressure Monitor
1. Connect W29 STAT PRESSURE
Board
MONITOR cable to the STAT pressure
monitor board. [1]
2. Connect the pipettor pressure sensor
cable. [2]
3. Slide the board into the bracket on the

Note and shutdown.
initialization.

3. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids and visually
check for leaks before removing the
absorbent towel.
cover(s).
reserved.
E1.06 BD,SENSOR #12 Version - 96728-111_394_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76500-01 BD, Sensor #12
7-76500-02 Bd, Sensor #12 (RoHS)
E1.06 BD,SENSOR #12
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
access the pipettor boom arm.
3. Position the probe so that the home flag is clear
of the sensor.
4. Disconnect the pipettor home sensor cable from
the board. [1]
Remove
Pipettor
1. Loosen the two (2) screws (non-captive) that
Sensor #12
secure the sensor board. Use your fingers to
unscrew the final turns and remove the screws.
Note
The pipettor may need to be removed to
gain access to the two (2) screws on
pipettor sensor #12.
Note
2. Remove the pipettor sensor #12 from the

pipettor.
Replacement
Install
Pipettor
1. Place the pipettor sensor #12 into place
Sensor #12
and align the screws holes.
Note
Orient the cable connector toward
the cable.
2. Use your fingers to insert the screws for

the first few turns.
3. Tighten the screws to secure the board.
4. Connect the cable to the home sensor
board.
Note
initialization.


errors.
reserved.
E1.07 BOOM ARM,ASM Version - 96728-111_377_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78525-01 Boom Arm ASM
7-93961-01 Boom Arm Assembly, STAT
E1.07 BOOM ARM,ASM
14 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
3. Locate the boom arm (on the appropriate
pipettor). [1]
Note
pipettor locations (R1, R2, S, or ST).
4. Verify the probe is positioned above the wash
station.
Remove
Probe
Assembly
connection.
remove the probe tubing from the probe. [1]
3. Carefully loosen the screw (captive) on top of
the probe clamp until resistance is felt. [2]
Note
loosen the screw.
Note
point of resistance can cause the clip to
fall apart.

boom arm. [3]
5. Swing the probe free of the clip, lift the probe
and remove it from the boom arm. [4]
Remove
Probe
Tubing
clip on top of the boom arm. [1]
Remove
Pipettor Note
LLS and Z Use caution when loosening the screw, it is not
Limit Cable secured to the boom arm.

securing the LLS spade connector and slide the
limit board underneath the boom arm. [3]
3. Remove the black, snap-in molded piece from
the top of the boom arm. [4]
4. With the cable on top of the boom arm, guide
the connector up through the hole in the boom
arm.
5. Unclip the cable from the routing clip on the
boom arm. [5]
Remove
Boom Arm Note
Assembly Use caution when loosening the screws, they
are not secured to the boom arm.

arm, remove the two (2) screws (non-captive)
that secure the boom arm and cable routing
features to the pipettor. [1]
Replacement
Install
Boom
1. Place the screws in the cable routing clips and in
Arm
the boom arm holes.
Assembly
2. While supporting the pipettor, place the boom arm
on the pipettor and tighten the screws. [1]
Install Z-
Limit
1. Clip the cable to the boom arm routing clip. [1]
Cable
2. Guide the cable connector through the hole in the
boom arm.
3. Place the black snap-in molded piece into the top
of the boom arm. [2]
probe clip, press on the black, snap-in molded
piece until it seats properly in place on the boom
arm.
mechanism facing down and slide the connector
into place. [3]
6. Slide the LLS spade connector under the screw and
the washer on the probe clip, and use the #1
Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screw. [4]
Install
Probe Note
and A new probe should be installed if the boom arm
Probe was replaced for a probe movement restriction
Tubing error. The quality of a probe damaged during a Z-
axis crash cannot be determined visually or by
diagnostics.

2. Swing the probe to the probe clip and snap it in
place under the clip. [2]
3. Tighten the screw (captive) on top of the probe
clamp. [3]
Note
A #2 Phillips screwdriver may be used to
tighten the screw.
4. Inspect probe tubing and connector for kinks or
wear.
Note
Install new tubing if required.
5. Place the probe tubing into the routing clip.

6. Connect the probe tubing to the probe and finger
tighten the probe fitting. [4]

Note and shutdown.
ON prior to turning on the processing module
for proper initialization.

Startup procedure.
reserved.
E1.08 BD,SENSOR #13 Version - 96728-111_395_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76510-01 BD, Sensor #13
7-76510-02 BD, Sensor #13 (RoHS)
E1.08 BD,SENSOR #13
1.0 hr
Time Required
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
3. Locate the boom arm (on the appropriate
pipettor).
Note
pipettor locations (R1, R2, or S)
4. To gain access to the boom arm on the sample

pipettor, remove its internal cover by pulling up.
Note
For further information on removal of
internal covers, refer to the ARCHITECT
System Operations Manual, Section 9:
Service and maintenance, Subsection:

station.
Remove
Pipettor
Assembly
Note

Note
Remove
Sensor
1. Remove the three (3) screws securing the sensor
Board #13
board to the pipettor.
Replacement
Install
Sensor
1. Align the sensor board so that it
Board #13
straddles the Theta flag.
2. Install the three (3) screws through the
side of the robot arm.
Install
Pipettor
1. Connect the Theta and Z motor
Assembly
cables.
2. Feed the cables into the pipettor
mount and position the pipettor on the
two guide pins.
3. Align and tighten the four securing
screws and ground strap.
4. Connect the home sensor cables and
place the cable in the routing clip.

Note
The system control center For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to
power must be ON prior to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
turning on the processing Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.

procedure.
icon.
may be present.
Note
reserved.
E2.01 BD,ANTENNA,LLS,R1 Version - 96728-111_396_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78720-01 Antenna, R1
7-94047-01 Bd, Antenna, LLS, R1/R2, i2000SR
7-94047-02 Bd, Antenna, LLS, R1/R2, i2000SR ( RoHS)
E2.01 BD,ANTENNA,LLS,R1
20 min
Time Required
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
2. This procedure includes removal and
replacement instructions for both R1 and R2
LLS Antenna boards. Follow only the
instructions for the position you are replacing.
Preparation
to access the reagent refrigerator.
the reagents, rotate the reagent carousel if
refrigerator.
Remove
Reagent Note

the module. [3]
Note
Remove
Inner
Reagent
Carousel
Remove
Outer
1. Push the motor lever handle back.
Reagent
2. Rotate the dispersion motor handle 90 degrees.
Carousel
3. While pushing the green v-wheel lever handle
back, lift and remove the outer reagent carousel
from the module.
Remove R1
Reagent LLS
1. Remove the four (4) screws that secure the
Antenna
LLS antenna board to the recessed mounting
Board
receptacle.
2. Remove the six (6) screws that secure the R1
(3-position) antenna flex circuit to the mounting
blocks.
3. Lift up on the antenna board and rotate it 90° to
access the reagent antenna plug (between the
baseplate and connector). Remove the plug, if
necessary, and set aside.
4. Lift out the LLS antenna board from recessed
mounting receptacle.
5. Disconnect (W72) LLS antenna cable from
antenna board connector J1.
6. Disconnect (W73) LLS power cable from
antenna board connector J2
7. Disconnect (W146) LLS antenna cable from
antenna board connector J3
8. Disconnect (W147) LLS power cable from
9. Grasp the 3-position LLS flex circuit near the
10. Grasp the LLS antenna board with other hand
and pull out the R1 (3-position) LLS flex circuit
from connector J5.
Replacement
Install R1
Reagent
1. Ensuring proper orientation, push the R1 (3-
LLS
position) LLS flex circuit into the antenna board
Antenna
connector J5.
Board
2. Connect (W72) LLS antenna cable to antenna
board connector J1.
3. Connect (W73) LLS power cable to antenna board
connector J2.
4. Connect (W146) LLS antenna cable to antenna
board connector J3.
5. Connect (W147) LLS power cable to antenna board
connector J4.
6. Place LLS antenna flex circuit board into recessed
7. Secure board with four (4) screws.
8. Align mounting holes on the LLS flex circuit cable
and mounting blocks.
9. Insert all six (6) screws.
Note
Do not tighten screws until all six (6) screws
are inserted.
10. Tighten the six (6) screws that secure the antenna
flex circuit to mounting blocks.
11. Verify proper antenna ground connection by
measuring the resistance between the antenna
ground connection and comparing the reading with
a known good ground (pipettor frame, or process
path mounting screw).
Install
Outer
1. Pull the green v-wheel handle back and place the
Reagent
rim of the carousel into the groove of each v-wheel.
Carousel
2. Engage the motor lever handle.
Install
Inner
1. Push the v-wheel release (green) and place the rim
Reagent
of the carousel into the groove of each v-wheel. [1]
Carousel

Note and shutdown.
ON prior to turning on the processing For information on loading reagents, refer to the
module for proper initialization. ARCHITECT i System Operations Manual, Section 5:
management.
3. Verify the position of the sample pipettor allows
loading of reagents.
three (3) non-captive screws.
reserved.
E2.02 BD,ANTENNA,LLS,R2 Version - 96728-111_397_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78715-01 Antenna, R2
7-94047-01 Bd, Antenna, LLS, R1/R2, i2000SR
7-94047-02 Bd, Antenna, LLS, R1/R2, i2000SR ( RoHS)
E2.02 BD,ANTENNA,LLS,R2
20 min
Time Required
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
access the antenna flex circuit.
reagents, rotate the reagent carousel if
Remove
Reagent Note

module. [3]
Note
Remove
Inner
Reagent
Carousel
the module. [3]
Remove
Outer
1. Push the motor lever handle back.
Reagent
2. While pulling the v-wheel lever handle back, lift
Carousel
module.
Remove R2
Antenna
1. Remove the screws (four (4)-i2000; ten (10)
Flex Circuit
i2000SR) that secure the antenna flex circuit
board to the mounting blocks.
2. Remove the foam plug (93871).
3. Lift out the antenna board from recessed
4. Slowly pull the antenna up to gain access to the
connectors.
5. Place a piece of tape around the cables to hold
them up.
6. Disconnect the following:
J1 - W77 ANT
J3 - R2 ANT.R48SR (i2000SR only)
J4 - W39 / W175 ANT PWR
Replacement
Install R2
Antenna
1. Ensuring proper orientation, push the R2
Flex Circuit
(single position) LLS flex circuit into the
Board
2. Place reagent LLS antenna board into
recessed mounting receptacle.
3. Secure board with four (4) screws.
4. Align LLS antenna flex circuit mounting
hole with the hole on the mounting block
5. Insert and tighten the screw.
Install Outer
Reagent
1. Pull the v-wheel handle back and place
Carousel
the rim of the carousel into the groove of
each v-wheel.
2. Engage the motor lever handle.
Install Inner
Reagent
Carousel
stops. [2]
Note
The system control center power For information on loading reagents, refer to the ARCHITECT
must be ON prior to turning on the i System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
processing module for proper Subsection: Reagent inventory management.
initialization.

procedure.
provides adequate clearance for loading
of reagents.
carousel.
tighten the three (3) non-captive screws.
reserved.
E2.05 BD,ANTENNA,LLS,RV1/2 Version - 96728-111_366_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78595-02 LLS Antenna, RV 1-2 and STAT
7-78595-03 LLS Antenna, RV 1-2 and STAT (RoHS)
E2.05 BD,ANTENNA,LLS,RV1/2
Not Assessed
Time Required
Caution
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
cover(s) to access the RV 1/2 LLS antenna
board.
Remove
RV1/2 and
1. Locate the RV1/2 antenna board on the left
RV2 Antenna
2. Remove the screw (non-captive) securing the
plastic splash cover to the RV1/2 antenna
board.
3. Remove the splash cover.
4. Disconnect P1 RV1 LLS antenna cable W145
from J1 on the antenna board.
5. Disconnect P2 RV 2 LLS power W147 from
J2 on the antenna board.
6. Disconnect P5 RV1 LLS antenna cable W145
7. Remove the screw (non-captive) securing the
antenna to the mounting posts.
Note
A ground strap is connected to the
screw. The ground strap is removed
when the screw is removed.
8. Remove the RV1/2 and RV2 antenna from

the processing module.
Replacement
Install
RV1/2
1. Slide the antenna board under the process path,
and RV2
connectors side up, and align the screw holes to the
Antenna
mounting posts.
2. Install the screw and ground wire to the board.
Note
Slide the ground strap spade connector under the
screw closest to the left wall before the screw is
tightened completely.
3. Verify proper antenna ground connection by measuring the

resistance between the antenna ground connection and
comparing the reading with a known good ground (pipettor
frame, or process path mounting screw).
4. Connect P1 RV1 LLS antenna cable W145 to J1 on the
antenna board.
5. Connect P2 RV 2 LLS power W147 to J2 on the antenna
board.
6. Connect P5 RV1 LLS antenna cable W145 to J5 on the
antenna board.
7. Slide the plastic splash cover over the antenna and secure
with a screw.

Operation Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
Note pause, and shutdown.
The system control center power must be ON prior
to turning on the processing module for proper
initialization.

Startup procedure.

errors.
3 3600 - LLS Test
reserved.
E2.06 BD,ANTENNA,LLS,SH Version - 96728-111_398_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78570-01 Bd, Antenna, LLS, SH
7-78570-03 LLS Antenna, Sample Handler
7-78570-04 LLS Antenna, Sample Handler (RoHS)
E2.06 BD,ANTENNA,LLS,SH
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Locate the appropriate sample or
STAT antenna.
cover(s) to access the sample
handler LLS antenna board.
Remove Center For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the
Internal Cover ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. Remove the screw (non-captive) on
the center internal cover.
2. Tilt up and slide the cover from
between the right and left internal
covers.
Access the
antenna
1. At the sample handler, open the
appropriate sample handler cover.
Note
For additional access the
sample cover can be removed
2. For the i2000SR at the appropriate

RSH aspirate cover, remove the four
screws securing it to the front panel
Remove
Appropriate
1. For the i2000 system, loosen the
Sample Handler
thumbscrew securing the bar code
LLS Antenna
reader cover to the frame.
2. For the i2000 system, remove the
cover from the frame to allow access
to the sample handler LLS antenna
board.
3. Remove the antenna board from the
processing module by pulling out on
the black retaining pin. [1]
For sample pipettor

disconnect the following:
Disconnect P1 sample
LLS antenna cable
W67 from J1 on the
antenna board.
LLS power cable W68
from J2 on the antenna
board.
Disconnect P3 RV 24
to sample LLS antenna
cable W122 from J3 on
the antenna board.
to RV24 LLS power
cable W123 from J4 on
the antenna board.
For STAT pipettor disconnect

the following:
Disconnect P1 STAT
LLS antenna cable
W64 from J1 on the
antenna board.
Disconnect P2 STAT
LLS power cable W97
from J2 on the antenna
board.
Replacement

Install
Sample
1. For sample pipettor:
Handler LLS
Antenna Connect P1 sample LLS antenna
cable W67 to J1 on the antenna
board.
Connect P2 sample LLS power
cable W68 to J2 on the antenna
board.
Connect P3 RV 24 to sample LLS
antenna cable W122 to J3 on the
antenna board.
Connect P4 sample to RV24 LLS
power cable W123 to J4 on the
antenna board.
2. For STAT pipettor:
Connect P1 STAT LLS antenna

cable W64 from J1 on the
antenna board.
Connect P2 STAT LLS power
cable W97 from J2 on the
antenna board.
3. Carefully set the bottom of the board into

the guides and press the top forward
until the retaining pin can be installed.
4. For the i2000 system, place the bar code
reader cover on the frame and tighten
the thumbscrew.
Note
Verify that the cables are not
crimped by the cover when
installing.
5. For the i2000SR, using the four screws

removed install the RSH aspirate cover,
Install For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the

Center ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. With the cover tilted up place the guide
Internal maintenance, Subsection: Component replacement.
tabs under the left and right internal
Cover
covers.
2. Tilt the cover down and align the screw
hole.
3. Replace the screw connecting the cover
to the frame.
Note
initialization.
procedure.

errors.
3 3610 - Sample Handler LLS Test
reserved.
E2.07 BD,ANTENNA,LLS,RV24 Version - 96728-111_400_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78575-01 Bd, Antenna, LLS, RV24
7-78575-02 LLS Antenna, RV 24
E2.07 BD,ANTENNA,LLS,RV24
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
RV24 LLS
Antenna
access the RV 24 LLS antenna board. [1]
2. Remove the screw (non-captive) securing
the plastic splash cover to the RV24
antenna board.
3. Remove the splash cover.
4. Disconnect P1 RV24 LLS antenna cable
W122 from J1 on the antenna board.
5. Disconnect P2 RV 22 LLS power W123
6. Disconnect P3 RV1 LLS antenna cable
W145 from J3 on the antenna board.
7. Unscrew the two (2) screws (non-captive)
securing the RV24 LLS antenna to the
bracket.
8. Remove the RV24 LLS antenna from the
processing module. [1]
Replacement
Install
RV24
1. Slide the antenna board under the process
LLS
path, connectors side up, and align the
Antenna
screw holes to the bracket.
2. Install the front screw.
3. Connect P1 RV24 LLS antenna cable
W122 to J1 on the antenna board.
4. Connect P2 RV 22 LLS power W123 to J2
on the antenna board.
5. Connect P3 RV1 LLS antenna cable W145
tom J3 on the antenna board.
6. Install the splash cover and secure with
one screw.

Note
initialization.


errors.
3 3600 - LLS Test
reserved.
E2.08 PRESSURE MONITOR Version - 96728-111_401_3
List/Part Numbers
7-204070-01 Pressure Sensor
7-204070-02 Pressure Monitor Sensor, Tested
7-78594-01 Monitor, Pressure
E2.08 PRESSURE MONITOR
12 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard

General Precaution:
Pressure Monitor Sensor Assemblies are sensitive to physical damage especially where the wiring extends from the
monitor �s housing. The flex tab holding the wiring to the circuit housing can become unseated if the assembly is
handled improperly.
Removal

Preparation

cover(s) to access the pressure
monitor.
3. Locate the pressure monitor (on the

appropriate pipettor).
Note
map for pipettor locations (R1,
R2, S, or Stat).
Note
To gain access to the
pressure monitor on the
sample pipettor, remove the
internal cover, if present, by
pulling up.
4. To gain access to the pressure

monitor on the sample pipettor,
remove its internal cover by pulling
up.
5. Verify that the probes are positioned

above the wash stations.
Remove
Pressure
1. Disconnect the pressure monitor
Monitor
cable from the pressure monitor
board at position JP1.
Note
Squeeze the back side of the
clip to release.
Note
Handle the pressure monitor
sensor at the port locations
only to prevent sensor
damage.
2. Remove the pressure monitor from

the pipettor securing clip. (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
3. Place an absorbent towel under the Note

pressure monitor. Video contains no audio sound.
Video Note
4. Loosen and remove the probe tubing Video shows R&R for the R1 Pressure Monitor Sensor only.
from the top port of the pressure Refer to Service and Support Manual for other sensor locations.
monitor.
5. Loosen and remove the pressure

monitor-to-syringe tubing from the
bottom port of the pressure monitor.
6. Remove the pressure monitor cable

from the routing clip on the pipettor.
7. Remove the pressure monitor from

the module.
Replacement

Install
Pressure Note
Monitor Handle the pressure monitor
sensor at the port locations only
to prevent sensor damage. [1]

top port of the pressure monitor
and finger tighten the fitting.
2. Connect the pressure monitor-

to-syringe tubing to the bottom
port of the pressure monitor, and
finger tighten the fitting.
3. Place the pressure monitor into

the securing clip on the pipettor
and press both ends to snap it
into place.
4. Plug the monitor cable into

position JP1 on the pressure
monitor board.
Note
The connector is installed
correctly when it clicks
into place.
5. Insert the pressure monitor (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
cable into the routing clip on the

Note
pipettor.
Video Note
Video shows R&R for the R1 Pressure Monitor Sensor only.
Refer to Service and Support Manual for other sensor locations.

Note

Stopped to Ready.
E2.09 BD,PRESSURE MONITOR Version - 96728-111_402_2
List/Part Numbers
7-78585-02 Bd, Pressure Monitor
7-78585-03 Bd, Pressure Monitor (RoHS)
E2.09 BD,PRESSURE MONITOR
12 min.
Time Required
ESD Safe Work Mat Kit 7-100526-01

Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal
Offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the
processing module.
processing center
processing area.
3. Locate the pressure
monitor board to be
replaced.
Remove
Pressure
Monitor Note
Board Use proper ESD
tools when
handling boards
to prevent
damage.
1. Disconnect pressure
monitor cable, PRESS
MNTR, from JP2 on the
pressure monitor
board. [1]

monitor board out of the
mounting feature Note
located on the wall of Video contains no audio sound.
the processing Video Note
center. [2] STAT Pressure Monitor Bd shown in video.
3. Disconnect the sensor

cable from JP1 on the
pressure monitor
board. [3]
Note
Place Pressure
Monitor Board on
the ESD Work
Mat or into a
static protected
bag when not in
use.
Replacement
Install
Pressure
1. Connect the sensor cable
Monitor
into the pressure monitor
Board
board JP1 connector. [3]
2. Slide the pressure monitor

board into the mounting
feature located on the wall of
the processing center. [2]
3. Connect the pressure monitor
cable, PRESS MNTR, into
the JP2 connector. [1]
Note
Video Note
STAT Pressure Monitor Bd shown in video.
Prepare For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT System
for Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
Operation pause, and shutdown.
cover(s).

module.
Note
The system control
ON and at the
Snapshot screen prior
to powering on the

module and sample handler
from Stopped to Ready,
perform the Startup
procedure.
reserved.
E3.01 MANIFOLD,WASH STATION ASM Version - 96728-111_404_2
List/Part Numbers
7-77611-01 Manifold, Wash Station ASM
7-77611-02 Manifold, Wash Station ASM
7-94235-01 Manifold, Wash Station
7-94235-02 Manifold, Wash Station
E3.01 MANIFOLD,WASH STATION ASM
12 min
Time Required
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Open the pump bay panel.
3. Open the pump bay rack.
Remove Wash
Station
1. Locate the wash station manifold on the
Manifold
pump bay rack, near the bottom of the
large section.
2. Place an absorbent towel under the four
(4) tubing connections to absorb any
buffer leaks.
3. Disconnect reagent 1 and reagent 2 wash
station inlet tubing.
4. Disconnect reagent 1 and reagent 2
manifold to pump tubing.
5. Disconnect reagent 1 and reagent 2 wash
station valve connectors.
securing the manifold to the pump bay
rack.
Note
Do not drop the screws into the
module.
7. Remove the manifold.
Replacement
Install
Wash
1. Verify proper orientation of the wash
Station
station manifold onto the pump bay
Manifold
frame.
3. Connect reagent 1 and reagent 2
wash station inlet tubing.
manifold to pump tubing.
wash station valve connectors.

Note

procedure.
Procedure 2130 Flush Fluids.
4. Visually check for leaks.
5. Close the pump bay rack.
6. Close the pump bay panel.

errors.
1 1170 - Wash Station Test
reserved.
E3.02 SYRINGE Version - 96728-111_405_4
List/Part Numbers
7-37695-01 Syringe Sensor Interface PCB
7-77650-01 Syringe
7-77650-02 Syringe
7-900360-01 PCB Assy, Syringe (RoHS)
E3.02 SYRINGE
13 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal


cover(s) to access the syringe.
3. Locate the appropriate syringe
assembly.
Note
map for syringe locations
(R1S, R2S, SS, or STS)

5. Verify the probe is positioned above
the wash station.
Remove
Syringe
1. Place abs towel under syringe tubing
connections.
2. Disconnect the syringe cable from J1

on the syringe board by pushing the
tabs on the connector away from the
connector.
3. Loosen and disconnect the inlet and

outlet tubes from the syringe head
and drain the buffer from the tubing
onto the absorbent towel.
4. Press in on the syringe clamp [1]

(securing the syringe to the module
frame) and lift the syringe up and (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
away from the mounting bracket. [2]
Note
Note
R2 Syringe shown in the video.
Replacement
Install
Syringe
location the syringe is to be mounted.
2. Connect the syringe to pump tubing to

the bottom of the syringe assembly. [1]
3. Connect the pressure monitor to

syringe tubing to the syringe. [2]
4. Connect the syringe cable by aligning
the arrows on the connector. Verify the
tabs of the connector have locked in
place. [3]
5. Slide the syringe onto the mounting

bracket and ensure it mounted (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
securely. [4]
Note
Note
R2 Syringe shown in the video.

Note
Stopped to Ready.
2 2001 - Sample Pipettor Check
3 2002 - R1 Pipettor Check
5 2009 - STAT Pipettor Check
reserved.
E3.03 VALVE,SYRINGE and MANIFOLD Version - 96728-111_406_4
List/Part Numbers
7-77030-02 Valve, Syringe
7-77030-03 Architect Syringe Kit (Depot)
7-77612-01 Valve, Manifold Kit
E3.03 VALVE,SYRINGE and MANIFOLD
50 min
Time Required
7-64407-01 Gasket, Manifold Valve, Kit
Valve removal tool (shipped with valves)
Tools/Materials
Maintenance Kit (Customer):
O-ring removal tool
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal


valve.
Note
center map for the manifold
(WZ1, WZ2, PT/T), and
syringe locations (SS,STS,
R1S, R2S).

Remove
Syringe
1. Press in on the syringe clamp
(Syringe
securing the syringe to the module
Valves only)
frame [1] and lift the syringe up
and away from the mounting
bracket. [2]
Note
If it is necessary to remove
the syringe access the
valve, click on the icon in
the Note to the right to link
to Syringe R&R procedure
"Remove Syringe" video.
Note
Click the icon above to access the video in E3.02 SYRINGE
action section: "Remove Syringe".
Syringe Valve:
Remove Valve
1. Disconnect the valve electrical
Syringe connector. [1]
Manifold
2. Place an absorbent towel under
the valve.
Note
Use caution to ensure no
unnecessary lateral force is
applied to the valves to
prevent damage.
3. Use the valve removal tool to
unscrew and remove the valve. [2]
Note
For the syringe valve, thread
the valve cable in the (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
removal tool as shown to
Note
avoid breaking the valve
cable. [3]
Note
Syringe removed in video for ease of demonstration only and the
4. Use the O-ring removal tool to valve can be replaced without syringe removal.
remove the gasket.
5. Thoroughly clean the

manifold/syringe with DI water and
a lint free tissues.
Note
Using non-lint free tissues
may cause valve ports to
clog.
Manifold Valve:
Note
Replacement
Install Syringe Valve:

Valve(s)
1. Ensure that the manifold valve
ports openings do not have an
old gasket.
2. Place a new gasket (64407) into

the manifold/syringe. [1]
Note
Be very careful to fully
insert only a single
gasket into manifold hole
without
marking/damaging them
in any way.
3. Place the valves into the
appropriate holes of the Note
manifold/syringe. [2] Video contains no audio sound.
Note
4. Gently rotate the valve until the
Syringe removed in video for ease of demonstration only and the valve
ports are properly seated and
can be replaced without syringe removal.
secured into place.
5. Finger tighten the valve

retaining ring until it just meets Manifold Valve:
resistance.
6. Place the plastic valve tool over
the retaining ring and make
sure the ring is snug. [3]
Note
For the syringe valve,
place the valve removal
tool on top of the valve
and verify the valve
cables are routed
through the slot.
7. Turn the valve removal tool

another 1/6 to 1/4 turn (about
one flat on the hexagonal top)
to make sure the ring is only
snug. [3] Note
Note Video contains no audio sound.
unnecessary lateral force
is applied to the valves to
prevent valve damage.
8. Place the valve cables [4] into
the routing clips.
9. Connect the valve electrical

connector to the corresponding
valve position. [4]
Note
Verify each cable is
connected to the correct
valve.
Install
Syringe
1. Slide the syringe onto the
(Syringe
mounting bracket and press
Valves
down until the syringe clamp
only)
locks into place. [1]
Note
If the syringe was
removed, click the icon
in the Note to the right to
link to the Syringe R&R
"Install Syringe" video.
Note
Click the icon above to access the video in E3.02 SYRINGE action
section: "Install Syringe".
for Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: System
Operation startup, pause, and shutdown.

cover(s).

module.
Note
The system control
ON and at the Snapshot
screen prior to powering
on the processing
module for proper
initialization.
4. Perform the Startup procedure

to change the status of the
handler from Stopped to Ready.
4 G4 - Control Run Verify controls are within specifications for Controls within specifications = Pass
assay(s)/ parameter(s).
2 2151 - Prime Wash Zones
3 2152 - Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger
E3.05 TUBING KIT,PUMP Version - 96728-111_407_1
List/Part Numbers
7-79667-01 Tubing, Pump Kit
7-96166-01 Tube, Pump to Tee
E3.05 TUBING KIT,PUMP
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation
2. Loosen the screws on the lower right
access panel at the back of the
module.
3. Open the panel to gain access to the
pump area.
Remove
Pump
1. Locate the pump that needs the
Tubing
tubing replaced.
1 - STP 10µl (i2000SR only)

2 - R2WP 100µl
3 - R1WP 100µl
4 - PTP 100µl
5 - WZ2P 50µl
6 - WZ1P 50µl
7 - R2P 100µl
8 - R1P 100µl
9 - SP 100µl
10 - TP 100µl
2. Place an absorbent towel near the

affected tubing connection.
3. Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubing
from the tubing connections.
4. Remove the tubing from any clamps
and discard the tubing.
Replacement
Verify
Tubing/Ferrule
1. Perform P-13 Tubing Connector
Assembly
Inspection.
Install Pump
Tubing
1. Connect the tubing with the o-ring to
the pump inlet connection.
Note
Usually the bottom port of the
dual head pump.
2. Connect the other end of the tubing

to the side port of a new T-fitting.
3. Repeat the process above for the
other pump head and T-side fitting.
4. Connect the supply inlet to the center
port of the T-fitting.
5. Repeat Step1 through Step4 for the
output
Note
The system control center For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer
power must be ON prior to to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service
turning on the processing and Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.

2130 Flush Fluids.
5. Close the lower right access panel.
6. Tighten the screws.

errors.
reserved.
E3.06 TUBING,PUMP RACK,KIT Version - 96728-111_408_2
List/Part Numbers
7-76586-01 Tubing, Pump Rack Kit
E3.06 TUBING,PUMP RACK,KIT
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT

System Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or
function, Subsection: System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
access the probe.
Preparation
For Removal
of Tubing
station.
Remove
Tubing
1. Locate the appropriate pump.
Note
The pump bay rack may need to be separated
to access the appropriate pump.
2. Place an absorbent towel under the buffer manifold

to pump tubing at the pump and cut the tubing from
the barb fitting on the tubing union.
Note
Prior to removing the tubing, carefully observe
the routing of the tubing for correct installation.
3. Remove the old tubing.

4. Place an absorbent towel under the buffer manifold
to pump tubing at the manifold and cut the tubing
from the barb fitting on the manifold.
Replacement
Install
Tubing
1. Moisten the end of the tubing with
buffer and slide the tubing onto the
barb fitting on the pump.
2. Moisten the end of the tubing with
buffer and slide the tubing onto the
barb fitting on the buffer manifold.

Note

procedure.
3. Perform Diagnostic Procedure 2130
Flush Fluids.

errors.
reserved.
E3.07 TUBING, BUFFER MANIFOLD TO BUFFER RESERVOIR Version - 96728-111_409_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77660-01 Tubing, Buffer Manifold / Reservoir
E3.07 TUBING, BUFFER MANIFOLD TO BUFFER RESERVOIR
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
access the syringe.
Prepare to
Remove
1. Verify the pipettor probes are positioned above
Tubing
the wash stations.
Remove
Tubing
1. Locate the buffer manifold on the large rack.
Note
The pump bay rack may need to be
separated to access the appropriate
pump.
2. Place an absorbent towel under the manifold

tubing and disconnect the tubing from the tubing
union.
3. Remove the tubing from the tubing routing
features.
4. Disconnect the tubing from the buffer bottle
straw.
Note
To avoid damage to the straw, cut the
tubing above the straw and carefully slice
the tubing off of the barb.
Replacement
Install
Tubing
1. Route the tubing through the tubing
routing features from the syringe to the
appropriate pump.
2. Connect the tubing to the buffer straw.
3. Connect the tubing to the tubing union.

Note

procedure.
3. Perform Diagnostic Procedure 2130
Flush Fluids.

errors.
reserved.
E3.08 TUBING,TOP LEVEL KIT Version - 96728-111_411_2
List/Part Numbers
7-76587-01 Tubing, Pumps to Top Level
7-93852-01 Tubing Kit, Pumps to Top, i2000SR
E3.08 TUBING,TOP LEVEL KIT
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
2. Locate the tubing to be replaced.
Remove
Tubing
1. Disconnect the tubing from the device to
which it is attached.
2. Remove the tubing from any guides, noting
routing information.
3. Remove the right rear cover from the
processing module to gain access to the
pump compartment.
4. Loosen (1/4 turn) the two screws securing
the pump rack.
5. Remove the pump rack.
6. Locate the tubing in the pump compartment
and pull it through the top level access hole.
7. Disconnect the tubing from its source and
any routing clamps.
Replacement
Install
Tubing
1. Route the tubing through the
guides/clamps.
2. Connect the tubing to the destination
device in the processing module.
3. Carefully feed the tubing through the
access hole in the right rear corner of the
processing module until it is visible in the
pump compartment.
4. Route the tubing through the appropriate
guides/clamps.
5. Connect the tubing to the source device.

Note
The system control center power For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer
must be ON prior to turning on the to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service
processing module for proper and Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
initialization.

icon.
Flush Fluids, to remove any air that may
be present.
5. Visually check for leaks while performing
the flush.
Note


errors.
reserved.
E3.10A FMI 50ul Wash Zone Pump Version - 96728-111_412_4
List/Part Numbers
7-96346-01 50uL Buffer Pump (WZ)
E3.10A FMI 50µl Wash Zone Pump

6" Slot screwdriver
Tools/Materials Silicone Compound DC- 111
7-14237-01
or
Silicone Compound DC-4 7-204410-01
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Ready status.
Access
Appropriate
Pump
2. Open the pump bay access panel.

Note
Note
STAT Pump shown in video and is a similar removal to the WZ
pumps.
Remove
Appropriate
Pump
2 - R2WP 100µl
3 - R1WP 100µl
4 - PTP 100µl
5 - WZ2P 50µl
6 - WZ1P 50µl
7 - R2P 100µl
8 - R1P 100µl
9 - SP 100µl
10 - TP 100µl
Note
The pump bay rack
may need to be
separated to access the
appropriate pump.

pump.
3. Disconnect the input (bottom) and
output (top) tubing from the pump.
Note
Make note of the position of
each tubing so that they can
be replaced in the correct
position on the manifold.
4. Disconnect the home sensor cable

from the pump.
5. Disconnect the pump motor cable
from the pump.
6. Loosen the screw (non-captive) and
remove the pump from the rack.
Replacement
Install
Pump
1. Add Silicone DC-111 or DC-4
compound (grease to completely fill the
motor cable and home sensor cable
connectors as prevention against fluid
damage.
Note
Add enough grease to the pump
connector to provide a protective
seal from leaks.
2. Grasp the pump, then align and tighten

the mounting screw.
3. Connect the home sensor cable to the

pump.
4. Connect the pump motor cable to the

pump.
5. Connect the input (bottom) and output

(top) tubing to the designated ports of
the pump.
6. Smooth in and wipe off of the excess
Silicone Compound squeezed out of
the connector edges to create a
continuous fluid barrier.
Note
Note
STAT Pump shown in video and is a similar removal to the WZ
pumps.

Note
2. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids.


errors.
3 2006 - Wash Zone 1 Check Perform to verify wash zone 1
reserved.
E3.10B FMI Pre-trigger and Trigger Pumps Version - 96728-111_4864_3
List/Part Numbers
7-77759-01 Pump, Pre-Trigger
7-96344-01 100uL Trigger Pump
7-96345-01 Pre Trigger Pump
E3.10B FMI Pre-Trigger and Trigger Pumps
Note

6" Slot screwdriver
7-14237-01
or
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal

Ready status.
Preparation
1. Open the supply and waste center
door.
2. Perform flush,
3. Go to Flush Pre-Trigger or Trigger
Level Sensor with Air.
Flush Pre- For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to

Trigger or Caution the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
Trigger Level Avoid skin and eye contact with pre- Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
Sensor with trigger and trigger solutions.
Air
door.
2. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray out

all the way.
3. Lift and angle the pre-trigger or

trigger level sensor in the solution
container so that the sensor is
pushed up high and will flush only
air.
Note
Only the level sensor
corresponding to the pump
removed requires removal
from the solution bottle to
prevent leaks during pump
removal.
Note
If this step is missed then
bottle solution may
continually leak when the
pump tubing is removed.
4. Select the As needed category

from the maintenance screen under
the system icon.

2133 Air Flush.
Access
Appropriate
Pump
Remove Pre-trigger Pump:

Appropriate
Pump
1 - STP 100µl (i2000SR
only)
2 - R2WP 100µl
3 - R1WP 100µl
4 - PTP 100µ1
5 - WZ2P 50µl
6 - WZ1P 50µl
7 - R2P 100µl
8 - R1P 100µl
Note
9 - SP 100µl Video contains no audio sound.
10 - TP 100µl
Note Trigger Pump:

The pump bay rack
may need to be
separated to access
the appropriate pump.

pump.
3. Disconnect the input (right) and

output (left) tubing from the pump.
Note
each tubing so that they can
be replaced in the correct
Note
If the step to perform an air Note
flush was missed then the Video contains no audio sound.
bottle solution may Note
continually leak when the STAT Pump shown in video and is a similar replacement to the
pump tubing is removed. Trigger pump.

from the pump.

from the pump.

Replacement
Install Pump
compound (grease) to completely
fill the motor cable and home
sensor cable connectors as
prevention against fluid damage.
Note
Add enough grease to the
pump connector to provide
a protective seal from
leaks.
2. Grasp the pump, then align and

tighten the mounting screw.
3. Connect the home sensor cable

to the pump.
4. Connect the pump motor cable to

the pump.
5. Connect the input (right) and

output (left) tubing to the
designated ports of the pump.
6. Smooth in and wipe off of the
excess Silicone Compound
squeezed out of the connector
edges to create a continuous fluid
barrier.
Pre-trigger Pump:
Note
Trigger Pump:
Note
Note
STAT Pump shown in video and is a similar replacement to the
Trigger pump.
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
1. Place the level sense assemblies
Pumps Level
(straws) into the pre-trigger or
Sense
trigger container and tighten the
Assemblies
caps.
3. Close the supply and waste

center door.
Note
power must be ON and at the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
the Snapshot screen prior Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
to powering on the

errors.
4 2005 - Trigger Check
3 2004 - Pre-Trigger Check
E3.10C FMI 100ul Buffer Pumps Version - 96728-111_4865_2
List/Part Numbers
7-96343-01 100uL Buffer Pump
E3.10C FMI 100µl Buffer Pumps

6" Slot screwdriver
7-14237-01
or
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Ready status.
Access
Appropriate
Pump

Note
Note
STAT Pump shown in video.
Remove
Appropriate
Pump
2 - R2WP 100µl
3 - R1WP 100µl
4 - PTP 100µl
5 - WZ2P 50µl
6 - WZ1P 50µl
7 - R2P 100µl
8 - R1P 100µl
9 - SP 100µl
10 - TP 100µl
Note
The pump bay rack may
need to be separated to
access the appropriate
pump.

pump.
3. Disconnect the input (bottom) and

output (top) tubing from the pump.
Note
each tubing so that they can be
replaced in the correct position
on the manifold.

from the pump.

from the pump.

Replacement
Install
Pump
compound (grease to completely fill the
motor cable and home sensor cable
connectors as prevention against fluid
damage.
Note
Add enough grease to the pump
connector to provide a protective
seal from leaks.
2. Grasp the pump, then align and tighten

the mounting screw.
3. Connect the home sensor cable to the

pump.
4. Connect the pump motor cable to the

pump.
5. Connect the input (bottom) and output

(top) tubing to the designated ports of
the pump.
6. Smooth in and wipe off the excess
Silicone Compound squeezed out of the
connector edges to create a continuous
fluid barrier.
Note
Note
STAT Pump shown in video

Note
The system control center power For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to
must be ON prior to turning on the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
the processing module for proper Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
initialization.


errors.
3 2001 - Sample Pipettor Check
6 2009 - STAT Pipettor Check
E3.14 BD #8,SENSOR (Pump,Home) Version - 96728-111_413_2
List/Part Numbers
7-76480-01 BD, Sensor #8
7-900265-01 Sensor Board #8 (RoHS)
E3.14 BD #8,SENSOR (Pump,Home)
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Electrical Shock Hazard
Removal

Preparation
2. Disconnect the liquid waste outlet.
Remove
Sensor
Board #8
Note
The pump bay rack may need to
be separated to access the
appropriate pump.
2. Disconnect the pump home sensor cable
from the home sensor board.
3. Remove the screw (non-captive)
securing the sensor board #8 to the
pump.
4. Remove the sensor board and cover.
Replacement
Install Sensor
Board #8
1. Place sensor board #8, and cover, onto the appropriate pump and align the screw hole.
3. Connect the pump home sensor cable.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Close the pump bay rack
Note
If the pump bay rack was separated the rack must be joined prior to closing the pump
bay rack.

3. Connect the liquid waste outlet.
Note
The system control center power must be ON prior to turning on the processing

errors.
E3.15 TUBING, PRESSURE MONITOR TO SYRINGE Version - 96728-111_414_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77609-01 Tubing, Pressure Monitor to Syringe
E3.15 TUBING, PRESSURE MONITOR TO SYRINGE
12 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
1. The processing module must be in Warming, or Ready
Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
status.
System status.
Preparation
1. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s) to access the
pressure monitor.
2. Locate the pressure monitor to syringe tubing to be replaced
on the appropriate pipettor.
Note
Refer to the processing center map for pipettor
locations (R1, R2, or S).
3. To gain access to the pressure monitor to syringe tubing on

the sample syringe, remove its internal cover by pulling up.
Note
For further information on removal of internal covers,
refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
Section 9: Service and maintenance, Subsection:
4. Verify that probes are positioned above the wash stations.

Remove
Pressure
1. Remove the pressure monitor from the securing clip.
Monitor to
2. Place an absorbent towel under the pressure monitor.
Syringe
3. Loosen and remove the pressure monitor to syringe tubing
Tubing
from the bottom port of the pressure monitor.
4. Press in on the syringe clip securing the syringe to the
module frame and lift the syringe up and away from the
mounting bracket.
5. Place an absorbent towel under the syringe.
6. Loosen and remove the tubing from the syringe.
7. Remove the tubing from the routing clip on the pipettor.
8. Remove the tubing from the module.
Replacement
Install
Pressure
1. Connect the pressure monitor
Monitor to
to syringe tubing to the
Syringe Tubing
bottom port of the pressure
monitor.
2. Place the tubing into the
routing clip on the pipettor.
3. Connect the tubing to the
syringe.
Prepare for For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to the
Operation ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. Select As Needed category
Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
procedure 2130 Flush Fluids,
to remove any air that may
be present.
Note
If leaks are seen,
repeat the installation
procedure.

cover(s).
E3.16 MANIFOLD,BUFFER Version - 96728-111_415_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76437-01 Manifold, Buffer
7-93732-01 Manifold, Buffer (i2000SR)
E3.16 MANIFOLD,BUFFER
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Note
Replacement manifold of pump tubing is
available in the76586 Pump Rack Tubing Kit.
Preparation
Remove
Buffer
1. Place an absorbent towel under the tubing
Manifold
connections.
2. Cut each piece of tubing off of the barb fitting on
the manifold. For ease of installation, cut the tubing
close to the manifold.
Note
Label each tubing before removing to allow
for easier replacement.
3. Disconnect wash zone 1 and wash zone 2 tubing
connections from the front of the manifold.
4. Remove the two (2) screws (non-captive) securing
the manifold to the bump bay rack
Replacement
Install
Buffer
1. Place the buffer manifold on the pump bay rack,
Manifold
2. Install and tighten the two (2) screws.
3. Connect each piece of tubing to the manifold by
pushing the tubing onto the barb fitting at least 3/8
of an inch.
Note
A few drops of buffer or approved lubricant
may be placed on the barb fitting to lubricate
it. This makes it much easier to slip the
tubing onto the manifold barb.

Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
2130 Flush Fluids.

errors.
F1.01 INLET, BUFFER, ASM (written to be customer–replaceable with
Version - 96728-111_417_2
Abbott assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-77623-01 Inlet, Buffer, ASM
7-77623-02 Straw, Buffer Inlet
F1.01 INLET, BUFFER, ASM (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
15 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal

Preparation
door.
Remove For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to

Wash the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. If the volume is greater than 10 liters,
Buffer Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
unload buffer.
Reservoir
2. Grasp the hand holds on the side of

the buffer reservoir and slide it out.
Place the reservoir outside the module
on the floor.
Remove
Buffer
1. Push the quick disconnect tab to
Level
remove the tubing from the buffer
Sensor
filter. [1]
2. Remove the tubing from the routing
feature on the processing module
frame. [2]
3. Unscrew the cap. [3]
4. Remove the buffer inlet assembly from
the wash buffer reservoir.
Replacement
Install Buffer
Level Sensor
1. Place the buffer inlet assembly into the reservoir
and tighten the cap. [1]
2. Place the tubing into the routing feature on the
processing module frame. [2]
3. Snap the quick disconnect into the buffer filter. [3]
Install Buffer
Reservoir
1. Grasp the hand holds on the side of the buffer
reservoir and slide the reservoir into the
processing module.
Note
If buffer was unloaded to allow the removal
of the buffer reservoir from the processing
module, add wash buffer.
Prepare for
Operation
F1.02 SENSOR,LEVEL,BUFFER Version - 96728-111_418_1
List/Part Numbers
08C94-15 Sensor, Level, Buffer
08C94-25 Sensor, Buffer Level Sense
7-208108-01 Short Cycle Buffer Level Sensor
7-77624-01 Sensor, Level, Buffer
7-77624-02 Buffer Sensor Straw
7-77624-03 Buffer Sensor Straw with Standoff
F1.02 SENSOR,LEVEL,BUFFER
15 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal

Preparation
Remove For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer

Wash to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service
1. If buffer volume is greater than 10 liters,
Buffer and Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
unload buffer.
Reservoir
Select As needed from the
system icon.

reservoir outside the processing module
on the floor.
Remove
Buffer
1. Push on the white quick disconnect tab
Level
to remove the tubing. [1]
Sensor
2. Disconnect the level sensor cable. [2]
3. Unscrew the cap. [3]
4. Remove the level sensor.
Replacement
Install
Buffer
1. Place the level sensor into the
Level
reservoir and tighten the cap. [1]
Sensor
2. Snap the white quick disconnect into
the tubing. [2]
3. Connect the level sensor cable. [3]
Install For further information on loading wash buffer, refer to the ARCHITECT
Wash System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
1. Grasp the hand holds on the side of
Buffer Setup and Consumable inventory management.
the buffer reservoir and slide the
Reservoir
reservoir into the processing module.
Note
If buffer was unloaded to allow
the removal of the buffer
reservoir from the processing
module, add wash buffer.
Prepare For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to the

for ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. Select As needed category from the
icon.
may be present.
Note
4. Close the supply and waste center

door.
1 3410 - Level Sensors Test
F1.04 TUBING, BUFFER TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_419_1
List/Part Numbers
08C94-21 Wash Buffer Transfer Tubing
F1.04 TUBING, BUFFER TRANSFER
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal

Preparation
Remove
Flow
1. Open the tie wraps to free air detector.
Switch
2. Disconnect the sensor cable.
3. Unscrew the black tubing connectors
on the top and bottom of the air
detector.
4. Remove the air detector.
Replacement
Install
Flow
1. Connect the tubing and tighten connectors.
Switch
2. Connect the sensor cable.
3. Fix the tie wrap around the air detector.

Note
initialization.


errors.
F1.08 PUMP,TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_420_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78670-01 Pump, Transfer ASM
F1.08 PUMP,TRANSFER
12 min
Time Required
Removal

1. The processing module must be in Ready,
or Warming status.
Preparation
1. Perform 2133 Air Flush to flush buffer load
lines.
Remove
Transfer
1. Loosen the thumbscrew and pull the
Pump
transfer pump rack toward the rear of the
instrument.
2. Disconnect W144 TRANSFER PUMP
CABLE.
3. Cut the inlet and outlet tubing off the barb
fittings on the transfer pump.
securing the pump to the pump bay rack.
Replacement
Install
Transfer
1. Place the transfer pump on the pump bay rack
Pump
2. Install the four (4) screws.
3. Connect the inlet and outlet tubing by pushing the
tubing onto the barb fitting at least 3/8 of an inch.
Note
4. Connect W144 TRANSFER PUMP CABLE.

5. Reinstall the transfer pump rack and tighten the
thumbscrew.

2. Close the pump bay access panel.
and shutdown.
Note

Startup procedure.
F1.10 VALVE,BUFFER Version - 96728-111_146_3
List/Part Numbers
7-77662-01 Valve, Inlet Buffer, with Bulk Tubing
F1.10 VALVE, BUFFER
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal

Warming status.
1. Open supply and waste center door.

2. If the wash buffer volume is greater than 10
liters, unload buffer.
Select the As needed category from the

icon.
Perform maintenance procedure 2185
Wash Buffer Unload.

reservoir and slide it out. Place the reservoir
outside the module on the floor.
4. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids to flush buffer load
lines.
Unload and
Remove Wash
Buffer Reservoir
Remove Buffer
Valve in Pump
1. Open the pump bay and swing out the pump
Bay
racks.
2. Release the captive screws securing the tansfer
pump tray.
3. Slide out the tray and remove the two (2)
screws (non-captive) securing the buffer valve
to the bracket.
4. Place an absorbent towel under the tubing
connections.
5. Cut the tubing off of the barbed fittings on the
inlet and outlet side of the valve.
Replacement
Install
Buffer
1. Connect the valve to the tubing by pushing the
Valve in
tubing onto the barb fitting at least 3/8 of an inch.
Pump
Bay Note
2. Place the buffer valve under the bracket aligning

the screw holes and secure it with two (2) screws
(non-captive)
3. Slide the tray in.
4. Swing the pump racks back in place and close the
pump bay
1. Install the wash buffer reservoir
2. Grasp the handle on top of the reservoir.
and shutdown.
3. Slide the reservoir into the module.
Note

7. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids to remove air from the
buffer lines.
Note
Check for leaks while performing the flush.

F1.11 FILTER, BUFFER Version - 96728-111_147_2
List/Part Numbers
08C94-28 Filter, Buffer
08C94-29 Filter, Buffer
F1.11 FILTER, BUFFER
15 min
Time Required
Absorbent towels
Tools/Materials
Removal

Preparation
door.
Remove For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to

Wash the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. If buffer volume is greater than 10
Buffer Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
Reservoir
Select As needed from the
system icon.
Perform maintenance
procedure 2185 Wash Buffer
Unload.
2. Grasp the top handle or hand holds

on the side of the buffer reservoir and
slide it out. Place the reservoir outside
the processing module on the floor.
Note
Ensure tubing and cable connections
are kept free from damage. (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Note
Remove
Filter
1. Press down and out on the buffer filter
bracket. [1]
2. Remove the filter from the securing

feature in the frame of the supply and
waste center.

buffer filter quick disconnects.
4. Disconnect the two grey quick

disconnects at either end of the
filter.[2]
Replacement
Install
Filter
1. Connect the buffer filter to the two grey
quick disconnects.[1]
2. Place the buffer filter onto the securing

feature in the frame of the supply and
waste center.
3. Place the buffer filter bracket over the

filter and press into place, securing the
filter to the frame.[2]
Note Ensure all tubing is straight without

kinks.
Note
Install
Buffer
1. Grasp the top handle or hand holds on
Reservoir
the side of the buffer reservoir and
slide the reservoir into the processing
module.
Prepare
for
Operation
door.
F1.12 SWITCH, BUFFER FLOW Version - 96728-111_148_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77663-01 Flow Switch ASM
7-92370-01 Tubing, Front Inlet to Flow Switch
F1.12 SWITCH, BUFFER FLOW
40 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal

1. The processing module must be in Warming, or
Ready status.
Unload and
Remove Wash
Buffer Reservoir
2. If the wash buffer volume is greater than 10

icon.
Perform maintenance procedure 2185
Wash Buffer Unload.

4. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids to flush buffer load
lines.
Remove Buffer
Flow Switch
1. Loosen the screws on the lower right access
panel at the back of the module.
2. Open the panel to gain access to the pump
area.
transfer pump rack in position.
5.
Pull the assembly toward the back of the
instrument to gain access to the sensor.
6. Remove the two (2) tubes connected to the flow
switch and note the tube position.
7. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the flow switch
bracket.
8. Disconnect the flow switch cable and remove
the buffer flow switch.
Replacement
Install
Buffer
1. Install the buffer flow switch.
Flow
2. Connect the sensor cable.
Switch
3. Connect the tubing ensuring the tubes are
connected properly.
4. Install the bracket and tighten the
thumbscrew.
5. Install the transfer pump rack and tighten
the thumbscrew.

Note
initialization.

3. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids and check for
leaks.
Note
Check for leaks while performing
the flush.

F1.13 RESERVOIR,BUFFER Version - 96728-111_149_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76438-01 Reservoir, Buffer
F1.13 RESERVOIR,BUFFER
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

Remove
Buffer
Reservoir
door.
2. Perform 2185 Wash Buffer Unload.
3. Slide the buffer reservoir out and place
it on the floor.
4. Remove the buffer inlet tube by
unscrewing the cap and removing the
inlet tube.
5. Remove the buffer outlet tube by
unscrewing the cap and removing.
Replacement
Install
Buffer
1. Install the buffer reservoir and reinstall the
Reservoir
inlet and outlet tubes.
2. Place buffer reservoir back in the
compartment.

Note
initialization.

3. Load wash buffer.
the flush.
Note
6. Perform a flush to remove air from the

tubing.
Note
the flush.
G1.01 PROBE,WZ
Version - 96728-111_150_1
08C94-35 Probe, WZ

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Warming, or Ready status. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Preparation 1. Lift the appropriate processing center For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the
cover(s) to access the wash zone ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
probe. maintenance, Subsection: Component replacement.
Note
The rear processing center
access panel must be opened
to access the wash zone 2
probes.
2. Locate the wash zone probe to be

replaced on the appropriate wash
zone. [1]
Note
map on the i System
processing module for wash
zone locations (WZ1 or WZ2).

Remove 1. Grasp the tab on top of the wash

Wash Zone zone clip located at the front of the
Probe wash zone mechanism assembly.
2. Rotate the clip counterclockwise [2],
so the notch in the clip moves away
from the wash zone probe. [1]
3. Slide the tubing off the probe then lift
the probe from the wash zone
mechanism assembly.
4. Remove the tubing from the probe by
gently pulling the tubing and sliding it
from the probe.
Note
Replacement
Install 1. Push the wash zone tubing onto the

Wash wash zone probe until it passes the
Zone ridge on the probe. [1]
Probe
Note
The tubing should be half way
between the bend in the probe
and the ridge. [2]
2. Slide the probe in the wash zone

mechanism assembly until it is fully
seated.
Note
Pull up on the wash zone
mechanism to raise it if the
probes do not fit into the
openings on the wash zone (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
mechanism assembly.
Note
3. Check to ensure the tubing is placed Video contains no audio sound.
into the tubing guides on the wash
zone mechanism assembly.
4. Grasp the tab on top of the clip and
rotate the clip clockwise toward the
probes [3].
Note
If the clips do not rotate to their
locked position, ensure the
probes are completely seated in
the wash zone mechanism
assembly.
Prepare 1. Install the appropriate internal

for components cover(s).
Operation 2. Close the rear processing center
cover.
Verification
G1.02 TUBING/SENSOR, TEMP, WZ Version - 96728-111_151_2
List/Part Numbers
08C94-87 Tubing/Sensor, Temperature, WZ
7-77745-01 Tubing, WZ Waste Probe
G1.02 TUBING/SENSOR, TEMP, WZ
45 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. The processing module must
be in Warming, or Ready
status.

tubing.
Note
The rear processing
center access panel
must be opened to
access wash zone 2
temperature
tubing/sensors.
2. Locate the wash zone

temperature tubing/sensor to be
replaced on the appropriate
wash zone (WZ1 or WZ2). [1]
Note
center map on the
i System processing
module for wash zone
locations (WZ1 or WZ2).
3. Remove the appropriate

internal components cover(s), if
present.
Remove Wash
Zone Temperature
1. Remove the tubing from the
Tubing and
probe by gently pulling and
Sensor Assembly
sliding it from the probe.
Note
WZ 1 will have a tubing
guide to slide the tubing
through to remove.
2. Locate the tubing on the WAM

thermistor bracket.[1]
3. Gently grasp the tubing and

thermistor at the junction and
pull down to remove it from the
WAM bracket.
4. Disconnect the corresponding
temperature sensor connector. Note
[2] Video contains no audio sound.
Note
5. Pull up on the tubing at the WZ1 is shown in the video
connection on the vacuum
vessel. [3]
Replacement
Replace WZ
Sensor and
1. Connect the tubing to the barb fitting
Tubing
on the vacuum vessel. [1]
Assembly
2. Attach the temperature sensor
connector to the corresponding
labeled cable.
3. Orient the sensor tubing so the

sensor connector is oriented toward
the front of the WAM bracket when
inserted. [2]
4. Snap the sensor tubing into the

WAM bracket at the tubing and
sensor junction.
For WZ2 only, direct the
tubing from the probe through Note
the routing clip to the vacuum Video contains no audio sound.
vessel port [3] to allow the Note
WZ mechanism to move WZ1 is shown in the video
freely.
5. 5. Push the wash zone tubing onto

the wash zone probe until it passes
the ridge on the probe.
Note
For WZ1 only, direct the
tubing through the routing clip
prior to sliding it on the probe.
Note
between the bend in the
probe and the ridge. [4]
6. 6. Place the tubing in the tubing

guide on the top of the WZ
mechanism.
7. Grasp the tab on top of the clips and

rotate clockwise toward the probes.
Prepare for
Operation

cover(s).
Note
Close the rear processing
center access panel if it was
opened to access the wash
zone 2 probes.
1 2050 - WZ Aspiration Test
G1.03 MOTOR,WZ,ASM Version - 96728-111_152_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76210-01 BD, Sensor #1
7-76210-02 BD, Sensor #1 (RoHS)
7-78851-01 Motor, Shutter or WZ
7-96251-01 WZ Mechanism
G1.03 MOTOR,WZ,ASM

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Lift the rear processing center cover to access
the wash zone mechanism.
3. Remove the appropriate internal component
cover(s), if present.
4. Locate the wash zone mechanism assembly to
be replaced on the appropriate wash zone.
Note
Refer to the processing center map on the
i System processing module for wash
Remove
Wash Zone
1. Grasp the tab on top of the wash zone clip
Probes
located at the front of the wash zone mechanism
assembly.
2. Rotate the clip counterclockwise [2], so the
notch in the clip moves away from the wash
zone probe. [1]
3. Perform one of the following depending on the
probe you are replacing:
Wash zone 1 - Remove the wash zone

tubing from the tubing guide, and then lift
the probe and the attached tubing out of
the wash zone mechanism assembly.
Wash zone 2 - Lift the probe and
attached tubing out of the wash zone
mechanism assembly.
4. Remove the tubing from the probe by gently

pulling the tubing and sliding it from the probe.
For Wash
Zone 2 Only.
1. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the liquid waste
Remove
arm to the wash zone.
Liquid Waste
2. Lift and remove the liquid waste arm (with probe
Arm
attached) from the wash zone mechanism
assembly using an absorbent towel to catch any
drips.
3. Set the arm aside.
Remove
Motor
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] securing the
motor to the mechanism base.
2. Extend the motor shaft carefully to allow working
room. [2]
Remove
Bearing
1. Carefully tilt the extended motor shaft up to
create a gap between the yoke and the
mechanism. [1]
2. Push the bearing against the top of the
mechanism while the yoke remains tilted. [2]
Note
The bearing slides out of the yoke. [3]
Remove
Springs/Yoke
1. Hold the WZ mechanism with the yoke at the top
to inspect the spring condition.
Note
The yoke should be suspended evenly on
the two springs and should not touch the
physical limits of the WZ mechanism.
Good springs [1] can be reused. Bad
springs [2] must be discarded.
Replacement springs are included with the
motor.
2. Remove the springs and yoke from the

mechanism.
Replacement

Examine
Springs/Yoke
1. Examine the springs to be sure the coils are
tight.
2. Examine the yoke to be sure the bearing
recess [1] is clean.
Install Springs
1. Work from the top of the WZ mechanism.
Insert the springs through the attachment
holes. [1]
2. Turn the springs inward so that they hang at
the sides of the yoke receiver area. [2]
Install Motor
1. Secure the replacement motor to the WZ
mechanism with two (2) screws. [1]
Install Yoke
1. Extend the shaft from the motor so that it
contacts the yoke receiver area. [1]
2. Drop the yoke [2] into position over the
bearing.
3. Use a spring pick or locally fabricated spring
installation aid [3] to gently pull the spring to
the edge of the yoke near the spring hole.
4. Guide the spring across the face of the Yoke
so that it snaps into place in the spring
hole. [4]
5. Carefully slide the spring installation aid out
of the spring end loop.
6. Repeat the spring installation process with
the other side. [5]
Inspect Yoke
1. Hold the WZ mechanism with the yoke at the
top.
2. Inspect the installation carefully.
Note
The yoke should be suspended evenly
on the two springs [1] and should not
touch [2] the physical limits of the WZ
mechanism.
Install Wash
Zone
1. Connect the sensor connector.
Mechanism
2. While lifting up on the buffer heater, insert
Assembly
manifold seat.
Note
heater.

4. Tighten the three (3) thumbscrews to attach
the wash zone mechanism assembly to the
wash zone manifold.
6. Connect the motor connector.
For Wash
Zone 2 Only.
1. Lift the arm.
Install Liquid
2. Place the liquid waste arm on the wash zone
Waste Arm
mechanism assembly.
3. Tighten the thumbscrew securing the liquid
waste arm to the wash zone.
Install Wash
Zone Probe
1. Replace the wash zone probe and tubing.
and Tubing
If replacing assembly for WZ1, go to
Install WZ1 Wash Zone Probe and
Tubing.
If replacing assembly for WZ2, go to
Install WZ2 Wash Zone Probe and
Tubing.
Install WZ1
Wash Zone
1. Route the wash zone tubing through the
Probe and
white plastic clamp on the back of the wash
Tubing
2. Push the wash zone tubing onto the wash
zone probe until it passes the ridge on the
probe.
Note
between the bend in the probe and
the ridge [3].
3. Slide the probe in the wash zone mechanism

assembly until it is fully seated.
Note
Pull up on the wash zone mechanism
to raise it if the probes do not fit into
the openings on the wash zone
mechanism assembly.
4. Place the tubing in the tubing guide.

5. Grasp the tab on top of the clips and rotate
clockwise toward the probes.
Note
locked position, ensure the probes are
completely seated in the wash zone
mechanism assembly.
Install WZ2
Wash Zone
1. Route the wash zone tubing through the
Probe and
white plastic clamp on the back of the wash
Tubing
2. Push the wash zone tubing onto the wash
zone probe until it passes the ridge on the
probe.
Note
the ridge [3].
3. Slide the probe in the wash zone mechanism

assembly until it is fully seated.
Note
Probe 1 should be located on the right
side of the post on top of the wash
Note
If the probes do not fit into the
openings on the wash zone
mechanism assembly, lift the wash
zone mechanism by pulling it up.
4. Grasp the tab on top of the clip and rotate

clockwise toward the probes.
Note
locked position, ensure the probes are
completely seated in the wash zone
mechanism assembly.
Check/Adjust
Tubing
1. Route the wash zone tubing in WZ 1.
Note
Use [1] as a guide so that instrument
operation does not cause the tubing
to bind, and that the thermistor
connections do not move.
2. Route the wash zone tubing in WZ 2.
Note
Use [2] as a guide so that instrument
operation does not cause the tubing
to bind, and that the thermistor
connections do not move.
and shutdown.
Note
initialization.

G1.04 BRACKET,BUFFER HEATER Version - 96728-111_153_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76879-01 Bracket, Buffer Heater
G1.04 BRACKET,BUFFER HEATER
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation
Remove Buffer
Heater Bracket
1. Place a paper towel around the
buffer heater connection to the
manifold.
2. Remove the tubing connector from
the heater to the manifold.
3. Loosen the thumbscrew securing
the heater to the manifold bracket.
4. Remove the buffer heater.
the bracket to the manifold.
6. Remove the buffer heater bracket.
Replacement

Install Buffer Heater
Bracket
1. Align the buffer heater bracket and tighten the thumbscrew securing the bracket to the
manifold.
2. Align the buffer heater and tighten the thumbscrew securing the heater to the manifold
bracket.
3. Install the tubing from the heater to the manifold.
Prepare for
Operation
Note
The system control center power must be ON prior to turning on the processing

errors.
1 G62 - Hardware Installation Verify hardware is securely installed.
Check for leaks as appropriate.
G1.05 MANIFOLD,WZ,ASM Version - 96728-111_154_2
List/Part Numbers
7-96263-02 WZ Manifold with Valves, No Lift
7-96263-03 WZ Manifold with Valves and Flush Nozzle
7-96263-04 WZ Manifold with Valves, Bonded Nozzle
7-96263-05 WZ Manifold with Valves, FEP Tips
7-96263-06 WZ Manifold with Valves, FEP Tips
G1.05 MANIFOLD,WZ,ASM
50 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal


center cover(s) to access the wash
zone manifold.
Note
to access the connections on
wash zone #2.
3. Locate the wash zone manifold

assembly (on the appropriate wash
zone).
Note
map on the i System

Remove
Wash Zone
Buffer Heater
buffer heater to manifold connection,
and disconnect the tubing from the
manifold. [1]

wash zone buffer heater (WZ2) or
buffer heater and bracket (WZ1) in
place. [2]
Note
Wash zone:
#1 buffer heater is
located on a bracket
connected to the wash
zone manifold.
#2 buffer heater is (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
located on the wash
zone manifold. Note
Note Video Note
Video shows WZ1 manifold Video shows WZ1 Manifold.
and buffer heater
3. Remove the buffer heater from the
wash zone manifold and set aside.
Note
Slide wash zone #2 buffer
heater toward the wash zone
remove the heater's guide
feature on the manifold.
Remove
Waste Arm
1. Slide the clip on the waste probe
and Tubing
counterclockwise to free the probe.
(WZ2 only)
2. Pull the probe up and out from the
waste arm and set it aside.
3. Loosen the waste arm screw on the

top of WZ2 Mechanism Assembly.
Remove
Wash Zone
1. Loosen the three (3) thumbscrews
Mechanism
securing the wash zone mechanism
Assembly
assembly to the wash zone
manifold. [1]
Note
Ensure WZ probes remain
undamaged during this
procedure. It is unnecessary
to remove the wash zone
probes from the assembly.
2. Grasp the wash zone mechanism

assembly and, while lifting, gently
rock it side-to-side to free it from the
guide pins.
3. Set the wash zone mechanism
assembly aside.
Remove
Wash Zone WARNING
Manifold Protective eyewear must be worn
Assembly for this step.
1. Disconnect the valve cables V1, V2,

V3 and V4. [2]

securing the manifold to the process
path. [3]

gently rock it side-to-side to free it
4. Remove the manifold from the

module.
Replacement
Install
Wash Zone Note
Manifold For older style WZ Manifold,
Assembly ensure the wash zone drain
tubing is connected and the
tubing inserted into the wash
drain prior to installing the
manifold to prevent leaks.[1]
1. Grasp the manifold, align the guide

pins, and seat the manifold on the
process path.
2. Ensure the manifold drain is over the

drain funnel. [2]
Note
The manifold is properly seated (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
if it is stable when pushed
towards the outer edge of the Note
process path prior to securing Video contains no audio sound.
the screws. Video Note
Video shows WZ1 Manifold.
path. [2]
4. Connect the appropriate valve cables

to the valves (V1, V2, V3, & V4). [3]
Note
Once the valve cables are
connected, verify each cable is
connected to the correct valve.
Note
Ensure the valve cables are
placed into the cable clip
mounted on the back of the
manifold. [4]
Install
Waste Arm
1. Seat the waste arm in to the slot on
and Tubing
the top of the WZ2 Mechanism
(WZ2 only)
Assembly.
2. Insert the probe into the waste arm.

clockwise to secure the probe. [1]
Note
Ensure the waste tubing is
routed so the wash zone
assembly moves without
restrictions and errors.
Install
Wash Zone
1. Place the wash zone mechanism
Mechanism
assembly on the manifold by aligning
Assembly
the guide pins.

3. Tighten the three (3) thumbscrews to

attach the assembly to the wash zone
manifold. [1]
4. Press down carefully on the wash

zone mechanism assembly guiding
the wash zone probes into the
manifold.
Install
Wash Zone
1. Place the buffer heater (WZ2), or
Buffer
buffer heater and bracket (WZ1), on
Heater
Note
Video shows WZ1 manifold and
buffer heater.
2. Align the thumbscrew with the hole on

the manifold. [1]
Note
For wash zone #2, slide the
tab of the buffer heater into the
slot in the manifold.
3. Tighten the thumbscrew securing the

buffer heater to the manifold.
4. Connect the buffer heater tubing to

the manifold. [2]
5. Route the valve cables to the left

(when looking from the front of the
instrument) of the wash zone manifold
thumbscrew. [3]
Note
This routes the cables away
from the wash zone probes.

Note

Stopped to Ready.
G1.06 HEATER,BUFFER,WZ Version - 96728-111_155_3
List/Part Numbers
7-78306-01 Heater, WZ Buffer
7-78306-02 Heater, WZ Buffer (RoHS)
G1.06 HEATER,BUFFER,WZ
13 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal


cover(s) to access the buffer heater.
Note
to access the connections on
wash zone #2.
3. Locate the buffer heater assembly (on

the appropriate wash zone).
Note
map on the i System
Remove
Wash Zone
Buffer
the buffer heater to manifold
Heater
connection, and disconnect the
tubing froom the manifold. [1]
2. Disconnect the tubing on

bottom of buffer heater.
3. Disconnect the thermistor
cable.
4. Disconnect the heater cable.
securing the wash zone buffer
heater or buffer heater and
bracket in place. [2]
Note
Wash zone #1 buffer (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
heater is located on a
bracket connected to the Note
wash zone manifold. Video contains no audio sound.
Wash zone #2 buffer
heater is located on the
wash zone manifold.
6. Remove the buffer heater from

the wash zone manifold and
set aside.
Note
Slide wash zone #2
buffer heater toward the
wash zone mechanism
assembly to remove the
heater's guide feature on
the manifold.
Replacement

Install
Wash
1. Place the buffer heater, or buffer heater
Zone
and bracket, on the wash zone
Buffer
manifold.
Heater
the manifold. [1]
Note
For wash zone #2, slide the tab
of the buffer heater into the slot
in the manifold.

4. Connect the buffer heater tubing to the

manifold. [2]
Note
5. Connect the tubing on bottom of buffer Video contains no audio sound.
heater.
6. Connect the thermistor cable.
7. Connect the heater cable.
8. Route the valve cables to the left of the

wash zone manifold thumbscrew. [3]
Note
This routes the cables way from
the wash zone probes.

Note
must be ON and at the Snapshot
screen prior to powering on the
initialization.

Stopped to Ready.

from the tubing.
Note
the flush.


errors.
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
G1.07 MANIFOLD,WZ Version - 96728-111_157_3
List/Part Numbers
7-96176-03 WZ Manifold, Closed
7-96176-04 WZ Manifold, Bonded Nozzles
7-96176-05 WZ Manifold, FEP Tips
G1.07 MANIFOLD,WZ
50 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Customer Maintenance Kit
Valve Removal Tool
Gasket, Manifold Valve, Kit 7-64407-01
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

module.

cover(s) to access the wash
zone manifold.
Note
The rear processing
center access panel must
be opened to access
wash zone #2
connections.
3. Locate the wash zone manifold
assembly on the appropriate
wash zone.
Note
center map on the
i System processing
module for wash zone
locations (WZ1 or WZ2).

Remove
Wash Zone
Buffer
the buffer heater to manifold
Heater
connection, and disconnect the
tubing from the manifold. [1]

the wash zone buffer heater or
buffer heater (WZ2) and bracket
(WZ1) in place. [2]
Note
Wash zone:
#1 buffer heater is
located on a (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
bracket connected
to the wash zone Note
manifold. Video contains no audio sound.
#2 buffer heater is Note
located on the Video shows WZ1 Manifold.
wash zone
manifold.
Note
Video shows WZ1
manifold and buffer
heater.
3. Remove the buffer heater from

the wash zone manifold and set
aside.
Note
Slide wash zone #2 buffer
heater toward the wash
zone mechanism
assembly to remove the
heater's guide feature on
the manifold.
Remove
Waste Arm
and Tubing
counterclockwise to free the
(WZ2 only)
probe.
2. Pull the probe up and out from

the waste arm and set it aside.
3. Loosen the waste arm screw on

the top of WZ2 Mechanism
Assembly.
Remove
Valves from Warning
Wash Zone Protective eyewear must
Manifold be worn for this step.
1. Disconnect the valve electrical

connector V1, V2, V3 and V4. [1]

the valves.
Note
unnecessary lateral force
is applied to the valves.
3. Use the valve removal tool to
loosen and remove each valves
(3). [2]
4. Remove the valve cables from

the cable clip mounted on the
back of the manifold. [1]
Note
To avoid breaking the
valve cable, route the
cable as shown. [3]
Remove
Wash Zone
1. Loosen the three (3)
Mechanism
thumbscrews securing the wash
Assembly
zone mechanism assembly to
the wash zone manifold. [1]
Note
Ensure WZ probes remain
undamaged during this
procedure. It is
unnecessary to remove
the WZ probes from the
assembly.

mechanism assembly and, while
lifting, gently rock it side-to-side
3. Set the wash zone mechanism

assembly aside.
Remove WZ
Manifold WARNING
Assembly Protective eyewear must be
worn for this step.

securing the manifold to the
process path. [3]
2. Grasp the manifold and, while

lifting, gently rock it side-to-side
module.
4. Remove all valve gaskets from
the WZ Manifold valve ports.
Note
A Valve Removal Tool
can be located in the
Customer Maintenance
Kit.
Replacement
Install WZ
Manifold
1. Ensure that the manifold valve ports
Valve
openings do not have an old gasket.
Gaskets
2. Place a new gasket (64407) into the
manifold/syringe. [1]
Note
Be very careful to fully insert
only a single gasket into each
manifold hole without
marking/damaging them in any
way.
Install
Wash Zone Note
Manifold For older style WZ Manifold,
Assembly ensure the wash zone drain
tubing is connected and the
tubing is inserted into the wash
drain prior to installing the
manifold to prevent leaks. [1]
pins, and seat the manifold on the
process path.
2. Ensure the manifold drain is over the

drain funnel. [2]
Note
The manifold is properly seated
if it is stable when pushed (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
towards the outer edge of the
process path prior to securing Note
the screws. Video contains no audio sound.
Note
Video shows WZ1 Manifold.
3. With mounting screws loose, push the Note
manifold towards the outer edge of the Video demonstrates adding gaskets prior to placing the manifold
process path. If the manifold does not on the process path. for ease
move it is properly seated.
path. [2]
Install
Valve(s) 1. Place the valves into the appropriate
holes of the manifold/syringe [2]
2. Gently rotate the valve until the ports

are properly seated and secured into
place.
3. Finger tighten the valve retaining ring

until it just meets resistance.
4. Place the plastic valve tool over the
retaining ring.
5. Turn the valve removal tool another
1/6 to 1/4 turn (about one flat on the
hexagonal top) to make sure the ring
is only snug. [3]
Note
unnecessary lateral force is
applied to the valves to prevent
valve damage.
6. Connect the appropriate valve cables

to the valves (V1, V2, V3, V4). [4]
Note
connected, verify each cable is
connected to the correct valve.
7. Route the valve cables [4] away from

the WZ Probes and into the routing
clips.
8. Connect the valve electrical connector
to the corresponding valve position. [4]
Note
Verify each cable is connected
to the correct valve.
Install
Wash Zone
1. Place the wash zone mechanism
Mechanism
assembly on the manifold by aligning
Assembly
the guide pins.

3. Tighten the three (3) thumbscrews to

attach the assembly to the wash zone
manifold. [1]
4. Press down carefully on the wash

zone mechanism assembly guiding the
wash zone probes into the manifold.
Install
Wash Zone
1. Place the buffer heater (WZ2), or
Buffer
buffer heater and bracket (WZ1), on
Heater
Note
Video shows WZ1 manifold and
buffer heater.

the manifold. [1]
Note
For wash zone #2, slide the tab
of the buffer heater into the slot
in the manifold.

4. Connect the buffer heater tubing to the

manifold. [2]
5. Ensure the valve cables are routed to
the left (when looking from the front of
the instrument) of the wash zone
manifold thumbscrew. [3]
Note
This routes the cables away
from the wash zone probes.
Note
Snapshot screen prior to turning
on the processing module for

Stopped to Ready.
G1.09 PROBE/TUBING, WASTE ARM Version - 96728-111_158_1
List/Part Numbers
08C94-89 Waste Arm Probe and Tubing
G1.09 PROBE/TUBING, WASTE ARM
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

System status.
Ready status.
Preparation
1. Lift the rear processing center cover to access
the liquid waste arm.
2. Open the rear access panel.
3. Locate the waste arm probe and tubing on the
liquid waste arm. [1]
Note
liquid waste arm location (A).
Remove
Waste Arm
1. If the liquid waste arm has a tubing routing clip,
Probe/Tubing
remove the liquid waste arm tubing from the
routing clip. [1]
2. Rotate the waste arm probe clip clockwise. [2]
3. Lift the probe and remove it from the front of the
liquid waste arm.
4. With one hand, hold down on the vacuum vessel.
With the other hand, pull up on the waste arm
tubing near the connection on the vacuum
vessel. [3]
5. Remove the waste arm probe and tubing from
the module.
Replacement
Install Waste Arm

Probe/Tubing
1. Slide the tubing on to the probe until it
passes the ridge on the probe.
Note
ridge.
2. Connect the tubing to the barb fitting on the

vacuum vessel. [1]
3. Slide the probe into the liquid waste arm until
it is fully seated.
4. Lift and rotate the probe clip
counterclockwise until the notch in the clip
sits over the probe. [2]
5. If the liquid waste arm has a tubing routing
clip, place the tubing in the routing clip. [3]
G1.10 TUBING,DRAIN,MANIFOLD Version - 96728-111_159_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77682-01 Tubing, Drain Manifold
7-77682-02 Drain Tube, Trig Manifold
G1.10 TUBING,DRAIN,MANIFOLD
12 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.

1. Lift the rear processing center cover(s) to
access the manifold drain tubing.
2. Locate the manifold drain tubing on the
appropriate wash zone or pre-trigger/trigger
manifold.
Note
for manifold locations (WZ1, WZ2,
PT/T).

cover(s).
Remove
Manifold Caution
Drain Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger
Tubing and trigger solutions.
1. Access the appropriate manifold drain tubing.
To access pre-trigger/trigger manifold

drain tubing go to Step4.
To access wash zone 1 manifold
To access wash zone 2 manifold

heater bracket to the wash zone manifold
and set the heater and bracket aside. Go to
Step4.
3. Open the rear processing center access
panel and go to Step4.
4. Disconnect the drain tubing from the
manifold.
5. Remove the drain tubing from the drain in
the baseplate and remove it from the
module.
Replacement
Connect
the
1. Place the drain tubing into the drain in
Manifold
the baseplate.
Drain
2. Connect the drain tubing to the
Tubing
manifold.
For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to
procedure.
the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
icon.
may be present.
Note
5. If the buffer heater bracket was

removed, place the bracket on the
wash zone manifold and tighten the
thumbscrew.
6. Close the rear processing access
panel if open.
8. Close the processing module cover(s).
G1.11 ARM, LIQUID WASTE Version - 96728-111_160_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92040-01 Arm, Liquid Waste
G1.11 ARM, LIQUID WASTE
10 min
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
access wash zone 2 and the liquid waste arm.
Remove Wash Zone

Probe from the
1. Remove the liquid waste arm tubing from the
Liquid Waste Arm
routing clip (if required) at the top of the liquid
waste arm.
2. Lift up and slide the wash zone probe out of the
front of the arm.
3. Place the probe and tubing aside on an absorbent
towel.
Remove Liquid
Waste Arm
1. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the liquid waste
arm to the wash zone mechanism assembly.
2. Lift and remove the liquid waste arm.
Note
The wash zone temperature sensor routed
over the arm may need to be removed from
its routing feature to allow removal of the
arm.
Replacement
Install Liquid
Waste Arm
1. Place the liquid waste arm on the wash
liquid waste arm to the wash zone
mechanism assembly.
Note
If the wash zone temperature
sensor was removed, replace it
into the routing feature.
Install Wash
Zone Probe on
1. Replace the probe and rotate the waste
the Liquid Waste
arm probe clip counterclockwise until
Arm
the notch of the clip sits over the probe.
2. Route the liquid waste arm tubing
through the routing clip (if available).

procedure.
H1.01 SENSOR,LEVEL,PRE-TRIGGER/TRIGGER Version - 96728-111_161_1
List/Part Numbers
08C94-16 Sensor Level, Trigger
08C94-17 Sensor Level, Pre-trigger
08C94-26 Sensor, Trigger Level Sense
08C94-27 Sensor, Pretrigger Level Sense
H1.01 SENSOR,LEVEL,PRE-TRIGGER/TRIGGER
10 min
Time Required
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Ready status.
Preparation
Remove Pre-
Trigger or Caution
Trigger Level Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger and
Sensor trigger solutions.

2. Disconnect the pre-trigger or trigger electrical
connector. [1]
Note
08C94-27 and 08C94-26 sensors use a
new connector and may have a short
adapter cable to mate with older cables.
Release this connector by pressing the
release lever. [4]
3. Using absorbent towel to catch any spilled liquid,
unscrew the tubing fitting from the level sense
tube. [2]
4. Unscrew the level sensor cap. [3]
5. Remove the level sensor and wipe the outside of
the assembly with an absorbent towel.
Replacement
Install Pre-
Trigger or
1. Place the level sensor into the container and
Trigger
tighten the cap with the arrow on the cap
Level
facing toward the front.
Sensor
Note
On sensor 08C94-27 and 08C94-26,
the arrow is on top of the vent.
2. Tighten the cap. [1]
Note
When the level sensor is correctly
installed, the grey wire is on the right
and the tubing is on the left.
3. Connect the pre-trigger or trigger electrical

connector. [2]
Note
Connectors are keyed to prevent cross
connection of trigger and pre-trigger
sensors.
4. Connect the tubing fitting to the level sensor

tube. [3]
Note
The tubing connects to the lower
fitting on the sensor. Do not remove
the vent fitting [4] from the 08C94-26
and 08C94-27 sensors (note vent
path [5]).
Prepare for For further information on performing maintenance procedures,

Operation refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9:
Service and Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance
procedures.
2. Perform maintenance procedure 2130 Flush
Fluids, to remove any air that may be
present.
3. Visually check for leaks while performing the
flush.
Note
1 3410 - Level Sensors Test
H1.03 MANIFOLD,PRE-TRIG/TRIG Version - 96728-111_162_1
List/Part Numbers
7-95502-01 Heater / Tube, Trigger
H1.03 MANIFOLD,PRE-TRIG/TRIG
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

or Offline status.
Preparation
1. Pause the processing module.
Flush Pre-Trigger
or Trigger Level
1. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray out until it
Sensor with Air
locks into place.
2. Unscrew and pull up on the level sensor for
pre-trigger or trigger.
their container so that the assembly is out of
the solution.
Access Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
Manifold
2. Lift the rear processing center cover to
access the pre-trigger/trigger manifold.
Remove Valves
from Pre-
1. Remove the valve cables from the routing
Trigger/Trigger
clips.
Manifold
2. Unscrew the valves from the wash zone
manifold and set aside on an absorbent
towel.
Remove Pre-
Manifold Protective eyewear must be worn for this
step.
1. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the liquid

waste arm to the wash zone.
2. Lift the arm up and place it aside to allow
access to the manifold.
Note
The wash zone probe tubing routed
over the arm may need to be removed
from its routing feature to allow
removal of the arm.
3. Disconnect the pre-trigger and trigger heater.

4. Disconnect the pre-trigger and trigger drain
tubing.
Note
Make note of the position of each
tubing so that they can be replaced in
the correct position on the manifold.
5. Loosen the two (2) screws (captive) securing

6. Grasp the manifold and gently rock it side-to-
side while lifting to free it from the guide pins.
Replacement
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
1. Grasp the manifold, align the guide pins
Manifold Assembly
and seat it on the process path cover.
manifold to the process path cover.
3. Connect the pre-trigger and trigger heater.
tubing.
5. Verify the drain tubing is inserted in the
drain hole.
Install Valve(s)
1. Ensure that the manifold valve ports
openings do not have an old gasket.
2. Place a new gasket (64407) into the
manifold/syringe. [1]
Note
Be very careful to fully insert the
gaskets into the manifold holes
without marking them in any way.
3. Place the valves into the appropriate

holes of the manifold/syringe [2]
4. Gently rotate the valve until the ports are
properly seated
5. Using only fingers, tighten the retaining
ring until it just meets resistance, then
place the plastic valve tool over the
retaining ring and make sure the ring is
snug. [3]
6. Place the valve removal tool on top of the
valve and verify the valve cables are
routed through the slot.
7. With the valve removal tool, tighten
another 1/6 to 1/4 turn (about one flat on
the hexagonal top).
8. Place the valve cables [4] into the routing
clips.
9. Connect the valve electrical connector. [4]
Note
Verify each cable is connected to
the correct valve.
Prepare to Install
Pre-Trigger or
1. Place the liquid waste aspiration arm in
Trigger Level Sense
position and tighten the thumbscrew.
Assemblies
Note
If the wash zone probe tubing was
removed, replace it in the routing
feature.
2. While lifting up on the wash zone

mechanism assembly, insert the wash
zone probe tubing into the routing clip on
the top of the wash zone mechanism
assembly.
Install Pre-Trigger or
Trigger Level Sense
1. Place the level sense assemblies into the
Assemblies
pre-trigger or trigger container and tighten
the caps.
4. Close the rear processing center cover.

errors.
H1.04 HEATER/TUBE,PRE-TRIG/TRIG Version - 96728-111_163_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77604-02 HEATER / TUBE, PRE-TRIG
7-95502-01 Heater / Tube, Trigger
H1.04 HEATER/TUBE,PRE-TRIG/TRIG
14 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

in Ready status.
Flush the Pre- For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to
Trigger or Trigger Caution the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
Level Sensor with Avoid skin and eye contact with Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
Air pre-trigger and trigger solutions.
1. Open the supply and waste

center door.
2. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray
out until it locks into place.
3. Unscrew and pull up on the
level sensor for pre-trigger or
trigger.
4. Angle the sensor (pre-
trigger/trigger) in its container so
that the assembly is out of the
solution.
2133 Air Flush.
module.
cover to access the pre-trigger
or trigger heater.
3. Locate the pre-trigger or trigger
heater tubing to be replaced.
5. Open the rear processing center
access panel.
6. Remove the pump bay access
panel.
Remove Pre-
Trigger or Trigger
1. Disconnect the heater and
Heater
heater thermistor cables from
the heater tubing.
the connector on the manifold.
3. Disconnect the heater tubing
from the manifold.
4. Disconnect the other end of the
tubing from the tubing union
connector on the pre-trigger or
trigger pump.
tubing clip.
6. Feed the tubing up from the
manifold through the hole in the
baseplate.
module.
Replacement
Install Pre-
Trigger or
1. Connect the pre-trigger or trigger
Trigger
heater tubing into the designated
Heater
manifold position.
2. Feed the tubing from the manifold
through the hole in the baseplate.
3. Place the tubing in the routing clip.
4. Connect the other end of the tubing
to the tubing union connector on the
pre-trigger or trigger pump.
5. Connect the heater and heater
thermistor cables to the heater.
Note
Verify that both the pre-trigger
and trigger drain tubing are
inserted in the drain hole.
Install Pre-
Trigger or
1. Place the level sensors into the pre-
Trigger Level
trigger or trigger container and tighten
Sensors
the caps.
door.
Note

3. Select the As needed category from
the maintenance screen under the
system icon.
may be present.
Note
6. Close the rear processing center

access panel.
8. Replace the pump bay panel.
10. Close the rear processing center
cover.
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
H1.05 MANIFOLD,PRE-TRIG/TRIG ASM Version - 96728-111_164_4
List/Part Numbers
7-77629-02 Manifold, Pre-Trig / Trig ASM 11.9
7-77629-03 Manifold, Pre-Trig / Trig ASM
7-77651-02 Manifold, Pre-Trig/Trig 11.9
H1.05 MANIFOLD,PRE-TRIG/TRIG ASM
14 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

in Ready status.
Flush the Pre- For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to
Trigger or Trigger Caution the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
Level Sensor with Avoid skin and eye contact with Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
Air pre-trigger and trigger solutions.

center door.
2. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray
out.
3. Unscrew and pull up on the
level sensor for pre-trigger and
trigger.
4. Angle both sensors (pre-
trigger/trigger) in their container
so that the assembly is out of
the solution.
2133 Air Flush.

module.
cover to access the pre-
trigger/trigger manifold.
3. Locate the pre-trigger/trigger
manifold.
Note
center map for the pre-
trigger/trigger manifold
location (PT/T).

Remove Pre-
Manifold Protective eyewear must be
worn for this step.
1. Disconnect the valve cables V1,

V2, V3, V4.
2. Disconnect the pre-trigger and
trigger heater/tubing.
Note
Verify each heater/tubing
is labeled so they can be
replaced in the correct
3. Disconnect the pre-trigger and

trigger drain tubing. (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Note
thumbscrews securing the
manifold in place.
5. Grasp the manifold and gently
rock it side-to-side while lifting
module.
Replacement
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
Manifold
pins and seat it on the process path
cover.
2. Tighten the two (2) thumbscrews to
secure the manifold to the process
path.
heater/tubing.
Note
Once the heater/tubing are
connected, verify each is
connected to the correct port
on the manifold.

drain tubing.
5. Place the drain tubing is inserted in Note
the drain hole. Video contains no audio sound.
6. Connect the valve cables V1, V2,
V3, V4.
Note
connected, verify each cable
is connected to the correct
valve.
Install Pre-
Trigger or
1. Place the level sensors into the
Trigger Level
pre-trigger or trigger container and
Sensors
tighten the caps.
door.
Note
module for proper
initialization.

Stopped to Ready.

from the maintenance screen under
the system icon.


Note


cover(s).
J1.02 WASTE,CHUTE ASM Version - 96728-111_165_1
List/Part Numbers
7-95598-01 Waste Chute Assembly, Extruded
J1.02 WASTE,CHUTE ASM
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
door.
Remove Solid Waste

Container
1. Slide the waste container out of the
module.
2. Verify that the trap door on the waste
chute is closed.
Access Solid Waste

Chute Caution
Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-
trigger and trigger solutions.
1. Slide out the pre-trigger/trigger tray.
2. Disconnect the tubing and cables from
both the trigger and pre-trigger bottles.
Note
For ease of installation, label
tubing before removal.
3. Press in the tabs on each side of the

tray to remove the tray from the
processing module.
4. Set the tray with bottles aside.
Remove Solid Waste

Chute Assembly
1. Disconnect W105 SOLID WST SNSR
cable from the chute.
2. Grasp the handle of the solid waste
chute and pull it out of the module.
Note
The chute moves on slides that
allow it to be easily pulled in
and out.
3. Discard any RVs that may be in the

chute.
Remove Sensor and

Sensor Board from
1. Remove the screw (non-captive)
Chute
securing the sensor to the chute.
captive) securing the sensor board.
Note
Do not disconnect the cable.
Replacement
Install Sensor and

Sensor Board from
1. Place the sensor onto the chute,
Chute on New
inserting the guide pin and aligning the
Chute
screw hole.
2. Install and tighten the screw.
3. Place the sensor board onto the chute
screw hole. Install and tighten the two
(2) screws.
Install Solid Waste

Chute Assembly
1. Place the chute in the slides.
2. Connect the W105 SOLID WST SNSR
cable to the sensor board at position
J3.
Note
When the sensor is properly
connected, a green LED lights
on the sensor board.
3. Push the chute into the module until the

chute stops.
Note
Be sure the chute is pushed in
so that the chute opening lines
up with the baseplate opening.
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger Tray
1. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray onto
the rails until the locking tabs engage.
2. Install the trigger and pre-trigger tubing
and cables.
Install Solid Waste

Container
1. Slide the container into the processing
module.
2. Verify that the waste chute opened.

1. Close the supply and waste center door
2. If the solid waste container was
shutdown.
emptied update, the supply status
screen at the SCC.
procedure.
J1.03 CABLE,SENSOR,WASTE CHUTE Version - 96728-111_166_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76942-01 Cable, Sensor, Waste Chute
J1.03 CABLE,SENSOR,WASTE CHUTE
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
door.
Remove Solid Waste

Container
module.
2. Verify that the trap door on the waste
chute is closed.
Access Solid Waste

Chute
2. Disconnect the tubing and cables from
both the trigger and pre-trigger bottles.
3. Press in the tabs on each side of the
tray to remove the tray from the
processing module.
Remove Solid Waste

Chute Assembly
1. Disconnect W105 SOLID WST SNSR
cable from the chute.
2. Grasp the handle of the solid waste
chute and pull it out of the module.
Note
The chute moves on slides that
allow it to be easily pulled in
and out.
3. Discard any RVs that may be in the

chute.
Remove Waste Chute

Sensor Cable From
1. Disconnect the sensor cable from the
Chute
waste chute sensor board.
2. Disconnect the sensor cable from the
waste chute sensor.
Replacement
Install Waste
Chute Sensor
1. Connect the sensor cable to the waste
Cable
chute sensor board.
2. Connect the sensor cable to the waste
chute sensor.
Install Solid
Waste Chute
1. Place the chute in the slides.
Assembly
cable to the sensor board at position J3.
Note
connected a green LED lights.

chute stops.
Note
Be sure the chute is pushed in so
that the chute opening lines up
with the baseplate opening.
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
1. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray onto the
Tray
rails until the locking tabs engage.
and cables.
Install Solid
Waste
1. Slide the container into the processing
Container
module.
Note
If the solid waste container was
emptied update the supply status
screen at the SCC.

procedure.
J1.05 SLIDE,WASTE CHUTE Version - 96728-111_168_1
List/Part Numbers
7-94194-01 Waste Chute Top
J1.05 SLIDE,WASTE CHUTE
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Solid
Waste
1. Slide the waste receptacle out of the module.
Receptacle
2. Verify that the trap door on the waste chute is
closed.
Access Solid
Waste Chute Caution
Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger and
trigger solutions.

2. Disconnect the tubing and cables from both the
trigger and pre-trigger bottles.
3. Press in the tabs on each the side of the tray to
remove the tray from the processing module.
Remove Solid
Waste Chute
1. Disconnect W105 SOLID WST SNSR cable from
Assembly
the chute.
2. Grasp the handle of the solid waste chute and
pull it out of the module.
Note
The chute moves on slides that allow it to
be easily pulled in and out.
3. Discard any RVs that may be in the chute.

4. For each slide, remove the three (3) screws (non-
captive) from the underside of the baseplate and
remove the slides.
Note
The solid waste sensor cable clamp is
removed from the slide when the right
center slide mounting screw is removed.
Replacement
Install Solid
Waste Chute
1. Attach each slide to the baseplate by
Assembly
installing the three (3) screws (non-
captive).
Note
The solid waste sensor cable
clamp should be attached to the
center right slide mounting screw.
2. Install the solid waste chute assembly.

3. Place the chute in the slides and push it
into the module.
cable to the sensor board at position J3.
Note
connected a green LED lights.
5. Check to be sure the chute is pushed in

so that the chute opening lines up with
the baseplate opening.
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
1. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray onto the
Tray
rails until the locking tabs engage.
and cables.
Install Solid
Waste
1. Slide the receptacle into the processing
Receptacle
module.
Note
If the solid waste container was
emptied update the supply status
screen at the SCC.

procedure.
J1.06 BD,SENSOR #7 Version - 96728-111_169_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76475-01 BD, Sensor #7
7-76475-02 Bd, Sensor #7 (RoHS)
J1.06 BD,SENSOR #7
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Preparation
module.
4. Verify that the trap door on the waste chute
is closed.
Caution
Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-
trigger and trigger solutions.
Remove Sensor
Board #7 from
1. Grasp the handle of the solid waste chute
Waste Chute
and pull it toward you to gain access to the
waste chute sensor.
2. Disconnect the waste chute sensor cable
from the board.
3. Remove the two (2) screws (non captive)
securing the sensor board, to the waste
chute.
Replacement
Install Sensor
Board #7 on
1. Place the sensor board onto the chute
Waste Chute
screw hole.
2. Install and tighten the two (2) screws.
chute stops.
Note
Be sure the chute is pushed in so
that the chute opening lines up
with the baseplate opening.
2. Slide the solid waste container into the
processing module.
5. If the solid waste container was emptied
update the supply status screen at the
SCC.
Note
initialization.

procedure.
J1.08 SOLID WASTE CONTAINER Version - 96728-111_170_2
List/Part Numbers
7-77161-01 Container, Solid Waste
J1.08 SOLID WASTE CONTAINER
12 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
1. The processing module can
be in any status.
Remove
Waste
Container
center door.
2. Slide the waste container out
of the module.
3. Verify that the trap door on
the waste chute is closed.
Replacement
Install Waste Container

1. Slide the solid waste container into the processing module.
4. If the solid waste container was emptied update the supply status screen at the SCC.

errors.
K1.01 VESSEL,VACUUM,ASM Version - 96728-111_171_2
List/Part Numbers
7-77797-02 Vessel, Vacuum, Zone 1 ASM
7-77797-03 Vacuum Vessel WZ1 Assy w valves and WAM Bracket
7-77797-04 Vacuum Vessel Assembly, WZ1
7-77798-03 Vacuum Vessel WZ2 Assy w valves and WAM Bracket
7-77798-04 Vacuum Vessel Assembly, WZ2
K1.01 Vessel, Vacuum, ASM
Note
Time Required Not Assessed
Standard Tool Kit

Few drops of concentrated or diluted wash buffer
Tools/Materials
SuperLube Grease 2-94851-02
DC-111 silicone grease 7-14237-01
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Prerequisite The processing module must be in For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Stopped or Offline status. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Preparation

cover to access the vacuum vessel.
Note
For WZ1 vacuum vessel,
move the R2 Pipettor to
prevent probe damage.
VIDEO
Remove Note
Wash Zone Video contains no audio sound.
(WZ)
Temperature
Tubing and
Vacuum
Vessel
Remove Pull up on the 3 WZ tubings near the

Wash Zone vacuum vessel connection.
(WZ)
Temperature
Tubing
Remove
Vacuum
1. Remove the vacuum inlet tubing [1]
Vessel
from the vacuum valve. [2]
2. Disconnect the vacuum vessel

vacuum valve (top) connector. [3]
3. Disconnect the vacuum vessel drain

valve (bottom) connector. [7]
4. Loosen the 2 screws holding the

WAM Thermistor Bracket to the
vacuum valve (top) and set the
bracket with the 3 thermistor
tubings aside.
5. Loosen the thumbscrew [4]

securing the vacuum vessel bracket
to the mount on the baseplate.
6. Remove the vacuum vessel.

Note
If the bypass or gutter drain
tube is present, add a few
drops of wash buffer prior to
removing the vacuum vessel
to ensure the drain tube
remains inside the gutter.
Refer also to TSB 116-079-
Waste Gutter Leak
Prevention to reinsert a
removed drain tube.
Replacement
VIDEO
Lubricating the Note
Vacuum Vessel Video contains no audio sound.
By-Pass Tube (if
removed) and
Install Vacuum
Vessel
Lubricating the
Vacuum Vessel
1. Lubricate the bypass tube with
Bypass Tube (if
SuperLube grease and insert the
removed)
vacuum vessel drain into the hole
on the baseplate.
2. Ensure orientation of bypass
tube for WZ1 and WZ2 are
correct for proper draining.
Note
Refer also to TSB 116-
079B - Waste Gutter Leak
Prevention
WZ1 alignment of
the bypass tube
should face on a
diagonal across the
rear of the
instrument so the
index mark points
toward the process
path disk motor.
WZ2 alignment of
the bypass tube
will point into the
process path when
installed.
Install Vacuum
Vessel
1. Insert the vacuum vessel drain
into the hole on the baseplate.
Note
If the by-pass tube was
left inside the baseplate,
add a few drops of diluted
buffer or buffer
concentrate on the
vacuum vessel to easily
insert it into the drain tube.
Note
Ensure by-pass tube is
correctly oriented and free
from kinks to allow proper
draining.
2. Align the vacuum vessel bracket
thumbscrew [4] with the mount
on the baseplate and tighten.
3. Connect the vacuum valve (top)

connector.
4. Connect the vacuum vessel drain

valve (bottom) connector. [7]
5. Connect the vacuum inlet tubing

to the barb fitting on the side
vacuum vessel. [1]
Note
Add a few drops of buffer
or buffer concentrate on
the barb fitting to lubricate
it and easily slip the
tubing onto the barb.
6. Install the WAM thermistor

bracket with 3 WZ temperature
tubings to the bracket (top) and
secure the 2 screws.
7. Install the 3 wash zone
temperature tubings to the barb
fittings on the top of the vacuum
vessel.
cover(s).

module.
Note
power must be ON and at
the Snapshot screen prior
to powering on the

change the status of the
handler from Stopped to Ready.

errors.
K1.02 VALVE, DRAIN, WASH ZONE Version - 96728-111_172_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76447-01 Valve, Drain, Vacuum Vessel
K1.02 VALVE, DRAIN, WASH ZONE
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
access the vacuum vessel.
Remove
Vacuum
1. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the vacuum vessel
Vessel
bracket to the mount on the baseplate.
Drain Valve
2. Lift the vacuum vessel to access the vacuum vessel
drain valve. [1]
3. Disconnect the vacuum vessel drain valve (bottom)
connector.
4. Cut tubing between the valve and vacuum vessel.
5. Remove the two (2) screws (non-captive) from the
vacuum vessel bracket.
6. Cut off any tubing remaining on the vacuum vessel
barb fitting.
Note
If the valve coil is not electrically open, it is
possible that the body is just clogged. The
valve may be disassembled for cleaning by
using a large screwdriver to unscrew the
entire solenoid assembly [1] from the valve
body. The plunger, diaphragm and spring will
drop out of the solenoid assembly. Use 0.5%
sodium hypochlorite solution and a small
brush to remove any protein build up, then
rinse with deionized water.
Replacement
Install
1. If the valve was disassembled for cleaning, reassemble
Vacuum
Vessel following the picture as a guide. Insert the diaphragm and
Drain plunger assembly into the valve body, then place the
Valve spring into the hole on the end of the plunger. Thread the
stem into the valve body.
Note
A very thin coat of DC-111 silicone grease can be
applied to the mating surface of the valve body and
stem to insure a good seal and easier separation for
the next cleaning. Do not allow any grease to get
inside the stem or on the plunger.
2. If the solenoid was disassembled place the base ring,

rubber spacer, solenoid and retainer nut onto the stem.
3. Use a large common screwdriver to turn the stem firmly
into the valve body. Do not overtighten. Hold the stem with
the screw driver and use as small adjustable wrench to
firmly tighten the retainer nut if it had been removed.
4. Orient the valve according to the picture to identify inlet
and outlet ports. There is a flat spot [1] over one of the
threaded inserts used to hold the valve to the vacuum
vessel bracket. With this flat spot facing to the left as
shown in the picture, the top port [2] goes to the vacuum
vessel and the bottom port [3] goes to the drain.
Note
The valve body must be oriented this way in order
to reduce the chance of clogging early. The
diaphragm closes against two concentric openings in
the valve body. The inner opening goes to the fill
port [1] with the liquid path shown in red. If the drain
port [2] was on top, liquid would have to run
upwards to get to the central port. Aligning the valve
so that liquid flows from red to green allows the
valve body to drain completely. If the path ran from
green to red, liquid would collect under the central
port. This would quickly cause a protein build up
which would clog the valve.
5. Connect the piece of tubing between the valve and the

vacuum vessel.
Note
A few drops of buffer or buffer concentrate may be
placed on the barb fitting to lubricate it. This makes
it much easier to slip the tubing onto the manifold
barb.
6. Place the drain valve on the vacuum vessel bracket

aligning the screw hole.
7. Install the two (2) screws (non-captive) securing the
vacuum vessel to the bracket.
8. Insert the vacuum vessel drain into the hole on the
baseplate.
9. Align the vacuum vessel bracket thumbscrew with the
mount on the baseplate and tighten.
10. Connect the vacuum vessel drain valve (bottom) connector.

Note
The system control center power must be ON prior
to turning on the processing module for proper
initialization.
3. To change the status of the processing module and sample

handler from Stopped to Ready, perform the Startup
procedure.
errors.
K1.03 VALVE,VACUUM, WASH ZONE Version - 96728-111_173_2
List/Part Numbers
7-76446-01 Valve, Vacuum
K1.03 VALVE,VACUUM, WASH ZONE
Not Assessed
Time Required
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation

vacuum vessel.
Note
For WZ1 vacuum vessel, move the R2
Pipettor to prevent probe damage.
Remove
Vacuum Valve
1. Remove the vacuum inlet tubing [1]
from the vacuum valve [2].
2. Disconnect the vacuum valve cable

(top) connector [3].
3. Loosen vacuum vessel baseplate

screw [4].
4. Remove the thermistor tubing (3)

from the top of the vacuum vessel.
5. Set aside the WAM thermistor

bracket and disconnect the tubing
(3) from the top of the vacuum
vessel.

captive) [6] securing the valve to
the vacuum vessel bracket.
7. Remove tubing [5] between the

valve and vacuum vessel.
8. Remove the vacuum inlet piece of

tubing from the valve.
Replacement
Install
Vacuum
1. Orient the valve so the flat spot
Valve
(green dot) [1] faces as shown
in the picture and connect the:
Bottom port [2] to the
vacuum inlet tubing piece.
Side port [3] to the
vacuum vessel.
Note
A few drops of buffer or
buffer concentrate may
be placed on the barb
fitting to lubricate it. This
makes it much easier to
slip the tubing onto the
manifold barb.
2. Loosely attach the two (2) (non-

captive) screws to the vacuum
valve on the vacuum vessel
bracket aligning the screw hole.
3. Install the WAM thermistor

bracket and secure the screws.
4. Attach the top thermistor tubing

(3) to the top of the vacuum
vessel.
5. Install the vacuum vessel into

the baseplate and tighten the
screw. (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
6. Connect the vacuum valve (Top)

connector.
7. Attach the vacuum line to the
valve port [2].
for Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: System
Operation startup, pause, and shutdown.
cover(s).

module.
Note
The system control
center power must be ON
prior to turning on the


errors.
K1.04 PUMP,VACUUM Version - 96728-111_174_3
List/Part Numbers
7-77795-01 Pump, Vacuum
K1.04 PUMP,VACUUM
75 mins
Time Required
PV350 Pressure Adaptor (Vacuum Gauge)
Torx-15 Driver
Vacuum Pump Diaphragm kit (7-201782-01)
Tools/Materials Fitting kit, ARM (7-78175-01)
Decon kit, ARM (7-78172-01)
Vacuum Guage capable of measuring vacuum in the 0-30� mercury range (example: Fluke PV350 available
through the CELL-DYN product line)
6� piece of TYGON tubing with an inside diameter of 3/8�
Caution
Hot Surface
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Test For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System

Vacuum Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
1. Assemble vacuum system troubleshooting
Pump System status.
manifold.
Note
Refer to P-23 to assemble the vacuum
system troubleshooting manifold.
2. Connect the Fluke PV350 to the vacuum manifold

and adjust the Fluke PV350 as described in P-23
before performing the vacuum test.
Perform the For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System

Vacuum Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
1. Perform the Vacuum Pump Test Section in P-23 to
Pump Test System status.
determine if the pump requires rebuilding or
replacement.

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
3. Remove the pump bay panel to gain access to the
vacuum pump.
Remove
Vacuum Note
Pump The vacuum pump can reach temperatures of 170F
(76.7C). Use caution when working on or around
the vacuum pump (even after power OFF). Allow
the pump to cool prior to touching it.
1. Lift up and out to remove the cover plate.
2. Unfasten the quarter turn screw and loosen the
buffer transfer pump platform. Lay it in front of the
vacuum pump.
3. Cut the tubing off at the barb fittings on the top of
the pump.
Note
Label each tubing so they can be replaced
in the correct position on the pump.
4. Disconnect the electrical cables from the pump.
5. Pull up on the pump to disengage the feet from the
structure.
6. Remove the pump from the module.
Replacement
Install
Diaphragm
Replacement
1. Remove the pump head.

2. Remove four screws [1] from hold down plate [2].
Discard screws.
3. Remove hold down plate, diaphragm [3] and diaphragm
liner [4] from connecting rod top. Wipe connecting rod
top and hold down plate with a clean soft cloth.
4. Center the new diaphragm, liner, and hold down plate
over connecting rod holes.
Note
Make sure all holes align properly and that the
diaphragm is centered in the well of the housing.
5. Insert four new screws and screw down.
6. Clean inside of head and replace head.
Install Intake
1. Remove four (4) head screws [1] and head [2] and
and Exhaust
Valve discard screws.
2. Remove four (4) screws [8] from valve plate and remove
Replacement
the valve plate from the head.
Note
If valve plate needs to be pried out of head
cavity, be careful that the intake hole seat area
does not get damaged. If damage should occur
the valve plate will need to be replaced.
3. Remove the gasket [3] and discard.

4. Remove screw [5], flapper [6], restraint [9] and keeper
[4] from top side of valve plate [7], and discard.
Note
Wipe valve plate with a soft clean cloth.
5. Install the new gasket, flapper and keeper with the new
screw.
Note
Make sure the end of the flapper covers the
intake hole and that the restraint and keeper are
aligned properly.
6. Turn valve plate over and repeat procedure on exhaust

flapper.
Note
New pumps have no restraint on the lower
assemblies. Wipe inside of head with a clean soft
cloth.
7. Install new gasket.

8. Replace valve plate in head.
9. Insert 4 new screws and tighten in a criss-cross pattern.
10. Replace head and tighten the screws in a criss-cross
pattern.
11. Connect the decon fitting quick disconnect to the intake
side of the pump.
12. A typical vacuum pump with all internal parts replaced
should read approximately 20 - 23 inHg. If the reading is
lower than this recheck the positioning of the flapper
valve and check that the gasket that is between the
intake chamber and the output chamber has not been
distorted.
Install
Vacuum 1. Put the new pump into position. Push down until the feet
Pump of the pump engage in the structure.
2. Connect the electrical cables to the pump.
3. Connect the tubing to the designated ports on top of the
pump.
Note
A few drops of buffer or buffer concentrate may
be placed on the barb fitting to lubricate it. This
makes it much easier to slip the tubing onto the
barb.
4. Place the buffer transfer pump back into position and
fasten the quarter turn screw.
5. Place the cover plate back into position.

Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
Note
Startup procedure.

errors.
K1.05 WASH CUP GROUND CABLE Version - 96728-111_139_1
List/Part Numbers
7-94197-01 Cable, Wash Cup Ground
K1.05 WASH CUP GROUND CABLE
15 min.
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

System status.
Preparation
cover(s) to access the reagent wash
station.
2. Locate the reagent wash station to be
replaced.
Note
for the reagent wash station,
locations (R1W, R2W).
Remove
Reagent Wash
1. Place an absorbent towel under the buffer
Station
inlet tubing connection, and disconnect.
2. Place an absorbent towel under the buffer
outlet tubing connection, and disconnect.
reagent wash station to the wash station
mount.
guide pins.
5. Remove the wash station.
Replacement
Prepare
Wash Cup
1. Ensure that the ground contact (bottom
Ground
surface of the wash cup mounting
Contacts
feature) is clean.
Note
If the wash cup mounting feature
can not be cleaned, replace the
wash cup.
2. Ensure that the surface of the mounting

post is clean.
Note
To clean the surface, use tap
water and a light abrasive scraping
action,
Attach Wash
Cup Ground
1. Locate the process path ground closest
Cable
to the wash cup.
2. Remove the screw and attach the small
terminal ring of the wash cup ground
cable.
3. Firmly tighten the ground screw.
4. Using wire ties as required, route the
wash cup ground cable to the wash cup
mounting post.
Note
Ensure that the wire is not routed
in an area were the cable will
interfere with the movement of any
device.
5. At the other end of the cable, align the

rectangular terminal with the two pins on
the wash cup mounting post.
6. With terminal placed on the mounting
post, install the wash cup.
7. Ensure the wash cup is fully seated on
the mounting post.
Connect
Wash Cup
1. At the wash cup top port, connect the
Tubing
buffer inlet tubing.
2. At the bottom port, connect the buffer
outlet (vacuum) tubing to the barb fitting
on the wash station.
Note
initialization.

K1.06 VESSEL, VACUUM, REAGENT WASH CUP Version - 96728-111_140_1
List/Part Numbers
K1.06 VESSEL, VACUUM, REAGENT WASH CUP
30 min.
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

ARCHITECT System Operations
1. The processing module must be in Stopped, or Offline status.
Manual, Section 1: Use or function,
Preparation
3. Remove the pump bay panel to gain access to the fluid pump area.
Remove
Transfer
1. Loosen the thumbscrew and pull the transfer pump rack toward the
Pump Rack
rear of the instrument.
2. Leave the tubing connected and lay the rack assembly on top the
vacuum pump.
Remove
Reagent Note
Wash Cup The vacuum vessel is part of the drain fluidics rack mounted to the left
Vacuum wall. It is not necessary to remove this assembly. If you chose to,
Vessel disconnect W155 under the large vacuum accumulator, various tubing
and release the assembly by the two 1/4 screws.
1. The vacuum vessel is suspended by tubing between the vacuum and

drain valves.
2. Disconnect the two small reagent wash cup drain tubes at the top of
the vessel.
3. Carefully pry the tubing from the bottom vacuum vessel drain port.
4. Carefully pry the tubing from the top vacuum port, and remove the
vessel.
5. If either of the tubes was damaged, remove the appropriate valve.
(K1.02 VALVE, DRAIN, WASH ZONE)
Replacement
Install
Vacuum Note
Vessel Dipping the ends of the tubing into a small
amount of a mild soap solution will make
sliding the tubing on easier.
1. For this application the four top ports [3] on

the vacuum vessel must be configured with
two (2) barbed fittings and two (2) plugs.
2. Connect the upper vacuum valve to the top
of the assembly [1]. Ensure that the tubing
is pushed fully over the fitting barb.
3. Connect the lower drain valve to the bottom
fitting [2]. Ensure that the tubing is pushed
fully over the fitting barb.
4. Connect the two small reagent wash cup
lines to the two barbed ports on the top
surface [3].
5. Ensure that cable W155 is still properly
connected.
Install
Transfer
1. Place the right edge of the transfer rack a
Pump
long the small lip on the right wall.
Rack
2. As you slide the rack toward the back,
check the tubing at the back is not crimped.
3. Continue sliding the transfer rack until the
front left latch screw is aligned with the
drain rack

1. Leave the pump bay panel off until
verification is complete.Connect the liquid
waste outlet.
Note
initialization.

K1.07A Wash Zone VACUUM VESSEL Version - 96728-111_141_3
List/Part Numbers
7-77712-02 Vacuum Vessel, Upgrade
7-77712-03 Vacuum Vessel Rebuild Kit
K1.07A WASH ZONE VACUUM VESSEL
30 min.
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Open the appropriate cover to access the
vacuum vessel.
3. Locate the wash zone vacuum vessel(s) near
the wash zone assemblies.
Remove
Small
1. With one hand, hold down the vacuum vessel.
Tubing
With the other hand, pull up on the tubing near
the connection.
Remove
Vacuum
1. Remove the tubing from the bottom of the upper
Vessel
vacuum valve.
2. Remove the drain tubing from the top of the
bottom drain valve.
Replacement
Preassemble
New
1. Install the supplied 1/4" (6 mm) diameter
Vacuum
tubing on the top fitting [1] of the new
Vessel
vacuum vessel.
Note
Wetting the inside of the tubing and
the fitting with buffer will make the
assembly easier.

tubing on the vessel bottom fitting [2].
3. Using the supplied tubing fittings, configure
the top ports [3] on the new vessel as that of
the remove vessel.
Number of barbed ports
Wash Zone 1 = 3
Wash Zone 2 = 4
Install
Vacuum
1. Insert the open end of the 1/4" (6 mm)
Vessel
tubing over the bottom barbed fitting of the
upper vacuum valve [1].
Note
assembly easier.
2. Determine the amount of bottom tubing

length required to completly cover the fitting
of the bottom drain valve. Trim off any
access tubing.
tubing over the top barbed fitting of the
lower drain valve.
Connect
Vacuum
1. Connect the appropriate tubes to the small
Tubes to
fittings on the top surface of the vessel:
Small Ports
Wash Zone 1 - three (3) tubing /
sensor tubing
Wash Zone 2 - three (3) tubing /
sensor tubing and one (1) waste
aspirate tube

Note
initialization.

K1.07B Wash Cup Vacuum Vessel Version - 96728-111_4840_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77712-02 Vacuum Vessel, Upgrade
7-77712-03 Vacuum Vessel Rebuild Kit
K1.07B WASH CUP VACUUM VESSEL
30 min.
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Open the appropriate cover to access the
vacuum vessel.
3. Locate the Reagent Wash Cup vacuum vessel
on the left wall of the pump bay.
Remove
Small
1. With one hand, hold down on the vacuum vessel.
Tubing
With the other hand, pull up on the tubing near
the connection.
Remove
Vacuum
1. Remove the tubing from the bottom of the upper
Vessel
vacuum valve.
2. Remove the drain tubing from the top of the
bottom drain valve.
Replacement
Preassemble
New
Vacuum
tubing on the top fitting [1] of the new
Vessel
vacuum vessel.
Note
assembly easier.

tubing on the vessel bottom fitting [2].
3. Using the supplied tubing fittings, configure
the top ports [3] on the new vessel as that of
the remove vessel.
Number of barbed ports
Reagent Wash Cup = 2
Install
Vacuum
Vessel
tubing over the bottom barbed fitting of the
upper vacuum valve [1].
Note
assembly easier.
2. Determine the amount of bottom tubing

length required to completly cover the fitting
of the bottom drain valve. Trim off any
access tubing.
tubing over the top barbed fitting of the
lower drain valve.
Connect
Vacuum
1. Connect the appropriate tubes to the small
Tubes to
fittings on the top surface of the vessel:
Small Ports
Reagent Wash Cup - two (2) active
wash cup vacuum tubes

Note
initialization.

K1.08 VACUUM,ACCUMULATOR Version - 96728-111_175_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78400-01 Accumulator, Vacuum ASM
K1.08 VACUUM,ACCUMULATOR
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the processing module
vacuum accumulator.
Remove
Vacuum
1. Cut the tubing between the vacuum accumulator
Accumulator
and the vacuum drain valve located at the bottom
of the accumulator.
2. Cut the remaining tubing from the vacuum drain
valve.
3. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the vacuum
vessel to the vacuum accumulator bracket and set
the vacuum vessel aside.
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the vacuum
accumulator bracket to the frame and remove the
bracket.
5. Cut the tubing off at the four (4) barb fittings on
top of the accumulator.
6. Disconnect W89 VAC Liquid SNSR cable.
7. Disconnect W89 Vac switch cable.
8. Remove the accumulator from the module.
Replacement
Install
Vacuum
1. Connect W89 VAC Liquid SNSR cable.
Accumulator
2. Connect W89 Vac switch cable.
3. Connect the tubing to the top of the vacuum
accumulator by pushing the tubing onto the four
(4) barb fitting at least 3/8 of an inch.
Note
A few drops of buffer or buffer
concentrate may be placed on the barb
fitting to lubricate it. This makes it much
easier to slip the tubing onto the barb.
4. Place the accumulator bracket around the

accumulator and align the screw holes to the
mounts on the frame.
6. Align the vacuum vessel bracket thumbscrew
with the screw mount on the accumulator
bracket.
7. Connect the piece of tubing between the drain
valve and the accumulator.

and shutdown.
Note


errors.
K1.09 FILTER,VACUUM Version - 96728-111_176_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78475-01 Filter, Vacuum
K1.09 FILTER,VACUUM
Not Assessed
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation
module
3. Remove the pump bay panel to
access the vacuum Filter.
Remove
Vacuum
1. Cut the inlet and outlet tubing off
Filter
at the barb fittings on the filter.
2. Remove the filter from the
module.
Replacement
Install
Vacuum
1. Connect the vacuum filter to the inlet and outlet
Filter
tubing by pushing the tubing onto the barb fitting
at least 3/8" (9.53mm).
Note
A few drops of buffer or buffer concentrate
may be placed on the barb fitting to
lubricate it. This makes it much easier to
slip the tubing onto the barb.

Operation instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and
shutdown.
Note


errors.
K1.10 VACUUM SENSOR SWITCH Version - 96728-111_142_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77716-01 Switch, Vacuum
K1.10 VACUUM SENSOR SWITCH
Not Assessed
Time Required
Part Number 8160042301

Tools/Materials Teflon Tape
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
vacuum accumulator.
Remove
Vacuum
1. Cut the tubing between the vacuum accumulator
Accumulator
and the vacuum drain valve located at the bottom
of the accumulator.
2. Cut the remaining tubing from the vacuum drain
valve.
3. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the vacuum
vessel to the vacuum accumulator bracket and set
the vacuum vessel aside.
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the vacuum
accumulator bracket to the frame and remove the
bracket.
5. Cut the tubing off at the four (4) barb fittings on
top of the accumulator.
6. Disconnect W89 VAC Liquid SNSR cable.
7. Disconnect W89 Vac switch cable.
8. Remove the accumulator from the module.
Remove
Vacuum
1. At the top of the vacuum accumulator, locate and
Sensor
remove the vacuum sensor [1].
Switch
2. Remove any remaining teflon tape.
Replacement
Install
Vacuum
1. At the threaded end of the vacuum switch, cover
Switch
the threads with a layer of teflon tape.
2. Carefully install the switch into the opening on
the vacuum accumulator.
3. Ensure that the vacuum switch, is making a tight
seal wtih the vacuum accumulator.
Install
Vacuum
1. Connect W89 VAC Liquid SNSR cable.
Accumulator
2. Connect W89 Vac switch cable.
3. Connect the tubing to the top of the vacuum
accumulator by pushing the tubing onto the four
(4) barb fitting at least 3/8 of an inch.
Note
A few drops of buffer or buffer
concentrate may be placed on the barb
fitting to lubricate it. This makes it much
easier to slip the tubing onto the barb.
4. Place the accumulator bracket around the

accumulator and align the screw holes to the
mounts on the frame.
6. Align the vacuum vessel bracket thumbscrew
with the screw mount on the accumulator
bracket.
7. Connect the piece of tubing between the drain
valve and the accumulator.

and shutdown.
Note


errors.
K1.11 WASTE MANIFOLD Version - 96728-111_177_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78104-02 Waste Manifold Kit, Crack Resistant
K1.11 WASTE MANIFOLD
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System
status.
Preparation
3. Remove the pump bay panel to access the
waste manifold.
Remove
Waste
1. Place an absorbent towel under the waste
Manifold
manifold.
2. Cut each piece of tubing off just above the
barb fitting on the manifold.
securing the waste manifold bracket to the
frame.
Replacement

Install
Waste
1. Align the waste manifold bracket to the holes on
Manifold
in the frame.
3. Connect the tubing to the waste manifold by
pushing the tubing onto the barb fitting at least
3/8 of an inch.
Note
A few drops of buffer or buffer concentrate
may be placed on the barb fitting to
lubricate it. This makes it much easier to
slip the tubing onto the barb.

shutdown.
Note


errors.
2 G111 - Waste Drainage Verify waste is draining freely.
K1.12 VALVE,DRAIN,ACCUMULATOR Version - 96728-111_179_1
K1.12 VALVE,DRAIN,ACCUMULATOR
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
3. Remove the pump bay panel to gain
access to the accumulator drain valve.
Remove
Accumulator
1. Disconnect the valve connector.
Drain Valve
2. Cut tubing between the valve and the
waste manifold.
3. Cut tubing between the valve and the
vacuum accumulator.
4. Cut off any tubing remaining on the
vacuum accumulator and waste manifold
barb fittings.
Replacement
Install
Accumulator
1. Connect the piece of tubing between the
Drain Valve
drain valve and the accumulator.
2. Connect the piece of tubing between the
drain valve and the waste manifold.
3. Connect the valve connector.
Note
initialization.


errors.
2 G111 - Waste Drainage Verify waste is draining freely.
K1.13 WASH STATION,SAMPLE Version - 96728-111_180_3
List/Part Numbers
7-77729-01 Wash Station, Sample
7-77729-02 Wash Cup, Wire Grounded, Sample - STAT
7-77729-03 Wash Station, Sample - STAT, Bypassed Gutter
K1.13 WASH STATION,SAMPLE
10 min
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials 2-94851-02 SuperLube Grease
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation
1. Lift the front processing center
cover to access the sample wash
station.
2. Locate the sample wash station.

Note
center map for the sample or
STAT wash station, location
(SW or SWT).
Remove
Sample and
STAT
the wash station to the wash station
(i2000SR)
mount.
Wash
Station(s) 2. Loosen the pipettor base screw to
remove the attached ground wire [1]
and slide the connector out from
under the pipettor screw.
3. While holding the yellow, drain by-

pass tube [2] in place, grasp the
wash station and gently rock side to
side while lifting to free it from the
guide pin.
To ensure the yellow, drain
by-pass tube remains in the
baseplate, a long flat blade Note
screwdriver may be used to Video contains no audio sound.
push and hold the drain tube
in place while removing the
wash station.
Note
To replace a removed yellow,
drain by-pass tube, refer to
the current TSB 116-079 or
115-121 "Waste Gutter Leak
Preventation" for the
instructions and orientation.
4. Remove and set the wash station

aside.
I
Replacement
Install Sample
and STAT
(i2000SR) Note
Wash Station(s) Ensure drain by-pass tube
is fully seated.
1. Grasp the wash station, align the

guide pins and seat it on the wash
station mount.
Note
To help seat the wash cup

you may lightly grease the
lower outside prior to
inserting it into the bypass
gutter sleeve. (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
2. Tighten the thumbscrew securing

the wash station to the mount. Note
3. Connect the ground wire to the
pipettor base screw. [1]
Prepare for For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to

Operation the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. Perform a Startup procedure.
2. Select As Needed category from
the maintenance screen under the For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
system icon. System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,

Note
If leaks, foam, or bubbles,
are seen, repeat the
5. Check to see that resistance

between the wash station targets
and the associated pipettor is less
than 5 ohms.
6. Check to see that resistance

between the pipettor base and the
process path ground points is not
more than 0.5 ohms.
7. Calibrate the pipettor associated

with the wash station.

errors.
K1.14 WASH STATION,REAGENT Version - 96728-111_181_3
List/Part Numbers
7-78133-01 Wash Station, Reagent
7-78133-02 Wash Station, Reduced Stem
7-78133-03 Wash Station, Reagent, Wire Grounded
7-78133-04 Wash Station, Reagent, Bypassed Gutter
K1.14 WASH STATION,REAGENT
12 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
be in Stopped, or Offline status.
Preparation
reagent wash station.
2. Locate the reagent wash

station to be replaced.
Note
center map for the
reagent wash station,
locations (R1W, R2W).
Remove
Reagent
Wash
the buffer outlet tubing (bottom)
Station
connection, and gently pull the
tubing from the port to
disconnect.

the buffer inlet (top) connection,
and unscrew the tubing to
disconnect.

securing the reagent wash
station to the wash station
mount. (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Note Note
If the wash station has Video contains no audio sound.
an attached ground wire,
slightly loosen the
pipettor base screw
where this wire is
attached. Slide the
connector out from
under the pipettor screw,
then continue to step 4.
4. Grasp the wash station and

gently rock side to side while
lifting to free it from the guide
pins.
5. Remove the wash station.
Note
If the drain tube is
present, add a few drops
of wash buffer prior to
removing the wash cup
to ensure the drain tube
remains inside the
gutter. [1] Refer also to
TSB 116-079-Waste
Gutter Leak Prevention
to reinsert a removed
drain tube.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. If replacing the same Reagent Wash
Wash
Cup removed, prior to replacement use
Station
tap water to clean the:
a. bottom surface of the reagent

wash cup mounting feature.
b. top surface of the wash cup

mount
2. Place the reagent wash station into the

drain in the baseplate.
Note
If the drain tube is present, add a
few drops of wash bugger to the (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
external, bottom area of the wash
cup to easily insert it. Note
3. Align the guide pins and seat the wash
cup on the wash station mount.
wash station to the mount.
Note
If the new wash station has an
attached ground wire:
route it to the base of the
pipettor associated with
the wash station
slightly loosen one pipettor
base screw
slide the wash station
connector under the screw
tighten the base screw and
ensure the wire is out of
the way.
5. Connect the buffer inlet tubing (top).

6. Connect the buffer outlet tubing (bottom)
to the barb fitting on the wash station.
Prepare For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to

for the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. Perform a Startup procedure.
maintenance screen under the system For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
icon. System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
Flush Fluids, to remove any air that may
be present.

the flush.
Note
5. Check to see that resistance between

the wash station targets and the
associated pipettor is less than 5 ohms.
6. Check to see that resistance between

the pipettor base and the process path
ground points is not more than 0.5
ohms.
7. Calibrate the pipettor associated with

the wash station.
Note
If the resistance at the wash cup
is >0.5 ohms or the probe
calibration fails at the wash cup:
clean the pipettor screw,
screw insertion, and wash
ground wire or move the
ground wire to another
ground screw on the
pipettor
replace the screw and
ground wire.
open/close freely.
L1.01 POWER SUPPLY Version - 96728-111_182_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78164-02 Fuse Kit, Card Cage Pwr. Supply and RSH
7-78700-01 Power Supply,
7-92694-03 Power Supply, Artesyn, IVDD Labeled, without caddy.
L1.01 POWER SUPPLY
3.0 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Lifting Hazard - The power supply weighs over 100 pounds (45 kilos). Use two people to move.
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Open Power
Supply Box
1. Remove banding.
2. Lift box up and off of pallet.
Remove
Caddy
1. Remove tie down bolts for power supply and
power supply caddy.
2. Remove power supply caddy from pallet.
Preparation
2. Disconnect the module power plug from the
electrical outlet.
3. Open the front, lower left access door.
4. Open the front, lower right access door to access
the card cage.
Note
Before continuing, take the appropriate
ESD precautions.
Remove
Connectors
1. Loosen the screw securing the card cage cover in
on Power
place.
Supply
2. Open the card cage door.
3. Release the card cage and swing it forward to
gain access to the connectors on the power
supply.
Note
Prior to disconnecting any cables, note
power supply connectors that have no
cables attached.
4. Disconnect the connections from the power

supply.
5. Swing the card cage back and fasten into place.
Access
Power
1. Close the front doors of the module.
Supply
2. If required, move the module away from the wall
to gain access to the power supply.
3. Remove the left rear skin to gain access to the
power supply.
4. Disconnect the reagent cooler and vacuum pump
power cords from the lower right side of the power
supply. They are in the lower left side of the
reagent cooler compartment, under the reagent
cooler.
Remove
Power
1. Loosen the six (6) mounting screws securing the
Supply
power supply to the module frame.
2. Position the power supply caddy behind the
instrument power supply. Lower the caddy arms
until they are below the power supply handles.
3. Slide the power supply caddy in as far as
possible.
4. While cranking the caddy arms up, reposition the
caddy so the notches in the arms engage the
power supply handles.
5. Once the caddy has made contact with the power
supply, carefully raise and level it until it moves
easily.
6. Pull the caddy away from the instrument, adjusting
the arms as needed to permit the power supply to
move freely.
7. Remove the power supply.
Place
Defective
1. Place the defective power supply on the area of
Power
the pallet previously occupied by the power supply
Supply on
caddy.
Pallet
Remove
New Power
1. Using the power supply caddy, remove the new
Supply from
power supply from the pallet.
Pallet
Replacement
Install Power
Supply
1. Inspect the power supply compartment and
verify that no cables are in the power supply
area.
2. With the new power supply on the caddy,
adjust the arms so the power supply lines up
with the opening.
3. Slide the power supply into the instrument,
adjusting the arms as needed to allow free
travel into the instrument.
Note
As second person may be needed to
prevent the instrument from moving.
4. Once the power supply is in, lower the

cradle arms and remove the cradle.
5. Align and tighten the six (6) screws securing
the power supply into place.
Install Power
Connectors to
1. Connect the reagent refrigerator and vacuum
Power Supply
pump connectors.
2. Open the front left and right access doors to
access the power supply connectors.
3. Loosen the screw securing the card cage
cover in place.
5. Release the card cage and swing it forward
to gain access to the connectors on the
power supply.
Note
Refer to the list of unused connectors
while connecting the power supply.
6. Connect the connectors on the power
supply.
7. Close the door to the card cage and tighten
the screws securing it in place.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Measure the AC input voltage at the wall
plug.
power supply cover to the power supply and
remove the cover.
3. Verify the voltage and the frequency
connectors are set to the correct values.
Note
Failure to perform this step causes
damage and/or incorrect operation of
the module.
4. Install the power supply back cover.

5. Install the line cord on the power supply.
6. Plug the power supply cord into the outlet.
7. Close the lower left and right access door.
Note
initialization.
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.02 FAN,PS Version - 96728-111_183_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92071-01 Fan, PS
L1.02 FAN,PS
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal

Preparation
1. Power OFF processing module.
2. Disconnect the line cord from the
power outlet.
3. Open front right door.
4. Open card cage.
Remove
Power Supply
1. Disconnect cable connected on the
Fan
back of power supply (connector B1 or
B2).
2. Unscrew the four (4) screws securing
the fan to the back of power supply.
3. Remove fan and grid.
Replacement
Install
Power
1. Mount the new fan and grid to the power supply
Supply Fan
back wall using the four (4) screws.
Note
Look at the label on the side of the fan and
verify that the arrow is pointing toward the
power supply chassis (the arrow indicates the
air flow).
2. Connect the fan cable to connector B1/B2 dependent

on which fan you have removed.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Measure the AC input voltage at the wall plug.
2. Remove the four (4) screws securing the power
supply cover to the power supply and remove the
cover.
3. Verify or set the voltage setting connector to the
correct frequency.
Note
Failure to perform this step causes damage
and/or incorrect operation of the module.

Note
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.03 BD,36V MODULE,PS Version - 96728-111_184_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92063-01 Bd, 36V Module, PS,
L1.03 BD,36V MODULE,PS
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Disconnect the line cord from the power outlet
and from the power supply.
3. Open lower left back panel.
Remove Power
Supply Back WARNING
Panel To reduce the risk of shock, wait at least
two (2) minutes after power is removed
before servicing a board in the power
supply.
1. Remove the four (4) screws attaching the back

panel to the power supply chassis.
2. Push the back panel upwards to release it from
the power supply chassis.
Note
Take static precautions prior to handling
any boards or modules.
Remove Power
Supply 36V
1. Disconnect cable from J1 on the module.
Module Board
2. Grab the aluminum flange at the front of the
module, and slide the module out of from the
power supply card cage.
Replacement
Install Power Supply

36V Module Board
1. Slide the module into the slot, and verify
that the board is fully seated.
2. Connect cable to J1 located at the front of
the module.
Replace Power
Supply Back Panel
1. Push the back panel downwards to lock it
to the power supply chassis.
2. Align the back panel to the four screw
slots.
3. Replace the four (4) screws securing the
power supply back panel to the power
supply chassis.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Connect the line cord to the power supply
and the power outlet.
2. Replace the lower left back panel.
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.05 BD,QUAD MODULE,PS Version - 96728-111_185_1
L1.05 BD,QUAD MODULE,PS
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Disconnect the line cord from the power outlet
and from the power supply.
3. Open lower left back cover left.
Remove Power
Supply Back WARNING
Panel To reduce the risk of shock, wait at least
supply.

Note
Take static precautions prior to
removing any boards or modules.
Remove Power
Supply Quad
Module Board
quad module, and slide the module halfway out
from the power supply card cage.
2. Disconnect cable from J1 (located at front left
of quad module) on the quad module.
quad module, and remove the module from the
power supply.
Note
Graphics are for reference only, use a
36V module. The quad module is on the
left of the module pictured.
Replacement
Install Power
Supply Quad
1. Slide the quad module halfway into the slot.
Module Board
2. Connect cable to J1 located at the front of the
36V module.
3. Slide the quad module completely into the slot,
and verify that the board is fully seated.
Replace Power
Supply Back
1. Push the back panel downwards to lock it to
Panel
2. Align the back panel to the four screw slots.
3. Replace the four (4) screws securing the back
Prepare for
Operation
remove the cover.
3. Verify or set the voltage setting connector to
the correct frequency.
Note
the module.

Note
initialization.
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.06 VOLTAGE JUMPER,KIT,PS Version - 96728-111_186_1
L1.06 VOLTAGE JUMPER,KIT,PS
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Disconnect the line cord from power outlet and
from the power supply.
3. Open lower left back panel.
Remove
Power Supply WARNING
Back Panel To reduce the risk of shock, wait at least two
(2) minutes after power is removed before
servicing a board in the power supply.

Note
Take static precautions prior to removing
Remove
Jumper Plug
1. Remove the jumper plug from the connector
located at the lower middle part of the power
supply.
Replacement
Replace
Jumper Plug
1. Replace the jumper plug to the appropriate
connector.
Replace Power
Supply Back
1. Push the back panel downwards to lock it to the
Panel
power supply chassis.
2. Align the back panel to the screw slots.
Prepare for
Operation
supply cover to the power supply and remove
the cover.
correct frequency.
Note
damage and/or incorrect operation of the
module.

Note
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.07 BD,HEATER,PS Version - 96728-111_187_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92066-01 Bd, Heater, PS,
L1.07 BD,HEATER,PS
Not Assessed
Time Required
Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
1. Pause and power OFF the assay module.
2. Remove the line cord.
3. Remove the lower left rear panel.
Remove
Power WARNING
Supply Back To reduce the risk of shock, wait at least two
Panel (2) minutes after power is removed before

2. Push the back panel upward to release it from the
Note
Remove
Power
1. Grasp the aluminum flange at the front of the
Supply
heater board and slide the heater board out until
Heater
the J3 connector is accessible (about one-third the
Board
length of the board).
2. Disconnect the cable from J3.
3. Slide the heater board out until the J2 connector
is accessible (about one-half the length of the
board).
5. Remove the heater board from the power supply
card cage.
Replacement
Replace Power
Supply Heater
1. Align the heater card with the card slot and slide
Board
the card and connect cable to J3. Repeat the
procedure for cable and connector J2.
2. Slide the heater board into its position and verify
it is fully seated.
Replace Power
Supply Back
1. Push the back panel downward to lock it to the
Panel
Prepare for
Operation
supply cover to the power supply and remove
the cover.
correct frequency.
Note
damage and/or incorrect operation of the
module.

Note
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.08 AC INPUT MODULE,PS Version - 96728-111_188_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92067-01 AC Input Module, PS
L1.08 AC INPUT MODULE,PS
Not Assessed
Time Required
Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
2. Disconnect the line cord from the power outlet and
from the power supply.
Remove Power
Supply Back WARNING
Panel To reduce the risk of shock, wait at least two (2)
minutes after power is removed before servicing
a board in the power supply.

2. Push the back panel upwards to release it from the
Note
Take static precautions prior to handling any
boards or modules.
Remove Quad
Module
1. Grab the aluminum flange at the front of the quad
module, and slide the module halfway out from the
power supply card cage.
2. Disconnect cable from J1 on the quad module. -
located at front left of quad module.
3. Grab the aluminum flange at the front of the quad
module, and remove the module from the power
supply card cage.
Remove Power
Supply AC
1. Remove the two (2) screws located on the top, and
Input Module
one screw at the left of the input module.
2. Slide the assembly halfway out.
3. Remove the yellow cables connected to the 5-pin
connector on the input module.
4. Remove the yellow cable located on a screw
terminal.
5. Disconnect cable from connector J1.
6. Remove the white cable from the main switch/circuit
breaker.
7. Remove the black cable from the main switch/circuit
breaker.
8. Remove the input module.
Replacement
Replace Power
Supply AC Input
1. Replace the white cable to the main
Module
switch/circuit breaker.
2. Replace the black cable to the main
switch/circuit breaker.
3. Replace the yellow cables connected to the 5-
pin connector on the input module.
4. Replace the yellow cable located on a screw
terminal.
5. Slide the AC input module into its slot.
6. Replace the three (3) screws securing the
input module in place.
Replace Quad
Module
1. Slide the quad module halfway into the slot.
2. Connect cable to J1 located at the front of the
36V module.
3. Slide the quad module completely into the slot,
and verify that the board is fully seated.
Replace Power
Supply Back
Panel
Prepare for
Operation
remove the cover.
Note
the module.

Note
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.09 RELAY KIT,VACUUM PUMP Version - 96728-111_189_1
L1.09 RELAY KIT,VACUUM PUMP
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Caution
Lifting Hazard - The power supply weighs over 100 pounds (45 kilos). Use two people to move.
Removal

System Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function,
1. The processing module must be in Stopped, or Offline
status.
Preparation
2. Disconnect the line cord from the power outlet and the
power supply.
Remove
Circuit Note
Breaker Take static precautions prior to removing any boards or
modules.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of shock, wait at least two
(2) minutes after power is removed before
2. Remove power supply back panel.

3. Remove the four (4) screws securing the back panel to
4. Push the back panel upwards to release it from the
5. Remove the four (4) screws securing the circuit
breakers to the bracket.
6. Disconnect the cables.
Remove
Vacuum
1. Remove the power supply.
Pump
Relay Caution
The power supply weighs over 100 pounds (45
kilos). Use two people to move.
2. Lay the power supply on its side to gain access to the

bottom.
3. While keeping the relay secure with one hand, remove
the two (2) screws securing the relay from the bottom.
4. Disconnect four cables.
5. Remove the relay.
Remove
Receptacle
1. Remove the four (4) screws securing the vacuum
pump/refrigerator receptacle.
2. Remove four cables.
Replacement
Install Circuit
Breakers Note
boards or modules
1. Connect the cables.

circuit breakers to the bracket.
Install Vacuum
Pump Relay Caution
The power supply weighs over 100 pounds
(45 kilos). Use two people to move.
1. Verify that the power supply is in your

control at all times while it is being moved
using the wheels.
2. Connect the four cables to the relay.
3. While power supply in tilted position, support
the relay with one hand, and replace the two
(2) screws securing the relay to the bottom
of the power supply.
4. Replace the relay.
Install Vacuum
Pump/Refrigerator Caution
Receptacle The power supply weighs over 100 pounds
(45 kilos).
1. Verify that the power supply is in your

control at all times while it is being moved
using the wheels.
2. Connect the four cables to the relay.
vacuum pump/refrigerator receptacle.
4. Replace the power supply.
Install Power
Supply Back Panel
1. Replace the power supply back panel.
3. Align the back panel to allow the four (4)
screws to fit.
4. Replace the four (4) screws attaching the
back panel to the power supply chassis.
Note
initialization.
6. Replace the lower left back panel.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Measure the AC input voltage at the wall
plug.
remove the cover.
Note
the module.

Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.11 POWER CORD, KIT Version - 96728-111_191_1
L1.11 POWER CORD, KIT
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

Preparation
2. Disconnect the line cord from the
power outlet and the power supply.
Replacement
Prepare for
Operation
cover.
correct frequency.
Note

Note

errors.
L1.12 36V Module, ARTESYN Power Supply Version - 96728-111_192_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92695-01 Bd, 36V Module Artesyn PS
7-92695-02 Bd, 36V Module Artesyn/Astec PS (RoHS)
L1.12 36V Module, ARTESYN Power Supply
45 min
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
2. Remove the system power cord by unplugging it
from the UPS and from the power supply.
Note
boards or modules.
Remove
Power
1. Loosen the three (3) captive screws securing the
Supply Back
back cover to the power supply. [1]
Cover
2. Lift the cover up and off of the power supply.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of shock, wait at least
supply.
Remove 36V
Module
1. Loosen the two (2) captive screws [1] securing the
desired 36V module [2].
2. Rotate the lower ejector tab [3] outward toward the
lower edge of the board.
3. Slide the 36V module out of the power supply.
Replacement
Install 36V
Module
1. Align the top and bottom edges of the module in
the guides and place the 36V module [2] in the
power supply.
2. With the ejector tab [3] rotated away from the
board, slide the board into the power supply until it
stops.
3. Rotate the ejector tab toward the board and verify
that it hooks onto the metal lip of the power
supply. Continue rotating until the tab is seated.
4. Secure the module with two (2) captive screws [1].
Install Power
Supply Back
1. Place the back cover over the top edge of the
Cover
power supply.
2. Push the cover downward to lock it to the power
supply chassis.
3. Align the cover to the three screw slots.
4. Secure the cover with three (3) captive screws [1].
Prepare for
Operation
1. Plug the system power cord into the UPS and the
power supply.
2. Install the lower left rear panel.
Note
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.13 Quad Module, ARTESYN Power Supply Version - 96728-111_193_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92696-01 Bd, Quad Module, Artesyn PS
7-92696-02 Bd, Quad Module, Artesyn/Astec PS (RoHS)
L1.13 Quad Module, ARTESYN Power Supply
45 min
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Note
boards or modules.
Remove
Power
Supply Back
Cover
WARNING
supply.
Remove
Quad Module
1. Loosen the two (2) captive screws [1] securing the
desired 36V module [2].
2. Rotate the lower ejector tab [3] outward toward the
lower edge of the board.
3. Slide the module out of the power supply.
Replacement
Install Quad
Module
1. Align the top and bottom edges of the module in
the guides and place the quad module [2] in the
power supply.
2. With the ejector tab [3] rotated away from the
board, slide the board into the power supply until it
stops.
3. Rotate the ejector tab toward the board and verify
that it hooks onto the metal lip of the power
4. Secure the module with two (2) captive screws [1].
Install Power
Supply Back
Cover
power supply.
supply chassis.
Prepare for
Operation
power supply.
Note
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.14 FUSE REPLACEMENT, PS Version - 96728-111_194_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78164-01 Fuse Kit, Card Cage P/S
7-78164-03 FUSE KIT, Card Cage, Power Supply, RSH
L1.14 FUSE REPLACEMENT, PS
11 min
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Locate the fuse (look for a mechanical arm
extruding from the fuse body) on the back of the
processing module.
Remove
Fuse
1. Pull the body of the fuse straight back to
remove.
Replacement
Install Fuse
1. Push the fuse onto its casing.
Prepare for
Operation
cover.
correct frequency.
Note

Note
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.15 Heater Board, ARTESYN Power Supply Version - 96728-111_195_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92697-01 Bd, Heater, Artesyn P.S.
7-92697-02 Bd, Heater, Artesyn/Astec PS (RoHS)
L1.15 Heater Board, ARTESYN Power Supply
45 min
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Note
boards or modules.
Remove
Power
Supply Back
Cover
WARNING
supply.
Remove
Heater Board
1. Loosen the four (4) captive screws securing the
heater board [1] to the power supply.
2. Rotate the ejector tab [2] outward toward the lower
edge of the board.
3. Slide the heater board [1] out of the power supply.
Replacement
Install Heater
Board
1. Slide the heater board [1] into the power supply.
2. Rotate the ejector tab [2] toward the board and
verify that it hooks onto the metal lip of the power
3. Secure the heater board [1] with four (4) captive
screws.
Install Power
Supply Back
Cover
power supply.
supply chassis.
Prepare for
Operation
power supply.
Note
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.16 AC Input Module, ARTESYN Power Supply Version - 96728-111_196_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92698-01 AC Input Module, Artesyn PS
7-92698-02 AC Input Module, Artesyn/Astec PS (RoHS)
L1.16 AC Input Module, ARTESYN Power Supply
45 min
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Note
boards or modules.
Remove
Power
Supply Back
Cover
WARNING
supply.
Remove
Heater Board
1. Loosen the four (4) captive screws securing the
heater board [1] to the power supply.
2. Rotate the ejector tab [2] outward toward the lower
edge of the board.
3. Slide the heater board out of the power supply.
Remove AC
Input Module
AC input module [1] to the power supply.
2. Grasp the top lip of the module, just above the
main power breaker, and slide the AC input
module out of the power supply.
Replacement
Install AC
Input Module Note
There is a guide pin located on the upper left
corner of the AC input module slot.
1. Slide the AC input module [1] into the power

supply.
2. Secure the module with three (3) captive screws.
Install Heater
Board
1. Slide the heater board [1] into the power supply.
2. Rotate the ejector tab [2] toward the board and
verify that it hooks onto the metal lip of the power
3. Secure the heater board [1] with four (4) captive
screws.
Install Power
Supply Back
Cover
power supply.
supply chassis.
Prepare for
Operation
power supply.
Note
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.17 AC Distribution Module, ARTESYN Power Supply Version - 96728-111_197_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92699-01 AC Dist. Module Artesyn PS
7-92699-02 AC Dist. Module Artesyn/Astec PS (RoHS)
L1.17 AC Distribution Module, ARTESYN Power Supply
45 min
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Note
Remove Power
Supply Back
Cover
WARNING
To reduce the risk of shock, wait at
least two (2) minutes after power is
removed before servicing a board in
the power supply.
Unplug
Reagent
1. Reach under the reagent cooler and disconnect
Cooler and
the reagent cooler and vacuum pump power
Vacuum Pump
cords from the lower right side of the power
Power Cables
supply (lower left side of the reagent cooler
compartment, under the reagent cooler).
Remove AC
Distribution
Module
AC distribution module [1] into the power supply.
2. Grasp the left lip of the module and slide the
module out of the power supply as far as the
cables allows.
3. Disconnect the five (5) cables and ground wire
from the module.
Note
Leave the ground wire connected to the
power supply on the other end.
4. Slide the module out of the power supply. [1]

5. Note the position of the voltage and frequency
jumpers. These jumpers are used in the same
position on the new module.
6.
Remove and set aside the voltage and frequency
jumpers.
Replacement
Install AC
Distribution
1. Insert the jumpers on the new AC distribution
Module
module in the same position they were in on the
old module.
2. Insert the module into the power supply just far
enough to access all of the connectors.
3. Connect the five (5) cables and ground wire to
the module.
4. Slide the module [1] the rest of the way into the
power supply. Arrange the cables as you slide the
module into place to prevent damage.
5. Tighten the three (3) captive screws to secure the
module to the power supply.
6. Plug the reagent cooler and vacuum pump power
cords into the power supply.
Note
The reagent cooler plug is keyed so the
two plugs cannot be reversed.
7. Verify that the reagent cooler and vacuum pump

breakers are in the ON position.
Install Power
Supply Back
Cover
power supply.
supply chassis.
4. Secure the cover with three (3) captive
screws [1].
Prepare for
Operation
power supply.
Note
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.18 ARTESYN Power Supply Version - 96728-111_198_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92694-01 Power Supply, Artesyn
7-92694-02 Power Supply, Artesyn, IVDD Labeled
7-92694-03 Power Supply, Artesyn, IVDD Labeled, without caddy.
7-92694-05 Power Supply, Astec, without caddy.
L1.18 ARTESYN Power Supply
3 hrs
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials Power Supply Caddy
WARNING
Caution
Lifting Hazard -- The power supply weighs over 100 lbs (45 k) and is shipped with a caddy that is used to
move the power supply. Verify that the power supply is in your control at all times while it is being moved. A
second person is required when moving the power supply on and off of the caddy
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Open
Power
1. Remove banding.
Supply Box
2. Lift box up and off of pallet.
Remove
Caddy
1. Remove the tie down bolts for the power supply
and power supply caddy.
2. Remove the power supply caddy from the pallet.
Preparation
1. If the wash buffer reservoir volume is greater than
10 liters, unload buffer.

Perform maintenance procedure 2185 Wash
Buffer Unload.

Note
Before continuing, take the appropriate ESD
precautions.
Access
Power
1. Loosen the two (2) captive screws securing the
Supply
right side module cover (unload side) and remove
the cover.
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the cable
harness access panel at the right side (unload
side) of the instrument.
3. Open the two processing module front access
doors.
Remove
Wash
1. Disconnect the buffer reservoir level sensor.
Buffer
Reservoir
Note
Remove the wash buffer reservoir with
caution. Removing and replacing the
reservoir can damage the carousel motor
sensor board.
Remove
Connectors
1. Release the card cage by unhooking the two card
on Power
latches.
Supply
2. Disconnect the connectors from the power supply.
Note
Access the connectors from either the
processing module right side, or from the
buffer reservoir area.
Note
The power supply (78700) has connectors in
all locations except J904, J924, and J929.
Note
The ARTESYN power supply has
connectors in all locations except J904 and
J924 (J929 no longer exists).
Access
Power
1. Remove the lower left and right rear panels.
Supply
the reagent cooler and vacuum pump power cords
from the lower right side of the power supply
(lower left side of the reagent cooler compartment,
under the reagent cooler). [1]
Remove
Power
1. Remove the six (6) mounting screws securing the
Supply
power supply to the module frame. [1]
2. Position the power supply caddy behind the
instrument power supply.
3. Position the caddy arms until they are between the
power supply handles and the top of the power
supply back panel. [2]
4. Slide the power supply caddy in as far as possible.
Note
While sliding the caddy arms into position, it
may be necessary to perform fine
adjustments to the arm height and angle.
5. While cranking the caddy arms up, reposition the

caddy so that the notches in the arms engage the
power supply handles.
6. Once the caddy arms have made contact with the
power supply handles, carefully raise and level the
power supply until it moves easily.
Note
If the power supply is raised too high, the
instrument frame can hinder removal.
7. Pull the caddy away from the instrument and

remove the power supply.
Note
It may be necessary to rock the caddy when
you meet slight resistance as you remove
the power supply.
Place
Defective
1. Place the defective power supply on the area of
Power
the pallet previously occupied by the power supply
Supply on
caddy.
Pallet
Remove
New Power
1. Use the power supply caddy to remove the new
Supply from
power supply from the pallet.
Pallet
Replacement
Install
Power
1. Inspect the power supply compartment and verify
Supply
that no cables are in the power supply area.
Note
The ARTESYN power supply is shipped with
an extension cable (90500, W131A). This
cable is only used if the ARTESYN power
supply is replacing an earlier (non-
ARTESYN) power supply. This cable is to
extend the fan cable (76631, W131).
2. With the new power supply on the caddy, adjust

the arms so the power supply lines up with the
opening.
3. Slide the power supply into the instrument,
adjusting the arms as needed to allow free travel
into the instrument.
Note
As second person may be needed to prevent
the instrument from moving.
4. Once the power supply is properly positioned, lower

the cradle arms and remove the caddy.
5. Secure the power supply to the frame with six (6)
screws.
Install
Power
1. Connect the reagent refrigerator and vacuum pump
Connectors
connectors (the reagent cooler plug is keyed, so
to Power
the two plugs cannot be reversed).
Supply
Note
On the ARTESYN power supply there two
connectors (J904 and J924) that do not have
cables going to them.
Note
If an earlier (non-ARTESYN) power supply
is replaced with an ARTESYN power supply,
connect the extension cable (90500, W131A)
from connector J901 to the card cage fan
cable (76931, W131).
2. From the right side of the processing module or

buffer reservoir compartment, connect the cables to
the power supply.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Measure the AC input voltage to the module at the
UPS.
remove the cover.
3. Confirm the voltage [1] and the frequency [2]
connectors are set to the correct values.
Note
4. Verify that the reagent cooler [4] and vacuum For information on the startup procedure, refer to the
pump [3] breakers are in the ON position. ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
5. Replace the power supply cover by placing the Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause,
cover over the top edge of the power supply. Push and shutdown.
the back cover downward to lock it to the power
supply chassis.
6. Align the back cover to the three screw slots.
7. Tighten the three (3) captive screws to secure the
cover to the power supply.
power supply.
9. Close the card cage and secure it by latching it into
place.
10. Connect the buffer reservoir level sensor and install
the buffer reservoir.
11. Install the cable harness access panel at the right
side (unload side) of the instrument with two (2)
screws.
12. Install the right side module cover and tighten the
two (2) captive screws that secure it to the module.
13. Close the two processing module front access
doors.
Note

Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
L1.19 15 Amp Fuse, ARTESYN Power Supply Version - 96728-111_5184_1
List/Part Numbers
7-14107-01 Fuse, ARTESYN PS 15A
L1.19 15 Amp Fuse, ARTESYN Power Supply
25 min
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Note
Remove Power
Supply Back
1. Loosen the three (3) captive screws [1] securing
Cover
the back cover to the power supply.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of shock, wait at
least two (2) minutes after power is
removed before servicing a board in
the power supply.
Unplug
Reagent
Cooler and
the reagent cooler and vacuum pump power
Vacuum Pump
cords from the lower right side of the power
Power Cables
supply (lower left side of the reagent cooler
compartment, under the reagent cooler). [1]
Loosen AC
Distribution
1. Loosen the three (3) captive screws [1] securing
Module
the AC distribution module into the power supply.
2. Grasp the left lip of the module and slide the
module out of the power supply as far as the
cables allow.
Remove Old
Fuse
1. Remove fuse out of the holder.
Replacement
Install AC
Distribution
1. Install new Fuse.
Module
2. Slide the module [1] the rest of the way into the
power supply.
Note
Arrange the cables as you slide the
module into place to prevent damage.
3. Tighten the three (3) captive screws to secure

the module to the power supply.
4. Plug the reagent cooler and vacuum pump
power cords into the power supply.
Note
The reagent cooler plug is keyed so the
two plugs cannot be reversed.
5. Verify that the reagent cooler and vacuum pump

breakers are in the ON position.
Install Power
Supply Back 1. Place the back cover over the top edge of the
Cover power supply.
supply chassis.
4. Secure the cover with three (3) captive screws.
[1].
Prepare for
Operation
1. Plug the system power cord into the UPS and
the power supply.
Note

errors.
M1.01 CARD CAGE Version - 96728-111_321_3
List/Part Numbers
7-78164-03 FUSE KIT, Card Cage, Power Supply, RSH
7-78625-01 Card Cage
7-93727-01 Card Cage, i2000SR
M1.01 CARD CAGE
Time Required 3 hrs
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
3. Open the front, lower right access door.
Disconnect All
Connectors at
Back of Card
place.
Cage
3. Release the card cage and swing it forward to gain
access to the connectors on the rear of the card
cage.
4. Remove each connector [68 connectors] from the
rear of the card cage.
5. To access the card cage hinge and strain relief
mounting screws, perform one of the following.
If the right side panel card cage rear access

panel is accessible, don't cut the cable
bundles from the cable strain relief bracket.
If the card cage rear access panel cannot be
removed, cut the cable ties and remove the
cables.
Note
Take care not to damage any
connectors.
Remove Strain
Relief Bracket
1. Loosen the top and bottom screws on the bracket.
with Cables
2. Remove the two (2) middle screws.
Note
The bracket is slotted to make it easier to
remove.
3. Lift the bracket straight up and pull off the card

cage.
Remove Card
Cage from Hinge
1. Remove the two (2) middle hinge screws.
2. Loosen the top and bottom hinge screws.
Note
The top and bottom screws are in slotted
positions and do not have to be removed.
3. Gently lift the card cage high enough to allow the

hinge to release from the two remaining screws
which secure the card cage to the structure.
Note
The card cage is loaded with all the boards
and weighs approximately 65 pounds. You
need another person to help you lift the card
cage.
4. Remove the card cage from the module.
Replacement
Install Card
Cage
1. Extend the hinge so that the top and bottom
slots are receptive to the mounting screws.
2. Gently slide the card cage so the two (2) screws
are captured by the hinge.
3. Slide the card cage down until it is fully seated.
4. Reattach the two (2) middle hinge screws.
5. Tighten the top and bottom hinge screws.
Install Cable
Strain Relief
1. Push the bracket slotted holes over the two (2)
Bracket (With
screws on the card cage.
All Cable
2. Reattach the other two (2) screws.
Bundles
3. Reattach any cables that were removed.
Attached)
Reconnect
Cables
1. For type 93727 card cage (i2000SR), move the
four (4) ESD boards 94008 from the old back
plane to the new one or order new ESD boards.
Install in spaces JU8/9, JU10/11, JU4/5, and
JU6/7. For the 78625 card cage (i2000), go to
Step 2. Refer M1.10 Board, ESD (i2000SR).
2. Install each cable connector to the back plane of

the card cage.
Note
Be careful not to force connector mating
as this could damage the connectors.
Prepare to
Install Cards
1. Close the card cage and tighten the screws
into Card
securing it in place.
Cage
2. Loosen the screws securing the card cage door
in place on both card cages.
3. Open the card cage doors.
Verify Power
Status
1. Verify that the power cord is connected to the
power source and that the switch is turned OFF.
Attach Wrist
Strap Note
electrostatic discharge (ESD) precaution. Use
the wrist strap supplied with the board and do
not wear gloves. Not following these precautions
may damage or destroy the electronic circuitry of
the board.
1. Place the wrist strap snugly onto your wrist.

2. Attach the wrist strap to the card cage.
Transfer Each
Board from
1. Grasp the ejector tabs firmly.
Card Cage to
2. Pull the ejector tabs outward toward the upper
Card Cage
and lower edge of the board.
3. Slide the board out of the card cage.
4. Place the boards in the new card cage in the
same slot location as in the old card cage.
5. Verify that the boards are fully seated.
6. Close the door to the card cage and tighten the
screws securing it in place.

1. Remove and discard the wrist strap.
2. Close the lower access doors.
and shutdown.
Note


errors.
3 5131 - WZ, Wash Station, Valve Test
This note and associated expected results Verify and document the following:
apply to Card Cage replacement only.
The sound of the R1 wash station
Verify R1 & R2 wash station valves valve opening and closing could be
heard.
valve opening and closing could be
heard.
4 5133 - Other Valves & Diverter Test

This note and associated expected results The sound of the wash station vacuum
apply to Card Cage replacement only. vessel vacuum valve opening and
closing could be heard.
Verify wash station vacuum vessel vacuum & The sound of the wash station vacuum
drain valves. vessel drain valve opening and closing
could be heard.
2 5400 - Crash Sensor Test

Crash sensor test passes for all
Verify crash sensors for all pipettors. pipettors.

M1.02 FUSE REPLACEMENT, CCAGE Version - 96728-111_200_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78164-01 Fuse Kit, Card Cage P/S
M1.02 FUSE REPLACEMENT, CCAGE

Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
1. If buffer volume is greater than 10 liters, unload
buffer.
Select As needed from the maintenance

screen under the system icon.
Buffer Unload.

4. Open the front, lower right access door to access
the fuse.
Remove
Buffer
1. Slide the container out and place it outside the
Reservoir
module on the floor.
Note
Before continuing, take the appropriate ESD
precautions.
Remove
Fuse
1. Release the card cage and swing it forward to gain
access to the connectors on the rear of the card
cage.
2. Locate the fuse (look for the mechanical arm
extruding from the fuse body).
3. Pull the body of the fuse straight back to remove
the fuse.
Note
See Fuse Location on Card Cage Back
Plane Board (i2000 only) or Fuse Location
on Card Cage Back Plane Board (i2000SR
only) for the card cage fuse layout.
Replacement
Install
fuse
1. Push the fuse onto its casing.
2. Swing the card cage to the closed position.
3. Latch the card cage to the back frame.

1. Close the lower access doors.
Note
initialization.
Note
Reload buffer if unloaded earlier.


errors.
M1.03 BD, INDEXER (written to be customer–replaceable with Abbott
Version - 96728-111_201_2
assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-204347-01 Indexer Board, Tested
7-204347-02 Indexer Board, Tested (RoHS)
7-76170-01 BD, Indexer
7-90370-01 Bd, Indexer
M1.03 BD, INDEXER (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
card cage cover. [1]
5. Open the card cage cover.
Attach
Wrist Strap Note
Before continuing, take the appropriate electrostatic
discharge (ESD) precaution. Use the wrist strap
supplied with the board and do not wear gloves.
Not following these precautions may damage or
destroy the electronic circuitry of the board.

Remove
Indexer
1. Locate the desired board.
Board
Note
Refer to the card cage cover for board
locations.
2. Rotate the ejector tabs outward toward the upper

Note
This disconnects the board from the
connection on the card cage.
Replacement
1. Remove the new board from the antistatic bag.
Note
The board should be handled on the edges
only.
Note
Perform Step2 and Step3 only if 76170. The
new indexer board 90370 does not have any
jumpers.
2. Place the board on the antistatic bag.

3. Remove and install the jumpers on position J3, if
required, to match the graphic.
4. Remove the jumpers on position J6, if required, to
match the graphic.
5. Compare the jumper configuration of the new board
to the configuration of the board which was removed
to verify the jumpers are configured properly.
Note
If J5, J7 and J8 are on the board, no jumpers
should be installed on them.
6. Discard any unused jumpers.
Install
Jumpers
Install
Indexer
1. Align the top and bottom edges of the board in the
Board
guides and place the board in the card cage.
2. With the ejector tabs rotated away from the board,
slide the board into the card cage until it stops.
3. Rotate the ejector tabs toward the board and verify
that they hook onto the metal lip of the card cage.
Continue rotating until the tabs are seated against
the board.
Note
Seating the tabs against the board ensures
that the board is properly seated in the
connector.
4. Verify that the board is fully seated by slightly

tugging on the board.
Prepare
for
1. Close the cover to the card cage and tighten the
Operation
3. Close the processing module doors.
Note

errors.
M1.04 BD, MOTOR DRIVER (written to be customer–replaceable with
Version - 96728-111_254_2
Abbott assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-204346-01 Motor Driver Board, Tested
7-204346-02 Motor Driver Board, Tested (RoHS)
7-76205-01 BD, Motor Driver
7-76205-02 BD, Motor Driver
7-94004-01 Board, Motor Driver
M1.04 BD, MOTOR DRIVER (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
Note
To support the STAT pipettor the i2000SR must use 76205-105 Motor Driver Board or newer that is linked to catalog part
number 7-94004-01.
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Attach
Wrist Strap Note

Remove
Motor
Driver
Board Note
locations.

Note
Replacement
Install
Motor
Driver
Board Note
only.
Note
Boards labeled 76205-104 or lower must not
be used on i2000SR systems.

the board.
Note
connector.

Prepare
for
Operation
Note

errors.
M1.05 BD,TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Version - 96728-111_202_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78560-01 Bd, Temperature Controller
7-78560-03 Bd, Temperature Controller (RoHS)
M1.05 BD,TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Attach Wrist
Strap Note
electrostatic discharge (ESD) precaution. Use the
wrist strap supplied with the board and do not
wear gloves. Not following these precautions may
damage or destroy the electronic circuitry of the
board.

Remove
Temperature
Controller
Board Note
locations.

Note
Replacement
Install
Temperature
Controller
Board Note
The board should be handled on the
edges only.
2. Align the top and bottom edges of the board in

the guides and place the board in the card cage.
3. With the ejector tabs rotated away from the
board, slide the board into the card cage until it
stops.
4. Rotate the ejector tabs toward the board and
verify that they hook onto the metal lip of the card
cage. Continue rotating until the tabs are seated
against the board.
Note
connector.


and shutdown.
Note

errors.
M1.06 BD,CONTROLLER Version - 96728-111_203_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204164-01 CPU Board, Tested
7-78665-04 Controller Board, All Modules
7-78665-06 Controller Board, All Modules
M1.06 BD,CONTROLLER

Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Attach Wrist
Strap Note
board.

Remove
CPU Board
Note
locations.

Note

Verify
Jumper
1. Verify the part number of the board. Jumper
Configuration
configuration is dependent on the part number of
the board.
Note
edges only.

4. If installing a 76165 controller board, remove and
install the jumpers on position JU1 and JU2, if
required, to match the appropriate graphic.
5. If installing a 78665 controller board, no jumpers
are required.
Note
For type 78665-109 or later be sure that
JU-3 is OPEN (not LAS position), unless
the board is being used in the LAS
carousel position. For LAS carousel
control, close JU-3(LAS position) or use a
red-tabbed controller board type 90905.
Replacement

Install
CPU
Board
the board.
Note
connector.


and shutdown.
Note

errors.
2 6008 - Controller Configuration
M1.07 BD,DC DRIVER,I/O Version - 96728-111_204_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78590-02 Bd, DC Driver, I/O
7-78590-03 Solenoid-DC Driver, Refurbished, i2000
7-78590-04 DC Driver Board with Fuses
7-900085-02 Bd, DC Driver IO (solenoid driver) - (RoHS)
M1.07 BD,DC DRIVER,I/O

Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Attach
Wrist Strap Note

Remove
DC Driver
I/O Board
Note
locations.

Note
Replacement
Install DC
Driver I/O
Board
Note
only.

the board.
Note
connector.


and shutdown.
Note
5. Perform a Startup procedure to verify proper

operation of the board.
1 5131 - WZ, Wash Station, Valve Test
Verify R1 & R2 wash station valves valve opening and closing could be
heard.
valve opening and closing could be
heard.
2 5132 - Syringe/Vacuum/PT/T Valve Test

3 5133 - Other Valves & Diverter Test
This note and associated expected results The sound of the wash station vacuum
apply to Card Cage replacement only. vessel vacuum valve opening and
closing could be heard.
Verify wash station vacuum vessel vacuum & The sound of the wash station vacuum
drain valves. vessel drain valve opening and closing
could be heard.

M1.08A R1 and R2 LIQUID LEVEL SENSE BOARD Version - 96728-111_144_2
List/Part Numbers
7-78565-20 Bd, Liquid Level Sense,
7-92375-02 BD, Liquid Level Sense
7-92375-03 LLS/PM Bd with Slope Score Option
7-94255-01 PM Algorithm LLS Brd
M1.08A R1 and R2 LIQUID LEVEL SENSE BOARD
Note
All LLS boards used on the i2000SR, must be part number 92375-105 or greater.
Note
The 94255 board can be identified by the black ejection tabs located at the top and bottom front edge of the board. This board
MUST NOT be used in upper card cage locations 6 (R2) or 8 (R1).
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Attach
Wrist Strap Note

Remove
Liquid
Level
Sense Note
Board Refer to the card cage cover for board
locations.
Note
Replacement
Determine if
LLS Board
1. Determine if Liquid Level Sense (LLS) board
Requires
requires jumpers.
Jumpers
If board to be installed does not have
small display on the front edge of the
board, go to Verify Jumper Configuration.
If board has a small display panel on the
front edge of the board, jumpers are not
required, go to Install Liquid Level Sense
Board.
Verify
Jumper
Configuration
Note
edges only.
Note
Compare the jumper configuration of the
new board to the graphic. Verify the
jumpers are configured properly. Jumpers
should not be installed on JU5 through
JU11. [1]
Install Liquid
Level Sense Note
Board The 94255 board must not be installed in a
reagent pipettor location (upper card cage
locations slot 6 (R2) or 8 (R1)).

stops.
against the board.
Note
connector.


and shutdown.
Note

1 3600 - LLS Test
M1.08B S and STAT LIQUID LEVEL SENSE BOARD Version - 96728-111_4841_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78565-20 Bd, Liquid Level Sense,
7-92375-02 BD, Liquid Level Sense
7-94255-01 PM Algorithm LLS Brd
M1.08B S and STAT LIQUID LEVEL SENSE BOARD
Note
All LLS boards used on the i2000SR, must be part number 92375-105 or greater.
Note
The 94255 board can be identified by the black ejection tabs located at the top and bottom front edge of the board. This
version of the board is released as an optional TSB to be installed only in the sample (upper slot 10) / STAT (upper slot 4)
locations only with software version 2.1 or greater.
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Attach
Wrist Strap Note

Remove
Liquid
Level
Sense Note
Board Refer to the card cage cover for board
locations.
Note
If the Sample / STAT LLS board is being
replaced and has black ejector tabs, ensure
that the new board to be installed is also a
94255 board with black tabs.
Note
Replacement
Determine if
LLS Board
1. Determine if Liquid Level Sense (LLS) board
Requires
requires jumpers.
Jumpers
If board to be installed does not have
small display on the front edge of the
board, go to Verify Jumper Configuration.
If board has a small display panel on the
front edge of the board, jumpers are not
required, go to Install Liquid Level Sense
Board.
Verify
Jumper
Configuration
Note
edges only.
Note
Compare the jumper configuration of the
new board to the graphic. Verify the
jumpers are configured properly. Jumpers
should not be installed on JU5 through
JU11. [1]
Install Liquid
Level Sense Note
Board If LLS board being replaced in either upper card
cage slot 4 or 10 is a 94255 version board with
black ejector tabs, the new board must also be a
94255 version board with black ejector tabs.

stops.
against the board.
Note
connector.


and shutdown.
Note

M1.09 BD,CMIA OPTICS Version - 96728-111_205_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76185-03 CMIA Optics Board Improved
M1.09 BD,CMIA OPTICS

Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Attach
Wrist Strap Note

Remove
CMIA
Optics
Board Note
locations.

Note
Replacement
Install
CMIA
Optics
Board Note
only.
the board.
Note
connector.

Prepare
for
Operation
Note

errors.
M1.10A R1 and R2 ESD BOARD Version - 96728-111_332_2
List/Part Numbers
7-94008-01 Board, ESD
7-94008-02 Board, ESD (RoHS)
M1.10A R1 and R2 ESD BOARD

Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Access
Buffer
Reservoir
Preparation For further information on performing maintenance
Manual, Section 9: Service and Maintenance, Subsection:
buffer.
As-needed maintenance procedures.
Buffer Unload.
Remove
Wash
1. Remove the buffer inlet tube by unscrewing the
Buffer
cap and removing the inlet tube.
Reservoir
2. Remove the buffer outlet tube by unscrewing the
cap and removing.
Power OFF
Module
Disconnect
Cable
1. Disconnect the W88 BUFF BTL SENSOR cable.
Attach
Wrist Strap Note

Access
ESD
Boards
place.
3. Release the card cage and swing it forward.
Note
Check the rear of the card cage and
reconnect any cable connections that may
have pulled loose.
Remove
ESD
1. From the rear of the card cage, locate the ESD
Boards
boards.
2. Locate the ESD board to be replaced.
3. Pull the ESD board out and away from the card
cage.
Replacement
Install
ESD
1. From the rear of the card cage, locate
Boards
the JU pins for the ESD board being
replaced.
2. Verify the board and pins are aligned,
and insert the new ESD board.
Note
ESD board orientation is not
critical

Secure
Card
1. Check the rear of the card cage and
Cage
reconnect any cable connections that
may have pulled loose.
2. Swing the card cage to the closed
position.
Note
As the card cage is moved to the
closed position, assist the cables
as they are flexed.
3. Latch the card cage closed.
Connect
Cable
1. Connect the W88 BUFF BTL SENSOR
cable.
Buffer System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Install the buffer inlet tube and secure
Reservoir Subsection: Setup and Consumable inventory management.
the cap.
2. Install the buffer outlet tube and secure
the cap.
buffer reservoir and slide the reservoir
into the processing module.
Note
the removal of the buffer reservoir
from the processing module, add
wash buffer.

Note
initialization.

procedure.
1 3600 - LLS Test
M1.10B S and STAT ESD BOARD Version - 96728-111_4842_1
List/Part Numbers
7-94008-01 Board, ESD
7-94008-02 Board, ESD (RoHS)
M1.10B S and STAT ESD

Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Access
Buffer
Reservoir
Preparation For further information on performing maintenance
Manual, Section 9: Service and Maintenance, Subsection:
buffer.
As-needed maintenance procedures.
Buffer Unload.
Remove
Wash
1. Remove the buffer inlet tube by unscrewing the
Buffer
cap and removing the inlet tube.
Reservoir
2. Remove the buffer outlet tube by unscrewing the
cap and removing.
Power OFF
Module
Disconnect
Cable
1. Disconnect the W88 BUFF BTL SENSOR cable.
Attach
Wrist Strap Note

Access
ESD
Boards
place.
3. Release the card cage and swing it forward.
Note
Check the rear of the card cage and
reconnect any cable connections that may
have pulled loose.
Remove
ESD
1. From the rear of the card cage, locate the ESD
Boards
boards.
2. Locate the ESD board to be replaced.
3. Pull the ESD board out and away from the card
cage.
Replacement
Install
ESD
1. From the rear of the card cage, locate
Boards
the JU pins for the ESD board being
replaced.
2. Verify the board and pins are aligned,
and insert the new ESD board.
Note
ESD board orientation is not
critical

Secure
Card
1. Check the rear of the card cage and
Cage
reconnect any cable connections that
may have pulled loose.
2. Swing the card cage to the closed
position.
Note
As the card cage is moved to the
closed position, assist the cables
as they are flexed.
3. Latch the card cage closed.
Connect
Cable
1. Connect the W88 BUFF BTL SENSOR
cable.
Buffer System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Install the buffer inlet tube and secure
Reservoir Subsection: Setup and Consumable inventory management.
the cap.
2. Install the buffer outlet tube and secure
the cap.
buffer reservoir and slide the reservoir
into the processing module.
Note
the removal of the buffer reservoir
from the processing module, add
wash buffer.

Note
initialization.

procedure.
P1.01 FILTER,CARD CAGE/POWER SUPPLY Version - 96728-111_206_1
List/Part Numbers
08C94-07 Filter, Card Cage/Power Supply
P1.01 FILTER,CARD CAGE/POWER SUPPLY

Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Filter
1. Locate the center of the small door covering the card
cage. Reach under the instrument and locate the filter
(about 3" from the edge).
2. Grasp the filter removal tab, push back, and pull
down until the filter drops free.
Replacement
Install
Filter
1. Align the rear (non-tab end) of the filter to the slot under the card cage (toward the rear of the
instrument).
2. Using the tab, insert the filter into the rear slot and push it back until the front of the filter clears the
front of the slot.
3. Gently let the filter come forward until it is in place.
1 G112 - Power Supply Card Cage Filter Verify correct position of power supply card
cage filter.
P1.02 FAN REPAIR KIT Version - 96728-111_207_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77147-01 Fan Repair Kit
7-77147-02 Circulator Fan Kit
P1.02 FAN REPAIR KIT

Removal

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
1. The processing module must be in Stopped, or Offline status.
Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
System status.
Preparation
1. If buffer volume is greater than 10 liters, unload buffer.
Select As needed from the maintenance screen under the

system icon.
Perform maintenance procedure 2185 Wash Buffer Unload.

3. Open the front lower left and right access doors.
Remove
Bulk Buffer
1. Grasp the handle on top of the container.
Container
2. Slide the container out and place it outside the module on the floor.
Open Card
Cage
1. Open two metal clamps located at inner left card cage wall.
2. Swing the card cage forward.
Note
Open the card cage carefully to avoid disconnecting cables
from the backplane connectors.
Remove
Fans
1. Disconnect the three cables, W131 (fan1), W131 (fan 2) and W131
(fan3) going to the three fans located in the drawer located between
the card cage and the power supply.
2. Grab the release handle located on the right side of the fan drawer,
pull the handle to free the fan drawer from the right wall, and let the
drawer slide down just enough to free it from its fixed location.
3. Grab the release handle located on the left side of the fan drawer.
As you support the drawer underneath with one hand, pull the
handle away from the left to free the fan drawer from its fixed
location and let it slide down slowly.
4. Remove the drawer with fans.
5. Remove the fan(s) by unscrewing the four (4) screws (non-captive)
securing each fan(s) to the drawer.
Replacement
Install
Fans
1. Install the fan(s) using the four (4) screws (non-
captive) securing each of the fan(s) to the drawer.
Note
Verify correct orientation of the fans. All fans
should blow the air toward the power
supply.
2. Slide the left and right edges of the drawer into the
slots in the processing module structure. Slide the
drawer with fans upwards and lock the drawer into
its position.
Note
Verify the drawer is properly locked at both
ends. Push the handles toward the
processing module structure, if necessary, to
lock the drawer into position.
3. Connect the three cables, W131 (fan1), W131 (fan

2)and W131 (fan3) going to the three fans located
in the drawer.

Note and shutdown.

3. Visually verify that all three fans are turning.
WARNING
Keep a safe distance from the rotating
fans.

errors.
2 G14 - Fan Verify that the fan is rotating and that the air
flows in the correct direction.
P1.05 KEYPAD,PROCESSING MODULE Version - 96728-111_208_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78751-01 Keypad, Processing Module
P1.05 KEYPAD,PROCESSING MODULE
Time Required 20 min.

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
access the processing keypad.
Remove
Left
1. Open the left window.
Window
2. Loosen the black thumbscrew.
3. While lifting up on the black bracket, lift up on the
window and pull it free of the bottom pin.
Remove
Center
1. Remove the screw on the cover.
Internal
Cover Note
Do not drop the screw into the module.
2. Tilt up and slide the cover from between the right

and left internal covers.
Note
For further information on removal of
internal covers, refer to the ARCHITECT
System Operations Manual, Section 9:
Service and maintenance, Subsection:
Remove
Processing
1. Disconnect the keypad electrical cable.
Module
2. Turn the two (2) screws, on the left internal cover,
Keypad
counterclockwise 1/4 turn to release them.
3. Grasp the cover and gently rock it side to side
while lifting to free it from the frame.
4. Remove the process keypad with cover.
Replacement
Install
Processing
1. Place the processing keypad with cover
Module
onto the processing module frame.
Keypad
2. Verify the cover is seated flush with the
frame.
3. Turn each screw 1/4 turn clockwise.
4. Connect the keypad electrical cable.
Install
Center
1. With the cover tilted up place the guide
Internal
tabs under the left and right internal
Cover
covers.
2. Tilt the cover down and align the screw
hole.
3. Install the screw connecting the cover to
the frame.
Install Left
Window
1. Place the access door on the pin located
on the Sampling Queue cover.
2. While lifting up on the black bracket,
place bracket pin in the hole on the left
window.
3. Tighten the thumbscrew.
4. Close the left window.
Note
initialization.

1 3700 - Keypad Test
P1.33 KEYPAD,SAMPLE HANDLER Version - 96728-111_209_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78760-02 Keypad, Sample Handler
P1.33 KEYPAD,SAMPLE HANDLER

Tools/Materials Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation
controlling the sample handler.
2. Loosen the left queue processing
module panel screws and remove
the panel.
Remove Sample
Handler Keypad
1. Disconnect the keypad electrical
cable connector.
captive) on the back side of the
panel.
Note
Do not drop the screws into
the module.
3. Remove the keypad from the

module.
Replacement
Install Sample Handler Keypad

1. Connect the keypad electrical cable.
2. Properly align the keypad on the load queue cover.
3. Install and tighten the screws securing the keypad to the load queue cover.

1. Tighten the left side processing module panel screws to reattach the panel.
3. Perform Startup procedure.
Q1.01 CPU, System Control Center Version - 96728-111_211_3
List/Part Numbers
07D01-02 ARC SCC CPU
07D01-05 ARC SCC "E" Platform
07D01-06 ARC SCC "F" Platform
07D01-07 ARC SCC "F+" Platform
Q1.01 CPU, System Control Center
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

Preparation
1. Observe ESD precautions.
Perform For information on the shutdown procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT

SCC System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
1. From the SCC Main Menu, select
Shutdown System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Overview, Snapshot.
2. Select F3 (Shutdown).
3. Select OK to confirm the Shutdown
request.
Note
A message displays
informing you that Shutdown
is complete and you can turn
off the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC.

5. Turn off all peripherals connected to
the computer.
6. Put identification tags on all cables
and disconnect cables connected to
the rear of the computer.
Remove
SCC
1. Lift and remove the SCC from its
location.
Replacement
1. Place the new SCC into position.

2. Reconnect the following cables:
Keyboard [16]
Bar Code Wand (Optional) [via Keyboard] [17]
Video Monitor Touchscreen [2]
Video Monitor [3]
Mouse [14]
Printer [13]
Ethernet Hub [15]
Speakers (Optional) [7]
Power Cord
Note
This is an example of one possible SCC configuration. Refer to the appropriate ISA for other SCC
configurations.
Replace SCC
Install ARCHITECT
Software
1. Perform the most recent ARCHITECT software TSB.
Restore Database
1. If a backup is available, restore the customer database.

errors.
Q1.02 CMOS Battery,SCC (Platform A and B) Version - 96728-111_212_1
Q1.02 CMOS Battery, SCC (Platform B, C, D & E)
45 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Note
Removing and replacing the SCC Clock/CMOS battery can cause your system to lose the configuration information in the
CMOS chip. However, it should auto detect the two hard drives, the CDROM drive, and the RAM at the next boot up.
Removal

Warming, or Ready Status.
2. Unload Reagents as per the
ARCHITECT Systems Operations
Manual.
Preparation For more information on loading reagents, refer to the ARCHITECT

i System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
Perform SCC For information on the shutdown procedure, refer to the
Shutdown ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
Overview, Snapshot.
request.
Note
A message displays informing
you that Shutdown is complete
and you can turn off the power.

5. Turn off all peripherals connected to
the computer.
6. Put identification tags on all cables and
disconnect cables connected to the
rear of the computer.
Remove SCC
Cover
1. Locate and remove the screws on the
back cover of the SCC.
2. Grasp the rear of the cover lower
edges, pull them outward about 0.25"
inch and lift the cover up and pull
toward you.
Note
B and C Platform: Do not try to
lift the cover off, as it wraps
under the CD-ROM and floppy
drives.
Remove
Floppy Drive
1. Locate the two screws on either side of
(Platform B
the floppy drive and remove them.
and C)
2. Looking down on the floppy drive,
locate the cable located beside the
drive.
3. Remove the cable connector by
carefully lifting up on the black cross
piece.
4. Slide the floppy drive cage back and lift
out of system.
Remove
CMOS Battery
1. Locate the battery on the SCC mother
(Platform B
board.
and C)
2. Use a very small screwdriver or finger
nail to lift the battery out of its holder.
Note
Two clips secure the battery to
the mother board.
Remove Platform D
1. Locate the battery on the SCC mother
CMOS Battery
(Platform D board.
and E) 2. Press the release tab on the battery
holder.
Note
Use a nonconductive item or
fingernail to lift the battery out of
its holder.
Platform E
Replacement
Install CMOS Battery

1. Place the new battery in the holder, ensuring the plus (+) sign is up.
Install Floppy Drive

(Platform B and C)
1. Slide the floppy drive back into position until the securing hook slides under the plate
over the CDROM Drive and holds it in place.
2. Install the two (2) securing screws through the front floppy drive.
3. Install the connector beside the floppy drive.
Install SCC Cover

1. Install the cover by grasping the rear corners, sliding it over the front of the case, and
lowering it until it is fully seated against the chassis.
2. Install the screws.
3. Reconnect cables to the SCC.
Set Date and Time

1. Power ON the SCC.
2. Enter Setup.
3. Set date and time.
4. Perform P-233 Verify and Configure BIOS to configure BIOS for the appropriate
platform.
5. Save and exit.
Note
The boot up sequence continues.
6. Once the system is loaded, verify the date and time setting is correct.
Configure the Date and

Time Settings
1. Select System control center from the System categories list on the Configuration
screen .
2. Select F6-Configure. The Configure system control center window displays.
3. Enter the date using the current format in the System date data entry box.
4. Enter the time in the System time data entry box. The system time displays in a 24-
hour format.
5. Select the desired Date format option.
Note
When you edit this field, the new format does not display in the System date
field until you select Done and access the window again.
6. Select the Time zone list button, and then select the desired time zone.
7. Select the Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings check box. (optional)
8. Select Done to save your changes.
1 P-211 System Date, Time, and Time Zone
2 G115 - SCC Power OFF the SCC.
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet.
Wait for five (5) minutes.
Plug in the SCC.
Power ON the SCC.
Verify the system powers on without error.
Q1.03 RAM,CPU,SCC Version - 96728-111_213_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78803-02 RAM, 256K SCC
Q1.03 RAM,CPU,SCC
Not Assessed
Time Required
Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Perform For information on the shutdown procedure, refer to the

SCC ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
1. From the SCC Main Menu, select Overview,
Shutdown Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
Snapshot.
3. Select OK to confirm the Shutdown request.
Note
A message displays informing you that
Shutdown is complete and you can turn off
the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC by flipping the rear power

enable switch down to the O position.
5. Turn off all peripherals connected to the computer.
6. Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect
cables connected to the rear of the computer.
Note
The power to the processing module(s) must
be off prior to turning on the power to the
system control center. If the processing
module(s) power is ON, communication is not
properly initialized between the system
components.
Remove
CPU Cover
1. At the back of the CPU chassis, remove the screws
from the cover.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Two (2)

screws
Platform C (P4) - Three (3) screws
2. Lift up the back of the cover to a 45 degree angle

(approximately), then pull it out from the CPU
chassis while maintaining the same angle.
Remove
RAM
1. Disconnect and remove any expansion boards
restricting access to the RAM slots.
2. Press back the retaining clips holding the RAM
board into the socket and tilt the top of the RAM
board away from the clips.
3. Remove the RAM board.
Replacement
Preparation
2. Remove the RAM from its wrapper, and place it on a grounded, static-free surface,
component-side up.
Install RAM
1. Holding the RAM board at an angle, align the notch in the board with the alignment tab in the
socket.
2. Press down and tilt the board up until it snaps into the retaining clips.
3. Install and reconnect any expansion boards removed to access the RAM.
Install Cover
1. Verify that you have not left any tools or loose parts inside the computer.
2. Angle the cover at approximately 45 degrees with the front end pointing at the insertion point
on the CPU chassis.
3. Move the cover into the insertion point all the way and then lower the back of the cover into
place.
4. Reinstall the two (2) retaining screws at the back panel.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Reconnect all cables to the computer and turn on peripheral equipment.
2. Power ON the computer by flipping the rear power enable switch up to the I position.
Power ON
1. Power ON the CPU assembly.
1 G9 - System Power Verify system powers ON and starts up/
initializes successfully.
Q1.04 Hard Drive, System,CPU (Platform C) Version - 96728-111_214_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78800-02 10 Gig Hard Drive SCC
7-78800-03 Hard Drive, CPU
Q1.04 Hard Drive, System,CPU (Platform C)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Note Primary Drive (SYSTEM)
Depending on the SCC CPU configuration, the hard
drive with the system software is typically located in
the following location:
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - mounted on a bracket

under the CD Rom drive and is next to the D: drive.
Its ribbon cable is connected to the Primary IDE.
Platform C (P4) - mounted in a bracket next to the Secondary Drive (BACKUP)
floppy drive. Its ribbon cable is connected to the
Primary IDE.

2. Identify the correct drive by the jumpering for the
primary (SYSTEM) and secondary (BACKUP) drives.
Note
Graphics are only examples. Refer to information
shipped with the new hard drive.

Snapshot.
Note
the power.

Note
components.
Remove
CPU Cover
from the cover.

screws

Access
Drive
1. Access the hard drive carrier.
Carrier
If Platform C (P4), go to Remove RAM
(Platform C (P4)).
If Platform C (P4), go to Remove CD-ROM
Drive (Platform A and B).
Remove
RAM
(Platform C
(P4))
2. Press back the retaining clips [2] holding the RAM
board [1] into the socket and tilt the top of the RAM
4. Locate and unplug the multicolored power and
ribbon cables to the floppy drive [3].
5. Go to Disconnect Drive Cables.
Remove
CD-ROM
1. Disconnect the multicolor power, ribbon and audio
Drive
cables at the rear of the CD-ROM.
(Platform A
2. Remove the CD-ROM by pushing the two (2) side
and B)
tabs toward the center and pulling the drive forward.
Disconnect
Drive Note
Cables To prevent bent pins, pull ribbon cables off carefully.

ribbon cables to the hard drive(s) [1].
Remove
Drive Note
Carrier If an expansion board restricts the clearance of the
carrier, remove the expansion cover retaining
bracket and the expansion board.
1. Loosen securing screw(s).
Platform C (P4) - Loosen the three (3) screws

holding the carrier to the CPU chassis. [2]
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Loosen the
screw holding the carrier to the CPU
chassis. [1]
2. Remove the drive carrier.

Platform C (P4) - Slide the carrier to the rear
as far as it will go, then lift up the back of the
carrier and pull it out at about a 45 degree
angle. Take care that all cabling is clear when
removing the carrier.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Lift the carrier
out of the CPU chassis.
Remove
System SYSTEM Drive
1. Observe the jumpers on the back of the drive and
Hard Drive
locate the system drive.
2. Remove the four (4) screws securing the hard drive
to the carrier.
3. Slide the drive out of either end of the carrier.
BACKUP Drive
Note
Replacement
Preparation
SYSTEM Drive
2. Remove the hard drive from its wrapper, and
place it on a grounded, static-free surface,
component-side up.
BACKUP Drive
Note
Install System
Hard Drive SYSTEM Drive
1. If required, refer to the hard disk drive
manufacturer's instructions to set any jumpers
or switches and termination resistors.
2. With the connectors toward the rear of the
drive carrier, slide the disk drive into the
carrier until the screw holes are aligned.
3. Secure the hard disk drive to the drive carrier
with four (4) screws.
BACKUP Drive
Note
Install Drive
Carrier
1. Position the carrier above the CPU chassis in
the same approximate position as when it was
removed.
2. Lower the carrier into the CPU chassis at an
approximate 45 degree angle.
Platform C - Move the carrier forward

until the floppy disk drive clears the
slot in the CPU chassis and aligns with
the front.
Platforms A (PII) and B (PIII) - Lower
the back of the carrier until it rests on
the 5.25-inch drive bay and the CPU
chassis transverse brace.
3. Fasten the carrier to the CPU chassis.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - one (1)

screw
Platform C (P4) - three (3) screws
4. Connect the cables to devices in the drive

carrier.
Install RAM
(Platform C (P4))
1. Holding the RAM board [1] at an angle, align
the notch in the board with the alignment tab
in the socket.
2. Press down and tilt the board up until it snaps
into the retaining clips. [2]
3. Install and reconnect any expansion boards
removed to access the RAM.
Install CD ROM
Drive (Platform A
1. From the front, align the rails on the CD ROM
(PII) and B (PIII))
drive with the tracks in the bay.
2. Slide the drive back until rails latch.
3. Connect the multicolor Power, ribbon and
audio cables to the drive.
Install Cover
1. Verify that no tools or loose parts are in the
computer.
2. Angle the cover at approximately 45 degrees
with the front end pointing at the insertion
point on the CPU chassis.
3. Move the cover into the insertion point all the
way and then lower the back of the cover into
place.
4. Reinstall the screws at the back panel.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - four (4)

screws
Prepare for
Operation
1. Reconnect all cables to the computer and turn
on peripheral equipment.
2. Power ON the computer by flipping the rear
power enable switch up to the I position.
Power ON
1 P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC
Platform C)
3 P-206 Printer Configuration
2 P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen
Q1.05 Hard Drive, Backup,CPU (Platform C) Version - 96728-111_215_1
List/Part Numbers
7-99024-02 CD-RW Drive (RHOS)
Q1.05 Hard Drive, Backup,CPU (Platform C)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Note Primary Drive (SYSTEM)
Depending on the SCC CPU configuration, the hard
drive with the system software is typically located in
the following location:
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - mounted on a bracket

under the CD.
drive and is next to the D: drive. Its ribbon cable is
connected to the Primary IDE. Secondary Drive (BACKUP)
Platform C (P4) - mounted in a bracket next tot the
floppy drive. Its ribbon cable is connected to the
Primary IDE.

2. Identify the correct drive by the jumpering for the
primary (SYSTEM) and secondary (BACKUP) drives.
Note
Snapshot.
Note
the power.

Note
components.
Remove
CPU Cover
from the cover.

screws

Access
Drive
Carrier
(Platform C (P4)).
drive (Platform A and B).
Remove
RAM
(Platform C
(P4))
Remove
CD-ROM
drive
(Platform A
and B)
Disconnect
Drive Note

Remove
Drive Note

chassis. [1]

Remove
Backup SYSTEM Drive
1. Observe the jumpers on the back of the drive and
Hard Drive
locate the backup drive.
2. Remove the four (4) screws securing the hard drive
to the carrier.
3. Slide the drive out of either end of the carrier.
BACKUP Drive
Note
Replacement
Preparation
2. Remove the hard drive from its wrapper, and
component-side up.
Install Backup
Hard Drive
1. If required, refer to the hard disk drive
manufacturer's instructions to set any jumpers
or switches and termination resistors.
5.25-inch drive bay until the screw holes are
aligned.
3. Secure the hard disk drive to the drive carrier
with three (3) screws.
Install Drive
Carrier
the same approximate position as when it
was removed.

the front.

screw

carrier.
Install RAM
(Platform C (P4))
in the socket.
Install CD ROM
Drive (Platform A
(PII) and B (PIII))
Install Cover
computer.
place.

screws
Prepare for
Operation
1. Reconnect all cables to the computer and
turn on peripheral equipment.
Power ON

errors.
2 P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC
Platform C)
4 P-206 Printer Configuration
Q1.06 Floppy Drive,CPU (Platform A, B and C) Version - 96728-111_216_1
Q1.06 Floppy Drive,CPU (Platform A, B, and C)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation

Snapshot.
Note
the power.

Note
components.
Remove
CPU Cover
from the cover.

screws

Access
Drive
Carrier
(Platform C (P4)).
drive (Platform A and B).
Remove
RAM
(Platform C
(P4))
Remove
CD-ROM
Drive
(Platform A
and B)
Disconnect
Drive Note

Remove
Drive Note

chassis. [1]

Remove
Floppy
1. Remove the four (4) screws securing the floppy
Drive
drive to the carrier.
2. Slide the drive out of the carrier.
Replacement
Preparation
2. Remove the floppy disk drive from its
wrapper, and place it on a grounded, static-
free surface, component-side up.
Install Floppy
Drive
carrier until the screw holes are aligned.
2. Secure the floppy disk drive to the drive
carrier with four (4) screws.
Install Drive
Carrier
the same approximate position as when it
was removed.

the front.

screw

carrier.
Install RAM
(Platform C (P4))
in the socket.
Install CD ROM
Drive (Platform A
(PII) and B (PIII))
Install Cover
computer.
place.

screws
Prepare for
Operation
1. Reconnect all cables to the computer and
turn on peripheral equipment.
Power ON
1 G28 - Floppy Disk Verify that the LED on the floppy disk drive
turns on.
Q1.07 CD ROM Drive,CPU (Platform A, B, and C) Version - 96728-111_217_1
List/Part Numbers
7-99024-02 CD-RW Drive (RHOS)
Q1.07 CD ROM Drive,CPU (Platform A, B, and C)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation

Snapshot.
Note
the power.

Note
components.
Remove
CPU Cover
from the cover.

screws

Remove
CD-ROM
1. Disconnect the multicolored power, ribbon, and
Drive
audio cables at the rear of the CD ROM.
2. Remove the CD ROM by pushing the two (2) side
Replacement
Preparation
2. Remove the CD-ROM drive from its wrapper, and place it on a grounded, static-free surface,
component-side up.
Install CD-
ROM drive
1. If required, refer to the CD-ROM disk drive manufacturer's instructions to set any jumpers or
switches and termination resistors.
2. With the CD-ROM connectors facing the rear of the computer, slide the drive into the carrier until
the screw holes align.
3. Secure the CD-ROM disk drive to the drive carrier with screws.
Install Drive
Carrier
1. Position the carrier above the CPU chassis in the same approximate position as when it was
removed.
2. Lower the carrier into the CPU chassis at an approximate 45 degree angle.
Platform C - Move the carrier forward until the floppy disk drive clears the slot in the CPU
chassis and aligns with the front.
Platforms A (PII) and B (PIII) - Lower the back of the carrier until it rests on the 5.25-inch
drive bay and the CPU chassis transverse brace.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - one (1) screw

4. Connect the cables to devices in the drive carrier.
Install Cover
1. Verify that no tools or loose parts are in the computer.
2. Angle the cover at approximately 45 degrees with the front end pointing at the insertion point on
the CPU chassis.
3. Move the cover into the insertion point all the way and then lower the back of the cover into
place.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - four (4) screws

Prepare for
Operation
1. Reconnect all cables to the computer and turn on peripheral equipment.
2. Power ON the computer by flipping the rear power enable switch up to the I position.
Power ON
1 G93 - CD-ROM Verify read / write access operation (example:
perform a restore procedure and an archive
procedure).
Q1.08 DIGIBOARD & Cables,CPU (Platform C) Version - 96728-111_218_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78804-01 Serial Cables
Q1.08 DIGIBOARD & Cables,CPU (Platform C)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation

Snapshot.
Note
the power.

Note
components.
Remove
CPU Cover
from the cover. [1]
Remove
DIGIBOARD
1. Disconnect any cables from the board you are going
Cables
to remove.
Remove
DIGIBOARD
1. Remove the Phillips screw [1] securing the
DIGIBOARD [2] to the back panel.
2. Rock the DIGIBOARD out of the mother board
connector.
3. Discard the DIGIBOARD and its cable.
Replacement
Preparation
2. Remove the DIGIBOARD from its wrapper, and
component-side up.
Install
DIGIBOARD
1. Install the new DIGIBOARD by firmly seating it into
the first slot [1] of the mother board.
2. Install the new 8 port cable onto the DIGIBOARD
external connector.
Note
Refer to DIGICABLE Connections to make
cable connections.
3. Plug the Null Modem connector into P6 and P1.

4. Connect the remaining cables to the DIGIBOARD.
DIGICABLE Connections
Install Cover
and Cables
1. Install the computer cover.
2. Connect all other cabling to the rear of the
computer.

errors.
2 P-227 Host Serial Port Loop Back Test (SCC
platform B or C)
Q1.09 Hard Drive, System,CPU (Platform D) Version - 96728-111_128_1
Q1.09 Hard Drive, System, CPU (Platform D and E)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Caution
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Perform
SCC
Shutdown
Snapshot.
Note
Shutdown is complete and you can
turn off the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC by pressing the

ON/OFF [1] button.
5. Turn OFF the process module(s).
6. Turn off all peripherals connected to the
computer.
7. Mark all cables connected to the CPU and
disconnect them from the rear of the SCC.
Remove
SCC Cover
1. Remove the three (3) screws [1]securing the
cover to the case.
2. Pull the cover straight back, approximately 1"
(2 cm), then lift and remove the cover.
Access
Hard Drive
1. Remove the screw [1] that secures the
hard/floppy drive bracket to the chassis.
2. Disconnect all cabling from the rear of the
Hard Drive [3]
3. Pull the lever firmly toward the back of the

chassis. [2]
Note
This action releases the assembly and
moves it out of the computer face
plate.
4. Lift the hard/floppy drive bracket out of the
computer chassis.
Remove
Hard Drive
1. Remove the four (4) screws [2] (two on each
side), that secure the hard drive to the
bracket.
2. Slide the hard drive out of the bracket.
Replacement
Install
Hard
1. Slide the new hard drive into the bracket.
Drive
Note
Before installing the new hard drive check the
jumpering [1].
2. Replace the four (4) screws that secure the hard drive to the
bracket.
3. With the bracket lever pulled back, slide the hard/floppy
drive bracket into position.
Note
Verify that no cabling is pinched under the hard/floppy
drive bracket. If better access is required, remove the
CD-RW drive for improved cable visibility.
4. Replace the screw that secures the bracket to the chassis.
5. Re-attach all cabling. [2]
1 P-238 Hard Drive Recovery Options (Platform
C and D)
Q1.10 Floppy Drive,CPU (Platform D) Version - 96728-111_136_1
List/Part Numbers
7-99023-01 Floppy Drive, D platform
Q1.10 Floppy Drive,CPU (Platform D and E)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials Standard Tool Kit
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Perform
SCC
Shutdown
Snapshot.
Note
the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC by pressing the ON/OFF [1]

button.
Remove
SCC Cover
1. Remove the three (3) screws [1] securing the
cover to the case.
Access
Floppy
1. Remove the screw [1] that secures the hard/floppy
Drive
drive bracket to the chassis.
2. Disconnect all cabling from the rear of the Floppy
Drive.
chassis. [2]
Note
moves it out of the computer face plate.
computer chassis.
Note
The tag on the floppy drive cabling faces
the hard drive when connected properly(or
the arrow on the 40 pin connector is next to
the floppy drive power connector)
Remove
Floppy
1. Remove the four (4) screws [2] (two on each side),
Drive
that secure the floppy drive to the bracket.
2. Slide the floppy drive out of the bracket.
Replacement
Install
Floppy
1. Slide the new floppy drive into the bracket.
Drive
2. Replace the four (4) screws that secure the floppy drive to the bracket.
3. With the bracket lever pulled back, slide the hard/floppy drive bracket into position.
Note
Verify that no cabling is pinched under the hard/floppy drive bracket and that the floppy drive
cable is oriented on the connector properly. If better access is required, remove the CD-RW
drive for improved cable visibility.
4. Replace the screw that secures the bracket to the chassis.

5. Re-attach all cabling.
turns on.
Q1.11 CD RW Drive (Platform D) Version - 96728-111_137_1
List/Part Numbers
7-99024-01 CD-RW Drive
Q1.11 CD RW Drive (Platform D and E)
Caution
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Perform
SCC
Shutdown
Snapshot.
Note
Shutdown is complete and you can
turn off the power.

ON/OFF [1] button.
computer.
Remove
SCC Cover
1. Remove the three (3) screws [1] securing the
cover to the case.
Remove
CD-RW
1. Remove the cabling from the rear of the CD-
Drive
RW Drive. [1]
2. Remove the three (3) screws [2] that secure
the CD-RW Drive to the chassis.
3. Remove the CD-RW drive.
Replacement
Install CD-
RW Drive
1. Put the CD-RW drive in the computer and secure it with
three (3) screws.
2. Attach all cabling to the rear of the CD-RW drive. [1]
Note
Verify that the IDE cable (to the CD-RW drive) does
not obstruct the CPU fan (allows effective cooling).
1 G93 - CD-ROM Verify read / write access operation (example:
perform a restore procedure and an archive
procedure).
Q1.12 Power Supply Version - 96728-111_138_1
List/Part Numbers
7-99026-01 Power Supply, SCC-D
Q1.12 Power Supply (Platform D and E)
WARNING
CAUTION
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Perform
SCC
Shutdown
Snapshot.
Note
the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC by pressing the ON/OFF [1]

button.
Remove
SCC Cover
1. Remove the three (3) screws [1]securing the cover
to the case.
Access
Power
1. Remove the three (3) screws [1] that secure the
Supply
hard/floppy bracket to the chassis.
chassis. [2]
Note
moves it out of the computer face plate.

computer chassis.
Note
Do not disconnect the data cables from the
hard/floppy drive assemblies. Set aside the
hard/floppy drive assembly.
Remove
Power
1. From the back of the computer, remove the three
Supply
(3) screws [1] securing the power supply to the
computer chassis.
2. Disconnect the power cables from the hard drive,
CD-RW drive, floppy drive, and motherboard (two
connections).
3. Remove the power supply from the computer.
Replacement
Install
Power
1. Place the power supply into the chassis from the top.
Supply D
2. Slide the power supply towards the rear.
Platform
3. Secure the power supply to the chassis using three
(3) screws.
Note
Break off the connector at the tab that contains
the last 4 pins on the 24 pin power connector.
This will leave a 20 pin power connector which
will fit into the J3J1 connector spot on the
motherboard.
4. Reconnect all cabling.

Floppy Disk Power [1]
Motherboard Power [2]
12V CPU Power [4] (connected to
motherboard-J5B1)
Hard Drive Power [5]
Note
Do not install the Rear Fan connection on the
motherboard of the D platform. Some power
supplies may not have this cable as part of the
power supply.
Note
The other power connectors are not used (
including P11). [6]
5. Tie wrap the unused connectors to the bundle of
wires coming from the power supply.
6. Install the CD-RW drive carrier to the chassis using
three (3) screws.
7. Install the cover to the case using three (3) screws.
Install
Power
1. Place the power supply into the chassis of the
Supply E
computer.
Platform
2. Slide the power supply towards the rear.
3. Secure the power supply to the chassis using three
(3) screws.
4. Reconnect all cabling.
CD-RW Drive Power [1]
Floppy Drive Power[2]
Secondary Power supply for Hard Drive if
needed [3].
Note
This connector is only to be used in cases
when the serial power supply can not be used.
Motherboard Power [4]
12 VDC Power(connected to motherboard) [5]
E Platform Hard Drive Power [6]
Note
Do not install the tachometer cable Q4B1 to
the motherboard on E Platform
5. Tie wrap the unused connectors to the bundle of
wires coming from the power supply.
6. Install the CD-RW drive carrier to the chassis using
three (3) screws.
7. Install the cover to the case using three (3) screws.

errors.
Q1.13 Power Supply, C Platform Version - 96728-111_4549_1
Q1.13 Power Supply, C Platform
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

Offline status. Subsection: System status.
Perform
SCC
Shutdown Snapshot.
Note
the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC by pressing the ON/OFF
button.
Remove
1. Remove the three (3) screws securing the cover to
SCC Cover
the case.
2. Pull the cover straight back, approximately 1" (2
cm), then lift and remove the cover.
Replace
the Power 1. Remove the center support panel screw [1].
Supply 2. Remove the support bracket [2].
3. Remove the four screws that secure the power
supply to the chassis at rear panel.
4. Remove the connectors from the main power
supply to the motherboard, floppy drive, CD-RW
drive, HD-1 and HD-2 and J6.
Replacement

1. Install the new power supply into chassis.
2. Re-connect the cable/connectors to their plugs:
motherboard
floppy drive
CD-RW drive
HD-1 and HD-2
J6
3. Secure power supply into the chassis using four [4] screws.
4. Install the center support bracket and secure with one [1] screw.
5. Install the computer cover using three (3) screws to secure cover to case.
turns on.
Q1.14 Flash Drive (Platform D and E) Version - 96728-111_4550_1
Q1.14 Flash Drive ( Platform D and E)
Caution
Removal

or Offline status. System status.
Perform
SCC
Shutdown Snapshot.
Note
Shutdown is complete and you can turn
off the power.
ON/OFF [1] button.
computer.
Remove
1. Remove the three (3) screws securing the
SCC Cover
cover to the case.
2. Remove the cabling from the rear of the CD-
RW Drive. [2]
3. Pull the cover straight back, approximately
1" (2 cm), then lift and remove the cover.
Remove
CD-RW 1. Remove the cabling from the rear of the CD-
Drive RW Drive. [1]
2. Remove the three (3) screws [2] that secure
the CD-RW Drive to the chassis.
3. Remove the CD-RW Drive.
Remove
the flash 1. Locate the flash drive within the computer.
drive
Note
The flash drive resides underneath the
CD-RW.
2. Cut the tie wraps that hold the flash drive and
cabling in place.
Note
There are two USB connectors, ensure
you use the one that was connected to
the Flash Drive.
3. Remove the flash drive and cable.
Replacement
Install
1. Install the new flash drive with cable to the USB
Flash Drive
connector for the Flash Drive.
2. Install new tie wraps to hold the flash drive and cabling in
place.
Note
Verify that the IDE cable(to the CD-RW drive) does
not obstruct the CPU fan ( allows effective
cooling).
Install CD-
1. Put the CD-RW drive in the computer and secure it with
RW Drive
three (3) screws.
2. Attach all cabling to the rear of the CD-RW drive. [1]
Note
Verify that the IDE cable(to the CD-RW drive) does
not obstruct the CPU fan ( allows effective
cooling).
1 G114 - Software Backup / Restore Verify data is backed up from and/or restored
to instrument using appropriate medium.
Q1.15 SCC Chassis Fan Replacement (Platform E) Version - 96728-111_4551_2
Q1.15 SCC Chassis Fan Replacement (Platform E)
CAUTION
Removal

Perform
SCC
Shutdown Overview, Snapshot.
request.
Note
A message indicates Shutdown is
complete.
ON/OFF [1] button.
computer.
7. Mark all cables connected to the CPU
and disconnect them from the rear of the
SCC.
Remove
1. Remove the three (3) screws securing
SCC Cover
the cover to the case.
2. Pull the cover straight back,
approximately 1" (2 cm), then lift and
remove the cover.
Remove
Fan Note
Fan airflow direction is OUT of the
SCC.
1. Determine which fan is not operational
and remove.
2. Disconnect the fan connectors [1] and
remove the fan.
Replacement
Install Fan
Note
Verify fan airflow direction is OUT of the SCC.
1. Connect fan connector to Y connection that attaches to the motherboard.
2. Install new fan into position.
1 P-238 Hard Drive Recovery Options (Platform
C and D)
Q2.01 Keyboard Skin Version - 96728-111_219_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78822-01 Keyboard Skin, SCC
Q2.01 Keyboard Skin
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

status.
Perform For information on the shutdown procedure, refer

SCC to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
1. From the SCC Main Menu, select Overview, Snapshot.
Shutdown Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Note
A message displays informing you that Shutdown is
complete and you can turn off the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC by flipping the rear power enable

switch down to the "O" position.
6. Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect cables
connected to the rear of the computer.
Note
The power to the processing module(s) must be off
prior to turning on the power to the system control
center. If the processing module(s) power is ON,
communication is not properly initialized between the
system components.
Replacement
1. Removal and replacement steps are left to the discretion of

the Abbott trained repair person.
Prepare For information on the startup procedure, refer to

for the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
1. Power OFF the processing module(s).
Operation Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
Note System startup, pause, and shutdown.
The power to the processing module(s) must be OFF
prior to turning on the power to the system control
center. If the processing module(s) power is ON,
communication is not properly initialized between the
system components.
2. Power ON the system control center.

3. Power ON the monitor.
4. Power ON the processing module(s).
5. To change the status of the processing module and sample
handler from Stopped to Ready, perform the Startup
procedure.
Q2.02 Monitor, Touchscreen Version - 96728-111_220_1
List/Part Numbers
07D03-17 Monitor 17" Touchscreen
Q2.02 Monitor, Touchscreen
20 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.

SCC ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
1. Access the Snapshot screen by selecting
Shutdown instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Overview and then Snapshot.
2. Select F3-Shutdown.
4. When the screen turns blue, and a
message about shutting down the SCC
displays, press the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys
simultaneously.
5. A popup message displays. Select
Shutdown, then OK.
Note
Wait while the software applications
shut down. A message displays
informing you that it is safe to turn
off the computer.
6. Press the power switch on the front of the

central processing unit (CPU) to power OFF
the system control center.
Remove
Monitor
monitor to power OFF the monitor.
2. Unplug the monitor power cord from the
wall outlet or UPS.
3. Unscrew and disconnect the monitor cable
from the port on the back of the CPU. [1]
4. Unscrew and disconnect the touchscreen
cable from the port on the back of the
CPU. [2]
Replacement
Install
Monitor
1. Connect the monitor cable to the port on the back of
the CPU. Secure the cable to the CPU by screwing
in the connector. [1]
2. Connect the touchscreen cable to the port on the
back of the CPU. Secure the cable to the CPU by
screwing in the connector. [2]
3. Connect the monitor power cord to the monitor. [3]
4. Plug the power cord into the wall outlet or UPS.

Note and shutdown.
be OFF prior to turning on the power to the
components.
2. Power ON the system control center by pressing the

power switch on the front of the CPU.
3. Power ON the monitor.
Note
Do not go to the next step until the system
control center displays the Snapshot screen.

Startup procedure.
1 G11 - Monitor Verify Monitor turns on and displays the
intended screen.
Q2.03 Keyboard,SCC Version - 96728-111_222_1
List/Part Numbers
07D11-01 Keyboard, English
07D11-20 Keyboard, French
07D11-30 Keyboard, German
07D11-40 Keyboard, Italian
07D11-50 Keyboard, Spanish
07D11-60 Keyboard, Japanese
Q2.03 Keyboard,SCC
10 min
Time Required
Removal

4. When the screen turns blue, and a message
about shutting down the SCC displays,
press the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys
simultaneously.
Shutdown, then OK.
Note
informing you that it is safe to turn off
the computer.

Remove
Keyboard
1. Disconnect the keyboard cable from the port
on the back of the CPU. [1]
Replacement
Install
Keyboard
1. Connect the keyboard to the port on the back of the
CPU. [1]

Note and shutdown.
components.

Note

Startup procedure.
1 G8 - Keyboard/ Keypad Verify keyboard / keypad / LUI is functional by
selecting different key commands.
Q2.05 External Modem Version - 96728-111_223_1
List/Part Numbers
07D07-11 External Modem 110V
07D07-12 External Modem
Q2.05 External Modem
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal
Prerequisite
1. Turn the Processing Module power OFF.
2. Log on as FSE and enter the day's password.
Remove External Modem

1. Remove the external modem.
If an external modem is not present, go to Connect Modem.
If an external modem is present, go to Step2.
2. Remove all cables from the external modem.
Replacement
Connect
Modem
1. Connect the new modem to an analog phone line with a
standard phone cable, using the connector marked
TELCO [1] on the rear of the case.
Note
The connector marked PHONE [2] is used only for
pass through connection of a standard telephone. This
jack is not required for the modem installation.
2. Connect the USB cable to the SCC first [4], then watch the
SCC monitor while making the USB connection to the
modem [3]. A Found New Hardware message displays.
If the system completes an automatic installation from

this point, the proper driver is already installed and the
procedure is complete.
If the New Hardware Wizard displays and stops, the
proper driver must be loaded.
For SCC B, C, or D platforms with software

installed using the Base Configuration OPK CD,
go to Access Task Manager and Explorer.
For platforms upgraded from V2.0X without the
OPK CD, go to Start Driver Installation Wizard.
Start Driver
Installation Note
Wizard Some platforms may have been updated from a disk image
("Ghost") of V2.0X to V2.10 and V2.11. These platforms do
not have all of the standard Windows drivers that are
included in the Base Configuration (OPK) CD that is used for
a new V2.1X installation.
1. Verify that Found New Hardware displays when the modem

is connected to the SCC USB port.
2. Follow the Wizard instructions until Search for a suitable
driver displays.
3. Select Next.
4. Check the Specify a Location box.
Install
Driver from
1. Place the Windows 2000 Base Configuration (OPK) disk in
OPK Disk
the CD-RW drive.
2. Click Next, then select Browse.
3. Expand the Look In drop down list and select W2k_OPK_PE
(E:).
4. Double click on W2K_OPK, I386, $OEM$.
5. Double click on $$, INF, MODEM, and USB56K.
6. Select USR00ECK.INF and click Open.
7. Select OK, then confirm the file found message:
e:\w2k_opk\i386\$oem$\$$\inf\modem\usb56k\usr00eck.inf.
8. Click Next and verify that the PWR LED on the modem turns
on.
9. Click Finish.
Access
Task
1. Under the System Folder select Task Manager.
Manager
2. Select New Task, enter Explorer, and click OK.
and
3.
Minimize the Task Manager screen.
Explorer
Configure
Modem
1. Expand My Computer.
Software
2. Place the cursor on Control Panel and click to display the
contents in the right window.
3. Double-click on Phone and Modem Options.
4. Select the Modems tab.
5. Select U.S. Robotics 56K Faxmodem USB.
6. Select Properties, Advanced, Advanced Port Settings.
7. Select Com Port Numbers, COM11. (Scroll down if
necessary.)
8. Select OK to close Advanced Port Settings, then U.S.
Robotics 56K Faxmodem USB Properties, and Phone and
Modem Options.
Configure
pcAnywhere
1. Restore Task Manager and click on New Task.
2. Select Browse, then click on the Desktop icon (left panel).
3. Double-click on the Symantec pcAnywhere shortcut icon
(right panel).
4. Click on OK to create a new task and run the pcAnywhere
Manager.
5. Minimize the Task Manager window, then right click on the
Modems icon.
6. Click on Properties to display the list of modems on the
system.
Note
Be sure that U.S. Robotics 56K Faxmodem USB is
selected and that no other modems are checked.
7. Select Apply if any changes are made and close the window
by clicking OK.
8. Close the pcAnywhere Manager window and Explorer.
Reboot
SCC
1. Reboot the SCC.
1 P-210 Modem Test
released Operation and Service Procedures. If the
system/instrument produces results, ENSURE
appropriate Quality Control is in specification and
calibrate as necessary.
Q2.06 Printer Version - 96728-111_224_1
List/Part Numbers
07D08-11 Printer 110V
07D08-22 Printer 220V
Q2.06 Printer
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal

Remove
Printer
1. Power OFF the printer.
2. Unplug the printer power cord from the
wall outlet.
3. Disconnect the printer from the port
marked PARALLEL on the back of the
CPU. [1]
Replacement
Install
Printer
1. Connect the printer cable to printer.
2. Connect the printer power cord to the printer.
3. Connect the printer cable to the port marked
PARALLEL on the back of the CPU. [1]
4. Plug the power cord into the wall outlet.
Note
If your System Control Center is connected to a
UPS, the printer should not be plugged into the
UPS.
1 G12 - Printer Verify printer prints reports and/or performs a
screen print.
Q2.07 UPS, SCC Version - 96728-111_225_1
List/Part Numbers
07D06-11 UPS 110V
Q2.07 UPS, SCC
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal

Preparation
WARNING
Do not perform this activity with the
UPS plugged in.
1. Unpack the new UPS.

2. Locate the enclosed graphical instructions.
3. Remove the UPS cover.
4. Connect battery according to the graphical
instructions included in packet.
5. Replace the UPS cover.
request.
4. When the screen turns blue, press the
Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys simultaneously.
Shutdown, then OK.
Note
off the computer.

central processing unit (CPU) to power
OFF the system control center.
Remove
UPS
1. Power ON the UPS. [1]
I is ON.
O is OFF.
Note
Circuit breaker in rear pops
straight out if power input
surge occurs that UPS
cannot handle.
2. Unplug all power cords plugged into the

UPS.
3. Unplug the UPS from the wall outlet.
Replacement
Install
UPS
1. Plug the UPS into the wall outlet.
2. Plug power cords into the UPS.

1. Power ON the UPS. [1]
I is ON. and shutdown.
O is OFF.
Note
Circuit breaker in rear pops straight out
if power input surge occurs that UPS
cannot handle.
Note
components.
1 G15 - UPS Verify UPS is able to maintain a continuous
supply of electric power to connected
equipment.
Q2.08 Mouse,SCC Version - 96728-111_226_1
List/Part Numbers
07D01-99 Mouse, SCC
07D02-01 Mouse, SCC, Black
Q2.08 Mouse,SCC
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal


request.
4. When the screen turns blue, press the
Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys simultaneously.
Shutdown, then OK.
Note
off the computer.

central processing unit (CPU) to power
OFF the system control center.
Remove
Mouse
1. Disconnect the mouse cable from the port
in the back of the CPU. [1]
Replacement
Install
Mouse
1. Connect the mouse cable to the port in the back of
the CPU. [1]

1. Power OFF the processing module (s).
Note and shutdown.
components.
Note
3. Power ON the processing module (s).

Startup procedure.
1 G13 - Mouse Verify mouse if functional by selecting different
cursor commands.
Q2.10 Network Hub & Cables Version - 96728-111_227_1
List/Part Numbers
07D04-01 Network Hub & Cables,AA
07D04-12 Network Hub & Cables,AE
07D04-24 Network Hub & Cables,AX
07D04-36 Network Hub & Cables,AZ
07D04-48 Network Hub & Cables,BJ
Q2.10 Network Hub & Cables
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials Standard FSE Tool Kit
Removal

System status.

4. When the screen turns blue, and a
message about shutting down the SCC
displays, press the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys
simultaneously.
Shutdown, then OK.
Note
off the computer.

1. Unplug the network hub power cord from
the wall outlet or UPS. [1]
2. Disconnect the communication cables from
the network hub. [2]
Note
The cables can be connected to any
position on the network hub. Exact
location of the connectors is not
necessary.
Remove
Network
Hub
Replacement
Install
Network
1. Plug the new network hub power cord [1] into an SCC
Hub
USB port. [2]
2. Connect the communication cables into the ports of
the network hub.
Note
The cables can be connected to any position on
the network hub. Exact location of the
connectors is not necessary.
Note pause, and shutdown.
The power to the processing module(s) must be
OFF prior to turning on the power to the system
control center. If the processing module(s)
power is ON, communication is not properly
initialized between the system components.

Note

Startup procedure.
1 P-219 Ethernet Communication Verification
R1.01 BD,STEPPER MOTOR,ARM Version - 96728-111_228_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78194-01 Bd, Stepper Motor, ARM
R1.01 BD,STEPPER MOTOR,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal
Preparation
1. Power OFF the ARCHITECT ARM.
2. Unplug the AC power cord from the module.
3. Disconnect the inlet water tubing from the
module.
4. Open the fluidics access door.
Remove PCX25
PCB
1. Loosen the captive screw and open the
PS/BD access door.
2. Disconnect the 36V DC power cord from J4.
5. Disconnect the 5V DC power cable from J3
6. Remove the four (4) screws that secure
PCX25 PCB.
Replacement
Install PCX25 PCB

1. Align PCX25 PCB mounting holes to mounting posts and secure with four (4) screws.
2. Connect 36V DC power cable to J4.
3. Connect 5V DC power cable to J3.
4. Connect cable to J2.
5. Connect cable to J5.
6. Close the PS/BD access door and secure.
7. Close the fluidics access door.
8. Connect water inlet tubing to ARCHITECT ARM.

1. Plug in the AC power cord to the module.
2. Power ON the ARCHITECT ARM.
3. Connect the inlet water tubing from the module.
1 P-11 ARCHITECT ARM Installation and
Verification
R1.02 BD,MAIN,ARM Version - 96728-111_229_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78182-01 Bd, Main, ARM
7-78182-02 Main Board, ARM
R1.02 BD,MAIN,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal
Preparation
3. Disconnect the inlet water tubing from the module.
Remove
PC1119X1
1. Loosen the captive screw and open the PS/BD
PCB
access door.
2. Disconnect the ribbon cable from J5.
3. Disconnect the cable from J14 (RS232).
4. Disconnect the ribbon cable from J3 (meter).
5. Disconnect the cable from J19 (inlet cell).
6. Disconnect the cable from J20 (outlet cell).
7. Disconnect the cable from J21 (meter/P2).
8. Disconnect the cable from J22 (meter/P3).
9. Disconnect the cables from J34 (5V motor).
10. Disconnect the cables from J23 (motor).
11. Disconnect the cables from J12 (pressure).
12. Disconnect the cable from J36 (flood).
13. Disconnect the following cables and label them as
directed: J24 and J25 (label SV1); J26 and J27
(label SV2); J28 and J29 (label SV3); J30 and J31
(label SV4); J32 and J33 (label SV5).
14. Disconnect the cable with red-brown-wires from
J13, level.
15. Disconnect the 36V DC power cable from J7.
16. Disconnect the 36V DC power cable from J6.
17. Remove the six (6) screws that secure PC1119X2
PCB.
Replacement
Install
PC1119X2
1. Align the board and secure with six (6) screws.
PCB
2. Connect the 36V DC power cable to J6.
3. Connect the 36V DC power cable to J7.
4. Connect the cable with red-brown-wires to J13, level.
5. Connect the following cables according to the labels previously attached: J24 and J25 (label SV1);
J26 and J27 (label SV2); J28 and J29 (label SV3); J30 and J31 (label SV4); J32 and J33 (label
SV5).
6. Connect the cables to J12 (pressure) and to J36 (flood).
7. Connect the cables to J34 (5V motor) and to J23 (motor).
8. Connect the cable to J22 (meter/P3).
9. Connect the cable to J21 (meter/P2).
10. Connect the cable to J20 (outlet cell).
11. Connect the cable to J19 (inlet cell).
12. Connect the ribbon cable to J3 (meter).
13. Connect the cable to J14 (RS232).
14. Connect the ribbon cable to J5.
15. Close the PS/BD access door and secure with the captive screw.
Prepare for
Operation
Verification
R1.03 BD,SENSOR,ARM Version - 96728-111_230_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78192-01 Bd, Sensor, ARM
R1.03 BD,SENSOR,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Middle
PCB
access door.
2. Disconnect the cable from P1.
5. Remove the four (4) screws that secure middle
board.
Replacement
Install Middle Board

1. Align middle board mounting holes to mounting posts and secure with four (4) screws.
2. Connect cable to P1.

Verification
R1.04 POWER SUPPLY,ARM Version - 96728-111_231_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78189-01 Power Supply, ARM
R1.04 POWER SUPPLY,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
Remove
Power Supply
access door.
2. Remove nut that secures three (3) red wires to
upper power supply terminal post and remove
wires.
3. Remove nut that secures three (3) black wires to
lower power supply terminal post and remove
wires.
4. Remove the four (4) screws and nuts that secure
power supply.
5. Unscrew and remove the two (2) black wires from
terminals L1 and L2/N terminals.
6. Unscrew and remove Green/Yellow striped ground
wire from ground terminal.
Replacement

1. Insert and secure ground wire (Green with Yellow stripe) to power supply AC terminal
ground post.
2. Insert and secure two (2) black wires to power supply AC terminal L1 and L2/N posts.
3. Secure the Power Supply to the panel with 4 screws and nuts.
4. Connect three (3) black wires over the lower terminal post and secure with one nut.
5. Connect three (3) red wires over the upper terminal post and secure with one nut.
8. Connect water input to ARCHITECT ARM.
Prepare for
Operation
Verification
R1.05 BLOCK,VALVE,ARM Version - 96728-111_233_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78197-01 Block, Valve, ARM
R1.05 BLOCK,VALVE,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
Remove
Valve Block
1. Remove hose clamps on two (2) tubings on rear
of valve block and disconnect both tubings.
2. Unscrew and remove inlet cell from top, left side of
valve block.
3. Remove hose clamp and disconnect the tubing
from upper left side of valve block.
4. Unscrew and disconnect the tubing from lower left
side of valve block
5. Unscrew and disconnect the two (2) tubings from
bottom of valve block
6. Disconnect the two (2) wires from each of two (2)
valves on front left side of valve block.
7. Disconnect the two (2) wires from each of three
(3) valves on front right side of valve block
8. Remove the two (2) screws that secure the left
bracket to the shelf.
9. Remove the two (2) screws that secure the right
side of valve block to the vertical bracket.
Replacement
Install Valve Block

1. Secure the right side of valve block to the vertical bracket with two (2) screws.
2. Secure the left bracket to the shelf with two (2) screws.
3. Connect two (2) wires to each of three (3) valves on front right side of valve block.
4. Connect two (2) wires to each of two (2) valves on front left side of valve block.
5. Connect and screw on two (2) tubings to bottom of valve block
6. Connect and screw on tubing to lower left side of valve block.
7. Connect tubing to upper left side of valve block and secure with hose clamp.
8. Insert and screw on inlet cell to top, left side of valve block. Install o-ring, if included.
9. Connect two (2) tubings to rear of valve block and secure both with hose clamps.
11. Connect water supply to ARCHITECT ARM.

Verification
R1.06 REG,INPUT PRESSURE,ARM Version - 96728-111_234_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78179-01 Reg, Input Pressure, ARM
R1.06 REG,INPUT PRESSURE,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Input
Regulator
1. Disconnect the four (4) tubes connected to
the input regulator.
Replacement
Install Input Regulator

1. Position regulator and connect four (4) tubings.
2. Verify that all four (4) fittings are secure.
3. Close fluidics access door.

Verification
R1.08 PUMP,ARM Version - 96728-111_235_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78190-01 Pump, ARM
R1.08 PUMP,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Dual
Head Pump
1. Loosen the captive screw and open the
PS/BD access door.
2. Remove the four (4) screw-on fittings from
pump heads.
3. Disconnect the drive cable from pump.
4. Disconnect the sensor cable from PCX25
PCB J2 and J6.
pump bracket to chassis.
Replacement
Install Dual Head Pump

1. Position and secure pump to chassis with four (4) screws.
2. Connect drive cable to pump.
3. Connect sensor cable to PCX25 PCB J2 and J6.
4. Connect four (4) tubings to pump heads.
5. Close PS/BD access door and secure.

Verification
R1.09 SENSOR,INPUT PRESSURE,ARM Version - 96728-111_236_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78180-01 Sensor, Input Pressure, ARM
R1.09 SENSOR,INPUT PRESSURE,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Input
Pressure Sensor
1. Locate input pressure sensor on rear panel.
2. Unscrew and disconnect the tubing from the
pressure sensor.
3. Disconnect the two (2) black wires from
pressure sensor terminals marked NO and C.
4. Remove the two (2) screws that secure
pressure sensor.
Replacement
Install Input Pressure Sensor

1. Secure pressure sensor to rear panel with two (2) screws.
2. Connect two (2) black wires to input pressure sensors terminals marked NO and C.
3. Connect tubing to lower sensor port.

Verification
R1.11 KEYPAD,ARM Version - 96728-111_237_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78181-01 Keypad, ARM
R1.11 KEYPAD,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
2. Unplug the AC power cord from the
module.
3. Disconnect the inlet water tubing from
the module.
Remove
ARCHITECT ARM
Keypad
top cover on left and right sides.
2. Lift off top cover and unplug ribbon
cable.
3. Remove four (4) nuts that secure
keypad to top cover.
keypad to panel.
Replacement
Install ARCHITECT ARM Keypad

1. Secure keypad to panel with four (4) screws.
2. Secure keypad assembly to top cover with four (4) nuts.
3. Connect ribbon cable to keypad.
4. Secure top cover to ARCHITECT ARM with four (4) screws.

Verification
R1.12 PANEL,POWER ENTRY,ARM Version - 96728-111_238_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78188-01 Panel, Power Entry, ARM
R1.12 PANEL,POWER ENTRY,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
Remove Power Entry

Panel
1. Loosen the two (2) screws (captive) that secure the PS/BD access door and open the
door.
2. Disconnect the two (2) black wires from the top lugs of the power entry panel.
3. Disconnect the ground wire (green/yellow stripe) from the bottom lug of the power
entry panel.
4. Remove the four (4) screws that secure the power entry panel.
Replacement
Install Power Entry

Panel
1. Install the replacement power entry panel and secure with four (4) screws.
2. Connect the two (2) black wires to the top lugs of the power entry panel.
3. Connect the ground wire (green/yellow stripe) to the bottom lug of the power entry
panel.
4. Close the PS/BD access door and secure with two (2) screws (captive).

1. Connect the inlet water tubing from the processing module.
Verification
R1.15 CASTERS,ARM Version - 96728-111_239_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78170-01 Casters, ARM
R1.15 CASTERS,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove
Wheel
1. Loosen captive screw and open PS/BD access
door.
2. Remove the four (4) bolts and nuts that secure
wheel.
Replacement
Install Wheel
1. Align wheel holes to ARCHITECT ARM base holes and secure wheel with four (4) bolts and
nuts.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
R1.17 BLOCK,OUTLET CELL,ARM Version - 96728-111_240_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78184-01 Block, Outlet Cell, ARM
R1.17 BLOCK,OUTLET CELL,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
Remove
Outlet Cell
Block
access door.
2. At the pump assembly, locate the three (3) tubings
from the output cell block and remove the tube
clamps on the pump heads end.
3. Remove the two tubings from both fittings.
4. Remove tubing clamp that secures tubing from
inlet cell block to output cell block fitting.
5. Remove tubing from fitting.
6. Disconnect the two (2) black wires from outlet cell
pressure sensor terminals marked C and NC.
7. Unscrew and remove outlet cell from outlet cell
block.
8.
Remove the two (2) screws that secure outlet cell
block to right panel.
9. Remove outlet cell block.
Replacement
Install Outlet Cell

Block
1. Secure Outlet Cell block to right side panel with two (2) screws.
2. Insert and screw on outlet cell.
3. Connect two (2) black wire, each to Outlet Cell Pressure sensor terminals marked C and
NC.
4. Connect tubing from Output Cell block to inlet cell block and secure with tubing clamp.
5. Connect three (3) tubings from Outlet Cell block to Dual Head pump heads. and secure with
tubing clamps.
Prepare for
Operation
Verification
R1.18 FUSE,250V/2A,PACK,ARM Version - 96728-111_241_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78177-01 Fuse, 250V/2A, ARM
R1.18 FUSE,250V/2A,PACK,ARM
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials Small flat blade screwdriver
Removal
Preparation
Remove
Fuse(s)
1. Locate fuse holder at upper end of power input
panel.
Note
The cutout in the access door is designed to
provide access to the fuse holder without
opening the door.
2. With a small flat screw driver, lift the fuse holder

release tab.
Note
The fuse holder should pop out.
3. Remove fuse holder.

4. Remove fuse(s).
Replacement
Install Fuse(s)
1. Insert fuse(s) into the holder.
2. Insert fuse holder into its slot on input power panel.
3. Push the fuse holder until it snaps into place.
Verification
R1.19 CELL,INLET,ARM Version - 96728-111_242_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78178-01 Cell, Inlet, ARM
R1.19 CELL,INLET,ARM
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Inlet
Cell
1. Loosen the captive screw and open lower door.
2. Unscrew the inlet cell from valve block.
3. Unplug the cord from PC1119X1 PCB connector
J19.
4. Remove the cord through the two (2) routing
holes and cord clamp.
Replacement
Install Inlet Cell

1. Screw inlet cell into valve block. Install o-ring, if included.
2. Route cable through two (2) mounting holes and cable clamp.
3. Plug cable into PC1119X1 PCB connector J19.
4. Close lower door and secure.

Verification
R1.20 DOOR,SERVICE,ARM Version - 96728-111_244_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78193-01 Door, Service, ARM
R1.20 DOOR,SERVICE,ARM
5 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
2. Unplug the AC power cord from the
module.
module.
Remove Fluidics
Access Door
1. Remove the six (6) screws that secure the
door to the cabinet.
2. Remove the fluidics access door.
Replacement
Install Fluidics Access Door

1. Align hinge to holes in cabinet and secure with the six (6) screws.


errors.
R1.21 DOOR,ELECTRONICS BAY,ARM Version - 96728-111_245_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78173-01 Door, Electronics Bay, ARM
R1.21 DOOR,ELECTRONICS BAY,ARM
5 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Lower
Door
access door.
2. Remove the four (4) screws and nuts that
secure door to hinge.
3. Remove the four (4) screws that secure board
panel to lower door.
Replacement
Install Lower Door

1. Align door to hinge holes and secure door to hinge with four (4) screws and nuts.
2. Align board panel mounting holes to stand-off on lower door and secure with four (4)
screws.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
R1.22 COVER,TOP,ARM Version - 96728-111_246_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78195-01 Cover, Top, ARM
R1.22 COVER,TOP,ARM
5 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Top
Cover
1. Remove the four (4) screws from left and right
sides of cover.
2. Lift cover and disconnect the ribbon cable from
the keypad.
3. Locate and disconnect the cable from PC1119X1
PCB connector J13.
4. Remove cable through two (2) routing holes.
Replacement
Install Top Cover

1. Route cable through two (2) mounting holes to PC1119X1 PCB
2. Plug cable into PC1119X1 PCB connector J13.
3. Plug ribbon cable into the keypad.
4. Position cover on ARCHITECT ARM top and align mounting holes.
5. Secure cover on left and right sides.


errors.
R1.25 POWER CORD,ARM Version - 96728-111_247_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78186-01 Power Cord, US, ARM
7-78187-01 Power Cord, Europe, ARM
R1.25 POWER CORD,ARM
10 min
Time Required
Removal
Remove Power
Cord
2. Unplug the AC power cord from the power
source.
3. Unplug the AC power cord from the module
power supply entry panel.
Replacement
Install Power Cord

1. Plug replacement power cord to module power entry panel.
2. Plug replacement power cord to power source.
Verification
R1.27 CABLE,RS232,KIT,ARM Version - 96728-111_248_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78191-01 Kit, Cable, RS232, ARM
R1.27 CABLE,RS232,KIT,ARM
10 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Remove
RS232
Cable
2. Loosen the two (2) screws that secure the RS232
cable to the rear panel.
3. Disconnect the RS232 cable from the
ARCHITECT ARM.
4. If the ARCHITECT ARM is connected to the SCC
by serial cable, disconnect the RS232 cable from
the SCC.
Replacement
Install RS232
Cable
1. If the ARCHITECT ARM is connected to the SCC by serial cable, connect the RS232 cable to
the SCC.
2. Connect the RS232 cable to the ARCHITECT ARM and secure the two (2) screws.
Verification
R1.28 KIT,TUBING,ARM Version - 96728-111_249_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92484-02 Tubing, ARM to Instrument
R1.28 KIT,TUBING,ARM
5 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Remove ARCHITECT ARM
Tubing
1. Power OFF the
ARCHITECT ARM.
2. Disconnect the inlet water
tubing.
Replacement
Install ARCHITECT ARM Tubing

1. Connect the inlet water tubing.
Verification
R1.29 FUSE,250V/1A,PACK,ARM Version - 96728-111_250_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78214-01 Fuse, 250V/1A, ARM
R1.29 FUSE,250V/1A,PACK,ARM
5 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
Remove Fuse
1. Remove the fuse from the fuse holder.
Replacement
Install Fuse
1. Install the fuse in the fuse holder.

Verification
S1.01 LAS B Dual Sensor Board Version - 96728-111_251_1
List/Part Numbers
7-90775-01 Bd, LAS B modified Dual Sensor
S1.01 LAS B Dual Sensor Board
15 min
Time Required
#1 Phillips screwdriver.
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove LAS
Front Carousel
1. Remove the LAS carousel.
Cover Assembly
2. Disconnect the cable from the carousel front
cover sensor. [1]
3. Remove the screws securing the lower cover
track supports to the processing module. [2]
4. Remove the screws securing the upper left and
right mounting brackets to the processing
module. [3]
5. Disconnect the LUI interface cable (W153) from
the LQ LUI keypad cable (W111) when
removing the LAS front carousel cover
assembly.
Remove LAS
Sensor B Dual
1. Disconnect P1 and P2 from the carousel home
Board
sensor cable (92408) to J1 and J2 on the
sensor board (90775).
2. Disconnect cable W134 LAS Carousel Sensor
Cable (93754) from the sensor board (90775).
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the
sensor board to the drive plate sub-assembly
and remove the sensor board.
Replacement
Install LAS
Sensor B
1. Install the LAS sensor board with two (2)
Dual Board
screws.
2. Connect P1 from the carousel home
sensor cable (92408) to J1 on the sensor
board and P2 to J2 on the sensor board.
3. Connect cable W134 LAS carousel
sensor cable (93754) to J3 on the sensor
board (90775).
4. Connect the LUI interface cable (W153)
to the LQ LUI keypad cable (W111) and
install the front cover assembly.
5. Insert the LAS carousel.
Note
initialization.

errors.
3 3225 - LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration
S1.02 LAS Tension Arm Assembly Version - 96728-111_252_1
List/Part Numbers
7-90413-01 Tension Arm Assy
S1.02 LAS Tension Arm Assembly
1.0 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove LAS
Front Carousel
Cover Assembly
cover sensor. [1]
module. [3]
assembly.
Remove LAS
Tension Arm
1. Remove the shoulder screw securing the
Assembly
tension arm assembly to the plate.
2. Lift tension arm assembly away from the motor
slide.
Replacement
Install
Tension
1. Assemble the tension arm assembly by inserting the
Arm
compression spring and spring plunger into the
Assembly
tension arm.
2. Compress the components with light force, aligning
the openings through the arm and plunger.
3. Insert the shoulder screw to retain the parts.
4. Attach the tension arm assembly to the drive plate
by inserting, then tightening, the shoulder screw into
the threaded hole.
5. Rotate the tension arm in a clockwise direction until
the arm engages a ramp feature on the motor slide
surface and then snaps into place in a recess in the
motor slide.
Install
Front
1. Connect the LUI interface cable (W153) to the LQ
Cover
LUI keypad cable (W111) and install the front cover
Assembly
assembly.
2. Connect the LAS carousel sensor cable to the
carousel front cover sensor.
3. Place the LAS carousel onto the carousel gear.

Note and shutdown.

errors.
2 3600 - LLS Test
S1.03 LAS Carousel Pinion Motor Version - 96728-111_253_1
List/Part Numbers
7-90411-01 Motor Slide Assy
S1.03 LAS Carousel Pinion Motor
1.0 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove LAS
Front
Carousel
2. Disconnect the cable from the carousel front cover
Cover
sensor. [1]
Assembly
3. Remove the screws securing the lower cover track
supports to the processing module. [2]
module. [3]
5. Disconnect the LUI interface cable (W153) from the
LQ LUI keypad cable (W111) when removing the
LAS front carousel cover assembly.
Remove LAS
Carousel
1. Release the LAS Motor Slide Assembly from the
Motor
LAS carousel by pushing the tension arm assembly
out of the recess of the motor slide.
2. Rotate the tension arm assembly counter clockwise
away from the motor slide.
3. Slide the motor away from the carousel gear,
unplug the LAS carousel motor cable W128 from
the motor and disconnect the ground cable (92380)
from the motor; by removing the screw securing the
ground cable to the motor.
4. Lift the motor slide assembly out of the carousel
drive assembly.
Replacement
Install LAS
Motor
1. Place the motor slide assembly into the carousel
Slide
drive assembly.
Assembly
2. Connect LAS carousel motor cable W128 to the
carousel motor and the ground cable to the motor
slide.
3. Slide the motor toward the carousel gear and lock
into place by rotating the tension arm assembly
clockwise until it locks into place in the recess of
the motor slide.
Install LAS
Front
Cover
LUI keypad cable (W111) and install the front
Assembly
cover assembly.
2. Secure the cover to the processing module using
screws.
3. Attach the cable to the carousel front cover
sensor.
4. Secure the mounting brackets to the processing
module.

Note and shutdown.

errors.
S1.04 Board, LAS LLS Antenna Version - 96728-111_256_1
List/Part Numbers
7-90870-01 LAS Track, Hitachi Antenna Bd
7-92940-01 Bd, Antenna, LAS Track General
7-92940-02 Bd, Antenna, LAS Track General (RoHS)
S1.04 Board, LAS LLS Antenna
1.0 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials #1 Phillips screwdriver.
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove LAS
LLS Antenna
1. Remove the retainer pin located at the top of the
Board
board.
2. Lift the LAS LLS antenna board up and out of
the bracket to gain access to the cables.
3. Disconnect the RV1/LAS antenna signal cable
W96 and antenna power cable W95 from the
LAS LLS antenna board.
Replacement
Install LAS
LLS
1. Inspect the coaxial cable RV1/LAS
Antenna
antenna signal cable W96 and verify that
Board
the center pin is not bent.
2. Connect the RV1/LAS antenna signal
cable W96 and the antenna power cable
W95 to the LAS LLS antenna board.
3. Attach the board to the bracket and
secure with the retaining pin.
4. Attach the left side skin panel.
Note
initialization.

errors.
3 3600 - LLS Test
2 1118 - LAS Pipettor Calibration
S1.05 Bracket, LAS LLS Antenna Board Version - 96728-111_257_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77450-01 Bracket, Sample LLS Bd
S1.05 Bracket, LAS LLS Antenna Board
1.0 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove LAS
LLS Antenna
1. Remove the retainer pin located at the top of
Board
the board.
2. Lift the LAS LLS antenna board up and out of
the bracket to gain access to the cables.
3. Disconnect the RV1/LAS antenna signal cable
W96 and antenna power cable W95 from the
LAS LLS antenna board.
Remove LAS
LLS Antenna
Board Bracket
bracket to the instrument.
2. Remove the bracket.
Replacement
Install LAS
LLS Antenna
1. Align the bracket.
Board Bracket
2. Attach the bracket to the instrument
using two (2) screws.
Install LAS
LLS Antenna
1. Inspect the coaxial cable RV1/LAS
Board
antenna signal cable W96 and verify
that the center pin is not bent.
2. Connect the RV1/LAS antenna signal
cable W96 and the antenna power
cable W95 to the LAS LLS antenna
board.
3. Attach the board to the bracket and
secure with the retaining pin.
4. Attach the left side skin panel.
Note
initialization.

errors.
3 3600 - LLS Test
2 1118 - LAS Pipettor Calibration
S1.06 LAS Drive Plate Assembly Version - 96728-111_258_1
List/Part Numbers
7-90408-01 Drive Plate assy
S1.06 LAS Drive Plate Assembly
1.0 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove LAS
Front Carousel
Cover Assembly
cover sensor. [1]
module. [3]
assembly.
Remove LAS
Sensor B Dual
1. Disconnect P1 and P2 from the carousel home
Board
sensor cable (92408) to J1 and J2 on the
2. Disconnect cable W134 LAS Carousel Sensor
Cable (93754) from J3 on sensor board
(90775).
sensor board to the drive plate sub-assembly
and remove the sensor board.
Remove LAS
Barcode Reader
1. Disconnect W156 and W106 from the BCR
Power T Board
power T board.
2. Remove the seven (7) screws securing the
BCR power T board to the standoffs.
Remove LAS
Drive Plate
1. Disconnect LAS carousel motor Cable W128
Assembly
from the carousel motor.
2. Remove the four (4) screws, two on each side,
securing the drive plate to the frame.
3. Lift the drive plate away from the frame.
Replacement
Install LAS
Drive Plate
1. Align the holes of the drive plate with
Assembly
the screw holes in the frame and
secure using four (4) screws.
2. Connect W128 to the carousel motor.
Install LAS
Barcode
1. Secure the BCR power T board to the
Reader Power
standoffs using seven (7) screws.
T Board
2. Connect cables W156 and W106 to the
BCR power T board.
Install LAS B
Dual Sensor
1. Install the LAS sensor board with two
Board
(2) screws.
2. Connect P1 from the carousel home
sensor cable (92408) to J1 on the
sensor board and P2 to J2 on the
sensor board.
3. Connect cable W134 LAS Carousel
Sensor Cable (93754) to J3 on the
4. Attach the front cover assembly.
5. Insert the LAS carousel.
Install LAS
Front Cover
Assembly
2. Secure the cover to the processing
module using screws.
3. Attach the cable to the carousel front
cover sensor.
4. Secure the mounting brackets to the
processing module.
Note
initialization.
errors.
4 3600 - LLS Test
S1.07 LAS Carousel Home and Position Sensor Version - 96728-111_259_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92408-01 Carousel Home and Position Sensor, LAS
S1.07 LAS Carousel Home and Position Sensor
1.0 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal

or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove LAS
Front Carousel
Cover Assembly
cover sensor. [1]
4. Remove the screws securing the upper left
and right mounting brackets to the processing
module. [3]
5. Disconnect the LUI interface cable (W153)
from the LQ LUI keypad cable (W111) when
assembly.
Remove LAS
Carousel Home
1. Remove the LAS carousel gear.
and Position
2. Disconnect P1 and P2 cable connectors (from
Sensor
carousel home sensor cable) from the sensor
board.
carousel home sensor to the drive plate sub-
assembly.
4. Remove the carousel home sensor.
Replacement
Install LAS
Carousel Home
1. Place the carousel home sensor on the drive
and Position
plate sub-assembly, aligning the holes in the
Sensor
sensor with the holes in the drive plate sub-
assembly.
2. Secure the sensor in place with two (2)
screws.
3. Connect P1 and P2 from the carousel home
sensor cable to the sensor board.
4. Install the LAS carousel gear.
Install LAS
Front Cover
1. Connect the LUI interface cable (W153) to
Assembly
the LQ LUI keypad cable (W111) and install
the front cover assembly.
2. Secure the cover to the processing module
using screws.
3. Attach the cable to the carousel front cover
sensor.
processing module.

and shutdown.
Note
initialization.

errors.
4 3600 - LLS Test
S1.08 LAS Carousel Drive Gear Version - 96728-111_260_1
List/Part Numbers
7-90416-01 Carousel gear, Bearing and E-Ring
S1.08 LAS Carousel Drive Gear
1.0 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove LAS
Front Carousel
Cover Assembly
cover sensor. [1]
module. [3]
assembly.
Remove LAS
Carousel Drive
1. Release the carousel motor from the LAS
Gear
carousel by rotating the tension arm assembly
counterclockwise out of the recess in the motor
slide.
2. Slide the motor out of the way.
3. Remove the retaining E-ring securing the upper
bearing and drive gear on the shaft.
4. Lift up on the drive gear and remove the drive
gear and bearings.
Replacement
Install
LAS
1. Install the lower bearing on top of the drive spindle
Carousel
pressed in place on the drive plate.
Drive
2. Place the LAS carousel drive gear on top of the
Gear
lower bearing.
3. Install the upper bearing on top of the LAS carousel
drive gear and secure with the retaining E-ring.
4. Slide the carousel motor toward the drive gear and
lock into place by rotating the tension arm assembly
clockwise until it snaps into place into the recess of
the motor slide.
Install
LAS Front
Cover
LUI keypad cable (W111) and install the front cover
Assembly
assembly.
2. Secure the cover to the processing module using
screws.
3. Attach the cable to the carousel front cover sensor.
4. Secure the mounting brackets to the processing
module.

and shutdown.
Note

errors.
4 3600 - LLS Test
S1.09 Board, LAS Barcode Reader Power T Version - 96728-111_261_1
S1.09 Board, LAS Barcode Reader Power T
1.0 hr
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove LAS
Front Carousel
Cover Assembly
cover sensor. [1]
module. [3]
assembly.
Remove LAS
Barcode Reader
1. Disconnect W156 and W106 from the BCR
Power T Board
power T board.
2. Remove the seven (7) screws securing the
BCR power T board to the standoffs.
Replacement
Install LAS
Barcode
1. Secure the BCR power T board to the
Reader Power
standoffs using seven (7) screws.
T Board
2. Connect cables W156 and W106 to the
BCR power T board.
Install LAS
Front Cover
Assembly
to the LQ LUI keypad cable (W111)
and install the front cover assembly.
cover sensor.
processing module.
Note
the processing module for

errors.
S1.10 ARCHITECT LAS CPU Board Version - 96728-111_262_1
List/Part Numbers
7-90905-01 LAS CPU Board
S1.10 ARCHITECT LAS CPU Board
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Attach Wrist
Strap Note
board.

Remove
ARCHITECT
1. Locate the ARCHITECT LAS CPU board in slot 3
LAS CPU
of the card cage.
Board
2. Rotate the red ejector tabs outward toward the
upper and lower edge of the board.
Note

Replacement
Install
ARCHITECT
1. Align the top and bottom edges of the
LAS CPU
ARCHITECT LAS CPU board in the slot 3 guides
Board
and place the board in the card cage.
stops.
against the board.
Note
connector.


1. Close the cover to the card cage cover and
secure with the screws securing it in place.
and shutdown.
Note

errors.
2 6008 - Controller Configuration
S1.11 Sensor, LAS Carousel Cover Version - 96728-111_263_1
S1.11 Sensor, LAS Carousel Cover
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal

be in Stopped, or Offline
status.
Preparation
module.
Remove LAS
Carousel
Remove LAS
Carousel Cover
1. Disconnect the cable from the
Sensor
carousel front cover
sensor. [1]
2. Remove the screws securing
the sensor to the front cover.
Replacement
Install LAS
Carousel
1. Secure the sensor to the carousel cover
Cover
using screws.
Sensor
cover sensor.
Note
initialization.

errors.
S1.12 Assembly, LAS Front Carousel Cover Version - 96728-111_264_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92417-02 LAS Front Cover Assy
S1.12 Assembly, LAS Front Carousel Cover
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove LAS
Front Carousel
Cover Assembly
cover sensor. [1]
module. [3]
assembly.
Replacement
Install LAS
Front Cover
Assembly
cover sensor.
processing module.
Note
initialization.

errors.
V2.01 LQ,ASM Version - 96728-111_265_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77324-01 LQ ASM
V2.01 LQ,ASM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Remove the load queue cover.
3. Disconnect the sample handler LUI cable.
4. Remove the carrier access windows.
5. Remove the processing queue cover.
Remove
Load
1. Remove the three (3) screws securing the load
Transfer
transfer assembly to the processing queue and load
Assembly
queue.
2. Remove the wear strip.
3. Remove the screw securing the load transfer fence
to the top of the processing queue front rail.
4. Remove LQ HALL SNSR cable from the sensor on
the carrier stop bracket.
5. Remove W21 T1 MTR cable from the load transfer
motor.
6. Remove W44 T1 SOL and W44 T1 SOL SNSR
cable from J2 connector on the front sensor
board #10 (78650) of the load transfer assembly.
7. Lift the load transfer assembly off of the mounting
features and remove W114 T1 SNSR cable from
the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215),
located on the rear of the load transfer assembly.
8. Remove cable P1 (from BCR FULL) from the J1
connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on
the rear of the load transfer assembly.
9. Remove the load transfer assembly from the
instrument.
Remove
Load
1. Remove the LQ1 FULL SNSR cable from the J2
Queue
Assembly
the front of the load queue assembly.
2. Remove the LQ1 SNSR cable from the J3
3. Remove the LQ1 MTR cable from the load queue
motor
4. Remove the four (4) screws securing the load
queue to the support brackets
Note
If the load queue BCR is attached to the
load queue, disconnect the BCR cable
(W113 LQ BCR) before removing the load
queue.
5. Remove the load queue from the instrument.
Replacement
Install Load
Queue Assembly
1. Mount the load queue onto the support brackets and secure it using four (4) screws.
Note
If the load queue BCR is attached to the load queue, connect the BCR cable (W113
LQ BCR).
2. Connect the LQ1 MTR cable to the load queue motor.

3. Connect the LQ1 SNSR cable to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on
4. Connect the LQ1 FULL SNSR cable to the J2 connector on sensor board #2 (76215),
located on the front of the load queue assembly.
Install Load
Transfer Assembly
1. Connect cable P1 (from BCR Full) to the J1 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located
on the rear of the load transfer assembly.
2. Connect cable W114 T1 SNSR to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on
3. Install the load transfer assembly onto the mounting features of the load queue and
processing queue assemblies and secure in place with three (3) screws.
4. Install the load transfer fence to the processing queue front rail and secure it with one (1)
screw.
5. Install the wear strip.
6. Connect cable W44 T1 SOL and W44 T1 SOL SNSR to the J2 connector on the front
sensor board #10 (78650) of the load transfer assembly.
7. Connect cable W21 T1 MTR to the load transfer motor.
8. Connect cable LQ HALL SNSR to the sensor on the carrier stop bracket.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install the processing queue cover.
2. Install the carrier access windows.
3. Install the load queue cover. Connect the sample handler LUI cable.

errors.
2 3315 - Sample Handler Test
V2.02 BCR,SID,LQ Version - 96728-111_267_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77327-01 Barcode Reader SID
V2.02 BCR,SID,LQ
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Class 2 Laser Radiation
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Upper Left
Cover
access the upper left cover mounting screws.
2. Turn the upper left cover front and rear mounting
screws counterclockwise one-quarter turn to
release them.
3. Tilt the cover toward you, pull up and out, and
remove the cover.
Remove Load
Queue BCR
1. Locate and loosen the two (2) screws (captive)
Assembly
securing the load queue BCR assembly to
bracket (77322).
2. Lift up the load queue BCR assembly and
disconnect cable W113 LQ BCR.
Remove Load
Queue BCR
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the BCR to
the bracket (77359).
Note
Load queue BCR assembly mounting
bracket (77322) may be attached to either
the load queue assembly, or to the side of
the structure.
Replacement
Install Load
Queue BCR
1. Attach the load queue BCR to the
bracket (77359) using two (2)
screws.
Install Load
Queue BCR
1. Connect cable W113 LQ BCR.
Assembly
2. Install the load queue BCR
assembly to the bracket (77322)
and tighten the two (2) captive
screws.
Install Upper
Left Cover
1. With the cover angled toward you,
place the locking features onto the
slots in the frame.
2. Push the cover to the frame and
align the screw holes.
3. Turn each screw clockwise one-
quarter turn to secure.
4. Close the appropriate processing
center cover(s).

errors.
V2.04 MOTOR,CONVEYOR,LQ Version - 96728-111_268_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77351-01 Motor, Conveyor, LQ
V2.04 MOTOR,CONVEYOR,LQ
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
transfer assembly to the processing queue and
Assembly
load queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Load
1. Remove the LQ1 full sensor cable from the J2
Queue
Assembly
2. Remove the LQ1 sensor cable from the J3
motor
Note
queue.
Remove
Timing Belt
1. Loosen four (4) screws securing the load queue
motor and slide the motor toward the pulley
assembly so as to release tension on its timing belt.
2. Slide this timing belt off of the toothed pulley of the
pulley assembly.
Remove
Load
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the pulley
Queue
assembly to the frame of the load queue assembly.
Pulley
Remove
Load
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the sensor
Queue
board #2 (76215) bracket (77328).
Conveyor
Motor
queue conveyor motor and slide the motor toward
the pulley assembly so as to release tension on its
timing belt.
3. Slide this timing belt off of the motor assembly and
remove the motor.
Replacement
Install Load Queue

Conveyor Motor
1. Install the load queue conveyor motor with four (4) screws. Do not tighten down the
screws yet.
2. Slide the timing belt from the load queue pulley on to the load queue motor assembly
pulley.
3. Slide the motor away from the pulley assembly to apply tension to the belt. Secure the
motor by tightening the four mounting screws.
4. Attach the sensor board #2 (76215) bracket (77328) with two (2) screws.
Install Load Queue

Assembly
Note
LQ BCR).

3. Connect the LQ1 sensor cable to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located
on the front of the load queue assembly.
4. Connect the LQ1 full sensor cable to the J2 connector on sensor board #2 (76215),
located on the front of the load queue assembly.
Install Load Transfer

Assembly
1. Connect cable P1 (from BCR Full) to the J1 connector on sensor board #2 (76215),
2. Connect cable W114 T1 SNSR to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V2.05 BELT,TIMING,LQ Version - 96728-111_269_1
V2.05 BELT,TIMING,LQ
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Load
Queue
Assembly
motor.
queue to the support brackets.
Note
queue.
Remove
Load
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the sensor
Queue
board #2 (76215) bracket (77328).
Pulley Belt
2. Loosen the four (4) screws securing the load queue
motor assembly (77351) to the load queue
assembly.
3. Slide the motor assembly (77351) to the front,
releasing tension on the load queue pulley belt.
4. Slide the timing belt off of the pulley on the load
queue conveyor assembly.
Replacement
Install Load
Queue Pulley
1. Slide the load queue motor assembly (77351) toward the front of the instrument.
Belt
2. Install the timing belt from the load queue motor pulley to the conveyor pulley and then slide the
load queue motor assembly to the back of the instrument to put tension on the timing belt.
3. Secure the load queue motor assembly (77351) to the load queue assembly with four (4)
screws.
4. Install the sensor board #2 (76215) bracket (77328) with two (2) screws.
Install Load
Queue
Assembly
Note
If the load queue BCR is attached to the load queue, connect the BCR cable (W113 LQ
BCR).

3. Connect the LQ1 sensor cable to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on the
front of the load queue assembly.
4. Connect the LQ1 full sensor cable to the J2 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on
Install Load
Transfer
1. Connect cable P1 (from BCR Full) to the J1 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on
Assembly
2. Connect cable W114 T1 SNSR to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on the
rear of the load transfer assembly.
3. Install the load transfer assembly onto the mounting features of the load queue and processing
queue assemblies and secure in place with three (3) screws.
screw.
6. Connect cable W44 T1 SOL and W44 T1 SOL SNSR to the J2 connector on the front sensor
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V2.06 BELT,PULLEY,LQ Version - 96728-111_270_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78165-01 Belts, Sample Handler Kit
V2.06 BELT,PULLEY,LQ
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Load
Queue
Assembly
motor
Note
queue.
Remove
Load
Queue
queue conveyor (77350) to the load queue
Pulley Belt
assembly.
2. Slide the conveyor to the rear, releasing tension on
the timing belt.
3. Slide the timing belt off of the pulley of the load
queue conveyor assembly.
Replacement
Install Load
Queue Pulley
1. Slide the load queue conveyor assembly toward the front of the instrument.
Belt
load queue conveyor to the front of the instrument to put tension on the timing belt.
3. Secure the load queue conveyor to the load queue assembly with four (4) screws.
Install Load
Queue
Assembly
Note
BCR).

Install Load
Transfer
Assembly
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V2.07 CONVEYOR,LQ Version - 96728-111_271_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77350-01 Conveyor, LQ
V2.07 CONVEYOR,LQ
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
load queue.
4. Remove LQ HALL SNSR cable from the sensor
on the carrier stop bracket.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Load Queue
Assembly
motor
Note
queue.
Remove
Load Queue
Conveyor
queue conveyor.
2. Slide the conveyor to the rear, releasing tension of
the timing belt.
queue closeout bracket (77536).
Replacement
Install Load
Queue Conveyor
1. Install the load queue conveyor belt to the load queue frame using four (4) screws.
Note
Do not tighten screws until the load queue pulley belt is in place.
2. Tighten the four (4) screws securing the load queue conveyor.
3. Install the load queue closeout bracket using four (4) screws.
Install Load
Queue Assembly
Note
LQ BCR).

3. Connect the LQ1 sensor cable to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on
4. Connect the LQ1 full sensor cable to the J2 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located
Install Load
Transfer Assembly
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V2.08 PULLEY,LQ Version - 96728-111_272_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77402-01 Pulley, LQ
V2.08 PULLEY,LQ
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Load
Queue
Assembly
motor
Note
queue.
Remove
Load
Queue
queue conveyor.
Conveyor
the timing belt.
3. Slide the timing belt off of the pulley assembly, but
leave the belt on the conveyor pulley.
Remove
Sensor
1. From underneath the load queue assembly (77328),
Board
remove the sensor board #2 (76215) bracket by
Bracket
removing two (2) screws.
Remove
Timing Belt
1. Loosen four (4) screws securing the load queue
motor and slide the motor toward the pulley
assembly so as to release tension on its timing belt.
2. Slide this timing belt off of the pulley assembly.
Remove
Load
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the pulley
Queue
assembly to the frame of the load queue assembly.
Pulley
Replacement
Install Load
Queue Pulley
1. Install the pulley assembly such that the pulley is under the load queue motor assembly and
secure with two (2) screws.
Install Timing
Belt
1. Slide the timing belt from the load queue motor assembly pulley onto the toothed pulley of the
pulley assembly.
2. Slide the motor away from the pulley assembly to apply tension to the belt. Secure the motor
by tightening the four (4) mounting screws.
Install Sensor
Board Bracket
1. Attach the sensor board bracket with two (2) screws.
Install Load
Queue
1. Slide the load queue conveyor assembly toward the front of the instrument.
Conveyor
load queue conveyor to the front of the instrument to put tension on the timing belt.
3. Secure the load queue conveyor to the load queue assembly with four (4) screws.
Install Load
Queue
Assembly
Note
BCR).

Install Load
Transfer
Assembly
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V2.10 SENSOR,LQ,PROXIMITY Version - 96728-111_273_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77578-01 Sensor, LQ
V2.10 SENSOR,LQ,PROXIMITY
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Load
Queue
Assembly
motor
Note
queue.
Remove
Load
Queue
queue conveyor.
Conveyor
the timing belt.
queue closeout bracket (77536).
Remove
Load
1. Remove nut securing the load queue sensor to the
Queue
rear of the load queue assembly frame and remove
Sensor
the sensor.
2. From underneath the load queue assembly, remove
the load queue sensor cable (77578) from J2 of the
load queue sensor board #2.
Replacement
Install Load
Queue Sensor
1. Install the load queue sensor to the rear of the load queue assembly and secure with a nut.
2. Connect cable (77578) to J2 of the load queue sensor board #2 underneath the load queue
assembly.
Install Load
Queue Conveyor
1. Install the load queue conveyor belt to the load queue frame using four (4) screws.
Note
Do not tighten screws until the load queue pulley belt is in place.
2. Tighten the four (4) screws securing the load queue conveyor.
3. Install the load queue closeout bracket using four (4) screws.
Install Load
Queue Assembly
Note
LQ BCR).

3. Connect the LQ1 sensor cable to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on
4. Connect the LQ1 full sensor cable to the J2 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located
Install Load
Transfer Assembly
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V2.11 BD,SENSOR #2 Version - 96728-111_274_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76215-01 BD, Sensor #2
7-76215-02 BD, Sensor #2 (RoHS)
V2.11 BD,SENSOR #2
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Load
Queue Sensor
1. Remove Cable P1 from J1 of the load queue
Board #2
sensor board #2 on the side of the load queue
assembly.
2. Remove Cable (77578) from J2 of the load
queue sensor board #2 on the side of the load
queue assembly.
3. Remove Cable W114 LQ1 SNSR from J3 of
the load queue sensor board #2 on the side of
the load queue assembly.
4. Remove the load queue sensor board #2 by
removing two (2) screws.
Replacement
Install Load Queue Sensor

Board #2
1. Install the load queue sensor board #2 with two (2) screws to the bracket on the
side of the load queue assembly.
2. Install cable W114 LQ1 SNSR to J3 of the load queue sensor board #2.
3. Install cable (77578) to J2 of the load queue sensor board #2.
4. Install cable P1 to J1 of the load queue sensor board #2.


errors.
V2.13 BCR,SID LQ ASM Version - 96728-111_275_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76159-01 BCR, SID LQ. ASM
V2.13 BCR,SID LQ ASM
11 min.
Time Required
#2 Phillips screw driver (optional)

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Upper
Left Cover
to access the upper left cover mounting screws.
2. Turn the upper left cover front and rear
mounting screws counterclockwise one-quarter
turn to release them.
3. Tilt the cover toward you, pull up and out, and
remove the cover.
Remove the
Load Queue
1. Locate and loosen the two (2) screws (captive)
BCR Assembly
securing the load queue BCR assembly to
bracket (77322).
2. Lift up the load queue BCR assembly and
disconnect cable W113 LQ BCR.
Note
Load queue BCR assembly mounting
bracket (77322) may be attached to
either the load queue assembly, or to the
side of the structure.
Replacement
Install Load Queue BCR

Assembly
1. Connect cable W113 LQ BCR.
2. Install the load queue BCR assembly to the bracket (77322) and tighten the two
(2) captive screws.
Install Upper Left Cover

1. With the cover angled toward you, place the locking features onto the slots in the
frame.
2. Push the cover to the frame and align the screw holes.
3. Turn each screw clockwise one-quarter turn to secure.
4. Close the appropriate processing center cover(s).

2. Close the appropriate processing center cover(s).

errors.
V2.14 CLOSEOUT,LQ Version - 96728-111_276_1
V2.14 CLOSEOUT,LQ
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Load
Queue
Assembly
motor
Note
queue.
Remove
Load
Queue
queue closeout to the end of the load queue.
Closeout
Replacement
Install Load Queue

Closeout
1. Remove the four (4) screws securing the load queue closeout to the end of the load queue.
Install Load Queue

Assembly
Note
If the load queue BCR is attached to the load queue, connect the BCR cable (W113 LQ BCR).

3. Connect the LQ1 sensor cable to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on the front
of the load queue assembly.
4. Connect the LQ1 full sensor cable to the J2 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on the
Install Load
Transfer Assembly
1. Connect cable P1 (from BCR Full) to the J1 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on the
rear of the load transfer assembly.
2. Connect cable W114 T1 SNSR to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located on the rear
of the load transfer assembly.
3. Install the load transfer assembly onto the mounting features of the load queue and processing queue
assemblies and secure in place with three (3) screws.
4. Install the load transfer fence to the processing queue front rail and secure it with one (1) screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V3.01 TRANSFER,LOAD,ASM Version - 96728-111_278_1
List/Part Numbers
7-76962-01 Cable, ISH BCR full sensor
7-77367-01 Stop Bracket- LQ- Depot
7-77374-01 Transfer, Load ASM
V3.01 TRANSFER,LOAD,ASM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
motor.
instrument.
Replacement
Install Load
Transfer Assembly
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V3.02 MOTOR,TRANSFER, LOAD/UNLOAD Version - 96728-111_279_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77378-01 Motor, LQ / ULQ Transfer
V3.02 MOTOR,TRANSFER, LOAD/UNLOAD
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
load queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Load
Transfer
transfer fence.
Motor
2. Loosen the two (2) screws securing the belt clamp
(77376).
3. Loosen two (2) screws of the pulley assembly and
slide the pulley assembly toward the transfer #1
motor.
4. Slide the timing belt off of both pulleys (motor and
pulley) and slide belt out of the belt clamp.
transfer motor to the frame and remove the
motor. [1]
Replacement
Install Load
Transfer Motor
1. Install load transfer motor and secure to frame with four (4) screws.
Install Pulley
Assembly
1. Slide belt in to the belt clamp and over the pulleys for the load transfer motor and pulley
assembly.
2. Pull the pulley assembly away from the motor to tension the belt and secure the pulley
assembly by tightening the two (2) screws.
3. Tighten the two (2) screws securing the belt clamp.
4. Install the load transfer guard with three (3) screws.
Install Load
Transfer Assembly
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V3.03 BELT,TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_280_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78165-01 Belts, Sample Handler Kit
V3.03 BELT,TRANSFER
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Transfer
Belt
transfer fence.
2. Loosen the two (2) screws securing the belt clamp.
3. Loosen two (2) screws of the pulley assembly and
slide the pulley assembly toward the load transfer
motor.
4. Slide the transfer belt off of both pulleys and slide
belt out of the belt clamp.
Replacement
Install Transfer
Belt
1. Install the transfer belt into the belt clamp tighten the clamp screws.
2. Install the transfer belt over both pulleys.
4. Install the load transfer fence using three (3) screws.
Install Load
Transfer Assembly
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
List/Part Numbers
7-78655-01 Bd, Sensor #11
V3.04 BD,SENSOR #11
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Sensor
1. Slide the transfer mechanism from behind the
Board #11
fence.
2. Remove the transfer flex cable from J1 of the
sensor board #11.
3. Remove the transfer solenoid cable from J2 of the
sensor board #11.
4. Remove the screw securing the board to the
transfer mechanism frame and remove board.
Replacement
Install Sensor
Board #11
1. Using the alignment pin as a guide, align sensor board #11 to the load transfer assembly
frame and tighten the screw.
2. Connect the carrier stop solenoid cable to J2 of the sensor board #11.
3. Connect the transfer flex cable to J1 of the sensor board #11.
Install Load
Transfer Assembly
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
List/Part Numbers
7-78650-01 Bd, Sensor #10
V3.05 BD,SENSOR #10
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Sensor
1. Remove the transfer flex cable from J1 of
Board #10
the sensor board #10.
2. Remove W44 T1 SOL and W44 T1 SOL
SNSR cable from J2 of the sensor
board #10.
board to the load transfer fence and remove
board. [1]
Replacement
Install Sensor Board #10

1. Mount the sensor board #10 to the load transfer fence with two (2) screws.
2. Connect cable W44 T1 SOL and W44 T1 SOL SNSR to J2 of the sensor board #10.


errors.
V3.06 CABLE,FLEX,TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_283_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78649-01 Cable, Flex, Transfer
V3.06 CABLE,FLEX,TRANSFER
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Transfer Flex
Cable
2. Carefully remove the transfer flex cable
from the guide feature on the load
transfer fence.
Replacement

Install Transfer Flex
Cable
2. Carefully press the transfer flex cable into the guide feature on the load transfer
fence.


errors.
V3.08 SOLENOID, CARRIER STOP,TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_284_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77377-01 Solenoid, Carrier Stop, X-Fer
V3.08 SOLENOID, CARRIER STOP,TRANSFER
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Transfer
1. Slide the transfer mechanism from under the
Solenoid
load transfer guard.
carrier stop solenoid to the load transfer
assembly frame.
3. Remove the carrier stop solenoid connector
from J2 of the sensor board #11.
4. Lift the transfer solenoid [1] out of the
mechanism.
Replacement
Install Transfer
Solenoid
1. Connect the transfer solenoid connector to J2 of the sensor board #11.
2. Mount the carrier stop solenoid to the load transfer assembly frame and secure in place
with two (2) screws.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V3.09 SWITCH,MICRO,SH KIT Version - 96728-111_285_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77579-02 Micro Switch, Black Button
V3.09 SWITCH,MICRO,SH KIT
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation
3. Disconnect the sample handler LUI
cable.
Remove
Micro
1. Locate the micro switch to be replaced
Switch
(carrier stop switch shown for
example). [1]
2. Disconnect the switch cable.
switch in place.
Replacement
Install Micro Switch

1. Install the micro switch using two (2) screws.
2. Connect the switch cable.


errors.
V3.10 PULLEY,TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_286_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77369-01 Pulley, X-fer ASM
V3.10 PULLEY,TRANSFER
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Transfer
1. Remove the two (2) screws of the transfer pulley
Pulley
assembly [1] and slide the assembly toward the
transfer motor.
2. Slide the transfer belt off the transfer pulley
assembly gear and pull out the assembly.
Replacement
Install Transfer
Assembly
1. Install the transfer pulley assembly with two (2) screws to the load transfer frame. Do not
tighten the screws.
2. Slide the transfer belt on to the transfer pulley.
3. Pull the transfer pulley assembly away from the motor to tension the belt and secure the
Install Load
Transfer Assembly
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V3.12 CLAMP,BELT,TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_287_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77376-01 Clamp, Belt, Transfer
V3.12 CLAMP,BELT,TRANSFER
11 min.
Time Required
#2 Phillips screwdriver (optional)

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Transfer Belt
1. Move the transfer mechanism until the
Clamp
transfer belt clamp [1] is accessible.
transfer belt clamp to the unload transfer
assembly.
3. Slide out the transfer belt clamp.
Replacement
Install Transfer Belt Clamp

1. Slide the transfer belt clamp onto the unload transfer assembly.
2. Secure in place with the two (2) screws.


errors.
List/Part Numbers
7-76215-01 BD, Sensor #2
7-76215-02 BD, Sensor #2 (RoHS)
V3.13 BD,SENSOR #2
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Sensor
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing sensor
Board #2
board #2 to the back of the load transfer frame and
remove board.
Replacement
Install Sensor
Board #2
1. Mount sensor board #2 with two (2) screws to the back of the load transfer frame.
Install Load
Transfer Assembly
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V4.01 PQ,ASM Version - 96728-111_290_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77424-01 PQ ASM
V4.01 PQ,ASM

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
6. Remove the unload queue cover.
7. Remove the processing queue cover support
bracket.
Remove Load
Transfer
Assembly
load queue.
3. Remove the screw securing the load transfer
fence to the top of the processing queue front
rail.
5. Remove W21 T1 MTR cable from the load
transfer motor.
board #10 (78650) of the load transfer
assembly.
7. Lift the load transfer assembly off of the
mounting features and remove W114 T1 SNSR
cable from the J3 connector on sensor
board #2 (76215), located on the rear of the
load transfer assembly.
connector on sensor board #2 (76215), located
instrument.
Remove
Unload
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the unload
Transfer
transfer to the processing queue and unload
Assembly
queue.
transfer fence to the top of the processing
queue front rail.
4. Remove W22 T2 MTR cable from the unload
transfer motor.
cable from J2 connector on sensor board #10
(78650) on the front of the unload transfer.
6. Lift the unload transfer off of the mounting
features and remove W115 T2 SNSR cable
from J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215)
on the rear of the unload transfer.
7. Remove the Unload Transfer Assembly from the
instrument.
Remove
Processing
1. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews securing the
Queue BCR
processing queue BCR.
2. Remove the BCR and disconnect the BCR
cable.
Remove
Processing
1. Remove the pin securing the processing queue
Queue LLS
LLS board in place.
Board and
2. Disconnect the four (4) cables from the
Bracket
processing queue LLS board.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the LLS
board bracket to the front panel.
Remove
Processing
1. Remove W117 PQ sensor cable from the J3
Queue
Assembly
to the left of the Star Wheel.
2. Remove W117 Star Wheel sensor cable from
located to the right of the Star Wheel.
3. Remove the PQ BCR cable from J1 on the
BCR Power T board.
4. Remove the Star Wheel motor cable (W24) from
the Star Wheel motor.
5. Remove the PQ home sensor cable from the J2
6. Remove PQ BCR cable from J3 on the BCR
Power T board.
7. Remove the PQ motor cable from the
processing queue motor.
processing queue to the front panel.
9. Raise and tilt the processing queue forward to
remove it from the font panel.
Replacement
Install Processing Queue

Assembly
1. Tilt the processing queue and slide it into the font panel and secure it with four (4)
screws.
2. Connect the PQ motor cable to the processing queue motor.
3. Connect the PQ BCR cable to J3 on the BCR Power T board.
4. Connect the PQ home sensor cable to J2 on sensor board #2 (76215), located to the
left of the Star Wheel.
5. Connect the Star Wheel motor cable (W24) to the Star Wheel motor.
7. Connect W117 Star Wheel sensor cable to J3 on sensor board #2 (76215), located to
the right of the Star Wheel.
8. Connect W117 PQ sensor cable to J3 on sensor board #2 (76215), located to the left
of the Star Wheel.

LLS Board and Bracket
1. Install the LLS board bracket using two (2) screws.
2. Connect the four (4) cables to the processing queue LLS board.
3. Position the processing queue LLS board behind the tabs at the bottom of the board
and secure with the pin at the top of the board.

BCR
1. Connect the BCR cable.
2. Position the BCR in place and tighten the two (2) thumbscrews.
Install Unload Transfer

Assembly
1. Connect cable W115 T2 SNSR to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215) on
the rear of the unload transfer.
2. Install the unload transfer assembly on the mounting features of the unload queue and
processing queue, install the wear strip, and secure in place with two (2) screws.
3. Connect cable W45 T2 SOL and W45 T2 SOL SNSR to the J2 connector on sensor
board #10 (78650) on the front of the unload transfer.
4. Connect cable W22 T2 MTR to the unload transfer motor.
5. Install the unload transfer fence to the front rail of the processing queue using two (2)
screws.

Assembly
2. Connect cable W114 T1 SNSR to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215),
4. Install the load transfer fence to the processing queue front rail and secure it with one
(1) screw.

1. Install the processing queue cover support bracket.
2. Install the unload queue cover.

errors.
V4.02 PROXIMITY SENSOR Version - 96728-111_291_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77578-01 Sensor, LQ
V4.02 PROXIMITY SENSOR

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Load
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
motor.
instrument.
Remove
Proximity
1. Locate the proximity sensor on the left side of the
Sensor
processing queue.
2. Remove the nut securing the sensor to the
processing queue frame and remove the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor cable from J2 on sensor
board #2 (76215), located to the left of the Star
Wheel.
Replacement
Install Proximity
Sensor
1. Install the processing queue proximity sensor to the left end of the processing queue and
secure it with a nut.
2. Connect the proximity sensor cable to J2 on sensor board #2 (76215), located to the left of
the Star Wheel.
Install Load
Transfer Assembly
screw.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V4.03 CONVEYOR,PQ Version - 96728-111_292_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77475-01 Conveyor, PQ
V4.03 CONVEYOR,PQ

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
bracket.
Remove Load
Transfer
Assembly
load queue.
rail.
transfer motor.
cable from the J3 connector on sensor board #2
(76215), located on the rear of the load transfer
assembly.
instrument.
Remove
Unload
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
transfer fence to the top of the processing queue
front rail.
transfer motor.
J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215) on the
rear of the unload transfer.
7. Remove the Unload Transfer Assembly from the
instrument.
Remove
Processing
Queue BCR
cable.
Remove
Processing
Queue LLS
LLS board in place.
Board and
Bracket
Remove
Processing
Queue
Assembly
2. Remove W117 Star Wheel sensor cable from the
J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215),
3. Remove the PQ BCR cable from J1 on the BCR
Power T board.
4. Remove the Star Wheel motor cable (W24) from
the Star Wheel motor.
Power T board.
7. Remove the PQ motor cable from the processing
queue motor.
Remove
Processing
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the left rear
Queue
rail to the conveyor assembly.
Conveyor
2. Remove the three (3) screws securing the right
rear rail to the conveyor assembly.
3. Remove the screw securing the Star Wheel
home sensor bracket to the processing queue
frame and remove the Star Wheel home sensor
cable from J2 of sensor board #2 (76215),
4. Remove the four (4) screws securing the BCR
Power T board bracket (77454) to the bottom of
the processing queue frame.
5. Remove the four (4) screws securing the front
rail to the conveyor assembly.
6. Loosen the four (4) screws securing the
conveyor motor to the frame. Slide the motor
toward the pulley to relive tension on the timing
belt. Remove the timing belt.
conveyor assembly to the processing queue
frame. Remove the conveyor assembly.
Replacement

Conveyor
1. Install the conveyor and secure in place with four (4) screws.
2. Install the processing queue front rail with four (4) screws.
3. Install the BCR Power T board bracket with four (4) screws.
4. Install the Star Wheel home sensor bracket with a screw and connect the Start Wheel
sensor cable to J2 of sensor board #2 (76215), located to the right of the Star Wheel.
5. Install the right rear rail with three (3) screws.
6. Install the left rear rail with two (2) screws.
Assembly
screws.
of the Star Wheel.


BCR

Assembly
screws.

Assembly
(1) screw.


errors.
V4.05 SWITCH,MICRO,SH KIT Version - 96728-111_293_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77407-01 Micro Switch, Red Button
7-77479-01 Micro Switch, Straight Arm
7-77579-01 Switch, Micro, ISH Kit
7-77579-02 Micro Switch, Black Button
V4.05 SWITCH,MICRO,SH KIT

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Preparation
module.
3. Disconnect the sample handler
LUI cable.
4. Remove the carrier access
windows.
5. Remove the processing queue
cover.
Remove
Micro
1. Locate the switch to be
Switch
replaced.
2. Disconnect the switch cable.
securing the switch in place.
Replacement

Install Micro Switch
1. Install the micro switch using two (2) screws.
2. Connect the switch cable.


errors.
V4.06 SENSOR,STAR WHEEL POSITION PQ Version - 96728-111_294_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77444-01 Sensor, Star Wheel Position, PQ
V4.06 SENSOR,STAR WHEEL POSITION PQ

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Star
Wheel Position
1. Remove the Star Wheel sensor cable from J2
Sensor
on sensor board #2 (76215), located on the
right of the Star Wheel.
2. Remove the screw securing the Star Wheel
sensor bracket.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the Star
Wheel sensor. [1]
Replacement
Install Star Wheel Position

Sensor
1. Secure the Star Wheel sensor to the bracket with two (2) screws.
2. Position the bracket, with sensor attached, to the processing queue frame and
secure with the screw.
3. Install the Star Wheel sensor cable to J2 on sensor board #2 (76215), located on the
right of the Star Wheel.


errors.
V4.12 BELT,TIMING,PQ Version - 96728-111_295_1
V4.12 BELT,TIMING,PQ

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
bracket.
Remove Load
Transfer
Assembly
load queue.
rail.
4. Remove LQ HALL SNSR cable from the
sensor on the carrier stop bracket.
transfer motor.
assembly.
8. Remove cable P1 (from BCR FULL) from the
located on the rear of the load transfer
assembly.
instrument.
Remove
Unload
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
queue front rail.
transfer motor.
7. Remove the Unload Transfer Assembly from
the instrument.
Remove
Processing
Queue BCR
cable.
Remove
Processing
Queue LLS
LLS board in place.
Board and
Bracket
Remove
Processing
Queue
Assembly
BCR Power T board.
4. Remove the Star Wheel motor cable (W24)
from the Star Wheel motor.
6.
Remove PQ BCR cable from J3 on the BCR
Power T board.
Remove
Processing
Queue Timing
processing queue conveyor motor.
Belt
2. Slide the motor toward the pulley to release
tension on the belt.
3. Remove the processing queue timing belt. [1]
Replacement

Timing Belt
1. Install the processing queue timing belt on the pulley and to the motor pulley.
2. Slide the processing queue motor away from the pulley and secure with motor with
four (4) screws.

Assembly
screws.
of the Star Wheel.


BCR

Assembly
screws.

Assembly
(1) screw.


errors.
V4.13 BD,BCR T
Version - 96728-111_296_1
7-79085-01 Bd, BCR T

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal
Stopped, or Offline status. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Preparation 1. Power OFF the processing module.

3. Disconnect the sample handler LUI
cable.
Remove 1. Remove the two (2) screws securing

BCR T the processing queue cover support
Board bracket.
2. Remove the seven (7) screws securing
the BCR T board to the bracket
(77454).
3. Remove the BCR T board.
Replacement
Replace Board 1. Install the BCR T board to the bracket (77454)

using seven (7) screws.
2. Install the processing queue cover support
bracket using two (2) screws.
Note
Install BCR T Board jumpers for the
appropriate module.
Prepare for 1. Install the processing queue cover.

Operation 2. Install the carrier access windows.
3. Install the load queue cover. Connect the
sample handler LUI cable.
Verification
V4.14 MOTOR,CONVEYOR,PQ Version - 96728-111_297_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77476-01 Motor, Conveyor, PQ
V4.14 MOTOR,CONVEYOR,PQ

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
bracket.
Remove Load
Transfer
Assembly
load queue.
rail.
4. Remove LQ HALL SNSR cable from the
sensor on the carrier stop bracket.
transfer motor.
assembly.
8. Remove cable P1 (from BCR FULL) from the
located on the rear of the load transfer
assembly.
instrument.
Remove
Unload
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
queue front rail.
transfer motor.
7. Remove the Unload Transfer Assembly from
the instrument.
Remove
Processing
Queue BCR
cable.
Remove
Processing
Queue LLS
LLS board in place.
Board and
Bracket
Remove
Processing
Queue
Assembly
BCR Power T board.
4. Remove the Star Wheel motor cable (W24)
from the Star Wheel motor.
Power T board.
Remove
Processing
Queue
processing queue conveyor motor [1] to the
Conveyor
frame.
Motor
2. Slide the motor toward the pulley to relieve
tension on the timing belt. Remove the timing
belt.
3. Remove the processing queue conveyor motor.
Replacement

Conveyor Motor
1. Align the processing queue conveyor motor to the frame and start, but do not tighten,
the four (4) screws.
2. Slide the timing belt onto the pulley and motor.
3. Slide the motor away from the pulley to put tension on the belt.
4. Tighten the four (4) screw to secure the motor to the frame.

Assembly
screws.
of the Star Wheel.


BCR

Assembly
screws.

Assembly
(1) screw.

1. Install the processing queue support bracket.

errors.
V4.15 STAR WHEEL,MOTOR,PQ,ASM Version - 96728-111_298_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77400-01 Star Wheel, PQ
V4.15 STAR WHEEL,MOTOR,PQ,ASM

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Operations Manual, Section

1: System Status, for further information.
Preparation
Remove Star
Wheel Motor
Star Wheel motor to the frame.
2. Slide the Star Wheel motor away from the
frame.
Replacement

Install Star Wheel Motor
1. Carefully slide the Star Wheel motor into place between the home sensor.
2. Install the Star Wheel motor using four (4) screws.


errors.
V4.16 BCR, PQ,ASM
Version - 96728-111_300_1
7-77441-03 BCR, PQ ASM

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal
Prerequisite 1. The processing module must be in For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System
Stopped, or Offline status. Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
System status.
Preparation 1. Power OFF the processing
module.
LUI cable.
windows.
cover.
Remove Center 1. Remove the two (2) screws For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the
Internal Cover (captive) on the left internal cover. ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
2. Tilt up and slide the cover to the maintenance, Subsection: Component replacement.
left.
Remove Processing 1. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews

Queue Bar Code securing the bar code reader
Reader/Antenna cover to the frame.
Assembly 2. Remove the cover from the frame
to allow access to the processing
queue bar code reader/antenna
assembly.
3. Disconnect the bar code reader
cable W112 from the bar code
reader.
4. Remove the assembly from the
module.
Replacement
Install Processing Queue Bar Code 1. Connect the bar code reader cable W112 to the bar code
Reader/Antenna Assembly reader.
2. Place the bar code reader cover on the frame and tighten the
two (2) thumbscrews.
Note
Verify that the cables are not crimped by the cover
when installing.
Install Center Internal Cover 1. Tilt the cover down and align the screw holes.
2. Replace the two (2) screws connecting the cover to the frame.
Prepare for Operation 1. Install the processing queue cover.

3. Install the load queue cover. Connect the sample handler LUI
cable.
Verification
V4.17 COVER,BCR,PQ Version - 96728-111_301_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77429-02 Cover, PQ BCR
V4.17 COVER,BCR,PQ

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

Preparation
module.
LUI cable.
windows.
cover.
Remove Center For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the
Internal Cover ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
(captive) on the left internal
cover.
2. Tilt up and slide the cover to
the left.
Remove
Processing Queue
Bar Code Reader
thumbscrews securing the bar
Cover
code reader cover to the frame.
2. Remove the cover from the
frame to allow access to the bar
code reader/antenna assembly.
(non-captive) that secure the
reader to the bar code reader
cover.
Note
The screws are removed
from the front of the
bracket not from the
reader side.
4. Set the reader with mirror aside.
Replacement
Install Processing Queue Bar Code Reader

1. Place the bar code reader on the bar code reader cover and
align the screw holes.
2. Install the two (2) screws securing the reader to the cover.
Install Processing Queue Bar Code Reader

Cover to the Frame
1. Place the bar code reader cover on the frame and tighten the
Note
Verify that the cables are not crimped by the cover
when installing.
Install Center Internal Cover

1. Tilt the cover down and align the screw holes.
2. Replace the two (2) screws connecting the cover to the frame.

3. Install the load queue cover. Connect the sample handler LUI
cable.

errors.
V4.20 SOLENOID,GATE,PQ Version - 96728-111_303_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77581-01 Gate, Unload Solenoid ASM
V4.20 SOLENOID,GATE,PQ

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

status.
Preparation
2. Access the sample processing queue by pulling on the
black lever on the left processing queue access door of
the processing queue and swinging the door open.
3. Open the right processing queue access door.
4. Locate the processing queue gate solenoid.
Remove
Processing
1. Loosen the thumbscrew mounting the gate solenoid
Queue Gate
assembly to the processing queue.
Solenoid
2. Grasp the gate solenoid and lift it from the guide pin.
3. Disconnect cable W46 GATE SOL from the gate
solenoid.
4. Disconnect cable W115 GATE SNSR from the P3
connector on the gate solenoid sensor board.
5. Disconnect cable W156 P2 from the P2 connector on the
gate solenoid sensor board.
6. Disconnect cable GATE HALL SNSR from the P1
connector on the gate solenoid sensor board.
7. Remove the gate solenoid from the instrument.
Replacement
Replace
Gate
1. Connect cable W46 GATE SOL to the
Solenoid
gate solenoid.
2. Connect cable GATE HALL SNSR to the
P1 connector on the gate solenoid sensor
board.
3. Connect cable W156 P2 to the P2
connector on the gate solenoid sensor
board.
4. Connect cable W115 GATE SNSR to the
P3 connector on the gate solenoid sensor
board.
5. Grasp the gate solenoid, align the guide
pin, and seat the solenoid in the
processing queue.
6. Tighten the thumbscrew.

1. Close the right and left processing queue
access doors.
Note
initialization.

V5.01 TRANSFER,UNLOAD,ASM Version - 96728-111_304_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77535-01 Stop Bracket- ULQ- Depot
7-77549-01 Transfer, Unload
V5.01 TRANSFER,UNLOAD,ASM

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Unload
Transfer
transfer to the processing queue and unload queue.
Assembly
front rail.
transfer motor.
6. Lift the unload transfer off of the mounting features
and remove W115 T2 SNSR cable from J3
connector on sensor board #2 (76215) on the rear
of the unload transfer.
7. Remove the unload transfer assembly from the
instrument.
Replacement
Install Unload
Transfer Assembly
1. Connect cable W115 T2 SNSR to the J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215) on the rear
screws.

errors.
V5.02 MOTOR,TRANSFER, UNLOAD/LOAD Version - 96728-111_305_1
V5.02 MOTOR,TRANSFER, UNLOAD/LOAD

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Unload
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
front rail.
transfer motor.
J3 connector on sensor board #2 (76215) on the
rear of the unload transfer.
instrument.
Remove
Unload
1. Loosen two (2) screws of the transfer pulley
Transfer
assembly and slide the assembly toward the
Motor
unload transfer motor.
2. Slide the transfer belt off of the motor pulley.
3. Remove the four (4) screws mounting the unload
transfer motor to the unload transfer frame and
remove the motor. [1]
Replacement
Install Unload
Transfer Motor
1. Install the unload transfer motor and secure in place with four (4) screws.
2. Slide the transfer belt on the motor pulley.
Install Unload
Transfer Assembly
screws.
Prepare for
Operation
3. Install the load queue cover.

errors.
V5.03 BELT,TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_306_2
V5.03 BELT,TRANSFER

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Unload
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
front rail.
transfer motor.
instrument.
Remove
Transfer
1. Remove the three (3) screws securing the unload
Belt
transfer fence.
2. Loosen the two (2) screws of the pulley assembly
and slide the pulley assembly toward the
transfer #2 motor.
3. Loosen the two (2) screws on the transfer belt
clamp.
4. Slide the belt [1] out of the clamp and off of both
pulleys.
Replacement
Install Transfer
Belt
1. Install the transfer belt into the belt clamp, tighten clamp screws.
2. Install the transfer belt over both pulleys.
4. Install the unload transfer fence using three (3) screws.
Install Unload
Transfer Assembly
screws.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V5.04 BD,SENSOR #11

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Unload
Transfer
Assembly
front rail.
transfer motor.
instrument.
Remove
Sensor
1. Slide the transfer mechanism from behind the fence.
Board #11
2. Remove the transfer flex cable from J1 of the
sensor board #11.
3. Remove the transfer solenoid cable from J2 of the
sensor board #11.
4. Remove the screw securing the board to the unload
transfer frame and remove board.
Replacement
Install Sensor
Board #11
1. Mount sensor board #11 with a screw to the unload transfer assembly frame.
2. Connect the carrier stop solenoid cable to J2 of the sensor board #11.
Install Unload
Transfer Assembly
screws.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V5.05 BD,SENSOR #10

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Sensor
Board #10
2. Remove W45 T2 SOL and W45 T2 SOL
SNSR cable from J2 of the sensor
board #10.
board to the unload transfer frame and
remove board. [1]
Replacement
Install Sensor Board #10

1. Mount sensor board #10 to the unload transfer frame with two (2) screws.
2. Connect cable W45 T2 SOL and W45 T2 SOL SNSR to J2 of the sensor board #10.


errors.
V5.06 CABLE,FLEX,TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_309_1
V5.06 CABLE,FLEX,TRANSFER

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Transfer Flex
Cable
sensor board #10.
2. Carefully remove the transfer flex cable
from the guide features on the unload
transfer fence.
sensor board #11.
Replacement
Install Transfer Flex

Cable
1. Connect one end of the transfer flex cable to J1 of the sensor board #11.
2. Carefully press the transfer flex cable into the guide features on the unload transfer
fence.
3. Connect the other end of the transfer flex cable to J1 of the sensor board #10.


errors.
V5.08 SOLENOID, CARRIER STOP, TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_311_1
V5.08 SOLENOID, CARRIER STOP, TRANSFER

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Carrier Stop
1. Slide the transfer mechanism from under
Solenoid
the unload transfer fence.
carrier stop solenoid to the unload
transfer slide.
3. Remove carrier stop solenoid connector
from J2 of the sensor board #11.
4. Lift the carrier stop solenoid [1] out of the
mechanism.
Replacement
Replace Carrier Stop

Solenoid
1. Connect the carrier stop solenoid connector to J2 of the sensor board #11.
2. Mount the carrier stop solenoid to the unload transfer slide and secure in place with
two (2) screws.


errors.
V5.10 PULLEY,TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_312_1
V5.10 PULLEY,TRANSFER

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Unload
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
front rail.
transfer motor.
instrument.
Remove
Transfer
1. Remove the two (2) screws of the transfer pulley
Pulley
assembly and slide the assembly toward the
transfer motor.
2. Slide the transfer belt off the transfer pulley
assembly gear [1] and pull out the assembly.
Replacement
Install Transfer
Pulley
1. Install the transfer pulley assembly with two (2) screws to the unload transfer frame. Do not
tighten the screws.
2. Install the transfer belt over the transfer pulley assembly gear.
Install Unload
Transfer Assembly
screws.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V5.12 CLAMP,BELT,TRANSFER Version - 96728-111_313_1
V5.12 CLAMP,BELT,TRANSFER

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Transfer Belt
1. Move the transfer mechanism belt until the
Clamp
transfer belt clamp is accessible.
transfer belt clamp [1] to the unload transfer
assembly.
3. Slide out the transfer belt clamp. [1]
Replacement
Install Transfer Belt Clamp

1. Slide the transfer belt clamp on to the unload transfer assembly.
2. Secure in place with the two (2) screws.


errors.
V5.13 BD,SENSOR #2

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Unload
Transfer
Assembly
front rail.
transfer motor.
instrument.
Remove
Sensor
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing sensor
Board #2
board #2 to the back of the unload transfer frame
and remove board.
Replacement
Install Sensor
Board #2
1. Mount sensor board #2 with two (2) screws to the back of the unload transfer frame.
Install Unload
Transfer Assembly
screws.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
V6.01 ULQ ASM Version - 96728-111_315_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77524-01 ULQ ASM
V6.01 ULQ ASM

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Unload
Transfer
Assembly
front rail.
transfer motor.
instrument.
Remove
Unload
1. Remove the W22 T3 MTR cable from the unload
Queue
queue motor located under the unload queue
Assembly
assembly.
2. Remove W116 T3 SNSR cable from J3 on the load
queue sensor board #2 (76215) located under the
unload queue assembly.
3. Leave the unload queue full sensor cable attached
to J1 on the load queue sensor board #2 located
under the unload queue assembly.
queue assembly frame to the support brackets.
5. Lift the unload queue assembly off the support
brackets and set aside.
Replacement
Install Unload
Queue Assembly
1. Place the unload queue assembly onto the support brackets on the right side of the
instrument.
2. Secure the unload queue assembly to the support brackets with four (4) screws.
3. Connect cable W116 T3 SNSR to J3 on the load queue sensor board #2 (76215) located
4. Connect cable W22 T3 MTR to the unload queue motor located under the unload queue
assembly.
Install Unload
Transfer Assembly
screws.
Prepare for
Operation
errors.
V6.03 MOTOR,UNLOAD Version - 96728-111_316_1
List/Part Numbers
7-37930-01 Motor, Unload
V6.03 MOTOR,UNLOAD

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Unload
Transfer
Assembly
queue.
front rail.
transfer motor.
instrument.
Remove
Unload
1. Remove the W22 T3 MTR cable from the unload
Queue
queue motor located under the unload queue
Assembly
assembly.
2. Remove W116 T3 SNSR cable from J3 on the
load queue sensor board #2 (76215) located under
the unload queue assembly.
3. Leave the unload queue full sensor cable attached
to J1 on the load queue sensor board #2 located
queue assembly frame to the support brackets.
5. Lift the unload queue assembly off the support
brackets and set aside.
Remove
Transfer
1. Remove the four (4) screws and nuts mounting the
Motor
unload queue motor [1] to the unload queue frame
and remove the motor. [1]
Replacement
Install Transfer
Motor
1. Install the unload queue motor in the unload queue frame and secure using four (4) screws
and nuts.
Install Unload
Queue Assembly
1. Place the unload queue assembly onto the support brackets on the right side of the
instrument.
2. Secure the unload queue assembly to the support brackets with four (4) screws.
3. Connect cable W116 T3 SNSR to J3 on the load queue sensor board #2 (76215) located
4. Connect cable W22 T3 MTR to the unload queue motor located under the unload queue
assembly.
Install Unload
Transfer Assembly
screws.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
W1.01 RSH Bar Code Reader (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1363_2
List/Part Numbers
7-77327-01 Barcode Reader SID
W1.01 RSH Bar Code Reader

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Class 2 Laser Product
Removal

Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System
1. The processing module and sample
status.
handler must be in Stopped or Offline
status.
Preparation
2. Open the left RSH cover.
Remove RSH
Bar Code
1. Disconnect cable W631 BCR from the
Reader
bar code reader [1].
2. Remove the two (2) screws (metric)
securing the bar code reader to the
bracket [2].
Note
Keep the two (2) metric screws
separate from other screws.
Replacement
Install
RSH Bar
1. Attach the bar code reader to the bracket
Code
with the two (2) metric screws with the bar
Reader
code reader cable positioned down [2].
2. Attach W631 BCR to the bar code
reader [1], and verify that connector is fully
engaged before tightening screws.
Close
Cover
1. Close the RSH cover.
Note
must be on prior to turning on the
processing module to ensure proper
initialization.
1 G23 - Initialization/ Startup Verify instrument initializes and/or starts up.
2 3222 - RSH Bar Code Calibration
RSH Service and Support Manual (Version 96770-105) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i2000, and i2000SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000,
i8000, c8000, ci8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
W1.02 RSH LUI Panel (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1362_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86122-01 LUI Panel, RSH
W1.02 RSH LUI Panel

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. The processing module and sample handler must
System status.
be in Stopped or Offline status.
Preparation
2. Remove the left RSH end cap by loosening the
two (2) screws on the inside of the end cap and
sliding the cap forward.
3. Open the left RSH cover.
Remove
RSH LUI
1. Remove the two (2) non-captive screws securing
Panel
the keypad to the frame [1].
2. Pull the keypad forward [2].
3. Disconnect cable W630 SHK from P1 of the
keypad [3].
Replacement
Install
RSH LUI
1. Connect cable W630 SHK to P1 of the
Panel
keypad [3].
2. Postion the keypad in the frame [2] and
secure to the frame with two (2)
screws [1].
3. Attach the left RSH end cap.
Close
Cover
1. Close the left RSH cover.

Note
initialization.
W1.03 RSH Rail Guide Sensor Board (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1361_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86215-01 Board, Sensor, Rail Guide
7-86215-02 Board, Sensor, Rail Guide (RoHS)
7-86403-02 Cable, Carrier Transport Arm Sensor W575
W1.03 RSH Rail Guide Sensor Board

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. The processing module and sample handler
System status.
must be in Stopped or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Rail
Guide Sensor
1. Disconnect W575 from the rail guide sensor
Board
board [1].
2. Unscrew the two (2) non-captive screws
securing the rail guide sensor board to the
carrier transport [2].
3. Remove the rail guide sensor board from the
Replacement
Install Rail
Guide
1. Install the rail guide sensor board on the
Sensor
Board
2. Install the two (2) non-captive screws
securing the rail guide sensor board to the
3. Connect W575 to the rail guide sensor
board [1].
Note
initialization.
2 3323 - RSH Section Test
W1.04 Cover Interlock Sensor Boards (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1359_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86220-01 Board, Cover Interlock Sensor
7-86220-02 Board, Cover Interlock Sensor (RoHS)
7-91799-01 Board, SIB Cover Interlock Sensor
7-91799-02 Board, SIB Cover Interlock Sensor (RoHS)
W1.04 Cover Interlock Sensor Boards
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Remove the RSH right end cap by loosening the
Remove
Interlock
1. Disconnect cable from the SIB cover interlock
Sensor
sensor board to the sensor interface board
Boards
J13 [1].
2. Push down on the lower tab of the plastic clip
and slide the SIB cover interlock sensor board
out of the clip [2].
Note
The first interlock sensor board is also
pulled along [3].
3. Disconnect the SIB cover interlock sensor

board [4] from the interlock sensor board [3].
4. Continue sliding the interlock sensor boards out
of the channel, disconnecting the boards at each
junction [5].
5. At the final interlock sensor board, remove the
cover sensor terminator board [6].
Replacement
Install
Interlock Note
Sensor All interlock sensor boards should be replaced at
Boards the same time (interlock sensor board, cover
sensor terminator board, and the SIB cover
interlock sensor board).
1. Connect the cover sensor terminator board to a

cover interlock sensor board [6].
2. Slide the boards into the channel, connecting
additional interlock sensor boards until all boards
are inserted [5].
Note
Verify the sensor SW1 is facing up when
inserting the interlock sensor board into the
channel.
3. Connect the SIB cover interlock sensor board to

the final interlock sensor board [3].
4. Slide the SIB cover interlock sensor board into the
plastic clip [2].
5. Attach the cable from the SIB cover interlock
sensor board to J13 of the sensor interface
board [1].
1. Install the RSH right end cap.
and shutdown.
Note
on prior to turning on the processing module
to ensure proper initialization.
W1.05 Sensor Interface Board (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1358_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86260-01 Board, Sensor Interface, RSH
7-86260-02 Board, Sensor Interface, RSH (RoHS)
W1.05 Sensor Interface Board

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Sensor
1. Disconnect the following cables from the sensor
Interface
interface board [1]:
Board
W500 SIB Power Cable from J1
W510 P2 SIB Signal Cable 1 from J2
W540 SIB BCR from J4-4
W573 (i 2000 SR), W571 (c 8000), W572
(ci8200) P6 SIB to transport sensor from
J6
W610 P7 Mod1 SIB/CP Sensor from J7
(only on integrated system)
W630-W631 P9 SIB SHK/BCR from J9
the SIB cover interlock sensor board cable
from J13
W640 P20 SIB-UDB SFI from J14
2. Remove the two (2) non-captive screws securing

the sensor interface board to the structure [2].
3. Remove the sensor interface board from the
structure.
Replacement
Install
Sensor
1. Attach the sensor interface board to the
Interface
structure using the two (2) screws
Board
removed earlier [2].
2. Connect the following cables to the sensor

W510 P2 SIB Signal Cable 1 from
J2
W520 P3 SIB Signal Cable 2 from
J3
W573 (i 2000 SR), W571 (c 8000),
W572 (ci8200) P6 SIB to transport
sensor from J6
W610 P7 Mod1 SIB/CP Sensor
from J7
W612 P8 Mod2 SIB/CP Sensor
from J8 (only on integrated system)
W630-W631 P9 SIB SHK/BCR from
J9
the SIB cover interlock sensor
board cable from J13
1. Attach the RSH right end cap.
Note
initialization.
2 5507 - RSH Indicator Lights Test
5 3401 - Section/Bay Sensors Test
6 3252 - RSH Bar Code Reader Test
W1.06A Carrier Positioner Board (RSH)(i2000SR) Version - 96781-104_1357_3
List/Part Numbers
7-86545-01 Board, Carrier Positioner
7-86545-02 Board, Carrier Positioner (RoHS)
W1.06A Carrier Positioner Board (i2000SR)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Open Covers
1. Open RSH covers near the desired carrier
positioner.
2. Open the processing module front cover.
3. Manually move the carrier transport away from
the carrier positioner.
Remove Motor
Cover
1. Lift and remove the motor cover [1] over the
carrier positioner board.
Remove
Carrier
1. Disconnect cable W610 P2 CP Sensor from
Positioner
carrier positioner board P2 and disconnect the
Board
cable from P1 [1].
2. Remove the screw securing the carrier
positioner board to the carrier positioner [2].
3. Remove board from the carrier positioner.
Replacement
Install
Carrier
1. Place the carrier positioner board on the
Positioner
carrier positioner and attach with a
Board
screw [2].
2. Connect cable W610 CP Sensor to P2 of
the carrier positioner board and connect
the CP Encoder Sensor cable to P1 [1].
Install
Motor
1. Install the motor cover [1] over the carrier
Cover
positioner board.
Close/Install
Covers
1. Close the processing module front cover.
2. Close RSH covers near the desired carrier
positioner.
Note
initialization.
2 1119 - Transport Calibration
W1.07A Carrier Positioner Encoder Sensor (RSH) (i2000SR) Version - 96781-104_1356_3
List/Part Numbers
7-86576-01 Sensor, Carrier Positioner Encoder
7-86576-02 Sensor, Carrier Positioner Encoder (RoHS)
W1.07A Carrier Positioner Encoder Sensor (i2000SR)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Open the processing module cover.
3. Open the RSH covers near the carrier
positioner.
Remove
Carrier
Positioner
the carrier positioner.
Carriage
2. Move the carrier positioner carriage so that the
screws [1] on the far right end of the carrier
positioner are accessible.
3. Unscrew the two (2) non-captive screws [1].
4. Move the carrier transport to the far right end of
the RSH so that the back of the carrier
transport does not interfere with the carrier
positioner carriage.
5. Slide the carrier positioner carriage to the far
left until it is clear of the channel and lift out [2].
Remove Motor
Cover
Remove
Carrier
1. Disconnect the sensor cable from the carrier
Positioner
positioner board at P2. [1]
Drive
2. Disconnect the carrier positioner motor at the
motor cable connection.
3. Loosen the captive screw at the left end of the
carrier positioner [2].
4. Remove carrier positioner drive by sliding it to
the right and partially into the opening in the
frame to fully disengage the drive from the
channel [3].
Remove
Carrier
1. Remove the two (2) non-captive screws [1]
Positioner
securing the carrier positioner encoder sensor
Encoder
to the carrier positioner drive [2].
Sensor
2. Remove the sensor cable from the channels on
the bottom of the carrier positioner on each
end [3].
3. Disconnect P1 CP Encoder Sensor cable from
the carrier positioner encoder sensor [4].
Replacement

Install
Carrier Note
Positioner Verity that the label on the sensor cable does not
Encoder interfere with carrier positioner travel. If it interferes,
Sensor tape the label closely to the cable or remove the
label.
1. Connect P1 CP Encoder Sensor to the carrier

positioner encoder sensor board [4].
2. Postion the sensor cable into the channels on the
bottom of the carrier positioner and press into
place [3].
Note
Proper routing of the carrier positioner cable is
critical to the carrier positioner
performance [3]. No slack should exist in the
cable on the sensor end or in the middle
section of the carrier positioner. Verify that the
carrier positioner and the drive screw
assembly do not come in contact with the
sensor cable.
3. Insert the two (2) non-captive screws [1].

4. Press and hold the sensor [2] to the right and firmly
against the mounting block.
5. Hold the sensor [2] as you tighten the two (2)
screws. [1]
Install
Carrier
1. Place the carrier positioner drive assembly into the
Positioner
frame opening of the channel and slide it to the left
Drive
until it is fully inserted [3].
2. Tighten the screw on the left end of the carrier
positioner to secure the positioner to the frame [2].
3. Connect cables CP Sensor to P2 [1] of the carrier
positioner board and to the carrier positioner drive
motor.
Install
Motor
1. Install the motor cover [1] over the carrier positioner
Cover
board.
Install
Carrier
1. Slide the left end of the carrier positioner carriage to
Positioner
the right into the channel until it is fully inserted [2].
Carriage
2. Insert and tighten the two (2) non-captive screws on
the right end of the carrier positioner [1].
Close
Covers
1. Close the RSH and processing module covers.

1.
Power ON the processing module.
Note and shutdown.
The system control center power must be on
prior to turning on the processing module to
ensure proper initialization.
W1.08 Indicator Light (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1355_2
List/Part Numbers
7-91840-01 Indicator, Priority Light Status
7-91840-02 Indicator, Priority Light Status (RoHS)
7-91845-01 Indicator, Tray Bay
7-91845-02 Indicator, Tray Bay (RoHS)
W1.08 Indicator Light
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Lower
1. Loosen the two (2) quarter-turn captive
Cover
screws [1] securing the lower cover to the frame
and remove the cover.
Remove
Indicator
1. Disconnect the light cable from the board [1].
Light
2. Squeeze the side tabs of the desired light while
removing the light [2].
Replacement
Install
Indicator
1. Slide the light into the opening until the
Light
tabs snap into place [2].
2. Connect the light cable to the board [1].
Install
Lower
1. Position the lower cover on the instrument
Cover
and tighten the two (2) quarter-turn screws
to attach the cover to the frame [1].

Note
initialization.
W1.09 Carrier/Tray Sensor (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1354_2
List/Part Numbers
7-91863-01 Sensor, Tray
7-91863-02 RSH Tray Sensor (RoHS)
W1.09 Carrier/Tray Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Lower
1. Loosen the two (2) quarter-turn captive screws [1]
Cover
securing the lower cover to the frame and remove
the cover.
Disconnect
Carrier or
1. Disconnect the tray sensor cable of the desired
Tray Sensor
sensor from the appropriate board (unit detect
board (UDB) or priority light sensor board (PLSB)).
Remove
Sensor
1. Remove the desired sensor.
If a carrier sensor, go to Remove Priority

Section Carrier Sensor.
If a tray sensor, go to Remove Tray
Sensor.
Access
Priority
1. Locate the priority section partition to the left of
Section
the sensor.
Carrier
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the partition
Sensor
to the bay [1] and remove the partition.
3. Repeat 2, for the partition to the right of the
sensor.
Note
This releases the plate covering the priority
section sensor.
Note
Under the plate are loose components (a
button, a spring, and a sensor). Take care
not to lose these components.
Remove
Priority
1. Remove the plate covering the sensor [2].
Section
2. Remove the sensor from the section [1].
Carrier
Sensor
Remove
Tray Sensor
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the plate to
the bay [1].
Note
This releases the plate covering the tray
sensor.
Note
Under the plate are loose components) a
button, a spring, and a sensor). In addition,
once the plate is removed, the tray door is
no longer secured. Take care not to lose
these components.
2. Remove the plate covering the sensor [2].

3. Remove the sensor from the bay [3].
Replacement
Install
Sensor
1. Install sensor.
If a carrier sensor, go to Install

Priority Section Carrier Sensor.
If a tray sensor, go to Install Tray
Sensor.
Install
Priority
1. Install the sensor in the section. [1]
Section
Carrier Note
Sensor Verify sensor is properly
oriented [1].
2. Install the plate covering the sensor [2].
Install
Priority
1. Install the priority section partition to the
Section
left of the sensor. Install the two (2)
Carrier
screws securing the partition [1]
Sensor
2. Repeat 1 for the partition to the right of
the sensor.
Install Tray
Sensor
1. Install the sensor in the bay [3].
Note
Verify sensor is properly
oriented [3].
2. Install the plate covering the sensor [2].
plate to the bay [1].
Connect
Carrier or
1. Connect the tray sensor cable to the
Tray Sensor
UDB or PLSB.
Install Lower
Cover
1. Position the lower cover on the
instrument and tighten the two (2)
quarter-turn screws to attach the cover to
the frame [1].
Note
processing module to ensure
W1.10 Priority Load Sensor Board, Unit Detect Boards (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1353_3
List/Part Numbers
7-95460-01 Board, Tray UDB
7-95460-02 Board, Tray Unit Detect (RoHS)
7-95465-01 Board, Priority Load Sensor
7-95465-02 Board, Priority Load Sensor (RoHS)
W1.10 Priority Load Sensor Board, Unit Detect Boards (RSH)
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Possible Electrostatic Discharge Shock
Removal

System status.
handler must be in Stopped or
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Remove the RSH right end cap by
loosening the two (2) screws on the
inside of the end cap and sliding the
cap forward.
Remove Lower Cover

1. Loosen the two (2) quarter-turn
captive screws securing the lower
cover to the frame and remove the
cover.
Remove the Priority Light
Sensor Board (PLSB) and
1. Disconnect cable W640 P20 UDB
Unit Detect Boards (UDB)
SFI from J1N of the UDB board on
the right of the instrument [2].
2. Disconnect all carrier present sensor
cables and all indicator light cables
from the UDB and PLSB [3].
3. Slide the boards out of the channel,
disconnecting each board at the
junction between boards [4].
Replacement
Install the Priority Light

Sensor Board (PLSB)
1. Slide the PLSB into the channel.
and Unit Detect Boards
2. Set the bay switch SW2 on each
(UDB)
UDB to the correct setting for the
bay.
Note
The switch setting matches
the bay number. The priority
bay is bay 1. (Example: the
switch setting for bay 2 is
2. [5].)
3. Connect the next UDB to the PLSB

and continue sliding in and
connecting until all UDB are
inserted [4].
4. Connect all carrier present sensor
cables and indicator light cables to
the PLSB and UDB [3].
5. Connect W640 P20 UDB SFI to J1N
of the UDB on the right of the
instrument [2].
Install Lower Cover
1. Position the lower cover on the
instrument and tighten the two (2)
quarter-turn screws to attach the
cover to the frame.
Prepare for Operation For information on the startup procedure, refer to the
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
1. Install the RSH right end cap.
and shutdown.
Note
power must be on prior to
module to ensure proper
initialization.
W1.11 Sensor Interface Board Fuses (RSH) Version - 96781-104_917_2
List/Part Numbers
7-96275-01 Fuse, 4.0A nano
7-96276-01 Fuse, 1.5A Nano
W1.11 Sensor Interface Board Fuses
Tools/Materials Fine Needle Nose Pliers or Tweezers
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Remove the RSH right end cap by loosening
the two (2) screws on the inside of the end cap
and sliding the cap forward.
Remove
Sensor
1. Disconnect the following cables from the
Interface Board
sensor interface board [1]:

W573 (i 2000 SR), W571 (c 8000), W572
(ci8200) P6 SIB to transport sensor from
J6
the SIB cover interlock sensor board
cable from J13
2. Remove the two (2) non-captive screws

securing the sensor interface board to the
structure [2].
3. Remove the sensor interface board from the
structure.
Remove
Sensor
1. Lay the SIB flat and locate the desired fuse.
Interface Board
(Go to Fuse location on Sensor Interface Board
Fuse
(SIB) for fuse locations).
2. Use fine point needle nose pliers or tweezers
to grip the fuse.
Note
The fuse holder [1] is easily damaged if
the wrong tool is used to remove the
fuse.
3. Pull the fuse straight out of the fuse holder.
Replacement

Install
Sensor
1. Use fine point needle nose pliers or tweezers
Interface
to grip the fuse.
Board Fuse
2. Position the fuse directly over, and aligned with
the fuse holder.
3. Insert the fuse into the fuse holder.
Note
The fuse holder [1] is easily damaged if
the fuse is not properly aligned with the
fuse holder, or the fuse is not inserted
in a straight motion.
Install
Sensor
1. Attach the sensor interface board to the
Interface
structure using the two (2) screws removed
Board
earlier [2].
2. Connect the following cables to the sensor

W573 (i 2000 SR), W571 (c 8000),
W572 (ci8200) P6 SIB to transport
sensor from J6
the SIB cover interlock sensor board
cable from J13

1. Attach the RSH right end cap.
Note
be on prior to turning on the processing
module to ensure proper initialization.
Fuse location on Sensor Interface Board (SIB)
Fuse Function Rating Part #
+5VDC Carrier Positioner

F1 1.5A 96276
+5VDC Carrier Transport
F2 1.5A 96276
+5 VDC Low Voltage Regulator
F3 4.0A 96275
+5 VDC Input DC/DC
F4 4.0A 96275
+5 VDC Unregluated PLSB and UDB
F5 4.0A 96275
+3.3 VDC FPGA
F6 1.0A Not Replaceable
+5 VDC Bar Code/Sample Handler Keypad
F7 1.5A 96276
+3.3 VDC FPGA
+5 VDC Regulated PLSB and UDB
F9 1.5A 96276
+3.3 VDC Door Interlock Sensors
RSH Service and Support Manual (Version 96770-104) • Copyright 2002, 2004 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, and i 2000 SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, c 8000, ci8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
W2.01A Carrier Positioner Carriage (RSH)(i2000SR) Version - 96781-104_1352_3
List/Part Numbers
7-86578-01 Assy, Carrier Positioner Carriage
W2.01A Carrier Positioner Carriage (i2000SR)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation
3. Open the RSH covers near the desired carrier
positioner.
Remove
Carrier
1. Manually move the carrier transport away from the
Positioner
carrier positioner, so that the back of the carrier
Carriage
Note
The ci8200 has two carrier positioners.

4. Slide the carrier positioner carriage to the far left
until it is clear of the channel and lift it out [2].
Replacement
Install
Carrier
1. Slide the left end of the carrier positioner
Positioner
carriage to the right into the channel until
Carriage
it is fully inserted [2].
2. Insert and tighten the two (2) non-captive
screws on the right end of the carrier
positioner [1].
Close
Covers
1. Close the RSH and processing module
covers.
Note
W2.02A Carrier Positioner Drive (RSH) (i2000SR) Version - 96781-104_1350_3
List/Part Numbers
7-86579-01 Assy, Carrier Positioner Drive
W2.02A Carrier Positioner Drive (i2000SR)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
3. Open the RSH covers near the desired carrier
positioner.
Remove
Carrier
1. Manually move the carrier transport away from the
Positioner
carrier positioner, so that the back of the carrier
Carriage
Note
The ci8200 has two carrier positioners.

4. Slide the carrier positioner carriage to the far left
until it is clear of the channel and lift it out [2].
Remove
Motor Cover
Remove
Carrier
1. Disconnect the sensor cable from the carrier
Positioner
positioner board at P2. [1]
Drive
2. Disconnect the carrier positioner motor at the
motor cable connection.
3. Loosen the captive screw at the left end of the
carrier positioner [2].
4. Remove carrier positioner drive by sliding it to the
right and partially into the opening in the frame to
fully disengage the drive from the channel [3].
Replacement
Install
Carrier
1. Place the carrier positioner drive assembly
Positioner
into the frame opening of the channel and
Drive
slide it to the left until it is fully inserted [3].
2. Tighten the screw on the left end of the
carrier positioner to secure the positioner to
the frame [2].
3. Connect cables CP Sensor to P2 [1] of the
carrier positioner board and to the carrier
positioner drive motor.
Install
Motor
1. Replace the motor cover [1] over the carrier
Cover
positioner board.
Install
Carrier
1. Slide the left end of the carrier positioner
Positioner
carriage to the right into the channel until it
Carriage
is fully inserted [2].
2. Insert and tighten the two (2) non-captive
screws on the right end of the carrier
positioner [1].
Close
Covers
covers.
Note
initialization.
W2.03 Carrier Transport Pulley Assembly (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1349_2
List/Part Numbers
7-90594-01 Belt Tension Cap
7-90607-01 Assy, Carrier Transport Pulley
W2.03 Carrier Transport Pulley Assembly

14237-015 Lubricant with Teflon
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation
2. Open the left RSH top cover.
3. Remove the RSH left end cap by loosening the
two (2) screws [1] on the inside of the end cap
and sliding the end cap forward.
the left end of the RSH.
Release Belt
Tension
1. Loosen clamp locking screw. [1]
2. Tighten the bolt on the belt tension
assembly. [2]
3. Remove the belt from the belt tension
pulley. [3]
Remove Carrier
Transport Pulley
Assembly
plate to the end of the x-axis belt tension
bracket.
Note
There is a spring on the block behind
the plate that exerts pressure on the
plate as it is being removed.
2. Remove the plate.

3. Slide the carrier transport pulley assembly [2]
(including the spring [3] at the end of the
assembly) out of the channel.
Replacement
Install Carrier
Transport
1. Slide the spring [3] into opening at end of
Pulley
belt tension bracket.
Assembly
2. Slide the carrier transport pulley
assembly [2] into the channel, exerting
pressure to compress the spring [3].
Note
The block on the assembly must
not bind and must move freely in
the channel.
3. Place the plate on the end of the

channel.
4. Tighten the two (2) screws [1] securing
the plate to the x-axis belt tension
bracket.
Apply Belt
Tension
1. Ensure that the belt tension disk [1] is
loose.
2. Fully tighten the bolt. [2]
3. Remove the belt from around both
pulleys.
4. Apply a small bead of lubricant (14237-
015) [4] around the gear and interior
flange surfaces of both pulleys.
5. Wrap the belt around the x-axis motor
pulley.
6. Wrap the belt around the belt tension
pulley [3].
7. Set the belt tension by removing the
bolt [2] on the end of the belt tension
assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH
keypad cable guide.
9. Rotate the clamp [1] to align notch with
rib on slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by
tightening the clamping screw [1] on the
back of the assembly.
1. Install RSH left end cap and tighten the
two screws [1].
2. Close the RSH top left cover.
Note
W2.04A Carrier Transport Bearing Assembly (RSH) (i2000SR) Version - 96781-104_1348_3
List/Part Numbers
7-90619-01 Assy, Carrier Transport Bearing
7-91832-01 Bearing and Wiper Kit, Carrier Transport
7-91833-01 Wiper Pads
W2.04A Carrier Transport Bearing Assembly (i2000SR)

Carrier Calibration Tool (76347)
Flashlight
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove Left
Top Cover
2.
Push each of the four (4) cover hinge tabs into
the removal position [1].
3. Rotate the cover back until hinges are
disengaged and remove cover [2] from the
instrument.
Move Carrier
Transport to
1. Manually move the carrier transport as far to the
Left Side of
left as possible.
RSH.
Caution
Failure to move the carrier transport to the
extreme left end of the RSH results in
damage to the carrier transport sensors.
Release Belt
Tension
2. Tighten the bolt on the belt tension assembly. [2]
3. Remove the belt from the belt tension pulley. [3]
Remove
Carrier
1. Loosen the captive screw securing the carrier
Transport
transport guard [1] to the carrier transport.
Guard
2. Lift the carrier transport guard up and out of the
RSH.
Disconnect
Connectors
1. Disconnect the following connectors from the
carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
P2 Transport Motor [2]
Note
The transport motor cable is W572
on a ci8200, and W573 on an
i 2000 SR standalone.
Remove
Carrier
Transport
carrier transport to the carrier transport
bearing. [3]
2. Lift the carrier transport up and guide it out
through the left side of the RSH, being careful
not to damage the carrier transport sensors
located at the bottom and back of the assembly.
Disconnect
Flex Cable
1. At the left side of the carrier bearing assembly,
loosen the captive screw [1] securing the flex
cable to the assembly.
Release Belt
1. At the right side of the carrier transport bearing,
loosen the captive screw securing the belt [1].
2. Remove the belt from the clamp by sliding it to
the front.
Note
Use needle nose pliers to pull the belt
directly toward you. Wiggle the belt as
you pull it straight out of the clamp.
3. At the left side of the carrier transport bearing,

4. Remove the belt.
5. Go to Remove Carrier Transport Pulley
Assembly.
Remove Belt
Tension
1. Move the carrier transport to the right of the
Bracket
priority bay.
2. Disconnect W631 BCR from the bar code
reader.
3. Disconnect W630 SHK P1 from the RSH
keypad.
4. Remove the bar code and keypad cables from
the cable guides.
Note
Do not pull on the belt tension bracket
until all screws are removed.
5. At the end of the bracket, remove the four

screws holding the belt tension bracket to the
sample handler. [2]
6. From the back of the bracket, remove the screw
at the top rail [1], or, if the instrument is a
c 8000 or ci8200, remove the screw from the
inside of the top front of the bracket. [1]
7. To prevent damage to the pins on the belt
tension bracket, carefully pull the bracket straight
off the sample handler.
Note
The pins are located on the bottom.
8. Check the x-axis belt tension bracket and verify

that both pins are still in place on the bracket.
If the pins are in place, go to Release

Belt.
If the pins are not, remove the pin from
the mating surface on the sample handler.
Remove
Carrier
Transport
plate to the end of the x-axis belt tension
Pulley
bracket.
Assembly
Note
There is a spring on the block behind the
plate that exerts pressure on the plate as
it is being removed.

Remove
Carrier
1. Slide the carrier transport bearing to the left end
Transport
of the RSH.
Bearing
2. Remove the carrier transport bearing assembly
Assembly
from the RSH.
Replacement
Install
Carrier
1. Using 14237-015 Lubricant, lubricate the felt
Transport
wipers on the top and bottom of the carrier
Bearing
transport bearing.
Assembly
2. While compressing the carrier transport bearing
springs, carefully guide the carrier transport into
the appropriate slot.
Note
As the carrier bearing is installed, use care
to ensure that the felt pads [1] are
compressed as they come in contact with
the bearing rails.
Install Belt
Tension
1. Pull bar code and keypad (LUI) cable W630 SHK
Bracket
and W631 BCR out the end of the sample
handler.
2. Attach the belt tension bracket to the left end of
the sample handler.
3. Secure the bracket with four (4) screws [2].
4. Install a screw at the rear of the bracket (top
rail) [1], at the top rail [1], or, if the instrument is a
c 8000 or ci 8200, install the screw in the inside of
the top front of the bracket. [1]
5. Route the cables through the cable guides.
6. Connect W630 SHK P1 to the RSH keypad.
Install
Carrier
1. Slide the spring [3] into opening at end of belt
Transport
tension bracket.
Pulley
2. Slide the carrier transport pulley assembly [2] into
Assembly
the channel, exerting pressure to compress the
spring [3].
Note
The block on the assembly must not bind
and must move freely in the channel.
3. Place the plate on the end of the channel.

4. Tighten the two (2) screws [1] securing the plate
to the x-axis belt tension bracket.
Route
Carrier
1. At the left end of the sample handler feed one end
Transport
of the new carrier transport belt into the
Belt
opening [2] (with the belt teeth facing up).
2. Continue feeding the belt until it appears on the
right end.
3. Use a flashlight to visually verify that the belt did
not twist.
4. At the right end of the sample handler, wrap the
belt around the x-axis motor capstan.
5. Route the belt to the right side of the carrier
transport bearing.
6. At the left end of the sample handler, wrap the
belt around the belt tension pulley.
7. Route the belt to the left side of the carrier
transport bearing.
Attach
Carrier
1. Align the mark on the right end of the belt with the
Transport
right end of the carrier transport belt clamp [1].
Belt
2. Push the belt fully into the clamp until the belt
touches the rear stop [2].
3. Measure the distance between the front edge of
the belt and the clamp. The distance [3] should
be at least 0.5" (13 mm).
4. Insert the carrier calibration alignment tool [4] into
the opening under the clamping screw.
5. Tighten the screw until tension is felt on the tool.
6. Loosen the screw 1/4-turn to remove the tool.
7. Tighten the screw 1/4- turn.
Note
The belt will be firmly attached, but the
screw should not be completely tight.
8. Repeat the process above for the left end of the

belt.
Apply Belt
Tension
1. Ensure that the belt tension disk [1] is loose.
3. Remove the belt from around both pulleys.
4. Apply a small bead of lubricant (14237-015) [4]
around the gear and interior flange surfaces of
both pulleys.
5. Wrap the belt around the x-axis motor pulley.
6. Wrap the belt around the belt tension pulley [3].
7. Set the belt tension by removing the bolt [2] on the
end of the belt tension assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH keypad cable
guide.
9. Rotate the clamp [1] to align notch with rib on
slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by tightening the
clamping screw [1] on the back of the assembly.
Connect
Flex Cable
1. At the left end of the carrier bearing assembly,
attach the flex cable
Install
Carrier
1. Guide the carrier transport through the left side of
Transport
the RSH and place on the carrier transport
bearing, being careful not to damage the carrier
transport sensors.
2. Tighten the three (3) captive screws securing the
carrier transport to the carrier transport bearing. [3]
Connect
Connectors
1. Connect the following connectors to the carrier
transport [1]:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
on a ci 8200, and W573 on an i
2000 SR standalone.
2. Press down on the cable clamps, to latch the

cable to the carrier transport. Pull on the cable
connectors to ensure that they are latched.
Install
Carrier
1. Place the carrier transport guard on the carrier
Transport
transport.
Guard
2. Tighten the captive screw securing the carrier
Install RSH
Top Cover
1. Place the RSH cover into position on the hinge [2].
2. Push the four (4) cover hinge tabs into the
attached position [1].
Note and shutdown.
on prior to turning on the processing
W2.05 Tray Platform Module Assembly (RSH) Version - 96781-104_918_2
List/Part Numbers
7-203436-01 Assy, Tray Platform - Grey
7-91499-01 Assy, Tray Platform Module
W2.05 Tray Platform Module Assembly
Time Required 20-60 min

Carrier calibration tool (76347)
Note
The time to complete this procedure is dependent on the tray bay being removed. The RSH tray bays are nested together. To
remove a bay, the bays to its left (including the priority bay) must also be removed.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Remove the RSH left end cap by loosening
the two (2) screws [1] on the inside of the
end cap and sliding the end cap forward.
Remove All RSH

Top Covers
2. Push each of the four (4) cover hinge tabs
into the removal position [1].
instrument.
4. Repeat the steps above for each of the
remaining top covers.
Note
If the bay to be replaced is on the left
module of a ci8200, only the covers
on that module needs to be remove.
Remove Interlock
Sensor Boards
1. At the right end of the sample handler,
release the interlock sensor boards by
pulling the latch tab down [2].
2. Disconnect the small connector board [4].
3. Pull interlock sensor board [3] out of the top
cover rail.
4. As the board is removed, disconnect the
first sensor board from the next board in the
series.
5. Repeat the process until all boards have
been removed.
Note
There are three (3) boards in a
i 2000 SR, four (4) in a c 8000 and
seven (7) in a ci8200
Move Carrier
Transport to Left
1. Manually move the carrier transport as far to
Side of RSH.
the left as possible.
Caution
Failure to move the carrier transport
to the extreme left end of the RSH
results in damage to the carrier
transport sensors.
Release Belt
Tension
2. Install the tension release bolt [2].
3. Tighten the bolt [2] to release the tension.
pulley. [3]
Remove Carrier
Transport Guard
1. Loosen the captive screw securing the
carrier transport guard [1] to the carrier
transport.
2. Lift the carrier transport guard up and out of
the RSH.
Disconnect
Connectors
1. Disconnect the following connectors from
the carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
The transport motor cable is
W571 on a c 8000 standalone
RSH, W572 on a ci8200, and
W573 on an i 2000 SR
standalone.
Remove Carrier
Transport
securing the carrier transport to the carrier
transport bearing. [3]
through the left side of the RSH, being
careful not to damage the carrier transport
sensors located at the bottom and back of
the assembly.
Release Belt
1. At the left side of the old style carrier
transport bearing, loosen the captive screw
securing the belt [1].
2. Remove the belt from the clamp by sliding it
to the front. Use needle nose pliers to pull
the belt directly toward you. Wiggle the belt
as you pull it straight out of the clamp.
Remove Belt
Tension Bracket
1. Move the carrier transport bearing assembly
to the right of the priority bay.
2. Disconnect the W631 BCR from the bar
code reader.
3. Disconnect W630 SHK P1 from the RSH
keypad.
4. Remove the bar code and keypad cables
from the cable guides.
Note
Do not pull on the belt tension
bracket until all screws are removed.

screws holding the belt tension bracket to
the sample handler. [2]
6. From the back of the bracket, remove the
screw at the top rail [1], or, if the instrument
is a c 8000 or ci8200, remove the screw
from the inside of the top front of the
bracket. [1]
tension bracket, carefully pull the bracket
straight off the sample handler.
Note
Remove Partition
Screws at Top Note
Cover Rail If on a ci8200, the tray platform to be
replaced is on the RSH section attached to
the left process module. Only remove the
screws on the along its bays.
1. Remove the eight (8) screws [1] securing

the priority bay partitions to the rail.
2. At all routine bays, remove the screws [2]
securing the partitions to the rail.
Remove Cover
Support Brackets
1. At each cover support bracket [1], remove
two (2) mounting screws [2] [3].
Note
If care is taken, it is not required to
remove the rear screw [3] on the
brackets.
Remove c 8000
Priority Bay
1. At the left end of the priority bay, remove
Closeout (c 8000
the c 8000 priority bay closeout [1] by
and ci8200 only)
removing the indicated screws.
Remove RSH
Access Cover
1. Remove the two (2) screws [3] at the top of
the front plastic cover.
Remove the
Cover Lower Rail Note
The cover lower rail on a ci8200 is in two
pieces. If the bay to be replaced is within
the left module on ci8200, it is not
necessary to remove the screw in the next
step.
1. At the right end of the cover lower rail on a

c 8000 or i 2000 SR, remove the screw
holding the rail to the motor bracket.
2. Over the tray platform module being
replaced, remove the cover top rail.
Remove Lower
Cover(s)
1. Loosen the two (2) 1/4-turn captive
screws [1] securing the lower cover to the
frame and remove the cover(s).
Disconnect
Connectors to Note
Priority Light Latches should be firmly pressed in before
Sensor and Unit attempting to disconnect cables from the
Detect Boards priority light sensor board and the unit
detect boards.
1. If the tray platform module to be replaced

contains bays 2 and 3, carefully disconnect
both the switch and light connectors on the
priority light sensor board.
2. At the tray platform module to be replaced
and the module to its left, disconnect all the
light and switch connectors at the UDB
board.
Note
A tray platform module contains a
pair of routine bays 2 & 3, 4 & 5, and
etc.
Remove Priority
Bay Screw Cover
1. At the left side of the priority bay, locate the
cover over the screws.
2. Remove the cover by lifting and pulling the
tab to the left [1].
Remove Carrier
Sensor Cover
1. At the back of the two right partitions on the
priority bay, remove the rear screws.
2. Slide the partition back and lift it out.
3. Under the sensor plate [2] is a button [3], a
spring (under button) [4], and a sensor. [5]
Do not lose these components during
priority bay transfer.
4. Under the partitions, lift and remove the
small plate [2] that covers the carrier
sensor [1] on the far right side.
Note
Loose components (a button, a
spring, and a sensor) are under the
plate. Take care not to lose these
components.
Loosen Priority
Bay
1. Completely remove the six (6) screws [3]
securing the bay to the frame.
Note
The bay sits on pins that align its
position on the RSH. If the screws
are not fully removed the screws and
pins make removal and installation
difficult.
2. Do not remove the priority platform

assembly.
Remove Required
Tray Platform
1. The carrier transport section align sensor is
Modules
engaged with the notches at the rear of the
bays. Ensure that the carrier transport is
moved away from the bays to be replaced.
2. At the left bay within the tray platform
module to be replaced, remove the two (2)
screws securing the bay cover plate [1].
Note
A tray platform module contains a
pair of bays 2 & 3, 4 & 5, and etc.
3. Lift and remove the cover plate [3].
Note
A tray detect button is under the
cover plate. Under the button is a
spring and sensor. Do not lose these
components.
4. Repeat the above for right bay in tray

platform module.
5. Remove the three (3) screws [5] under each
plate.
6. If the tray platform assembly being replaced
does not contain bays 2 and 3, repeat the
process above for tray platform module to its
left.
7. To remove the platform module, lift the left
assembly slightly to clear the mating edge.
8. Lift and remove the defective tray platform
module.
Replacement
Install Tray
Module Assembly
1. Ensure the carrier transport, is moved away
form the tray platform module being installed.
2. Place the tray platform module in the open
position on the extrusion.
3. Lift the platform assembly to the left and
place the left edge of the new assembly
under it.
Note
The tray platform is aligned to the
extrusion by guide pins.
4. Position the assembly as required to ensure

that the part is aligned with the guide pins
and seated flush on the extrusion.
Secure the Tray

Platform Modules
1. Ensure the tray platform assemblies are
seated squarely on the extrusion.
2. Install the three (6) screws [5] to secure the
assembly to the extrusion.
Note
If tray platform assembly to the left is
loose, repeat the process.
3. Ensure that the sensor, spring and button for

each bay is properly seated.
4. Ensure that the door release latches are
properly seated.
5. Install the cover plate [3] with two (2)
screws [1].
6. Repeat the above for the each of the bays.
Secure Priority
Bay
1. The priority bay sets on pins that align its
position on the extrusion. Adjust the
assembly as required, to ensure the bay is
squarely seated and aligned.
2. Install the six (6) screws and secure the bay
to the frame. [3]
Install Screw
Access Covers
1. Slide the screw access cover into the left
side of the priority bay [3].
Connect Priority
Light Sensor and
1. At the UDB and priority light sensor boards,
Unit Detect
reconnect the sensor and LED connections.
Boards
Install Lower
Cover
1. Position the lower cover on the instrument
and tighten the two (2) 1/4-turn screws to
attach the cover to the frame [1].
Install Lower
Cover Rail
1. Lay the cover lower rail along the top of the
bays.
2. Install the lower cover rail.
For an i 2000 SR or a c 8000, secure

the rail to the motor bracket with a
screw.
For a ci8200 align the pins at the right
end with the corresponding holes on
the mounted rail.
Install Partition
Screws at Lower
1. Install the eight (8) screws [1] securing the
Cover Rail
priority bay partitions to the rail.
2. At all routine bays, install the screws [2]
securing the partitions to the rail.
Install Cover
Support Brackets
1. At each cover support bracket [1], install
mounting screw [2].
Install RSH
Access Cover
1. Install the top two (2) screws [3] at the top of
Install c 8000
Priority Bay
1. At the left end of the priority bay, install the
Closeout (c 8000
c 8000 priority bay closeout [1] using the
and ci8200 only)
indicated screws.
Install Belt
Tension Bracket
1. Pull bar code and keypad (LUI) cable
W540 BKPL-SIB BCR out and away from
the bracket area.
2. Attach the belt tension bracket to the left end
of the c 8000 sample handler.
4. Install screws at the rear of the bracket [1].
5. Route the cable through the cable guides.
6. Connect the cables W630 to the RSH LUI
keypad and the bar code reader.
Install Interlock
Sensor Boards Note
All interlock sensor boards should be
replaced at the same time (interlock sensor
board, cover sensor terminator board, and
the SIB cover interlock sensor board).
1. Connect the cover sensor terminator board

to a cover interlock sensor board [6].
2. Slide the boards into the channel, connecting
additional interlock sensor boards until all
boards are inserted [5].
Note
Verify the sensor SW1 is facing up
when inserting the interlock sensor
board into the channel.
3. Connect the SIB cover interlock sensor

board [4] to the final interlock sensor
board [3].
4. Slide the SIB cover interlock sensor board
into the plastic clip [2].
5. Attach the cable from the SIB cover interlock
sensor board to J13 of the sensor interface
board [1].
Route Carrier
Transport Belt
1. At the left end of the sample handler feed
one end of the new carrier transport belt into
the opening [2] (with the belt teeth facing
up).
2. Continue feeding the belt until it appears on
the right end.
3. Use a flashlight to visually verify that the belt
did not twist.
4. At the right end of the sample handler, wrap
the belt around the x-axis motor capstan.
transport bearing.
6. At the left end of the sample handler, wrap
the belt around the belt tension pulley.
transport bearing
Attach Carrier
Transport Belt
1. Align the mark on the right end of the belt
with the right end of the carrier transport belt
clamp [1].
2. Push the belt fully into the clamp until the
belt touches the rear stop [2].
3. Measure the distance between the front
edge of the belt and the clamp. The distance
[3] should be at least 0.5" (13 mm).
4. Insert the carrier calibration alignment tool [4]
into the opening under the clamping screw.
5. Tighten the screw until tension is felt on the
tool.
6. Loosen the screw 1/4-turn to remove the
tool.
Note
The belt will be firmly attached, but
the screw should not be completely
tight.
8. Repeat the process above for the left end of

the belt.
Apply Belt
Tension
015) [4] around the gear and interior flange
surfaces of both pulleys.
pulley.
pulley [3].
7. Set the belt tension by removing the bolt [2]
on the end of the belt tension assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH keypad
cable guide.
9. Rotate the clamp [1] to align notch with rib
on slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by tightening
the clamping screw [1] on the back of the
assembly.
Install Carrier
Transport
1. Guide the carrier transport through the left
side of the RSH and place on the carrier
transport bearing, being careful not to
damage the carrier transport sensors.
2. Tighten the three (3) captive screws securing
the carrier transport to the carrier transport
bearing. [3]
Connect
Connectors
1. Connect the following connectors to the
carrier transport [1]:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
standalone.
Install Carrier
Transport Guard
1. Place the carrier transport guard on the
carrier transport.
2. Tighten the captive screw securing the
transport.
Install All RSH
Top Covers
1. With the cover at a 45 degree angle, insert
the top cover [2] hinge into the its rear
mount.
2. Raise the cover and release the spring
latches to secure the hinge.
Install Caps/Close
Covers
1. Install and secure the RSH left end cap by
tightening the two screws [1].
2. Install and secure the RSH right end cap by
covers.
Note and shutdown.
initialization.
2 P-01 Routine Bay Partition Alignment
RSH Service and Support Manual (Version 96770-105) • © 2002, 2008• ARCHITECT, i2000, and i2000SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000,
W2.06 Priority Platform Module (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1347_2
List/Part Numbers
7-203440-01 Assy, Priority Platform Module - Gray
7-91516-01 Assy, Priority Platform Module
W2.06 Priority Platform Module

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove All
RSH Top
Covers
2. Push each of the four (4) cover hinge tabs into
the removal position [1].
instrument.
Note
If the bay to be replaced is on the left
module of a ci8200, only the covers on
that module needs to be remove.
Remove RSH
Bar Code
1. Disconnect cable W631 BCR from the bar
Reader
code reader [1].
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the bar
code reader to the bracket [2], setting the
screws aside.
Note
Keep the two (2) screws apart from
other screws as they are metric.
Disconnect
Priority Tray Note
Sensors and Latches should be firmly pressed in before
Indicator Lights attempting to disconnect cables from the
priority light sensor board and the unit detect
boards.
1. Loosen the two (2) 1/4-turn captive screws
securing the lower cover to the frame and
remove the cover.
2. Disconnect the carrier sensor cables from the
priority light sensor board (PLSB).
3. Disconnect the indicator light cables from the
PLSB.
Free Bay
Partitions
1. Remove the eight (8) screws [1] securing the
priority bay partitions to the top rail.
2. At each of the three (3) standard bays to the
right, remove the three (3) screws [2] securing
the partitions to the rail.
Move Carrier
Transport to
1. Manually move the carrier transport as far to
Left Side of
the left as possible.
RSH.
Caution
Failure to move the carrier transport to
the extreme left end of the RSH results
in damage to the carrier transport
sensors.
Release Belt
Tension
2. Install the belt tension release bolt [2].
pulley. [3]
Remove
Carrier
Transport
Guard
2. Lift the carrier transport guard up and out of
the RSH.
Disconnect
Connectors
carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
standalone.
Remove
Carrier
1. Loosen the three (3) captive screws securing
Transport
bearing. [3]
through the left side of the RSH, being careful
not to damage the carrier transport sensors
located at the bottom and back of the
assembly.
Remove
Carrier
1. At the left side of the old style carrier transport
Transport Belt
bearing, loosen the captive screw securing the
Left End
belt [1].
2. Remove the belt from the clamp by sliding it to
the front.
Note
Use needle nose pliers to pull the belt
directly toward you. Wiggle the belt as
you pull it straight out of the clamp.
Remove Belt
Tension
1. Move the carrier transport bearing assembly to
Bracket
the right of the priority bay.
2. Disconnect cable W540 BKPL-SIB BCR at the
keypad (LUI) panel.
3. Remove the bar code and keypad cables from
the cable guides.
Note
Do not pull on the belt tension bracket
until all screws are removed.
4. From the back of the bracket, remove the

screw at the top rail [1], or, if the instrument is
a c 8000 or ci8200, remove the screw from the
inside of the top front of the bracket. [1]
screws holding the belt tension bracket to the
sample handler. [2]
tension bracket, carefully pull the bracket
straight off the sample handler.
Note
7. Remove the top two (2) screws [3] at the top of

Remove
Priority Bay
1. At the left side of the priority bay, locate the
Screw Cover
cover over the screws. [1]
2. Remove the cover by lifting and pulling the tab
to the left [1].
Remove
Carrier Sensor
1. At the back of the two right partitions on the
Cover
priority bay, remove the rear screws.
2. Slide the partition back and lift it out.
3. Under the partitions, lift and remove the small
plate [2] that covers the carrier sensor [1] on
the far right side.
Note
Loose components (a button, a spring,
and a sensor) are under the plate. Take
care not to lose these components.
Remove
c 8000 Filler
1. Remove the three (3) screws securing the
(c 8000 and
c 8000 filler to the right of the keypad and
ci8200 only)
remove the filler.
Remove
Priority Bay
1. Remove the six (6) screws [3] securing the bay
to the frame.
2. To secure button, spring and sensor, reinstall
small plates. Use tape to hold the plate to the
assembly.
3. While holding the top rail up, lift and remove
the priority bay.
Replacement
Place Priority
Bay on Sample Note
Handler The priority bay sits on pins that align its
1. Adjust the assembly, as required, to ensure the

bay is squarely seated and aligned.
2. Lift the rail above the partitions and place the
priority bay on the sample handler frame.
Remove
Carrier Sensor
1. Remove the screw at the rear of the two right
Cover
partitions.
2. Remove the small cover plate [2] that covers
the carrier sensor. [1]
Remove
Priority Bay
1. Locate the cover over the screws (left side of
Screw Cover
the priority bay).
2. Remove the cover by lifting and pulling the tab
to the left [1].
Secure Priority
Bay Note
The priority bay sits on pins that align its
1. Adjust the assembly as required, to ensure the

bay is squarely seated and aligned.
2. Install the six (6) screws and secure the bay to
the frame. [3]
Install Carrier
Sensor Cover
1. Install the small cover plate over the sensor.
Note
Verify that the loose components under
the plate are all present.
2. Install the two (2) partitions and secure with

two (2) screws.
Install Screw
Access Covers
1. Slide the screw access cover into the left side
of the priority bay [3].
Secure
Partitions to
1. Secure the eight (8) priority bay partitions to
Rail
the rail with screws. [1]
2. At the three standard bays to the right, install
the three (3) screws securing the three
partitions to the rail. [2]
Install Belt
Tension
1. Pull bar code and keypad (LUI) cable
Bracket
W540 BKPL-SIB BCR out and away from the
bracket area.
2. Attach the belt tension bracket to the left end of
the c 8000 sample handler.
4. Install screws at the rear of the bracket [1].
5. Route the cable through the cable guides.
6. Connect the cables W630 to the RSH LUI
Keypad and the bar code reader.
7. Install the two (2) screws [3] at the top of the
front plastic cover.
Route Carrier
Transport Belt
1. At the left end of the sample handler feed one
end of the new carrier transport belt into the
right end.
3. Use a flashlight to visually verify that the belt
did not twist.
4. At the right end of the sample handler, wrap
the belt around the x-axis motor capstan.
transport bearing.
transport bearing.
Attach Carrier
Transport Belt
1. Align the mark on the right end of the belt with
the right end of the carrier transport belt
clamp [1].
3. Measure the distance between the front edge
of the belt and the clamp. The distance [3]
should be at least 0.5" (13 mm).
4. Insert the carrier calibration alignment tool [4]
into the opening under the clamping screw.
5. Tighten the screw until tension is felt on the
tool.
Note
8. Repeat the process above for the left end of

the belt.
Apply Belt
Tension
both pulleys.
7. Set the belt tension by removing the bolt [2] on
the end of the belt tension assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH keypad
cable guide.
slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by tightening
the clamping screw [1] on the back of the
assembly.
Install Carrier
Transport
1. Guide the carrier transport through the left side
of the RSH and place on the carrier transport
transport sensors.
2. Tighten the three (3) captive screws securing
bearing. [3]
Connect
Connectors
transport [1]:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
standalone.
Install Carrier
Transport
Guard
transport.
Install c 8000
Filler (c 8000
1. Using three (3) screws, secure the c 8000 filler
and ci8200
to the left side of the priority bar.
only)
Install RSH Bar

Code Reader
1. Attach the bar code reader to the bracket with
the two (2) metric screws.
Note
Verify that the bar code reader cable is
positioned down.
2. Attach W631 BCR to the bar code reader [1],

and verify that connector is fully engaged
before tightening screws.
Connect
Priority Tray
1. Connect all carrier sensor cables to the PLSB.
Sensors and
2. Connect the indicator light cables to the PLSB.
Indicator Lights
3. Tighten the two (2) quarter-turn captive screws
securing the lower cover to the frame and
remove the cover.
Install RSH
Top Cover
1. With the cover at a 45 degree angle, insert the
top cover [2] hinge into the its rear mount.
2. Raise the cover and release the spring latches
to secure the hinge.
Note and shutdown.
W2.07 Carrier Transport Drive Motor (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1346_2
List/Part Numbers
7-91809-01 Motor, Carrier Transport Drive
7-96173-01 Motor, RSH Carrier Belt Drive
W2.07 Carrier Transport Drive Motor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
two (2) screws [1] on the inside of the end cap and
sliding the end cap forward.
3. Remove the right side processing module cover.
Remove
Right Side
1. On the right side of the system, open the top
Cover
covers and loosen the right side cover top 1/4-turn
screws.
2. Left the side cover at the bottom [1] as loosen the
two side screws [2].
Release
Belt
Tension
2. Tighten the bolt on the belt tension assembly. [2]
Remove
Carrier Note
Transport To prevent damage to the carrier transport belt,
Drive Motor verify that tension is released and that the belt is
removed from the carrier transport pulley prior to
removing the belt from the carrier transport drive
motor.
1. At the right end of the RSH, slide the carrier

transport belt off the carrier transport drive
motor [1].
2. Disconnect the carrier transport drive motor
cable [2].
3. Remove the four (4) screws securing the motor to
the RSH [3].
4. Remove the motor from the RSH.
Replacement

Install
Carrier
1. At the right end of the RSH, install the
Transport
carrier transport drive motor on the
Drive Motor
mounting bracket.
2. Install the four (4) screws to secure the
motor to the mounting bracket [3].
3. Connect the carrier transport drive motor
cable [2].
4. Slide the carrier transport belt onto the
carrier transport drive motor [1].
Apply Belt
Tension
1. Ensure that the belt tension disk [1] is
loose.
3. Remove the belt from around both
pulleys.
015) [4] around the gear and interior
flange surfaces of both pulleys.
pulley.
pulley [3].
7. Set the belt tension by removing the
bolt [2] on the end of the belt tension
assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH
keypad cable guide.
9. Rotate the clamp [1] to align notch with
rib on slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by
tightening the clamping screw [1] on the
back of the assembly.
Install
Caps/Close
1. Install and secure the RSH left end cap
Covers
by tightening the two screws [1].
2. Install and secure the RSH right end cap
by tightening the two screws [1].
covers.
1. Install the right side processing module
cover.
Note
To prevent cross threading the
bracket, raise and lower the
cover [1] as you tighten the
screws [2].
Note
W2.08 Carrier Transport (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1345_2
List/Part Numbers
7-201431-01 Sensor Shield, Carrier Transport
7-92947-01 Assy, Carrier Transport
7-92947-02 Assy, Carrier Transport with Sensor Guard
EE-SX3070L RSH CARR. TRANSPORT SNSR EE SX3070, LSP
HOA014901L RSH CARR.TRANSPORT SNSR HOA0149-001, LSP
W2.08 Carrier Transport

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
4. Remove the RSH left end cap by loosening the two
(2) screws [1] on the inside of the end cap and
left as possible.
Caution
extreme left end of the RSH results in
damage to the carrier transport sensors.
Remove
Carrier
Transport
Guard
RSH.
Disconnect
Connectors
carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
on a c 8000 standalone RSH, W572
Remove
Carrier
Transport
2. Lift the carrier transport up and guide it out through
the left side of the RSH, being careful not to
damage the carrier transport sensors located at the
bottom and back of the assembly.
Replacement
Install
Carrier
Transport
transport sensors.
bearing. [3]
Connect
Connectors
transport [1]:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
2. Press down on the cable clamps, to latch the

cable to the carrier transport.
3. Pull on the cable connectors to ensure that they
are latched.
Install
Carrier
Transport
transport.
Guard
Install End
Cap/Close
Covers
Note and shutdown.
W2.09 Bay Door (RSH) Version - 96781-104_919_3
List/Part Numbers
7-203438-01 Door, RSH Bay, Grey
7-91504-01 Door, RSH Bay
7-91504-02 Door, RSH Bay, Beige
W2.09 Bay Door

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Bay Door
1. Remove the two (2) screws [2] securing the bay
door to the tray via the screw plate.
2. Remove the screw plate.
3. Remove the bay door by lifting straight up.
Note
Loose components (a button, a spring, a
sensor, and two door release arms with
springs) are under the plate. Take care not
to lose these components.
Replacement
Install
Bay Door
1. At the bottom right corner of the door is a coiled
spring. As the door is installed, insert the end of
the spring into the small hole in the right side of
the tray platform.
2. At the each side of the bay door area are two door
release arms, align the door as required to align
the bottom edge with the notches in the release
arms.
3. Verify that the loose components under the plate
are all present.
4. Verify that the bay door is correctly positioned.
5. Install the screw plate.
6. Tighten the two (2) screws [2] securing the screw
plate to the platform.

Note and shutdown.
on prior to turning on the processing module
to ensure proper initialization.
1 G143 - RSH Bay Door Operational Check Ensure that when the RSH Bay Door is in the Door operates according to above verification.
down position it returns fully to the closed and
locked position with no external assistance.
Test this operation 5 times by inserting a
carrier tray and removing it and observing that
the door returns and locks after each
insertion/removal.
W3.01 Flex Cable Assembly (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1344_3
List/Part Numbers
7-201396-01 Velcro Strips, RSH Flex Chain
7-35003533-01 ASSY, CABLE, FLEX W572 ci82k/ci162k plus RSHx
7-94129-01 Cable Flex i4000SR, W574
7-95420-01 Assy, Flex Chain i2kSR W573
7-95420-02 Assy, Flex Chain i2kSR W573
7-95420-03 Assy, Flex Chain, i2000SR W573
7-95421-01 Flex Chain ci82k W572
7-95421-02 Flex Chain ci82k W572
7-95421-03 Flex Chain ci8200 W572
7-95528-01 IGUS Chain, c8k
7-95528-02 Flex Chain c8000 W571
7-95528-03 Flex Chain c8000 or c16000 W571
W3.01 Flex Cable Assembly
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Remove the RSH left end cap by loosening the two
(2) screws [1] on the inside of the end cap and
4. Open RSH covers near the carrier transport.
Remove
Flex Cable
Assembly
carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
2. Loosen the captive screw securing the flex cable

assembly to the carrier transport bearing [3].
3. Remove the non-captive screw from the right end
of the cable. [4]
4. Remove the Transport Motor Cable P2 from the
bracket at the right rear of the RSH.
5. Disconnect the Xport Sensor Cable P1 from
connector J6 on the sensor interface board (SIB).
6. Slide the flex cable assembly out of the RSH,
being careful not to damage the carrier transport
sensors.
Note
The flex cable is designed to flex only in
one direction. If the cable is to be
reinstalled, use care to ensure that the cable
is not bent in the opposite direction. The
resulting kink in the cable can develop
during use and damage the section align
sensor on the carrier transport.
Replacement
Install Flex
Cable Note
Assembly The flex cable is designed to flex only in one
direction. If the cable is to be reinstalled, use care
to ensure that the cable is not bent in the opposite
direction. The resulting kink in the cable can
develop during use and damage the section align
sensor on the carrier transport.
1. Slide the flex cable assembly into the RSH, being

careful not to damage the carrier transport sensors.
2. Attach non-captive screw to the right end of the
cable. [4]
3. Tighten the captive screw securing the flex cable
assembly to the carrier transport bearing [3].
transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
The transport motor cable is W571 on
a c 8000 standalone RSH, W572 on a
ci8200, and W573 on an i 2000 SR
standalone.
5. Connect the Transport Motor Cable P2 to the

bracket.
6. Connect the Xport Sensor Cable P1 to J6 on the
SIB.
Install
Caps/Close
Covers
2. Install and secure the RSH right end cap by
3. Close the RSH covers near the carrier transprot.

Note and shutdown.
The system control center power must be on
W3.02 Carrier Transport Belt (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1343_2
List/Part Numbers
7-35003533-01 ASSY, CABLE, FLEX W572 ci82k/ci162k plus RSHx
7-35003534-01 BELT, TIMING, AT5, ci8200/ci16200 plus RSH EXTENSION
7-95424-01 Belt, Carrier Transport, i2kSR
7-95425-01 Belt, Carrier Transport, c8K
7-95426-01 Belt, Carrier Transport ci82k
7-95427-01 Belt, X-Position, i4000SR
7-96557-01 Spring, RSH Belt Tension
W3.02 Carrier Transport Belt
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
Flashlight
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
3. Open the RSH covers.
left as possible.
Note
extreme left end of the RSH may result in
damage to carrier transport sensors.
Release
Belt
Tension
Replace
Belt
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] securing the plate
Tension
to the end of the x-axis belt tension bracket.
Spring
Note
There is a spring on the block behind the
plate that exerts pressure on the plate as it
is being removed.

4. Install a new belt tension spring.
5. Slide in the carrier transport pulley assembly.
6. Install the plate using the two screws [1].
Remove
Carrier
Transport
Guard
RSH.
Disconnect
Connectors
carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
Remove
Carrier
Transport
2. Lift the carrier transport up and guide it out through
the left side of the RSH, being careful not to
damage the carrier transport sensors located at the
bottom and back of the assembly.
Release
Belt
1. At the right side of the carrier transport bearing,
2. Remove the belt from the clamp by sliding it to the
front. Use needle nose pliers to pull the belt
directly toward you. Wiggle the belt as you pull it
straight out of the clamp.
3. At the left side of the carrier transport bearing,
4. Remove the belt.
Replacement
Route
Carrier
1. At the left end of the sample handler feed one
Transport
end of the new carrier transport belt into the
Belt
right end.
3. Use a flashlight to visually verify that the belt did
not twist.
4. At the right end of the sample handler, wrap the
belt around the x-axis motor capstan.
transport bearing.
transport bearing.
Attach
Carrier
1. Align the mark on the right end of the belt with
Transport
the right end of the carrier transport belt
Belt
clamp [1].
3. Measure the distance between the front edge of
the belt and the clamp. The distance [3] should
be at least 0.5" (13 mm).
4. Insert the carrier calibration alignment tool [4] into
the opening under the clamping screw.
5. Tighten the screw until tension is felt on the tool.
Note
8. Repeat the process above for the left end of the

belt.
Apply Belt
Tension
both pulleys.
7. Set the belt tension by removing the bolt [2] on
the end of the belt tension assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH keypad cable
guide.
slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by tightening the
clamping screw [1] on the back of the assembly.
Install
Carrier
Transport
transport sensors.
bearing. [3]
Connect
Connectors
transport [1]:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
Install
Carrier
Transport
transport.
Guard
Connect
Flex Cable
1. Tighten the captive screw securing the flex cable
to the carrier transport bearing.
Install
Caps/Close
1. Install the RSH left end cap.
Covers
2. Close all RSH and processing module covers.

Note and shutdown.
W3.03 Carrier Transport Guard (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1342_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86141-01 Cover, Carrier Transport
W3.03 Carrier Transport Guard

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
status.
Preparation
1. Open RSH covers near the carrier
transport.
2. Open the processing module cover.
Remove Carrier
Transport
Guard
transport.
2. Lift the carrier transport guard up and
out of the RSH.
Replacement
Install
Carrier
1. Place the carrier transport guard on the
Transport
carrier transport.
Guard
2. Tighten the captive screw securing the
transport.
Close
Covers
covers.

Note
initialization.
open/close freely.
W3.04 RSH Cover Version - 96781-104_342_2
W3.04 RSH Cover

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
1. Open the desired RSH cover.
Remove
RSH Cover
1. Push each of the four (4) cover hinge tabs
into the removal position [1].
2. Rotate the cover back until the hinges are
disengaged and remove the cover from the
instrument [2].
Replacement
Install
RSH
1. Place the RSH cover into position on the
Cover
hinge [2].
2. Push the four (4) cover hinge tabs into the
attached position [1].
Note
initialization.

errors.
W3.05 SIB carrier transport cable (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1339_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86403-01 Cable, Car. Transport Arm W575
7-86403-02 Cable, Carrier Transport Arm Sensor W575
W3.05 SIB carrier transport cable

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
status.
Preparation
3. Open the RSH cover closest to the
carrier transport.
Remove Carrier
Transport Guard
transport.
2. Lift the carrier transport guard up and out
of the RSH.
Remove SIB
Carrier Transport
1. Disconnect the end of the SIB carrier
Cable
transport cable from the carrier transport
flex board [1].
2. Disconnect the end of the SIB carrier
transport cable from the rail guide [2].
3. Slide the cable to the right until the cable
guard is out of the channel.
4. Lift the cable and remove it from the
channel in the rail guide [3].
5. Unwind the SIB carrier transport cable
Replacement
Install SIB
Carrier
1. Wind the SIB carrier transport cable around the
Transport
post.
Cable
Note
The connectors at both ends of the cable
are identical. Verify that the end with the
cable guard close to the connector is
installed in the rail guide [3].
2. Connect the end of the SIB carrier transport
cable to the rail guide [2].
3. Connect the end of the SIB carrier transport
cable to the carrier transport flex board [1].
Install
Carrier
Transport
transport.
Guard
Close
Covers

Note shutdown.
W4.01 c 8000 Card Cage Version - 96781-104_134_1
W4.01 c 8000 Card Cage

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the instrument (use the main circuit
breaker located at the rear of the instrument).
2. Remove the RSH end cap by loosing the two (2)
Phillips screws on the inside of the end cap and
3. Remove the right side cover from the processing
module.
Disconnect
Cables
1. Disconnect the following connectors from the back
of the card cage mother board:
J 679
J 678
J 680
J 603
J 703
J 701
J 702
J 41
J 42
J 48
J 600
2. Remove the cables from the cable clamps on the

card cage mounting plate and move out of the way.
Open Card
Cage Front
1. Open the card cage front cover by loosening the
Cover
bottom captive screw and lifting the cover straight
up.
Note
Do not pull out on the bottom of the cover.
The cover is not hinged.
Remove
Card Cage
1. In the upper slot, remove the motor driver card.
Circuit
2. In the bottom left slot, remove the indexer board.
Boards
3. In the bottom right slot, remove the CPU board.
Remove
Card Cage
1. Loosen the top screw on each side of the card
cage mounting plate.
2. Remove the lower three (3) screws from each side
of the mounting plate.
Note
Early manufactured instruments do not have
the bottom two screws on each side of the
mounting plate.
3. Remove the two (2) screws that secure the card

cage mounting plate to the RSH (located between
transport motor and the processing module).
4. Lift the card cage and mounting plate up and off of
the top two (2) screws and remove the card cage
from the processing module.
Replacement
Install
Card Cage
1. Place the card cage and mounting plate on
top of the two (2) screws on the processing
module.
2. Install the two (2) screws that secure the card
cage mounting plate to the RSH (located
between transport motor and the processing
module).
3. Install the lower three (3) screws on each side
of the mounting plate and tighten the top
screws.
Note
Early manufactured instruments do not
have the bottom two screws on each
side of the mounting plate.
Open Card
Cage
1. Open the card cage front cover by loosening
Front
the bottom captive screw and lifting the cover
Cover
straight up.
Note
Do Not pull out on the bottom of the
cover. The cover is not hinged.
Install
Card Cage
1. In the upper slot, install the motor driver card.
Circuit
2. In the bottom left slot, install the indexer
Boards
board.
3. In the bottom right slot, install the CPU board.
Install
Card Cage
1. Install card cage front cover and tighten the
Circuit
bottom captive screw.
Boards
Connect
Cables
1. Connect the following plugs to the connectors
on the back of the card cage mother board:
J 679
J 678
J 680
J 603
J 703
J 701
J 702
J 41
J 42
J 48
J 600
2. Route the cables in the cable clamps and

secure them to the mounting plate.
Note
Cables must not extend below the card
cage to prevent interference with the
right side cover.
Install
Cover and
1. Install the right side cover on the processing
End Cap
module.
2. Install the RSH end cap by sliding the cap to
the rear and engaging the three (3) screws on
the inside of the end cap.
3. Tighten the two (2) Phillips screws.

Note

1 G1 - Verify the Repair according to released
Operation and Service Procedures.
RSH Service and Support Manual (Version 96770-105) • © 2002, 2008• ARCHITECT, i2000, and i2000SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000,
5.3 CLI Commands
Command Locator
Group Command
HOME V1 V2
ISH_COMP_INIT V1
LASB_COMP_INIT V1
MOD_COMP_INIT V1
Motor Commands
OMS V1 V2
STAR_WHEEL_INDEX V1 V2
VACUUM V1
Temperature Commands TCB V1
DIO V1 V2
DIVERT V1
DIO/EIEIO Commands
EIEIO V1 READ
Solenoid Commands SOL V1 V2 Value
ASPIRATE V1 V2 V3 V4
DISPENSE V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
FLUSH_PIPETTER V1
FLUSH_TRIGGER1
FLUSH_TRIGGER2
FLUSH_WASHER V1
GET_LLS_DATA V1
LLS V1 V2 value
Fluidics/Pipettors/Wash Zones/LLS Commands PASSIVE_WASH V1 V2

PROBE_MOVE V1 V2
PROBE_RAISE V1
TRIGGER1_DISPENSE V1
WASHER_ASPIRATE V1
WASHER_DISPENSE V1 V2 V3
WASHER_MOVE V1 V2
CMIA_READ V1
OPTICS V1
Optics Commands READ V1 V2
SHUTTER_MOVE V1
DISPERSION V1
REAGENT_RING_MOVE V1 V2 V3
Reagent Carousel Commands
SET_REAGENT_BOTTLE V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
PROC_PATH V1
PROC_PATH_MOVE V1 V2
Process Path Commands
BOOT_DIAGS
CLEAR_LOG V1
Software Commands
GET_LOG V1 V2
Introduction
This document contains general commands for use with the ARCHITECT system. Use these commands when diagnosing
hardware issues. Maintenance and diagnostic procedures use a series of these commands (in a short program) and are the
preferred method of diagnostics. There are cases, however, when using individual CLI commands is necessary.
Commands are classified as either high level or low level commands. Low level commands are singular commands that go directly
to software drivers and hardware controllers. High level commands are implemented in software by using one or more low level
commands. Caution must be used when mixing low level commands in a sequence with high level commands, since the high level
commands may produce unexpected side-effects on low level software drivers and hardware controllers. Also, modules must be
reinitialized after using CLI commands.
CLI commands can be entered in several areas. For software v.1.50 and above, maintenance and diagnostic procedure 6200
produces an interactive window for the user to enter the commands and produces responses with the appropriate commands.
Commands may also be entered into the SCC Hyperterminal windows or, for some low level commands only, in the individual
module Hyperterminal (ISH/IAHV) window when debug cables are installed.
Command Format
The basic command format is:
COMMAND V# V# V#
where "COMMAND" is a specific function to be performed and each "V#" is a variable that specifies the parameter required to
perform the function. Commands are not case sensitive.
Example Description
1>HOME The set module is 1 or processing module, the command is HOME, the first value 1 designates motor 1 (outer
10 reagent carousel), and the second value 0, designates the step number that is set as home.
2>SOL 3 The set module is 2 or processing module 2; the command is SOL, which directs the command to a solenoid,
SET 1 specifically solenoid 3, and the syringe valve on the R2 pipettor. The value SET 1 turns the valve on, SET 0 would
turn it off.
Prerequisite Commands
Prerequisite commands are entered to direct the next command at a specific part of the instrument. At power on, default values are
established for these values. However, when issuing commands from CLI, the state of the system should not be assumed.
Example Description
SET_MODULE V1 V1 =
0 = returns 0>, which is sample handler
1 = returns 1>, which is module 1
SET_PROTOCOL V1 ROUTINE_TYPE = Reagent 1 pipettor

STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) = Reagent 2 pipettor at process path position 48
STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) = Reagent 2 pipettor at process path location 71 and outer reagent ring
ROUTINE_TYPE = Reagent 2 pipettor at process path location 71 and inner reagent ring
ROUTINE_TYPE = Sample pipettor
STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) = STAT pipettor
SET_SAMPLE V1 V1 =
ISH = sample handler configuration
LAS = LAS configuration
SET_TEST_TYPE V1 V1 =
ROUTINE_TYPE = default
STAT_TYPE = valid only on i 2000 SR
V1 = Assay protocol, Table 5-2
Table 5-1: Assay Protocol Name

V1, Protocol Name SET_TEST_TYPE status Protocol location
REAGENT1 ROUTINE_TYPE Reagent 1 pipettor
REAGENT1 STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) Reagent 2 pipettor at process path position 48
REAGENT2 STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) Reagent 2 pipettor at process path location 71 and outer reagent ring
REAGENT3 ROUTINE_TYPE Reagent 2 pipettor at process path location 71 and inner reagent ring
SAMPLE ROUTINE_TYPE Sample pipettor
SAMPLE STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) STAT pipettor
Motor Commands
HOME V1 V2
Purpose This command initializes the position of the specified motor by homing it and establishing the specified step
number as the home step number.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (for processing module motors - Table 5-2)
SET_MODULE 0 (for sample handler motors - Table 5-3)

V1= motor number, Table 5-2 and Table 5-3
V2= step number.
Example Description
1>HOME 0 0 Homes the process path motor and 0 is the home step
Table 5-2: V1 Process Module Motors

Motor # Description Motor # Description
0 Process Path Motor 16 R2 Pipettor -Theta Axis
1 Outer Reagent Carousel 17 R2 Pipettor - Z Axis
2 Inner Reagent Carousel 18 R2 Syringe
3 Dispersion Motor 19 WZ1 Aspirate Probes
4 Sample Pipettor-Theta Axis 20 RV Orienter

5 Sample Pipettor- Z Axis 21 RV Transport
6 Sample Syringe 22 STAT Syringe*
7 WZ1 Switch Diverter 23 STAT Pipetter Z Motor*
8 R1 Pipettor -Theta Axis 24 R1 Wash Cup Buffer Pump
9 R1 Pipettor- Z Axis 25 R2 Wash Cup Buffer Pump
10 R1 Syringe 26 Sample Probe Buffer Pump
11 WZ2 Aspirate Probes 27 R1 Probe Buffer Pump
12 Trigger Pump 28 R2 Probe Buffer Pump
13 Pre-Trigger Pump 29 STAT Probe Buffer Pump*
14 Shutter 30 WZ1 Dispense Pump
15 STAT Pipetter Theta Motor* 31 WZ2 Dispense Pump
Note
Asterisk (*) indicates i 2000 SR only.
Table 5-3: V1 Standard Sample Handler Motors

Motor # Description
0 Load Queue Inner Lane Conveyer Belt
1 Load Transfer Solenoid Mechanism
2 Unload Transfer Solenoid Mechanism
3 Unload Inner Lane Pusher Mechanism

4 Load Queue Outer Lane Conveyer Belt
5 Unload Outer Lane Pusher Mechanism
6 Processing Queue Conveyer Belt Module #1*
7 Star Wheel Motor Module #1*
7 LAS Carousel (i 2000
Note
* - Module numbering for this table is physically from right to left.
ISH_COMP_INIT V1
Purpose This command is only valid on systems equipped with a standard sample handler. This high level command
initialized the specified standard sample handler component by homing all of its associated motors, initializing the
state of the gates, etc. This command places the assembly in a known state so it is ready to accept all other high
level commands. The actual initialization performed depends on the component specified.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 0
V1 = component name, Table 5-4.
Example Description
0>ISH_COMP_INIT CONVEYOR1 Initializes the processing queue and associated hardware at processing module #1.
Table 5-4: V1, Standard Sample Handler Components

Component Description
CONVEYOR1 Processing queue at module #1
LOAD_XFER Load transfer mechanism
LOADQ_LANE1 Inner load queue lane on a two lane system, or the only lane on single lane system
LOADQ_LANE2 Outer load queue lane on a dual lane system

STAR_WHEEL1 Star Wheel indexer at module #1
UNLOAD_PUSHER1 Inner unload queue lane pusher mechanism
UNLOAD_PUSHER2 Outer unload queue lane pusher mechanism
UNLOAD_XFER Unload transfer mechanism
LASB_COMP_INIT V1
Purpose This command is only valid on systems equipped with the LAS Carousel. This high level command initializes the
specified LAS Carousel component by homing all of its associated motors, etc. This command places the
assembly in a known state so it is ready to accept all other high level commands. The actual initialization
performed depends on the component specified.
V1 = component name, Table 5-5.
Example Description
0>LASB_COMP_INIT LASB_CAROUSEL Initializes the LAS Carousel
Table 5-5: V1, LAS Components

Component Description
LASB_BARCODE_READER LAS Bar Code Reader
LASB_CAROUSEL LAS Carousel
MOD_COMP_INIT V1
Purpose This high level command allows you to initialize the specified component by homing all its associated motors,
initializing the state of the valves, etc. This command places the component in a known state so it is ready to
accept all other high level commands. This command is only used by a processing module.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number)
V1 = Component, Table 5-6
Example Description
1>MOD_COMP_INIT ITV1 Initializes vortexer #1.
1>MOD_COMP_INIT PROCESS_PATH Initializes the process path.

Table 5-6: V1, Components
Example Description
BARCODE_READER Reagent bar code reader
CMIA_READER CMIA reader
DISPERSION_MECH Microparticle dispersion mechanism
ITV1 In-Track Vortexer #1
LOAD_DIVERTER Load Diverter
PROCESS_PATH Process Path Carousel
RGNT_CAROUSEL 1 Outer Reagent Carousel
RGNT_CAROUSEL 2 Inner Reagent Carousel
RGNT_PIPETTER1_FLUIDICS Reagent Pipettor #1 Fluidics (syr & pmp)
RGNT_PIPETTER1_THETA Reagent Pipettor #1 Theta Axis
RGNT_PIPETTER1_Z Reagent Pipettor #1 Z Axis
RGNT_PIPETTER2_FLUIDICS Reagent Pipettor #2 Fluidics (syr & pmp)
RGNT_PIPETTER2_THETA Reagent Pipettor #2 Theta Axis
RGNT_PIPETTER2_Z Reagent Pipettor #2 Z Axis
RV_LOADER RV Loader
RV_UNLOADER RV Unloader
SAMPLE_PIPETTER_FLUIDICS Sample Pipettor Fluidics (syr & pmp)
SAMPLE_PIPETTER_THETA Sample Pipettor Theta Axis
SAMPLE_PIPETTER_Z Sample Pipettor Z Axis
SHUTTER CMIA Shutter Mechanism
STAT_DIVERTER STAT diverter
STAT_PIPETTER_FLUIDICS STAT Pipetter Fluidics (syringe and pump
STAT_PIPETTER_THETA STAT Pipetter Theta Axis
STAT_PIPETTER_Z STAT Pipetter Z Axis
SYSTEM_VACUUM System vacuum
TRIGGER1 Pre-rigger Dispenser
TRIGGER2 Trigger Dispenser
WASH_ZONE2 Wash Zone #1 Fluidics
WASH_ZONE2_ASP Wash Zone #1 Aspirate Mechanism
WASH_ZONE2_SWITCH Wash Zone #1 Diverter Switch
WASH_ZONE3 Wash Zone #2 Fluidics

WASH_ZONE2_ASP Wash Zone #2 Aspirate Mechanism
OMS V1 V2
Purpose Low level Oregon Micro System (OMS) commands are used to move a motor or obtain data from it.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (for processing module motors - Table 5-2)
SET_MODULE 0 (for sample handler motors - Table 5-3)
V1= motor number, Table 5-2 and Table 5-3
V2 = any single OMS command, Table 5-7
Example Description
1>OMS 5 MR4000 moves the sample Pipettor z motor 4000 steps down
1>OMS 26 JG40000 runs the sample buffer pump at flush velocity
0>OMS 6 ST stops sample queue conveyor motor
Table 5-7: V2 OMS Commands

Commands Description Example
JG velocity Move motor at velocity (steps/sec) forward or backward indefinitely. Range is 0>OMS 6 JG4000
between 0 and 128000. Runs process queue 4000
steps/minute.
MA step Move to absolute step number. 1>OMS 5 MA3000

number Moves the process path one RV
position.
MR number Move number of steps from current position (can be plus or minus) 1>OMS 0 MR536
steps Moves the process path one RV
position.
RE Return current encoder position (Motors 0,1,2,and 3 only). 1>OMS 1 RE

Returns position of Outer Reagent
Carousel.
RP Return the current absolute position. 1>OMS 5 RP

Reports the sample z motor
position.
ST Stop motor using deceleration values set in mot.dat file 1>OMS 5 ST

Stops sample z motor.
STAR_WHEEL_INDEX V1 V2
Purpose This high level command only applies to systems with a standard sample handler. This command indexes the Star
Wheel associated with the specified processing module to the next engagement or aspirate position. Within each
sample carrier location, there are actually two positions. The engage position is one in which you move to safely
engage a carrier without affecting a trailing carrier. The aspirate position is the location at which the sample in a
carrier location is aligned for aspiration by the sample probe. At the aspirate position, bar code data can be read
and displayed.
Prerequisite None
V1 = Module (specifies which processing module 1-4)
V2 = index position (ENGAGE or ASPIRATE)
Example Description
STAR_WHEEL_INDEX 1 Moves the star wheel on module 1 to the engage position.

ENGAGE
STAR_WHEEL_INDEX 1 Moves the star wheel on module 1 to the aspirate position. bar code data can be read and
ASPIRATE displayed in this position.
VACUUM V1
Purpose This command turns the vacuum pump on or off.
V1 = Command, ON or OFF.
Example Description
1>VACUUM ON Turns the vacuum pump on in module 1.
Temperature Commands
TCB V1
Purpose This command allows for low level control over the functions on the Temperature Controller Board.
V1 = Command, Table 5-8
Example Description
1>TCB READ 17 On module 1, reads channel 17, Pre-Trigger Heater in degrees C. Returns 37000 = 37.0 C.
1>TCB CHAN_STATUS 12 On module 1, shows status of Process Path Zone 5.
1>TCB CHAN_CTRL 21 1 On module 1, turns on Wash Zone1 Buffer Heater.

Table 5-8: V1 Command
Example Description Command Output
CHAN_CTRL Enable or Disable the control and None

channel value alarms for a specified channel. See
Table 5-9, "Temperature Channel
Descriptions" for channel
descriptions.
value = 1 (Enable)
value = 0 (Disable)
CHAN_STATUS Returns channel status information. Returns thirteen columns with information about a given channel. The
channel See Table 5-9, "Temperature information appears on a single line (32 lines when all channels are
Channel Descriptions" for channel specified), with each column separated by a space. See Table 5-10,
descriptions. "CHAN_STATUS Column Descriptions" for column descriptions.
READ channel Read temperature on specified Integer temperature(s) in thousands of a degree (6 chars per value, 4
channel. See Table 5-9, values per line when all channels are read, each separated by a space,
"Temperature Channel e.g. 37.000 C = 37000).
Descriptions" for channel
descriptions.
Table 5-9: Temperature Channel Descriptions

Channel # Temperature Channel Descriptions
4 Process Path Zone 1
6 Wash Zone 1, Position 1- WAM
7 Reagent Cooler Temperature
10 Wash zone 1, Position 2 - WAM
16 Trigger Heater
17 Pre-Trigger Heater
21 Wash Zone 1, Buffer Heater
24 Wash Zone 2, Buffer Heater
28 Ambient Temperature
32 All Channels
Table 5-10: CHAN_STATUS Column Descriptions
Column # Description Reference
1 channel number 0-31
2 channel type 0=reference,1=monitor, 2=control, 3=WAM
3 on/off state 0=channel off, 1=channel on
4 temperature Integer temperature, in thousands of a degree
5 high alarm limit Integer temperature, in thousands of a degree
6 low alarm limit Integer temperature, in thousands of a degree
7 alarm on/off state 0=channel off, 1=channel on
8 alarm pending 0=no alarm pending, 1=alarm pending
9 alarm count number of samples which had alarm conditions
10 set point the PID temperature set point
11 heater ticks the current heater tick count (0-960)
12 heater on ticks output of PID determines how many ticks the heater needs to be on (0-960)
13 heater period ticks the number of ticks in the heater update period (960)
DIO/EIEIO Commands
DIO V1 V2
Purpose This is a low level I/O command to read, set, or clear I/O bits on the CPU and optics board. Note that the
SET_MODULE command indicates the module that the CLI command accesses. If the SET_MODULE is set to
the sample handler, bits 48-95 are not accessible and an error results. Processing module bits are in Table 5-12,
"V1, DIO Bit Identifiers for Processing Module", 0-23 are read only, 24-47 are read/write, 48-94 are read only.
Standard sample handler bits are in Table 5-13, "V1, DIO Bit Identifiers for the Standard Sample Handler", 0-
23 are read only, 24-30 are read/write. Only the read only (input) bits are able to generate inputs.
V1 = bit, Table 5-12 for Assay Module, Table 5-13 for Sample handler.
V2 = command, Table 5-11
Example Description
0>DIO 27 SET 1 Load transfer arm opens.
0>DIO 30 READ Reads condition of Load Lane 1 Solenoid.
Table 5-11: V2, Commands

Commands Description
READ Return the current value of the solenoid.
Returns:
0 = off
1 = on
SET value Set solenoid to value.

Value:
0 = off
1 = on
Table 5-12: V1, DIO Bit Identifiers for Processing Module

Bit # Input/Output Description Active Logic If Active Notes
0 Input AC failed 1 No AC input
1 Input Over Voltage 1 AC input too high
2 Input Under Voltage 1 AC input too low
3 Input Over Temperature 1 Power Supply hot
4 Input STAT Diverter Sensor 0 Diverter is extended i 2000 SR
8 Input RV Load Diverter Shutter Sensor 0 Shutter is activated
9 Input Wash Zone Bypass Sensor 0 Diverter is extended
13 Input SPI Comm Error 1 SPI command not recognized
14 Input RV Loader Sensor Calibration X Response Signal
16 Input Module ID (LSB) X 0=Module 1 or 3; 1=Module 2 or 4
17 Input Power Board Fault 1 Fault condition on power board
18 Input Module ID (MSB) X 0=Module 1 or 3; 1=Module 2 or 4
19 Input Buffer Full 0 Buffer level full
20 Input Buffer Low 0 Buffer level is < low level
21 Input Buffer Empty 0 Buffer level is practically empty
22 Input Vacuum low 1 Vacuum too low
23 Input Liquid in Vacuum 0 Drain valve FAILED
24 Output Power Supply All OFF 0 Power OFF
25 Output Vacuum Pump on/off 1 Vacuum pump ON
27 Output Heater OFF 0 AC power to heaters is disabled
31 Output SPI Decode 0 X Bit 0 of SPI Address (LSB)
32 Output SPI Decode 1 X Bit 1 of SPI Address
33 Output SPI Decode 2 X Bit 2 of SPI Address
34 Output SPI Decode 3 X Bit 3 of SPI Address (MSB)
48 Input Trigger FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home

49 Input Pre-Trigger FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
50 Input R1 Wash Cup FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
51 Input R2 Wash Cup FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
52 Input Sample Probe FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
53 Input R1 Probe FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
54 Input R2 Probe FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
55 Input STAT Buffer Pump Verification 1 Pump is home i 2000 SR
56 Input Wash Zone 1 FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
57 Input Wash Zone 2 FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
62 Input RV at end of Transport 0 RV present
63 Input RV at RV Transport Drop Point 0 RV present
64 Input RV in place in staging lane 0 RV present
65 Input Hopper level low 1 Not enough RVs in Hopper
66 Input RV Load Diverter Sensor 0 Diverter is extended
68 Input RV Unload Solenoid Sensor 0 Unloader is Active
69 Input Front Lid 1 Lid is Open
70 Input Rear Lid 1 Lid is Open
71 Input Vacuum Accumulator Liquid Detect 1 Excess liquid in Accumulator
72 Input Reagent Access Lid 1 Lid is Open
73 Input Waste Chute 1 Waste container not present
84 Input Hopper Sensor (12 Volt) 0 Hopper is empty i 2000 SR
85 Input Assay Module Backplane +12v fuse 0 Fuse Blown
86 Input Assay Module Backplane -12v fuse 1 Fuse Blown
87 Input Assay Module Backplane +5v fuse 0 Fuse Blown
91 Input Air in Transfer Pump fluid line 0 Air is in the fluid line
92 Input Trigger Level Low 0 Level low
94 Input Pre-trigger Level Low 0 Level low
95 Input Over temperature from Motor Drivers 1 Driver board in Power Cage too HOT
Table 5-13: V1, DIO Bit Identifiers for the Standard Sample Handler
Bit # Input/Output Description Active Logic If Active
0 Input Carrier Present Lane 1 0 Carrier Present
1 Input Carrier Present at gate for unload transfer 0 Carrier Present
2 Input Carrier Present at BCR Module 1* 0 Carrier Present

3 Input Carrier Present Lane 2 0 Carrier Present
4 Input Carrier Present BCR Module 2* 0 Carrier Present
7 Input LUI Stop 0 Key Pressed
8 Input LUI Load 0 Key Pressed
9 Input LUI Pause 0 Key Pressed
10 Input LUI Reverse 0 Key Pressed
11 Input PQ Access Door Sensor Module 2* 0 Window Closed
15 Input Carrier Present at Unload Queue 0 Carrier Present at Sensor
16 Input Overtemperature from Motor drivers 1 Driver board in Power Cage too HOT
17 Input Power Board Fault 1 Fault condition on power board
18 Input Assay Module Backplane +12V fuse 0 Fuse blown
19 Input Assay Module Backplane -12V fuse 1 Fuse blown
20 Input Assay Module Backplane +5V fuse 0 Fuse blown
24 Output LUI Load LED 1 LED on
25 Output LUI Load 2 LED 1 LED on
26 Output LUI Load 1 LED 1 LED on
27 Output Transfer 1 Solenoid actuator 1 Arm extended
28 Output Transfer 2 Solenoid actuator 1 Arm extended
29 Output Unload Transfer Gate Solenoid actuator 1 Gate retracted
30 Output Load Lane 1 Solenoid 1 Gate open
Note
* - Module numbering for this table is physically from right to left
Table 5-14: V1, DIO Bit Identifiers for the LAS Carousel
Bit # Input/Output Description Active Logic If Active
2 Input LAS Carousel Position Sensor 0 Position Detected
7 Input LUI Stop 0 Key Pressed
8 Input LUI Load 0 Key Pressed
9 Input LUI Pause 0 Key Pressed
10 Input LUI Advance 0 Key Pressed

14 Input Window Sensor 1 Window Closed
24 Output LUI Ready LED 1 LED on
DIVERT V1
Purpose This command cycles the diverter mechanism to divert an RV along the process path carousel. The diverter
solenoid extends, holds, and retracts using timing data specified in a system file.
V1 = Location, either LOAD or STAT (i 2000 SR only)
Example Description
1>DIVERT LOAD Places an RV in the outer lane at the load diverter for the next test.
1>DIVERT STAT Places an RV in the outer lane at the STAT diverter for the next test.
EIEIO V1 READ
Purpose EIEIO stands for Enhanced Indexer Extra I/O. This low level command is to read the condition of switches on the
standard sample handler.
V1 = bit, Table 5-15
Example Description
0>EIEIO 1 READ Read the status of carrier present at gate switch.
Table 5-15: V1, Bit Identifiers

Bit # Description Active Logic If Active
1 Carrier Present at load queue BCR 0 Carrier Present
2 Unload Queue #1 full 0 Carrier Present
3 Load queue gate lane #1 1 Gate Closed
4 Module #1 sample queue full* 0 Carrier Present
5 Unload queue gate 1 Gate Closed
6 Load transfer 1 Arm extended
7 Unload transfer 1 Arm extended
8 Indexer Fault/Ready LEDs 1 Ready LED is ON

16 Unload queue #2 full 0 Carrier Present
17 Module #2 sample Queue full* 0 Carrier Present
18 Load queue gate lane #2 1 Gate Closed
24 Indexer Fault/Ready LEDs 1 Ready LED is ON
Note
* - Module numbering for this table is physically from right to left
Solenoid Commands
SOL V1 V2 Value
Purpose This is a low level command that can actuate, retract, or read the control state of a solenoid on the processing
module. This command supplies access to the solenoid control on the Solenoid/DC Driver Board. The
SET_MODULE command indicates the module that the CLI command accesses. This command does not apply to
the sample handler, which uses DIO command to control solenoids.
V1 = solenoid, Table 5-17 for Process Module Solenoids.
V2 = command, Table 5-16.
Example Description
1>SOL 1 SET 1 Actuates solenoid 1, R1 syringe valve.
Table 5-16: V2, Commands

Commands Description
READ Return the current value of the solenoid.

Returns:
0 = off
1 = on
SET value Set solenoid to value.

Value:
0 = off
1 = on
Table 5-17: V1, Solenoid Identifiers

Solenoid Active
Description If Active Notes
# Logic
0 Sample Pipettor Syringe Valve 1 Opens valve
1 R1 Pipettor Syringe Valve 1 Opens valve
2 R2 Pipettor Syringe Valve 1 Opens valve
3 R1 Wash Cup Valve 1 Opens valve
4 R2 Wash Cup Valve 1 Opens valve
5 STAT Syringe Valve 1 Opens valve i 2000 SR only
9 Wash Zone #1, Dispense Valve #1 1 Opens valve
12 Wash Zone #1, Waste Valve 1 Opens valve
16 Wash Zone #2, Waste Valve 1 Opens valve
17 Trigger Dispense Valve 1 Opens valve
18 Trigger Waste Valve 1 Opens valve
19 Pre-Trigger Dispense Valve 1 Opens valve
20 Pre-Trigger Waste Valve 1 Opens valve
24 Transfer Pump Enable 0 Start pump
25 Transfer Pump Direction 1 Pump into onboard reservoir
30 Wash Zone #1, Vacuum Vessel 1 Apply vacuum
31 Wash Zone #2, Vacuum Vessel 1 Apply vacuum
32 RV Load Diverter Shutter 1 No longer contends with RV Load Diverter
34 STAT Diverter 1 Diverts and opens shutter i 2000 SR only
35 Wash Zone #1, Drain Vacuum Vessel 1 Allow vacuum vessel to drain
37 Wash Zone #2, Drain Vacuum Vessel 1 Allow vacuum vessel to drain
38 Reagent Pipettors, Vacuum Vessel 1 Apply vacuum
39 Reagent Pipettors, Drain Vacuum 1 Allow vacuum vessel to drain

Vessel
41 Buffamatic Valve 1 Allows buffer to be transferred
42 RV Load Diverter 1 Divert from staging lane to processing

lane
43 Waste- Main Liquid Air Separator 1 Drain liquid waste
Fluidics/Pipettors/Wash Zones/LLS Commands

ASPIRATE V1 V2 V3 V4
Purpose This command is used to aspirate the specified volume of liquid from the specified well.
Prerequisite SET MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number)
SET_TEST_TYPE STAT_TYPE (only for specific wells on the i 2000 SR, refer to the prerequisite commands
section)
SET_PROTOCOL SAMPLE (or other well, refer to the prerequisite commands section)
V1 = Volume (uL) of liquid to be aspirated (10 - 1200uL)
V2 = Name of the well where the aspiration is to be performed, Table 5-18
V3 = Number of steps to raise the probe before performing a wick-off (0 = no wick-off)
V4 = Depth of probe in liquid while aspirating (z steps)
Example Description
1>SET_PROTOCOL Get 50 uL from the sample cup with no wick-off and go 53 steps into the liquid.
SAMPLE
1>ASPIRATE 50 SAMPLE
0 53
1>SET_TEST_TYPE Get 50 uL from the sample cup at the STAT pipettor with no wick-off and go 53 steps into the liquid.
STAT_TYPE (Valid only for i 2000 SR).
1>SET_PROTOCOL
SAMPLE
1>ASPIRATE 50 SAMPLE
0 53
Note
The Well Names below can have different meanings based on the current protocol setting.
Table 5-18: V2, Well Designations

Well Name Description
RV Reaction Vessel into which the sample and primary assay reagents are dispensed.
WASH_CUP Location where probe washing is executed. Each pipettor has its own wash cup associated with it.
WASTE_CUP Location at which probe liquid waste is dispensed. Each pipettor has its own waste cup associated
with it.
REAGENT_1 The outer reagent bottle location on the outer reagent carousel where the primary assay reagent has
been positioned.
REAGENT_2 The inner reagent bottle location on the outer reagent carousel where the microparticle primary assay
reagent has been positioned.
REAGENT_3 The reagent bottle location on the inner reagent carousel where the conjugate primary assay reagent
has been positioned.
REAGENT_4 The outer reagent bottle location on the outer reagent carousel where a secondary or pretreatment
assay reagent has been positioned.
REAGENT_5 The inner reagent bottle location on the outer reagent carousel where a secondary or pretreatment
assay reagent has been positioned.
REAGENT_6 The reagent bottle location on the inner reagent carousel where a secondary or pretreatment assay
reagent has been positioned.
SAMPLE The location where the sample or STAT Pipettor aspirates sample.
PRETREAT_START Location at which pretreatment reagents and sample are dispensed to initiate a pretreatment step.
PRETREAT_COMPLETE Location at which the pretreatment step has been completed. The pretreated sample is aspirated from
the PRETREAT_COMPLETE location and placed in the RV location to continue normal assay
processing.
PREDILUTE Location into which a multi-RV dilution is initiated,
PREDILUTE_PRETREAT Location into which a pretreatment and predilution are done concurrently.
DISPENSE V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
Purpose This command dispenses the specified volume (uL) into the specified well.
section)
V1 = Volume (uL) of liquid to be aspirated (10 - 1200uL)
V2 = Name of the well where the aspiration is to be performed, Table 5-18
V3 = Number of steps to raise the probe before performing a wick-off (0 = no wick-off)
V4 = Number of steps from the bottom of the specified well to start dispense ( 0)
V5 = Number of steps to raise the boom while performing dispense (0 = do not move)
Example Description
1>SET_PROTOCOL Put 50uL of liquid from the sample pipettor in a RV in processing position 1, 0 wick-off, 400 steps above
SAMPLE bottom, no z travel.
1>DISPENSE 50 RV 0
400 0
1>SET_TEST_TYPE Put 50uL of liquid from the STAT pipettor in an RV in processing position 45, 0 wick-off, 400 steps
STAT_TYPE above bottom, no z travel. (Valid only for i 2000 SR).
1>SET_PROTOCOL
SAMPLE
1>DISPENSE 50 RV 0
400 0
FLUSH_PIPETTER V1
Note
Pipetter is not the Abbott standard spelling, but it is the CLI command.
Purpose This is a high level command that is used to flush a default volume (uL) of buffer through a pipettor, repeatedly
cycling the associated syringe during the buffer flush. This command is allowed on any pipettor. Part of this
command moves the pipettor to the waste cup. Probe crash may occur if module is not in Ready state.
VACUUM ON
V1 = Pipettor (sample = 1, R1 = 2, R2 = 3, STAT = 4 (i 2000 SR only))
Example Description
1>FLUSH_PIPETTER 1 Flush Sample Pipettor
FLUSH_TRIGGER1
Purpose The FLUSH_TRIGGER1 command dispenses to waste the amount of pre-trigger specified by a system file which
defines a default flush.
Example Description
1>FLUSH_TRIGGER1 Flushes pre-trigger
FLUSH_TRIGGER2
Purpose The FLUSH_TRIGGER2 command dispenses to waste the amount of trigger specified by a system file which
defines a default flush.
Example Description
1>FLUSH_TRIGGER2 Flushes trigger
FLUSH_WASHER V1
Purpose The FLUSH_WASHER command dispenses to waste the amount of buffer specified by a system file which defines
a default flush.

V1 = wash zone, 2 = wash zone 1, 3 = wash zone 2.
Example Description
1>FLUSH_WASHER 2 Flushes wash zone 1 on the set module.
2>FLUSH_WASHER 3 Flushes wash zone 2 on the set module.
GET_LLS_DATA V1
Purpose This command retrieves the Liquid Level Sense (LLS) data log from the LLS monitoring hardware. The command
is executed after issuing a LLS ENABLE command. A string of data is output. The values are useful in
troubleshooting LLS errors.
The output consists of 32 values separated by a space. The first line of values of the output are: Minimum,
Average, Maximum, (Maximum-Minimum), (Maximum-Average), (Average-Minimum), Mode, Noise Reading, ADA
Count, and FNF count. The Mode value should be a value 0 through 15. The noise reading is calculated by the
FPGA. For good performance, the noise level value is expected to be less than 1/3 of the threshold value. The
ADA count is the Air During Aspiration count, the value of which will increment if the LLS is enabled and the
probe looses contact with the fluid before the LLS is disabled. The FNF count 0 is the Fluid Not Found counter,
the value of which will increment if the LLS is enabled and then disabled before the LLS detects fluid.
Values 13-31 of the output are data points collected by the 12 bit A/D converter. A value of 2000 to 4095 is output
if the probe is in liquid or near an LLS antenna. The last data value output is one of two special end of data
markers: 65535 = normal end of data, 65534 = overflow of 8K data buffer.
V1 = Pipettor, 0 = sample, 1 = R1, 2 = R2, 3 = STAT.
Example Description
Sequence: Output:
LLS 0 ENABLE
LLS 0 DISABLE 00300 00330 00400 00100 00070 00030 00000 00000 00000 00000
GET_LLS_DATA 0
00333 00333 00335 00335 00333 00333 00336 00331 00332 00334
00333 00327 00323 00327 00325 00328 00334 00337 00337 0334
00336 65534
LLS V1 V2 value
Purpose This is a low level Liquid Level Sense board command set.
V1 = Identifies which Pipettor board to address. Table 5-19

V2 = any level sense command from Table 5-20
Example Description
1>LLS 0 ENABLE Enables LLS mode on sample Pipettor
1>LLS 1 CLR_STATUS Clears the LLS/Event register on the R1 Pipettor.
Table 5-19: V1, Pipettor Board Mechanism

Identification
Pipettor Board # Description
0 Sample Pipettor
1 R1 Pipettor
2 R2 Pipettor
3 STAT Pipettor (i 2000 SR only)
Table 5-20: V2, Level Sense Command

Command Description
ENABLE Enable level sense mode.
DISABLE Disable current mode.
STATUS Retrieve contents of LLS Status/Events register
CLR_STATUS Clears the LLS/Event register.
LLS_LIMIT Enable or disable Z-axis limits interrupt generation to indexer board upon level sense. value: 0 = disable, 1 =
value enable.
Z_LIMIT value Enable or disable Z-axis limit sensor detection and interrupt generation to indexer board upon probe crash.
value: 0 = off, 1 = on.
PASSIVE_WASH V1 V2
Purpose This command is used to perform a passive wash on the sample or STAT probe (i 2000 SR only). This command
positions the probe at the wash or waste cup as specified and dispense the diluent for the volume requested.
SET_TEST_TYPE STAT_TYPE (only on i 2000 SR to wash the STAT pipettor)
V1 = Pump volume to use for each wash cycle (100 uL increments).
V2 = Well, either WASH_CUP or WASTE_CUP.
Example Description
1>PASSIVE_WASH 500 WASH_CUP Pumps 500 uL through the sample probe to the center of the cup.
1>PASSIVE_WASH 300 WASTE_CUP Pumps 300 uL through the sample probe to the outer circle of the cup.
1>SET_TEST_TYPE STAT_TYPE Pumps 500 uL through the STAT probe to the center of the cup.
1>PASSIVE_WASH 500 WASH_CUP
PROBE_MOVE V1 V2
Purpose This command moves the probe arm to align the probe over the specified well at the specified offset from the
calibrated well location. The theta axis may be offset from this fixed position by use of the offset parameter. The
Pipettor that moves is indirectly specified by use of the SET_MODULE and SET_PROTOCOL commands. This
command first moves the probe to the Z-CLEAR position, then moves in the theta axis to the well. The probe is
left at the Z-CLEAR position above the target well.
section)
V1 = Well name, Table 5-18.
V2 = toffset is the number of steps to offset the Theta Boom Arm from the center of the well. 0 = no offset.
Example Description
1>PROBE_MOVE WASH_CUP 10 Moves the probe 10 steps from its wash cup.
1>SET_TEST_TYPE STAT_TYPE Moves the STAT probe 10 steps from its wash cup.
1>SET_PROTOCOL SAMPLE
1>PROB_MOVE WASH_CUP
PROBE_RAISE V1
Purpose This command positions the Z-axis of the specified boom at the height specified by the height parameter. This
command does not change the theta axis of the boom. The probe that moves is indirectly specified by use of the
SET_MODULE and SET_PROTOCOL commands.
section)
V1 = Height, Table 5-21
Example Description
1>PROBE_RAISE Z_ABOVE_WASH Puts probe above the wash cup.
Table 5-21: V1 Height

Height Description
Z_ABOVE_RV Probe at the top of the RV
Z_ABOVE_WASH Probe at the top if the wash cup.
Z_CLEAR Probe clears everything in process area.
Purpose This command dispenses the amount of pre-trigger solution specified by the volume parameter into the RV in the
current process path carousel location.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number).
V1 = volume to dispense in uL (must be an integer multiple of 100uL)
Example Description
1>TRIGGER1_DISPENSE 500 Dispenses 500 uL of pre-trigger into a RV.
Purpose This command dispenses the amount to trigger solution specified by the volume parameter into the RV in the
current process path carousel location.
V1 = volume to dispense in uL (must be an integer multiple of 100uL)
Example Description
1>TRIGGER2_DISPENSE 500 Dispenses 500 uL of trigger into a RV.
WASHER_ASPIRATE V1
Purpose This command aspirates the fluid out of the RVs in the process path that are currently aligned with the wash
zone. Due to the nature of the mechanism, the aspirate is exercised across all positions with aspirate probes in
the wash zone. For Wash Zone 2, this also includes the liquid waste aspirate position. This command includes the
steps to lower the probes, turn on the vacuum, and raise the probes.
VACUUM ON
V1 = Wash Zone, 2 is Wash Zone 1, 3 is Wash Zone 2.
Example Description
1>WASHER_ASPIRATE 2 Aspirates fluid present in RVs under Wash Zone 1.
WASHER_DISPENSE V1 V2 V3
Purpose This command dispenses a volume of fluid into the RV in the process path that is currently aligned with the
specified wash zone dispense nozzle.
V2 = Station, identifies a specific dispense position on a wash station (1, 2, or 3).
V3 = Volume to dispense in uL (must be an integer multiple of 100uL).
Example Description
1>WASHER_DISPENSE 2 3 500 Dispenses 500uL of fluid from probe 3 on Wash Zone 1.
WASHER_MOVE V1 V2
Purpose This command moves the washer probe assembly to the specified position.
V2 = Position, specifies the calibrated washer position to move to. See Table 5-22.
Example Description
1>WASHER_MOVE 2 START Moves wash zone 1 probes to the aspiration start level.
Table 5-22: V2 Position

Position Description
BOTTOM Wash probes at aspiration stop level (RV bottom).
PARK Wash probes above RV.

START Wash probes at aspiration start level.
Optics Commands
CMIA_READ V1
Purpose This command performs a complete CMIA assay read. This command includes moving the shutter, turning on the
PMT, background read, Trigger dispense, signal read, and turning off the PMT. The Trigger dispense volume may
be set to 0 to inhibit the Trigger dispense during read.
V1 = Volume of Trigger dispensed in uL (must be in increments of 100 uL and 0).
Example Description
1>CMIA_READ 500 Dispenses 500 uL of trigger and reads signal.
1>CMIA_READ 0 Dispenses no trigger and reads signal.
OPTICS V1
Purpose This command allows for low level control over the functions on the CMIA optics reader board.
V1 = Command. See Table 5-23.
Example Description
1>OPTICS PMT 1 Turns on high voltage to optics for optics read.
Table 5-23: V1 Commands

Command Description
PMT value Turn the PMT high voltage on/off. value: 0 = off, 1 = on
START Start a read sequence. Clears the read counter and the latch. This command should be issued first to start a read
sequence.
STATUS Retrieve board status:
Returns the following:
PMT high voltage status, where 0 is off, 1 is on.

Mode status where, I = ISA clock mode, N = normal mode, F = Factory test mode.
Blue LED value, with range of -32768 to +32767
Pass LED status, where 0 is off, 1 is on.
READ V1 V2
Purpose This command executes an optics read by taking the specified number of subreads at the specified read interval.
Then the command returns the subread count values at the conclusion of execution. Prior to executing this
command, separate commands should be issued to close the shutter and turn on the PMT high voltage.
V1 = Interval, time interval between subreads (integer number of msec) (50-3000).
V2 = Numreads, number of subreads to take (1-200).
Example Description
1>READ 100 Reads 5 subreads at every 100 msec. Returns 8 characters/ value, each separated by a single space. For
5 example:
01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567
SHUTTER_MOVE V1
Purpose This command moves the shutter to a specified station.
V1 = Station, see Table 5-24.
Example Description
1>SHUTTER_MOVE CLOSE Moves shutter up around RV.
Table 5-24: V1 Station

STATION DESCRIPTION
CLOSE Shutter closed (RV captured).
OPEN Shutter opened.
EXTEND Shutter extended further open for removal.
Note
May need to be manually re-inserted into process path slots.
Reagent Carousel Commands
DISPERSION V1
Purpose This command can activate or deactivate the dispersion of micro-particles on the reagent carousel. Once
dispersion is activated, it continues indefinitely until deactivated.
V1 = Command, ON = activate, OFF = deactivate.
Example Description
1>DISPERSION ON Activates dispersion ring on reagent carousel.
REAGENT_RING_MOVE V1 V2 V3
Purpose This command allows movement of a specified reagent carousel ring to a specified location, at a specified station.
V1 = Reagent ring ID, 1 = outer, 2 = middle, 3 = inner.
V2 = Locnum, Carousel location number (0 = deadwedge, or 1-25).
V3 = Station, See Table 5-25.
Example Description
1>REAGENT_RING_MOVE 2 7 BARCODE Moves the middle reagent rings position 7 to the reagent bar code reader station.

Station Description
BARCODE Reagent pack bar code reader.
PIPE1 Pipetting station (R1 access).
PIPE2 Pipetting station (R2 access - valid for only ring 1 on the i 2000; valid for rings 1-3 on the i 2000 SR).
LOAD Center of the reagent bottle access area.
SET_REAGENT_BOTTLE V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
Purpose This command identifies which type of reagent bottle is currently loaded into the specified reagent ring and
reagent carousel location. This information is needed in order to establish the necessary data (i.e. HVR table, Top
of bottle, Bottom of bottle) for a subsequent ASPIRATE command out of one of the reagent wells.
V1 = Reagent ring ID, 1 = outer, 2 = middle, 3 = inner.

V2 = Carousel location number (1-25).
V3 = Reagent bottle type, Table 5-26.
V4 = Current fill volume of reagent in bottle (real number in mL 0.0)
V5 = Non-usable volume of reagent in bottle (real number in mL 0.0)
Example Description
1>SET_REAGENT_BOTTLE Tell the instrument that there is a Medium sized reagent bottle on the inner carousel at position 7,
3 7 B 15.0 1.5 with 15 mL of reagent in it, with a dead volume of 1.5 mL.
Table 5-26: V3 Reagent bottle type

Reagent bottle type Description
A Small Reagent Bottle (25 mL capacity),
B Medium Reagent Bottle (32-mL capacity).
C Large Reagent Bottle (60-mL capacity).
Process Path Commands
PROC_PATH V1
Purpose This command moves the process path carousel V1 positions relative to its current position in the counter
clockwise direction.
V1 = The number of carousel locations to move (1-112).
Example Description
1>PROC_PATH 6 Moves the process path 6 positions counter clockwise.
PROC_PATH_MOVE V1 V2
Purpose This command moves the process carousel location specified by V1 to the location specified by V2. The process
path only moves in the counter clockwise direction.
Prerequisite: SET_MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number).
V1 = Carousel location number (1-112)

V2 = Station, see Table 5-27.
Example Description
1>PROC_PATH_MOVE 4 ACCESS Moves the #4 position counter clockwise to the access door.

Process Path
Position
Station Description Notes
i 2000 i 2000 SR
ACCESS Access port to processing lane 28 28
CMIA CMIA optical read and trigger addition station 98 98
ITV1 Vortexing station 3 3
ITV2 Vortexing station n/a 49 i 2000 SR

only
ITV3 Vortexing station 72 72
ITV4 Vortexing and pre-trigger addition station 94 94
PRETREAT Pre-Treated Sample pipetting station 24 24
REAGENT1 Reagent 1 pipetting station 2 2
RV_LOAD RV load position (Bypass for position 1) 1 1
RV_STAT RV STAT position n/a 47 i 2000 SR

only
RV_UNLOAD RV unload position 109 109
RV_XFER Point where RVs are loaded from the RV Loader onto the inner 46 45
process path
SAMPLE Sample pipetting station at position 1 1 1
STAT_SAMPLE Sample pipetting station at STAT position n/a 47 i 2000 SR

only
TEMP_PROBE1 Temperature probe insertion position 1 11 80
TEMP_PROBE2 Temperature probe insertion position 2 11 80
WASH2_1 Wash Station 2 Position 1 64 64

WASH2_BP Wash Station 2 Bypass 60 60
WASTE Liquid waste aspiration 100 100
Software Commands
BOOT_DIAGS
Purpose This command is used to execute a sequence of boot diagnostics and initializations on the following
subassemblies:
CPU Board
Motor Indexer Boards
Solenoid / DC Motor Driver Board (Assay Module only)
Optics / Digital I/O Board (Assay Module only)
LLS /PM Boards (Assay Module only)
Temperature Controller Board (Assay Module only)
Reagent Bar Code Reader (Assay Module only)
Load Queue Bar Code Reader (Sample Handler only)
Sample Queue Bar Code Reader (Sample Handler only)
Each subassembly on the associated module is tested and reinitialized. The results of each test are reported in
the command output, as PASS or FAIL. Note that this command may require up to one minute to complete its
execution. Also note that this command leaves all subassemblies in their bootup initialization state. All tested
subassemblies may require further initialization prior to use.
Example Description
1>BOOT_DIAGS After about one minute, a list of subassemblies, with a PASS or FAIL associated with it, is printed.
CLEAR_LOG V1
Purpose This command clears all entries from the specified log.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number - only required for logs specific to a
processing module or sample handler)
V1 = Log, See Table 5-28.
Example Description
1>CLEAR_LOG LLS Clears all entries from the LLS log.
Table 5-28: V1 Log

Log Description
ASSAY Assay activity log for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
CAL Assay calibration log. One assay calibration log is maintained for the entire system. All assay calibrations for all
modules are contained in one log.
HISTORY Permanent message history log. One message history log is maintained for the entire system, independent of how
many modules are configured.
LAS Lab Automation System log. One LAS log is maintained for the entire system, independent of how many modules are
configured.
LLS Liquid Level Sense log for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
MAINT Maintenance History log. One maintenance history log is maintained for the entire system, independent of how many
modules are configured.
OPTICS Logs the optics read for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
QC QC log. One QC log is maintained for the entire system, independent of how many modules are configured.
PM Pressure Monitoring log for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
POST Power On Self Test log for a module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
RESULT Result log. One result log is maintained for the entire system. All test patient, control, and calibrator test results for all
modules are contained in one log.
SAMPLE Sample log to record all the significant events associated with sample management.
SCRIPT Contains detailed information from performance of M&D procedures. Information includes some screen text and all
CLI commands and responses to CLI commands within M&D procedures.
TEMP Temporary Message log. Logs the most recent events that have been generated.
TRACE Trace log for a module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
WAM Wash Aspirate Mechanism log. One WAM log is maintained for each module.
GET_LOG V1 V2
Purpose This command extracts the data from the specified log into a text file. The log is placed in the file specified by the
file parameter.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number - only required for logs specific to a
processing module or sample handler).
V1 = Log, See Table 5-28.
V2 = File, name of file on the SCC (including path) into which the assay log is to be placed.
Example Description
1>GET_LOG LLS A:\LLS.LOG Copies the LLS log to the floppy disk in drive A:\ to a file called LLS.LOG.
1>GET_LOG HISTORY Copies the HISTORY log to the location LOGS\00001HIS.LOG on the D:\
D:\LOGS\00001HIS.LOG drive.
reserved.
Field Updates are distributed in ISA EDOC-022 current version. See History Report for change listing. Developed by GSS ePublishing. Abbott Service and Support Information • Copyright 2015 • Abbott
Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL 60064. All rights reserved. Trademark references listed in the ISA and TSB databases. Procedure Database control number DA-S00787 current version.

M & D Search Criteria Revision Date --- 2/2/2012
UsedOn: Procedure Number:
c16000
c4000 Description:
c8000
i1000SR Scope:
i2000

User: Type: Software Category:
Version:
ADMIN Diagnostics 2.6/3.1x As Needed
CSC Maintenance 3.0 Bar Code Readers
FSE 4.0x Carousels
Operator 5.0x Daily
5.1x Fluidics Wash

988 Record(s) returned.
= Click to sort
UsedOn Software Procedure User Type // Module Category Status Scope Option Time Special Tools
Description Module// Number
Version
i2000 5.0x 1005 Optics Test CSC Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Stopped, CMIA Reader is tested with low none 5
i2000 or 4 Temperature Ready, level commands. Twenty sets of
Warming reads are taken at 3 different delay
times. If any reads are zero the
test fails.
test fails.
test fails.
test fails.
i2000 5.0x 1020 Optics Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Ready, Note 10 min none
Background i2000 or 4 Temperature Warming Verify that the covers are
closed and that the
sensors are not bypassed
prior to running this
procedure.
Three background readings are

taken during this procedure. One
with no RV in position, the second
with an empty RV and the third
with Pre-Trigger solution in the
RV.
Normalization and linearity
parameters are not used during
this procedure. Raw counts must
be between 3 RLU - 500 RLU.
closed and that the
procedure.

RV.
closed and that the
procedure.
RV.
closed and that the
procedure.

RV.
i2000 5.0x 1030 Shutter Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Stopped, The shutter moves to three Normal shutter 1 min none
i2000 or 4 Temperature Ready, positions during this procedure, test
Warming Closed, Open and Extended, to (open/close)
verify correct operation. Extended
shutter test
(open/
close/extend)
Extend shutter
(This option
leaves the PM
in a stopped
state at
completion)
shutter test
(open/
close/extend)
Extend shutter
(This option
leaves the PM
in a stopped
state at
completion)
shutter test
(open/
close/extend)
Extend shutter
(This option
leaves the PM
in a stopped
state at
completion)
shutter test
(open/
close/extend)
Extend shutter
(This option
leaves the PM
in a stopped
state at
completion)
i2000 5.0x 1040 Optics FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Ready, P-44 1040 CMIA OPTICS 75 min Optics Normalization Solution (7-
Normalization i2000 or 4 Temperature Warming Normalization 92513-01)
To calibrate a new CMIA reader Normalization solution may be
after installation. Aliquots of stored at -10° C or colder for a
diluted Total T3 Conjugate (optics period of 12 months. It may be
normalization solution) are thawed and refrozen twice. Once
dispensed into RVs. Pre-Trigger thawed, Normalization solution will
and Trigger are then added and remain stable for 7 days at 2-8° C
RLU values are read. (35.6-46.4° F).
Normalization and Linearity
Factors are calculated and their
values are written into the
database.
database.
database.
i2000 5.0x 1045 Optics FSE Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Ready, To verify the optics CMIA reader is 30 min Optics Verifier Kit
Verification i2000 or 4 Temperature Warming working as expected.
Normalization and linearity factors
are verified by taking five reads
from the three levels of optics
normalization solution and
comparing the reads to the
standard. The three reads taken
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
attomoles. Background levels are
also verified.
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
also verified.
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
also verified.
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
also verified.
i2000 5.0x 1100 Pipettor Test Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, Pipettors move through their full Sample 2 min none
i2000 or 4 Ready, range during this procedure. pipettor
Warming R1pipettor
R2 pipettor
All
End testing
Warming R1pipettor
R2 pipettor
All
End testing
Warming R1pipettor
R2 pipettor
All
End testing
Warming R1pipettor
R2 pipettor
All
End testing
i2000 2.2x 1102 Robotics Test FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, This procedure provides robotic Wash Zone Variable
Tool i2000 or 4 Ready, control for the wash zones, valves, Motors,
Warming CMIA reader, temperature data, Syringe
reagent bar code reader, process Pumps and
path, carousels, pipettors, sensors Valves On/Of
and pumps. Control
Pumps
Warning: This procedure will CMIA Reader,
enable the user to move pumps Heater On/Off
and motors. Conditions could exist and
for the movement of fluids. Be Temperature
aware that this fluid could cause Readings
damage to the processing module. Reagent
Carousel and
Bar Code
Reader
Process Path
and Reagent
Carousel
Pipettor, LLS
and PM
Read Fluid
Level and
Door Sensors
Vortexer Test
at Various
Speeds
RV Loader
Home and
Sensor Read
36 volts
On/Off
Exit
Sub Option
i2000 5.0x 1111 Sample Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, Sample probe position is set for all 7 min Lint-free tissue
Calibration i2000 or 4 Ready, positions required for aspirating Deionized water
Warming and dispensing specimens during RSH/SSH:
processing. Positions are set for Sample carrier
Sample Carriers, or LAS Sample Carrier calibration tool (7-76347-
Carousel, Wash station, RV1 and 01)
RV 24. i2000 LAS:
Probe straightness is determined. LAS sample carousel
In addition on an i2000SR LAS the LAS carousel calibration tool
sample and STAT pipettor probes (Alignment kit 7-90816-01)
move over the LAS track allowing i2000SR LAS:
you to observe probe positioning. Pipettor calibration tool
SH bar code tool
RV 24. i2000 LAS:
SH bar code tool
RV 24. i2000 LAS:
SH bar code tool
RV 24. i2000 LAS:
SH bar code tool
i2000 5.0x 1112 R1 Pipettor Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, R1 probe position is set for all 7 min Cotton swab
Calibration // or 4 Ready, positions required for aspirating Deionized water
i2000 Warming and dispensing reagents with the
R1 pipettor during processing.
Probe straightness is determined.
Positions are set for Wash station,
RV2, Inner and Outer reagent
Carousels.
Carousels.
Carousels.
Carousels.
i2000 5.0x 1113 R2 Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, R2 probe position is set for all 7 min Cotton swab
Warming and dispensing reagents with the
RV71 and Inner reagent carousel.
i2000 5.0x 1115 Wash Station FSE Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, Sample, R1 and R2 probe 3 min Lint free tissue dampened with
Pre-alignment i2000 or 4 Ready, positions are set for the wash water
Warming station positions required for
flushing the system.
i2000 5.0x 1118 LAS Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 0 As Needed Stopped, To visually align the sample Variable LAS pipettor calibration tool
Calibration LAS Ready, pipettor with the LAS track. (alignment kit 07-90816-01)
Warming SH bar code tool (LN6E69)
i2000 5.0x 1120 Sample Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, (c 8000 only) 10 min Cuvette Segment Robocal
Calibration i2000 or 4 Ready This procedure determines the alignment Tool (LN 2J93-01)
position of calibration targets in Carrier Calibration Tool (LN5E13-
relation to the home position of the 01)
sample pipettor
sample pipettor
sample pipettor
sample pipettor
i2000 5.0x 1150 Probe CSC Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Ready, The pipettor moves the probe to Sample 10 min none
Alignment Test i2000 or 4 Warming individual locations during this pipettor
procedure, allowing visual R1pipettor
observation of the probe position R2 pipettor
in the wash cup and process path. All pipettors
End testing
End testing
End testing
End testing
i2000 5.0x 1155 Probe Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, The wash cup target is used to 2 min Cotton swab
Straightness Test i2000 or 4 Ready, measure the straightness of the Deionized water
Warming probe during this procedure.
i2000 5.0x 1160 Pipettor Move Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, The Sample pipettor moves to the 1 min none
i2000 or 4 Ready, wash station to provide easy
Warming access to the probe. On
completion, the pipettor moves to
the park position.
the park position.
the park position.
the park position.
i2000 5.0x 1170 Wash Station Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Stopped, Tests wash station function. Buffer R1 Pipettor 1 min none
Test i2000 or 4 Wash Ready, is pumped though selected wash R2 Pipettor
Warming stations and the operator is Both pipettors
prompted to visually observe that End testing
the appropriate wash station is
active.
active.
active.
active.
i2000 5.0x 1240 Particle Capture CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, Microparticles are dispensed into 30 min Microparticle bottle from Reagent
All WZ i2000 or 4 Wash Warming 30 RVs during this procedure. The Kit (once the microparticle bottle is
first fifteen are controls and are not used for this procedure the kit
washed. The next three are should no longer be used)
spacers between the controls and
washed particles. The last fifteen
are test samples and are washed
at both wash zones. The RVs are
removed from the RV access and
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
The washed RVs should have a
visible brown microparticle pellet
on the side of the RV wall and no
fluid. The RVs that are not washed
should have visible microparticles
and 50 µL of fluid.
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
WZ 1 i2000 or 4 Wash Warming 30 RVs during this procedure. The Kit (once the microparticle bottle is
at wash zone 1. The RVs are
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
and 50 µL of fluid
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
and 50 µL of fluid
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
and 50 µL of fluid
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
and 50 µL of fluid
i2000 5.0x 1245 Visual Particle CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, Microparticles are dispensed into Select: 17 min Microparticle bottle from Reagent
Capture Check i2000 or 4 Wash Warming 15 RVs during this procedure. The Kit (once the microparticle bottle is
microparticles are washed so that Wash Zone 1 used for this procedure the kit is
5 RVs are washed with only probe Wash Zone 2 no longer used)
1, 5 RVs with only probe 2 and 5
RVs with only probe 3. RVs are
moved to the RV access door for
removal and visual inspection.
i2000 5.0x 1251 Residual FSE Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, Fifteen numbered and weighed 13 min Gravimetric Balance
Volume WZ 1 i2000 or 4 Wash Warming RVs are loaded by the user during
this procedure. Wash Buffer is
dispensed into then aspirated out
of the RVs. After aspiration the
user removes and reweighs the
RVs to determine residual volume.
The difference between the
weights for each RV is determined.
This average difference should be
<9 µL (mg) and a S.D. <2 µL (mg).
Visual inspection: (No special

tools required)
The fluid remaining in the RVs
may be used as a qualitative
visual indication of Wash Zone
function. The final RV should have
approximately 2 drops in the
bottom and no evidence of
splashing in the RV.

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)
RVs to determine residual
volume.The difference between
the weights for each RV is
determined. This average
difference should be <9 µL (mg)
and a S.D. <2 µL (mg).

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)
i2000 5.0x 2001 Sample Pipettor Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, The sample pipettor aspirates and 50 10 min Saline
Check i2000 or 4 Warming dispenses either a single 50 µL or 250 Calibrated manual pipettor
5 dispenses of 50uL of saline into (capable of pipetting 50uL or
5 RVs. The user is instructed to 250uL)
use a calibrated pipettor to RSH/SSH
dispense 50 µL or 250uL of saline Sample carrier
into an empty RV to be used as a Sample cup
reference. The user removes the i2000 LAS
RVs from the RV access door and LAS sample carousel
compares the amount of saline sample cup
dispensed by the sample pipettor i2000SR LAS
to the reference. sample tube
5 dispenses of 50 µL of saline into (capable of pipetting 50µL or
5 RVs. The sample pipettor also 250µL and 900µL)
dispenses 1000 µL of buffer from RSH/SSH
the pump (bypassing the syringe) Sample carrier
into 5 RVs. The user is instructed Sample cup
to use a calibrated pipettor to i2000 LAS
dispense 50 µL or 250 µL of saline LAS sample carousel
into an empty RV and 900 µL of sample cup
saline into a second RV to be i2000SR LAS
used as a reference. The user sample tube
removes the RVs from the RV
access door and compares the
amount of saline dispensed by the
sample pipettor to the reference.
i2000 5.0x 2002 R1 Pipettor Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, The R1 pipettor aspirates and 50 10 min Saline
Check i2000 or 4 Warming dispenses either a single 50 µL or 250 WZ probe maintenance water
5 dispenses of 50uL of saline into bottle
5 RVs. The user is instructed to Calibrated manual pipettor
use a calibrated pipettor to (capable of pipetting 50 µL or
dispense 50 µL or 250uL of saline 250uL)
into an empty RV to be used as a
reference. The user removes the
RVs from the RV access door and
compares the amount of saline
dispensed by the R1 pipettor to
the reference.
5 dispenses of 50 µL of saline into bottle
5 RVs. The R1 pipettor also Calibrated manual pipettor
dispenses 1000 µL of buffer from (capable of pipetting 50µL or
the pump (bypassing the syringe) 250µL and 900µL)
into 5 RVs. The user is instructed
to use a calibrated pipettor to
dispense 50 µL or 250 µL of saline
into an empty RV and 900 µL of
saline into a second RV to be
used as a reference. The user
the reference.
the pump (bypassing the syringe) 250µLand 900µL)
i2000 5.0x 2004 Pre-Trigger Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, Either a single 100 µL dispense or 100 10 min Saline
Check i2000 or 4 Warming 3 dispenses of 100 µL of Pre- 300 Calibrated manual pipettor
Trigger is dispensed into 5 RVs. (capable of pipetting 100µL or
The user is instructed to use a 300µL )
calibrated pipettor to dispense 100
µL or 300ul of saline into an empty
RV to be used as a reference. The
user removes the RVs from the
RV access door and compares the
amount of Pre-Trigger dispensed
by the Pre-Trigger /Trigger
manifold to the reference.
i2000 5.0x 2005 Trigger Check Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, Either a single 300 µL dispense or 300 10 min Saline
i2000 or 4 Warming 3 dispenses of 300 µL of Trigger is 900 Calibrated manual pipettor
dispensed into 5 Rvs. The user is (capable of pipetting 300 µL or
instructed to use a calibrated 900uL)
pipettor to dispense 300 µL or
900ul of saline into an empty RV
to be used as a reference. The
amount of Trigger dispensed by
the Pre-Trigger /Trigger manifold
to the reference.
to the reference.
to the reference.
to the reference.
i2000 5.0x 2006 Wash Zone 1 Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, Either a single 400 µL dispense or 400 10 min Saline
Check i2000 or 4 Warming 3 dispenses of 400uL of buffer is 1200 Calibrated manual pipettor
dispensed into 15 Rvs (5 RVs per (capable of pipetting 400 µL or
wash zone nozzle). The user is 1200 µL)
instructed to use a calibrated
1200uL of saline into an empty RV
amount of buffer dispensed by
wash zone 1 to the reference.
wash zone nozzle). The user is 1200uL)
i2000 5.0x 2010 Wash Station CSC Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Precision Stopped, This procedure visually checks the none 3 min 10mL graduated cylinder or tube
Check i2000 or 4 Ready, dispensing precision and accuracy
Warming of the R1 and R2 wash stations.
i2000 5.0x 2021 Sample Pipettor CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 5 min Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric i2000 or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of the Tap water
sample pipettor by gravimetric RSH/SSH
measurement. Fifteen RVs are Sample carrier
weighed empty and weighed again Sample cup
after 50 µL of buffer is dispensed. i2000 LAS
The operator then calculates the LAS sample carousel
difference. The final result must be sample cup
between 46 µL (mg) and 51 µL i2000SR LAS
(mg) and the CV must be 1.0%. Sample tube

tools required)
The fluid in the RVs may be used
as a qualitative visual indication of
Pipettor function. The final volume
should be approximately 50 µL.
Gravimetric i2000 or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of the Tap water or saline
measurement. Liquid is aspirated Sample carrier
and dispensed into 20 pre- Sample cup
weighed RVs. 50 µL of tap water i2000 LAS
or saline is aspirated and LAS sample carousel
dispensed into the first 15 RVs. sample cup
1000 µL of buffer is dispensed into i2000SR LAS
the last 5 RVs (bypassing the Sample tube
syringe). RVs are weighed empty
and weighed again after liquid is
dispensed. The operator then
calculates the difference.
For the first 15 RVs, The final

result must be between 46 µL (mg)
and 51 µL (mg) and the CV must
be less than or equal to 1.0%.
For the last 5 RVs, each result

must be greater than or equal to
900 µL (mg).
Visual inspection: Perform

diagnostic procedure 2001 Sample
Pipettor Check.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.

900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.
i2000 5.0x 2022 R1 Pipettor CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 5 min Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric i2000 or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of the R1 WZ probe maintenance water
pipettor by gravimetric bottle (LN06E68)
measurement. Fifteen RVs are Tap water
weighed empty and weighed again
after 50 µL of buffer is dispensed.
The operator then calculates the
difference. The final result must be
between 46 µL (mg) and 51 µL
(mg) and the CV must be
1.0%.

tools required)
measurement. Liquid is aspirated Tap water or saline
and dispensed into 20 pre-
weighed RVs. 50 µL of liquid is
aspirated and dispensed into the
first 15 RVs. 1000 µL of liquid is
dispensed into the last 5 RVs
(bypassing the syringe). RVs are
after liquid is dispensed. The
operator then calculates the
difference.
For the first 15 RVs, the final result

must be between 46 µL (mg) and
51 µL (mg) and the CV must be
less than or equal to 1.0%.

900 µL (mg).

diagnostic procedure 2002 R1
Pipettor Check.
difference.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.
difference.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.
(mg) and the CV must be 1.0%.

tools required)
pipettor function. The final volume
weighed RVs. 50 µL of tap water
or saline is aspirated and
dispensed into the first 15 RVs.
1000 µL of buffer is dispensed into
the last 5 RVs (bypassing the


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.

900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.
i2000 5.0x 2024 Pre-Trigger CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 3 min Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric i2000 or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of Pre-
Trigger by gravimetric
measurement. Fifteen RVs are
after 100 µL of Pre-Trigger is
calculates the difference. The final
be 1.0%.

tools required)
Pre-Trigger function. The final
volume should be approximately
100 µL.
be 1.0%.

tools required)
100 µL.
be 1.0%.

tools required)
100 µL.
be 1.0%.

tools required)
100 µL.
i2000 5.0x 2025 Trigger CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 3 min Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric i2000 or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of Trigger
by gravimetric measurement.
Fifteen RVs are weighed empty
and weighed again after 300 µL of
Trigger is dispensed. The operator
then calculates the difference. The
final result must be between
285 µL (mg) and 315 µL (mg) and
the CV must be 1.0%.

tools required)
Trigger function. The final volume

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)
i2000 5.0x 2026 Wash Zone 1 CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 3 min Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric i2000 or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of wash
zone 1 by gravimetric
after 400 µL of buffer is
result must be between 360 µL
(mg) and 440 µL (mg) and the CV
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
Wash Zone 1 function. The final
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
i2000 5.0x 2050 WZ Aspiration Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, This procedure tests wash zone Wash Zone 1 10 min none
Test i2000 or 4 Wash Warming aspiration. Buffer is dispensed into (WZ1)
3 RVs. The operator is instructed Wash Zone 2
to remove the RVs and determine (WZ2)
if the RV is half full of buffer.
Buffer is dispensed into and then
aspirated 10 times during this
procedure.
CSC logon or higher, the

procedure dispenses into the last
three RVs and aspirates fluid and
then aspirates air. The
temperature of the thermistors is
captured and displayed.
procedure.

procedure.

procedure.

i2000 8.0x 2055 2055 WZ Valve FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, The pressure is measured in the Wash zone 1 12 min none
Pressure Check i2000 or 4 Wash Warming wash zone manifold tubing to test Wash zone 2
for highly restictive valves.
i2000 5.0x 2110 Syringes and Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Syringes/ Ready, Operation of all pumps, syringes Select: 1 min none
Pumps Test i2000 or 4 Pumps Warming and sensors is verified during this
procedure. User selects the Pumps
specific pump(s) or syringe(s) to Syringes
test. End Testing
If Pumps, select
group:
Trigger/Pre-
Trigger
Buffer
Wash Zones
All
If Trigger/Pre-Trigger:
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
If Wash Buffer:
R1 Wash cup
R2 Wash Cup
Sample Probe
R1 Probe
R2 Probe
All
If Wash Zone:
WZ1
WZ2
Both (WZ1
and WZ2)
If Syringes(s):
Sample
R1
R2
All
test. End Testing
If Pumps, select
group:
Trigger/Pre-
Trigger
Buffer
Wash Zones
All
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
If Wash Buffer:
R1 Wash cup
R2 Wash Cup
Sample Probe
R1 Probe
R2 Probe
All
If Wash Zone:
WZ1
WZ2
Both (WZ1
and WZ2)
If Syringes(s):
Sample
R1
R2
All
test. End Testing
If Pumps, select
group:
Trigger/Pre-
Trigger
Buffer
Wash Zones
All
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
If Wash Buffer:
R1 Wash cup
R2 Wash Cup
Sample Probe
R1 Probe
R2 Probe
All
If Wash Zone:
WZ1
WZ2
Both (WZ1
and WZ2)
If Syringes(s):
Sample
R1
R2
All
test. End Testing
If Pumps, select
group:
Trigger/Pre-
Trigger
Buffer
Wash Zones
All
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
If Wash Buffer:
R1 Wash cup
R2 Wash Cup
Sample Probe
R1 Probe
R2 Probe
All
If Wash Zone:
WZ1
WZ2
Both (WZ1
and WZ2)
If Syringes(s):
Sample
R1
R2
All
i2000 5.0x 2130 Flush Fluids Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, Combined Flush procedures for all Operator Logon: 5 min none
i2000 or 4 Warming solutions or individual Flush No Options
procedures for Wash Buffer, Pre- CSC Logon:
Trigger and Trigger are performed Select:
during this procedure.
Pipettors
Note Wash zone
Performing this procedure manifolds
does not reset the clock Pre-
for the automatic flush. Trigger/Trigger
manifold
Note All
To flush buffer, inventory Exit
status must be greater
than 50%
If Pipettors:
Sample
Reagent 1
Reagent 2
All
Exit to main
menu
If Wash zone
manifolds:
Wash zone 1
Wash zone 2
All
Exit to menu
If Pre-Trigger/Tigger
manifold
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
Exit to main
menu
Pipettors
Note Wash zone
manifold
Note All
than 50%
If Pipettors:
Sample
Reagent 1
Reagent 2
All
Exit to main
menu
If Wash zone
manifolds:
Wash zone 1
Wash zone 2
All
Exit to menu
manifold
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
Exit to main
menu
Pipettors
Note Wash zone
manifold
Note All
than 50%
If Pipettors:
Sample
Reagent 1
Reagent 2
All
Exit to main
menu
If Wash zone
manifolds:
Wash zone 1
Wash zone 2
All
Exit to menu
manifold
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
Exit to main
menu
Pipettors
Note Wash zone
manifold
Note All
than 50%
If Pipettors:
Sample
Reagent 1
Reagent 2
All
Exit to main
menu
If Wash zone
manifolds:
Wash zone 1
Wash zone 2
All
Exit to menu
manifold
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
Exit to main
menu
i2000 5.0x 2133 Air Flush Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, Wash Buffer, Trigger and Pre- Wash Buffer 7 min Wash buffer transfer tubing
// or 4 Warming Trigger lines are flushed with air Pre- Empty wash buffer reservoir
i2000 during this procedure. Trigger/Trigger
Wash Buffer,
Pre-Trigger,
Trigger
Buffer input
line
End Testing
Wash Buffer,
Pre-Trigger,
Trigger
Buffer input
line
End Testing
Wash Buffer,
Pre-Trigger,
Trigger
Buffer input
line
End Testing
Wash Buffer,
Pre-Trigger,
Trigger
Buffer input
line
End Testing
i2000 5.0x 2135 Long Term Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Ready, All pumps and fluidic lines are 19 min 5 liter (minimum) container
Shutdown i2000 or 4 Warming flushed with buffer, air, deionized 1 liter (minimum) container)
water and then air. RVs are 12 liter (minimum) container
unloaded during this procedure if Wash buffer transfer tubing (2)
requested by the operator. Wash buffer reservoir
Deionized water
Absorbent tissue water
Deionized water
Deionized water
Deionized water
i2000 5.0x 2151 Prime Wash Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, 100 µL Wash Buffer dispenses 6 min none
Zones // or 4 Warming through the valves into 3 RVs in
i2000 both Wash Zones 1 and 2 during
this procedure.
this procedure.
this procedure.
this procedure.
i2000 5.0x 2152 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, 300 µL Pre-Trigger and 100 µL 5 min none
Trigger and Trigger // or 4 Warming Trigger solutions dispense into two
i2000 RVs at the valves in the dispense
manifold.
i2000 5.1x 2152 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, 300 µL Pre-Trigger and 100 µL 5 min none
i2000 RVs at the valves in the dispense
manifold.
i2000 7.0x 2152 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, 200 µL of Pre-Trigger and Trigger 5 min none
Trigger and Trigger // or 4 Warming solutions dispense into two RVs at
i2000 the valves in the dispense
manifold.
i2000 8.0x 2152 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, 200 µL of Pre-Trigger and Trigger 5 min none
i2000 the valves in the dispense
manifold.
i2000 5.0x 2180 Internal CSC Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, The Wash Buffer fluidics system is 75 min Buffer filter
Decontamination // or 4 Warming decontaminated during this Probe conditioning solution
i2000 procedure. 0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
Wash Buffer preparation
Sodium hypochlorite is pumped containers (2)
into the buffer fluidics and allowed Wash buffer reservoir (clean)
to remain for 10 minutes, Wash buffer transfer tubing (2)
refreshing the solution at 2.5 Concentrated wash buffer 1 L (2)
minute intervals. After 10 minutes
the sodium hypochlorite is pumped
out as waste and buffer is pumped
through the system to clear the
fluidic lines. Following the rinse
with wash buffer the sample and
STAT probes are treated with
ARCHITECT probe conditioning
solution. In addition, during this
procedure the wash buffer
reservoir, inlet tubing and level
sensor are decontaminated.
i2000 5.0x 2182 ARM FSE Maintenance 5 As Needed Stopped, The ARCHITECT ARM accessory 45 min ARM decontamination kit (7-
Decontamination // Ready, is decontaminated during this 78172-01) 0.5% Sodium
SCC Warming procedure hypochlorite
ARM Concentrated wash buffer
(LN06C54)
(LN06C54)
(LN06C54)
(LN06C54)
i2000 5.0x 2185 Wash Buffer Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, Wash Buffer transfers from a 8 min Wash buffer transfer tubing
Unload // or 4 Ready, Processing Module to an external Wash buffer reservoir
i2000 Warming container during this procedure.
i2000 5.0x 3000 Reagent Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Carousels Stopped, Reagent Carousels move and are 2 min none
Carousel Test i2000 or 4 Ready, checked for step loss.
Warming
Warming
Warming
Warming
i2000 5.0x 3115 Vortexer Test Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Reaction Stopped, Vortexer function is tested. The Vortexer # 1 10 min none
i2000 or 4 Mechanisms Ready, vortexers are tested at eight Vortexer # 2
Warming different speeds in up and down Vortexer # 3
positions. All
Speeds tested (RPMs):
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520;
2765; 3034; 3289
positions. All
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520;
2765; 3034; 3289
positions. All
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520;
2765; 3034; 3289
positions. All
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520;
2765; 3034; 3289
i2000 5.0x 3118 Vortexer Splash CSC Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Reaction Ready, This procedure tests splashing of Vortexer # 1 10 min Water based dye, diluted 1:10 with
i2000 or 4 Mechanisms Warming the vortexer. Vortexer # 2 water
Vortexer # 3
Vortexer # 3
Vortexer # 3
Vortexer # 3
i2000 5.0x 3125 Hopper Level Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Stopped, Operation of the RV Hopper level 1 min none
Sensor Test i2000 or 4 Mechanisms Ready, sensor is tested.
Warming
Warming
Warming
Warming
i2000 5.0x 3131 RV Loader Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, A self calibrating RV transport 2 min none
Sensor Calibration i2000 or 4 Ready, sensor board #6 is calibrated. This
Warming includes the drop point sensor,
load point sensor, and the
processing path insertion point
sensor.
Note: To determine if the board is

self calibrating observe the LEDs
located under the RV transport
near the RV sensor board cable. If
the board contains 5 LEDs the
board is self calibrating.
sensor.

sensor.

sensor.

i2000 5.0x 3140 RV CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Ready, All RVs (112) are moved from the 20 min none
Load/Unload Test i2000 or 4 Mechanisms Warming inner to the outer track and
unloaded. After unloading, 112
RVs are loaded into the inner
track.
track.
track.
unloaded. The operator has the
option to have the system load 112
new RVs into the inner track or
leave the process path empty.
i2000 5.0x 3150 Diverter Test Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Reaction Ready, Diverters are moved 10 times. Wash zone 5 min none
i2000 or 4 Mechanisms Warming When testing the RV load diverter RV Unload
or STAT diverter 10 RVs are RV Load
loaded from the inner track to the
outer track and moved to the RV
access door to confirm 10 RVs
were loaded.
were loaded.
were loaded.
were loaded.
i2000 5.0x 3175 Vacuum Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Modules Ready, Operation of the vacuum system, Both Wash 5-13 none
System Test i2000 or 4 Warming vacuum vessels and drain valves Zones min
is tested during this procedure. Individual
Wash Zone
positions
Wash Station
vacuum
vessel
Vacuum
System
Integrity
Run all tests
sequentially
Wash Zone
positions
Wash Station
vacuum
vessel
Vacuum
System
Integrity
Run all tests
sequentially
Wash Zone
positions
Wash Station
vacuum
vessel
Vacuum
System
Integrity
Run all tests
sequentially
Wash Zone
positions
Wash Station
vacuum
vessel
Vacuum
System
Integrity
Run all tests
sequentially
i2000 8.0x 3177 Vacuum FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Ready, This procedure is used to Vacuum Time none
Diagnostics i2000 or 4 Warming troubleshoot the vacuum system. system leak variable
check
Pump integrity
check
Toggle valves
and vacuum
on and off
Vacuum
stress test
Drain vacuum
accumulator
i2000 2.11 3200 Reagent Bar Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, The Reagent bar code reader is Operator Logon: 5 min Reagent kit or Bar code calibration
Code Reader Test i2000 or 4 Readers Ready, tested during this procedure. Only Select: tool
Warming the first 20 characters of each bar
code label are displayed. Read all
Read a
position
CSC Logon:
Additional option
Read "No
Bottle" labels
on back of
carousel
i2000 2.2x 3200 Reagent Bar Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, The Reagent bar code reader is Operator Logon: 5 min Reagent kit or Bar code calibration
Code Reader Test i2000 or 4 Readers Ready, tested during this procedure. Only Select: tool
Read a
position
CSC Logon:
Additional option
Read "No
Bottle" labels
on back of
carousel
i2000 2.11 3210 Reagent Bar Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, Calibration positions for reagent 5 min Requires 2 BARCODE
Code Calibration i2000 or 4 Readers Ready, bottles are defined. CALIBRATION TOOL bottles
Warming (LN06E67-01)
i2000 2.2x 3210 Reagent Bar Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, Calibration positions for reagent 5 min Requires 2 BARCODE
Code Calibration i2000 or 4 Readers Ready, bottles are defined. CALIBRATION TOOL bottles
Warming (LN06E67-01)
i2000 2.11 3212 Reagent BCR FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, This procedure allows the user to None 5 Wash Zone Probe Maintenance
Alignment i2000 or 4 Readers Ready, manually align the reagent bar Water Bottle (LN 06E68)
Warming code reader so that the bar code
reader beam strikes the reagent
bottles vertically.
i2000 2.2x 3212 Reagent BCR FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, This procedure allows the user to None 5 Wash Zone Probe Maintenance
Alignment i2000 or 4 Readers Ready, manually align the reagent bar Water Bottle (LN 06E68)
bottles vertically.
Note: This procedure is only

required for bar code readers with
an adjustable bracket.
i2000 5.0x 3220 SH Bar Code Operator Diagnostics// 0 Bar Code Ready, (SSH only) 2 min Sample Carrier
Calibration SSH Readers Warming Calibration positions for Sample ID
bar codes are defined for the load
queue bar code reader.
i2000 5.0x 3225 LAS Crsl Bar Operator Diagnostics// 0 Bar Code Ready, To calibrate the processing queue 5 min SH bar code tool (LN6E69-01)
Code Calibration LAS Readers Warming bar code reader to the LAS LAS sample carousel
carousel.
carousel.
carousel.
carousel.
i2000 5.0x 3250 SH Bar Code Operator Diagnostics// 0 Bar Code Ready, Load Queue and Processing 5 min SH bar code tool (LN 6E69-01)
Reader Test SSH Readers Warming Queue bar code readers are Sample Carrier
tested.
At the load queue bar code reader
all tube positions and carrier
positions are read. The bar code
width is checked and the beginning
of the bar code label is compared
against the calibration point.
At each processing bar code
reader the sample carrier positions
are read.
tested.
are read.
tested.
are read.
tested.
are read.
i2000 5.0x 3253 Bar Code FSE Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows the Code 39 large 3 min none
Configuration SCC Ready, configuration of additional bar code intercharacter
Warming parameters. gap
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
i2000 5.0x 3255 LAS Crsl Bar Operator Diagnostics// 0 Bar Code Ready, To test the processing queue bar 5 min SH bar code tool (LN 6E69-01) or
Code Reader Test LAS Readers Warming code reader`s ability to read the bar coded sample tubes
LAS sample carousel ID and bar LAS sample carousel
code tubes.
code tubes.
code tubes.
code tubes.
i2000 5.0x 3315 Sample Handler Operator Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, Verify Calibration and Cycle Verify 2-5 Sample carrier
Test SSH Ready, Carriers: This option tests the load Calibration min. SH bar code tool(LN 6E69-01) or
Warming queue and processing queue bar and Cycle bar coded sample tube
code readers, verifies the load Carriers
queue bar code reader calibration cycle Carriers
and cycles carriers to test the
operation of the SSH. This option
should be used for component
replacement verification and SH
installation.
Cycle Carries: - cycles carriers to
test the operation of the SSH. This
option can be used during
troubleshooting.
Pipettor probe position at the
aspiration point (s) can be
observed during both options.
Does not check the LQ BCR Full
Sensor.
installation.
troubleshooting.
Sensor.
installation.
troubleshooting.
Sensor.
installation.
troubleshooting.
Sensor.
i2000 5.0x 3316 Carrier Probe CSC Diagnostics// 0 Modules Ready, (SSH only) 4 min Sample carrier
Alignment Test SSH Warming The pipettor(s) moves the probe to Sample cups
each of the 5 sample carrier
positions during this procedure,
allowing visual observation of the
probe position in the sample cup.
The procedure also verifies the
carrier is present at the following
sensors: Carrier present at lane 1,
Processing module, Carrier at gate
for unload, Carrier at unload
queue
queue
queue
queue
i2000 5.0x 3318 LAS Crsl Probe CSC Diagnostics// 0 Modules Ready, (LAS only). 10 min LAS sample carousel
Alignment Test LAS Warming To move the probe to each sample Bar coded tubes (20)
tube location on the LAS sample
carousel, allowing visual
observation of probe position.
i2000 5.0x 3400 Interlock Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, All interlock sensors for the Waste chute 10 min none
Sensors Test i2000 or 4 Sensors Ready, processing module and the Front
Warming sample handler are checked during processing
this procedure. The user is asked center cover
to open and close covers to Reagent
facilitate testing. carousel cover
Rear
processing
center cover
Processing
Queue access
doors (SSH
only)
LAS carousel
cover (LAS
SH only)
RSH covers
(RSH only)
All
Rear
processing
center cover
Processing
Queue access
doors (SSH
only)
LAS carousel
cover (LAS
SH only)
RSH covers
(RSH only)
All
Rear
processing
center cover
Processing
Queue access
doors (SSH
only)
LAS carousel
cover (LAS
SH only)
RSH covers
(RSH only)
All
Rear
processing
center cover
Processing
Queue access
doors (SSH
only)
LAS carousel
cover (LAS
SH only)
RSH covers
(RSH only)
All
i2000 5.0x 3410 Level Sensors Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, Wash Buffer, Pre-Trigger and Wash buffer 1 min none
Test i2000 or 4 Sensors Ready, Trigger Level Sensors are Pre-Trigger
Warming checked. Trigger
All
All
All
All
i2000 5.0x 3520 Temperature Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, Temperatures in the Processing Process path 1 min none
Status // or 4 Ready, Module are read and their status Trigger & Pre-
i2000 Warming displayed. Trigger
Normal temperature Ranges: Wash Zones
Process path: 36.4° C-37.6° C Cooler
Triggers: 32.0° C-37.6° C Ambient
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C (CSC/FSE
Reagent cooler: 2.0° C-12.0° C logon only)
All
Note
Ambient temperature
is displayed if logged
on as CSC or FSE.
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
pass or fail. The value
is for informational
use only.
All
Note
Ambient temperature
on as CSC or FSE.
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
use only.
All
Note
Ambient temperature
on as CSC or FSE.
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
use only.
All
Note
Ambient temperature
on as CSC or FSE.
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
use only.
i2000 2.1x 3521 Temperature CSC Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, Temperatures in the Processing Process path 1 min none
Status i2000 or 4 Ready, Module are read and their status Trigger and
Warming displayed. Pre-Trigger
Process path: 36.4° C-37.6° C Ambient
Triggers: 32.0° C-37.6° C Reagent
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C Cooler
Reagent cooler: 2.0° C-12.0° C All
Ambient:
15.0C - 30.0C
i2000 5.0x 3530 Temperature Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, RVs containing buffer are 5 min External thermometer (7-77997-01
Check-Manual // or 4 Warming equilibrated in each of the 6 or LN08C94-88)
i2000 process path zones during this WZ probe maintenance water
procedure. Tap water in the WZ bottle (LN 6E68)
probe maintenance water bottle is Tap water
placed in the reagent cooler.
When instructed, the user inserts a
thermometer probe to measure the
temperature. Process path
temperature must be between
36.4° C-37.6° C and reagent
cooler temperature must be
between .0° C-12.0° C.
i2000 5.0x 3600 LLS Test Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, This procedure tests the ability to RV2 6 min WZ probe maintenance water
i2000 or 4 Wash Warming detect liquid in the following RV24 bottle (LN 6E68)
locations: RV2, RV24, reagent R1 at Inner Tap water
carousel, outer, middle, or inner Carousel
ring. R1 at Middle
Carouse
The following locations are also R1 at Outer
tested for an ARCHITECT Carousel
i 2000 SR system: RV 48 R2 at Inner
Carousel
All positions
ring. R1 at Middle
Carouse
Carousel
All positions
ring. R1 at Middle
Carouse
Carousel
All positions
ring. R1 at Middle
Carouse
Carousel
If logged on as FSE and a All positions
Reagent carousel option is
selected, the procedure will allow
the FSE to specify the reagent
bottle location to test.
i2000 5.0x 3610 Sample Handler Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, This procedure tests the ability to High sample 3 min Sample Carrier or carousel
LLS Test i2000 or 4 Wash Warming detect liquid at sample pipettor or volume test Sample Cup(s)
STAT pipettor (i 2000 SR only) Low sample Sample Tube (2)
aspiration point(s). If the system is volume test Tap water
connected to an LAS track the All Tests
procedure will test the aspiration
point at the LAS track. The High
sample volume test will test
1400 µL in a sample cup. The Low
sample volume test will test 50 µL
in a sample cup and 100 µL in a
sample tube. The following LLS
data will be analyzed: noise while
in air, difference between the
average LLS read in air and the
average LLS read in liquid, and
maximum LLS read in air.
i2000 5.0x 3650 Set LAS Gain FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Ready, The LAS gain is set at the LAS i2000sr 7 Sample tube
i2000 or 4 Warming aspiration point. The probe is Sample pipettor
moved to just above the bottom of STAT pipettor
a tube and the LLS is cycled on All
and off. The signal is compared to Exit
a desired LLS A to D value of
3200. The gain setting is stepped
up until either the LLS A to D
value is >3200 or the gain setting
is 99.
is 99.
is 99.
is 99.
i2000 5.0x 3700 Keypad Test Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, L1 - L4 keys and the access 1 min none
i2000 or 4 Ready, indicator light function on the
Warming processing module keypad is
tested during this procedure. The
user is asked to perform
operations to facilitate testing.
Note: The Run, Carousel advance
and Stop keys can not be tested,
i2000 5.0x 3710 Keypad Test Operator Diagnostics // 0 Modules Stopped, (SSH and RSH) 1 min none
SSH Ready, Sample Handler keypad function is
Warming tested during this procedure. The
i2000 5.0x 3710 Keypad Test Operator Diagnostics // 0 Modules Stopped, Sample Handler keypad function is 1 min none
LAS Ready, tested during this procedure. The
Warming user is asked to perform
i2000 5.0x 3800 Pressure Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, To test the operation of the Sample 30 min Required materials depend on the
Monitoring Test i2000 or 4 Wash Warming pressure monitoring boards and Pipettor Per pipettor tested. Materials may
transducers. R1 Pipettor Pipettor include:
R2 Pipettor WZ probe maintenance water
All bottle (LN 06E86)
Sample carrier
Sample tube
Tap water
Sample carrier
Sample tube
Tap water
Sample carrier
Sample tube
Tap water
Sample carrier
Sample tube
Tap water
i2000 5.0x 4050 Buffer Run Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, This procedure allows the 60 min Tap water or saline
i2000 or 4 Warming simulation of running assays using 2 Reagent kits (3 bottles
wash buffer instead of reagents to per kit) - bottles must be
troubleshoot system failures. empty
Sample carriers
Note: You can enter the number Sample cups/tubes
of tests to be run when logged on
as FSE.
Sample carriers
as FSE.
Sample carriers
as FSE.
Sample carriers
as FSE.
i2000 5.0x 4080 Module Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, This procedures allows you to 5 min none
Initialization i2000 or 4 Ready, perform a processing module
Warming initialization with the processing
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
i2000 5.0x 4090 Sample Handler Operator Diagnostics // 0 Modules Stopped, (RSH, SSH and LAS) 2 min none
Initialization SSH, LAS Ready, This procedures allows you to
Warming perform a sample handler
initialization with the sample
handler doors/covers open.
i2000 5.0x 4200 Functional Area Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, Procedure tests the functionality of none Variable
Test i2000 or 4 Ready, the following areas: RV loader,
Warming process path, reagent carousel
and pipettor.
and pipettor.
and pipettor.
and pipettor.
i2000 5.0x 5100 PP & Carousel Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure allows homing of Process Path 1 min none
Motor Tests i2000 or 4 Motors Ready, the following motors: Process path, Outer carousel
Warming outer carousel, inner carousel, Inner carousel
dispersion (middle) carousel, wash Dispersion
zone 1, wash zone 2, shutter, RV carousel
loader wheel (orienter) and RV Wash Zone 1
loader transport. Wash Zone 2
Shutter
RV Orienter
RV Transport
Home All
End Testing
Shutter
RV Orienter
RV Transport
Home All
End Testing
Shutter
RV Orienter
RV Transport
Home All
End Testing
Shutter
RV Orienter
RV Transport
Home All
End Testing
i2000 5.0x 5110 Pipettor & Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure allows homing of Sample 1 min none
Syringe Motor Tests i2000 or 4 Motors Ready, the following motors: Sample pipettor Z
Warming pipettor theta and Z, R1 pipettor Sample
theta and Z, R2 pipettor theta and pipettor Theta
Z, Sample syringe, R1 syringe and R1 pipettor Z
R2 syringe. R1 pipettor
Theta
R2 pipettor Z
R2 pipettor
Theta
Sample
syringe
R1 syringe
R2 syringe
Home all
End Testing
Theta
R2 pipettor Z
R2 pipettor
Theta
Sample
syringe
R1 syringe
R2 syringe
Home all
End Testing
Theta
R2 pipettor Z
R2 pipettor
Theta
Sample
syringe
R1 syringe
R2 syringe
Home all
End Testing
Theta
R2 pipettor Z
R2 pipettor
Theta
Sample
syringe
R1 syringe
R2 syringe
Home all
End Testing
i2000 5.0x 5120 Pump Motor Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure allows homing of Pre-Trigger 1 min none
Tests i2000 or 4 Motors Ready, the following pump motors: Pre- Trigger
Warming Trigger, Trigger, R1 wash station, R1 Wash
R2 wash station, wash zone 1, station
wash zone 2, Sample pipettor, R1 R2 Wash
pipettor and R2 pipettor station
Sample pump
R1 pump
R2 pump
Wash Zone 1
Wash Zone 2
Home all
End Testing
Sample pump
R1 pump
R2 pump
Wash Zone 1
Wash Zone 2
Home all
End Testing
Sample pump
R1 pump
R2 pump
Wash Zone 1
Wash Zone 2
Home all
End Testing
Sample pump
R1 pump
R2 pump
Wash Zone 1
Wash Zone 2
Home all
End Testing
i2000 5.0x 5131 WZ, Wash Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure allows cycling of Select a set of valves: 1 min none
Station, Valve Test i2000 or 4 Sensors Ready, the following valves: Wash Zone
Warming 1, Wash Zone 2, R1 Pipettor wash Wash Zone 1
station and R2 Pipettor wash (WZ1)
station. Wash Zone 2
(WZ2)
Wash stations
End testing
If select Wash Zone 1:
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2 (V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 1 valves
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2(V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 2 valves
If select wash stations:
R1 Wash
stations
R2 Wash
stations
Both Wash
stations
(WZ2)
Wash stations
End testing
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2 (V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 1 valves
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2(V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 2 valves
R1 Wash
stations
R2 Wash
stations
Both Wash
stations
(WZ2)
Wash stations
End testing
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2 (V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 1 valves
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2(V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 2 valves
R1 Wash
stations
R2 Wash
stations
Both Wash
stations
(WZ2)
Wash stations
End testing
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2 (V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 1 valves
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2(V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 2 valves
R1 Wash
stations
R2 Wash
stations
Both Wash
stations
i2000 5.0x 5132 Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure allows cycling of Select a set of valves: 1 min none
Syringe/Vacuum/PT/T i2000 or 4 Sensors Ready, the following valves:
Valve Test Warming Syringe
i 2000 SR/i 2000: Valves
Wash Zone vacuum, Sample, R1 Wash Zone
and R2 Syringes, Trigger and Pre- vacuum
Trigger. valves
Trigger and
Pre-Trigger
valves
End testing
If select Syringe
valves:
Sample
syringe valve
R1 syringe
valve
R2 syringe
valve
All syringe
valves
If select Wash Zone

vacuum valves:
WZ1 vacuum
valve
WZ1 drain
valve
WZ2 vacuum
valve
WZ2 drain
valve
All WZ
vacuum
valves
If select Trigger and

Pre-Trigger values:
Pre-Trigger
dispense
valve (V1)
Pre-Trigger
waste valve
(V2)
Trigger
dispense
valve (V3)
Trigger waste
valve(V4)
All Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
valves
Trigger. valves
Trigger and
Pre-Trigger
valves
End testing
If select Syringe
valves:
Sample
syringe valve
R1 syringe
valve
R2 syringe
valve
All syringe
valves
If select Wash Zone

vacuum valves:
WZ1 vacuum
valve
WZ1 drain
valve
WZ2 vacuum
valve
WZ2 drain
valve
All WZ
vacuum
valves

Pre-Trigger values:
Pre-Trigger
dispense
valve (V1)
Pre-Trigger
waste valve
(V2)
Trigger
dispense
valve (V3)
Trigger waste
valve(V4)
All Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
valves
Trigger. valves
Trigger and
Pre-Trigger
valves
End testing
If select Syringe
valves:
Sample
syringe valve
R1 syringe
valve
R2 syringe
valve
All syringe
valves
If select Wash Zone

vacuum valves:
WZ1 vacuum
valve
WZ1 drain
valve
WZ2 vacuum
valve
WZ2 drain
valve
All WZ
vacuum
valves

Pre-Trigger values:
Pre-Trigger
dispense
valve (V1)
Pre-Trigger
waste valve
(V2)
Trigger
dispense
valve (V3)
Trigger waste
valve(V4)
All Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
valves
Trigger. valves
Trigger and
Pre-Trigger
valves
End testing
If select Syringe
valves:
Sample
syringe valve
R1 syringe
valve
R2 syringe
valve
All syringe
valves
If select Wash Zone

vacuum valves:
WZ1 vacuum
valve
WZ1 drain
valve
WZ2 vacuum
valve
WZ2 drain
valve
All WZ
vacuum
valves

Pre-Trigger values:
Pre-Trigger
dispense
valve (V1)
Pre-Trigger
waste valve
(V2)
Trigger
dispense
valve (V3)
Trigger waste
valve(V4)
All Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
valves
i2000 5.0x 5133 Other Valves & Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure allows cycling of Select: 1 min none
Diverter Test i2000 or 4 Sensors Ready, the following valves:
Warming Wash station
i 2000 SR/i 2000: vacuum valve
Wash station vacuum, liquid air Liquid Air
separator, process path diverters; separator
wash zone diverter, RV Unload valve
solenoid and RV Load diverter. Diverters
End testing
If select Wash station

vacuum valve:
Wash station
vacuum valve
Wash stations
drain valve
Both wash
station
vacuum and
drain valves
If select Liquid air

separator valve:
Separator inlet
valve
Separator
drain valve
Both Separtor
inlet and drain
valves
If select diverters:
RV unload
diverter
RV load
diverter
Wash Zone
diverter
All diverters
solenoids
End testing

vacuum valve:
Wash station
vacuum valve
Wash stations
drain valve
Both wash
station
vacuum and
drain valves

separator valve:
Separator inlet
valve
Separator
drain valve
Both Separtor
inlet and drain
valves
RV unload
diverter
RV load
diverter
Wash Zone
diverter
All diverters
solenoids
End testing

vacuum valve:
Wash station
vacuum valve
Wash stations
drain valve
Both wash
station
vacuum and
drain valves

separator valve:
Separator inlet
valve
Separator
drain valve
Both Separtor
inlet and drain
valves
RV unload
diverter
RV load
diverter
Wash Zone
diverter
All diverters
solenoids
End testing

vacuum valve:
Wash station
vacuum valve
Wash stations
drain valve
Both wash
station
vacuum and
drain valves

separator valve:
Separator inlet
valve
Separator
drain valve
Both Separtor
inlet and drain
valves
RV unload
diverter
RV load
diverter
Wash Zone
diverter
All diverters
solenoids
i2000 5.0x 5220 RV Sensors Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Reaction Stopped, This test loads 1 RV and passes it Select: 1 min none
Test i2000 or 4 Mechanisms Ready, through each of the RV loader
Warming sensors. Each sensor is tested RV hopper
with and without an RV in its path. level sensor
Drop point
sensor
Load point
sensor
Load diverter
shutter sensor
Load diverter
sensor
Process path
insertion point
sensor
All RV
sensors
Drop point
sensor
Load point
sensor
Load diverter
shutter sensor
Load diverter
sensor
Process path
insertion point
sensor
All RV
sensors
Drop point
sensor
Load point
sensor
Load diverter
shutter sensor
Load diverter
sensor
Process path
insertion point
sensor
All RV
sensors
Drop point
sensor
Load point
sensor
Load diverter
shutter sensor
Load diverter
sensor
Process path
insertion point
sensor
All RV
sensors
i2000 5.0x 5400 Crash Sensor Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, Pipettor probes are manually lifted Select: 2 min none
Test i2000 or 4 Ready, to test the crash sensor.
Warming Sample
pipettor
R1 pipettor
R2 pipettor
All pipettors
Warming Sample
pipettor
R1 pipettor
R2 pipettor
All pipettors
Warming Sample
pipettor
R1 pipettor
R2 pipettor
All pipettors
Warming Sample
pipettor
R1 pipettor
R2 pipettor
All pipettors
i2000 5.0x 5500 SH Motor Test Operator Diagnostics // 0 Fuses/ Stopped, (SSH only) Load queue 1 min none
SSH Motors Ready, To home the following standard Load transfer
Warming SH motors: load queue, unload Processing
queue, load transfer, unload queue 1
transfer, sample queue, and Star Star wheel 1
Wheel. Unload
transfer
Unload queue
Home all
End testing
Additional options are

available in a multi-
module system.
Wheel. Unload
transfer
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
Wheel. Unload
transfer
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
Wheel. Unload
transfer
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
i2000 5.0x 5505 SH Switches/ FSE Diagnostics// 0 Solenoids/ Stopped, (SSH only) Select: 2 min none
Solenoids SSH Sensors Ready, Tests the solenoids and switches
Warming of the sample handler. Solenoids
The following solenoids can be Switches
tested: End testing
Load transfer, Gate, Unload
If solenoids, select
transfer.
group:
The following Switches can be Load transfer

tested: Gate
Carrier present at lane 1, Carrier Unload
present at LQ BCR, Carrier transfer
present at BCR PQ1, Module 1 End testing
PQ full
Carrier present at gate for unload, If switches, select
Carrier present at unload queue, group:
UQ lane 1 full.
Carrier
present at
lane 1
Carrier
present at LQ
BCR
Carrier
present at
BCR PQ1
Module 1 PQ
full
Carrier
present at
gate for
unload
Carrier
present at
unload queue
UQ lane 1 full
End testing

module system.
tested: End testing
transfer.
group:

tested: Gate
PQ full
UQ lane 1 full.
Carrier
present at
lane 1
Carrier
present at LQ
BCR
Carrier
present at
BCR PQ1
Module 1 PQ
full
Carrier
present at
gate for
unload
Carrier
present at
unload queue
UQ lane 1 full
End testing

module system.
tested: End testing
transfer.
group:
tested: Gate
PQ full
UQ lane 1 full.
Carrier
present at
lane 1
Carrier
present at LQ
BCR
Carrier
present at
BCR PQ1
Module 1 PQ
full
Carrier
present at
gate for
unload
Carrier
present at
unload queue
UQ lane 1 full
End testing

module system.
tested: End testing
transfer.
group:

tested: Gate
PQ full
UQ lane 1 full.
Carrier
present at
lane 1
Carrier
present at LQ
BCR
Carrier
present at
BCR PQ1
Module 1 PQ
full
Carrier
present at
gate for
unload
Carrier
present at
unload queue
UQ lane 1 full
End testing

module system.
i2000 5.0x 5700 Fuse Status Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fuses/ Stopped, The status of +5V, +12V and -12V 1 min none
i2000 or 4 Motors Ready, fuses is displayed.
Warming
Warming
Warming
Warming
i2000 5.0x 5715 Turn 36V FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, This procedure turns off and on Variable none
Power Off and On i2000 or 4 Ready, the 36 volt power to all motors,
Warming valves and solenoids of an i
system. For a multi-module
system the SH power will be
turned off if the PM selected is the
PM supplying the power to the SH.
i2000 5.0x 6000 Retrieve Test FSE Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, Determines the total number of 1 min none
Counts SCC Ready, tests initiated and tests completed
Warming for the selected processing
module. Test counts may be
cleared during this procedure.
i2000 5.0x 6004 Copy Backup Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, Copies system software backup to Copy Backup Variable Blank or appendable CDR/CDRW
Software SCC Ready, a CD or replace a backup on the software from or
Warming SCC with one on a CD. (x): drive to CDR/CDRW containing
Note: Performing this procedure CD compressed backup software
does not backup the system Copy Backup
software. software from
CD to (x):
drive
x= backup drive
CD to (x):
drive
x= backup drive
CD to (x):
drive
x= backup drive
CD to (x):
drive
x= backup drive
i2000 8.0x 6007 SCC Utilities Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows the user to Touch screen variable none
SCC Ready, perform the following functions: calibration
Warming USB utilities
Calibrate the touch screen Check/Repair
monitor ARCHITECT
View the USB drive(s) database
Eject the USB drive(s) Clear CLI Port
Check and repair the (i2000SR LAS
ARCHITECT database only)
Clear the CLI port Abbottlink
(i2000SR LAS only) utilites
Initiate AbbottLink (AbbottLink
connector utilities consolidated
(AbbottLink consolidated configuration
configuration only) only)
Backup
If logged on as FSE, in addition to
utilities
the above operations you will be
able to view backup drives and
look for missing backup files.
i2000 5.0x 6008 Controller Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, To configure the PM and SH 1 min none
Configuration SCC Ready, controller board after replacement.
Warming Bootcode is downloaded to the SH
or PM CPU.
or PM CPU.
or PM CPU.
or PM CPU.
i2000 5.0x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, To retrieve current logs, copy the Retrieve and Time Materials vary depending on the
SCC Ready, database to CD, copy archived Copy Current variable option selected. Required
Warming logs to CD and retrieve a Memory Logs to Disk materials may include:
Dump file. If requested by Abbott and/or Hard CDR or CDRW disks
personnel, the logs may be Drive Floppy/Floppies
cleared from the system. Copy
database to
Retrieve and Copy Current logs CD
to Disk and/or Hard Drive: Copy Archived
This option will copy the following Logs from
logs to the D drive and Floppy or Hard Drive to
CD if selected. CD
Sample Handler logs: SH Trace, Retrieve
Sample Activity, Power On Self Memory Dump
test File (FSE
Processing Module Logs: Assay only)
Activity, Assay Calibration, Assay
Parameter, Assay QC Reuslt Data,
Liquid Level Sense, Maintenance
History, Permanent Message
History, Pressure Monitoring,
Quality Control, Result, Scripting,
Temporary Message History, Dr.
Watson, Host, LAS, ARM, Arch,
Unhandled, Application Event,
Temporary, CDRecord, Monitor log
(only valid on SCC platform C and
higher), Printed Reports
In addition, the i System copies:
Power On Self Test, PM Trace,
Wash Aspirate Monitoring.
In addition, the c System
copies:Optics
Note: An AchivedLogModem.zip
file is generated when logs are
copied to the hard drive. This file
contains all of the logs except the
Optics log. This file is smaller and
should be used when transferring
logs via a modem.
Copy database to the CD:This

option will compress and copy the
database to the D drive and CD.
Copy Archive Logs from Hard

Drive to CD:This option will copy
up to 5 previously retrieved
compressed logs from the D drive
to a CD.
Retrieve memory dump file:

(FSE only)
This option will compress and copy
a memory dump file to a CD.
Refer to P-204 Log Retrieval
Procedure software (version 2.02
or higher) for additional
information.
i2000 5.1x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, To retrieve current logs, copy the Retrieve and Time Materials vary depending on the
database to
CD if selected. CD
test File (FSE
copies:Optics
logs via a modem.


to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
i2000 7.0x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, To retrieve current logs and Retrieve and Time Materials vary depending on the
SCC Ready, memeory dump file, copy the Copy Current variable option selected. Required
Warming database to CD, and copy Logs to Disk materials may include:
archived logs to CD. and/or Hard CDR or CDRW disks
If logged on as FSE a copy of the Drive Floppy/Floppies
memory dump can be retrieved Copy
without current logs. If requested database to
by Abbott personnel, the logs may CD
be cleared from the system. Copy Archived
Logs from
Retrieve and Copy Current logs Hard Drive to
to Disk and/or Hard Drive: CD
This option will copy the following Retrieve
logs to the D drive and Floppy or Memory Dump
CD if selected. File (FSE
Sample Handler logs: SH Trace, only)
Sample Activity, Power On Self
test
Processing Module Logs: Assay
Activity, Assay Calibration, Liquid
Level Sense, Maintenance History,
Permanent Message History,
Pressure Monitoring, Quality
Control, Result, Scripting,
higher), Mini-Memory Dump,
Assay QC Result Data, Remote
SW Status, remote SW History,
Printed reports,
In addition:
i System copies: Power On Self
Test, PM Trace, Wash Aspirate
Monitoring.
i1000SR copies:Reagent
c System copies:Optics, Photo
data
c4000 copies: Lamp monitoring
logs via a modem.


to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
i2000 8.0x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, To retrieve current logs and Retrieve and Time Materials vary depending on the
Warming database to CD, and copy Logs to USB materials may include:
archived logs to CD. drive, CD CDR or CDRW disks
If logged on as FSE a copy of the and/or Hard USB drive
memory dump can be retrieved Drive
without current logs. If requested Copy
by Abbott personnel, the logs may database to
be cleared from the system. CD
Copy Archived
Retrieve and Copy Current logs Logs from
to USB drive, CD and/or Hard Hard Drive to
Drive: CD
This option will copy logs to the D Retrieve
drive and USB drive or CD if Memory Dump
selected. In addition a compresses File (FSE
archive file containing the logs is only)
saved. Up to 5 archived files can
be saved.
For a complete list of logs refer to
P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure
logs via a modem.
Copy Database to the CD: This

database to a CD.

Drive to CD: This option will copy
to a CD.
Retrieve Memory Dump File:

(FSE only)
Procedure for additional
information.
i2000 5.0x 6010 Load Queue Operator Maintenance// 0 As Needed Ready, (SSH only) 5 min 0.1% Sodium hypochlorite
Cleaning SSH Warming All surfaces of the Load Queue Lint free tissue or gauze
conveyor belt are exposed for
cleaning.
cleaning.
cleaning.
cleaning.
i2000 5.0x 6012 Air Filter Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, Weekly Stopped, Instructions for cleaning the waste 10 min Air filters
Cleaning // or 4 Ready, center and PM filter. Tap water
i2000 Warming
i2000 Warming
i2000 Warming
i2000 Warming
i2000 5.0x 6014 Pipettor Probe Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, Weekly Ready, Instructions for cleaning the 5 min Wash bottle w/deionized water
Cleaning // or 4 Warming pipettor probes. Cotton swabs
i2000
i2000
i2000
i2000
i2000 5.0x 6015 WZ Probe Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, Weekly Stopped, Instructions for manually cleaning 5 min Wash bottle w/deionized water
Cleaning - Manual // or 4 Ready, the wash zone probes. Cotton swabs
i2000 Warming
i2000 Warming
i2000 Warming
i2000 Warming
i2000 5.0x 6017 Unload Queue Operator Maintenance// 0 As Needed Stopped, (SSH only) 5 min 0.1% Sodium hypochlorite
Cleaning SSH Ready, Instructions for cleaning the Lint free tissue or gauze
Warming Unload Queue.
i2000 5.0x 6020 Processing Operator Maintenance// 0 As Needed Ready, (SSH only) 5 min 0.1% Sodium hypochlorite
Queue Cleaning SSH Warming The Processing Queue belt(s) is Lint free tissue or gauze
exposed for cleaning.
i2000 5.0x 6022 LAS Carousel Operator Maintenance// 0 As Needed Stopped, (LAS only) 5 min 0.1% Sodium hypochlorite
Cleaning LAS Ready, Instructions for cleaning the LAS
Warming carousel.
Warming carousel.
Warming carousel.
Warming carousel.
i2000 5.0x 6029 Assay Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Any This procedure prints one of the 2 min None
Information SCC state following:
A complete list of all

assays currently installed
on the system and their
version number. The list
contains the assay
number, assay name and
version.
Calibration bar code labels
A range of numeric SID
bar code labels

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels
i2000 8.0x 6029 Assay Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Any This procedure prints one of the Show installed 2 min None
Information SCC state following: assay
information
A complete list of all Print IA
assays currently installed calibration bar
on the system and their code labels
version number. The list Print CC
contains the assay calibration bar
number, assay name and code labels
version. Print a range
Calibration bar code labels of numbered
A range of numeric SID bar code
bar code labels labels
i2000 5.0x 6035 PC Board Test FSE Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure tests the power 1 min None
i2000 or 4 Sensors Ready, supply heater, motor driver and
Warming DC driver I/O boards for power
interrupt error conditions. The
power supply heater is checked by
reading DIO bits O-3, the motor
driver by reading DIO bit 95, and
the DC driver I/O boards by
reading DIO bit 17.
reading DIO bit 17.
reading DIO bit 17.
reading DIO bit 17.
i2000 5.0x 6037 WZ Probe Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Stopped, Detailed instructions are given for 5 min None
Straightness i2000 or 4 Wash Ready, checking the straightness of the
Warming wash zone probes during this
procedure.
Procedure 2050 WZ Aspiration
Test, should be run at the
completion of this test.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
i2000 5.0x 6038 External Operator Maintenance 5 As Needed Stopped, This procedure gives instructions Supply and 5 min 0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
Decontamination // Ready, for decontaminating the external waste center Lint free tissue or gauze
SCC Warming surfaces of the ARCHITECT Sample
modules. handler
accessories
System
control center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
ARM
modules. handler
accessories
System
control center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
ARM
modules. handler
accessories
System
control center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
ARM
modules. handler
accessories
System
control center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
ARM
i2000 5.0x 6041 Daily Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, Daily Ready, The following is performed: 21 min Maintenance cleaning
Maintenance // or 4 Warming bottle (LN02G16-99)
i2000 Sample pipettor probe is 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
cleaned with 0.5% sodium ARCHITECT Probe
hypochlorite and Conditioning Solution
conditioned with Probe (LN01L56-40)
Conditioning Solution.
Wash zone probes,
temperature tubing and
sensors, and vacuum
vessels for wash zone 1
and 2 are cleaned with
0.5% sodium hypochlorite.
The microparticle bottles
on the reagent carousel
are mixed.
Wash zone probes,
sensors, and vacuum
are mixed.
Wash zone probes,
sensors, and vacuum
are mixed.
Wash zone probes,
sensors, and vacuum
are mixed.
Verify that a backup has
been performed in the last
thirty (30) days.
Check the database
integrity
NOTE: The backup verification and
database integrity check are only
performed on the i2000/i2000SR
processing module when it is
module 1.
i2000 5.0x 6043 WZ Probe Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, Cleans the inside and outside of 35 min WZ probe maintenance water
Cleaning - Bleach // or 4 Warming the probes in wash zone 1 and 2 bottle (LN06E68)
i2000 with bleach. Maintenance cleaning bottle
(LN02G16-99)
Tap water
0.25% sodium hypochlorite
(LN02G16-99)
Tap water
(LN02G16-99)
Tap water
(LN02G16-99)
Tap water
i2000 8.0x 6100 Na Hypochlorite Operator Maintenance// 5 As Needed Stopped, Procedure to calculate the volume None 1min None
Calculator SCC Ready, of sodium (Na) hypochlorite
Warming required to make a specific volume
of sodium hypochlorite solution.
i2000 5.0x 6114 Install/Delete ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to install all Install: 2 min ARCHITECT i System System
Assays SCC Ready, or selected assays. The procedure Assay CD-ROM
Warming is also used to delete selected All groups
assays Specific assay or ARCHITECT c System Assay
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to
main menu
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to
main menu
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to
main menu
i2000 8.0x 6114 Install/Delete ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to install all Install: 2 min Assay CD-ROM
Assays SCC Ready, or selected assays. The procedure or
Warming is also used to delete selected All groups ARCHITECT c System Assay CD-
assays Specific assay ROM
NOTE: Prior to installing a new or group (These or
updated assay file, refer to the options will e-assay file
assay CDROM or e-assay depend on the
customer information for any assay CD)
special instructions. When Return to
installing an e-assay file from main menu
Abbott mail, the customer
information may be viewed during
the installation procedure.
i2000 5.0x 6115 Install/Delete ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to install all Install: 2 min D:\
Procedures SCC Ready, or selected procedures. The Single SERVICE\PROCEDURES\
Warming procedure is also used to delete Multiple directory
selected procedures. Procedures All System Software
may be installed using one of the Configuration CD-ROM
following Delete: Floppy disk associated
Single with a TSB or ISA
D:\ Multiple ARCHITECT System
SERVICE\PROCEDURES\ Maintenance and
directory Diagnostics CD-ROM.
System Software
Configuration CD-ROM
Floppy disk associated
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
selected procedures. All System Software CD-ROM
USB drive associated with
Delete: a TSB or ISA
Single
Multiple
i2000 5.0x 6116 Update 6115 ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to update Install media options: 2 min ARCHITECT System Maintenance
Procedure SCC Ready, diagnostic procedure 6115 Floppy disk and Diagnostics CD-ROM,
Warming Install/Delete Procedure. Cd or
Procedures may be installed using Hard Drive Floppy disk associated with a TSB
one of the following: or ISA.
ARCHITECT System Maintenance
and Diagnostics CD-ROM
D:\ SERVICE\PROCEDURES\
directory
Floppy disk associated with a TSB
or ISA.
directory
or ISA.
directory
or ISA.
i2000 8.0x 6116 Update 6115 ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to update Install media options: 2 min D:\
Procedure SCC Ready, diagnostic procedure 6115 USB drive SERVICE\PROCEDURES\
Warming Install/Delete Procedure. CD directory
Hard Drive System Software CD-ROM
a TSB or ISA
i2000 5.0x 6200 CLI Terminal FSE Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Ready, This procedure allows service to Time None
Simulator SCC Warming issue CLI commands through an variable
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
i2000 7.0x 6220 User-Defined ADMIN Diagnostics// 5, Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows you to Create/Edit Time Materials vary depending on the
Maintenence SCC Ready, create, edit, import, export, print Export variable option selected:
Warming and view user-defined, text-based Import CD-R or unformatted CD-RW
maintenance procedures. View/Print Floppy disk
USB flash drive
i2000 8.0x 6220 User-Defined ADMIN Diagnostics// 5, Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows you to Create/Edit Time Materials vary depending on the
USB flash drive
i2000 5.0x 6500 MAC Hardware Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, Determines the MAC address of None 1
Address SCC Ready, the secondary network interface
Warming card installed in an SCC. This is
used when setting up the
AbbottLink system.
i2000 5.1x 6500 MAC Hardware Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, Determines the MAC address of None 1
AbbottLink system.
i2000 7.0x 6500 MAC Hardware Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Any Determines the MAC address of None 1
Address SCC state the secondary network interface
card installed in an SCC. This is
AbbottLink system.
i2000 8.0x 6500 MAC Hardware Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Any Determines the MAC address of None 1
AbbottLink system.
i2000 5.0x 8000 Unload RVs Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Stopped, Fluid is removed from all Reaction 20 min none
i2000 or 4 Mechanisms Ready, Vessels in the outer process path
Warming and they are unloaded during this
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
i2000 2.2x 8010 Reverse RV Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Stopped, Reverses the RV loader wheel to none 1 min
Loader Wheel i2000 or 4 Mechanisms Ready, allow removal of jammed RVs.
Warming
I2000SR 5.0x 1005 Optics Test CSC Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Stopped, CMIA Reader is tested with low none 5
i2000SR or 4 Temperature Ready, level commands. Twenty sets of
test fails.
test fails.
test fails.
test fails.
i2000SR 5.0x 1020 Optics Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Ready, Note 10 min none
Background i2000SR or 4 Temperature Warming Verify that the covers are
closed and that the
procedure.

RV.
closed and that the
procedure.

RV.
closed and that the
procedure.

RV.
closed and that the
procedure.

RV.
i2000SR 5.0x 1030 Shutter Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Stopped, The shutter moves to three Normal shutter 1 min none
i2000SR or 4 Temperature Ready, positions during this procedure, test
shutter test
(open/
close/extend)
Extend shutter
(This option
leaves the PM
in a stopped
state at
completion)
shutter test
(open/
close/extend)
Extend shutter
(This option
leaves the PM
in a stopped
state at
completion)
shutter test
(open/
close/extend)
Extend shutter
(This option
leaves the PM
in a stopped
state at
completion)
shutter test
(open/
close/extend)
Extend shutter
(This option
leaves the PM
in a stopped
state at
completion)
i2000SR 5.0x 1040 Optics FSE Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Ready, To calibrate a new CMIA reader 75 min Optics Normalization Solution (7-
Normalization i2000SR or 4 Temperature Warming after installation. Aliquots of 92513-01)
diluted Total T3 Conjugate (optics Normalization soution may be
normalization solution) are stored at -10° C or colder for a
dispensed into RVs. Pre-Trigger period of 12 months. It may be
and Trigger are then added and thawed and refrozen twice. Once
RLU values are read. thawed, Normalization solution will
Normalization and Linearity remain stable for 7 days at 2-8° C
Factors are calculated and their (35.6-46.4° F).
database.
database.
database.
i2000SR 5.0x 1045 Optics FSE Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Ready, To verify the optics CMIA reader is 30 min Optics Verifier Kit
Verification i2000SR or 4 Temperature Warming working as expected.
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
also verified.
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
also verified.
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
also verified.
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
also verified.
i2000SR 5.0x 1100 Pipettor Test Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, Pipettors move through their full Sample 2 min none
i2000SR or 4 Ready, range during this procedure. pipettor
Warming R1pipettor
R2 pipettor
STAT pipettor
(I 2000 SR
only)
All
End testing
Warming R1pipettor
R2 pipettor
STAT pipettor
(I 2000 SR
only)
All
End testing
Warming R1pipettor
R2 pipettor
STAT pipettor
(I 2000 SR
only)
All
End testing
Warming R1pipettor
R2 pipettor
STAT pipettor
(I 2000 SR
only)
All
End testing
I2000SR 2.2x 1102 Robotics Test FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, This procedure provides robotic Wash Zone Variable
Tool i2000SR or 4 Ready, control for the wash zones, valves, Motors,
Warming CMIA reader, temperature data, Syringe
reagent bar code reader, process Pumps and
path, carousels, pipettors, sensors Valves On/Of
and pumps. Control
Pumps
Warning: This procedure will CMIA Reader,
enable the user to move pumps Heater On/Off
and motors. Conditions could exist and
for the movement of fluids. Be Temperature
aware that this fluid could cause Readings
damage to the processing module. Reagent
Carousel and
Bar Code
Reader
Process Path
and Reagent
Carousel
Pipettor, LLS
and PM
Read Fluid
Level and
Door Sensors
Vortexer Test
at Various
Speeds
RV Loader
Home and
Sensor Read
36 volts
On/Off
Exit
Sub Option
i2000SR 5.0x 1111 Sample Pipettor Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, Sample probe position is set for all 7 min Lint-free tissue
i2000SR Warming and dispensing specimens during RSH/SSH:
RV 24. i2000 LAS:
SH bar code tool
RV 24. i2000 LAS:
SH bar code tool
RV 24. i2000 LAS:
SH bar code tool
RV 24. i2000 LAS:
SH bar code tool
i2000SR 5.0x 1112 R1 Pipettor Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, R1 probe position is set for all 7 min Cotton swab
i2000SR Warming and dispensing reagents with the
Carousels.
Carousels.
Carousels.
Carousels.
The following positions are also

tested for an i 2000 SR: Middle
and Outer reagent carousel, RV48.



i2000SR 5.0x 1115 Wash Station FSE Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, Sample, R1 and R2 probe 3 min Lint free tissue dampened with
Pre-alignment // or 4 Ready, positions are set for the wash water
i2000SR Warming station positions required for
The following position is also
tested for an i 2000 SR: STAT
probe.
probe.
probe.
probe.
i2000SR 5.0x 1117 STAT Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, Stat probe position is set for all 7 min Lint-free tissue
Calibration i2000SR or 4 Ready, positions required for aspirating Deionized water
Warming and dispensing specimens during RSH:
Sample Carriers, Wash station, Carrier calibration tool (7-76347-
and RV47. 01)
Probe straightness is determined. i2000SR LAS:
In addition on an i2000SR LAS the Pipettor calibration tool
sample and STAT pipettor probes SH bar code tool
move over the LAS track allowing
you to observe probe positioning.
and RV47. 01)
and RV47. 01)
and RV47. 01)
i2000SR 5.0x 1118 LAS Pipettor Operator Maintenance 0 As Needed Stopped, (LAS only) Variable LAS pipettor calibration tool
Calibration // Ready, To visually align the sample LQ bar code tool LN6E69)
RSH Warming pipettor with the LAS track.
i2000SR 5.0x 1119 Transport Operator Maintenance 0 As Needed Stopped, (RSH only) 5 min none
Calibration // Ready, Aligns the carrier transport position
RSH Warming with the bays and carrier positions.
i2000SR 5.0x 1120 Sample Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, (c 8000 only) 10 min Cuvette Segment Robocal
Calibration i2000SR or 4 Ready This procedure determines the alignment Tool (LN 2J93-01)
sample pipettor
sample pipettor
sample pipettor
sample pipettor
i2000SR 5.0x 1150 Probe CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Ready, The pipettor moves the probe to Sample 10 min none
Alignment Test i2000SR or 4 Warming individual locations during this pipettor
in the wash cup and process path. STAT pipettor
(I 2000 SR
only)
All pipettors
End testing
(I 2000 SR
only)
All pipettors
End testing
(I 2000 SR
only)
All pipettors
End testing
(I 2000 SR
only)
All pipettors
End testing
i2000SR 5.0x 1155 Probe Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, The wash cup target is used to 2 min Cotton swab
Straightness Test i2000SR or 4 Ready, measure the straightness of the Deionized water
i2000SR 5.0x 1160 Pipettor Move Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, The Sample or STAT pipettor 1 min none
i2000SR or 4 Ready, moves to the wash station to
Warming provide easy access to the probe.
On completion, the pipettor moves
to the park position.
I2000SR 5.0x 1162 Carrier FSE Diagnostics // 0 Modules Stopped, This procedure moves the carrier 5 min. none
Transport Move RSH Ready, transport to the maintenance
Warming location.
Warming location.
Warming location.
Warming location.
i2000SR 5.0x 1170 Wash Station Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Stopped, Tests wash station function. Buffer R1 Pipettor 1 min none
Test i2000SR or 4 Wash Ready, is pumped though selected wash R2 Pipettor
active.
active.
active.
active.
i2000SR 5.0x 1240 Particle Capture CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, Microparticles are dispensed into 30 min Microparticle bottle from Reagent
All WZ i2000SR or 4 Wash Warming 30 RVs during this procedure. The Kit (once the microparticle bottle is
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
WZ 1 i2000SR or 4 Wash Warming 30 RVs during this procedure. The Kit (once the microparticle bottle is
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
and 50 µL of fluid
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
and 50 µL of fluid
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
and 50 µL of fluid
visually inspected.
Visual inspection:
and 50 µL of fluid
i2000SR 5.0x 1245 Visual Particle CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, Microparticles are dispensed into Select: 17 min Microparticle bottle from Reagent
Capture Check i2000SR or 4 Wash Warming 15 RVs during this procedure. The Kit (once the microparticle bottle is
i2000SR 5.0x 1251 Residual FSE Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, Fifteen numbered and weighed 13 min Gravimetric Balance
Volume WZ 1 i2000SR or 4 Wash Warming RVs are loaded by the user during

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)
i2000SR 5.0x 2001 Sample Pipettor Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, The sample pipettor aspirates and 50 10 min Saline
Check i2000SR or 4 Warming dispenses either a single 50 µL or 250 Calibrated manual pipettor
5 dispenses of 50uL of saline into (capable of pipetting 50uL or
5 RVs. The user is instructed to 250uL)
use a calibrated pipettor to RSH/SSH
dispense 50 µL or 250uL of saline Sample carrier
reference. The user removes the i2000 LAS
RVs from the RV access door and LAS sample carousel
compares the amount of saline sample cup
dispensed by the sample pipettor i2000SR LAS
to the reference. sample tube
i2000SR 5.0x 2002 R1 Pipettor Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, The R1 pipettor aspirates and 50 10 min Saline
Check i2000SR or 4 Warming dispenses either a single 50 µL or 250 WZ probe maintenance water
the reference.
the reference.
i2000SR 5.0x 2004 Pre-Trigger Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, Either a single 100 µL dispense or 100 10 min Saline
Check i2000SR or 4 Warming 3 dispenses of 100 µL of Pre- 300 Calibrated manual pipettor
i2000SR 5.0x 2005 Trigger Check Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, Either a single 300 µL dispense or 300 10 min Saline
i2000SR or 4 Warming 3 dispenses of 300 µL of Trigger is 900 Calibrated manual pipettor
instructed to use a calibrated 900 µL)
to the reference.
to the reference.
to the reference.
to the reference.
i2000SR 5.0x 2006 Wash Zone 1 Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, Either a single 400 µL dispense or 400 10 min Saline
Check i2000SR or 4 Warming 3 dispenses of 400uL of buffer is 1200 Calibrated manual pipettor
wash zone nozzle). The user is 1200µL)
i2000SR 5.0x 2009 STAT Pipettor Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, The STAT pipettor aspirates and 50 10 min Saline
5 dispenses of 50uL of saline into (capable of pipetting 50 µL or 250
5 RVs. The user is instructed to µL)
use a calibrated pipettor to RSH
dispense 50 µL or 250 µL of saline Sample carrier
reference. The user removes the i2000SR LAS
RVs from the RV access door and sample tube
dispensed by the STAT pipettor to
the reference.
5 RVs. The STAT pipettor also 250µL and 900µL)
dispenses 1000 µL of buffer from RSH
to use a calibrated pipettor to i2000SR LAS
dispense 50 µL or 250 µL of saline sample tube
i2000SR 5.0x 2010 Wash Station CSC Diagnostics// 1 or 2 Precision Stopped, This procedure visually checks the none 3 min 10mL graduated cylinder or tube
Check i2000SR Ready, dispensing precision and accuracy
i2000SR 5.0x 2021 Sample Pipettor CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 5 min Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric i2000SR or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of the Tap water
measurement. Fifteen RVs are Sample carrier
weighed empty and weighed again Sample cup
after 50 µL of buffer is dispensed. i2000 LAS
The operator then calculates the LAS sample carousel
difference. The final result must be Sample cup
between 46 µL (mg) and 51 µL i2000SR LAS
(mg) and the CV must be 1.0%. Sample tube

tools required)
Gravimetric i2000SR or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of the Tap water or saline
dispensed into the first 15 RVs. Sample cup


900 µL (mg).
Pipettor Check.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.
i2000SR 5.0x 2022 R1 Pipettor CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 5 min Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric i2000SR or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of the R1 WZ probe maintenance water
(mg) and the CV must be
1.0%.

tools required)
difference.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.
difference.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.
difference.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.
(mg) and the CV must be 1.0%.

tools required)


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.
i2000SR 5.0x 2024 Pre-Trigger CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 3 min Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric i2000SR or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of Pre-
be 1.0%.

tools required)
100 µL.
be 1.0%.

tools required)
100 µL.
be 1.0%.

tools required)
100 µL.
be 1.0%.

tools required)
100 µL.
i2000SR 5.0x 2025 Trigger CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 3 min Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric i2000SR or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of Trigger

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)
i2000SR 5.0x 2026 Wash Zone 1 CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 3 min Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric i2000SR or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of wash
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
i2000SR 5.0x 2029 Stat Pipettor CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 5 min Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric i2000SR or 4 Warming precision and accuracy of the Tap water
STAT pipettor (i 2000 SR only) by RSH
gravimetric measurement. Fifteen Sample carrier
RVs are weighed empty and Sample cup
weighed again after 50 µL of i2000SR LAS
buffer is dispensed. The operator Sample tube
46.0 µL (mg) and 51.0 µL (mg)
and the CV must be 1.0%.

tools required)
should be approximately 50 µL
STAT pipettor by gravimetric RSH
weighed RVs. 50 µL of tap water i2000SR LAS
or saline is aspirated and Sample tube


900 µL (mg).

diagnostic procedure 2009 STAT
Pipettor Check.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.


900 µL (mg).

Pipettor Check.
i2000SR 5.0x 2050 WZ Aspiration Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, This procedure tests wash zone Wash Zone 1 10 min none
Test i2000SR or 4 Wash Warming aspiration. Buffer is dispensed into (WZ1)
procedure.

procedure.

procedure.

procedure.

i2000SR 8.0x 2055 2055 WZ Valve FSE Diagnostics// 1 or 2 Fluidics Ready, The pressure is measured in the Wash zone 1 12 min none
Pressure Check i2000SR Wash Warming wash zone manifold tubing to test Wash zone 2
for highly restictive valves.
i2000SR 5.0x 2110 Syringes and Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Syringes/ Ready, Operation of all pumps, syringes Select: 1 min none
Pumps Test i2000SR or 4 Pumps Warming and sensors is verified during this
test. End Testing
If Pumps, select
group:
Trigger/Pre-
Trigger
Buffer
Wash Zones
All
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
If Wash Buffer:
R1 Wash cup
R2 Wash Cup
Sample Probe
R1 Probe
R2 Probe
STAT Probe
(i2000SR only)
All
If Wash Zone:
WZ1
WZ2
Both (WZ1
and WZ2)
If Syringes(s):
Sample
R1
R2
STAT
All
test. End Testing
If Pumps, select
group:
Trigger/Pre-
Trigger
Buffer
Wash Zones
All
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
If Wash Buffer:
R1 Wash cup
R2 Wash Cup
Sample Probe
R1 Probe
R2 Probe
STAT Probe
(i2000SR only)
All
If Wash Zone:
WZ1
WZ2
Both (WZ1
and WZ2)
If Syringes(s):
Sample
R1
R2
STAT
All
test. End Testing
If Pumps, select
group:
Trigger/Pre-
Trigger
Buffer
Wash Zones
All
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
If Wash Buffer:
R1 Wash cup
R2 Wash Cup
Sample Probe
R1 Probe
R2 Probe
STAT Probe
(i2000SR only)
All
If Wash Zone:
WZ1
WZ2
Both (WZ1
and WZ2)
If Syringes(s):
Sample
R1
R2
STAT
All
test. End Testing
If Pumps, select
group:
Trigger/Pre-
Trigger
Buffer
Wash Zones
All
Pre-Trigger
Trigger
All
If Wash Buffer:
R1 Wash cup
R2 Wash Cup
Sample Probe
R1 Probe
R2 Probe
STAT Probe
(i2000SR only)
All
If Wash Zone:
WZ1
WZ2
Both (WZ1
and WZ2)
If Syringes(s):
Sample
R1
R2
STAT
All
i2000SR 5.0x 2130 Flush Fluids Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, This procedure flushes the buffer, 5 min none
// or 4 Warming Trigger and Pre-Trigger lines.
i2000SR The following amounts are flushed:
Buffer: minimum 550 mL
Pre-Trigger: 13 mL
Trigger: 13 mL
Note
Performing this
procedure does not
reset the clock for the
automatic flush.
Note
To flush buffer,
inventory status must
be greater than 50%
Pre-Trigger: 13 mL
Trigger: 13 mL
Note
Performing this
procedure does not
automatic flush.
Note
To flush buffer,
be greater than 50%
Pre-Trigger: 13 mL
Trigger: 13 mL
Note
Performing this
procedure does not
automatic flush.
Note
To flush buffer,
be greater than 50%
Pre-Trigger: 13 mL
Trigger: 13 mL
Note
Performing this
procedure does not
automatic flush.
Note
To flush buffer,
be greater than 50%
i2000SR 5.0x 2133 Air Flush Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, Wash Buffer, Trigger and Pre- Wash Buffer 7 min Wash buffer transfer tubing
i2000SR during this procedure. Trigger/Trigger
Wash Buffer,
Pre-Trigger,
Trigger
Buffer input
line
End Testing
Wash Buffer,
Pre-Trigger,
Trigger
Buffer input
line
End Testing
Wash Buffer,
Pre-Trigger,
Trigger
Buffer input
line
End Testing
Wash Buffer,
Pre-Trigger,
Trigger
Buffer input
line
End Testing
i2000SR 5.0x 2135 Long Term Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Modules Ready, All pumps and fluidic lines are 19 min 5 liter (minimum) container
Shutdown i2000SR or 4 Warming flushed with buffer, air, deionized 1 liter (minimum) container)
Deionized water
Deionized water
Deionized water
Deionized water
i2000SR 5.0x 2151 Prime Wash Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, 100 µL Wash Buffer dispenses 6 min none
i2000SR both Wash Zones 1 and 2 during
this procedure.
this procedure.
this procedure.
this procedure.
i2000SR 5.0x 2152 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, 300 µL Pre-Trigger and 100 µL 5 min none
i2000SR RVs at the valves in the dispense
manifold.
i2000SR 5.1x 2152 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, 300 µL Pre-Trigger and 100 µL 5 min none
i2000SR RVs at the valves in the dispense
manifold.
i2000SR 7.0x 2152 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, 200 µL of Pre-Trigger and Trigger 5 min none
i2000SR the valves in the dispense
manifold.
i2000SR 8.0x 2152 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, 200 µL of Pre-Trigger and Trigger 5 min none
i2000SR the valves in the dispense
manifold.
i2000SR 5.0x 2180 Internal CSC Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, The Wash Buffer fluidics system is 75 min Buffer filter
i2000SR procedure. 0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
i2000SR 5.0x 2182 ARM FSE Maintenance 5 As Needed Stopped, The ARCHITECT ARM accessory 45 min ARM decontamination kit (7-
(LN06C54)
(LN06C54)
(LN06C54)
(LN06C54)
i2000SR 5.0x 2185 Wash Buffer Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, Wash Buffer transfers from a 8 min Wash buffer transfer tubing
i2000SR Warming container during this procedure.
i2000SR 5.0x 3000 Reagent Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Carousels Stopped, Reagent Carousels move and are 2 min none
Carousel Test i2000SR or 4 Ready, checked for step loss.
Warming
Warming
Warming
Warming
i2000SR 5.0x 3115 Vortexer Test Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Stopped, Vortexer function is tested. The Vortexer # 1 10 min none
i2000SR or 4 Mechanisms Ready, vortexers are tested at eight Vortexer # 2
positions. STAT vortexer
Speeds tested (RPMs): (i 2000 SR
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520; only)
2765; 3034; 3289 All
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520; only)
2765; 3034; 3289 All
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520; only)
2765; 3034; 3289 All
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520; only)
2765; 3034; 3289 All
i2000SR 5.0x 3118 Vortexer Splash CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Ready, This procedure tests splashing of Vortexer # 1 10 min Water based dye, diluted 1:10 with
i2000SR or 4 Mechanisms Warming the vortexer. Vortexer # 2 water
Vortexer # 3
STAT vortexer
(i 2000 SR
only)
Vortexer # 3
STAT vortexer
(i 2000 SR
only)
Vortexer # 3
STAT vortexer
(i 2000 SR
only)
Vortexer # 3
STAT vortexer
(i 2000 SR
only)
i2000SR 5.0x 3125 Hopper Level Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Stopped, Operation of the RV Hopper level 1 min none
Sensor Test i2000SR or 4 Mechanisms Ready, sensor is tested.
Warming
Warming
Warming
Warming
I2000SR 5.0x 3131 RV Loader Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, A self calibrating RV transport 2 min none
Sensor Calibration i2000SR or 4 Ready, sensor board #6 is calibrated. This
sensor.

sensor.

sensor.

sensor.

i2000SR 5.0x 3140 RV CSC Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Ready, All RVs (112) are moved from the 20 min none
Load/Unload Test i2000SR or 4 Mechanisms Warming inner to the outer track and
track.
track.
track.
unloaded. The operator has the
option to have the system load 112
new RVs into the inner track or
leave the process path empty.
i2000SR 5.0x 3150 Diverter Test Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Ready, Diverters are moved 10 times. Wash zone 5 min none
i2000SR or 4 Mechanisms Warming When testing the RV load diverter RV Unload
loaded from the inner track to the STAT
outer track and moved to the RV (i 2000 SR
access door to confirm 10 RVs only)
were loaded.
were loaded.
were loaded.
were loaded.
i2000SR 5.0x 3175 Vacuum Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Modules Ready, Operation of the vacuum system, Both Wash 5-13 none
System Test i2000SR or 4 Warming vacuum vessels and drain valves Zones min
Wash Zone
positions
Wash Station
vacuum
vessel
Vacuum
System
Integrity
Run all tests
sequentially
Wash Zone
positions
Wash Station
vacuum
vessel
Vacuum
System
Integrity
Run all tests
sequentially
Wash Zone
positions
Wash Station
vacuum
vessel
Vacuum
System
Integrity
Run all tests
sequentially
Wash Zone
positions
Wash Station
vacuum
vessel
Vacuum
System
Integrity
Run all tests
sequentially
i2000SR 8.0x 3177 Vacuum FSE Diagnostics// 1 or 2 Modules Ready, This procedure is used to Vacuum Time none
Diagnostics i2000SR Warming troubleshoot the vacuum system. system leak variable
check
Pump integrity
check
Toggle valves
and vacuum
on and off
Vacuum
stress test
Drain vacuum
accumulator
i2000SR 2.11 3200 Reagent Bar Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, The Reagent bar code reader is Operator Logon: 5 min Reagent kit or Bar code calibration
Code Reader Test i2000SR or 4 Readers Ready, tested during this procedure. Only Select: tool
Read a
position
CSC Logon:
Additional option
Read "No
Bottle" labels
on back of
carousel
i2000SR 2.2x 3200 Reagent Bar Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, The Reagent bar code reader is Operator Logon: 5 min Reagent kit or Bar code calibration
Code Reader Test i2000SR or 4 Readers Ready, tested during this procedure. Only Select: tool
Read a
position
CSC Logon:
Additional option
Read "No
Bottle" labels
on back of
carousel
i2000SR 2.11 3210 Reagent Bar Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, Calibration positions for reagent 5 min Requires 2 Bar code Calibration
Code Calibration i2000SR or 4 Readers Ready, bottles are defined. Tool bottles (LN06E67-01)
Warming
i2000SR 2.2x 3210 Reagent Bar Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, Calibration positions for reagent 5 min Requires 2 Bar code Calibration
Code Calibration i2000SR or 4 Readers Ready, bottles are defined. Tool bottles (LN06E67-01)
Warming
I2000SR 2.11 3212 Reagent BCR FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, This procedure allows the user to None 5 Wash Zone Probe Maintenance
Alignment i2000SR or 4 Readers Ready, manually align the reagent bar Water Bottle (LN 06E68)
bottles vertically.
I2000SR 2.2x 3212 Reagent BCR FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, This procedure allows the user to None 5 Wash Zone Probe Maintenance
Alignment i2000SR or 4 Readers Ready, manually align the reagent bar Water Bottle (LN 06E68)
bottles vertically.
Note: This procedure is only

required for bar code readers with
an adjustable bracket.
i2000SR 5.0x 3220 SH Bar Code Operator Diagnostics // 0 Bar Code Ready, (SSH only) 2 min Sample Carrier
Calibration RSH Readers Warming Calibration positions for Sample ID
i2000SR 5.0x 3222 RSH Bar Code Operator Diagnostics // 0 Bar Code Ready, (RSH only) 5 min Sample Carrier
Calibration RSH Readers Warming Calibration positions for Sample ID SH bar code tool (06E69-01)
bar codes are defined for the RSH
bar code reader.
bar code reader.
bar code reader.
bar code reader.
i2000SR 5.0x 3225 LAS Crsl Bar Operator Diagnostics // 0 Bar Code Ready, (LAS only) 5 min LQ bar code tool (7-91925-01)
Code Calibration RSH Readers Warming To calibrate the processing queue LAS sample carousel
bar code reader to the LAS
carousel.
carousel.
carousel.
carousel.
i2000SR 5.0x 3250 SH Bar Code Operator Diagnostics // 0 Bar Code Ready, (SSH only) 5 min LQ bar code tool (7-91925-01)
Reader Test RSH Readers Warming Load Queue and Processing Sample Carrier
Queue bar code readers are
tested.
are read.
tested.
are read.
tested.
are read.
tested.
are read.
i2000SR 5.0x 3252 RSH Bar Code Operator Diagnostics // 0 Bar Code Ready, (RSH only) 5 min LQ bar code tool (7-91925-01) or
Reader Test RSH Readers Warming This procedure moves a carrier bar coded sample tubes (optional)
from a bay and section to the bar Sample Carrier
code reader where the carrier and
sample tubes are read.
I2000SR 5.0x 3253 Bar Code FSE Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows the Code 39 large 3 min none
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
i2000SR 5.0x 3255 LAS Crsl Bar Operator Diagnostics // 0 Bar Code Ready, (LAS only) 5 min LQ bar code tool (7-91925-01) or
Code Reader Test RSH Readers Warming To test the processing queue bar bar coded sample tubes
code reader`s ability to read the LAS sample carousel
LAS sample carousel ID and bar
code tubes.
code tubes.
code tubes.
code tubes.
i2000SR 5.0x 3315 Sample Handler Operator Diagnostics // 0 Modules Ready, (SSH only) 2 min Sample carrier
Test RSH Warming Sample Carrier(s) moves from the LQ bar code tool or bar coded
Load Queue to the Unload Queue sample tube
during this procedure (SSH only).
All Carrier and sample bar code
labels are read. The operation of
all Sample Handler sensors are
verified.
observed.
Does not check LQ Full, ULQ1
Full, or LQ BCR Full Sensor.
verified.
observed.
verified.
observed.
verified.
observed.
i2000SR 5.0x 3316 Carrier Probe CSC Diagnostics // 0 Modules Ready, (SSH only) 4 min Sample carrier
Alignment Test RSH Warming The pipettor(s) moves the probe to Sample cups
queue
queue
queue
queue
i2000SR 5.0x 3317 RSH Test Operator Diagnostics // 0 Modules Ready, (RSH only). 5 min Sample carrier (up to 67)
RSH Warming One sample carrier moves from Bar coded sample tubes (5
the RSH bay 1, section 1 to the optional)
bar code reader. The carrier is Tap water (c 8000 only)
then moved to the aspiration
point(s) and the probe(s) move
down into each tube. All other
carriers move from the RSH bays
to the carrier positioner(s) and
back to the original bay.
i2000SR 5.0x 3318 LAS Crsl Probe CSC Diagnostics // 0 Modules Ready, (LAS only). 10 min LAS sample carousel
Alignment Test RSH Warming To move the probe to each sample Bar coded tubes (20)
i2000SR 5.0x 3319 Carrier Probe CSC Diagnostics // 0 Modules Ready, (RSH only). i 2000 SR 5 min Sample carrier
Alignment Test RSH Warming The carrier filled with sample tubes Carrier positioner Sample tubes (5)
moves to the appropriate carrier
positioner. At the i 2000 SR Pocket 1
routine and STAT aspiration Pocket 2
locations, each position in the Pocket 3
carrier is moved to the aspiration Pocket4
point. The pipettor probe is moved Done Testing
down into the tube.
c 8000
Carrier positioner
Pocket 1
Pocket 2
Done Testing
CI8200
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
down into the tube.
c 8000
Carrier positioner
Pocket 1
Pocket 2
Done Testing
CI8200
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
down into the tube.
c 8000
Carrier positioner
Pocket 1
Pocket 2
Done Testing
CI8200
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
down into the tube.
c 8000
Carrier positioner
Pocket 1
Pocket 2
Done Testing
CI8200
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
i2000SR 5.0x 3323 RSH Section Operator Diagnostics // 0 Solenoids/ Ready, (RSH only) Enter a bay and 5 min Sample carrier
Test RSH Sensors Warming This procedure tests the ability of section
the RSH carrier transport to pick Locate the first carrier
up a carrier from a specific detected
location and return it to that End testing
location.
location.
location.
location.
i2000SR 5.0x 3400 Interlock Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, All interlock sensors for the Waste chute 10 min none
Sensors Test i2000SR or 4 Sensors Ready, processing module and the Front
Rear
processing
center cover
Processing
Queue access
doors (SSH
only)
LAS carousel
cover (LAS
SH only)
RSH covers
(RSH only)
All
Rear
processing
center cover
Processing
Queue access
doors (SSH
only)
LAS carousel
cover (LAS
SH only)
RSH covers
(RSH only)
All
Rear
processing
center cover
Processing
Queue access
doors (SSH
only)
LAS carousel
cover (LAS
SH only)
RSH covers
(RSH only)
All
Rear
processing
center cover
Processing
Queue access
doors (SSH
only)
LAS carousel
cover (LAS
SH only)
RSH covers
(RSH only)
All
i2000SR 5.0x 3401 Section/Bay Operator Diagnostics // 0 Solenoids/ Stopped, (RSH only) Test all 5 min Sample carriers
Sensors Test RSH Sensors Ready, This procedure tests the sections/bays Sample trays
Warming carrier/tray sensors for priority and Test selected
routine bays. section or bay
i2000SR 5.0x 3410 Level Sensors Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, Wash Buffer, Pre-Trigger and Wash buffer 1 min none
Test i2000SR or 4 Sensors Ready, Trigger Level Sensors are Pre-Trigger
All
All
All
All
i2000SR 5.0x 3520 Temperature Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, Temperatures in the Processing Process path 1 min none
i2000SR Warming displayed. Trigger
All
Note
Ambient temperature
on as CSC or FSE.
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
use only.
All
Note
Ambient temperature
on as CSC or FSE.
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
use only.
All
Note
Ambient temperature
on as CSC or FSE.
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
use only.
All
Note
Ambient temperature
on as CSC or FSE.
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
use only.
i2000SR 2.1x 3521 Temperature CSC Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, Temperatures in the Processing Process path 1 min none
Status i2000SR or 4 Ready, Module are read and their status Trigger and
Warming displayed. Pre-Trigger
Process path: 36.4° C-37.6° C Ambient
Triggers: 32.0° C-37.6° C Reagent
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C Cooler
Reagent cooler: 2.0° C-12.0° C All
Ambient:
15.0C - 30.0C
i2000SR 5.0x 3530 Temperature Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, RVs containing buffer are 5 min External thermometer (7-77997-01
i2000SR process path zones during this WZ probe maintenance water
i2000SR 5.0x 3600 LLS Test Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, This procedure tests the ability to RV2 6 min WZ probe maintenance water
i2000SR or 4 Wash Warming detect liquid in the following RV24 bottle (LN 6E68)
locations: RV2, RV24, reagent RV48 Tap water
carousel, outer, middle, or inner (i 2000 SR
ring. only)
R1 at Inner
The following locations are also Carousel
tested for an ARCHITECT R1 at Middle
i 2000 SR system: RV 48 Carouse
R1 at Outer
Carousel
R2 at Inner
Carousel
R2 at Middle
Carousel
(i 2000 SR
only)
R2 at Outer
Carousel
(i 2000 SR
only)
All positions
ring. only)
R1 at Inner
R1 at Outer
Carousel
R2 at Inner
Carousel
R2 at Middle
Carousel
(i 2000 SR
only)
R2 at Outer
Carousel
(i 2000 SR
only)
All positions
ring. only)
R1 at Inner
R1 at Outer
Carousel
R2 at Inner
Carousel
R2 at Middle
Carousel
(i 2000 SR
only)
R2 at Outer
Carousel
(i 2000 SR
only)
All positions
ring. only)
R1 at Inner
R1 at Outer
If logged on as FSE and a Carousel
Reagent carousel option is R2 at Inner
selected, the procedure will allow Carousel
the FSE to specify the reagent R2 at Middle
bottle location to test. Carousel
(i 2000 SR
only)
R2 at Outer
Carousel
(i 2000 SR
only)
All positions
i2000SR 5.0x 3610 Sample Handler Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, This procedure tests the ability to High sample 3 min Sample Carrier or carousel
LLS Test i2000SR or 4 Wash Warming detect liquid at sample pipettor or volume test Sample Cup(s)
i2000SR 5.0x 3650 Set LAS Gain FSE Diagnostics// 1 or 2 Pipettors Ready, The LAS gain is set at the LAS i2000sr 7 Sample tube
i2000SR Warming aspiration point. The probe is Sample pipettor
is 99.
is 99.
is 99.
is 99.
i2000SR 5.0x 3700 Keypad Test Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, L1 - L4 keys and the access 1 min none
i2000SR or 4 Ready, indicator light function on the
i2000SR 5.0x 3710 Keypad Test Operator Diagnostics // 0 Modules Stopped, (SSH and RSH) 1 min none
RSH Ready, Sample Handler keypad function is
i2000SR 5.0x 3800 Pressure Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, To test the operation of the Sample 30 min Required materials depend on the
Monitoring Test i2000SR or 4 Wash Warming pressure monitoring boards and Pipettor Per pipettor tested. Materials may
STAT Pipettor bottle (LN 06E86)
(i 2000 SR Sample carrier
only) Sample tube
All Tap water
only) Sample tube
All Tap water
only) Sample tube
All Tap water
only) Sample tube
All Tap water
i2000SR 5.0x 4050 Buffer Run Operator Maintenance// 1 or 2 As Needed Ready, This procedure allows the 60 min Tap water or saline
i2000SR Warming simulation of running assays using 2 Reagent kits (3 bottles
Sample carriers
as FSE.
Sample carriers
as FSE.
Sample carriers
as FSE.
Sample carriers
as FSE.
i2000SR 5.0x 4080 Module Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, This procedures allows you to 5 min none
Initialization i2000SR or 4 Ready, perform a processing module
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
i2000SR 5.0x 4090 Sample Handler Operator Diagnostics // 0 Modules Stopped, (RSH, SSH and LAS) 2 min none
Initialization RSH Ready, This procedures allows you to
i2000SR 5.0x 4200 Functional Area Operator Diagnostics// 1 or 2 Modules Stopped, Procedure tests the functionality of none Variable
Test i2000SR Ready, the following areas: RV loader,
and pipettor.
and pipettor.
and pipettor.
and pipettor.
i2000SR 5.0x 5100 PP & Carousel Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure allows homing of Process Path 1 min none
Motor Tests i2000SR or 4 Motors Ready, the following motors: Process path, Outer carousel
Shutter
RV Orienter
RV Transport
Home All
End Testing
Shutter
RV Orienter
RV Transport
Home All
End Testing
Shutter
RV Orienter
RV Transport
Home All
End Testing
Shutter
RV Orienter
RV Transport
Home All
End Testing
i2000SR 5.0x 5110 Pipettor & Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure allows homing of Sample 1 min none
Syringe Motor Tests i2000SR or 4 Motors Ready, the following motors: Sample pipettor Z
Theta
The following motors are also R2 pipettor Z
tested for an ARCHITECT R2 pipettor
i 2000 SR system: STAT pipettor Theta
theta and Z, STAT syringe. Sample
syringe
R1 syringe
R2 syringe
STAT Pipettor
Z (i 2000 SR
only)
Stat pipettor
Theta (i 2000
SR only)
STAT syringe
(i 2000 SR
only)
Home all
End Testing
Theta
syringe
R1 syringe
R2 syringe
STAT Pipettor
Z (i 2000 SR
only)
Stat pipettor
Theta (i 2000
SR only)
STAT syringe
(i 2000 SR
only)
Home all
End Testing
Theta
syringe
R1 syringe
R2 syringe
STAT Pipettor
Z (i 2000 SR
only)
Stat pipettor
Theta (i 2000
SR only)
STAT syringe
(i 2000 SR
only)
Home all
End Testing
Theta
syringe
R1 syringe
R2 syringe
STAT Pipettor
Z (i 2000 SR
only)
Stat pipettor
Theta (i 2000
SR only)
STAT syringe
(i 2000 SR
only)
Home all
End Testing
i2000SR 5.0x 5120 Pump Motor Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure allows homing of Pre-Trigger 1 min none
Tests i2000SR or 4 Motors Ready, the following pump motors: Pre- Trigger
pipettor and R2 pipettor. station
Sample pump
The following pump motors are R1 pump
also tested for an ARCHITECT R2 pump
i 2000 SR system: STAT pipettor. Wash Zone 1
Wash Zone 2
STAT pump
(i 2000 SR
only
Home all
End Testing
Sample pump
Wash Zone 2
STAT pump
(i 2000 SR
only
Home all
End Testing
Sample pump
Wash Zone 2
STAT pump
(i 2000 SR
only
Home all
End Testing
Sample pump
Wash Zone 2
STAT pump
(i 2000 SR
only
Home all
End Testing
i2000SR 5.0x 5131 WZ, Wash Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure allows cycling of Select a set of valves: 1 min none
Station, Valve Test i2000SR or 4 Sensors Ready, the following valves: Wash Zone
(WZ2)
Wash stations
End testing
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2 (V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 1 valves
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2(V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 2 valves
R1 Wash
stations
R2 Wash
stations
Both Wash
stations
(WZ2)
Wash stations
End testing
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2 (V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 1 valves

Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2(V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 2 valves
R1 Wash
stations
R2 Wash
stations
Both Wash
stations
(WZ2)
Wash stations
End testing
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2 (V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 1 valves
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2(V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 2 valves
R1 Wash
stations
R2 Wash
stations
Both Wash
stations
(WZ2)
Wash stations
End testing
Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2 (V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 1 valves

Dispense
valve 1 (V1)
Dispense
valve 2(V2)
Dispense
valve 3 (V3)
Dispense
valve 4 (V4)
All Wash
Zone 2 valves
R1 Wash
stations
R2 Wash
stations
Both Wash
stations
i2000SR 5.0x 5132 Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure allows cycling of Select a set of valves: 1 min none
Syringe/Vacuum/PT/T i2000SR or 4 Sensors Ready, the following valves:
Trigger. valves
Trigger and
i 2000 SR only: Pre-Trigger
STAT Syringe valves
End testing
If select Syringe
valves:
Sample
syringe valve
R1 syringe
valve
R2 syringe
valve
STAT syringe
valve
All syringe
valves
If select Wash Zone

vacuum valves:
WZ1 vacuum
valve
WZ1 drain
valve
WZ2 vacuum
valve
WZ2 drain
valve
All WZ
vacuum
valves

Pre-Trigger values:
Pre-Trigger
dispense
valve (V1)
Pre-Trigger
waste valve
(V2)
Trigger
dispense
valve (V3)
Trigger waste
valve(V4)
All Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
valves
Trigger. valves
Trigger and
STAT Syringe valves
End testing
If select Syringe
valves:
Sample
syringe valve
R1 syringe
valve
R2 syringe
valve
STAT syringe
valve
All syringe
valves
If select Wash Zone

vacuum valves:
WZ1 vacuum
valve
WZ1 drain
valve
WZ2 vacuum
valve
WZ2 drain
valve
All WZ
vacuum
valves

Pre-Trigger values:
Pre-Trigger
dispense
valve (V1)
Pre-Trigger
waste valve
(V2)
Trigger
dispense
valve (V3)
Trigger waste
valve(V4)
All Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
valves
Trigger. valves
Trigger and
STAT Syringe valves
End testing
If select Syringe
valves:
Sample
syringe valve
R1 syringe
valve
R2 syringe
valve
STAT syringe
valve
All syringe
valves
If select Wash Zone

vacuum valves:
WZ1 vacuum
valve
WZ1 drain
valve
WZ2 vacuum
valve
WZ2 drain
valve
All WZ
vacuum
valves

Pre-Trigger values:
Pre-Trigger
dispense
valve (V1)
Pre-Trigger
waste valve
(V2)
Trigger
dispense
valve (V3)
Trigger waste
valve(V4)
All Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
valves
Trigger. valves
Trigger and
STAT Syringe valves
End testing
If select Syringe
valves:
Sample
syringe valve
R1 syringe
valve
R2 syringe
valve
STAT syringe
valve
All syringe
valves
If select Wash Zone

vacuum valves:
WZ1 vacuum
valve
WZ1 drain
valve
WZ2 vacuum
valve
WZ2 drain
valve
All WZ
vacuum
valves

Pre-Trigger values:
Pre-Trigger
dispense
valve (V1)
Pre-Trigger
waste valve
(V2)
Trigger
dispense
valve (V3)
Trigger waste
valve(V4)
All Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
valves
i2000SR 5.0x 5133 Other Valves & Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure allows cycling of Select: 1 min none
Diverter Test i2000SR or 4 Sensors Ready, the following valves:
End testing
i 2000 SR only:
STAT diverter
vacuum valve:
Wash station
vacuum valve
Wash stations
drain valve
Both wash
station
vacuum and
drain valves

separator valve:
Separator inlet
valve
Separator
drain valve
Both Separtor
inlet and drain
valves
RV unload
diverter
RV load
diverter
Wash Zone
diverter
STAT diverter
(i 2000 SR
only)
All diverters
solenoids
End testing
i 2000 SR only:
STAT diverter
vacuum valve:
Wash station
vacuum valve
Wash stations
drain valve
Both wash
station
vacuum and
drain valves

separator valve:
Separator inlet
valve
Separator
drain valve
Both Separtor
inlet and drain
valves
RV unload
diverter
RV load
diverter
Wash Zone
diverter
STAT diverter
(i 2000 SR
only)
All diverters
solenoids
End testing
i 2000 SR only:
STAT diverter
vacuum valve:
Wash station
vacuum valve
Wash stations
drain valve
Both wash
station
vacuum and
drain valves

separator valve:
Separator inlet
valve
Separator
drain valve
Both Separtor
inlet and drain
valves
RV unload
diverter
RV load
diverter
Wash Zone
diverter
STAT diverter
(i 2000 SR
only)
All diverters
solenoids
End testing
i 2000 SR only:
STAT diverter
vacuum valve:
Wash station
vacuum valve
Wash stations
drain valve
Both wash
station
vacuum and
drain valves

separator valve:
Separator inlet
valve
Separator
drain valve
Both Separtor
inlet and drain
valves
RV unload
diverter
RV load
diverter
Wash Zone
diverter
STAT diverter
(i 2000 SR
only)
All diverters
solenoids
i2000SR 5.0x 5220 RV Sensors Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Stopped, This test loads 1 RV and passes it Select: 1 min none
Test i2000SR or 4 Mechanisms Ready, through each of the RV loader
Drop point
sensor
Load point
sensor
Load diverter
shutter sensor
Load diverter
sensor
Process path
insertion point
sensor
STAT diverter
sensor
(i 2000 SR
only)
All RV
sensors
Drop point
sensor
Load point
sensor
Load diverter
shutter sensor
Load diverter
sensor
Process path
insertion point
sensor
STAT diverter
sensor
(i 2000 SR
only)
All RV
sensors
Drop point
sensor
Load point
sensor
Load diverter
shutter sensor
Load diverter
sensor
Process path
insertion point
sensor
STAT diverter
sensor
(i 2000 SR
only)
All RV
sensors
Drop point
sensor
Load point
sensor
Load diverter
shutter sensor
Load diverter
sensor
Process path
insertion point
sensor
STAT diverter
sensor
(i 2000 SR
only)
All RV
sensors
i2000SR 5.0x 5400 Crash Sensor Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, Pipettor probes are manually lifted Select: 2 min none
Test i2000SR or 4 Ready, to test the crash sensor.
Warming Sample
pipettor
R1 pipettor
R2 pipettor
STAT pipettor
All pipettors
Warming Sample
pipettor
R1 pipettor
R2 pipettor
STAT pipettor
All pipettors
Warming Sample
pipettor
R1 pipettor
R2 pipettor
STAT pipettor
All pipettors
Warming Sample
pipettor
R1 pipettor
R2 pipettor
STAT pipettor
All pipettors
i2000SR 5.0x 5500 SH Motor Test Operator Diagnostics // 0 Fuses/ Stopped, (SSH only) Load queue 1 min none
RSH Motors Ready, To home the following standard Load transfer
Wheel. Unload
transfer
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
Wheel. Unload
transfer
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
Wheel. Unload
transfer
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
Wheel. Unload
transfer
Unload queue
Home all
End testing
module system.
i2000SR 5.0x 5501 RSH Motor Operator Diagnostics // 0 Fuses/ Stopped, (RSH only) Carrier 5 min none
Test RSH Motors Ready, To home the following RSH transport X
Warming motors: carrier transport X, carrier Carrier
transport theta, carrier transport Z, transport theta
and carrier positioner. Carrier
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
i2000SR 5.0x 5505 SH Switches/ FSE Diagnostics // 0 Solenoids/ Stopped, (SSH only) Select: 2 min none
Solenoids RSH Sensors Ready, Tests the solenoids and switches
tested: End testing
transfer.
group:

tested: Gate
PQ full
UQ lane 1 full.
Carrier
present at
lane 1
Carrier
present at LQ
BCR
Carrier
present at
BCR PQ1
Module 1 PQ
full
Carrier
present at
gate for
unload
Carrier
present at
unload queue
UQ lane 1 full
End testing

module system.
tested: End testing
transfer.
group:

tested: Gate
PQ full
UQ lane 1 full.
Carrier
present at
lane 1
Carrier
present at LQ
BCR
Carrier
present at
BCR PQ1
Module 1 PQ
full
Carrier
present at
gate for
unload
Carrier
present at
unload queue
UQ lane 1 full
End testing

module system.
tested: End testing
transfer.
group:

tested: Gate
PQ full
UQ lane 1 full.
Carrier
present at
lane 1
Carrier
present at LQ
BCR
Carrier
present at
BCR PQ1
Module 1 PQ
full
Carrier
present at
gate for
unload
Carrier
present at
unload queue
UQ lane 1 full
End testing

module system.
tested: End testing
transfer.
group:
tested: Gate
PQ full
UQ lane 1 full.
Carrier
present at
lane 1
Carrier
present at LQ
BCR
Carrier
present at
BCR PQ1
Module 1 PQ
full
Carrier
present at
gate for
unload
Carrier
present at
unload queue
UQ lane 1 full
End testing

module system.
i2000SR 5.0x 5506 RSH Sensor Operator Diagnostics // 0 Solenoids/ Stopped, (RSH only) Carrier 10 min Carrier
Test RSH Sensors Ready, This procedure tests the carrier transport theta Carrier tray
Warming transport and carrier positioner align
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
i2000SR 5.0x 5507 RSH Indicator Operator Diagnostics // 0 Modules Stopped, (RSH only) 1 min None
Lights Test RSH Ready, This procedure tests the RSH
Warming indicator lights.
i2000SR 5.0x 5700 Fuse Status Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fuses/ Stopped, The status of +5V, +12V and -12V 1 min none
i2000SR or 4 Motors Ready, fuses is displayed.
Warming
Warming
Warming
Warming
I2000SR 5.0x 5715 Turn 36V FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, This procedure turns off and on Variable none
Power Off and On i2000SR or 4 Ready, the 36 volt power to all motors,
i2000SR 5.0x 6000 Retrieve Test FSE Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, Determines the total number of 1 min none
I2000SR 5.0x 6004 Copy Backup Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, Copies system software backup to Copy Backup Variable Blank or appendable CDR/CDRW
CD to (x):
drive
x= backup drive
CD to (x):
drive
x= backup drive
CD to (x):
drive
x= backup drive
CD to (x):
drive
x= backup drive
i2000SR 8.0x 6007 SCC Utilities Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows the user to Touch screen variable none
SCC Ready, perform the following functions: calibration
Warming USB utilities
Calibrate the touch screen Check/Repair
monitor ARCHITECT
View the USB drive(s) database
Eject the USB drive(s) Clear CLI Port
Check and repair the (i2000SR LAS
ARCHITECT database only)
Clear the CLI port Abbottlink
(i2000SR LAS only) utilites
Initiate AbbottLink (AbbottLink
connector utilities consolidated
(AbbottLink consolidated configuration
configuration only) only)
Backup
If logged on as FSE, in addition to
utilities
the above operations you will be
able to view backup drives and
look for missing backup files.
i2000SR 5.0x 6008 Controller Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, To configure the PM and SH 1 min none
or PM CPU.
or PM CPU.
or PM CPU.
or PM CPU.
i2000SR 5.0x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, To retrieve current logs, copy the Retrieve and Time Materials vary depending on the
database to
CD if selected. CD
test File (FSE
copies:Optics
logs via a modem.


to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
i2000SR 5.1x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, To retrieve current logs, copy the Retrieve and Time Materials vary depending on the
database to
CD if selected. CD
test File (FSE
copies:Optics
logs via a modem.


to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
i2000SR 7.0x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, To retrieve current logs and Retrieve and Time Materials vary depending on the
Warming database to CD, and copy Logs to Disk materials may include:
archived logs to CD. and/or Hard CDR or CDRW disks
If logged on as FSE a copy of the Drive Floppy/Floppies
memory dump can be retrieved Copy
without current logs. If requested database to
by Abbott personnel, the logs may CD
be cleared from the system. Copy Archived
Logs from
Retrieve and Copy Current logs Hard Drive to
to Disk and/or Hard Drive: CD
This option will copy the following Retrieve
logs to the D drive and Floppy or Memory Dump
CD if selected. File (FSE
Sample Handler logs: SH Trace, only)
Sample Activity, Power On Self
test
Processing Module Logs: Assay
Activity, Assay Calibration, Liquid
Level Sense, Maintenance History,
Permanent Message History,
Pressure Monitoring, Quality
Control, Result, Scripting,
higher), Mini-Memory Dump,
Assay QC Result Data, Remote
SW Status, remote SW History,
Printed reports,
In addition:
i System copies: Power On Self
Test, PM Trace, Wash Aspirate
Monitoring.
i1000SR copies:Reagent
c System copies:Optics, Photo
data
c4000 copies: Lamp monitoring
logs via a modem.


to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
i2000SR 8.0x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, To retrieve current logs and Retrieve and Time Materials vary depending on the
Warming database to CD, and copy Logs to USB materials may include:
archived logs to CD. drive, CD CDR or CDRW disks
If logged on as FSE a copy of the and/or Hard USB drive
memory dump can be retrieved Drive
without current logs. If requested Copy
by Abbott personnel, the logs may database to
be cleared from the system. CD
Copy Archived
Retrieve and Copy Current logs Logs from
to USB drive, CD and/or Hard Hard Drive to
Drive: CD
This option will copy logs to the D Retrieve
drive and USB drive or CD if Memory Dump
selected. In addition a compresses File (FSE
archive file containing the logs is only)
saved. Up to 5 archived files can
be saved.
For a complete list of logs refer to
logs via a modem.
Copy Database to the CD: This

database to a CD.

Drive to CD: This option will copy
to a CD.
Retrieve Memory Dump File:

(FSE only)
Procedure for additional
information.
i2000SR 5.0x 6010 Load Queue Operator Maintenance 0 As Needed Ready, (SSH only) 5 min 0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
Cleaning // Warming All surfaces of the Load Queue Lint free tissue or gauze
RSH conveyor belt are exposed for
cleaning.
cleaning.
cleaning.
cleaning.
i2000SR 5.0x 6012 Air Filter Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, Weekly Stopped, Instructions for cleaning the waste 10 min Air filters
i2000SR Warming
i2000SR Warming
i2000SR Warming
i2000SR Warming
i2000SR 5.0x 6014 Pipettor Probe Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, Weekly Ready, Instructions for cleaning the 5 min Wash bottle w/deionized water
i2000SR
i2000SR
i2000SR
i2000SR
i2000SR 5.0x 6015 WZ Probe Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, Weekly Stopped, Instructions for manually cleaning 5 min Wash bottle w/deionized water
i2000SR Warming
i2000SR Warming
i2000SR Warming
i2000SR Warming
i2000SR 5.0x 6017 Unload Queue Operator Maintenance 0 As Needed Stopped, (SSH only) 5 min 0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
Cleaning // Ready, Instructions for cleaning the Lint free tissue or gauze
RSH Warming Unload Queue.
i2000SR 5.0x 6020 Processing Operator Maintenance 0 As Needed Ready, (SSH only) 5 min 0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
Queue Cleaning // Warming The Processing Queue belt(s) is Lint free tissue or gauze
RSH exposed for cleaning.
i2000SR 5.0x 6022 LAS Carousel Operator Maintenance 0 As Needed Stopped, (LAS only) 5 min 0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
Cleaning // Ready, Instructions for cleaning the LAS
RSH Warming carousel.
i2000SR 5.0x 6029 Assay Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Any This procedure prints one of the 2 min None

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels
i2000SR 8.0x 6029 Assay Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Any This procedure prints one of the Show installed 2 min None
Information SCC state following: assay
information
A complete list of all Print IA
assays currently installed calibration bar
on the system and their code labels
version number. The list Print CC
contains the assay calibration bar
number, assay name and code labels
version. Print a range
Calibration bar code labels of numbered
A range of numeric SID bar code
bar code labels labels
i2000SR 5.0x 6035 PC Board Test FSE Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure tests the power 1 min None
i2000SR or 4 Sensors Ready, supply heater, motor driver and
reading DIO bit 17.
reading DIO bit 17.
reading DIO bit 17.
reading DIO bit 17.
i2000SR 5.0x 6037 WZ Probe Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Stopped, Detailed instructions are given for 5 min None
Straightness i2000SR or 4 Wash Ready, checking the straightness of the
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
i2000SR 5.0x 6038 External Operator Maintenance 5 As Needed Stopped, This procedure gives instructions Supply and 5 min 0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
modules. handler
accessories
System
control center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
ARM
modules. handler
accessories
System
control center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
ARM
modules. handler
accessories
System
control center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
ARM
modules. handler
accessories
System
control center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
ARM
i2000SR 5.0x 6041 Daily Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, Daily Ready, The following is performed: 21 min Maintenance cleaning
i2000SR Sample pipettor probe is 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
Wash zone probes,
sensors, and vacuum
are mixed.
Wash zone probes,
sensors, and vacuum
are mixed.
Wash zone probes,
sensors, and vacuum
are mixed.
Wash zone probes,
sensors, and vacuum
are mixed.
Verify that a backup has
been performed in the last
thirty (30) days.
Check the database
integrity
NOTE: The backup verification and

database integrity check are only
performed on the i2000/i2000SR
processing module when it is
module 1.
i2000SR 5.0x 6043 WZ Probe Operator Maintenance 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready, Cleans the inside and outside of 35 min WZ probe maintenance water
i2000SR with bleach. Maintenance cleaning bottle
(LN02G16-99)
Tap water
(LN02G16-99)
Tap water
(LN02G16-99)
Tap water
(LN02G16-99)
Tap water
i2000SR 8.0x 6100 Na Hypochlorite Operator Maintenance// 5 As Needed Stopped, Procedure to calculate the volume None 1min None
Calculator SCC Ready, of sodium (Na) hypochlorite
Warming required to make a specific volume
of sodium hypochlorite solution.
i2000SR 5.0x 6114 Install/Delete ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to install all Install: 2 min ARCHITECT i System System
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to
main menu
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to
main menu
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to
main menu
i2000SR 8.0x 6114 Install/Delete ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to install all Install: 2 min Assay CD-ROM
Assays SCC Ready, or selected assays. The procedure or
Warming is also used to delete selected All groups ARCHITECT c System Assay CD-
assays Specific assay ROM
NOTE: Prior to installing a new or group (These or
updated assay file, refer to the options will e-assay file
assay CDROM or e-assay depend on the
customer information for any assay CD)
special instructions. When Return to
installing an e-assay file from main menu
Abbott mail, the customer
information may be viewed during
the installation procedure.
i2000SR 5.0x 6115 Install/Delete ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to install all Install: 2 min D:\
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
selected procedures. All System Software CD-ROM
Delete: a TSB or ISA
Single
Multiple
i2000SR 5.0x 6116 Update 6115 ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to update Install media options: 2 min ARCHITECT System Maintenance
directory
or ISA.
directory
or ISA.
directory
or ISA.
i2000SR 8.0x 6116 Update 6115 ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to update Install media options: 2 min D:\
Procedure SCC Ready, diagnostic procedure 6115 USB drive SERVICE\PROCEDURES\
Warming Install/Delete Procedure. CD directory
Hard Drive System Software CD-ROM
a TSB or ISA
i2000SR 5.0x 6200 CLI Terminal FSE Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Ready, This procedure allows service to Time None
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
i2000SR 7.0x 6220 User-Defined ADMIN Diagnostics// 5, Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows you to Create/Edit Time Materials vary depending on the
USB flash drive
i2000SR 8.0x 6220 User-Defined ADMIN Diagnostics// 5, Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows you to Create/Edit Time Materials vary depending on the
USB flash drive
i2000SR 5.0x 6311 RSH Cleaning Operator Maintenance 0 As Needed Stopped, (RSH only) Tray bays 5 min 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
// Ready, This procedure provides Priority DI water
RSH Warming instructions for cleaning the sections cotton swabs
following RSH components (RSH Carrier Lint free tissue
only): transport
Tray bays RSH covers
Priority sections Carrier
Carrier transport arm and guard positioner(s)
RSH covers All
Carrier positioner Exit
only): transport
RSH covers All
only): transport
RSH covers All
only): transport
RSH covers All
i2000SR 5.0x 6500 MAC Hardware Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, Determines the MAC address of None 1
AbbottLink system.
i2000SR 5.1x 6500 MAC Hardware Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, Determines the MAC address of None 1
AbbottLink system.
i2000SR 7.0x 6500 MAC Hardware Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Any Determines the MAC address of None 1
AbbottLink system.
i2000SR 8.0x 6500 MAC Hardware Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Any Determines the MAC address of None 1
AbbottLink system.
i2000SR 5.0x 8000 Unload RVs Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Stopped, Fluid is removed from all Reaction 20 min none
i2000SR or 4 Mechanisms Ready, Vessels in the outer process path
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
I2000SR 2.2x 8010 Reverse RV Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Reaction Stopped, Reverses the RV loader wheel to none 1 min
Loader Wheel i2000SR or 4 Mechanisms Ready, allow removal of jammed RVs.
Warming
Server Host=gssweb.add.abbott.com; Database Host=ADDDALQ05; Database Catalog=MD
P-01 Routine Bay Partition Alignment Version - 96782-103_298_1

At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
P-01 Routine Bay Partition Alignment
Purpose To improve the quality of tray insertion by adjusting the gap between the RSH standard bay Module RSH
partitions.
Materials Partition Align Tool (94193) Time 15
Required min
Preparation
1. The power condition can be either ON or OFF.
2. The processing module must be in the Stopped, or Ready state.
3. Open the top bay door above the bay (on the right side of the RSH).
Verify Bay Partition

Alignment Note
This procedure must first be performed on the extreme right bay.
1. In the tray insertion guide area [1], insert the partition align tool [2] between the left and
right partitions and insert the tool.
2. Verify that as the tool is inserted, it slides into the tray insertion guide smoothly and that
it cannot be moved left and right.
Note
At reference point [3], there is a slight resistance.
If the specification is met, go to Verify Partition Spring Operation.

If the specification is not met, go to Align Bay Partition.
Align Bay Partition

1. Align the bay partition:
If the tool fit is too tight:
Loosen the top screw [4] on the right partition.

Push the partition firmly to the right.
Tighten the screw.
If the tool fit is too loose:
Loosen the top screw [4] on the left partition.

Move the partition to the right as required to achieve a smooth insertion of
the tool.
Tighten the screw.
2. Go to Verify Bay Partition Alignment.

Verify Partition Spring
Operation
1. Insert a sample carrier tray into the bay.
2. Press the tray back toward the processing module and verify that the springs at the rear
of the partitions push the tray forward.
If the springs push the tray forward, go to Align Remaining Partitions.

If the tray does not spring forward, clean the tray guides and repeat the check.
If the tray still does not spring forward, go to Verify Bay Partition Alignment.
Align Remaining
Partitions Note
Once the right partition is properly aligned, it is a reference for the next bay and should
not be adjusted.
1. Repeat Verify Bay Partition Alignment until all left partitions on all bays meet the
specification.
P-06 ARCHITECT ARM Troubleshooting Information Version - 96756-111_304_1

P-06 ARCHITECT ARM Troubleshooting Information
Purpose To provide instructions for troubleshooting ARCHITECT ARM problems. Module ARCHITECT ARM
Materials Required 7-78172-01 ARM decon kit (Used in this case for troubleshooting purposes) Time N/A
Links
ARM Block Diagrams

Basic Communication Errors
Buffer Quality Errors
Decontamination Errors
Flood Indicator
Inlet Pressure Indicator Errors
Inventory Level Errors
Outlet Pressure Errors
Performing a System Flush
Stop Key Errors
Water Temperature Errors
Water Quality Errors
Performing a System Flush
Install
Jumper
1. Power OFF the unit.
2. Unplug the unit.
3. Open the front door.
4. Open the lower compartment containing PCBs.
5. On the main PCB, install a jumper at J35.
6. Plug in the unit.
Connect
Tubing
1. Disconnect the buffer output tubing from the back of
the unit.
2. Disconnect the buffer pickup assembly from the top
right section of the unit.
Note
Use decon kit parts for the following steps.
3. Connect tubing jumper between the buffer outlet port

and the decontamination port on the back of the
unit.
4. Connect the tubing tee between the buffer inlet port
and the decontamination port at the top right side of
the unit. Do not connect the buffer pickup assembly
to the tee.
5. Verify the water is connected to the water inlet port
at the back of the ARCHITECT ARM.
Initiate
Flush
1. Turn on the unit.
2. Place the ARCHITECT ARM in the System Flush
mode by simultaneously pressing the DECON and
Stop keys.
3. The Start LED illuminates and the Flush LED
flashes.
4. The mode ends after 15 minutes or when the Stop
key is pressed.
Verification
1. After 15 minutes of running in the flush mode, check
for leaks and correct as necessary.
2. Verify there is no standing water in the flood pan.
3. Reconnect ARCHITECT ARM tubing to the
processing module(s).
Remove
Jumper
1. Remove the jumper from J35 on the main PCB.
2. Close the lower compartment.
3. Close the front door.
Basic Communication Errors
Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action
No communication from
the ARCHITECT ARM to Note
the SCC through the RS- ARCHITECT Advisor also has information regarding these errors.
232 connection
Main PCB is interrupted 1. Verify that the RS232 cable between the SCC and the ARCHITECT ARM
causing a lock up is not damaged and that both ends are securely connected.
2. Pressing the START key restarts the ARCHITECT ARM operation.
3. A self test can be performed by jumpering J35 on the Main PCB and
pressing the DECON key.
ARCHITECT ARM to
System Control Note
Center (SCC) This cycles each LED on and off on the keypad panel and turns
Communication Error each solenoid valve on and off. Valves 1 and 4 remain on and the
pump operates for 7 seconds. Valves 1 and 4 are then turned off.
This sequence is repeated until the STOP key is pressed.
4. Remove jumper J35 and re-boot the ARCHITECT ARM.
Note
J35 must be removed after testing, otherwise the
ARCHITECT ARM cannot communicate with the SCC.
Water Quality Errors
Inlet Water Quality LED Inlet water quality is below

Illuminated recommended level (1 M ohm/cm
1. Check inlet water source [1] for proper resistivity (1
±3% accuracy)
Megohm or greater).
2. Check inlet tubing for contamination and/or damage.
3. Perform a Flush (see Performing a System Flush)

procedure to remove possible contaminates.
Both Water Quality and Calibration check failure

Buffer Quality LEDs
1. Check connections P2 [2] and P3 [1] to Sensor PCB for
Illuminated
loose pins or wiring.
2. Replace Main PCB due to relay malfunctions.

3. Replace Sensor PCB.
Buffer Quality Errors
Buffer LED High Buffer mixture conductivity is

Illuminated too high
1. Replace the buffer.
Note
The box may have been frozen or become contaminated.
2. Perform a Flush (see Performing a System Flush) procedure to remove

possible contaminants.
3. Check for proper operation of pump.
Note
Fluid flow will be present in the buffer concentration tube if pump
is operating properly.
Buffer LED Low Buffer mixture conductivity is

Illuminated below recommended levels
1. Check the buffer container; it may have been frozen or become
contaminated.
Note
When installing a new ARCHITECT ARM, the flush routine may
have to be repeated 5 or 6 times to ensure filling of all tubing.
2. Check conductivity cell for leakage or damage. Press START until

incoming buffer concentration tubing to the pump is full.
3. Run a flush several times (in test mode: with J35 jumpered, press the
DECON key).
4. Check for proper operation of pump.
Note
Fluid flow is present in the buffer concentration tube if pump is
operating properly.
5. Check all fittings for possible leaks.
6. Check flood detector [1] for proper operation. Ensure cable connections

are secure.
7. Open the front door.

8. Observe the concentrated pickup line [2] (clear tubing) at the back of the
unit on the right side that goes through the side panel toward the buffer
pickup assembly.
Note
If the tubing is not completely full of liquid a low conductivity error
LED illuminates.
9. Check that there are no leaks in the concentrated pickup line (clear
tubing).
Buffer Level The buffer container is

Indicator, Red LED empty or not feeding the
1. Check the buffer container to ensure buffer is present.
Illuminated mix chamber
2. Check the pickup assembly for proper operation.
3. Verify the customer is pressing the bottle load button prior to installing a
new container with the pickup hanging freely.
4. Install the new container with the pickup unit.
Both Buffer Quality Check sum failure (bad data

LEDs Illuminated from sensor PCB)
1. Cycle the power ON and OFF.
(full on)
2. Check the connections to sensor PCB.
3. Replace the sensor PCB.
Flood Indicator
Flood LED The ARCHITECT ARM has a

Illuminated leak in the system
1. Check all fittings for possible leaks.
2. Check flood detector [1] connection for proper operation.
3. Ensure output tube is sloping downward. [2]
Note
If output tubing is not sloping downward, fluid can back up into the
system and overflow onto the electronics.
Water Temperature Errors
Inlet water temperature LED Inlet temperature is above or below recommended

Illuminated level (range is 15 degrees C to 37 degrees C)
1. Check the inlet water source for
proper temperature.
2. Check the inlet cell for proper
operation (ensure no
obstructions).
3. Check the inlet cell for secure
connection.
Inlet Water Quality and Inlet No data being sent from sensor PCB
Temperature LEDs Illuminated.
1. Cycle power ON and OFF to reset
Main PCB.
2. Replace sensor PCB if LED
continues to illuminate.
3. Replace Main PCB as last
troubleshooting step.
Inlet Pressure Indicator Errors
Inlet Pressure LED Illuminated Inlet pressure to

ARCHITECT ARM is
1. Check inlet water line connection for leaks around connectors.
below 1.0 psig
2. Check inlet water source for obstructions.
3. Check setting of low pressure switch (using the pressure gauge
connected to the decon port).
Note
It should be set at or near 1 psig on the indicator.
Sensor is located on back wall of ARCHITECT ARM.
Note
Clean the pressure transducer with DI water when
changing from outlet to inlet port to eliminate saline
contamination.
4. Install a fitting on a pressure gauge/sensor.

5. Connect the pressure gauge or sensor to the Decon Port [1] on
the top of the ARCHITECT ARM.
6. Verify that the pressure reading is between 10 psig and
15 psig.
7. To do this, install a fitting on a pressure gauge/sensor and
connect it to the white Decon Port (#2) [1] on the top of the
ARCHITECT ARM.
8. Any inlet water pressure above 15 psig is regulated to
approximately 15 psig at this Decon Port (#2) [1].
9. This input pressure should not read less than 10 psig as per
Pre-Site Checklist.
Both Inlet Low Pressure LED and A/D converter failure

Outlet High Pressure LED
1. Cycle power ON and OFF to cycle Main PCB.
Illuminated
2. Check connections of U6 chip (ensure all pins are in their
sockets) on Main PCB.
3. Replace Main PCB as your last troubleshooting step.
Outlet Pressure Errors
Outlet Outlet pressure from ARCHITECT ARM to

Pressure LED the processing module(s) is too high,
1. Check for proper connections at the back of ARCHITECT ARM
Illuminated above 16 psig
and at the processing module.
2. Check for obstruction or kinked tubing between the
ARCHITECT ARM output and the processing module inlet.
3. Ensure the inlet valve is open. To check if the valve is working,
observe the buffer bottle on the system to see that it is filling.
4. Check the setting of the high pressure switch by installing the T-
fitting (refer to System Flush Mode picture) at the output of the
ARCHITECT ARM.
5. Install the pressure gauge onto the in-line T-fitting.
6. Watch the pressure gauge.
7. The output switch should trip if the output exceeds 16 psig.
8. If the gauge reads high, try letting the mixed buffer run into a
container (bypassing the processing module).
9. If the error continues, adjust the switch on the right wall by the
mixing block for a reading of 15 psig.
10. Rotate the switch clockwise (when viewed from top) to increase,
counterclockwise to decrease the pressure setting.
Note
Clean the pressure transducer with D.I. water when
changing from outlet to inlet port to eliminate saline
contamination.
11. Replace the valve block if Outlet LED continues to illuminate.
Inventory Level Errors
Upon Power Up, the Empty Red Buffer concentrate levels were
LED (Inventory Level Indicator) lost; software is using default
1. Recalibrate the buffer level empty and full (take pickup
Briefly Flashes values
assembly out of box).
2. Place pickup assembly in cubitainer then cycle power on
and off.
Note
This calibrates the pickup assembly.
All Four of the Inventory Level The pickup assembly is not
Indicators Are Flashing plugged into the
1. Check the connection of the pickup assembly.
ARCHITECT ARM
2. Check the pickup assembly for proper operation (check
connectors on transducer).
3. Check connectors to Main PCB for tightness (P-215 PM
Log Interpretation and P-216 WAM Log Interpretation).
Decontamination Errors
Both Decontamination LED's Decontamination cycle was

Are Flashing along with Stop aborted in the middle of the
1. Cycle the power switch OFF and ON and restart
LED cycle
decontamination cycle.
2. Perform a system flush cycle (approximately a 15 minute
procedure).
3. Perform a flush (see Performing a System Flush).
Note
J35 on the main PCB must be jumpered in order
to perform this test.
On Power Up, Four LEDs Battery on main PCB is dead

(Decon 1, Decon 2, Flush and (buffer levels are not retained
1. Replace the battery [1].
Inventory Level) Briefly Flash when power is shut off)
2. Replace the main PCB.
3. Replace pickup assembly.
Stop Key Errors
Possible
Problem Corrective Action
Cause
Stop LED Motor

Flashing stall
1. Check all tubing leading to and from pump for blockage or collapsing.
2. Using the digital volt meter, check the winding values to ensure proper pump operation.
J6-1 blue to J6-5 yellow: 1.5 ohms

J6-2 blue to J6-6 yellow: 1.5 ohms
J6-3 black to J6-7 red: 1.5 ohms
J6-4 black to J6-8 red: 1.5 ohms
Note
There are 4 motor windings. Each winding is isolated from the motor housing and each
other. The cable connector [1] has the numbers embossed on the surface of the
connector.
3. Check for +5VDC (J4) to motor driver PCB (from main to motor).
4. Replace motor driver PCB if STOP LED continues to flash.
ARCHITECT ARM Keypad
Water Quality Error Indicator Inventory Level Indicator

1 7
Buffer Quality Error Indicator Start Key
2 8
Flood Indicator Decontamination Key
3 9
Water Temperature Indicator Flush to Drain Key
4 10
Low Inlet Pressure Indicator Bottle Load Key
5 11
High Outlet Pressure Indicator Stop Key
6 12
ARM Block Diagrams
ARM Fluidics Components, Normal Operation

ARM Fluidics Components, Flush Mode
ARM Fluidics Components, Decontamination Mode
ARM Electrical Connections
P-10 ARCHITECT ARM Multimodule Tubing Kit Version - 96756-111_4032_1

P-10 ARCHITECT ARM Multimodule Tubing Kit
Purpose This procedure provides instructions for the installation and verification of the Module ARCHITECT
ARCHITECT ARM. ARM
Materials Standard Tool Kit Time 1.5 hrs
Required ARCHITECT ARM (LN 8C95-01)
Tubing, ARM to Instrument (7-92484-02)
ARM Multimodule Tubing Kit (7-96485-01)
Preparation
1. Verify the power switch on the ARCHITECT
ARM is in the OFF
position.
Connect the
1. Connect the white connector of the 10ft (3.05m)
Water Source
to polyethylene tubing(white tubing-in shipping box)
ARCHITECT to the NCCLS Reagent Grade Type II water
ARM Module source in the laboratory.
2. Flush the DI water line to a drain for two
minutes.
3. Connect the other end of the tubing to the water
inlet port. [3]
Note
Connector [2] is not used during normal
ARCHITECT ARM operation. It is used only
during decontamination.
Waste Tubing
1. Connect the white connector of the 10ft (3.05m)
Connections
polyethylene tubing(white tubing-in shipping box)
to the waste 1 (pressurized) drain port. [4]
2. Connect the right-angled quick disconnect fitting
of the polyvinyl chloride (clear tubing-in shipping
box) tubing to the waste 2 (gravity)port. [5]
3. Connect the waste lines.
If connecting the two waste lines to a floor
drain, continue with Step 4.
If connecting the two waste lines to the
waste pump, go to P-12 External Waste
Pump Installation and Verification. Return
to this procedure when completed.
4. Ensure the two waste tubing lines run downhill to
the drain.
If the lab has a floor drain, run both lengths of
waste tubing to the floor drain.
To prevent accidental flooding caused by tubing
movement, it is recommended that the waste 1
pressurized drain tubing be fastened to the drain.
Route the waste 2 gravity drain tubing
downward.
Note
The waste 2 drain must be atmospherically
vented.
Caution
Verify waste connections are properly
installed.
Connect
1. Locate the 20 ft (6.09 m) polyurethane tubing
ARCHITECT
ARM Buffer with gray disconnects on each end (92484
Output to Tubing, ARCHITECT ARM to Instrument).
2. Connect one end of the tubing to the wash
Processing
Module Buffer buffer outlet port [1].
3. Connect the other end of the tubing to the buffer
Inlet
inlet port on the rear of the processing module.
Identify
Components Note
of the Perform the following steps when connecting to
ARCHITECT an i4000, i6000 or i8000 system only. Order one
ARM 7-96485-01 multimode tubing kit for each
Multimodule processing module beyond the first i2000.
Tubing Kit 1. The ARCHITECT ARM Multimodule Tubing Kit
provides the components necessary to add one
ARCHITECT Processing Module to an exisiting
ARCHITECT ARM and Processing Module
installation. Use the ARCHITECT ARM
installation procedure as a reference.
2. Order one kit for each extra module being
added. One or more Multimodule Tubing Kits
along with the original 20 ft (6 meter) supply line
are assembled to produce a Multimodule Buffer
Supply Manifold.
3. Refer to the following diagram for part
identification.
Become
1. The Multimodule Buffer Supply Manifold can be
Familiar with
Installation put together in several possible arrangements
Options from components in this Multimodule Tubing
Kit.Detailed views are provided in later sections
for both a Middle Module and a Last Module
installation.Refer to the following diagram for
acceptable i4000 configurations.
Note
The i4000 can be supplied from either end
or from the center of the manifold. The
center feed requires cutting the 4 foot (1.2
meter) tubing near the midpoint.
2. Examine the following diagram to select an
appropriate arrangement for the Multimodule
Buffer Supply Manifold to support an i6000. The
i6000 manifold can be supplied from either end
or from a center feed to one of the four foot (1.2
meter) tubing lengths which has been cut near
the midpoint.
3. The Multimodule Buffer Supply Manifold for an
i8000 must be fed from the center of the middle
four foot (1.2 meter) span of supply tubing. This
requirement will ensure adequate flow of buffer
from the ARCHITECT ARM to the outermost
modules. Cut one four foot section in half and
use the following diagram as a guide.
Connect the
1. A Middle Module is any Processing Module
Middle Module
which falls between the ARCHITECT ARM and
the Last Module or between another Middle
Module and the Last Module.
2. Use the included Tee fitting to create a tap
between the existing 20 foot (6 meter) tubing
from the ARCHITECT ARM and the original
Processing Module.
Note
Cut the original tubing 28 inches (about
71 cm) from the end connected to the
Processing Module. This piece becomes
the Riser and Processing Module
connection.
3. The Tee fitting is also used where a center feed
into one of the four foot (1.2 meter) spans is
desired. Carefully cut a four foot (1.2 meter)
length of tubing near its midpoint using a sharp
knife for this application.
4. Use the hose clamps included in the kit to make
a leak proof joint at the Tee fitting.
Note
Leave the clamps snug but not fully tightened
until the manifold assembly is aligned on the
instrument. This will allow easy twisting of tubing
on the fittings so that the manifold lays properly.
Connect the
1. Use the four foot (1.2 meter) length of tubing to
Last Module
connect between the Tee fitting of the Middle
Module and the elbow leading to the Riser for
the Last Module.
2. Use the supplied hose clamps at all fitting joints
to insure leak proof connections.
3. Repeat this procedure if the installation will be
center fed and has another Last Module on the
other end of the Multimodule Buffer Supply
Manifold.
Verify the
1. Dress the tubing so that there are no kinks that
Installation
would restrict buffer flow from the ARCHITECT
ARM.
Note
This can be done by twisting various
sections of tubing on the fittings for best
lay.
2. Check to be sure that there are no tripping
hazards where the tubing runs between
Processing Modules or from the ARCHITECT
ARM.
3. Check all hose clamps again to be sure they are
properly positioned with one at every barbed
fitting end.
4. Perform a final tightening by using the slip-joint
pliers to tighten each clamp one click past finger
tight.
Note
Do not overtighten to the point where
damage to the soft plastic tubing occurs.
Tighten only as necessary to create a
good seal.
5. Proceed with ARCHITECT ARM installation
verification and make a final check for leaks.
RS-232
1. Connect the RS-232 serial cable from the
Connection
ARCHITECT ARM to the SCC.
i2000 or i2000SR - connect the provided RS-
232 serial cable from the port on the
ARCHITECT ARM [6] to:
- Edgeport - Port 2 on the serial expansion
- DIGI - connect directly to P5.
i1000SR - use the DB25-DB9 cable supplied
with the i1000SR ARM Adapter Kit. Connect the
cable from the DB25 port on the ARCHITECT
ARM to the DB9 connector labeled ARM on
outside of the SCC Interface Panel. (If the DB25-
DB9 cable is not long enough, use the long
cable supplied with the ARM, then use the
DB25-DB9 cable as an adapter.)
Note
Installation instructions for the ARM Adapter Kit
are found in the Installation section of the
i1000SR Service and Support Manual.
Connect
Power Note
The ARCHITECT ARM module can be
connected to the same utility service as the
ARCHITECT system, but on a different branch
circuit or fuse.
1. Install the appropriate fuse (fuses are taped to
power cords) in the ARCHITECT ARM power
entry module. [1]
2. Install the power cord into the power entry
module. [1]
3. Connect the ARCHITECT ARM module to a
properly grounded electrical outlet using the
appropriate power cord ( 2 versions-in shipping
box).
Calibrate
1. Turn the ARCHITECT ARM power on at the
Level Sense
power entry module.
2. Press the Stop key. [1]
The red indicator beneath the Stop key
illuminates. [2]
3. Connect the buffer pickup assembly sensor
cable to the console. [3]
Note
Allow the assembly to hang freely.
4. Press the Bottle Load key. [4]
The amber indicator beneath the Bottle
Load key flashes. [5]
5. While the indicator continues to flash, disconnect
the sensor cable.
Configure
1. Log in as FSE.
System
2. Select System and Configuration.
Software
3. With the System Settings radio button selected,
select Reagents -Supplies.
4. Select F6 - Configure.
5. Under IA Supply Options, change Wash Buffer
Transfer from Manual to Automatic.
6. Select Done.
7. Verify on the System Snapshot screen
that ARM displays.
Load
1. Remove the cardboard cutout and the cap from
Concentrated
Wash Buffer the new concentrated wash buffer cubitainer.
2. Place the buffer pickup assembly into the
Container
container. Twist the fitting to tighten. [4]
3. Place the container into position on the
ARCHITECT ARM module with the white bracket
near the tubing assembly. [4]
4. Connect the buffer pickup assembly sensor
cable [2] and tubing [1] to the ARCHITECT ARM
console.
5. On the Keypad, press the Bottle Load [5] key.
The following occurs:
The Stop indicator light [6] is no longer
illuminated.
The amber Bottle Load indicator [7] illuminates
briefly while the sensor automatically recalibrates
to full.
The Flush indicator [8] illuminates briefly.
The green Start indicator [9] illuminates steadily.
Note
The Start indicator [9] flashes green when buffer
is flowing to the wash buffer reservoir.
Fill Buffer
1. If buffer transfer does not automatically begin for
Reservoir
this first fill, select F2-Update Supplies (from
the Supply Status screen).
2. In the Wash Buffer field, select Add Buffer.
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that the buffer reservoir on the processing
module is filling. For a new instrument, stop the
fill when the buffer level is approximately 1 1/2
inches (4 cm) above the bottom reservoir float.
Note
If the ARM is being replaced, continue the fill
and verification. If the ARM is being installed
with a new instrument, load only enought buffer
to confirm that the ARM is working. Both ARM
and instrument must be decontaminated before
use. Excess buffer in the reservoir will be
wasted.
Verification
1. Once the ARCHITECT ARM shuts down, verify
that the buffer reservoir is full.
2. Visually inspect the area around the
ARCHITECT ARM and the buffer valve on the
processing module for leaks.
3. Visually verify that the wash buffer
Note
Do not perform this verification until after the
ARM and instrument have been decontaminated.
P-11 ARCHITECT ARM Installation and Verification
Version - 96756-111_309_3
At the completion of this VP: After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
Purpose This procedure provides instructions for the installation and verification of the Module ARCHITECT
ARCHITECT ARM. ARM
Materials Standard Tool Kit Time 1.5 hrs
Required ARCHITECT ARM (LN 8C95-88, -89 or -90)
Preparation 1. Verify the power switch on the ARCHITECT ARM

is in the OFF position.
Connect the 1. Connect the white connector of the 10 ft (3.05 m)

Water Source to polyethylene tubing (white tubing - in shipping box)
ARCHITECT ARM to the deionized water source in the laboratory.
Module 2. Flush the DI water line to a drain for two minutes.
3. Connect the other end of the tubing to the water
inlet port. [3]
Note
Connector [2] is not used during normal
ARCHITECT ARM operation. It is used only
during decontamination.
Waste Tubing 1. Connect the white connector of the other 10 ft

Connections (3.05 m) polyethylene tubing (white tubing - in
shipping box) to the waste 1 (pressurized) drain
port. [4]
2. Connect the right-angled quick disconnect fitting of
the polyvinyl chloride (clear tubing - in shipping
box) tubing to the waste 2 (gravity) port. [5]
3. Connect the waste lines.
If connecting the two waste lines to a floor
drain, continue with Step4.
If connecting the two waste lines to the
waste pump, go to P-12 External Waste
Pump Installation and Verification. Return to
this procedure when completed.
4. Ensure the two waste tubing lines run downhill to
the drain.
If the lab has a floor drain, run both lengths
of waste tubing to the floor drain.
To prevent accidental flooding caused by
tubing movement, it is recommended that
the waste 1 pressurized drain tubing be
fastened to the drain.
Route the waste 2 gravity drain tubing
downward.
Note
The waste 2 drain must be
atmospherically vented.
Caution
Verify waste connections are properly
installed.
5. Perform procedure P-56 ARCHITECT ARM

Decontamination, then continue with installation.
Connect 1. Locate the 20 ft (6.09 m) polyurethane tubing with

ARCHITECT ARM gray disconnects on each end (92484 Tubing,
Buffer Output to ARCHITECT ARM to Instrument).
Processing 2. Connect one end of the tubing to the wash buffer
Module Buffer outlet port [1].
Inlet 3. Connect the other end of the tubing to the buffer
inlet port on the rear of the processing module.
Note
Refer to procedure P10 for use of the ARM
with IA multimodule systems. (i4000,
i4000SR, i6000, i8000)
RS-232 1. Connect the RS-232 serial cable from the
Connection ARCHITECT ARM to the SCC.
i2000 or i2000SR - connect the provided
RS-232 serial cable from the port on the
ACHITECT ARM [6] to:
Edgeport - Port 2 on the serial
expansion
DIGI - connect directly to P5.
i1000SR - use the DB25-DB9 cable
supplied with the i1000SR ARM Adapter Kit.
Connect the cable from the DB25 port on
the ARCHITECT ARM to the DB9 connector
labeled ARM on outside of the SCC
Interface Panel. (If the DB25-DB9 cable is
not long enough, use the long cable
supplied with the ARM, then use the DB25 -
DB9 cable as an adapter.)
Note
Installation instructions for the ARM
Adapter Kit are found in the
Installation section ofthe i1000SR
Service and Support Manual.
Connect Power Note

The ARCHITECT ARM module can be connected
to the same utility service as the ARCHITECT
system, but on a different branch circuit or fuse.
1. Install the appropriate fuse (fuses are taped to

power cords) in the ARCHITECT ARM power entry
module. [1]
2. Install the power cord into the power entry
module. [4]
3. Connect the ARCHITECT ARM module to a
properly grounded electrical outlet using the
appropriate power cord (2 versions - in shipping
box).
Calibrate Level 1. Turn the ARCHITECT ARM power on at the power
Sense entry module.
2. Press the Stop key. [1]
The red indicator beneath the Stop key

illuminates. [2]
3. Connect the buffer pickup assembly sensor cable

to the console. [3]
Note
Allow the assembly to hang freely.
4. Press the Bottle Load key. [4]
The amber indicator beneath the Bottle Load key

flashes. [5]
Load 1. Remove the cardboard cutout and the cap from

Concentrated the new concentrated wash buffer cubitainer.
Wash Buffer 2. Place the buffer pickup assembly into the
Container cubitainer and tighten the fitting.
Note It may be necessary to disconnect the pickup

assembly cable and tubing connectors [2], [1] to
get into the container. This will not affect sensor
calibration. Reconnect the cable and tubing when
the assembly is in place.
3. On the keypad, press the Bottle Load [5] key. The

following occurs:
The Stop indicator light [6] is no longer
illuminated.
The amber Bottle Load indicator [7]
illuminates briefly while the sensor
automatically recalibrates to full.
The Flush indicator [8] illuminates briefly.
The green Start indicator [9] illuminates
steadily.
Note
The Start indicator [9] flashes green
when buffer is flowing to the wash
buffer reservoir.
Configure System 1. Log in as FSE.

Software 2. Select System and Configuration.
3. With the System Settings radio button selected,
select Reagents - Supplies.
5. Under IA Supply Options, change Wash Buffer
Transfer from Manual to Automatic.
6. Select Done.
7. Verify on the System Snapshot screen that ARM
displays.
Fill Buffer 1. If buffer transfer does not automatically begin for

Reservoir this first fill, select F2-Update Supplies (from the
Supply Status screen).
2. In the Wash Buffer field, select Add Buffer.
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that the buffer reservoir on the processing
module is filling, then press the ARM STOP key if
the instrument is new. Complete the fill after
instrument decontamination.
Note
If the ARM is a replacement for an existing
instrument, let the buffer reservoir fill
completely.
Verification 1. Once the ARCHITECT ARM shuts down, verify

that the buffer reservoir is full.
2. Visually inspect the area around the
ARCHITECT ARM and the buffer valve on the
processing module for leaks.
3. Visually verify that the wash buffer reservoir on the
processing module is full.
P-12 External Waste Pump Installation and Verification
Version - 201985-104_678_1
Purpose To provide instructions for the installation and verification of the external waste pump. Module Waste Pump
Materials Required None Time 1.5 hrs
Preparation 1. Verify that the power switch on the external

waste pump is in the OFF position.
Position Waste 1. Place the waste pump as close to the back

Pump of the processing module as possible.
Connect Waste 1. Cut a piece of the waste tubing long enough

Pump to Back of to run from the back of the processing
Processing Module module to one of the four (4) inlet ports of
the waste pump. [2]
2. Install one end of the tubing to the
processing module waste port. [1]
Note
Use a cable tie or clamp to secure
the tubing to the barb fitting.
3. Install a quick connect fitting (14603) to the

other end of the tubing (secure the tubing to
the barb fitting with a cable tie or clamp). [3]
4. Connect this fitting to one of the four (4)
inlet ports of the waste pump. [2]
Note
This tubing must be below the level
of the waste port of the processing
module.
Connect Waste 1. Cut enough of the remaining tubing to run
Pump Outlet to from the waste pump outlet to the drain.
Drain 2. Install a quick connect fitting to one end of
the tubing (secure the tubing to the barb
fitting with a cable tie or clamp).
3. Connect this fitting to the waste pump
outlet. [1]
4. Run the other end of the tubing to the drain.
Note
This tubing should not be over 30'
(9.1m) long or run higher than 8'
(2.4m).
Assemble Tube to Note

Pipe Thread Perform this Action only if connecting
Connector ARCHITECT ARM to waste pump. If not
connecting to waste pump, go to Perform
Visual Verification.
1. Cut the existing tube to pipe thread

connector off of the polyethylene tubing
(white tubing from the ARCHITECT ARM
Waste 1 connector).
Note
Verify that the tubing is cut squarely
and remove any burrs.
2. Make a mark [1] on the tubing [2] 0.75

inches (1.9 cm) from the end of the tube.
3. Loosen the nut portion [3] of the connector
(92526-shipped in the pump box) until three
threads are visible.
4. Moisten the end of the tube with water.
5. Push the tube straight through the hole in
the nut on the connector until it bottoms on
the shoulder in the connector. [4]
6. Tighten nut [3] by hand.
Note
Additional tightening should not be
necessary, but 1/4 additional turn
may be added if desired. Over
tightening the nut results in stripped
threads and a fitting that does not
function properly.
Note
A proper assembly does not show
the insertion mark extending beyond
the nut. If the insertion mark is
visible, repeat Step1 -Step6.
7. Assemble the pipe thread pump connector

(92527, shipped in the pump box) to the
assembled connector. [5]
Connect Connector Note

to Waste Pump Perform this Action only if connecting
ARCHITECT ARM to waste pump. If not
connecting to waste pump, go to Perform
Visual Verification.
1. Connect the connector to one of the four

input connectors on the External Waste
Pump. [2]
Connect Polyvinyl Note
Chloride (clear Perform this Action only if connecting
tubing from Waste ARCHITECT ARM to waste pump. If not
2 connector) to connecting to waste pump, go to Perform
Waste Pump Visual Verification.
1. Assemble the 3/8 inch barb pump connector

(92529 in pump box) to the clear tubing
(ARCHITECT ARM waste 2).
2. Secure the connector with a hose clamp
(14331-010 in pump box).
3. Connect the connector to one of the four
input connectors on the external waste
pump [2].
Note
Verify the waste tubing line runs
downhill to the pump connector.
Perform Visual 1. Verify that there are not any male quick
Verification disconnect fittings installed without being
tubed up.
Note
Any unused inlet fittings left
connected to sump pump leak when
the pump is in use.
Verify Waste Pump 1. Move the toggle switch to the ON (to the Switch Positions:
Manual Setting left) position to verify that the pump starts.
2. If the pump comes on, move the toggle ON (left) - Pump is in a manual control mode. The
switch to the AUTO (to the right) position pump remains on until the operator turns the pump
immediately. The pump starts only when the off.
float sensors are tripped. AUTO (right) - Pump turns on as internal floats are
triggered.
OFF (middle)
Note
The pump is designed to run wet. Running
the pump for an extended time without fluid
causes early failure.
Verify Waste Pump 1. Perform three flushes on the system

Automatic Setting consecutively (maintenance procedure 2130
Flush Fluids) and verify that the pump turns
on and pumps the waste fluid to the drain.
P-13 Tubing Connector Inspection
Version - 201985-104_680_1
Purpose To provide information for use in visual inspection of tubing connectors. Module i2000, i2000SR
Materials Required None Time 5 min
Background
Tubing connectors connect tubing segments to pump ports and pipettor probes. The connectors consist of three parts: tubing, a
translucent plastic ferrule, and a black rubber seal. Small defects in the interface between the components can result in leaks or
other fluidics problems. The cross sectional view below shows how the ferrule and seal work together to create a pressure fitting.
Check for 1. Closely inspect the translucent ferrule for proper

Bad Seal seating.
Seating Proper seating [2] - seal is fully inserted in
the ferrule.
Improper seating [1] - seal is not fully
inserted in the ferrule.
Check for 1. Check for any defects at the end of the seal. [1]
Seal Face The seal should extend evenly beyond the tubing
Defect and ferrule. [2]
Note
Nicks, cuts, flats or other defects can
prevent proper closure against the pump
port face.
Check for 1. Verify that the tube does not extend beyond the
Extended ferrule or seal.
Tube
Note
The tubing is relatively non-compressible
and does not close effectively against the
pump port face.
Check for 1. Verify that the tube extends so that it is even with
Recessed the end of the ferrule.
Tube
Note
In this condition, the seal conforms to the
surface, but rolls and flexes under pressure
because it does not properly support the
sealing face.
Check for 1. Verify the tubing is cut squarely.

Bad Tubing
End Cut Note
A tube end that is not cut squarely creates
the same situation as a tube that does not
extend far enough or a tube that extends
too far. At some point around the edge of
the tube face, the seal is either
unsupported or does not reach the pump
port.
Check for 1. Check for burrs and tears on the tubing end.
Deformed
Tubing End Note
Ragged cuts are often the result of using a
dull blade to cut the tubing.
Replacement 1. If any of these conditions are present, replace the
tubing assembly where the damaged tubing
connector is found.
P-15 1 Step/2 Step Service Test
Version - 201985-104_682_2
Purpose Electrical and mechanical verification of system prior to control run. Module i2000, 2000SR
Materials Required 1 Step/2 Step Service Kit (7-78220-01 Kit) Time 30 min
Log On 1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Note

2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return
name field. the system to operator level of access. To do this,
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
field.
Note
Enter the date code in reverse order.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot
screen lists FSE.
Perform 6200 1. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6200 CLI

CLI Terminal Terminal Simulator.
Simulator 2. Enter the following command in the User Input
window install_assay D:\Service\941_004.iae
P, and then select Continue.
3. Enter the following command in the User Input
P, and then select Continue.
4. Enter the following command in the User Input
P, and then select Continue. (i2000SR only)
5. Enter Q in the User Input window.
6. Select Done.
Order Calibration 1. Order a calibration for 1 Step assay and 2 Step

assay.
2. Order a calibration for 2 Step/STAT assay
using a different carrier than the one used
above. (i2000SR only)
Order Patients 1. Order the following Load list:

1 Step Test - 10 replicates
2 Step/STAT Test - 10 replicates
(i2000SR only)
2 Step/STAT Test - 10 replicates
(i2000SR)
Prepare and load 1. Fill 1 Step/2 Step reagent bottles 2/3 to 3/4 full
1 Step /2 Step with tap water.
reagent bottles 2. Load reagent bottles into the reagent carousel.
Run Tests 1. Print the Order List Report.

2. Load the samples into the sample carriers.
3. Load the sample carriers.
4. Initialize the processing module, if the status is
not Running.
5. Initialize the sample handler, if the status is not
Running.
Verify Acceptable 1. Verify that no mechanical errors occur during

Performance the test.
Note
Calibrations will fail and no results are
reported. This procedure only verifies
mechanical functionality.
Remove 1. Remove the reagent bottles. Discard the tap

1 Step/2 Step water.
Reagent Bottles 2. Rinse the bottles and allow them to air dry.
3. Store in kit for reuse.
Perform 6114 1. Delete the 1 Step Test, 2 Step Test, and

Install/Delete 2 Step/STAT Test (i2000SR only). The assay
Assays numbers to delete are:
941
942
943 (i2000SR only)
P-17 Manual Bootcode Download Version - 201985-104_671_1

P-17 Manual Bootcode Download
Purpose Provides method for field service to update the boot code for the SH module controller or the PM Module i2000/SH,
module controller as an alternative to using diagnostic procedure 6008 Controller Configuration. i2000SR/SH
Materials Cables, Debug Kit (7-92394-01) Time 20 min
Required
Access
HyperTerminal Debug Cable Connectors
1. Using the debug cables, connect the 9-pin end of the
Windows
cable to the appropriate card cage connector for the
module to be configured (see Debug Cable
Connectors).
2. Connect the 25-pin end of the debug cable to the
corresponding DIGI cable connector debug cable.
Note
Null-modem is required for use of debug cable
with c8000 RSH card cage.
3. From the Snapshot screen, log on as FSE (refer to

P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure).
4. Select System, then Task Manager.
5. Select New Task and type explorer or select it from
the list.
6. Click OK.
Note
Explorer opens.
7. Minimize the Task Manager window.

8. Locate the Terminals folder in the C:\ drive and
double-click it to open it.
9. Return to the Terminals folder and double-click on
either the iahv.ht (for processing module) or ish.ht
(for SH) to open the desired HyperTerminal window.
iahv.ht communicates with port P7

ish.ht communicates with port P8.
10. Arrange/resize the windows so both are visible.

11. In the HyperTerminal window, press Enter once to
display the prompt (ex., 1> for the processing module
or >0 for the sample handler).
Note
If the prompt does not display, reset the
respective controller board by simultaneously
pressing the two square switches on the
controller board for 1-2 seconds. Use the
HyperTerminal window to monitor the
controller board boot process. If the display
does not occur, check the debug cable
connections. If an error is reported, the
controller board is defective and should be
replaced.
Download
Bootcode
1. Switch (ALT+TAB) to select the Snapshot screen.
2. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6200 CLI
Terminal Simulator.
3. Set the terminal to control the appropriate module by
using one the following commands, and then select
Continue:
set_module 0 for the SH

set_module 1 if the i System module is
module 1 (stand alone)
set_module 2, 3, or 4 if the i System module
is module 2, 3 or 4. Verify that the prompt
returns with the correct module number.
4. Enter the following CLI command and then select

Continue.
boot_file rom.hex
The system accepts the command and returns

the module prompt (ex. 1>).
5. Enter Q in the user input window.

6. Select Done.
Reset the
Controller Controller Board Locations
1. Reset the respective Controller Board by
Board
simultaneously pressing the two square switches on
the Controller Board for 1-2 seconds (see Controller
Board Locations).
2. Watch the IAHV or SSH HyperTerminal window and
verify that the rom.hex information [1] is being
downloaded to the Controller.
WARNING
Do not reset or power down the Controller
Board while the bootcode is being updated!
This causes permanent loss of the
Controller Board flash memory contents.
Note
After the Controller Board downloads the
bootcode it reboots itself.
3. Once the reboot has occurred and the i System or

SH module is at the Stopped state, go to Verify
Correct Controller Bootcode Version.
Verify Correct
Controller
1. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6200 CLI
Bootcode
Terminal Simulator.
Version
2. Type ish_ver or module_ver as appropriate and then
select Continue.
3. On the line CPU Board Boot Code, confirm that the
boot code version on the first portion of the line
matches the boot code version on the second portion
of the line.
Note
If versions do not match, boot code download
was not successful. Repeat this procedure or
replace the controller board.
P-18 Waste Pump Decontamination Version - 201985-104_644_1

P-18 Waste Pump Decontamination
Purpose This procedure is used to decontaminate the waste pump for service or return. Module Waste Pump
Materials Required 0.5% Sodium Hypochlorite, gloves, disposable towels Time 20 min
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Electronics No service of electronics is performed at this time.

Outside Surface Decontamination Only
surfaces
Inside Tub For the purpose of checking floats, gloves are required. If failure analysis / or return to the vendor is
required the steps to decontaminate the tub are:
Empty tub and rinse bottom half of tub with 0.5% Sodium Hypochlorite, allow to air dry, then rinse
with water.
Squirt 0.5% Sodium Hypochlorite on bottom of top housing, allow to air dry, then rinse with water.
Air dry or dry with disposable towels as required.
P-23 Vacuum System Troubleshooting Information Version - 201985-104_650_1

P-23 Vacuum System Troubleshooting Information
Purpose To aid in troubleshooting errors and observed problems related to the vacuum system. Module i2000,
i2000SR
Materials Fittings kit, ARM (7-78175-01) Time 2.0 -
Required Decon kit, ARM (7-78172-01) 3.0 hrs
Vacuum Gauge capable of measuring vacuum in the 0-30" mercury range (example: Fluke PV350
available through the CELL-DYN product line)
6" piece of TYGON tubing with an inner diameter of 3/8"
Note
Follow the suggestions in the ARCHITECT Advisor database prior to performing this procedure.
The following scenarios could indicate a faulty vacuum system:
Error codes, observed problems:
Wash Aspiration errors, error codes 3700-3799.

Vacuum errors, error codes 5300-5349.
Failing 3175 Vacuum System Test, Error 2200, Procedure failed.
Generic assay precision issues.
This procedure focuses on three main categories of vacuum problems:
Vacuum pump is faulty

Vacuum system is leaking.
Vacuum system is blocked/clogged.
Action Steps
Reference
Assemble
Vacuum 1. Locate the decontamination manifold [1]
System from the Decontamination Kit.
Troubleshooting 2. Remove the gray quick-disconnect fitting
Manifold from one of the tubing ends. [2]
3. Locate the white female quick-disconnect
from the ARM Fittings Kit (78175).
4. Install the white female quick-disconnect
to the open tubing end on the
decontamination manifold. [4]
Determine
Vacuum Gauge 1. Determine the vacuum gauge used.
If using a Fluke PV350, go to

Connect Fluke PV350.
If using another vacuum gauge,
go to Connect Standard Vacuum
Gauge to Manifold.
Connect Fluke
PV350 Note
This action is only required when using a
Fluke PV350 Pressure Vacuum Module.
1. Unscrew the gray female quick-

disconnect fitting from the manifold. [1]
2. Install the Fluke PV350 to the middle of
the decontamination manifold where the
gray female quick-disconnect fitting was
previously removed. [2]
Note
This troubleshooting aid can be
hooked up between the vacuum
pump and vacuum filter, vacuum
filter and vacuum accumulator, or
directly to the vacuum pump.
3. Connect the Fluke PV350 to a

multimeter.
4. Set the multimeter to the mV scale (the
Fluke PV350 outputs 0-100mV,
1mv/Unit).
5. Power ON the multimeter.
6. Set up the Fluke PV350 for in Hg [3] and
English. [4]
7. Use the adjustment feature on the Fluke
PV350 and adjust [5] the reading on the
Fluke PV350 to read 0 mV.
Note
Verify that the Fluke PV350 has a
good battery, otherwise it may not
read correctly.
8. Go to Preparation.
Connect
Standard Note
Vacuum Gauge This action is only required when using a
to Manifold standard vacuum gauge.
1. Locate the decontamination tubing from

the ARM Decontamination Kit
(78172). [3]
2. Remove the white male quick-disconnect
from the decontamination tubing.
3. Connect the gray male quick-disconnect
to the gray female quick-disconnect on
the middle of the decontamination
manifold. [4]
4. Connect the other end of the
decontamination tubing to the vacuum
gauge. [5]
Note
This troubleshooting aid can be
hooked up between the vacuum
pump and vacuum filter, vacuum
filter and vacuum accumulator, or
directly to the vacuum pump.
Note
Depending on the vacuum gauge
you are using, other adapters or
clamps may be necessary to
obtain an appropriately sealed
connection.
Preparation
1. Log on as FSE.
Open the Pump

Rack 1. Remove the rear panels on the
processing module.
2. Open the pump rack.
Perform
Vacuum Pump 1. Locate the quick-disconnects connecting
Test the vacuum pump to the vacuum filter.
2. Disconnect the vacuum pump tubing from
the vacuum filter.
3. Connect one end of the vacuum
troubleshooting aid to the vacuum pump
tubing end [1] and leave the other end of
the vacuum aid disconnected.
Note
The quick-disconnect fitting stays
shut when nothing is connected to
it.
4. Perform diagnostics procedure 6200 CLI

Terminal Simulator.
Note
See CLI Commands.
5. In the User Input field, type the command
SET_MODULE x (where "x" is the
required module (1 or 2)), followed by
Continue.
6. In the User Input field, type the command
DIO 25 SET 1, followed by Continue.
7. Listen for the vacuum pump to turn on.
8. Watch the vacuum gauge, and verify that
a vacuum of approximately 20-23"
mercury is achieved (this typically takes
less than 5 seconds).
9. Once the vacuum has stabilized at its
maximum value, type the command DIO
25 SET 0 in the User Input field, followed
by Continue.
the vacuum is bleeding off smoothly (this
typically takes less than 5 seconds).
If the specification is met, continue

with Perform Vacuum Accumulator
Leak Test.
If the specification is not met,
either a bad pump, or a bad
tubing/fitting to the pump is
indicated. Replace components as
required.
Perform
Vacuum 1. Locate the quick-disconnect at the
Accumulator vacuum filter.
Leak Test 2. Connect the free end of the vacuum
troubleshooting aid to the vacuum filter
side [2].
3. At the SCC, in the User Input field, type
the command DIO 25 SET 1, followed by
Continue.
mercury is achieved.
25 SET 0 in the User Input field, followed
by Continue.
7. Watch the vacuum gauge again, and
verify that a vacuum of >18" mercury is
maintained for >60 seconds.
If the test passes, go to Check for

Blockage.
If this test fails, go to Verify
Vacuum Tubing Fits Tightly.
Note
If the test still fails after
performing Verify Vacuum
Tubing Fits Tightly, there
may be a leak at the
vacuum accumulator,
vacuum filter, vacuum
tubing and/or vacuum
vessels. Go to Prepare
Vacuum Tube Plugging Aid.
Verify Vacuum
Tubing Fits 1. Rotate the tubing carefully at the
Tightly connection point to the fitting. If it rotates
easily, remove the tubing from the fitting,
trim off the edge with a box cutter knife,
and reattach the tubing. Verify that the
tubing has a tight fit.
2. Repeat this activity for all the tube
connection points.
3. Go to Perform Vacuum Accumulator
Leak Test.
Prepare
Vacuum Tube Note
Plugging Aid This action is only required for the
Vacuum Vessel Leak test.
Note
This describes one example on how to
plug/seal a tubing end.
1. Locate the black T-fitting [1] from the

ARM Fitting Kit.
2. Locate a piece of tubing about 6"
(~ 15cm) long, with an inside diameter of
3/8" (1cm).
3. Loop the tubing around the two thicker
ends of the T-fitting. [2]
Note
The thinner end of the T-fitting can
now be plugged into an open end
of a vacuum tubing [3] to seal it
off.
Perform
Vacuum Vessel Note
Leak Test This step is only required when the
Vacuum Accumulator Leak test fails.
Note
Begin this test with the vacuum vessel
beside Wash Zone 1.
1. Remove the vacuum tubing [1] (the thick

reinforced tubing) from the vacuum
vessel.
Note
The reinforced vacuum tubing is
usually very hard to get off due to
salt build up and a tight fit. Use
tap water on the tubing connection
to help loosen up the salt build up
around the connection point, prior
to rotating and pulling off the
tubing.
2. Plug/seal the tubing end, using the

plugging aid described in Prepare
Vacuum Tube Plugging Aid, or similar.
3. At the SCC, in the User Input field, type
the command DIO 25 SET 1, followed by
Continue.
Note
See CLI Commands for
information regarding CLI
commands.

mercury is achieved.
25 SET 0 in the User Input field,
followed by Continue.
7. Watch the vacuum gauge again, and
verify that a vacuum of > 18" mercury is
maintained for > 60 seconds.
8. Remove the plugging aid/clamp from the
vacuum tubing end.
9. Reconnect the vacuum tubing to the
vacuum vessel.
If the specification is met (the

vacuum is maintained), the
isolated vacuum vessel is leaking.
Replace the vacuum vessel and/or
solenoid DC driver board, as
appropriate.
If the specification is not met (the
vacuum is not maintained), repeat
Step1 through Step9 for the other
two vacuum vessels, until the
leaking vacuum vessel is located.
Note
If the test fails even after
you have tested all vacuum
vessels, the vacuum tubing
from the vacuum vessels to
the vacuum accumulator
may be leaking.
Replace
Tubing/Connect 1. Replace all the vacuum tubing.
Filter 2. Disconnect the troubleshooting aid from
the vacuum pump and the vacuum filter.
3. Connect the vacuum filter to the vacuum
pump tubing.
Check for
Blockage 1. Visually inspect the areas around the
vacuum tubing connection points, and
vacuum filter, for possible blockage/clogs.
Areas to inspect:
Vacuum tubing to vacuum vessel

connection points.
Vacuum tubing to vacuum
accumulator connection points.
Vacuum filter.
2. Clear any blockage as appropriate.
Check Vacuum
Vessel(s) 1. At the SCC, select Quit, followed by
Operation Done to exit 6200 CLI Terminal
Simulator.
2. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids, and verify
that the pipettors are being properly
washed at the active wash cups, without
flooding or splashing.
3. Perform 1251 Residual Volume WZ 1,
and verify that the RVs do not contain
any fluid.
4. Perform 1252 Residual Volume WZ 2,
and verify that the RVs do not contain
any fluid.
Close Pump
Rack 1. Close the pump rack.
2. Replace the rear panels on the
Processing Module.
Verification
1. Perform diagnostic procedure 3175
Vacuum System Test.
2. Perform procedure P-24 Precision Run.
3. Log off as FSE.
P-24 Precision Run
Version - 201985-104_652_3
At the completion of this VP: After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
Purpose The precision verification is used to verify that the instrument is functioning properly prior to releasing the system to Module i2000,
the customer. i2000SR
The procedure consists of calibrating and running specific assays with multiple replicates to test the pipetting, wash
system, and optical precision of the instrument. The acceptance criterion is listed in the assay package insert and
will determine if the instrument has passed or failed the verification.
Materials TSH (1 set or reagents) Time 90 min
Required B-hCG (1 set or reagents)
Trigger/Pre-Trigger (1 Bottle each)
Wash Buffer (The wash buffer bottle should be full)
TSH Calibrators (1 box of Calibrator)
B-hCG Calibrators (1 box of Calibrator)
TSH Controls (1 Bottle of low Control)
B-hCG Controls (1 Bottle of low Control)
Assay Disk (1)
Sample Carriers ( Set of at least 4 sequentially numbered carriers)
RV/Sample Cups ( 1 bag each)
Load Bulk 1. Verify that all bulk solutions are loaded and have been updated in the
Solutions supplies screen.
and 2. Load the appropriate reagents. (TSH, B-hCG)
Reagents
Verify TSB 1. Verify that all required Technical Service Bulletins have been
Status completed.
Install 6114 1. Logon as FSE.

Install/Delete 2. Select System Diagnostics.
Assays 3. Select the radio button (5) for module 5 (SCC).
4. Select Utilities tab, then select 6114 Install/Delete Assays.
5. Select F5 Perform, then OK followed by Install.
6. Select i2000, Proceed, All Groups.
Note
Enter the appropriate number for the following assays: TSH, B-
hCG (the numbers should be separated by a comma).
Example: 3,11
7. Select Continue, Return to Previous Menu, Return to Main Menu,

Exit, and Done.
Configure 1. At the snapshot screen select SYSTEM,

Single CONFIGURATION. Select QC-Cal settings, QC-Single Analyte.
Analyte 2. Select TSH and then select Configure F6.
Control
Precision Note
File Use the arrow button to scroll down if needed.
3. Click on the Drop Down Menu Box next to Lot no:

4. Select NEW LOT and type Service Precision.
Note
Enter the information contained in table below in the New Level
Screen.
5. Select Add Level then select Done.

6. Deselect the previously entered assay.
7. Repeat steps 2-5 for B-hCG.
Perform Run 1. Select the SSH and the i2000 processing module on the Snapshot
Initialization screen.
on 2. Select F8-Run.
Processing
Module and Note
Sample To save time, while the processing module is performing the run
Handler initialization, enter calibration and control orders.
Order Note
Calibration Gather two consecutively numbered carriers. Consecutively numbered
carriers are required for six point calibration assays.
1. Select ORDERS, CALIBRATION ORDER

2. Type in the Carrier Bar Code ID Number (C) and an unused Position
Number (P).
3. Select Assay TSH, and B-hCG, then select F2-ADD ORDER.
Note
Use the arrow button to scroll down if needed.
4. Select Exit.
Print the 1. Print the Order List to determine the minimum sample volume required
Order List per calibrator.
and Load 2. Select Orders from the Snapshot screen.
Calibrators 3. Select Order Status and then select Print F4.
into the 4. Select Order List Report and then select Done.
Sample 5. Pipette the appropriate calibrator into the sample cups and load in the
Carrier correct C/P(carrier/position) per the Order List Report.
Note
The Order List provides the correct amount of calibrator to be
dispensed into each sample cup.
6. Place the Carrier onto the sample loader.
Verify 1. When the run has completed, select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and
Calibration then select Calibration status.
2. Verify that the Cal Status for TSH, BhCG are listed as Active.
Order 1. Select ORDERS, CONTROL ORDER then select SINGLE ANALYTE. Note

Precision 2. Type in the Carrier Bar Code ID Number (C) and an unused Position The Precision Control was created earlier
Run Number (P) during the Configure Single Analyte Control
3. Select Assay(TSH), Lot(Service Precision), and Level(FSRPrec 1). Activity.
Note
Use the arrow button to scroll down if needed.
4. Select F5 ASSAY OPTIONS.
Note
In the number of replicates, UNDILUTED box enter 10.
5. Select Done and then select F2 ADD ORDER.

6. Repeat steps 3-6 for TSH. This will create a total of 20 samples for
each assay.
7. Repeat steps 2-6 for twice for B-hGC. This will create a total of 20
samples for each assay.
Note
Carrier and position will be automatically assigned when each
order is added.
8. Once all orders have been placed, print the Order List.
9. Select Orders from the Snapshot screen.
10. Select Order Status and then select Print F4.
11. Select Order List Report and then select Done.
Load Low 1. Pipette the correct amount of low control for each assay and place the
Controls into cups in the correct carrier positions, as per the printed Order List.
Carriers
Note
The Order List provides the correct amount of control to be
dispensed into each sample cup.
2. Place the Carriers into the sample handler.

3. If the modules are not in the Run mode select the SSH and i2000 and
then select F8-Run.
Print QC 1. Select QC Summary from the Snapshot screen.

Summary 2. Select the appropriate module number radio button.
Report 3. Select (highlight) the assays that were run for Service Precision (level-
FSRprec 1).Select Print F4.
4. Verify that the Selected Items radio button is selected. Select QC
Summary Report, then select Done.
Confirm 1. Confirm the precision results are acceptable using the Total %CV
Precision value listed in the appropriate assay package insert.
Data Results
i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-28 Power Supply Verification Version - 201985-104_657_1

P-28 Power Supply Verification
Purpose Use to verify the operation of the power supply after repair or replacement. Module i2000, i2000SR
Materials Required Multimeter Time 15 min.
WARNING
Verify Voltage
and Frequency
1. Verify the voltage [1] and the frequency [2] connectors are set
Settings
to the correct values.
Note
Failure to perform this step causes damage and/or
incorrect operation of the module.
Connect Power
Cord
1. Connect line cord to the power supply and to the power
outlet.
Power ON
Processing Note
Module The system control center power must be ON with the
Snapshot screen displayed prior to turning on the processing
1. Power ON the Processing Module.
Verify LED
1. Verify the 36v OK and Boost OK LEDs are lit.
2. Verify the +5v, ±12v, 24v, and Boost OK LEDs are lit.
1. Verify the voltage at the test points.
Verify Voltage
Test Points
Verify PM State
1. Verify that the processing module goes to the Stopped state
Test All Off

Switch
1. Power OFF the processing module using the All Off switch in
the front of the module.
Install Panel
1. Replace the back panel of the power supply.
2. Push the back panel downward to lock it to the power supply
chassis.
4. Replace the four (4) screws securing the back panel to the
Power ON
System
2. Perform Startup procedure.
Verify Vacuum
Pump and
1. Verify that the vacuum pump turns on during startup.
Refrigerator
2. Verify that the refrigerator is running by opening the top cover
and verifying that cold air is blowing from the cooler duct.
3. Verify that the heater card LEDs indicate that the heaters are
powered and heating.
Verify Ion Fan

(i2000 only)
1. Verify that the ion fan is running and that the ion probe LED
in the hopper is lit.
Verify LED
Function
1. Verify the 36v LEDs are lit.
2. Verify the +5v, +/-12v, and 24v LEDs are lit.
3. Verify that the PM goes to the Ready or Warming state.
Temperature
Test
1. Perform 3520 Temperature Status.
P-35 Pre-Installation Power Measurement Procedure (i2000) Version - 201985-104_710_2

P-35 Pre-Installation Power Measurement Procedure (i2000)
Purpose This procedure is used to verify power requirements during the pre-site, installation, or an Module i2000
onsite visit.
Materials Multimeter Time 5
Required min
WARNING
Measure
with
1. Plug the Black wire lead into the port labeled "Com" on the bottom of the
Breaker
digital volt meter and plug the Red wire lead into the port labeled "+" on
Closed
the bottom of the digital volt meter.
(Power
2. Select the setting for AC voltage reading (usually represented by the
ON)
symbol V~).
Note
The display should read VAC.
3. Measure the power readings at the outlet (see below) and record in the
breaker on section of the Pre-Installation Checklist.
WARNING Note
Line 1 and 2 contain electrical current! Never touch the Conduit measurement can be at
exposed metal probes of the digital meter with your fingers, the metal box the outlet is in,
or touch the two probes together at the exposed metal areas, the metal pipe the electrical
or an electrical shock could occur. wires are running up the wall in,
or the outlet faceplate screw.
Measure Line I (red) to Line 2 (black)
Measure Line I (red) to Ground (black)
Measure Line 2 (red) to Ground (black)
Measure Ground (black) to Conduit (red)
Measure
with
1. With the assistance of the lab personnel, locate the instrument breaker
Breaker
switch. Be sure the switch is properly identified as controlling the Abbott
Open
instrument (see Pre-Installation Checklist Power Requirements for circuit
(Power
breaker identification and proper power line amperage). A 220V breaker
OFF)
requires a double switch.
2. Flip the breaker switch to OFF.
Note
No other analyzers, lights or outlets should have gone off since
this is a dedicated power line.
3. Go back to the outlet, measure the power and record the readings in the
breaker off section of the Pre-Installation Checklist.
4. Verify the readings fall within the specification ranges listed in the Pre-
Installation Checklist.
5. If the readings are outside of the specification range, the customer should
contact a qualified electrician for resolution.
P-36 Pre-Installation Power Measurement Procedure (i2000SR) Version - 201985-104_711_2

P-36 Pre-Installation Power Measurement Procedure (i2000SR)
Purpose This procedure is used to verify power requirements during the pre-site, installation, or an Module i2000SR
onsite visit.
Materials Multimeter Time 5 min
Required
WARNING
Measure
Voltage with
1. Plug the Black wire lead into the port labeled "Com" on the
Breaker
bottom of the digital volt meter and plug the Red wire lead into
Closed
the port labeled "+" (plus) on the bottom of the digital volt
(Power ON)
meter.
2. Select the setting for AC voltage reading (usually represented
by the symbol V~).
Note
The display should read VAC.
3. Measure the power readings at the outlet (see below) and

record in the Breaker Closed section of the Pre-Site Note
Checklist. Conduit measurement can be at the
metal box the outlet is in, the metal
WARNING pipe the electrical wires are running up
Line I and 2 contain electrical current! Never touch the wall in, or the outlet faceplate
the exposed metal probes of the digital meter with screw.
your fingers, or touch the two probes together at
the exposed metal areas, or an electrical shock
could occur.
4. Verify that the readings fall within the ranges specified in the
Pre-Site Checklist.
Measure
Voltage with
1. Locate the instrument breaker switch. See the Pre-Installation
Breaker Open
Checklist Power Requirements for circuit breaker identification
(Power OFF)
and proper power line amperage. A 220V breaker requires a
double switch.
2. Flip the breaker switch to OFF.
Note
No other analyzers, lights or outlets should have gone
off since this is a dedicated power line.
3. Go back to the outlet, measure the power and record the

readings in the breaker off section of the Pre-Installation
Checklist.
4. Verify that all readings fall within the specification ranges listed
in the Pre-Installation Checklist.
5. If the readings are outside of the specification range, the
customer should contact a qualified electrician for resolution.
P-37 Card Cage Fan Filter Cleaning Procedure Version - 201985-104_713_1

P-37 Card Cage Fan Filter Cleaning Procedure
Purpose This procedure is used to clean the card cage fan filter. Module i2000, i2000SR
Materials Required Spare Filter from customer's accessory kit Time 5 min
Preparation
1. To perform this procedure you must have a clean dry filter available to put in place of the filter
to be cleaned.
Remove Card
Cage Fan Filter
1. Locate card cage fan filter located under the bottom of the instrument, below the card cage on
the right side, near the front of the instrument.
2. Remove the filter by grasping the ring on the filter, pushing the filter back, and pulling down.
Clean Filter
1. Clean the filter.
If a vacuum source is available, vacuum the normally exposed side of the filter to
remove the dust/lint buildup.
If a vacuum source is not available, locate a large sink and flush water from the back
side until it is clean. Let filter dry for five (5) hours (minimum) before using it in an
instrument.
Install Cleaned
Filter
1. Insert a new or cleaned and dry filter at an approximately 45 degree angle under the card cage,
push up to level, and let it slide forward into place.
P-39 Wash Zone Cleaning Version - 96756-111_260_1

P-39 Wash Zone Cleaning
To provides instruction on cleaning the external, internal, and dispenses nozzles on the Wash Zone i2000,
Purpose manifolds. Module i2000SR
Note
The nozzle area on the underside of the Wash Zone Manifolds can accumulate buffer salts.
This buildup can affect system performance and needs to be cleaned every 15,000 tests.
Cotton Tip Applicators 20 min

Materials Disposable Transfer Pipettes Time
Required Squeeze Bottle
Warm DI Water
Compressed Air
Valve removal/install Tool
See Parts section below
Note
It is recommended that this procedure be performed every 15,000 tests. Maintenance and Diagnostics 6000 is used to
determine the number of tests initiated and completed. This record needs to be maintained in order to schedule the next
procedure. On every service call the FSR must determine the number of test completed since the last cleaning.
Parts
Although no parts are required, it is recommended that item 1 (quantity 2) and 2 in the table below are available.
Item # Part Number Name Contents
7-64407-01 Gasket, Manifold Valve, Kit 10 Gaskets

1
7-77612-01 Valve, Manifold Kit Valve, Valve Removal Tool and 2 Gaskets
2
7-78320-01 Wash Zone Manifold Manifold, 10 Gaskets and Valve Removal Tool
3
7-78328-10 Wash Zone Manifold Assembly Assembled Manifold, Drain Tubing, Valves and Gaskets
4
Note
Gaskets should be replaced if leaking is observed or if they are nicked, torn or deformed. Always install new gaskets when a
valve is replaced.

Prerequisite For further information on removal of internal covers,
refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
Section 9: Service and maintenance, Subsection:
status.
Preparation
2. Warm a supply of DI water.
Perform
6000
1. Perform 6000 Retrieve Test Counts and record tests
Retrieve
initiated and tests completed.
Test Counts
Note
If this is the initial visit, create a tracking record
for this system in accordance with process
established within your service organization.
If the difference is less than 15,000, or this is a

new install, do not perform this procedure.
If the number of tests completed is greater than
15,000 tests, determine the difference between
the current and last recorded entries.
If the difference is greater than 15,000, go to
Remove Wash Zones 1 and 2.
Remove
Wash
1. Remove wash zone 1 & wash zone 2 manifolds and
Zones 1
separate them from the instrument (G1.05
and 2
MANIFOLD,WZ,ASM).
Remove
Wash Motor
1. Remove the wash zone motor assemblies, probes, and
Assemblies
heater from the wash zone manifold assemblies (G1.03
MOTOR,WZ,ASM).
Inspect
Manifold Field Orderable Parts
1. At the top of each manifold, inspect the area around
Top Surface
each valve.
Note
If there is any build up of salt around the base of
the valve, the quality of the valve, o-rings and
manifold is questionable. The valve and its
associated o-rings must be replaced. See Field
Orderable Parts.
Remove
Wash Zone
1. On a flat surface, provide a work area by spreading
Valves
absorbent material.
Note
Change the absorbent material as necessary
during the procedure.
2. Lay the wash zones on the absorbent material.

3. Remove Valves 1, 2 & 3 and their gaskets (O-rings)
(E3.03 VALVE,SYRINGE and MANIFOLD) and set them
aside.
Note
Replace gaskets if leaking is observed or if they
are nicked, torn, or deformed. Always install new
gaskets when a valve is replaced.
Prepare
Warm DI
1. Prepare approximately 250mL of warm DI water.
Water
Note
Refill and reheat the water during the procedure,
as required.
Clean
Manifold
1. Using warm DI water, squirt bottle, cotton applicator, and
Surface
wipes, remove the buffer salts build up from the
Areas
underside of the manifolds.
2. Remove any buffer salts from the upper surface.
Clean
Manifold
1. Use a cotton applicator to clean the interior of each
Valve
valve opening and gasket area.
Openings
Prepare
Nozzle
1. Flare the end of a disposable transfer pipette so that it
Cleaning
will fit over the middle nozzle on the bottom of the
Tool
manifold.
Note
If a disposable transfer pipette that seals around
the manifold dispense nozzle can't be located,
attach a length of tubing to the end of a
disposable syringe.
2. Fill the modified disposable transfer pipette with warm DI

water.
Clean
Middle Caution
Dispense When flushing the manifold in the following steps, a
Nozzle stream of fluid will leave the open valve ports. This fluid
must be directed in a safe direction.
1. Attach the disposable transfer pipette to the middle

nozzle of Wash Zone 1 manifold and squeeze the
bulbous end of the pipette.
2. Observe the stream of fluid as it leaves the valve
opening.
If the fluid stream is straight continuous stream

the manifold fluid path is clear.
If the fluid stream is erratic, refill the nozzle-
cleaning tool and repeat this action until the
stream is clear.
Clean
Outside
1. Locate the outside nozzle with the same tip diameter as
Nozzle
the middle nozzle.
2. Use the cleaning procedure in Clean Middle Dispense
Nozzle to clean this nozzle.
Clean 2nd
Outside
1. Prepare another nozzle cleaning tool for the remaining
Nozzle
outside nozzle (it has a larger dispense tip).
2. Use the cleaning procedure in Clean Middle Dispense
Nozzle to clean this nozzle.
Flush
Manifold
1. Flush all nozzles of both manifolds with compressed air.
Openings
with
Compressed
Air
Dry
Manifold
1. Use wipes and compressed air to dry the entire
Exterior
manifolds.
Surfaces
Dry Valve #
4 Connector
1. Use wipes and compressed air to dry the connector and
wires for valve #4.
Final
Cleaning
1. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris
from the wipes in the manifold openings and surfaces.
Install Wash
Zone Valves
1. Re-install valve gaskets (o-rings) and valves on both
and O-rings
manifolds (G1.03 MOTOR,WZ,ASM).
2. Inspect the gaskets as they are installed.
Note
If the valves mating surface or gaskets are
nicked, torn or deformed, replace them. If new O-
rings (64407) are available, it is recommended
that they be installed. Always install new gaskets
when a valve is replaced.
Install Wash
Zone
1. Re-install manifolds, motors, and heater assemblies
Manifolds
(G1.05 MANIFOLD,WZ,ASM).
2. Verify that each wash zone probe is straight and is
centered on the process path opening.
Note
A bent wash zone probe adversely affects system
performance.
3. Verify that the aspiration probe is straight and centered

over the opening.

1. Replace the appropriate internal components cover(s), if
Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
previously removed.
Note

Startup procedure.
Perform
Installation Note
Verification During verification, verify that no fluid is leaking from
valves, supply and drain tubing connections.
1. Perform all verifications described in G1.05

MANIFOLD,WZ,ASM which includes the following:
2130 Flush Fluids

2151 Prime Wash Zones
2006 Wash Zone 1 Check., or 2007 Wash Zone 2
Check
Perform Curve Verification
2. Perform 2050 WZ Aspiration Test.
Perform
Assay Run
1. Perform a five replicate control run on each level of
bHCG controls.
2. Calculate the mean, sd, and CVs and verify that the CVs
are under 10%.
Note
If CVs are out of range, refer to Abbott System
Advisor, i2000 Series for troubleshooting
information.
P-40 RV Loader Board #6 Calibration Version - 96756-111_262_1

P-40 RV Loader Board #6 Calibration
Purpose Provides calibration instructions and troubleshooting information for Sensor Board #6 used on Module i2000,
the RV Loader assembly. i2000SR
Materials Compressed air Time 15 min
Required
Links
Calibration
Calibration Troubleshooting
Calibration
Preparation
1. Turn ON the power to the processing module.
Note
Calibration may be done prior to
initialization, or in the Offline or Stopped
mode.
Prepare for
Calibration Note
Calibration should be performed during system
installation and repeated yearly after sensor
cleaning (during preventative maintenance).
Note
Sensor life is related to the time the power is
on and the amount of dust that builds up.
1. With processing module power ON, remove

the RV transport shield (A1.11 SHIELD, RV
TRANSPORT).
2. Remove all RVs from the RV Transfer
Assembly.
Note
Remove any RV that may be present at
the insertion point in the process path.
3. Clean the two (2) sensors (load and Insert
points) located near the process path end of
the RV transport.
4. Clean the drop point sensor located at the
right end of the RV transport near the RV
wheel.
Initiate
Calibration Note Calibration Board Location
Do not allow bright light to fall on the sensors
(can cause calibration errors).
1. Locate the calibration switch under sensor

board #6 (located behind the cable connector).
Note
The calibration switch has a normal
position (toward the RV loader wheel)
and a calibrate position (toward the
process path).
2. Ensure that the power LED is ON and all

sensor LEDs are OFF.
3. Move the calibration switch [1] to the calibrate
position (toward the process path) and observe
the three sensor LEDs. [2]
Note
Sensor LEDs are OFF as the board
begins self calibration [3].
Note
Each sensor LED lights as its channel
completes the calibration cycle [4, 5].
The complete sequence should take Calibration LED Sequences
less than one minute.
4. Verify that the yellow cal LED and all green

sensor LEDs are ON [6].
If the calibration is successful, go to

Return to Normal Operation.
If any other combination displays (failed
calibration), go to Calibration
Troubleshooting.
Note
Calibration LED Sequences
represents a calibration phase,
but typical calibrations may occur
too rapidly to see the individual
steps.
Return to
Normal
1. Move the calibration switch back to the normal
Operation
position.
2. Verify that the cal LED and all sensor LEDs
(1, 2, and 3) turn OFF.
3. If any LED other than Pwr remains on, repeat
the calibration process. Go to Calibration
Troubleshooting if a second failure occurs.
Verification
For information on the startup procedure, refer to the
1. Change the status of the Processing Module ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
and Sample Handler from Stopped to Ready instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
by performing P-248 Startup and Shutdown.
2. Log on as FSE.
3. Perform 3140 RV Load/Unload Test.
Calibration Troubleshooting
Calibration
Overview Calibration Failure
1. The calibration was not successful if:
The yellow cal LED did not come ON within

one minute of starting the cycle. [1, 3]
The yellow cal LED is ON and one or more
green sensor LEDs are OFF. [2]
Verify
Sensor Normal Use
1. Remove the RV transport shield (A1.11 SHIELD, RV
Operation
TRANSPORT).
2. Remove the RVs nearest the process path (insertion
point).
3. Verify that the sensors are blocked from stray light,
that there are no obstructions in the sense path or
bits of dirt on the lenses.
Note
The sensor number can be matched to
function with the following listing:
Sensor 1 = Drop Point
Sensor 2 = Load Point
Sensor 3 = Insert Point
4. Move the calibration switch to the normal operation

position (toward the RV loader wheel) and verify that
the three sensor LEDs are OFF.
5. Check the channel operation by alternately blocking
and opening the sensor path with an RV.
6. If the sensor LED for that channel goes ON when
blocked and OFF when open, the sensor channel
function is working.
Repeat
Calibration
1. Attempt a second calibration.
If the second calibration procedure passes,

place the calibration switch back in the
normal position and go to Verification.
If the second calibration attempt fails again on
the same channel, install a new sensor board
#6.
Note
If the calibration fails, but the channel
sensor check passes, the board will
work satisfactorily for a period of time,
but a replacement should be ordered.
There is no further calibration range
available on this channel and it will
begin to produce erratic results as the
LED ages.
P-42 UPS Installation
Version - 96756-111_255_1
Purpose Follow this procedure to install a TOSHIBA 1400XL Plus Series Uninterruptible Power System Module i2000,
(UPS) on the ARCHITECT i System. i2000SR
Materials Multimeter Time 20 min

Required
Preparation 1. Use the ramp provided to remove the UPS from its
pallet.
2. Place the UPS between the SCC cart and the
process module.
Note
All of the cabling from the SCC, HUB and
modem reach the UPS along with the
power cords from the process module(s) if
placed next to the SCC cart. A power strip
(not included) may be required to
accommodate all peripherals devices.
Measure Site 1. Measure the voltage at the laboratory power

Power receptacle.
Note
The voltage measured depends on the
standard for the region and the quality of
distribution within the site. Typically, voltage
is 208 VAC, 220 VAC, 230 VAC or 240
VAC. A UPS should not be used to
compensate for poor site wiring and poor
distribution.
2. If the voltage measured is 208 VAC go to Check

UPS Bypass circuit section below.
Prepare for 1. Verify that the UPS is disconnected from the site
Input Power power receptacle.
Configuration 2. Turn off all circuit breakers on the rear of the UPS.
Caution
Potential shock hazard. The UPS contains
internal batteries that will supply a high
voltage with power off and disconnected.
3. Remove the two (2) front screws and the two (2)
rear screws that secure the top cover, and remove
the cover.
4. Remove the eight (8) screws that secure the left
side cover and remove the cover.
Input Power 1. At the internal batteries, use insulated pliers to

Configuration disconnect the negative (black) wire [1].
Caution
The batteries have high voltage.
2. Use tape to insulate the battery wire to prevent it

from grounding out.
3. Bleed off the stored voltage in the DC capacitors
(upper right corner) by connecting a volt ohm
meter to the red and black wires of the DC
capacitors. [2]
4. Continue to hold the meter leads until the voltage
decreases close to zero.
5. Remove the transformer input red wire labeled
208v from the MOV circuit board. [3]
6. From the chassis wall [4], find the wire labeled
with the value nearest the measured site VAC
power reading.
7. Cut the tie wrap on the chassis wall and route the
wire to the MOV circuit board. [3]
8. Replace the 208v wire with the appropriate 220,
230 or 240 wire and place it on the MOV circuit
board. [3]
9. Tighten the nut to secure the wire.
10. Use a tie wrap to secure the protective wrap
around the cover that protects the red wire labeled
208V.
11. Sleeve and tie-wrap all voltage selection wires
(that are not being used) to the chassis mount [4]
so they are not loose inside the UPS.
Note
It is normal for a spark to occur in Step12.
12. Using insulated pliers, reconnect the battery

lead [1]
13. Replace all covers.
Set UPS 1. At the rear of the UPS, use the switches located at
Voltage the communication port [1], to match the output
Output selection to the input selection setting.
Power
Selection
Check UPS 1. Turn ON (up) the 30 amp input breaker. [1]
Bypass 2. The Line [11] and Bypass [12] LED indicators
Circuit illuminate after 30 seconds.
Note
If the green LEDs and the yellow alarm
LED do not illuminate, refer to the supplied
user manual.
3. Switch ON the output circuit breaker. [2]

4. Verify that the AC voltage output of the UPS is
approximately 208 VAC.
Note
If the UPS goes into the By-Pass mode, the
FSR may have to re-jumper the instrument
power supply to match the wall receptacle
VAC. Go to Set Power Configuration on
Processing Module.
Turn On 1. At the front of the UPS, press the ON switch. [8]
UPS 2. Verify that at least three battery charge [5] LEDs
(green) illuminate.
Note
Below is a description of the front panel
switches and LEDs
OVERLOAD [1] - (yellow) Indicates that the

UPS is overloaded.
LOAD [2] - (green) Indicates the relative
amount of output load.
BYPASS [3] - (yellow) Indicates UPS is Off
(inverter is bypassed) and output voltage is
from site power.
INVERTER [4] - (green) Indicates when
UPS is ON (inverter is operational).
BATTERY [5] - (green) Indicates relative
percent of battery charge. When site power
is off, the green LEDs indicates amount of
battery charge and relative battery time
remaining.
LINE [6] - (green) Indicates site power and
input breakers are On.
ALARM [7] - (yellow) with audible signal.
Indicates site power is Off or UPS has a
fault. Reset audible signal by pressing
BYPASS switch.
INVERTOR ON [8] - Turns ON inverter.
After a delay of approximately five (5)
seconds the BYPASS indicator extinguishes
and the INVERTER illuminates.
INVERTOR OFF [9] - Output power
supplied by the UPS Battery backup is now
available.
Connect 1. Set each module power configuration to 208 VAC

UPS Power (±10%).
Outputs 2. Plug the ARCHITECT power cable into the
appropriate UPS rear panel receptacle.
i2000SR - 20 amp
c8000 - 20 amp
ci8200 - 20 amp for each module.
i2000 - 30 amp
i4000, i6000 and i8000 require a UPS for
each module.
3. Turn ON the appropriate 220 VAC circuit breaker.
4. Plug the SCC, monitor, HUB, and modem
assemblies in the 110 VAC receptacles.
5. Turn ON all appropriate breakers
Note
A power strip is required If external waste
pump(s) are used.
Note
Do not plug the printer into the UPS
(excessive current draw and electrical
noise).
Perform 1. Power ON the SCC and its associated

Startup components.
Note
The SCC must be powered ON before the
process modules.
2. Power ON theprocessing module(s).

and sample handler from stopped to ready,
perform the startup procedure.
4. Verify that the UPS alarm and overload LEDs are
not ON.
5. A yellow label is shipped with user manual. For
future use, take this label and apply it to the UPS
right side panel.
Verification Note
Note: Verify that the Inverter LED (D) is ON If not
press Inverter ON switch (I) switch.
1. Turn OFF the Input breaker to the UPS for

approximately three (3) minutes (simulates loss of
power).
2. Verify that the battery back-up of the UPS
supports the instrument under test.
3. After the test has successfully passed turn the
input breaker back to ON.
4. Verify that there were no errors as a result of the
instrument running on UPS power.
Note
When the Inverter switch is pressed to ON
mode, the green LEDs on the load level
indicator will come on.
5. At the UPS front cover, press the Inverter OFF

switch.
6. Verify that the UPS switches to BYPASS mode
(the BYPASS LED illuminates).
7. An operation manual comes with the UPS when
shipped. Keep this manual at the customer site
with the UPS (if possible, tape the manual to the
top of the UPS). Troubleshooting information for
the UPS is contained in this manual.
8. To switch back to UPS inverter, press the Inverter
ON switch on the keypad.
P-45 Broken V-Wheel Post Repair Procedure (i2000) Version - 96756-111_268_2

P-45 Broken V-Wheel Post Repair Procedure (i2000)
Purpose This procedure documents the field repair procedure for broken V-Wheels mounts on an i2000 Module i2000
system.
Materials V-Wheel Mount Repair Kit (7-78233-01). Kit consists of 1 left (93288-101) and 1 right (93289-101) Time 1.5
Required mount repair part, 7 self tapping screws and 2 part epoxy. hrs
Device capable of drilling a 0.125" (3.175mm) hole and grinding/filing baseplate material.

System status.
Preparation
cover.
Note
To access all reagents, rotate
the reagent carousels by using
the processing module keypad
rotate button.
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover Note
Use caution when removing screws;
they are not secured to the carousel
cover.

captive) that hold the reagent carousel
cover in place. [2]
using the handle [3] and lifting the cover
up and out of the module.
Note
Remove Inner
Reagent Carousel
until the lever handle stops over the
inner carousel. [2]
(green) back [3], lift and remove the
inner reagent carousel from the module.
Remove Outer
Reagent Carousel
1. Push the two (2) motor lever handles
(green) away from the carousel.
(green) back, lift and remove the outer
reagent carousel from the module.
Prepare Diffuser for

Removal
1. Disconnect the refrigerator thermistor
cable W100 REFRIG THERM from the
temperature sensor.
2. Locate the reagent barcode reader
board and loosen the two (2)
thumbscrews to gain access to the
connector.
3. Disconnect the barcode reader cable
W86 REAGENT BCR from the reader.
Remove Reagent
Refrigerator Diffuser
1. Using a #2 screwdriver, remove the
three (3) screws (non-captive) that hold
the diffuser in place.
2. Lift the diffuser up, twisting slightly as
necessary to clear any obstructions, and
out of the module.
Mask Off Reagent
Area
1. Place the cables for the reagent BCR
and thermistor in the cavity for the
diffuser and tape them in place.
2. Using paper towels, or other material,
mask off the entire carousel area so
that only the broken tower is exposed.
Prepare V-Wheel
Mount Post
1. Grind the top of V-wheel post down to
0.9 inch for R or 0.8 inch for L.
Note
This is not a critical dimension,
but post must be short enough to
allow new post to sit flush on
bottom of baseplate and yet still
provide support for the adapter.
2. Place the replacement mount on the

ground down post and ensure its feet
contact the baseplate. Mark the location
of the three (3) screw holes.
3. Remove the replacement mount. Use
the location marks as a reference and
drill 0.125" (3.175mm) pilot holes in the
baseplate.
Glue Mount to Post

1. Clean residue from and around post.
2. Mix enough of the 2-part epoxy to equal
approximately 1 tsp (5ml).
3. Lightly coat the outside of the old post
and inside of the new post with epoxy.
Note
Do not apply adhesive to the top
of the stub, the bottom of the
adapter, or the threads in the
adapter.
4. Place adapter on top of post and ensure

that bottom of adapter is sitting on the
bottom of the baseplate and stays there
until epoxy is set. Wait for at least 45
seconds.
5. Install the three (3) screws that attach
the adapter to the baseplate and
tighten.
Clean Threads of
Insert
1. Gently install a wheel mount screw into
the post until snug (without the wheel.
2. Back it out and clean the epoxy off of it.
3. Repeat this several times until the screw
does not pull any more epoxy out of the
insert.
Caution
DO NOT LEAVE THE SCREW IN
THE INSERT OR IT WILL BE
GLUED IN PLACE.
4. Install three (3) screws and tighten.
Clean Reagent Area

1. Allow the epoxy to set for the time
specified by the epoxy manufacturer's
directions before re-assembling the
instrument.
2. Carefully remove the masking material.
Ensure that none of the residue gets
into the diffuser compartment.
3. Vacuum the diffuser reassembly, if
necessary.
Install Reagent
Refrigerator Diffuser
1. Place the diffuser in the opening in the
center of the backplate, aligning the
screw holes.
2. Install the three (3) screws and tighten.
Connect Reagent
Barcode Reader
Assembly and
2. Connect the barcode reader connector
Refrigerator
Temperature Sensor
temperature sensor.
5. Slide the louvers (2) into the reagent
Install Outer Reagent

Carousel

Carousel
1. Push the v-wheel release (green) [1]
stops. [2]
Install Reagent
Carousel Cover
captive). [1]
Power ON Processing
Module Note
Prepare for Operation For information on loading reagents, refer to the

management.
Stopped to Ready, perform P-248
Startup and Shutdown.
carousel.
Calibrate/Verify For further information on performing diagnostic

Operation of Reagent procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
1. Perform diagnostic procedure 3210
Bar Code Reader Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
Reagent Bar Code Calibration.
P-55 3 Point Optics Verification Procedure Version - 96756-111_235_1

P-55 3 Point Optics Verification Procedure
This procedure verifies the installation of a new reader. Diagnostic procedure 1045 Optics Verification i2000,
Purpose (i2000/i2000SR) and 1047 Optics Verification (i1000SR) check the optics at three (3) points on the Module i2000SR,
curve. i1000SR
Note
Diagnostic 1045 is available in Maintenance and Diagnostic CD 3.0 and higher.
Optics Verifier Reagent Kit 1 hr

Materials Time
Required
Prepare Optics Verifier Kit

Reagents
1. Thaw solutions two (2) hours at room temperature and mix by inversion.
2. Remove any bubbles and place a septum on each bottle.
Perform Optics Verification

Procedure (i2000/i2000SR)
1. Remove any reagent bottles from the inner carousel.
Note
Note bottle location. Bottles must be removed from the system and
returned to their original positions after completing this procedure.
2. Perform diagnostic procedure 1045 Optics Verification.

3. When prompted, load Verifier Solutions #1, #2, and #3.
4. When procedure is completed, remove, cap, and refrigerate the Optics Verifier
Solution bottles.
Note
Once thawed, verifier solution remains stable for 12 days at 2-8° C
(35.6-46.4° F).
5. Reinstall any reagent bottles removed from the inner carousel.
Perform Optics Verification

Procedure (i1000SR)
1. Perform diagnostic procedure 1047 Optics Verification.
2. When prompted, load Verifier Solutions #1, #2, and #3.
3. When the procedure is completed, remove, cap, and refrigerate the Optics
Verifier Solution bottles.
Note
Once thawed, verifier solution remains stable for 12 days at 2-8° C
(35.6-46.4° F).
P-56 ARCHITECT ARM Decontamination
Version - 96756-111_244_2
Purpose This procedure is used to decontaminate the ARCHITECT ARM module. Perform this protocol on Module ARCHITECT
an annual basis. ARM
Materials ARCHITECT ARM Decontamination Kit C/N: 7-78172-02 (This kit contains a Decon Manifold, a Time 45 min
Required Decon Jumper Tube, and the tubing and fittings required to replace tubing removed during the
decontamination procedure.)
0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
2 Empty cubitainers or other suitable 5L substitutes
1 to 3 Multimodule tubing kits: 7-96485-01 for each added module of an i4000, i4000SR, i6000 or
i8000 instrument.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Prerequisite 1. Verify that the ARCHITECT ARM cubitainer is

empty or near empty.
Note
Use another 5L or larger container if an
empty cubitainer is not available. Two 5L
or larger containers will be required.
Note
Concentrate remaining in the cubitainer
is discarded after decontamination.
2. Dilute the bleach (10% sodium hypochlorite)

with water at a 1:20 ratio (one part bleach to 20
parts water to make the 0.5% solution).
Caution
Full strength bleach cannot be used for
decontamination.
Disconnect 1. Press the STOP key.

Tubing for
Decontamination The red indicator beneath the STOP key
illuminates.
2. Disconnect the buffer outlet tube from the ARM

to the instrument. Discard the tube and any
multimodule manifold tubing except for a first
time decontamination.
3. Disconnect and discard the water inlet supply
tubing. Discard this tubing except for first time
decontamination.
Connection Legend:
Diluted Wash Buffer Outlet [1]

Decontamination Port 1 [2]
Water Inlet [3]
Waste1 (pressurized) [4]
Waste 2 (gravity) [5]
RS232 Port [6]
Disconnect 1. Disconnect the sensor cable.

Cables and 2. Disconnect the concentrate wash buffer inlet
Tubing tubing from the ARCHITECT ARM console.
Connection Legend:
1-Sensor Cable
2-Concentrated Wash Buffer Inlet
3-Decontamination Port 2
Prepare 1. Fill an empty cubitainer or other suitable

Cubitainer container with 5L (1.32 gal) of 0.5% sodium
hypochlorite solution.
2. Remove the empty cubitainer from the
ARCHITECT ARM and set it on the floor next
to the container with decontamination solution.
The process will empty one container and fill
the other.
3. Place the pickup tube assembly from the empty
container and place it in the decontamination
cubitainer. The tube must be nearly vertical in
the container.
Connect Decon 1. Lift the filled decontamination cubitainer into

Manifold position on the ARCHITECT ARM.
Note
Verify that the white bracket is
positioned against the pickup tube
assembly, so that the pickup tube is
properly positioned to pickup bleach
solution from the cubitainer as the
cubitainer is emptied.
2. Connect one end of the decon manifold to

Decon Port #2 [2] and the other end to the
concentrated wash buffer inlet port. [1]
Note
Both ports are located on top of the
ARCHITECT ARM.
3. Connect the concentrated wash buffer inlet

tubing to the center of the decon manifold.
4. Connect the sensor cable to the
ARCHITECT ARM.
Connect Decon 1. Connect the decon jumper tube to the diluted

Jumper Tube wash buffer outlet port [1] and to Decon Port #1
[2].
Note
Both fittings are located on the back of
the ARCHITECT ARM.
Connection Legend:
Diluted Wash Buffer Outlet [1]

Decontamination Port 1 [2]
Water Inlet [3]
Waste1 (pressurized) [4]
Waste 2 (gravity) [5]
RS232 Port [6]
Perform 1. Press the DECONTAMINATION and START

Decontamination keys at the same time (these keys are next to
each other).
The ARCHITECT ARM begins pumping
the bleach solution through the fluidics
system and into the drain.
The first decontamination indicator
flashes.
When bleach reaches the drain, and the
system is filled (about three (3) minutes),
the ARCHITECT ARM stops pumping
and incubates (approximately 15
minutes).
2. When the amber LED illuminates, connect the
new water inlet tubing.
3. Remove the concentrated wash buffer inlet
tubing from the decon manifold.
4. Disconnect the electrical connection of the
concentrate sensor assembly.
5. Remove the decontamination cubitainer and
any remaining bleach solution from the
ARCHITECT ARM.
6. Discard any remaining bleach solution and the
cubitainer, if used. Rinse any other container in
deionized water to remove the bleach. Rinse
the pickup tubing assembly and flush the
interior tubing with deionized water.
7. Press the DECONTAMINATION key.
The ARCHITECT ARM pumps water
through the fluidics and into the drain
(flushes the bleach).
The first decontamination indicator turns
off as the second decontamination
indicator flashes.
When water reaches the drain, and the
system is flushed (about 15 minutes),
the ARCHITECT ARM stops pumping
and the amber light illuminates.
8. Press the STOP key.
Discard and 1. Disconnect both the decon jumper tubing and

Replace Used decon manifold. Discard all items.
Items 2. Connect the new buffer outlet tubing (reconnect
original tubing for first time decontamination)
from the ARM to the instrument. Use
multimodule tubing kits 7-96485-01 as
necessary for reconnecting to multimodule
systems.
3. Remove the concentrate sensor assembly from
the Decontamination Kit.
4. Connect the electrical connection of concentrate
sensor assembly to the ARCHITECT ARM.
Caution
Do not insert the concentrate sensor
assembly into the cubitainer at this time.
Refill and Verify 1. Press the BOTTLE LOAD key (next to the
Operation STOP key). The bottle load indicator flashes.
2. While the bottle load indicator flashes,
disconnect the sensor assembly from the
ARCHITECT ARM.
3. Remove the cardboard cutout and the cap from
the new container of concentrated wash buffer.
4. Place the concentrated wash buffer tubing
assembly into the cubitainer.
5. Twist the fitting to tighten.
6. Place the container into position on the
ARCHITECT ARM and verify that the white
bracket is near the tubing assembly.
7. Reconnect the sensor cable and supply tubing
quick-disconnect fitting to the
ARCHITECT ARM.
8. Verify that the instrument wash buffer reservoir
is filled without error when requested through
the Supply Status screen on the SCC.
Note
The sensor automatically recalibrates
during this process.
P-57 Hopper Sensor/Inventory Workaround (i2000) Version - 96756-111_254_2

P-57 Hopper Sensor/Inventory Workaround (i2000)
Purpose This procedure explains the cause of incorrectly reported RV Hopper Inventory Level errors and Module i2000
provides a workaround until new software and RV loader sensor board are implemented.
Materials None Time 10
Required min
Note
The sensors used in the RV Hopper to monitor the RV level are very strong. With the RVs in the correct alignment, they can
"see through" up to six RVs. Additionally, the sensor mounting posts cause pockets empty of RVs to form between the two
sensors. Both conditions result in false "Hopper Level Low" error messages even when the hopper is filled to its 1200 RV
capacity.
Verify
Sensor
1. Verify the sensors are correctly mounted and oriented with respect
Mounting
to each other.
Verify
Sensor Note
1. Test sensor operation by removing the RVs from the hopper and If the green light does not
Board
checking the sensor board to verify that the green light is OFF. illuminate, the cable or sensor
board may be defective.
Note
The LED is on the sensor board on the bottom of the hopper
toward the right side of the instrument.
2. Place a solid object so that it covers one of the sensors and verify
that the green light illuminates.
Unplug the
Sensor
1. Locate the two-wire connector going from the sensor board from the
sensor in the hopper.
2. Disconnect the connector and secure it so that it cannot get into any
of the moving parts.
Verification
1. Verify the green LED illuminates and is steady.
Note
If it does not illuminate immediately (indicates malfunctioning
sensors or sensor board), replace the hopper.
2. Fill the hopper with RVs previously removed and add enough new
RVs to fill the hopper with about 1,100 RVs.
3. Update the RV inventory in the Supplies Screen of the User
Interface.
Operator
Notification
1. Inform the operator that removal of the sensor cable requires careful
monitoring of the hopper RV inventory both manually and by the
user interface.
P-69 Top Cover Switch Verification Version - 96756-111_242_1

P-69 Top Cover Switch Verification
Purpose This procedure is used to verify proper operation of the top cover switch to prevent error Module i2000,
messages. i2000SR
Materials None Time 15 min
Required
Verify Top Cover

Switch
1. Verify that the system is in Running status, that the top covers are closed and not bypassed
in the System configuration.
2. Push up and down lightly on the top covers to verify that the switches do not open and
cause an error to occur.
3. If the switch disengages, examine the switch and adjust it to ensure positive engagement
with the top cover.
P-70 Setting LAS LLS Gain Software Parameter (i2000)
Version - 96756-111_241_1
Purpose This procedure is used to verify proper operation of the top cover switch to prevent error Module i2000
messages.

Required min
Log On as 1. Select Log On F2 from the Snapshot screen.

FSE 2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name
field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password
field.
4. Select Done.
screen lists FSE.
Open Windows 1. From the Snapshot screen, select the System

NT Explorer menu.
2. From the drop down menu, select Task
Manager.
3. Select the New Task button from the Windows
NT Task Manager window.
4. Type Explorer in the Create New Task window.
5. Click on OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Windows NT
Explorer opens.
Open the 1. In Windows NT Explorer, double -click on the

LAS.CAL File C:\IPLS\IAHV\SYSTEM.
2. Locate the file LAS.CAL, and double-click on it
to open the file.
Note
If the file does not open automatically,
select either WORDPAD or NOTEPAD
from the Open With scroll-down menu,
followed by OK.
Set the LAS 1. Locate the column labeled Output Gain. [1]

LLS Gain 2. Use LAS LLS Output Gain to determine the gain
Software required (dependent on the distance between the
Parameter sample probe and the antenna board, at the
aspiration position).
3. Edit the gain value (from the table) for the
sample pipettor at the LAS track location.
4. Record the gain value for the sample pipettor at
the LAS track location in the column to the right.
5. Save the changes by selecting File, followed by
Save.
6. Power OFF the Processing Module.
7. Reboot the SCC computer by simultaneously
pressing the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys.
8. Wait for the SCC computer to reboot.
9. On the SCC, verify that all modules return to
Stopped status.
LAS LLS Output Gain
Distance Between Probe and Board LLS Gain Value
Inches mm General Track (92940) Hitachi Track (90870)
0.630 16 18 16
0.669 17 20 19
0.709 18 22 22
0.748 19 23 25
0.787 20 25 28
0.827 21 27 30
0.866 22 29 33
0.906 23 30 36
0.945 24 32 39
0.984 25 34 42
1.024 26 35 44
1.063 27 Not Determined 47
P-126 ICT Alignment
Version - 96721-108_766_1
Purpose Perform this procedure to align the ICT probe positions. Module c8000
Materials Required Standard Tool Kit Time 30 min
Alignment tool #1 & #2 from the Robotics Alignment Tool Assembly 89825
Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment Tool (LN 2J93-01)
While performing this procedure, if you are exposed to reagents, calibrators or controls, the following statements
may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
ICT Front/Back-Left/Right Alignment
Prerequisite 1. The processing module must be in Stopped or For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System
Ready status. Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the center System status.
rear deck and remove deck.
Verify ICT 1. Select the Modules category from the Diagnostics For further information on performing diagnostic
Probe screen under the system icon. procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Centered 2. Perform 1101 Robotics Test Tool. Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
Over 3. From the main menu of 1101 Robotics Test Tool Subsection: System diagnostics.
Cuvette select 1. Reaction carousel.
a. 1. Home
b. 0. Exit
4. From the main menu of 1101 Robotics Test Tool
select 9 ICT.
a. L1 Home
b. L2 Reaction Carousel cuvette
5. Verify that the probe is centered over cuvette cell
#92.
If properly centered, go to Step6.
If not properly centered, go to Adjust ICT
Head.
6. Select L4 Exit to return to the 1101 Robotics Test
Tool main menu.
7. Go to ICT Cuvette Down Position Adjustment.
Adjust ICT 1. If the ICT probe is not centered over cuvette

Head cell#92 [3] in a front to back relationship [1].
Loosen the two (2) screws [2] under the water
jacket tubing at the bottom of the head section.
2. Make slight front to back [1] movements of the ICT
head to get the proper front to back position.
3. Tighten the two (2) screws [2].
4. Verify that the probe is centered clockwise or
counterclockwise over the cuvette cell.
If properly centered, go to ICT Cuvette Down
Position Adjustment.
If not properly centered, go to Step5.
5. Adjust the position of the ICT head using 1101
Robotics Test Tool, and selecting L1 Rotate. Then
position the probe using L1 CW (clockwise) and L2
CCW (counterclockwise)
6. Once the position is correct select L4 Exit three (3)
times to return to the 1101 Robotics Test Tool main
menu.
7. Once the proper ICT head alignment at the cuvette
is verified, go to ICT Cuvette Down Position
Adjustment.
ICT Cuvette Down Position Adjustment
Prepare 1. From the main menu of 1101 Robotics

Reaction Test Tool select 1. Reaction
Carousel carousel.
a. 1. Home
2. Remove cuvette segment 150-136 and
install Cuvette Segment Robocal
Alignment Tool in position 150-136.
3. Select 2. Rotate Carousel in the 1101
Robotics Test Tool screen and touch
L2 five (5) times.
Note
This places the Cuvette
Segment Robocal Alignment
Tool under the ICT head.
4. Press L4 and select 0. Exit in the

options to return to the main menu in
the 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
Install 1. From the main menu of 1101 Robotics
Alignment Test Tool select 9 ICT.
Tool a. L1 Home
c. L2 Down stepup/stepdown
2. Place Alignment Tool 1 [1] between
the bottom surface [2] of the ICT head
mounting plate and the top surface of
the Cuvette Segment Robocal
Alignment Tool
Note
The Alignment Tool must be
placed on top of the Cuvette
Tool for proper height (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
measurement.
Note
Check ICT 1. Verify that the low limit surface of the

Cuvette tool fits under the plate [2] and the
Down high limit does not fit under the
Position plate [2].
If the down position meets the
specification, got to Step2.
If the down position does not
meet the specification, go to
Adjust ICT Cuvette Down
Position.
2. Select L4 Up/Exit (moves the ICT
probe out of the cuvette).
3. Go to ICT Reference Solution Cup
Alignment.
Adjust ICT 1. Adjust the height of the ICT using
Cuvette 1101 Robotics Test Tool
Down L1 Step up
Position L2 Step down
2. Go to Check ICT Cuvette Down
Position.
ICT Reference Solution Cup Alignment
Verify Probe 1. Select L3 ICT reference solution

Over cup in the 1101 Robotics Test Tool
Reference screen.
Solution Cup 2. Observe the probe position in
relation to the solution cup and
verify that it is centered over the
circle [1] formed by the sensor
probe [2] and the edge of the cup.
If the probe is centered over
the circle, go to Verify Probe
Down Position.
If the probe is not centered
over the circle, go to Adjust
Probe Over Reference
Solution Cup.
Adjust Probe 1. Perform 1101 Robotics Test Tool.

Over 2. Select L1 Rotate.
Reference 3. Position the probe using L1 CW
Solution Cup (clockwise) and L2 CCW
(counterclockwise).
Note
Additional adjustment is
made by loosening the two
(2) mounting screws for the
reference solution cup and
manually adjusting the cup.
4. Go to Verify Probe Over Reference

Solution Cup.
Verify Probe 1. Move the ICT probe to the down

Down position in the reference solution
Position cup [1] using 1101 Robotics Test
Tool and selecting L2 Down-step
up/step down.
2. Insert alignment tool #2 [2] between
the bottom surface of the ICT
mounting plate [3] and the top
surface of the clear plastic mounting
plate (for the reference solution
cup [1]).
3. Verify that the low limit surface of
the tool fits under the plate [3] and
the high limit does not fit under the
plate [3].
If the down position is within (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
specification, go to Exit 1101
Robotics Test Tool Note
Procedure. Video contains no audio sound.
If the down position is out of
specification, go to Adjust
Probe Down Position.
Adjust Probe 1. Adjust the height of the ICT using

Down 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
Position a. L1 Step up
b. L2 Step down
2. Perform Verify Probe Down
Position.
Exit 1101 1. Move the ICT probe out of the ICT

Robotics Test reference solution cup by selecting
Tool L4 Up/Exit.
Procedure 2. Select L4 Exit twice to return to
main menu of 1101 Robotics Test
Tool.
3. From the main menu of 1101
Robotics Test Tool select 1.
Reaction carousel.
a. 1. Home
4. Remove Cuvette Segment Robocal
Alignment Tool in position 150-136
and install cuvette segment
removed earlier into position150-
136.
5. Select 0. Exit twice to exit the 1101
Robotics Test Tool procedure.
Close 1. Install the center rear deck and

Cover/Doors secure with two (2) screws.
2. Run an ICT Calibration.
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-116) • Copyright 2002, 2014 • ARCHITECT, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-128 Mixer Alignment
Version - 96721-108_793_1
Purpose Perform this procedure to align the mixers. Module c8000

Alignment tool #3 from the Robotics Alignment Tool Assembly 89825
While performing this procedure, if you are exposed to reagents, calibrators or controls, the following
statements may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Stopped or Ready status. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Preparation 1. Select the Modules category from the For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to the
Diagnostics screen under the system ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting
icon. and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
2. Perform 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
Robotics Test Tool select 1. Reaction
carousel.
a. 1. Home
b. 0. Exit
Robotics Test Tool select 6. Mixer.
a. L1 Mixer 1
b. L2 Wash Cup
c. L4 Exit
d. L2 Mixer 2
e. L2 Wash cup
5. Verify that the mixers are centered
over the mixer wash cups.
If they are centered, go to
Step 6.
If they are not centered use the
software controls in 1101
Robotics Test Tool to center
the mixers. Select L1 Rotate
for the Mixer needing
adjustment and select CW
(clockwise) or CCW
(counterclockwise) to position
the mixer correctly. Enter L4
Exit once position is correct.
6. Select L3 Cuvette for each of the
mixers.
7. Verify that mixers are centered over
the cuvette cells.
Verify Mixer Height.
(clockwise) or CCW
VIDEO - Note
Verify Mixer
Height Video contains no audio sound.
Verify Mixer 1. Return to the main menu of 1101

Height Robotics Test Tool and select 1.
Reaction carousel.
a. 1. Home
2. Remove cuvette segment 150-136
and install Cuvette Segment Robocal
3. Select 2. Rotate Carousel in the
1101 Robotics Test Tool screen and
touch L2 eight (8) times.
Note
Tool under mixer #2.
4. Enter L2 one more time to move the

Robocal Alignment tool under mixer
#1.
5. Place the low limit surface of
alignment tool #3 [1] under the mixer
blade [2].
6. Verify that the low limit surface of the
alignment fits under the mixer blade
and the high limit does not pass
beneath the blade.
If specification is met, go to
Prepare for Operation.
If specification is not met, go to
Adjust Mixer Height.
Adjust 1. Loosen locking nut [2] and mounting

Mixer screws [4].
Height 2. Rotate the brass support shaft [1] CW
(clockwise) or CCW
(counterclockwise) to set proper
height.
Note
Lower part of the brass support
shaft [3] does not turn.
3. Once the correct height has been set,

tighten the locking nut [2] and
mounting screws [4].
4. Select L4 Exit and then 1. Home to
home the reaction carousel.
and install cuvette segment removed
earlier into position150-136.
Prepare for 1. Close cover(s) and door(s).

Operation
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-118) • © 2002, 2014 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-131 Cuvette Washer Alignment
Version - 96721-108_792_2
Purpose Perform this procedure to align the cuvette washer. Module c8000
Metric Ruler
Alignment tool #3 from the Robotics Alignment Tool Assembly 89825
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Diagnostics screen under the system ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting
icon. and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
carousel.
a. 1. Home
b. 0. Exit
4. Remove cuvette washer cover [1] by
loosening the cover screw [2].
5. Remove the cuvette wash nozzle
assembly [4] from the cuvette wash
elevator [5] by loosening the black
knurled knob [3].
Verify Dry 1. Verify that the dry tip is 61.5mm
Tip Position ±0.5 mm [1] from the bottom of the tip
to the underside surface of the nozzle
mounting plate.
Install 1. Install the cuvette wash nozzle

Nozzle assembly back on the cuvette wash
Assembly elevator and secure with the black
knurled knob.
Verify Tip 1. From the main menu of 1101

Rectangular Robotics Test Tool select 10. Wash
Orientation Station.
a. L2 Step Down
2. Using the black knurled knob, raise
and lower the cuvette washer.
3. Verify that the top of the dry tip
nozzle does not move as the washer
moves in and out of the cuvette.
Verify Nozzle Gap.
Adjust Tip Rectangular
Orientation.
Adjust Tip 1. Manually adjust the dry tip to ensure

Rectangular it is properly centered in the cuvette
Orientation cells.
2. Repeat Verify Tip Rectangular
Orientation.
Verify 1. With the cuvette wash in the down

Nozzle Gap position, verify the gap between the
bottom black plastic section of the
nozzle surrounding the nozzle
mounting post and the raised portion
of the mounting post near the nozzle
mounting plate is 1.5mm [2].
Verify Nozzle Centering Over
Cuvette.
Adjust Nozzle Gap.
Adjust 1. Manually move the dry tip (up or

Nozzle Gap down on the nozzle shaft) to meet the
1.5mm specification.
Verify 1. Select L1 up to move the cuvette

Nozzle washer to the up position, visually
Centering verify that all the washer nozzles are
Over centered over the cuvette cells.
Cuvette If specification is met, go to
Verify Nozzle Centering
Entering Cuvette.
Adjust Nozzle Centering Over
Cuvette.
Adjust 1. Adjust screws [2] on top of nozzle

Nozzle mounting plate for horizontal and
Centering left/right adjustment.
Over 2. Go to Verify Nozzle Centering Over
Cuvette Cuvette.
Verify 1. Select L2 Step Down to move
Nozzle washer to the down position,
Centering manually move the nozzle assembly
Entering up and down, and verify that the
Cuvette nozzles are centered when entering
the cuvettes.
Verify Nozzle Entry.
Adjust Nozzle Centering
Entering Cuvette.

Nozzle mounting plate as required to ensure
Centering nozzles are centered.
Entering 2. Go to Verify Nozzle Entry.
Cuvette
Verify 1. While slowly lifting up on the washer
Nozzle assembly by hand, verify that the dry
Entry nozzle enters the cells smoothly, and
without any deviation to the left or to
the right.
Verify Final Alignment.
Adjust Nozzle Entry.
Adjust 1. Loosen the two (2) screws [2] at the

Nozzle top of the dry nozzle and move the
Entry nozzle [1] in the desired direction.
2. Go to Verify Final Alignment.
Verify Final 1. When the adjustment is complete,
Alignment tighten the nozzle and recheck all
nozzles on the cuvette washer to
verify final alignment.
2. Select L1 Up to position cuvette
washer in the up position and then
select L4 Exit to return to main
screen of 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
Robotics Test Tool, select 1. Reaction
carousel.
a. 1. Home
4. Remove cuvette segment 150-136
and install Cuvette Segment Robocal
5. Select 2. Rotate Carousel in the
1101 Robotics Test Tool screen and
touch L2 six (6) times.
Note
Tool under the cuvette washer.
6. Place the low limit surface of the

alignment tool #3 [1] under nozzle #1
and verify height. Then move
and verify height.
7. With the height set properly, the low
limit surface of the alignment tool
#3 [1] should fit under the nozzle and
the high limit should not pass beneath
the blade.
Adjust Nozzle Level and
Height.
Note
Adjust 1. If the height is not set properly adjust

Nozzle the screws [3] on the linear slide for
Level and horizontal level and height alignment.
Height
Prepare for 1. Select 1. Home to home the reaction
Operation carousel.
and install cuvette segment removed
earlier into position150-136.
P-157 Top Cover Counterbalance Adjustment
Version - 96721-108_811_1
Purpose Sets the correct tension on the counterbalances on the top covers Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Top Cover 1. Move the front top cover and the rear top cover to
Test. the half way open position and release cover.
2. If the counterbalances are set correctly the top
covers should not move down. If covers move
down preform counterbalance adjustment.
Counter 1. Remove the front top cover or the rear top cover
balance that requires adjustment.
adjustment 2. While holding the nut [1] on the counterbalance
turn the bolt [2] clockwise two (2) turns. Repeat for
the other counterbalance on the top cover.
3. Replace top cover removed and retest.
P-159 Performance Verification Test (PVT)
Version - 96721-108_810_7
At the completion of this VP: After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
Purpose To verify and ensure that the instrument is functioning properly prior to releasing the system to the customer. Module c8000
The PVT consists of calibrating and running specific assays with multiple replicates to test the pipetting, wash system, optical and ICT precision of the (126)
instrument. The acceptance criteria, listed at the end of the procedure, determines if the instrument has passed or failed the test. The performance verification
test (PVT) is performed at the end of a new system installation.
Note
Toshiba manufacturing requires all new systems to pass the PVT acceptance criteria prior to shipping, Performing the PVT during system installation
verifies that issues have not occurred as a result of shipping and/or the installation process. The acceptance criteria utilizes a minimum and maximum
range instead of %CV. This is because the PVT is run with level II control and the established precision for control material can differ depending on the
control manufacturer. The photometric and ICT assays utilized by the PVT test washing, pipetting precision, reagent dispense accuracy, mixing, noise,
and reagent cross contamination. AST (rate down), LDH (rate up), and TP (end up) are the photometric assays. AST was chosen because it could
contaminate LDH if there is an issue with the reagent probe wash. TP was chosen because it has a very small sample volume of 3.2 µL (test for
sample precision). Electrolytes are used to verify the ICT module. The PVT must be run using 20 separate sample cups. Ordering the tests on 20
separate sample cups allows verification of the sample probe wash. The PVT must be run on the sample carousel and not the RSH. Toshiba performs
the PVT on the sample carousel because the RSH is not installed during manufacturing. So the installation PVT is a factory retest of the c8000 module
and not the RSH. (The M&D 3317 RSH Test verifies the RSH mechanical operation and the integration process ensures that the entire system,
including the RSH, is functioning correctly before the system is released to the customer.) Another reason that the PVT must be run on the sample
carousel is that a probe wash occurs when the RSH moves from one carrier to another. The extra wash is not desirable since we are testing for
carryover.
Materials See Materials/Equipment/Chemicals Required. Time 90

Required min
While performing this procedure, if you are exposed to reagents, calibrators or controls, the following statements may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Materials/Equipment/Chemicals Required
Materials Quantity Needed
AST 1 Cartridge of R1 and R2

LDH 1 Cartridge of R1 and R2
Total Protein (TP) 1 Cartridge of R1
ICT Reference Solution 1 Bottle
ICT Sample Diluent 1 Cartridge of R1
ICT Calibrator 1 bottle of each Calibrator (L and H)
ICT Module 1 Module
ICT Cleaning Fluid 1 Bottle
Acid Wash Solution 1 Bottle
Alkaline Wash Solution 1 Bottle
Water Bath Additive 1 Cartridge of R2
Multi-constituent Calibrators 1 Bottle for each Calibrator level
Liquid Control, Level I I 2 Bottles
1. Prepare the following solutions:
Prepare
Solutions
1. Load the following solutions:
Load
Solutions
Update 1. Update the system supply status.

System
Supply
Status
Verify 1. Verify completion of all Technical Service Bulletins
Completion (TSBs) and ensure that the Call Management System
of TSBs (CMS) reflects current instrument status.
Perform 1. Verify completion of all appropriate maintenance (daily,

Maintenance weekly, and monthly) and corresponding instrument log
Procedures entries.
Log On As 1. Select F2 - Log on from the Snapshot screen. Note

FSE 2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the system to operator level of access. To do
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot screen
lists FSE.
Load PVT 1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select
Assays Calibration order.
If Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP and AST are listed
in Assay box, go to Assay Edits.
If the assays are not listed, continue to Step2.
2. Select System from the menu bar, and then select
Diagnostics.
3. Select the Module 5 button (SCC).
4. Page down and select Utilities.
5. Select the 6114 Install/Delete Assays option and select
F5 - Perform.
6. Select Install.
7. Place the ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM into the
CD drive and select Proceed to continue.
Note
The new LDH (2P56) assay file is only available
on the cSystem Assay Disk Version 13.00 or
higher. The file and installation instructions to
create a CD are available on the GSS website:
http://gssweb.add.abbott.com/architect/205042.asp
8. Enter a 1 for the All groups option and select

Continue.
9. Follow the on screen instructions and select the options
to install Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, TP, AST and LDH, and
select Continue.
10. After the assays load, select the page down button in
the Instructions box until you reach the end of the assay
list.
11. Enter the option to Return to the main menu and select
Continue.
12. Select Exit and then select Done.
Assay Edits 1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select
Configuration.
2. Select the QC-Cal settings button and then select
Calibrator Set in the QC-Cal categories window.
3. Select MCC from the Calibrator sets window.
5. Select the lot number list button and then select New
Lot.
6. Enter the calibrator lot number in the Lot number data
entry box.
7. Enter the number of levels (2) and expiration date of the
Cal Set.
8. Highlight the TP row and select Define Data.
9. Enter a value in the Concentration data entry box for
each calibrator level. (Refer to the MCC value sheet for
TP calibrator concentrations.)
10. Select Done to return to the Configure calibrator set
window.
11. Select Done to create the calibrator set.
Configuration.
13. Select the Assay Settings button and select Assay
Parameters in the Assay categories window.
14. Select TP in the Assays list.
16. Configure the Assay availability box to Enabled.
17. Select Done.
18. Select LDH from Assay list.
19. Select F6-Configure.
20. Select the Reagent / Sample button in the middle of the
General page.
21. Select UNDILUTED default dilution button.
22. Select Done.
Load And Note

Scan If the customer is not going to be running electrolytes
Reagents and the option is turned off in the system configuration,
electrolytes do not have to be run as part of the PVT.
1. Place the reagent R1 cartridges and R2 cartridges in the
reagent carousel positions.
Note
The reagents must be loaded in the following
order:
R1 Carousel:
ICT Sample Diluent
LDH - R1 Reagent Cartridge
Total Protein - R1 Reagent Cartridge
AST - R1 Reagent Cartridge
R2 Carousel:
LDH - R2 Reagent Cartridge
AST - R2 Reagent Cartridge
2. Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select
Reagent status and F5 - Scan.
3. Verify the reagent cartridges read correctly and are in
the order above.
Create a 1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select
Calibration Calibration order.
Order 2. Select the Carrier button on the Calibration order
screen.
3. Enter the RSH carrier ID in the C: data entry box. (The
Carrier ID includes a letter and a number.)
4. Enter 1 for carrier position in the P: data entry box.
5. Select Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP, and AST from the
Assays list and then select F2 - Add order.
Print the 1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Order
Order List status.
Report 2. Select F4 - Print and then select Order List Report.
3. Select Done to print the report.
Load the 1. Determine the minimum sample volume required (from

Calibrators the Order List Report).
into the 2. Pippette the appropriate calibrator into the sample cups
Sample and load in the correct carrier/position (from the Order
Carrier List Report).
3. Place the Carrier into position 1 in the Priority Bay.
Start the 1. Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select
Calibration Snapshot.
2. Verify that the RSH and c8000 are in the Ready state.
3. Select the c8000 module and then select F8 - Run.
4. When the c8000 enters the Running status, select the
RSH module and then select F8 - Run.
Verify 1. When the run has completed, select QC-Cal from the
Calibration menu bar, and then select Calibration status.
2. Verify that the Cal Status for Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP,
and AST are listed as Active.
Create a 1. Select Results from the menu bar, and then select
Patient Results review.
Order
Note
If necessary, delete any results listed in the
Results review screen.
2. Remove any sample cups from positions 1-20 on the
sample carousel.
3. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select
Patient order.
4. Verify that Single patient is selected.
5. Select the Carousel button.
6. Enter a 1 for the cup position in the P: data entry box.
7. Enter a number in the SID data entry box.
assays list and then select F3 - Add order.
Note
After selecting F3 - Add order, the cup position in
the P: data entry box automatically increments.
9. Enter another number in the SID data entry box.

assays list and select F3 - Add order.
11. Repeat Step7 and Step8 until you have created a
patient order for Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP, and AST for
positions 1 -20 on the sample carousel.
Load Level 1. Pipette 125 µL of Level II Control into 20 sample cups

II Controls and place them into positions 1-20 on the sample
into carousel.
Positions 1-
20 on the Note
Sample If necessary, allow the control material to thaw for
Carousel 30 minutes and then gently tilt until mixed.
2. Replace the sample carousel cover.
Note
The Order status stays in Pending if the sample
carousel cover is not detected.
Run Snapshot.
2. Verify that the c8000 is in the Ready state.
3. Select the c8000 module and F8 - Run.
Print Results 1. When the run completes, select Results from the menu
bar and then select Results review.
2. Select Assay in the Results review screen.
3. Select F - 4 Print and then select the Results List
Report option.
Record and 1. Enter the processing module serial number and software
Evaluate configuration on the form below.
Results 2. Enter the PVT test results into the PVT Test Results
table.
3. Calculate and record the difference.
4. Use the PVT Test Acceptance Criteria to determine if
the PVT passed or failed.
5. Enter the results into the PVT Test Results table. See
below.
6. Sign and date the form.
Delete PVT 1. Delete patient results, exceptions and PVT assays from
Results and the processing module.
Assays
Note
You cannot delete the assays if there are pending
orders. Delete any pending orders prior to trying
to delete the PVT assays.
2. Select System from menu bar and the select

Diagnostics.
3. Select the Module 5 button (SCC) option on the
diagnostics screen.
5. Select 6114 Install/Delete Assays option and select F-5
Perform.
6. Select OK to perform the procedure.
7. Select Delete.
8. Enter the assay numbers of the assays that are to be
deleted (e. g. 1101, 1102, 1103, 1023, 1048, 1014).
9. Select Done to return the Diagnostics screen.
Remove the 1. Remove the reagents from the reagent carousel.

Reagent 2. Select Reagents from menu bar, and then select
Kits Reagent status.
3. Select F5 – Scan.
Processing Module SN: __________________________
Software Configuration: __________________________
PVT Test Results
Assay Highest Result Lowest Result Difference (High-Low) Acceptance Criteria Pass or Fail
AST 9 U/L
LDH 19 U/L
TP 0.22 g/dL
Na-C 3.4 mmol/L
K-C 0.24 mmol/L
Cl-C 3.0 mmol/L
PVT Test Acceptance Criteria
Name of Test Assays Number of Replicates Acceptance Criteria (less than or equal to)
AST 20 9*
LDH 20 19*
TP 20 0.22*
Na-C 20 3.4*
Assay Within Run Precision Test K-C 20 0.24*
Cl-C 20 3.0*
*The difference between the highest and the lowest result in the run of 20 replicates.
Printed Name: ______________________________________
Signature: _______________________________________
Date: ____________
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-116) • © 2002, 2011 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000 and ci16200 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. c4000,
i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure
Version - 96756-111_341_2
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to document how to log on and log off as FSE. Log off is documented Module SCC
so that the system can be returned to normal operation after service or support.
Materials FSE Date Code List Time 1

Required min
Log On as FSE
Select 1. Select Log on F2 from the

Log Snapshot screen.
On
Log 1. Enter FSE in all capital letters Note
On in the User name field. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the system to operator
2. Enter the FSE logon date code level of access. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
in the password field.
Note
Enter the date code in
reverse order.
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that the Operator listed
on the Snapshot screen lists
FSE.
Log Off as FSE
Select Log 1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Note

On Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
Note system to operator level of access.
The User Name field is selected and
populated with the name FSE.
Log On as 1. Press Delete to delete the FSE name.

Operator
Note
The password field disappears.
2. Select Done.
3. Verify that nothing is listed on the startup
screen after Operator:.
P-202 Modem Setup for Support Version - 96756-111_340_2

P-202 Modem Setup for Support
Purpose Setup your system as the remote system for using PCANYWHERE to modem into Module SCC/Modem
ARCHITECT systems.
Materials PCANYWHERE Version 10.0 or higher Time 10 min
Required
Install
PCANYWHERE
1. Install per manufacturers instructions.
Start
PCANYWHERE
1. Select Start.
2. Select Programs.
3. Select Symantec PCANYWHERE.
Add Remote
Icon
1. Select the Remotes button. [1]
2. From the list of icons displayed, Double-click
the Add Remote icon. [2]
The PCANYWHERE Remote Properties: New

Remote window displays.
Select Modem
1. Verify the displayed modem is correct. If it is not
correct, check the correct modem.
2. Select OK.
The new remote icon displays with the name

field highlighted.
Naming
ARCHITECT
1. Type in the name of your Remote Item (name of
Icon
the account or generic as ARCHITECT). [1]
2. Press Enter.
The new remote icon displays.
P-203 SCC Diagnostic Software (Virtual PC-Check) Version - 96756-111_339_2

P-203 SCC Diagnostic Software (Virtual PC-Check)
Purpose Instructions for using the SCC Diagnostic Software disk on the ARCHITECT SCC. Module SCC
Materials Required Diagnostic Software, SCC (99058) Time Variable
The SCC Diagnostic Software (Virtual PC-Check) is on any ARCHITECT SCC platform.
Refer to the appropriate product code R&R and verification procedures or ISAs for the replacement and verification of SCC
components.
DO NOT REMOVE the PC-Check disk while running the program, unless requested by the program to insert a data disk. In that
case, replace the program diskette immediately afterward.
DO NOT ABORT during hard drive testing. This causes loss of system data.
Normally, the screen display provides all information necessary to determine the nature of any fault detected.
Prerequisite
1. Exit the ARCHITECT application and Windows operating system.
Note
The PC-Check program is self-bootable and runs independently of the PC's operating
system.
2. Verify that the SCC has a working system core, a functioning central processor unit, a floppy disk
drive, and enough memory to load the program.
3. Complete processing or delete all pending test orders
4. Release all patient results
5. Archive all patient results
6. Release all QC results
7. Resolve all Exceptions and process Reruns, if necessary.
Create New
Backup
1. Create a new system backup.
Note
Use in the event of a catastrophic failure. Some tests may be destructive if the SCC power
is interrupted during the testing process.
2. Perform diagnostic procedure 6004 (option 2) to copy the system backup to a CD.
Start PC-
Check
1. Insert the PC-Check disk.
2. Perform a system shutdown and restart.
If the system boots to the PC-Check disk, go to Select Desired Diagnostic.

If the system does not boot to the PC-Check disk, access the BIOS setup function and
verify that the floppy drive (removable device) is set up as the first boot device. Then,
reboot with the PC-Check disk in the drive.
Select
Desired Note
Diagnostic Refer to PC-Check Main Menu before completing this Action.
1. At the PC-Check main menu, select the desired diagnostic test.
Note
For most issues, the option Perform Basic Testing is sufficient to determine the cause of a
problem.
Note
Passed/Failed results are displayed during this test option. Sufficient information should be
given to determine which component is failing. Use this information to make component
replacement decisions.
2. Select Exit (Write Reports) to exit PC-Check.

3. Replace the component(s) that failed according to the appropriate removal and replacement
procedure
4. Perform the test option again for the indicated failure and verify a Passed result.
If the problem is resolved by component replacement, go to Verify Replaced Component.
Verify
Replaced
1. Perform the appropriate verification procedure(s) as instructed in the removal and replacement
Component
procedure or ISA for the specific replaced component(s).
PC-Check Main Menu
Menu Item Description
System Displays overview of system information, including motherboard, BIOS, processor, memory, cache, drives, video,
Configuration audio, network, buses and ports.
IDE Bus Scans IDE bus, accesses the devices found and checks and displays the configuration.
Information
Perform Performs a set group of tests (see PC-Check Test Groups) on the processor, motherboard, memory, cache, all
Basic Testing drives, video adapter, printer functionality, speaker, keyboard and mouse. Interaction is required to test the mouse,
keyboard and speaker. Passed/failed results are displayed. Note that several tests are not a part of the customized
Abbott menu and will be displayed as `Not Run'. Other tests indicate `Absent' if specific hardware is not in the SCC.
Note
DO NOT attempt to run Basic Testing unless the appropriate amount of time can be allocated to complete all
tests. ABORTING during hard drive testing will cause data loss and require that the base configuration and
ARCHITECT application be reloaded on the hard drive. Approximate completion time is 20 minutes
(completion time may vary depending on the platform type). For Platform D, two tests, Motherboard Real-
time Clock Chip and CMOS RAM/Clock tests always show as FAILED due to an inherent incompatibility with
the software. Disregard the FAILED results for these two tests when using the diagnostic software on a
Platform D SCC.
Note
The default SCC keyboard type is Windows 104 key. The user determines appropriate selection. The printer
port is LPT1. Selecting Generic for the printer type works in most cases.
Perform Performs memory inversion test, a hard drive read-write test and hard drive mechanics stress test. Approximate
Advanced completion time is 20 minutes (completion time may vary depending on the platform type).
Testing
Display Test Displays test results.
Results
Print Test Allows for printing of test results printed.
Results
About Virtual Lists PC-Check version and which components of PC-Check are active on this customized disk.
PC-CHECK
Exit (Write Exits PC-Check. Does not write/save Results Summary.
Reports
PC-Check Test Groups
Group Test Basic Advanced
Processor Core
X
Processor Coprocessor Core
X
Processor
Processor Known Design Faults
X
Processor MMX Extensions
X
Motherboard DMA Controller
X
Motherboard System Timer
X
Motherboard Interrupt Controller
X
Motherboard
Motherboard Keyboard Controller
X
Motherboard PCI Bus
X
Motherboard Real-Time Clock Chip
X
Memory Inversion Tree
X
Memory Progressive Inversion
X
Memory
Memory Chaotic Addressing
X
Memory Block Rotation
X
Cache Memory Inversion Tree
X
Cache Memory Progressive Inversion
X
Cache Memory
Cache Memory Chaotic Addressing
X
Cache Memory Block Rotation
X
Hard Drive Read
X
Hard Drive Non-Destructive Write
X
Hard Drive
Hard Drive Mechanics Stress
X
Hard Drive Internal Cache
X
Video Adapter Text Memory
X
Video Adapter
Video Adapter Super VGA Memory
X
Printer Printer Test
X
Speaker Speaker Test
X
Keyboard Keyboard
X
Mouse Mouse
X
Laboratories. c4000, c4100, i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
Version - 96756-111_338_2
Purpose This procedure documents retrieval of current logs, copying the database to CD, copying archived logs Module SCC
to CD, and retrieval of a Memory Dump file. If requested by Abbott personnel, the logs may be cleared
from the system.
Retrieve current logs: This option copies the following logs to the D drive and floppy or CD if
selected: Assay Activity, Assay Calibration, Assay Parameter, Assay QC Result Data, Liquid
Level Sense, Maintenance History, Permanent Message History, Pressure Monitoring, Quality
Control, Result, Scripting, Temporary, Temporary Message History, Sample Activity, Dr. Watson,
Host, LAS, ARM, Arch, Unhandled, Application Event, CDRecord, Monitorlog, Printed Reports.
In addition, the iSystem copies: Power On Self Test, PM Trace, Wash Aspirate
Monitoring.
In addition, the cSystem copies: Optics
In addition, the i1000SR copies: Regeant
Copy database to the CD: This option compresses and copies the database to the D drive and
CD.
Copy archive logs to CD: This option copies up to 5 previously retrieved compressed logs from
the D drive to a CD.
Retrieve memory dump file: (FSE only) This option compresses and copies a memory dump file
to a CD.
Refer to the tables below for additional information regarding each option.
Materials Materials vary depending on the option selected. Required materials may include CD, or Floppies Time Variable
Required
Prerequisites 1. The system should be powered ON. P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure
2. The processing module must be in the Stopped, Warming, or
Ready state.
Access 6009 1. Select the System icon, then select Diagnostics from the drop-
Log Utilities down menu.
Procedure 2. Select the radio button for module 5.
3. Select the Utilities category.
Retrieve Logs 1. Select 6009 Log Utilities procedure. Note

2. Select Perform F5. A confirmation popup displays. Logs should not be cleared unless
3. Select OK to perform the procedure. The diagnostic perform specifically requested by in-house
dialog window displays. A description of the procedure displays Abbott personnel.
on the instruction window.
4. Select Proceed to continue the log retrieval procedure.
5. Select the appropriate option. Refer to the tables below for
additional information.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen.
7. When the procedure is complete, select Done.
File Transfer 1. Perform P-221 Modem File Transfer Procedure to transfer the
(Optional) logs via modem.
Error Messages
Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action
Not enough free space on A temporary copy of the files is copied to the C: drive before copying them to Perform the
C: drive to create the CD. There is not enough space on the C: drive to copy the temporary files. appropriate
temporary image files One of the following could have occurred: drive recovery
procedure
Non-ARCHITECT software was installed on the SCC. Replace the
The C: hard drive contains bad sectors. hard drive
No CD recorder detected The CD drive is not a read/write drive. Perform the

The Gearworks drivers are corrupted. appropriate
CD drive hardware failure drive recovery
procedure
Replace the
CD drive
Unknown error The COPY2CD_2 program was executed but did not respond. Perform the
appropriate
The COPY2CD_2 program has been moved or is corrupted. drive recovery
procedure
Retrieve Current Logs Option
This option captures logs for troubleshooting or software investigation. The table below details each log and describes when that log
is used. The log name has the following format: date_24time_serial#_logname.xxx (where x-axes is the extension of the log file). The
files may be copied to a floppy disk, CDR/CDRW disk or hard drive. If floppy disk is selected the logs are compressed and saved to
1 or more floppies. If CD is selected the files are recorded uncompressed to a blank or appendable CDR or CDRW disk. If hard
drive is selected the files are saved uncompressed to D:\Logs. In addition, all logs are saved in an archive file (refer to Copy Archive
Logs to the C Drive option for additional information).
Capture Log Module

Log Log Name Steps Log Format Capacity
When Specific
Application eventapp.txt Records the Format-specific for the application event 9900 or 9077 No
Event application error errors
event error occurred and
information. the SCC has
shut down.
Dr. Watson
errors
Arch arch Records Format-specific for architecture errors Architect No
architect exception
exception error errors
information.
ARM debugcom7.log Records all Format-specific for ARM communication ARM Issues No
debugcom7.log.bak communication event.
between the
SCC and ARM.
Assay assayactivity Records for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Lockstep 24000 per Lockstep or Yes
Activity assay Count | Lockstep Time | Test ID | module Timing errors
performance Mechanism ID | Duration | Event | Error for i System or
activities Code c System
associated with
performing tests
Assay assaycal Records for the Assay ID | Assay Status | Reagent Master 600 Cal or Result No
Calibration last 600 Lot | Calibrator Lot | Calibration Type | Issues for
attempted Completion Date | Completion Time | i System and c
calibrations. Module ID | Module SN | Operator ID | System
Curve Exception String | Curve Type |
Calibration Summary | Curve Parameters |
RMSE | Adjuster Ratios | Linear XFRM
Slope | Linear XFRM Intercept
Assay assayparameter Records a copy Formatted as an assay parameter report A copy of When you No
Parameter of the assay in assay numerical order. the assay need to review
parameters for parameter or verify the
each assay report for assay
installed. every parameter for
assay an i System
installed. and c System.
Assay QC ReleasedQC.csv CVS format log Control Name | SID | Control Level | Stored >Control No
Result Log that contains all Control Lot Number | Control Comment | QC Issues for the i
stored QC Assay Name | Assay Number | Module | results System and c
results currently Serial Number | Cal Lot | Cal Date and currently System
in the database. Time | Reagent Master Lot | Reagent in the
Serial Number | Date Time Completed | database.
Carrier | Position | Result | Units | Min
Range| Max Range | Dilution | Flags |
Read Values | Absorbance Cuvette | Mv
Cuvette | Operator ID | System Serial
Number
CDRecord CDRecord.log Captures a copy N/A N/A Problems No
of the log reading or
associated with writing to a
the CD CD-ROM.
recording
software.
Dr. Watson user.dmp Records Dr. Format-specific for Dr. Watson events. Dr. Watson No
drwtsn32.log Watson event errors
information.
Host debugcom5.log Records all See RS-232 Manual for format Host Issues No
debugcom5.log.bak communication information.
between the
SCC and Host.
LAS debugcom6.log Records Date/Time of Event | Communication 1000 LAS Issues No
debugcom6.log.bak transferred Direction | Event
between system
and LAS
Liquid Level lls Records for fluid Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Test ID | 10,000 Level Sense Yes
Sense aspirate events Assay ID | Pipetting Context | Pipetting per Issues for
including Step Number | Well Name | Level Sense module i System and c
aspirate and Category | Level Sense Event | Step System
wickoff. Number
Maintenance maintenancehistory Records for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Maintenance No
History maintenance Completion Status | Frequency | Operator or Diagnostic
performed. One ID | Event Procedure
log is Issues for
maintained for i System and c
all modules. System
Monitorlog Monitorlog.txt Fan and Date, Time, Error N/A When you No
(Note: only temperature need to review
valid on monitor errors from the
SCC information from intel monitor
platform C the intel monitor software.
and higher) software.
Optics optics Records the Replicate ID | Assay ID | Dilution ID | 10,000 Need to view Yes
optics reads for Sample ID | Test Completion Date | Test per absorbance
a c8000 Completion Time | Module ID | Cuvette | module data for
module. Concentration | 16 wavelengths with 33 wavelengths
reads other than
primary and
secondary for
c System
Permanent messagehistory Records for the Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Error 12000 Hardware or No
Message last 12000 error Category | Message Text Software
History codes logged in issues for
the message i System and c
history category. System
Power On post Last record for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Event Bootup Issues Yes
Self Test each i System Generated for i System or
processing sample
module, SCC or handler
sample handler
power on
sequence.
Captures
processing
module, SCC,
or sample
handler bootup
execution or
error messages.
Pressure pm Records for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Test ID | 10,000 Pressure Yes
Monitor pressure Assay Number | Protocol | Step Number | per Monitoring
monitoring Well Name | Pipetting volume | PM Status module Issues for
results of fluid | Front End Pressure | Aspirate Pressure | i System and c
aspirate events. Back End Pressure | Aspirate Error Sum | System
Actual Theoretical Ratio | Pressure Error |
Stuff
Printed *.rtf An RTF version Formatted as the specific report One RTF To obtain a No
Reports of each report version of copy of the
type. each printed report.
report
type
printed.
Quality qc Event recorded Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Operator 5000 QC event No
Control any time a user ID | Assay Name | Control Name | Control details for
performs the Lot Number | Control Level Name | Detail i System and c
following: | Event System
includes or
excludes a QC
point, edits
configuration
parameters,
changes
Westgard rules,
recalibrates
reagent lot,
edits QC lot
default.
Reagent reagent Records the Reagent Carrier Detected I Reagent 4000 Reagent Yes
Activity reagent Carrier Load Complete I Reagent Carrier carrier load
activities Unload Complete I Carrier Removed I and unload
associated with Reagent Carrier Load I Reagent Carrier issues for
loading and Unload I Reagent Carrier Error I Create c1000
unloading Reagent Pack I Delete Reagent Pack I
reagent carriers Report Mixing Status I Reagent Pack Last
Aspiration I Disposition Reagent Pack I
Carousel Window I Request Carousel I
Request Carousel Response I Release
Carousel I Reagent Pack Unload Time I
Carrier Inventory I Aliquot Created I
Reagent Pack Available
Result result Records for the Replicate ID | Assay ID | Assay Status | 11200 Result, LLS, No
last 11,200 Dilution ID | Sample ID | Sample Type | and PM Issues
attempted tests Patient ID | Test Order Date | Test Order for i System
run on the Time | Test Initiation Date | Test Initiation and c System
system. Time | Test Completion Date | Test
Completion Time | Assay Calibration Date
| Assay Calibration Time | Module ID |
Module SN | Operator ID | Dark Subreads
| Signal Subreads | Dark Count | Signal
Count | Corrected Count | Std Bak | Ave
Bak | Std For | Ave For | Shape |
Exception String | Result | Reported
Result | Reported Result Units | Result
Flags | Reagent Master Lot | Result
Interpretation | Dilution Protocol | Result
Details | Result Comment
Sample sampleactivity Records all Format-specific for each significant event. 1200 Sample Yes
Activity significant Handler Issues
sample
management
events.
Scripting Script Records script Format is specific for the maintenance or 10,000 Need exists to No
commands and diagnostic procedure. review specific
responses from errors that
a maintenance occurred when
or diagnostic running the
procedure. maintenance
or diagnostic
procedure
Temporary temporary_*.log Records the log No
data into a
temporary log
as a backup.
Temporary tempmessage Records for the Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Error 200 Bar code read No
Message last 200 Category | Message Text errors or Host
History messages communication
logged in the errors for
temporary i System and c
category (ie. System
Bar code read
errors, host
communication
errors)
Trace trace Hardware Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Ticks | 10,000 Hardware Yes
interactions to Event per issues for
and from module i System or
hardware sample
devices (ie. handler
Temperature
controller, OMS
boards)
Unhandled unhandled Records Format-specific for software error Non-specific No
software error software errors
information.
Wash wam Records for Date/Current_Time | Module_ID | 3200 Wash Aspirate Yes
Aspirate wash aspiration Zone_Number | St1test# | St1Max | Issues for
Mechanism results of wash St1Delta | St2test# | St2Max | St2Delta | i System
aspirate events. St3test# | St3Max | St3Delta
Copy Database to CD Option
This option backs up the database to the C: drive, compresses the database and records it to a CD. Once copied, the compressed
file is deleted from the C: drive. This option may be required when requested for software investigation.
Copy Archive Logs to CD Option
This option allows the user to copy previously retrieved logs from the hard drive to a CD. When the Retrieve Current Logs option is
selected, copies of the logs are compressed into one file and stored in D:\LOGS\ARCHIVEDLOGS. The file is named with the
following format: date_24time_serial#_[1-5}.zip. Up to five compressed archived logs are saved on the hard drive with 1 being the
newest and 5 being the oldest. The user is able to copy one or more archive files to a CD at a time.
Retrieve Memory Dump File Option (FSE only)
This option compresses and records the memory dump file to a CD. The memory dump file is used to gather data (debug
information) on the utilization of system memory for the SCC.
reserved.
P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen Version - 96756-111_337_3

P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen
Purpose To calibrate the touchscreen on the SCC. Module SCC

Access Explorer
1. Select the System icon.
2. Select Task Manager from the drop-down menu.
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Explorer opens.
Calibrate
Touchscreen
1. Using Explorer, scroll down and select Control Panel.
2. Double-click ELO Touchscreen to open it.
3. Select Align.
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to calibrate the touchscreen.
5. Select OK to complete the calibration.
Note
For some touchscreen monitors, better touchscreen response is achieved by
performing the touchscreen calibration twice.
Verify Touchscreen
Calibration
1. Move through at least four screens, using the touchscreen, to verify touchscreen
operation.
reserved.
P-206 Printer Configuration Version - 96756-111_305_2

P-206 Printer Configuration
To configure the printer during installation, or when a new printer is installed. SCC/Printer
Purpose Module
None 15 min
Materials Required Time
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
screen. system to operator level of access. To do this, perform
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
name field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the
password field.
Note
Enter the date code in reverse
order.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the
Snapshot screen lists FSE.
Access
Explorer
2. Select Task Manager from the drop-down
menu.
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Explorer
opens.
Rename
Architect Note
Printer to If this is a new printer and no Architect
Printer Product Printer is listed, go to Load Printer Driver.
Name
1. Using Explorer, select the Printers folder.
Note
The printers folder is located in the
C:\Control Panel directory.
2. Right-click Architect Printer (highlights

printer name) and select Rename from the
drop down menu (selects printer name for
editing).
Note
If a menu doesn't display when you
right-click the name, select File,
Rename from the menu bar.
3. Enter the printer product name (example

OKI B4350).
4. Press Enter to rename the printer.
Load Printer
Driver Note
If this is a new printer and the printer
driver is already listed in the printers
directory, skip this Action.
1. Insert the printer driver CD into the CD-

ROM drive.
Note
If the CD starts automatically, stop
that action. Exit the opening screen
from the CD and return to the
desktop.
2. Access the Printers folder and double-

click Add Printer.
3. Select Next (starts the Add Printer
Wizard).
4. Select the Local printer radio button.
5. Select Next.
6. Select LPT1 (connection port).
7. Select Next.
8. Select Have Disk.
9. Select Browse and locate the desired
printer driver file on the CD-ROM.
Note
Refer to the appropriate ISA for the
appropriate printer driver file name.
10. Select the driver and select Open.

11. Select OK, then Next several times until
the Completing the Add Printer Wizard
pop-up displays.
Note
Do not change any of the settings
on these screens.
12. Select Finish.
Note
The Wizard loads the new driver.
13. Remove the printer driver CD from the CD-
ROM drive.
Rename
Printer to
1. Right-click the name of the newly added
Architect
printer (highlights printer name) and select
Printer
Rename from the drop down menu
(selects printer name for editing).
Note
Rename from the menu bar.
2. Enter Architect Printer as the new name.

3. Press Enter to rename the printer.
Set Paper
Size
1. Right-click Architect Printer and scroll
down to Printing Preferences.
Note
Properties from the menu bar.
2. Select the Paper/Quality tab.

3. Select the Advanced button.
4. Select the desired paper size.
5. Select OK.
6. Go to Set Architect Printer as Default.
Set Architect
Printer as
1. Right-click Architect Printer (highlights
Default
printer name) and select Set as Default
Printer.
Note
right-click the highlighted item,
select File, Set as Default Printer
from the menu bar.
2. Verify that Set as Default Printer is

checked in the menu that displays.
3. Repeat this step to verify that when you
right-click the Architect Printer, a
checkmark displays in front of Set as
Default Printer.
4. Go to ARCHITECT Print Screen
Verification.
ARCHITECT
Print Screen Note
1. From any ARCHITECT screen, press If this print test fails, refer to current ARCHITECT ISAs
Verification
Alt+Print Screen and verify that the for information on Properties and Document Defaults for
screen prints. the printer.
ARCHITECT
Report Print Note
1. From the Snapshot screen, select the If this print test fails, verify that the printer is selected as
Test
Results icon. the default printer. If it continues to fail, refer to current
2. From the dropdown menu, select Results ARCHITECT ISAs for information on Properties and
Review. Document Defaults for the printer.
3. Select Print F4.
4. Select Results List Report.
5. Select Done to print.
Log Off as
FSE
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot
screen.
Note
The User Name field displays and is
2. Press Delete to delete the FSE name.
Note
3. Select Done.
Note
Prior to leaving the site, FSE is
required to return the system to
operator level of access.
P-207 ARCHITECT Print Test
Version - 96756-111_354_2
Purpose Verify printer is configured correctly. Module SCC/Printer
Verify 1. From any ARCHITECT screen, Note

ARCHITECT select the Alt+Print Screen keys If this print test fails, refer to current ARCHITECT ISAs for information
Print Screen and verify that the screen on Properties and Document Defaults for the printer.
prints.
Verify 1. From the Snapshot screen, Note

ARCHITECT select the Results icon. If this print test fails, verify that the printer is selected as the default
Prints 2. From the dropdown menu, printer. If it continues to fail, refer to current ARCHITECT ISAs for
Report select Results Review. information on Properties and Document Defaults for the printer.
3. Select Print F4.
4. Select Results List Report.
5. Select Done to print.
6. Verify that the report header
prints.
P-209 Use of Debug Cables for Troubleshooting (SCC Platform B or C) Version - 96756-111_293_2

P-209 Use of Debug Cables for Troubleshooting (SCC Platform B or C)
Purpose To provide instructions on how to use debug cables to troubleshoot system start up issues. This Module SCC,
procedure is especially useful when a processing module or sample handler remains in an OFFLINE i2000
status after adequate time for system start up has been allowed. SR,
i2000,
SH
Materials 7-92394-01 Cables, Debug Kit Time 15
Required min
Prerequisite
1. The processing module and sample handler must be in a Stopped status.
Preparation
1. Connect one debug cable from the top connector on the front of the card cage to
connector P8 on the SCC DIGI board cable.
Note
This cable is for the processing module.
2. Connect one debug cable from the bottom connector on the front of the card cage to
connector P7 on the SCC DIGI board cable.
Note
This cable is for the sample handler.
Prepare Software
1. Power down the processing module.
2. Log on as FSE (P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure).
3. Select System and then select Task Manager.
4. Select New Task.
5. Enter Explorer and then select OK.
6. Navigate to C:\TERMINALS.
7. Double-click on SSH.HT.
The sample handler hyperterminal window displays.
8. Double-click on IAHV.HT.
The processing module hyperterminal window displays.

Observe System Status
During Start Up
1. Power on the processing module.
Note
After power is applied, data displays in the processing module and sample
handler hyperterminal windows.
2. Allow the start up process to proceed until an error occurs or until the processing
module and sample handler are in a Stopped status.
3. Review the data generated during the start up process for errors or other problems.
reserved.
P-210 Modem Test Version - 96756-111_292_2

P-210 Modem Test
Purpose To be performed on installation of a system SCC, or modem. Module SCC/Modem

Verify System
is Ready
1. Verify system power is ON.
2. Verify modem is connected and ON.
3. Switch (Alt+Tab) to the PCANYWHERE window and verify status is Waiting.
Modem Into
System
1. Contact Country Support to dial in using PCANYWHERE Version 10.0 (or higher), or use a
separate computer equipped with PCANYWHERE (the FSR laptop) and a modem connection to
dial into the SCC.
Verify Remote
User
1. Remote user verifies that they are able to connect to the SCC and see the ARCHITECT user
Connection
interface.
2. Remote user verifies that they can move through at least four different screens without losing
connection.
3. Close remote user connection.
Verify System
is Ready
1. Switch (Alt+Tab) to the PCANYWHERE window and verify the status has returned to Waiting.
P-211 System Date, Time, and Time Zone Version - 96756-111_291_2

P-211 System Date, Time, and Time Zone
Purpose Set the date, time, and time zone and enable or disable daylight savings time. Module SCC
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. the system to operator level of access. To do this,
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
lists FSE.
Set Date,
Time, and
Time Zone
2. Select Configuration from the dropdown menu.
3. Select the System settings radio button.
4. Select the System control center category.
5. Select Configure F6.
6. Enter the System date and System time.
7. Select the desired time zone.
Note
Place a check in the Automatically adjust
clock for daylight saving changes checkbox
to select automatic adjustment for Daylight
Savings Time.
8. Select Done.
Verify
Settings
1. Access the Snapshot screen.
2. Verify the date and time are correct.
P-212 PCANYWHERE Startup
Version - 96756-111_290_2
Purpose This procedure is used to configure PCANYWHERE to manual startup (no modem installed), Module SCC/Modem
reconfigure automatic startup after a modem is installed, and restart PCANYWHERE.
Materials None Time 15 min

Required
Log On 1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot Note

screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the system to operator level of access. To do this, perform
User name field. Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
password field.
Note
Enter the date code in reverse
order.
4. Select Done.
Access 1. Select the System icon.

Explorer 2. Select Task Manager from the drop-
down menu.
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Explorer
opens.
Access Control 1. Using Explorer, scroll down and select

Panel Control Panel.
2. Select it to display the icons on the right
side of the screen.
Access 1. Scroll down the Explorer window to find

Services the Administrative Tools icon.
2. Double-click the Administrative Tools
icon.
3. Double-click the Services icon.
4. Verify that the Services window opens.
5. Scroll down to find PCANYWHERE Host
Service and double-click the icon to
select it.
PCANYWHERE 1. View the Service status and the
Settings Startup type.
The Startup type [1] indicates

PCANYWHERE status during power ON.
Automatic indicates
PCANYWHERE starts
automatically at power ON.
Manual indicates the user must
start PCANYWHERE in the
Services Control panel
The Service status [2] indicates if the

service is or is not active.
Started in the status field

indicates that the PCANYWHERE
service is running.
Stopped indicates that the
PCANYWHERE service is not
running.
Disable Note
PCANYWHERE Perform this procedure if a modem is
not installed on the SCC.
1. Set to Manual Startup:

From the services window, select
PCANYWHERE Host Service
from the list.
Set the Startup type to
Manual. [1]
Select OK to save the setting.
2. Stop the service:
If the Service status indicates
Started, select Stop to stop the
PCANYWHERE Host Service. [2]
A message displays indicating that
the system is attempting to stop
the PCANYWHERE service.
3. Select OK to save the setting.
4. Close the Services window.
5. Restart the SCC and verify that
PCANYWHERE does not start
automatically.
Verify/Configure to Automatic Startup and Start the Service
This is only required if PCANYWHERE does not go to the waiting mode when the SCC is restarted. This may occur if the service
setting for PCANYWHERE was changed from Automatic to Manual start.
Note
Verify that a modem is connected, turned on, and the telephone line is functional.
Verify/Configure to 1. In the Services window, with PCANYWHERE Host Service selected, double-click.
Automatic Startup 2. Select the Automatic Startup type.
Start Service 1. If the Service status lists Started, verify the modem is operational according to P-
210 Modem Test.
2. If the Service status lists Stopped, select Start to start PCANYWHERE Host
Service. A message displays attempting to startup PCANYWHERE and then puts it
in Waiting.
Note
If an error message is received select OK.
3. Select OK to save the setting.

4. Close the Services window.
5. Restart the SCC.
Verify 1. Switch (Alt+Tab) to the PCANYWHERE window and verify the status is Waiting.
PCANYWHERE
Starts Automatically
Verification 1. Verify modem operation using P-210 Modem Test.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks
of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All
rights reserved.
P-213 Modem Connection to an SCC
Version - 96756-111_289_2
Purpose This procedure documents how to use PCANYWHERE to modem into an ARCHITECT Module SCC/Modem
SCC.
Materials None Time N/A

Required
Contact 1. Contact the customer and obtain permission to

Customer modem into their system.
2. Inform them why you are modeming in and what
activities you expect to perform while connected
to their system.
3. Ask the customer to verify that the modem is on
and connected to a telephone line.
Verify 1. Have the customer press Alt+Tab to locate the

PCANYWHERE PCANYWHERE icon.
Status
Note
If the icon is not available, then
PCANYWHERE is not open or is not in a
waiting status.
2. Have the customer verify that the

PCANYWHERE dialog indicates
PCANYWHERE in a waiting status.
If PCANYWHERE is waiting, go to Open
PCANYWHERE.
If PCANYWHERE is not waiting, ask the
customer to restart the SCC, or refer to
P-212 PCANYWHERE Startup.
The customer may have closed
PCANYWHERE accidentally
PCANYWHERE has been changed
from Autostart to Manual start.
Open 1. Start PCANYWHERE.

PCANYWHERE 2. Select the Remotes button. [1]
3. Double-click the ARCHITECT icon. [2]
Note
If you work with pre-configured accounts,
double-click the account icon and the
computer automatically dials the number.
Enter Modem 1. Enter the modem number for the ARCHITECT
Number SCC. [1]
Be sure to enter any necessary access codes

(for outside line, etc.)
2. Select OK.
Log In 1. Enter FSE in the Username field.

2. Enter fse in the Password field.
3. Enter SCC in the Domain field.
Note
The PCANYWHERE file manager window
displays.
Once connected to an SCC, an image of

the SCC screen displays on your system.
You can perform:
All on-screen operations.
Most keyboard operations.
Note
Response to mouse clicks and keyboard
entries is slower than when you are
working directly on an SCC. Also, the
colors used in the ARCHITECT software
are not correctly presented in the
PCANYWHERE screen image. This does
not impact available functionality.
Complete 1. Refer to the functions and activities listed under

Modem Accessing Different Applications on the SCC to
Activities complete the call.
If file transfer is required, refer to P-221
Modem File Transfer Procedure.
Close Call 1. If you logged onto the system as FSE at any

time during your call, log off at this time (refer to
P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure.)
2. Select the End Remote Control Session
icon. [1]
3. Contact the customer to let them know that you
have completed your modem activities.
4. Document your activities according to local
country call management procedures.
Accessing Different Applications on the SCC
Note
The ALT+TAB key combination cannot be used to move between applications from a remote computer. Use Windows NT
Task Manager to switch between programs, end programs, or launch new programs on the SCC.
Log On as 1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Note

FSE 2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
name field. system to operator level of access. To do this, perform
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
password field.
Note
4. Select Done.
screen lists FSE.
Launch 1. Select the System icon on the SCC image.

Task 2. Select Task Manager from the drop-down
Manager menu.
Switch 1. Open Task manager.

Programs 2. Select the program you want to use.
3. Select the Switch To button. [1]
Close 1. Open Task manager.
Application 2. Select the program you want to end.
3. Select End Task. [1]
4. Select Wait in the next dialog.
Note
If the same dialog displays and the
application did not quit, select End
Task in the dialog.
Open 1. Open Task manager.

Programs 2. Select the New Task button. [1]
If you know the name and the path of
the application you want to start, you
can type it in the dialog box. [2]
If you want to select the application by
browsing, select Browse [3] and find
the program in the Browse window.
3. Select OK.
4. Minimize the Task manager window.
P-214 Database Restore Version - 96756-111_288_3

P-214 Database Restore
Purpose If the system has database errors or will not boot up, perform this procedure to restore the Module SCC
database from the system software.
Required min
Restore from Utilities
Log On
as FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site,
FSE is required to return the
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. system to operator level of
access. To do this, perform
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. Log Off as FSE, or restart
Note the SCC.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot screen lists FSE.
Restore
Database
1. Select the System icon, then select Utilities. Module Calibration - System
calibration files, robo.cal and
2. Select the Backup Software radio button. sample handler.cal files.
3. Select a backup from the available backup list. System Configuration -

Default host and system
4. Select [F5] Restore and restore the: parameters.
Module Calibration Database - System
database file, Architect.bak.
System Configuration Contains M&D procedures,
assay files, assay
Database
calibrations, results, module
5. The system restarts and the module calibration, system configuration, and and SCC configuration.
database are restored.
6. For i1000SR, after restoring a system backup, force the system to unload all
the reagents from the carousel and then reload them.
This may be done one of two ways:
1. Through the user interface, from Snapshot screen, select Reagents >
Select all > F7 Unload. Once the processing module is set to Ready
and the RSH to Running, the reagents will automatically unload. Then,
remove and reinsert the carriers to reload them.
OR
2. While the processing module and RSH are in Stopped or Ready

status, fully open and close the reagent carousel cover, which will
cause all the reagents to go to BCR Fail status. Once the processing
module is set to Ready and the RSH to Running, the reagents will
automatically unload. Then, remove and reinsert the carriers to reload
them.
Restore at Boot Up (cannot start ARCHITECT Software)
Access
Restore
1. When the system software starts to bootup and
Window
you get a screen that has the ARCHITECT logo,
press Alt+Shift.
2. Verify that a restore window displays.
Restore
Database
1. Select the desired backup file (the file to restore)
to highlight it.
2. Select the Create database button.
3. Select Done.
Verification
1. Verify the ARCHITECT application starts correctly.
2. Perform startup on the processing module and the
sample handler.
3. Update Inventory.
reserved.
P-215 PM Log Interpretation Version - 96756-111_287_2

P-215 PM Log Interpretation
Purpose Use to interpret PM log data after performing procedure P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure. Module SCC
Materials Required Floppy, CD, or modem for retrieval Time N/A
Example of PM Log:
The above sample represents only some of the potential errors. More than one error can occur, such as the 0X0150, because they
are or'd (combined) together. The 0X00150 shows a communications error and clot (0X0010) and two shape errors (0X0020).
PM
Definition Probable Cause and Corrective Action
Status
0X0001 Invalid Syringe PMIB is telling Syringe to cut on/off too early.
Try PMIB, LLS Board, Software protocol, experiment protocol
0X0002 Air Only No liquid was picked up during aspiration. Also known as front end pulse error.
Aspirated
Check LLS to see if it is triggering above the liquid
Check for droplets on side of container (condensation, splashing)
Is the container empty?
Check for connection tightness, and then start with sensor
0X0010 Clot Detected Clot Score Exceeded 1000. A clot was sucked in during aspiration.
Bad Samples. Check sample, especially if whole blood, for chunky bits (clots). Replace if clumpy.
Try a new probe then a sensor. Be sure to flush using CLI command for the pipettor (OMS XX
JGXXXX) before running PM again.
0X0020 Shape Error Shape Error. Air was aspirated after liquid was sampled. Shape score in log exceeds 180
Sample fluid not homogenous (usually blood samples)

Probe hitting side of container. Check Robo Cal
Erratic LLS. Check LLS log for consistent liquid found position
Can be loose robot components (mount screws or Z-Motion Slop)
0X0040 Start /Stop

0X0100 Communications Suspect when you get multiple different errors on the same pipettor. Can be combined with another
Error number.
0X0500 Communications The system may not see all the data.
Error
Broken or open connections on PMIB board. LLS/PMIB Connector wires broken. Check
connections or replace PMIB
Replace LLS Board
It has been observed that the PM/LLS components sometimes work fine except in certain
combinations with a particular pipettor. Try swapping the whole set of parts between a working
pipettor and the one in question.
0X0200 Over Pressure Overpressure detected.

Detected For overpressure, either the probe or sensor is clogged or the probe hit the bottom of the container and
sealed off without z-crashing.
0X0400 Under Pressure Under pressure detected.

Detected For under pressure, check for liquid in container
General If you get a large number of errors on a single pipettor regardless of sample size, the probable causes
are:
Sensor (erratic, not linear any more, leaking)

PMIB
Connections
LLS Board
P-216 WAM Log Interpretation Version - 96756-111_286_2

At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces
results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
P-216 WAM Log Interpretation
Purpose Use to interpret WAM log data after performing procedure P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure. Module SCC
A guideline to use for the WAM Station Delta at each probe position is that it should be at least 1250 units (1.25 C (33.6 F) degrees).
The WAM Log record structure (each line of data) is:
Date Current_Time Module_ID Zone_Number St1test# St1Max St1Delta St2test# St2Max St2Delta St3test# St3Max St3Delta
06/10/1998 17:36:43 |1 |2 | 25 | 27274 | 34 |0 | 27649 | 852 |0 28808 | 2651
St1, St2, St3 means station 1, 2, 3 in that order.
Note
In the logfile, it is all squeezed together to conserve disk space and looks like:
06/10/1998 17:36:43|1|2|25|27274|34|0|27649|852|0|28808|2651
Note
Aspirations occur twice per lockstep - this means two lines of data for each lockstep.
Note
If no RV is present at a probe position, data is reported, but is very low. This occurs as an RV enters and moves through a wash zone.
At the first lockstep when an RV enters a wash zone, the data for Probe 1 looks normal, while the data for probe 2 and 3 is low. At
lockstep 2, the data for probe 1 and 2 should look normal, while the data for 3 is low. At lockstep 3, the data for all three probes should
look normal. (This assumes that there are at least three (3) RVs in the process path.)
i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-217 Disable Keyboard Locale Hot Keys Version - 96756-111_275_2

P-217 Disable Keyboard Locale Hot Keys
Purpose This procedure documents how to disable the hot keys for local languages. Module SCC
Note
If locale hot keys are enabled when Alt+Shift keys are selected by the operator, the operating
system switches from US (standard) keyboard mapping to other keyboards (such as German,
French, Spanish, and Italian).

Required min
Log On as
FSE Note
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. the system to operator level of access. To do
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
screen lists FSE.
Access
Explorer
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
Disable
Keyboard
1. Use Explorer to navigate to the Control Panel folder.
Locale Hot
2. Double-click on Control Panel.
Keys
3. Double-click on Keyboard.
4. Select the Input Locales tab.
5. Select Change Key Sequence button.
6. De-select Enable Key Sequence check box.
7. Select OK.
8. Select Apply.
9. Select OK.
10. Close Explorer.
Log Off as
FSE Note
the system to operator level of access.
Note
The User Name field displays and is populated
with the name FSE.
Note
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that nothing is listed on the startup screen after
Operator:.
Verification
1. Press Alt+Shift on the keyboard.
Note
It is important that you only press Alt+Shift
once. If Alt+Shift is pressed more than once,
the keyboard mapping is not correctly set for
the verification.
2. Select the Orders icon.

3. Select Patient order from the drop-down menu.
4. Go to the SID field and press y on the keyboard.
Note
If "z" displays, repeat the procedure.
P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC Platform C) Version - 96756-111_276_1

P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC Platform C)
Purpose This procedure is used when the integrity of the system software (SCC Platform C) is suspect (incorrect Module SCC
shutdown of the SCC is a possible cause) or to install software when replacing the C: drive. This
procedure includes making a backup of the database, rewriting the C: drive, reconfiguring the SCC, and
restoring the database.
Materials ARCHITECT System Software Configuration Media Time 30
Required min
Prerequisite
1. The processing module must be in Stopped, Ready, or
Offline status.
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. return the system to operator level of access.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart
the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
lists FSE.
Verify
Current Note
1. Select the System icon, then Utilities. If this cannot be performed, go directly to
Backup
2. Select Backup software from the Utilities screen. Insert CD and Restart SCC.
3. Verify that a current backup displays in the Available
Backups field.
Insert CD
and Restart
1. Insert the ARCHITECT System Software
SCC
Configuration Media in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Select Shutdown [F3] from the Snapshot screen.
4. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del keys simultaneously.
5. When the Confirm exit window displays, select
Shutdown and restart the computer and then select
OK.
Note
When the SCC restarts, a WARNING! You are
about to install ... message displays.
6. Press any key to pass the WARNING screen.
Note
The R:\> prompt displays.
Rewrite C:
Drive Note
1. At the R:\> prompt, type 2 (Software Restore for C:) The ARCHITECT Software Configuration CD
REWRITE platform... "C", Drive C: and press Enter. is a service tool and should be taken from the
2. Press Enter to pass the WARNING! screen. site when the service engineer leaves.
Note
The system starts rewriting and the C: drive is
rewritten with a clean installation of the operating
system, application programs, and default system
files.
3. When prompted to insert the next media, remove Disk 1

of 2, insert Disk 2 of 2, and select Enter (continues the
process).
4. When the rewriting process is complete and the R:\>
prompt displays, remove Disk 2 of 2 from the CD-ROM
drive.
5. Reboot the computer by simultaneously pressing the
Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys.
Note
The system restarts. When the System Settings
Change window displays, the version splash
screen displays 2.01 rather than 2.02 because
the changes made between software version
2.01 and 2.02 affect only the c8000 module
firmware.
6. When the "Do you want to restart your computer

now?" displays, select Yes.
Note
This reboot ensures all of the hardware is
recognized before continuing.
Note
If the display graphics mode is not correct, select
Shutdown [F3] to shutdown and then restart the
SCC to correct the condition.
Configure
First Module Note
When the SCC reboots, the Configure first module
window displays.
1. Press the Num Lock key to activate the number

keypad.
2. Enter the FSE logon code.
3. Select the first processing module type from the list.
Note
If installing a ci8200, the first processing module
is c8000.
4. Enter the Serial No. of the first module being installed.

5. Select OK to shutdown and restart the SCC.
Note
After the SCC reboots a new database is
created. This may take up to 20 minutes. When
complete, the Snapshot screen displays.
6. When 0537 Improper shutdown on SCC error

message displays, select OK.
Note
If a modem is not installed, the software displays
a Dr. Watson error. Perform procedure P-212
PCANYWHERE Startup to set the service to
manual.
Verify
Software
1. When the Snapshot screen displays, log on as FSE (P-
Version
201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure).
2. Select the System icon, then Utilities.
3. Select Software install and verify software version 2.02
displays.
Restart SCC
and Locate
1. From the Utilities screen, select Backup software.
Backups
2. Verify that the last backups display in the Available
Backups field.
3. Locate the backup that you want to restore.
Restore
Database
1. Select the database backup that you wish to restore.
2. Select Restore, and restore the:
Module Calibration - System calibration files,

robo.cal and ish.cal files.
System Configuration - Default host and system
parameters.
Database - System database file, icw.odb.
Contains M&D procedures, assay files, assay
calibrations, results, module and SCC
configuration.
3. The system restarts and the module calibration, system

configuration, and database are restored.
Log On as
FSE Note
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. return the system to operator level of access.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart
the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
lists FSE.
Access
Explorer
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
Calibrate Perform P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen.

Touchscreen
Configure Perform P-206 Printer Configuration.
Printer
Identify and
Perform Note
1. Determine if the software version installed requires any Reinstalling software on the C: drive erases
Required
upgrades. any upgrades performed after the installation
Upgrades
of the latest software version using the
Compare the TSB sticker on the SCC and the Software Configuration CD-ROM. It is
processing module to the latest version of the necessary to reinstall those upgrades.
TSB/ISA listing.
Use Explorer to view the folders on the D: drive.
If a Change or Upgrade folder exists, and has
content, an upgrade has been performed.
2. Perform any required upgrades per the instructions

documented in the TSB or ISA.
Startup
Processing
1. Perform startup on the processing module(s) and
Module(s)
sample handler.
and Update
Inventory
Perform
Control Run
1. Using the reagents that shipped to the site, calibrate
and run at least two (2) sets of 10 (total of 20) replicates
of each level of control for one Two Step Assay
Protocol.
2. Verify that each of the results are within the ranges
published.
3. Print the QC report and verify that the CVs are under
10%. (Refer to P-24 Precision Run)
Note
Use all positive results for the calculation.
P-219 Ethernet Communication Verification Version - 96756-111_294_2

P-219 Ethernet Communication Verification
Purpose This procedure verifies that Ethernet communication has been established between the SCC and the Module SCC
processing module(s) or sample handler.
Required min
Power ON SCC
Note
Do not go to the next step until the system control center displays the Snapshot
screen.
Power ON the
Module(s)
2. Verify that the status of the attached module(s) goes from Offline to Stopped.
Note
During data transfer, the corresponding LED on the Ethernet hub blinks rapidly.
Perform Startup
1. To change the status of the processing module and sample handler from Stopped to Ready,
P-220 LLS Log File Interpretation Version - 96756-111_253_2

P-220 LLS Log File Interpretation
Purpose Use to interpret LLS log data after performing procedure P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure. Module SCC
LLS Log Field Definitions
Log excerpt showing how LLS should have increasing steps going into a container:
Regular LLS Log segment without errors:
LLS Status Codes

Readouts generated by the LLS X Status command:
Note
Works better if LLS X CLR_STATUS is run first, where X is the LLS system number, 0 (sample), 1 (R1), or 2 (R2).
Liquid Sensed, first time after replacing the cpu, or LLS board
0909
Liquid sensed, normal readout
0101
Lost contact during aspiration
0505
Self test readout, never saw liquid
0808
Shifted 0101 readout, may have crashed the probe
1011
Positively crashed the probe
1010
Theta Ground (only shows up during robo cal)
0606
P-221 Modem File Transfer Procedure
Version - 96756-111_281_1
Purpose Use to transfer files to and from an ARCHITECT SCC. This allows you to retrieve system logs, Module Modem
verify system files, or download updated files to the customer SCC.
Materials None Time N/A

Required
Access SCC 1. Select the File Transfer icon. [1]

PCANYWHERE
File Manager
Locate File(s) 1. Locate the file(s) you want to transfer on the

remote system or on the host system.
Transfer File(s) 1. Open the folder to which you want the file(s)
transferred.
2. Select the file(s) you want to transfer.
3. Select the Transfer icon. [1]
Note
The folder D:\Service\Temporary is on
every SCC as a temporary folder for files
that you want to transfer. The folder is a
temporary storage location; once file
transfer is complete and the files are
used appropriately, delete the files in this
folder.
Reference:
Verify Transfer 1. Verify that the file(s) that you transferred
displays in the receiving folder. The remote system (your PC) is on the left-hand
2. Complete the call according to P-213 Modem side of the screen. [2]
Connection to an SCC. The host system (SCC) is on the right hand side
of the screen. [3]
P-223 Override Processing Module Cover Interlocks Version - 96756-111_280_2

P-223 Override Processing Module Cover Interlocks
Purpose Module SCC

This procedure is used to override
the following covers:
front processing module cover

(c4000, i1000SR, i2000SR,
i2000)
rear processing module cover
(i2000SR, i2000)
R1, R2, and sample carousel
(c8000, c16000)
reagent supply center, reagent
supply center maintenance (Y)
(c4000)
Materials Required None Time NA
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. to return the system to operator level of
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. access. To do this, perform Log Off as
FSE, or restart the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot screen lists
FSE.
Override
cover
1. Select System from the Snapshot screen.
interlocks
2. Select Configuration, and then Modules.
3. Select the desired processing module, and then select On for
Override interlocks.
Note
Results are not reported when the cover interlocks are
overridden.
WARNING
The automatic reagent carousel scan is not
performed if you open and close the reagent
carousel covers. If any reagents or segments are
removed or changed you must request a manual
reagent scan.
Change
override
1. Select System from the Snapshot screen.
cover
2. Select Configuration, and then Modules.
interlocks
3. Select the desired processing module, and then select Off for
to Off
Override interlocks.
Note
Prior to leaving the site ensure that the override cover
interlocks is configured to Off as results are not reported
when the covers are overridden.
reserved.
P-224 External Modem DIP Switch Verification (US) Version - 96756-111_279_1

P-224 External Modem DIP Switch Verification (US)
Purpose Verify Dip Switch settings for the US Robotics modem are set to default. Module Modem
Use this table to verify that the dip switch settings are at default for the US robotics modem.
Note
If a DIP switch is ON, it is down. If a DIP switch is OFF, it is up.
Default
Switch Function
Setting
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Override
1 OFF OFF - Normal DTR operations: computer must provide DTR signal for the modem to accept
commands; dropping DTR terminates a call
ON - Modem ignores DTR (Override)
Verbal/Numeric Result Codes
2 OFF OFF - Verbal (word) results

ON - Numeric results
Result Code Display
3 ON OFF - Suppresses result codes

ON - Enables result codes
Command Mode Local Echo Suppression
4 OFF OFF - Displays keyboard commands

ON - Suppresses echo
Auto Answer Suppression
5 ON OFF - Modem answers on first ring, or higher if specified in NVRAM

ON - Disables auto answer
Carrier Detect (CD) Override

6 OFF OFF - Modem sends CD signal when it connects with another modem, drops CD on disconnect
ON - CD always ON (Override)
Power-on and ATZ Reset Software Defaults
7 OFF OFF - Loads YO-Y4 configuration from user-defined nonvolatile memory (NVRAM)
ON - Loads F0-Generic template from read only memory (ROM)
AT Command Set Recognition
8 ON OFF - Disables command recognition (Dumb Mode)

ON - Enables recognition (Smart mode)
P-226 Set Bar Code Transitions
Version - 96756-111_214_5
At the completion of this VP: After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results, ENSURE appropriate
Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
Purpose This procedure is used to reduce the frequency of the invalid bar code read errors by editing the transition field of the appropriate bar code Module SCC
calibration file to a value correct for the bar code type, presentation, or number of characters being used.
Materials Example Sample Tubes with customer bar code labels, pretreatment tubes or other tubes with special labels. Time 15
Required min
Prerequisites 1. Power ON the system.

2. The processing module must be in the Stopped, Warming, or Ready state.
Preparation 1. Obtain a variety of sample bar codes to be used.
Note
Some sites use a variety of bar code types and number of characters. To ensure that the
file is set properly to read all tubes, it is advised to determine the minimum number of
characters used.
2. Find out the bar code type (symbology) that is used.
Log On as 1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen.

FSE 2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field.
4. Select Done.
Determine 1. At the Snapshot screen, select Orders and then Patient order.
Number of 2. Select the SID field.
Characters 3. Using the SCC bar code scanner, scan the bar code label on a tube.
4. Count the number of characters entered into the field.
5. Repeat the process for the next tube.
6. Of the labels scanned, determine the minimum number of characters.
Perform 1. Perform 3253 Bar Code Configuration, Transition Value option (System, Diagnostics, SCC Option,
3253 Bar Utilities), and go to Shutdown and Restart SCC.
Code
Configuration
Manually Set Note Bar Code Transitions
Number of The following steps are an optional method to manually enter transition values to the BCR.Cal
Transitions File. This is required for values greater than those shown in the Bar Code Transitions table. Use
(Optional) minimum value that gives reliable results.
1. Using Bar Code Transitions, locate the bar code symbology and the number of characters.
2. Determine the recommended number of transitions.
Note
Barcode types serve as examples. Special labels may use transition settings closest to
those shown on the table for the example type. All settings are verified prior to use by
performing the appropriate test listed at the end of this procedure. Both tube and empty
positions are checked. Transitions as high as 120 would be acceptable.
Access 1. Select the System icon.
Explorer 2. Select Task Manager from the drop-down menu.
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
Open Bar 1. Navigate in Explorer on the left side to the desired folder for the type of sample handler.
Code Cal RSH and/or LSH (Sample Carousel) = C:\IPLS\RSH\System
File iRSH (c4000, i1000SR, ci4100) = C:\IPLS\iRSH\System
SSH = C:\IPLS\ISH\System
LAS = C:\IPLS\LASB\System
2. In the right field, select and double-click on BCR.CAL.
3. If the Open With pop up screen displays, select NOTEPAD.
Edit 1. In the BCR.CAL file, locate the value for the transition value number under the Value column.
Transition 2. Change the number to the new value determined above.
Value 3. Edit only the numerical value. DO NOT edit or delete any of the characters.
Note
The information for the Microscan MS3 barcode reader is not used at this time. This
information will only be present on instruments at v5.00 software or higher. If an error
occurs during the editing process go to Restore Default File.
Save File 1. At the top of the screen, select FILE then SAVE.
Restore Note
Default File This action is only required if there was an error in editing the BCR.CAL file.
1. Navigate in Explorer on the left side to the desired folder for the type of sample handler.
Note
Example: For the RSH you would navigate to C:\IPLS\RSH.
2. In the right field, select and double-click on the default directory and select BCR.CAL.
3. From the menu, select EDIT then COPY.
4. Navigate in Explorer to the appropriate sample handler system directory.
5. From the menu, select EDIT then Paste.
6. Go to Open Bar Code Cal File.
Shutdown 1. Perform P-248 Startup and Shutdown to shutdown and restart the computer and processing For information on the startup procedure,
and Restart modules. refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
SCC 2. Go to Perform Diagnostic Procedure Bar Code Reader Test. Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
Subsection: System startup, pause, and
shutdown.
Perform 1. Perform the appropriate Maintenance and Diagnostic procedure For further information on performing
Diagnostic SSH - 3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test diagnostic procedures, refer to the
Procedure RSH - 3252 RSH Bar Code Reader Test ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
Bar Code Section 10: Troubleshooting and
iRSH (c4000, i1000SR, ci4100) - 3230 Bar Code Reader Test
Reader Test diagnostics, Subsection: System
LAS - 3255 LAS Crsl Bar Code Reader Test diagnostics.
LSH / Sample Carousel - 3251 Sample Carousel Bar Code Test
Note
Use at least 10 bar coded tubes from the site when performing Maintenance and
Diagnostics.
2. Verify that all the bar coded tubes used scan correctly.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2010 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in
various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-227 Host Serial Port Loop Back Test (SCC platform B or C) Version - 96756-111_326_2

P-227 Host Serial Port Loop Back Test (SCC platform B or C)
Purpose This procedure documents how to test the host serial port. Module SCC
Materials Required Loop Back connector (shipped with the SCC) Time 10 min
Preparation
1. Power ON the system.
2. The processing module must be in the
Stopped, Warming, or Ready state.
Attach P3 port on DIGI board cable = Com 5

Loopback
1. Detach the LIS serial cable from the P3 serial
Connector to
port on the DIGI board cable.
Serial Port
2. Attach the loop back connector to the P3
serial port on the DIGI board cable.
Log On as FSE
Note
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User the system to operator level of access. To do this,
name field. perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
password field.
Note
4. Select Done.
screen lists FSE.
Turn Off Host

Bidirectional
Communications
2. Select Configuration from the drop-down
menu.
3. Select Host-Release Mode from the list box.
5. Select the Bi-directional Host radio button to
Off in the Communications section.
Note
Record the current setting (On or On
with Query). You need this information
when you turn the host communications
back on.
6. Select Done.
7. Select F1 - Exit to return to the Snapshot
screen.
Access Hyper
Terminal
menu.
3. Select New Task from the Windows NT
Security window.
4. Type Hypertrm.exe.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Hyper Terminal
opens.
Open New
Terminal
1. Type Host in the name field from the
Connection Description dialog window.
2. Select OK.
3. Select Com 5 from the Connect Using list box
in the Connect to dialog window.
4. Select OK.
Verification
1. Select OK from the Com 5 properties window.
2. Type 12345.
If the numbers display on the screen

the serial port is working properly.
If no numbers display on the screen the
serial port is not working.
Close New
Terminal
1. Close the terminal by clicking on the X in the
upper right corner of the window.
2. Select Yes to disconnect the terminal.
3. Select No so the session is not saved.
Turn On Host
Bidirectional
Communications
menu.
5. Select the Bi-directional Host radio button to
On or On with Query in the Communications
section.
6. Select Done.
screen.
Log Off as FSE

Note
the system to operator level of access.
Note
The User Name field displays and is
Note
3. Select Done.
Remove Loop
Back Connector
1. Remove the loop back connector from the P3
serial port on the DIGI board cable.
2. Attach the LIS cable to the P3 connector.
reserved.
P-228 SCC Bar Code Scanner Verification
Version - 96756-111_327_1
Purpose This procedure is used to verify bar code scanner functionality. Module Bar Code Scanner
Materials Required Bar Code Labels Time 3 min
Verify SCC BCR Functionality 1. From the Snapshot screen, select the Orders icon.
2. From the drop-down menu, select Patient orders.
3. Select the SID field.
4. Place the SCC bar code scanner over the bar code label.
5. Verify that the number from the label displays in the SID field.
P-230 D: Drive Recovery Procedure Version - 96756-111_328_2

P-230 D: Drive Recovery Procedure
Purpose This procedure is used when the integrity of the D: drive is suspect (incorrect shutdown of the SCC is Module SCC
a possible cause) or to install software when replacing the D: drive.
Materials ARCHITECT System Software Configuration Media Time 20
Required min
Insert CD and
Restart SCC
1. Insert the ARCHITECT System Software Configuration
Media in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Select Shutdown [F3] from the Snapshot screen.
4. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del keys simultaneously.
5. When the Confirm exit window displays, select Shutdown
and restart the computer and then select OK.
Note
When the SCC restarts, a WARNING! You are
about to install ... message displays.
6. Press any key to pass the WARNING screen.
Note
The R:\> prompt displays.
Rewrite D: Drive
Note
1. At the R:\> prompt type 3 (Software Restore for D:) The ARCHITECT Software
REWRITE platform... , Drive D: and press Enter. Configuration CD is a service tool and
2. Press Enter to pass the WARNING! screen. should be taken from the site when
the service engineer leaves.
Note
The system starts rewriting and the D: drive.
3. When the rewriting process is complete and the R:\> prompt

displays, remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive.
4. Reboot the computer by simultaneously pressing the
Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys.
Note
The system restarts. Wait until the System Settings
Change window is displayed.
5. Select Shutdown [F3] and then select OK to confirm the
shutdown request.
6. When the "Do you want to restart your computer now?"
displays, select Yes.
Note
This reboot ensures all of the hardware is recognized
before continuing.
Identify and
Perform Any Note
Required Reinstalling software on the D: drive erases any upgrade
Upgrades information saved in the Change or Upgrade folder on the D
Drive. The TSB sticker can be used to obtain information on
required upgrades.
1. Determine if any upgrades affect the information just

installed on the D Drive.
Compare the TSB sticker on the SCC and the

processing module to the latest version of the
TSB/ISA listing.
2. Perform any required upgrades that affect the D: Drive per

the instructions documented in the TSB or ISA.
Backup
Database
1. When the Snapshot screen displays, select the System
icon, then Utilities.
2. Select Create backup [F4] (performs database backup).
3. Verify that the backup occurs without error.
Startup the
Processing
1. Perform startup on the processing module(s) and sample
Module(s) and
handler.
Update Inventory
P-231 Software Error Information Version - 96756-111_329_2

P-231 Software Error Information
Purpose Checklist for gathering software error information. This information should be gathered and documented in Module SCC
the call management system, when a software error occurs. This checklist should be completed for any
software error, which reoccurs several times or requires onsite service.
Required min
List
Description Information Required Information
Here
Describe the error in detail (list all actions taken, all system responses). If possible, print a
screen image of the error as not all errors are logged in the message history and
temporary message.
List all related error messages (message history and temporary message). How often
does this error occur?
Error Description
Did the error occur while printing a report? If so, which one?
Did the error occur while printing a screen image (Alt + Print Screen)?
Did the error occur while accessing the SCC?
Did the error occur while creating patient test orders, calibrators test orders, or controls
test orders?
What keystrokes were being selected when the lockup or error occurred?
Check for Hidden Error A hidden error message may be present. Hold down the Alt+Tab keys and look for the
Messages following Icon.
Use the Tab key to tab to this icon and deselect the Alt key. If an error message
is present, it should display.
What was the status of the Processing Module at the time of error?
Status and Peripheral

Devices What was the status of the Sample Handler at the time of error?
Can the operator use the touchscreen? Keyboard? Mouse?
Does the SCC respond to STOP on the touchscreen or keypad?
What is the module configuration (i2000, i4000, i2000SR, c8000, etc.)?
What is the Software Version and when was it installed? (System, Utilities, Software
Install)
Were there any power issues at the time of the lockup? Does the customer have a UPS?
Is it correctly plugged into the backup outlet? (P-42 UPS Installation)
If the system is configured for a Host interface, what was the system doing at the time?
Was it querying the host or downloading tests from the host?
System Configuration & If the system is configured for a Host interface, was it releasing patient, QC, or exception
Activities results to the host?
If the system is configured for a Host interface, was it scanning patients or controls? Was
it running bar coded controls?
If the system is configured for automatic wash buffer transfer using the
ARCHITECT ARM, was an automatic or a manual transfer in progress?
If the system is configured for automatic wash buffer transfer using the
ARCHITECT ARM, was a Host transfer occurring at the same time as the transfer or
ARCHITECT ARM request?
Log Collection Perform Diagnostic Procedure 6009, Log Utilities (System, Diagnostics, Module 5, Utilities,
6009 Log Utilities, Option 1, Retrieve Current Logs, Select Log Destination - Floppy, CD,
or Hard drive.)
Note
Up to five (5) sets of logs can be stored to the Hard drive. The logs can be copied
to a CD at a later time using 6009, Option 3, Copy Archived Logs to CD. The logs
can also be sent via modem at a later time.
Database Collection (if Collect the Database for the following issues:
needed)
Reagent Issues (mismatches, read errors, etc.)
Assay Configuration Issues (such as Retest rules)
Search Function Issues
Tests not transitioning properly in Order Status Screen or Results Review Screen
(tests staying in Scheduled, Pending Transmission)
Copy the Database to a CD using 6009, Log Utilities, Option 2, Copy Database to CD
Rebooted the SCC?
Recovery - What Rebooted the Processing Module?
procedure was used to
recover from the error? Restored a backup database?
Reinstalled software? (P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC Platform C))
reserved.
P-232 Delete Reagent Kit Version - 96756-111_330_2

P-232 Delete Reagent Kit
Purpose This procedure documents deletion of a reagent kit from the system. Module SCC
Log On as FSE
Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the system to
Snapshot screen. operator level of access. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart
2. Enter FSE in all capital the SCC.
letters in the User name
field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date
code in the password field.
Note
Enter the date code in
reverse order.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator
listed on the Snapshot
screen lists FSE.
Access
Reagent
1. Select the Reagent icon
History Screen
from the Snapshot screen.
2. Select Reagent history from
the drop down menu.
Delete Reagent
Kit Note
1. Select the desired reagent To delete an assay instead of a reagent kit, perform diagnostic
kit. procedure 6114 Install/Delete Assays.
2. Select Delete - F6.
3. Repeat Step1 and Step2 to
delete additional kits.
4. Verify deletion of the
selected reagent kit(s).
P-233 Verify and Configure BIOS (Platform C) Version - 96756-111_332_1

P-233 Configure SCC Computer BIOS
Purpose This procedure is used to configure the SCC computer BIOS. Module SCC
Platform C
Select Language
2. Press [F2] repeatedly to enter Setup.
3. On the Setup main screen verify that the BIOS Version displayed
is: HV84510A.86A.0040P11.
4. On the Setup main screen, use the arrow keys to select the
Language Option, followed by [Enter].
5. Use the arrow keys to select English, followed by [Enter].
Select Plug and Play Option and Set Up

Peripheral Configuration
1. Use the arrow keys to change the screen to the Advanced menu.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the options below followed by [Enter].
Verify the following settings:
Peripheral Configuration.
Serial Port A - Enabled
Serial Port B - Enabled
Parallel Port - Enabled
Audio Device - Enabled
Lan Device - Enabled
Legacy USB Support - Disabled
3. Press [Enter], followed by [Esc] to return to the Advanced menu.
Set Up Power Management

1. Use the arrow keys to select the Power menu.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the options below followed by enter
and verify the following settings:
After Power Failure - Stay Off
Wake on LAN - Stay Off
Wake on PME - Stay Off
Wake on Modem Ring - Stay Off
3. Press the Esc key to return to the menu.
Set Up Boot Sequence

1. Use the arrow keys to select the Boot menu.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the options below followed by [Enter].
Verify the following settings:
Quiet Boot - Disabled
Intel Rapid BIOS BOOT - Enabled
Boot Device Priority
First Boot Device: Removable Devices
Second Boot Device: ATAPI CD-ROM.
Third Boot Device: Hard Drive
Fourth Boot Device: Disabled
Exit and Save BIOS Settings

1. Press F10 and Yes to save and exit.
Note
To avoid system instability, press F10 even if no parameters
are changed. The SCC reboots.
2. Verify that the system restarts without errors.
Platform D
Access BIOS
Configuration
1. Cycle power to the SCC. As the SCC begins to boot up, immediately press F2
repeatedly to enter the Setup screen.
2. At the Main screen, verify the BIOS Version indicated is:
BF86510A.86A.0046.P10
BF86510A.86A.0061.P17.0404211558408
BF86510A.86A.0077.P25.0508040031
Verify and/or Edit

BIOS Parameters
1. Cycle power to the SCC. As the SCC begins to boot up, immediately press F2
repeatedly to enter the Setup screen.
Note
The BIOS is installed by the vendor and may vary due to different motherboard
configurations.
2. Manually change the specific BIOS parameters as noted in the table below.
Note
To view /change a setting, use the following instructions:
1. Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to and highlight the parameter to be
viewed/changed.Press Enter.
2. Highlight the desired option/parameter in the pop-up and press Enter to select it.
The new value should then be displayed.
3. Use the cursor keys to move to the next parameter.
4. Press Esc as necessary to return to the menu bar.
Save BIOS Settings

and Exit
1. After the BIOS settings have been changed and verified, press F10 and OK to Save and
Exit the BIOS setup.
Note
Even if no parameters are changed, it is important to press F10 to save the current BIOS
setup or it may become unstable. The SCC will reboot.
Platform E
Verify and/or
Edit BIOS 1. Cycle power to the SCC. As the SCC begins to boot up, immediately press F2 repeatedly to enter
Parameters the Setup screen.
2. The BIOS is installed by the vendor and may vary due to different motherboard configurations.
3. Manually change the specific BIOS parameters as noted in the table below.
Note
To view /change a setting, use the following instructions:
1. Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to and highlight the parameter to be viewed/changed.
Press Enter.
2. Highlight the desired option/parameter in the pop-up and press Enter to select it. The new
value should then be displayed.
3. Use the cursor keys to move to the next parameter.
Save BIOS
Settings and
1. After the BIOS settings have been changed and verified, press F10 and OK to Save and Exit the
Exit
BIOS setup. (Even if no parameters are changed, it is important to press F10 to save the current
BIOS setup or it may become unstable. The SCC will reboot.
P-234 System Serialization Version - 96756-111_333_2

P-234 System Serialization
To configure serial numbers in the system software at installation. SCC

Purpose Module
None 15 min
Locate Serial
Number
1. Architect System No. - Completed by the SCC vendor.
Configuration
2. SCC Serial Number - Completed by the SCC vendor.
Information
Note
The first character of the SCC Serial Number is an alpha
character. It identifies the hardware used in the SCC so that the
correct replacement parts and Hard Drive Images can be
installed.
3. SH Serial Number:
RSH (c8000, i2000SR, ci8200) - Displayed under the right side end
cap of the RSH (Example: RSH02001).
RSH (i1000SR) - Uses the same 5 digit serial number as the

processing module (Example: RSHxxxxx).
RSH (c4000, ci4100) - Uses the same 5 digit serial number as the
c4000 processing module (Example: RSH01065).
Standard Sample Handler (i2000) - Created by the SCC Vendor (the

Architect System No. preceded by the letters SH (Example: SH02001).
4. PM Serial Number:
c4000 - c4000 for production systems (the ARCHITECT PM serial

number preceded by c4; Example: c401065).
c8000 - c8xxxxx for production systems (the ARCHITECT PM serial

number preceded by c8; Example: c801065).
i1000SR - i1SRxxxxx for production systems (the ARCHITECT PM

serial number preceded by i1SR; Example: i1SR01065).
i2000 - i2xxxxx for production systems (the ARCHITECT PM serial

number preceded by i2; Example: i201065).
i2000SR - iSRxxxxx for production systems (the ARCHITECT PM
serial number preceded by iSR; Example: iSR01065).
Note
For multi-module systems, module 1 is on the left.
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. is required to return the
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. system to operator level of
access. To do this, perform
Note
Log Off as FSE, or restart
the SCC.
4. Select Done.
Architect
System
1. From the Snapshot screen, select the System tab.
Number and
2. Select Configuration.
SCC Serial
3. Select the System Settings radio button.
Number
4. Select the System Control Center category.
Configuration
6. Enter the following serial numbers:
Architect system no.
Note
If replacing the SCC, do not edit the Architect system
no. This number remains the same for the system as
long as it is at the current site.
SCC serial no.
Note
The system number and SCC serial number are located
on the SCC (Platform D - on the front; Platform B or C -
located on the top of the case). The SCC Serial no. field
only accepts eleven charaters. Do not use the alpha
charcter (D) that precedes the eleven character numeric
SCC serial number.
7. Select Done.
Note
After editing the serial number, shutdown and restart the SCC to
transfer the edits to the database.
Sample
Handler Serial Note
Number This activity is not required for LAS configurations.
Configuration
1. From the Snapshot screen, select the System tab.
3. Select the System settings radio button.
4. Select the Sample Handler category.
6. Enter the sample handler serial number.
7. Select Done.
Note
After editing the serial number, shutdown and restart the SCC to
Processing
Module Serial
Number
Configuration
3. Select the System Settings radio button.
4. Select the Modules category.
6. Select the desired processing module from the dropdown menu.
7. Enter the processing module serial number.
8. Select Done.
9. After editing the serial number, shutdown and restart the SCC to
Note
Do not go to the next step until the system control center
displays the Snapshot screen.
Enter Serial
Numbers in
1. Enter the serial numbers for the PM(s), SCC, and SH into call
Call
management.
Management
2. Enter the Architect System No. into Call Management as the location
code for each of the serial numbers.
3. Document the installation per approved country procedures.
reserved.
P-237 System Time Zone Version - 96756-111_336_1

P-237 System Time Zone
Purpose Set the local time zone for the ARCHITECT instrument location. Module SCC
Access
Explorer
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Click on OK.
Access the
Control
1. Scroll down to Control Panel.
Panel
2. Click on Control Panel to display the icons on the
right side of the screen.
Access the
Date/Time
1. Double-click on Date/Time.
Properties
2. Verify that the Date/Time Properties window
Window
displays.
Select Time
Zone
1. Select the Time Zone tab.
2. Select the local time zone from the dropdown
menu.
Note
DO NOT edit the date, time, and daylight
savings time options in this window (Date &
Time tab). Make those changes in the user
interface screen (system/configuration/system
settings/system control center).
Apply the
Settings
1. Click on Apply.
2. Click on OK.
3. Restart the SCC to apply the settings.
P-238 Hard Drive Recovery Options (Platform C and D) Version - 96756-111_252_2

P-238 Hard Drive Recovery Options (Platform C and D)
Purpose This procedure is used when the integrity of the system software is suspect (incorrect shutdown of the Module SCC
SCC is a possible cause) or to install software when replacing the C: drive. This procedure includes
making a backup of the database, rewriting the C: drive, reconfiguring the SCC, and restoring the
database.
Materials ARCHITECT Software Configuration Media Time 30
Required Freshly Formatted Floppy min
ARCHITECT System Software
Note
If you are reinstalling V2.20 software and TSB 126-028 ARCHITECT c8000 Pressure Monitoring Update was previously
installed on the system, you must reinstall the SystemParameters.ini file contained in TSB 126-028. (Reinstallation of V2.20
software writes over the SystemParameters.ini file installed according to TSB 126-028. Refer to the latest revision of TSB 126-
028 for more information.
Links
ARCHITECT System Software Setup Options Description

[Option 1] Full Installation/Software Version Upgrade
[Option 2] Restore C: Drive only (after drive replaced); Restore C: Drive on Platform C or D SCC; Reload Base
Configuration/ARCHITECT; System Software and Restore from Backup CD
[Option 3] Restore D: Drive only (after drive replaced); Restore D: Drive on Platform C or D SCC
[Option 4] Reformat D:
Verify/Edit BIOS Parameters - Platform C
Verify/Edit BIOS Parameters - Platform D
Acquire Backup from Old D: drive
Restore Backup from Old D: Drive
ARCHITECT System Software Setup Options Description
Option Description Reference
[Option 1] Full Installation/Software Version When to Use:

Upgrade [Option 1]
New installations and upgrades from 2.11 to 2.20

When replacing hard drive in Platform D SCC (after Base
Configuration)
When replacing both hard drives of a Platform C SCC (after
Base Configuration)
What it does:
Performs complete installation of ARCHITECT application

software C: drive components
Partitions and formats the D: drive (if not formatted) and installs
D: drive software components
If D: drive is formatted and has ARCHITECT components

installed, this option does not disturb existing backups or
folders on the D: drive EXCEPT it will always reinstall
(overwrite) the M&D files and the DisableCBT.exe and
EnableCBT.exe files in the Service/CBT folder
[Option 2] Restore C: Drive only (after drive When to use:

replaced); Restore C: Drive on Platform C or D [Option 2]
SCC; Reload Base Configuration/ARCHITECT;
When replacing C: drive only on Platform C SCC (after Base
System Software and Restore from Backup CD
Configuration)
When reloading Windows (Base Configuration) due to corrupt (or
suspected corrupt) file system (Note: Create new backup first, if
possible.)
When restoring corrupt (or suspected corrupt) ARCHITECT
software on Platform C or D SCC
When restoring system information from a back up CD
What it does:
Will reinstall Windows 2000 (Base Configuration) and

ARCHITECT application software C: drive components.
Does nothing to the D: drive
[Option 3] Restore D: Drive only (after drive When to use:

replaced); Restore D: Drive on Platform C or D [Option 3]
SCC
When D: drive only is replaced on Platform C
When reloading D: drive software components, except CBT, and
reformatting of the drive is not desired
What it does:
If D: drive has been replaced:
Will partition and format a new D: drive (if not already

formatted) and install all ARCHITECT application
software components (CBT and M&D files)
If reloading D: drive software components:
Will not reformat the D: drive

Will recreate any missing folders or files
Will not disturb existing backups or existing folders
Will always reinstall (overwrite) the M&D files (.mde) and
the DisableCBT.exe and EnableCBT.exe files in the
Service/CBT folder
[Option 4] Reformat D:
Note
This will cause all backup data to be destroyed.
When to use:
When reloading D: drive software components, except CBT
What it does:
Will always partition and format the D: drive and install all D:
drive ARCHITECT application software components (including
the M&D files)
Will erase existing backup folders and backup files
[Option 1]
Full Installation/Software Version Upgrade, Reload Only ARCHITECT Software on Platform C or D SCC
Purpose On c8000 or ci8200 system with Platform C or D SCC: Module c8000 or ci8200 System Control Center
(SCC) - Platform C or D
When reloading/restoring only ARCHITECT software
on Platform C or D SCC
Materials ARCHITECT System Software (201738) Time Not Assessed

Required
ARCHITECT System Software CD
ARCHITECT CBT CD
ARCHITECT Windows 2000 Base Configuration CD (99036)

Blank CD-R compact disc - optional
Prerequisite
1. The processing module must be in Stopped, Ready, or Offline status.
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. required to return the system to
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. operator level of access. To do
this, perform Log Off as FSE, or
Note
restart the SCC.
4. Select Done.
Determine
SCC Status
1. Verify that the SCC is operational.
If the SCC is operational and if database corruption is not

suspected, go to Copy Backup Folder from D: Drive to CD.
If the Architect Software is not functional, go to Verify SCC
Boots to Snapshot Screen.
Copy
Backup Note
Folder from Perform these steps to copy the database on a CD (in the event of a
D: Drive to catastrophic failure during the procedure). These steps may only be
CD performed if the ARCHITECT software and CD drive writer are
working properly.
1. Perform diagnostic 6004 Option 1, Copy Backup software from D:

drive to CD.
2. When complete, remove and retain the CD (label as desired).
Verify SCC
Boots to
1. Verify that the SCC boots up to the Snapshot screen:
Snapshot
Screen If the SCC boots up to the Snapshot screen, go to Option A.
If the system does not boot up the ARCHITECT software, go
to Option B.
Option A
1. Insert the System Software CD.
2. From the Snapshot screen, select System, Utilities, Software
install.
Note
If a new backup was not made above, make one before
continuing (unless corruption is suspected).
3. Select Install [F3] and insert the CD as prompted.

4. Select OK.
5. At the Setup menu, go to Reinstall ARCHITECT Software.
Option B
1. While at the power up/shutdown or Abbott logo screen, press
Ctrl+Alt+Delete and select Task Manager.
2. Enter FSE in the Username filed and enter the FSE password.
3. Select New Task and type or select Explorer.
4. Select OK.
5. Close the Task Manager.
6. Insert the System Software CD.
7. In Explorer, open the folders for the CD drive (E:) and double-click
on Setup.exe (launches the Architect software installation
application).
Reinstall
ARCHITECT
1. At the Setup menu, select Full Installation/Software Version
Software
Upgrade, Begin.
2. At the prompt Select OK to remove and reinstall or Cancel to
continue installing other components, select OK.
Note
The system removes the previous copy of ARCHITECT
software, reinstalls the ARCHITECT software, and restores the
database from the system backup on the D: drive (the backup
contains patient database, assay calibrations, QC data,
iSystem robotics calibrations, etc.).
Note
Do not touch the keyboard, mouse or touchscreen during the
installation process (approximately 20-30 minutes). The
application installs completely without user intervention. This
system performs several reboots.
3. Depending on the status of the system prior to reinstalling the

software, the system displays the Snapshot screen, or the
Configure first module screen.
If the Snapshot sreen displays, go to Restore Backup.

If the Configure first module screen displays, go to Step4.
4. When the Configure first module screen displays, close any

PCANYWHERE error messages (if present), and remove the CD.
5. Press the Num Lock key to activate the number pad and enter the
FSE logon code.
6. Select c8000 from the Type pull down menu and enter the Serial
No. and select Done.
7. Select OK to the shutdown request.
Note
The Snapshot screen displays.
Restore
Backup
1. At the Snapshot screen, log on as FSE.
2. Select System, Utilities.
If a backup is available, select the desired backup (latest date)

from the Available backups.
If a backup is not available, go to Configure SCC (if Backup
not available).
3. Select Restore [F5].

4. Verify that Module Calibration, System Configuration, and
Database are checked.
5. Select Done, OK (to proceed with the restore).
Note
The system restarts and the Module Calibration, System
Configuration, and Database are restored.
Configure
SCC (if
1. If a backup is not available, refer the appropriate new SCC
Backup not
installation and modules procedure in the latest version of the
available)
software installation TSB and perform all the steps in the configure
scc and modules action item of the system configuration section.
[Option 2]
Restore C Drive (after drive replaced); Restore C: Drive on Platform C or D SCC; Reload Base Configuration/ARCHITECT;
System Software and Restore from Backup
Purpose On c8000 or ci8200 system: Module c8000 or ci8200 System Control

Center (SCC) - Platform C or D
When replacing hard drive on Platform D SCC
When replacing C: drive on Platform C SCC
When restoring/reloading BOTH Windows 2000 (Base
Configuration) and ARCHITECT Software on Platform C or D SCC

Required
ARCHITECT CBT CD

Determine
Option
1. Select the appropriate option:
If replacing hard drive on Platform D SCC,

go to Replace Hard Drive on Platform D
SCC:
If replacing C: hard drive on Platform C
SCC, go to Replace Hard Drive on
Platform C SCC
If reinstalling base configuration, system
software and restoring from a back up, go
to Install Base Configuration, System
Software, and Restoring from a Back Up
Replace Hard
Drive on
1. Create a new system backup. Type appropriate
Platform D
comment in Comment field.
SCC
2. Perform Diagnostic 6004 Option 1 - Copy backup
software from D: drive to CD. When complete,
remove the CD and label it.
3. Perform a system shutdown and turn SCC power
OFF.
4. Replace the hard drive per the appropriate R&R
procedure but do not install software as may be
directed by that procedure.
5. Use the Verify/Edit BIOS procedure in the
Appendix to access the BIOS SETUP UTILITY.
Select Advanced then Drive Configuration verify
that the newly installed drive is present (SATA
Port-0 shows the hard drive nomenclature). Exit
the BIOS utility, discarding changes.
6. Go to Choose Option.
Replace Hard
Drive on
1. Create a new system backup. Type appropriate
Platform C
comment in Comment field.
SCC
2. Optional - Perform 6004 Option 1 - Copy
backup software from D: drive to CD.
3. When complete, remove the CD and label it.
4. Perform a system shutdown and turn SCC power
OFF.
5. Replace the C: hard drive. (Q1.04 Hard Drive,
System,CPU (Platform C))
Note
Do not install software as may be directed
by that procedure.
Verify System
Identifies Hard
1. Use the Verify/Edit BIOS procedure in the
Drive
Appendix to access the BIOS SETUP UTILITY.
2. Select Advanced then IDE Configuration and
verify that both the newly installed C: drive and
the D: drive are present (Primary IDE Master and
Slave shows the hard drive nomenclature).
3. Exit the BIOS utility, discarding changes.
Install Base
Configuration, QUESTION
1. Create a new system backup (if possible). Type
System
appropriate comment in Comment field.
Software, and
2. Optional step - Perform 6004 Option 1 - Copy
Restoring from
backup software from D: drive to CD. This
a Back Up
creates a safe backup that can be used in the
event of a catastrophic system failure. When
complete, remove the CD and label it.
Choose
Option
1. Choose the appropriate option:
If hard drive was replaced on Platform D

or if the C: drive was replaced on Platform
C, a boot error or a message to insert boot
media displays when the SCC is turned on
(due to lack of installed software on the
new hard drive).
Insert the Base Configuration CD

and press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
The system reboots to the Base
Configuration CD.
If reinstalling base configuration, system

software and restoring from a back up:
While the SCC is on, insert the

Windows 2000 Base Configuration
CD then perform a system
shutdown and restart or cycle
power.
At the prompt Press any key to
boot from CD press any key within
four seconds.
Perform Base
Configuration
1. Select Yes to the message "WARNING! THIS
WILL ERASE ALL DATA ON THE C: DRIVE.".
Note
A message may display indicating, The
computer must be rebooted to
automatically reassign the drive letters..
If the message displays, select OK to
reboot.
2. After the reboot, press any key (within four

seconds) as directed to boot from the CD.
Note
The Base Configuration program partitions
and formats the C: drive (and D: drive if
unformatted), then copy the installation
files.
Note
Do not touch the keyboard, mouse or
touchscreen and do not respond to any
messages or prompts during this process
until the following message displays
(approximately 5 minutes).
3. When the screen [1] confirming copying of the

installation files, do the following (if present):
disconnect the printer

turn OFF the modem
disconnect the secondary network cable
and the ABBOTTLINK adapter.
Note
DO NOT disconnect the serial
expansion device (external serial
adapter).
4. Select OK.
5. When the system starts to reboot and the screen
goes blank remove the Base Configuration CD.
The Windows Setup begins. (If the CD was not
removed, when the Press any key to boot from
CD prompt displays, DO NOT press a key. Allow
the setup process to begin then remove the Base
Configuration CD.)
Perform Base
Configuration
1. During the Setup process, which takes
approximately 30-40 minutes, the system loads
Windows 2000 and needed drivers.
Note
DO NOT touch the keyboard, mouse or
touchscreen and do not respond to any
prompts until the screen [1] confirming the
installation is complete displays
(approximately 30-40 minutes).
Note
If a Platform D SCC is loaded with V1.00
Base Configuration, when the V2.10 is
installed, go to Platform D SCC with V1.00
Base Configuration.
2. When the screen [1] confirming the installation

displays, do the following (if present):
connect the printer

turn ON the modem
connect the secondary network cable and
ABBOTTLINK adapter.
3. Select OK.
Note
The system displays the Windows
desktop.
4. If there is an indication that the BIOS was

updated, but that the custom BIOS parameters
have not been edited, perform Verify/Configure
BIOS Parameters - Platform D at this time.
5. Once the BIOS parameters are edited and
verified, go to Delete CBT Folder.
Platform D
SCC with Note
V1.00 Base If a Platform D SCC is loaded with V1.00 Base
Configuration Configuration when the V2.10 is installed, the
BIOS firmware is updated. A popup message
displays indicating that the update is proceeding,
during which a series of tones sound. After the
BIOS update, the following message may display
(this is normal).
1. If this message displays, press F4.

2. At the Main screen, verify the BIOS Version is
HV84510A.86A.0040.P113.
3. Manually change the specific BIOS parameters.
Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to
and highlight the desired parameter and
press Enter.
Highlight the desired option/parameter in
the pop-up and press Enter to select it.
(The new value displays.)
Use the cursor keys to move to the next
parameter.
4. Press Esc as necessary to return to the menu

bar.
5. After the changing and verifying the BIOS
settings, press F10 and Yes to Save and Exit the
BIOS setup.
Note
Even if no parameters are changed, it is
important to press F10 to save the current
BIOS setup or it may become unstable.
6. The SCC reboots.
Delete CBT
Folder Note
Since the Windows link to the CBT is lost during
this procedure, delete the existing CBT folder and
reinstall the CBT.
1. From the Windows Desktop, open Windows

Explorer (Start, Programs, Accessories, Windows
Explorer).
2. Locate and delete the CBT folder on the D: drive
(D:\CBT), if present.
Note
This is necessary to allow a proper
reinstallation of the CBT.
3. If prompted to delete specific files, select Yes to

all.
4. Close Explorer.
Note
Since the previous version of the CBT
must be deleted and replaced with a
newer version, all customer CBT
passwords and saved data for the CBT
are lost.
Install CBT
1. Insert the CBT CD (90118-104).
2. Select Start, Run.
3. In the Run window, type e:\setup.exe and press
Enter.
Note
The CBT InstallShield displays.
4. Select Restart when prompted.

Note
The system reboots.
5. Select Next at the InstallShield Wizard screen.

6. At the Destination Folder window, select Browse
and type d:\CBT as the path for the CBT to be
installed.
7. Select OK then Next in the subsequent three
prompts.
8. When the installation is complete, select Finish.
Note
The SCC reboots and returns to the
Windows desktop.
9. Remove the CBT CD.
Install
ARCHITECT
1. At the Windows Desktop, insert the ARCHITECT
Software
System Software CD.
Note
The application should starts automatically.
If not, select Start, Programs, Accessories,
then Windows Explorer. In Explorer, open
the folder for the CD (E:\) and double-click
on Setup.exe to launch the Architect
software installation application.
2. At the Software Setup menu, select Full

Installation/Software Version Upgrade, Begin.
Note
If the prompt Select OK to remove and
reinstall (current software revision) or
Cancel to continue installing other
components displays, select OK.
Note
DO NOT touch the keyboard, mouse or
touchscreen during the installation
process. The application installs
completely without user intervention. This
process takes approximately 20-30
minutes and performs several reboots.
3. At the Configure first module window, close any

PCANYWHERE error messages (if present) and
remove the System Software CD.
4. Press the Num Lock key to activate the number
pad and enter the FSE logon code.
5. Select i2000SR (or c8000 if ci8200 system) from
the Type pull down menu and enter the Serial
No., and select Done.
6. Select OK to the shutdown request.
Note
After the reboot, the system creates a new
database, then the Snapshot screen
displays.
Install M&D
Procedures
1. Log on as FSE.
2. Perform 6115 (select System, Diagnostics,
Module 5, Utilities) to install all the M&D
procedures from the hard drive.
Copy Backup
Database to
D: Drive
If the hard drive was replaced on a
Platform D, or if Base Configuration and
ARCHITECT software were reloaded on
any system and a backup is available on
CD:
perform 6004 Option 2, Copy

Backup software from CD to D:
Drive.
Copy the most recent backup to the
D: drive and follow instructions to
cycle power to the SCC.
Go to Restore Backup.
If C: drive was replaced on a Platform C

SCC, go to Restore Backup.
If hard drive was replaced on a Platform
D, or if Base Configuration and
ARCHITECT software were reloaded on
any system, but no system backup is
available, perform all the Action items in
the System Configuration section of the
appropriate software installation TSB,
using the procedure for a New SCC
Installation, then go to Restore Backup to
Restore Local Keyboard below. (See
Note.)
Restore
Backup
3. Select the desired backup (latest date) from the
Available backups.
5. Verify that the items listed are checked.
Module Calibration
System Configuration
Database
6. Select Done, OK to proceed with the restore.
Note
The system restarts and the Module
Calibration, System Configuration, and
Database is restored.
Configure
SCC and
1. If a backup is not available, refer the appropriate
Modules (if
New SCC installation procedure in the latest
Backup not
version of the system software installation TSB
available)
and perform all the steps in the Configure SCC
and Modules action item of the System
Configuration section.
[Option 3]
Restore D Drive (after drive replaced); Restore D: Drive on Platform C or D SCC
Purpose On c8000 or ci8200 system: Module c8000 or ci8200 System Control Center
(SCC) - Platform C or D
When replacing D: drive on Platform C SCC
When restoring/reloading ARCHITECT software D: drive
components on Platform C or D SCC

Required
ARCHITECT CBT CD

Action Steps
Reference
Preliminary
1. This procedure is only for systems currently running V2.20 software.
2. Read the entire procedure before starting to perform it.
3. Refer to SCC Platform Descriptions in the Appendix for information regarding SCC platforms.
Determine
Option
If replacing the D: hard drive in a Platform C SCC
if the suspect drive is not accessible, proceed directly to Replace D: Hard Drive.
If the D: drive is operational, open Windows Explorer and copy any files found in the
Upgrades folder to floppy disc(s). Later, these files will be copied to the new D: drive
for future use as needed. Go to Replace D: Hard Drive.
If reinstalling/restoring D: drive software components, open Windows Explorer and copy any
files found in the Upgrades folder to floppy disc(s). Later, these files will be copied to the
new D: drive for future use as needed.
2. Go to Install ARCHITECT Software (Reloading Software).
Replace D:
Hard Drive
1. Use the appropriate hard drive replacement procedure (Q1.05 Hard Drive, Backup,CPU (Platform
C) or Q1.09 Hard Drive, System,CPU (Platform D)), but do not install software as directed by that
procedure.
2. Use the Verify/Edit BIOS procedure in the Appendix to access the BIOS SETUP UTILITY.
3. Select Advanced, IDE Configuration and verify that both the C: drive and newly installed D: drive
are present (Primary IDE Master and Slave will show hard drive nomenclatures).
4. Exit the BIOS utility, discarding changes.
Install
ARCHITECT Note
Software (D: This option partitions and formats the new D: drive (if not already formatted). It installs all D: drive
Drive components except the CBT (it creates a CBT folder.)
Replaced)
1. From the Snapshot screen, log on as FSE.
2. Select System, Utilities, Software install.
Note
Disregard the request to create a new backup.
3. Select Install [F3].

4. Insert the V2.20 software CD when requested.
5. Select OK.
Note
The application shuts down.
6. At the ARCHITECT System Software V2.20 Setup window, select the Restore D Drive only (After
Drive Replaced).
7. Select Begin.
Note
The application installs without user intervention. DO NOT touch the keyboard, mouse or
touchscreen until the snapshot screen displays (approximately 5 minutes).
8. At the Snapshot screen, remove the CD.
If corruption is not suspected, go to Install CBT.

If corruption is suspected, go to Install M&D Procedures.
Install
ARCHITECT Note
Software Use these steps if reloading D: drive software components.
(Reloading Note
Software) This option reformats the D: drive, erasing any existing system backups and backup folders. It
recreates all the D: drive components except the CBT, but creates a CBT folder.
1. From the Snapshot screen, log on as FSE.

2. Select System, Utilities then Software install. Disregard the request to create a new backup.
3. Select Install (F3). As directed, insert the V2.20 software CD then select OK. The application will
shut down.
4. At the ARCHITECT System Software V2.20 Setup window, select the fourth option, Reformat D
(This will cause all backup data to be destroyed) then select Begin. The application will start then
present the following popup, WARNING! THIS WILL ERASE ALL DATA ON THE D: DRIVE.
5. Select Yes to proceed.
Note
The application will format the D: drive and reload all the D: drive components. without user
intervention. DO NOT touch the keyboard, mouse or touchscreen until the snapshot screen
displays (approximately 5-10 minutes).
6. At the Snapshot screen, remove the CD.
If corruption is not suspected, go to Install CBT.

If corruption is suspected, go to Install M&D Procedures.
Install M&D
Procedures
1. Log on as FSE and perform diagnostic procedure 6115 (select System, Diagnostics, Module 5,
Utilities).
2. Install All the M&D procedures from the hard drive.
Install CBT
1. From the Snapshot screen, shutdown the ARCHITECT application.
2. When the power on/shutdown screen displays, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete and select Task Manager.
3. Enter FSE as username and enter the FSE password.
4. Type Explorer or select it from the pull down list and select OK.
5. Minimize the Task Manager.
6. In Explorer, locate and delete the entire CBT folder on the D: drive (D:\CBT). (Allows a proper
reinstallation of the CBT.)
If the message This may cause some programs not to work displays, select Yes.
If prompted to delete specific files, select Yes.
7. Insert the CBT CD.

8. Reopen the Task Manager and select New Task.
9. In the Open field, type e:\setup.exe<spc>/z"forceinstall" (<spc> equals one space and quote
symbols (" ") are required)
10. Select OK and minimize the Task Manager. (forces the CBT InstallShield to run).
Note
If the CBT was previously loaded on this SCC, the following prompt may display, This will
remove the ARCHITECT System CBT V2.00 from your computer. Are you sure that
you wish to continue?. Select Yes. Select Finish at the Maintenance Complete window.
Reopen the Task Manager and select New Task. Again, in the command line, type
e:\setup.exe<spc>/z"forceinstall" and select OK to begin the installation. Close the Task
Manager.
11. Select Next at the InstallShield Wizard screen.

12. Select OK at the Command line switched use to force the install onto SCC system. message.
13. At the Choose Destination Location window, change the destination folder by selecting Browse
and entering d:\CBT as the path for the CBT to be installed.
14. Select OK, Next for the next three prompts.
15. When the InstallShield Wizard is complete, select Finish.
Note
The SCC returns to the power on/shutdown screen.
16. Remove the CBT CD.
Copy
Upgrade
1. In Explorer, verify the upgrade files are in the Upgrade folder on the D: drive.
Files to D:
Drive If they are in the folder, go to Step2
If they are not in the folder, and the Upgrade files were saved to floppy disk(s), copy the
files from the floppy disk(s) back to the Upgrades folder in the D: drive.
2. Close Explorer and perform a shutdown and restart.
Create New
Backup
1. Create a new system backup.
2. Type an appropriate comment in the Comment field.
Disable CBT
if not
1. If it is determined that the CBT should be disabled, perform P-225 Disable or Enable CBT.
Purchased
by Customer
Verify/Edit BIOS Parameters - Platform C
Purpose Module
Verify/Edit
BIOS Settings BIOS Parameters (version HV84510A.86A.0040.P113)
1. Turn SCC power ON (or cycle power) and
(Platform C)
immediately press F2 repeatedly to enter the
BIOS Setup application.
Note
The first Setup screen is the Main menu.

HV84510A.86A.0040.P113.
(Refer to BIOS Parameters (version
HV84510A.86A.0040.P113).)
Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to

and highlight the desired parameter and
press Enter.
parameter.
4. Press Esc as necessary to return to the menu

bar.
5. After the changing and verifying the BIOS
settings, press F10 and Yes to Save and Exit
the BIOS setup. The SCC reboots.
Note
important to press F10 to save the
current BIOS setup or it may become
unstable.
Verify/Edit BIOS Parameters - Platform D
Verify/Edit
BIOS BIOS Version BF86510A.86A.0046.P10 or
1. Turn SCC power ON (or cycle power) and BF86510A.86A.0061.P17.0404211558408
Settings
immediately press F2 repeatedly to enter the BIOS
(Platform D)
Setup application.
Note
The first Setup screen is the Main menu.

BF86510A.86A.0046.P10 or
BF86510A.86A.0061.P17.0404211558408.
(Refer to BIOS Version BF86510A.86A.0046.P10
or BF86510A.86A.0061.P17.0404211558408.)
Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to and

highlight the desired parameter and press
Enter.
parameter.

5. After the changing and verifying the BIOS settings,
press F10 and OK to Save and Exit the BIOS
setup. The SCC reboots.
Note
important to press F10 to save the current
BIOS setup or it may become unstable.
Acquire Backup from Old D: drive
Prerequisite
Remove SCC
Cover Platform C
1. At the back of the SCC chassis, remove the
screws from the cover.

screws
Platform D - Three (3) screws
2. Remove the SCC cover.
Platform A (PII), B (PIII), C - Lift the

back of the cover to a 45 degree angle
(approximately), then pull it out from the
CPU chassis (while maintaining the same
angle).
Platform D - Pull the cover straight back,
approximately 1" (2 cm), then lift and
Platform D
remove the cover.
3. Determine the SCC platform.
If the SCC is Platform D, go to Attach

Old D: Drive Externally - Platform D.
If the SCC is Platform B or C, go to
Attach Old D: Drive Externally - Platform
B or C.
Attach Old D:
Drive Externally Note
- Platform D These steps are for use on Platform D SCC.
1. Remove the existing disk drive. (Q1.09 Hard

Drive, System,CPU (Platform D).
2. Attach the serial ATA cable from the old SCC to
the SATA 1 connector on the motherboard
adjacent to the existing SATA cable connector
(SATA 0).
3. Connect the old D: drive to the other end of the
ATA cable.
Note
There is no need to set the master/slave
jumper for the serial ATA type drive.
4. Attach a spare PC power connector to the

drive.
Note
It may be necessary to disconnect the
CD-ROM drive cable to access these
connectors.
5. Verify the drive case is insulated from any

power source and power ON the SCC.
6. Immediately begin pressing F2 to enter the
BIOS setup screen.
7. In the Drive configuration menu, verify that the
externally mounted drive is present in the list of
devices.
8. Exit the BIOS setup without saving changes.
Note
The system will reboot.
9. Go to Copy Old Backup to New D: Drive.
Attach Old D:
Drive Externally Note
- Platform B or These steps are for use on Platform B or C
SCC.
C
1. Remove the existing disk drive. (Q1.04 Hard

Drive, System,CPU (Platform C).
2. Verify that the master/slave jumper is set to
slave as indicated on the hard drive labeling.
3. Attach one of the open IDE cable connectors to
the old D: drive (externally mounted).
4. Attach a spare PC power connector to the
drive.
Note
It may be necessary to disconnect the
CD-ROM drive cable to access these
connectors.
5. Verify the drive case is insulated from any

power source and power ON the SCC.
6. Immediately begin pressing F2 to enter the
BIOS setup screen.
7. In the IDE configuration menu, verify that the
externally mounted drive is present in the list of
devices.
Note
It should show as a second hard drive.
8. Exit the BIOS setup without saving changes.
Note
The system will reboot.
Copy Old
Backup to New
1. Open Windows Explorer and locate the
D: Drive
externally attached hard drive.
2. Locate the backup folder in the E:, F: or G:
drive (depending on SCC platform).
3. Copy the entire E:\backup, F:\backup or
G:\backup folder to the current (installed) D:
drive.
4. If a backup folder does not exist in the current
D: drive, create one.
5. Select Yes to overwrite the current folder if
asked.
6. Verify that the backup folder was copied to the
D: drive.
Cycle SCC
Power
1. Perform a system shutdown.
2. Disconnect the externally mounted drive and
cable and install the cover.
3. Turn SCC power ON.
Note
If power is not cycled to the SCC, the
system does not recognize the backup
folder and files that were copied to the D:
drive.
Restore Backup
to C: Drive
Available backups.
5. Verify that the three items listed below are
checked and select Done then OK to proceed
with the restore.
Module Calibration
Database
6. The system will restart and the Module

Calibration, System Configuration, and
Database will be restored.
Restore Backup from Old D: Drive
Purpose Module
Prerequisite
Remove
SCC Cover Platform C
1. At the back of the SCC chassis, remove the screws
from the cover.

screws
Platform D - Three (3) screws
2. Remove the SCC cover.
Platform A (PII), B (PIII), C - Lift the back

of the cover to a 45 degree angle
(approximately), then pull it out from the
CPU chassis (while maintaining the same
angle).
Platform D - Pull the cover straight back,
approximately 1" (2 cm), then lift and remove
Platform D
the cover.
3. Determine the SCC platform.
If the SCC is Platform D, go to Attach Old D:

Drive Externally - Platform D.
If the SCC is Platform B or C, go to Attach
Old D: Drive Externally - Platform B or C.
Attach Old
D: Drive Note
Externally - These steps are for use on Platform D SCC.
Platform D
1. Remove the existing disk drive. (Q1.09 Hard Drive,
System,CPU (Platform D).
2. With SCC power OFF, remove the SCC cover.
3. Externally mount the old D: drive. Using the serial
ATA cable from the old SCC, attach it to the SATA
1 connector on the motherboard adjacent to the
existing SATA cable connector (SATA 0). There is
no need set the master/slave jumper for the serial
ATA type drive.
4. Attach a spare PC power connection to the drive. It
may be necessary to disconnect the CD-ROM drive
cable to access these connectors.
5. Ensure the drive case is insulated from any power
source and turn SCC power ON. Immediately begin
pressing F2 to enter the BIOS setup screen. In the
IDE configuration menu, verify that the externally
mounted drive is present in the list of devices.
6. Exit the BIOS setup without saving changes. The
system will reboot. Proceed to the Copy Old
Backup Folder New D: Drive action item below.
Copy Old
Backup
1. Open Windows Explorer and locate the backup
Folder to
folder in the old drive (externally attached) which
New D:
will show up as E:\backup, F:\backup or G:\backup
Drive
depending on a) how the external drive is attached
and b) the type of SCC platform in use.
2. Copy (drag) the entire E:\backup, F:\backup or
G:\backup folder to the new (installed) D: drive.
3. Refresh the view (press F5) and verify that the
backup folder was copied to the D: drive. (It may be
necessary to close and reopen Explorer to refresh
the view.)
4. Perform a system shutdown. Disconnect the
externally mounted drive and cable and install the
cover.
5. Turn SCC power ON.
Note
If power is not cycled to the SCC, the
system will not recognize the backup folder
and files that were just copied to the D:
drive.
Restore
Backup to
C: Drive
Available backups.
5. Verify that the three items listed below are checked
and select Done then OK to proceed with the
restore.
Module Calibration
Database
6. The system will restart and the Module Calibration,

System Configuration, and Database will be
restored.
reserved.
P-244 WINMSD Report Version - 96756-111_218_2

P-244 WINMSD Report
Purpose This procedure recalls Windows NT historical information that shows whether NT device drivers have Module SCC
been reconfigured since they were set up.
Materials Floppy or modem for retrieval Time 5
Required min
Access System
Diagnostics Window
2. Select New Task.
3. The Create New Task dialog displays.
4. Type winmsd in the Open: field and select OK.
The Windows NT Diagnostics window displays
Create and Save the

System Information
1. Select File, Save Report.
File
The Create Report dialog displays.
2. Select the radio buttons for All Tabs (Scope),

Complete (Detail Level), and File (Destination).
3. Select OK.
The Save WinMSD Report dialog displays.
4. Leave msdrpt.txt as the File name and select

the D: drive at the root level (no subdirectory) as
the location.
5. Select Save.
The file is save to the D: drive for us to retrieve

when drive is sent back.
6. Close the Windows NT Diagnostics window by
clicking on the X in the upper right corner of the
window.
7. Close Task Manager by clicking on the X in the
P-245 Stop Reagent Onboard Stability Timer Version - 96756-111_219_2

P-245 Stop Reagent Onboard Stability Timer
This procedure documents how to stop the onboard reagent stability timer. The procedure is only SCC
Purpose required when: Module
a repair significantly affects the time remaining for onboard stability

a hardware failure prevents a reagent scan from being performed
Note
Normally the onboard stability timer is stopped by removing the reagent kits and
performing a reagent scan (for the i2000/i2000SR).
None 10
Materials Time min
Required
Determine time
remaining for
1. Select the Reagent icon from the Snapshot screen.
onboard stability
2. Select Reagent status from the drop down menu.
3. Select the View All radio button.
4. Print a listing of all the reagents onboard by
pressing ALT+Print Screen.
5. Review the print screen copies with the customer
and determine which reagent kits to remove from
the module.
Log On as FSE
Note
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name return the system to operator level of access.
field. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password the SCC.
field.
4. Select Done.
screen lists FSE.
Remove Reagent
Kits from Module
1. Remove all the reagent kits from the module.
If i2000/i2000SR, go to Remove Reagent

Kits from Module (i2000/i2000SR).
If i1000SR, go to Remove Reagent Kits from
Module (i1000SR).
Remove Reagent
Kits from Module
1. Remove all the reagent kits from the module and
(i2000/i2000SR)
store them in the refrigerator.
Note
Be sure to store all the bottles for each
reagent kit together so that there will not be
any loading errors when the reagents are
loaded on the module again.
2. Go to Stop Reagent Onboard Stability Timer.
Remove Reagent
Kits from Module
(i1000SR)
3. Select the reagent kits to be removed.
4. Select F7-Unload.
Stop Reagent
Onboard Stability
1. Stop the reagent onboard stability timer.
Timer
If i2000/i2000SR, go to Stop Reagent
Onboard Stability Timer (i2000/i2000SR).
If i1000SR, go to Stop Reagent Onboard
Stability Timer (i1000SR).
Stop Reagent
Onboard Stability Note
Timer The Remove - F8 function key is only available at
(i2000/i2000SR) the FSE access level.

4. Select Remove - F8.
5. Verify removal of the selected reagent kits selected
from the reagent status screen.
Stop Reagent
Onboard Stability Note
Timer (i1000SR) The onboard stablity tracking timer stops when the
reagent carrier is unloaded from the reagent
carousel and removed from the RSH.

4. Select Remove - F8.
5. Verify removal of the selected reagent kits selected
from the reagent status screen.
Note
The Remove - F8 function key is only
available at the FSE access level.
P-246 Verify and Configure BIOS (Platform D) Version - 96756-111_220_1

P-246 Verify and Configure BIOS (Platform D)
Purpose This procedure is used to configure and verify installation of the SCC computer BIOS. Module SCC
Verify
BIOS BIOS Setup Parameters
Settings
2. As the SCC boots up, press F2 repeatedly to enter the
Setup screen.
3. At the Main screen, verify the BIOS Version indicated
is:
BF86510A.86A.0046.P10
or
BF86510A.86A.0061 .P17.0404211558408
4. Verify the specific BIOS parameters meet the

specification in BIOS Setup Parameters.
If the settings meet the specification, go to

Reboot SCC.
If the settings do not meet the specification, go
to Change BIOS Settings.
Change
BIOS
1. Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to and highlight
Settings
the parameter to be viewed/changed.
2. Press Enter.
3. Highlight the desired option/parameter in the pop-up
and press Enter to select it.
Note
The new value displays.
Note
parameter.

Reboot
SCC
1. When the BIOS settings are verified, press F10 and
OK to Save and Exit the BIOS setup. (Even if the
parameters are not changed, it is important to press
F10 to save the current BIOS setup or it may become
unstable.)
Note
The SCC reboots.
P-247 Host Serial Port Loop Back Test (SCC platform E) Version - 96756-111_221_1

P-247 Host Serial Port Loop Back Test (SCC platform E)
This procedure documents how to test the host serial port for the SCC platform E. SCC
Purpose Module
Loop Back connector (LN08B93-01) 10 min

Preparation
1. Power ON the system.
2. The processing module status must be
Stopped, Warming, or Ready.
Attach Loop Back

Connector
1. Attach the loop back connector.
If the SCC has an external multiport

serial adapter, go to Attach Loop Back
Connector (SCC with external multiport
adapter).
If the SCC does not have an external
multiport serial adapter, go to Attach
Loop Back Connector (SCC without
external multiport adapter).
Attach Loop Back

Connector (SCC with
1. Detach the LIS serial cable from Port 3 on
external multiport
the external mulitport serial adapter.
adapter)
2. Attach the loop back connector to Port 3 on
the external mulitport serial adapter.
3. Continue with Log On As FSE.
Attach Loop Back

Connector (SCC
1. Detach the LIS serial cable.
without external
multiport adapter) ARCHITECT instruments (except
i1000SR) - Detach the LIS cable from
the serial port (back of SCC).
i1000SR - Detach the LIS serial cable
from the SCC interface panel.
2. Attach the loop back connector.

ARCHITECT instruments (except
i1000SR) - Attach the laptop cable,
with the loopback connector, to the LIS
serial port (back of the SCC).
i1000SR - Attach the loop back
connector to the LIS port on the SCC
interface panel.
Log On As FSE
Note
1. Select F2 - Log On from the Snapshot Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to
screen. return the system to operator level of access.
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart
name field. the SCC.
password field.
Note
4. Select Done.
Turn Off Host Bi-

directional
Communications
menu.
5. Select the Bi-directional Host radio button Off
in the Communications section.
6. Record the current setting (On or On with
Query).
Note
This information is necessary when
turning on the host communication.
7. Select Done.
screen.
Access Hyper Terminal

menu.
3. Select New Task from the Windows Task
Manager window.
4. Type Hypertrm.exe.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Hyper Terminal
opens.
Open New Terminal

1. Type Host in the name field from the
Connection Description dialog window.
2. Select OK.
3. Select Com 5 from the Connect Using list
box in the Connect to dialog window.
4. Select OK.
Verification
1. Select OK from the Com 5 properties
window.
2. Type 12345.
3. Verify that the numbers display on the screen
the serial port.
Note
If no numbers display on the screen,
the serial port is not working.
Close New Terminal

1. Close the terminal by clicking on the X in the
2. Select Yes (disconnects the terminal).
3. Select No (do not save the session).
Turn On Host Bi-

directional
Communication
menu.
5. Select the Bi-directional Host radio button On
or On with Query in the Communications
section.
6. Select Done.
screen.
Log Off As FSE

Note
2. The User Name field displays and is return the system to operator level of access.
Note
4. Select Done.
Attach LIS Cable

1. Attach the LIS cable:
If the SCC has an external multiport

adapter, go to Attach LIS Cable (SCC
with external multiport adapter).
If the SCC does not have an external
multiport adapter, go to Attach LIS
Cable (SCC without external multiport
adapter).
Attach LIS Cable (SCC

with external multiport
1. Remove the loop back connector from Port 3
adapter)
on the external mulitport serial adapter.
2. Attach the LIS cable to Port 3 on the external
mulitport serial adapter.
Attach LIS Cable (SCC

without external
1. Detach the loop back connector.
multiport adapter)
i1000SR) - Detach the loop back
connector from the serial port (back of
SCC).
i1000SR - Detach the loop back
connector from the SCC interface
panel.
2. Attach the LIS serial cable.

i1000SR) - Attach the LIS cable to the
LIS serial port (back of the SCC).
i1000SR - Attach the LIS serial cable
to the LIS port on the SCC interface
panel.
P-248 Startup and Shutdown
Version - 96756-111_234_2
Purpose Identify the recommended steps for a successful startup and shutdown. Module SCC
Startup
Power ON 1. Power ON the UPS.

UPS and 2. Power ON the peripherals (modem, printer, monitor, etc.).
Peripherals 3. Verify that power to the processing module(s) is OFF.
Note
The power to the processing module(s) must be OFF prior to turning on the power to the
system control center. If the processing module(s) power is ON, communication is not
properly initialized between the system components.
Power ON 1. Power ON the system control center.

SCC
Note
Do not go to the next step until the system control center displays the Snapshot screen.
Power ON 1. Power ON the processing module(s).

Modules 2. To change the status of the processing module and sample handler from Stopped to Ready,
Shutdown
Prerequisite 1. The processing module must be in Stopped, Ready, or Offline status.
Perform SCC Shutdown 1. Access the Snapshot screen by selecting Overview and then Snapshot.
2. Select Shutdown F3.
4. When the screen turns blue, and a message about shutting down the SCC displays,
press the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys simultaneously. Select Shutdown the computer, then
OK.
Note
Wait while the software applications shut down. A message displays informing
you that Shutdown is complete and you can turn off the power.
Note
You can choose to restart the SCC at this point.
5. Press and hold the power switch on the front of the central processing unit (CPU) for
10 seconds to power OFF the SCC.
Shut Down Processing 1. Power OFF the processing module(s) and all peripherals.
Module(s) and
Peripherals
P-249 LIS Loopback Test with Edgeport Present (SCC Platforms D or E) Version - 96756-111_4037_1

P-249 LIS Loopback Test with Edgeport Present (SCC Platforms D or E)
Purpose This procedure provides instructions to perform a host serial port loopback test on D Module i2000, i2000SR
and E platforms when an edgeport is present. SCC Platform D&E
Materials DB25 male to a DB25 female, 6" cable(part of the EMSA kit 07D01-40) Time 6 mins.
Required Null Modem Adapter 7-100037-01 DB25f to DB25f
Log On as FSE
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen.
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field, then select Done.
Connect Port 3 to Port 1 on

the Edgeport 1. Connect the Null Modem adapter to the 6" DB25m to DB25f cable.
2. Connect one end of this cable to port 3 on the edgeport.
3. Attach the other end of this cable to port 1 on the edgeport.
Turn Off Host Bi-directional

Communication 1. Select the System icon.
2. Select Configuration from the drop-down menu.
5. Select the Bi-directional Host radio button to Off in the communications section.
Note
Record the current setting( On or On with Query). You need this information
when you turn the host communications back on.
6. Select Done.
7. Select F1- Exit to return to the Snapshot screen.
Access Hyperterminal on
the SCC 1. Select the System icon.
3. Select New Task from the list box.
4. Type Hypertrm.exe, then select OK.
Note
Minimize Task Manager when Hyperterminal opens.
Configure New
1. Type Host in the name field from the Connection Description dialog
Hyperterminal on the SCC
window.Select OK.
2. In the Connect to dialog window, select Com 5 from the Connect Using list box.
Select OK.
3. In the Com 5 properties window, configure the port settings as follows:
Select 9600 bits per second
Select 8 data bits
Select None for parity
Select 1 Stop bits
Select None for flow control
Select OK
4. In the Host Hyperterminal window select File/ Properties/ Settings.
5. Select the Windows Keys radio button.
6. Select OK.
7. Select File from the terminal window.
8. Select Save As/ Desktop in the Save In: drop down.
9. Click on Save.
Note
Now in Icon will be on the SCC Desktop and be accessible when you need
to use this procedure again.
Verification
1. In the hyperterminal window, type 12345.
If the numbers display in the SCC hyperterminal window, the serial port is
working properly.
If the numbers are not displayed in the hyperterminal window, the serial port is
not working.
Verify hyperterminal settings for the SCC.
Verify that the edgeport is configured correctly.
Troubleshoot cabling issues accordingly.
Close New Terminal
1. Close the terminal by clicking on the X in the upper right corner from the window.
Turn On Host Bidirectional

Communications 1. Select the System icon
3. Select Host-Release Mode.
5. Select the appropriate Bi-directional Host setting.
6. Click on Save.
Note
This will return it to it's original setting as documented at the beginning of
this procedure.
7. Select Done.
Log Off as FSE

Note
Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the system to operator
level of access.

2. Press Delete to delete the FSE name in the User Name field.
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that nothing is listed on th startup screen after Operator.
Remove Loop Back

1. Remove the loopback cable on the edgeport.
Connector
2. Attach the LIS cable to the port 3 connector on the edgeport.
P-250 LIS Loopback Test for Serial Connection on the E Platform (no Version - 96756-111_4036_1
four port Edgeport)

P-250 LIS Loopback Test for Serial Connection on the E Platform (no four port Edgeport)
Purpose This procedure provides instructions to perform a host serial port loopback test on Module i2000, i2000SR SCC
E platforms without an edgeport. Platform D&E
Materials Laptop Cable 14207-113 Time 6 mins.
Required Null Modem Cable DB25 female to 9 pin female 92393-101 (part of the Debug
Cable Kit 7-92394-01)
Field Service Laptop
Log On as FSE
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field, then select Done.
Connect Cable from SCC Serial

Port to Laptop Serial Port 1. Connect the DB25f end of the Null Modem cable to the DB25m end of the
Laptop cable.
2. Connect one end of this cable to the 9 pin serial connector on the back of
the SCC.
3. Connect the other end of this cable to the 9 pin serial connector on the
Laptop.
Turn Off Host Bi-directional

Communication 1. Select the System icon.
5. Select the Bi-directional Host radio button to Off in the Communications
section.
Note
Record the current setting( On or On with Query). You need this
information when you turn the host communications back on.
6. Select Done.
Access Hyperterminal on the SCC

3. Select New Task from the list box.
4. Type Hypertrm.exe, then select OK.
Note
Minimize Task Manager when Hyperterminal opens.
Configure New Hyperterminal on

1. Type Host in the name field from the Connection Description dialog
the SCC
window.Select OK.
2. In the Connect to dialog window, select Com 5 from the Connect Using list
box.
3. Select OK.
4. In the Com 5 properties window, configure the port settings as follows:
Select 8 data bits
Select 1 Stop bits
Select OK
7. Select OK.
10. Click on Save.
Note
The Icon will be on the SCC Desktop and be accessible when you
need to use this procedure again.
Configure New Hyperterminal on

the Laptop 1. Select Start from the windows screen on the laptop computer.
2. Select All Programs.
3. Select Accessories.
4. Select Communications.
5. Select Hyperterminal (the application will open)
Note
If a default telnet program wiindow appears, select NO to continue.
6. On the Connection Description window enter Architect_Terminal.
7. Select the Telephone Icon.
Note
In the future this will be the only icon you need to select to start this
operation.
8. Click on OK
Note
The connect to window will open.
9. In the Connect Using window, select COM 1 and click on OK.
Note
The COM 1 properties window will appear.
10. Configure the communications link as follows:
Select 8 data bits
Select 1 Stop bits
Select OK
13. Select OK.
16. Click on Save.
Note
The Icon will be on the SCC Desktop and be accessible when you
need to use this procedure again.
Verification
1. In the hyperterminal window, type 12345.
If the numbers display in the SCC hyperterminal window, the serial
port is working properly.
If the numbers are not displayed in the hyperterminal window, the
serial port is not working.
Verify hyperterminal settings for the SCC and laptop.
Troubleshoot cabling issues accordingly.
2. In the hyperterminal window on the Laptop, type 12345.
If the numbers display in the SCC hyperterminal window, the serial
port is working properly.
Close New Terminal

1. Close the terminal by clicking on the X in the upper right corner from the
window.
Turn on Host Bidirectional

1. Select the System icon
Communications
3. Select Host-Release Mode.
5. Select the appropriate Bi-directional Host setting.
6. Click on Save.
Note
This will return it to it's original setting as documented at the
beginning of this procedure.
7. Select Done.
Log Off as FSE

Note
Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the system to

2. Press Delete to delete the FSE name in the User Name field.
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that nothing is listed on the startup screen after Operator.
Remove Loop Back Connector

Note
Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the system to
1. Remove the loopback cable on the edgeport.

2. Attach the LIS cable to the port 3 connector on the edgeport.
P-251 Connect the Laptop to the Card Cage Version - 96756-111_4035_1

P-251 Connect the Laptop to the Card Cage
Purpose This procedure provides instructions to connect the laptop to the debug connectors on the card Module i2000,
cage. This will allow monitoring of the boot-up sequence or performing low level CLI commands i2000SR
from a laptop. SCC
Platform
D&E
Materials 14207-113 9 pin female to DB25 male (laptop cable) Time 6 mins.
Required 92392-101 DB25 female to 9 pin male
92391-101 9 pin to 9 pin male.
Connect Laptop
1. Connect the 9f pin end of the laptop cable to
to Card Cage
the 9 pin serial connector on the laptop.
2. Connect the 25m pin end of the laptop cable
to the 25f pin debug cable.
3. Connect the debug cable to the 9m pin
connector on the cable. Then connect this
cable to the 9f pin card cage.
Note
J46 for the ISH or RSH (sample handling) [1]
and J45 for the process module [2].
Configure
Hyperterminal 1. Select Start from the windows screen on the laptop
on the Laptop computer.
2. Select All Programs.
3. Select Accessories.
4. Select Communications.
5. Select Hyperterminal (the application will open).
Note
If a default telnet program pop up appears,
select NO to continue.
6. On the Connection Description window enter

Architect_Terminal.
7. Select the Telephone Icon.
Note
In the future this will be the only icon you
need to select to start this operation.
8. Click on OK.
Note
The connect to window will open.
9. In the Connect Using window select COM 1 and

click on OK.
Note
The COM 1 properties window will appear.

Select 9600 bits per second.
Select 8 data bits.
Select 1 Stop bits
Select OK.
11. Press the Enter/Return key.
Note
A module prompt (either 0 or 1) should
appear if the module is in the Stopped or
Ready state.
12. If the module is Offline, cycle the power to the

module.
Note
The boot sequence will display on the laptop.
13. Select File/Properties/Settings.

14. Select the windows keys radio button.
15. Select OK.
17. Click on Save.
Note
The icon will be on your desktop and be
accessible when you need to use this
procedure again.
Note
You may now monitor a boot-up sequence or
perform low level CLI commands from a
laptop.
Note
See CLI Command for use of commands.
P-252 Configure the SCC Hyperterminal Program for CLI Commands Version - 96756-111_4033_1
(with or without an Edgeport)

P-252 Configure the SCC Hyperterminal Program for CLI Commands (with or without an Edgeport)
Purpose This procedure provides instructions to connect the loopback cable to the edgeport and to Module i2000,
configure Hyperterminal on the SCC. This will allow performing CLI commands from the SCC i2000SR
Hyperterminal program. SCC
Platform
D&E
Materials DB25 male to a DB 25 female, 6" cable (part of the EMSA kit (07D01-40) Time 6 mins.
Required Null Modem Adapter 7 - 100037-01 DB25f to DB25f
Connect Loopback
Cable to Edgeport ( if Note
present) This step is not required for E platforms that do
not have an edgeport present.
Note
If present disconnect the cable from the ARM
(port 2) port on the edgeport.
Note
The ARM must also be disabled in the Architect
Software.
Note
The Wash buffer transfer must be set to Manual
in the Architect
Software.(System/Configuration/Reagent
Supplies)
1. Connect the female end of the DB25 male to a
DB 25 female, 6" cable into port 1 on the
edgeport.
2. Connect the Null/Modem Adapter to the male
end of the cable.
3. Connect the 25f pin connector of the
Null/Modem into port 2 of the edgeport.
Configure Refer to Section 5 in the Service and

Hyperterminal on SCC 1. Log on as FSE and type in the user passcode. Support Manual, category CLI for use of
2. Go to the Systems folder and Task Manager. commands.
3. Open Task Manager and then open New Task.
4. Type Explorer in the box and key Enter.
Note
Close the Windows Task Manager display.
5. Select My Computer.
6. Open the C drive and scroll down to Terminals and
key Enter.
7. Double click the SCC Hyperterminal (SCC.ht), On the
right side of the display.
Note
If the message Unable to open COM 3 appears,
select OK.
8. Select Files in the SCC Hyperterminal Window.

9. Select Properties.
Note
Enter any name and select a symbol then OK.
10. Select the down key next to Connect Using and select
COM 4.
Note
If edgeport is present, or COM 8 if there is no
edgeport present. Then select OK.

Select 8 data bits
Select 1 Stop bits
Select OK
12. Press Enter or select Call to get a prompt.
13. Type Set_Module X.
Note
Where X is the desired module to be tested,
and press Enter.
14. You may now enter CLI commands at this point (Low
level or High level).
15. When complete, close the hyperterminal window.
P-253 Configure the Laptop Hyperterminal Program for CLI Command Version - 96756-111_4034_1

P-253 Configure the Laptop Hyperterminal Program for CLI Command
Purpose This procedure provides instructions to attach the laptop to the edgeport and to configure Module i2000,
Hyperterminal on the laptop. This will allow performing CLI commands from the laptop i2000SR
Hyperterminal program. SCC
Platform
D&E
Materials DB25 male to a DB 25 female, 6" cable (part of the EMSA kit (07D01-40) Time 6 mins.
Required Null Modem Adapter 7 - 100037-01 DB25f to DB25f
Laptop Cable 14207-113
Connect Laptop to
1. Connect a 9f pin connector of the laptop cable to the 9 pin serial connector
Edgeport
on the laptop.
2. Connect the DB25 pin connector on the laptop cable to the DB25f pin on the
Null Modem adapter.
3. Connect the other end of the Null Modem Adapter to P1 of the edgeport.
4. Set up laptop following: Configure Hyperterminal on the Laptop.
5. Now you can send CLI commands at both low and high level (Boot Up
Sequences can not be observed from this configuration).
Configure New
Hyperterminal on the SCC 1. Type Host in the name field from the Connection Description dialog window.
2. Select OK.
3. In the Connect to dialog window, select Com 5 from the Connect Using list box.
4. Select OK.
5. In the Com 5 properties window, configure the Port settings as follows:
Select 8 data bits
Select 1 Stop bits
Select OK
6. Select File/ Properties/ Settings.
7. Select the Windows keys radio button.
8. Select OK.
10. Select Save As / Desktop in the Save In: drop down.
11. Click on Save.
Note
The Icon will be on the SCC Desktop and be accessible when you need to
use this procedure again.
12. Now you can send CLI commands at both low and high level.
Note
Boot Up Sequences can not be observed from this configuration.
P-254 WZ Valve Pressure Check Version - 96756-111_5515_1

At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results, ENSURE appropriate
Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
P-254 WZ Valve Pressure Check
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE guidelines. Trained personnel should
follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Purpose Provide instructions to properly setup, run, and evaluate the data to identify poorly performing wash zone valves using Module Architect i1000SR
the Wash Zone Valve Pressure Check M&D.
Architect i2000SR
i2000
Tools and
Materials 7-77609-01 Tubing, Pressure Monitor to Syringe Estimated Procedure: 10
Time minutes
7-204070-01 Pressure Sensor
Verification: 5
minutes
Total Time: 15
minutes
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Preparation The processing module must be in

the Ready state to perform to M&D Note
procedure. M&D is designed only for the Wash Zone Valve testing currently on the instrument. Reusing and testing a valve
may give unreliable data.
CAUTION
Attempts to test the Trigger or Pre-Trigger valves at the Wash Zone positions would contaminate the Wash Zone
Manifold.
Access
M&D
1. Log on as FSE at the
Procedure
Snapshot Screen.
2. Select:
System
Diagnostics
Processing Module
radio button
Fluidics/Wash tab
M&D WZ Valve
Pressure Check
For i2000/
i2000SR, use
M&D 2055.
For i1000SR,
use M&D
2057.
3. Press F5.
4. Click OK to start the

procedure.
Note
VIDEO Video contains no audio
Perform sound.
M&D WZ
Valve Note
Pressure This procedure is
Check demonstrated in the WZ1
area only. (It can also be
(i2000 & used on WZ2. )
i2000SR
ONLY)
Note
VIDEO Video contains no audio
Perform sound.
M&D WZ
Valve
Pressure
Check
(i1000SR
ONLY)
Perform
M&D WZ
1. Follow the on-screen
Valve
instructions to connect the
Pressure
spare pressure sensor and
Check
probe link tubing in-line
between the buffer
accumulator tubing and the
bottom tubing to the wash
zone buffer heater.
For i2000/i2000SR,
use M&D 2055.
WZ1 [1a]
WZ2 [1b]
For i1000SR, use
M&D 2057. [2]
CAUTION
Use only the tubing
listed as directed by
the M&D procedure
to generate accurrate
data.The M&D was
specifically designed
to work only with this
specific length of
tubing.
CAUTION
To prevent damage
to the Pressure
Sensor, handle the
sensor using the
tubing ports only.
Note
Ensure that the
tubing is free from
kinks when installing
the pressure monitor.

Note
Remove the pressure
monitor sensor and
probe link tubing
when directed by the
procedure. The
procedure will
perform a flush and
prime cycle prior to
exiting the procedure.
2. Print the results prior to

exiting the M&D procedure.
[3]
3. Use the table to evaluate
the results.
Note
When evaluating the
printed data using the
table below:
a. Review
each row of
conditions.
b. If both
Maximum PSI
and Slope
data columns
are true, then
perform
recommended
troubleshooting
in the probable
cause column.
c. If none of
the rows fit
your data, then
the data is
acceptable.
Note
A highly restrictive valve will exhibit the following when compared to a good valve:
A higher pressure profile than a good valve.
Troughs shift upwards, away from the x-axis
Characterized by an upward slope in the peaks.
Note
A valve should be considered as trending highly resistive when the slope is >1.2. A valve with a slope of at least 1.2 does not indicate the valve
is currently causing an assay performance issue, but only the valve is trending towards a point where as assay issue could occur.
Note
The results displayed and printed by the M&D are created after processing the raw data gathered during the procedure. Data gathered when
performing the procedure is stored in script files and can be reviewed using LOG-IC/Wash Zone Test M and D. Additional troubleshooting
related to pressure graphs is found in the HELP section of LOG-IC.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2015 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, ci8200 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. c4000, ci4100, i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000,
ci16200 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-301 PQ BCR Reset Procedure
Version - 201985-104_616_1
Purpose Resets the processing queue bar code reader. Module SSH
Reset BCR 1. Verify the BCR Power T board GREEN LED Note
Power T is ON. Continuous pressure (holding in) the BCR Power T
Board board reset button is not necessary.
Note
Normally the LED is ON. Note
It may be easier to dismount the BCR to view the BCR
If the LED is not ON, remove the Power T LEDs.
processing queue skin to gain access
to the BCR T Board.
2. Press the RESET button on the BCR Power
T board twice within two (2) seconds.
Note
The BCR GREEN (Rdy) and the
GREEN (Gd/ Rd) LEDs pulses on and
off for ~1.5sec.s.
If LEDs do 1. If the LEDs do not pulse on and off, shut

not pulse - down system power and replace the BCR
Identify cause power T board (V4.13 BD,BCR T).
of failure 2. If the LEDs still do not pulse on and off, shut
down system power and replace the bar
code reader (V4.16 BCR, PQ,ASM).
3. If the bar code reader still fails to initialize,
shut down system power and replace the
sample handler controller board (CPU board)
(M1.06 BD,CONTROLLER).
Perform 1. Perform P-248 Startup and Shutdown on the

Sample sample handler.
Handler 2. Verify that the Sample Handler initializes
Startup properly.
Verify Correct 1. Select the Modules category from the Note

PQ BCR diagnostic screen under the system icon. For further information on performing diagnostic
Operation 2. Select the Sample Handler radio button. procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System
3. Perform diagnostic procedure 3315 Sample Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and
Handler Test. diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
P-503 Sample Carousel Temperature Detector Adjustment Version - 96756-111_300_2

P-503 Sample Carousel Temperature Detector Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the displayed temperature of Sample Carousel. Module c16000
External thermometer (LN8C94-88)
Insulated Cup
Ice
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution

1. Verify that the processing module has been ON
for at least 30 minutes prior to testing.
2. The processing module must be in Stopped or
Ready status.
Preparation
1. Remove the screws securing the left front deck
and the left center front deck and remove the
decks.
Note
It is not necessary to disconnect the
cables on the left front deck. There is
enough service loop to set the deck aside.
Remove
Sample
1. Remove the temperature detector from the
Carousel
sample carousel assembly.
Temperature
Detector Note
Do not disconnect the temperature
detector from the connector.
Determine
Temperature
1. Fill an insulated cup half full of water.
of Water
2. Attach the removed temperature detector to the
external thermometer probe with a rubber band
and place the probes into the water.
3. Add ice to cool the water to 10°C ±5°C. This is
the temperature that the detector must be tested
at.
4. Wait for the readings to stabilize.
Determine For further information on performing diagnostic

Temperature procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
1. Select the As Needed category from the
of Sample Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
Maintenance screen under the System icon.
Carousel Subsection: System diagnostics.
3. Read the temperature status of the sample
carousel.
Compare
Temperature
1. Sample carousel temperature must be within
Readings
±0.2°C of the reading of the external
thermometer in the water.
If it is correct, go to Prepare for Operation.
If not correct, continue with Remove Left

Rear Cover.
Remove Left
Rear Cover
1. Remove the screws securing the left rear cover
and remove the cover.
Open Card
Cage Cover
card cage cover and open the cover.
Adjust VR3
1. Disconnect the MECH LED cables from the SMC
board, SM AC/DC board, and the AC/DC
controller board.
2. On the AC/DC controller board, turn VR3
(potentiometer) clockwise to raise the displayed
temperature and counter-clockwise to lower the
displayed temperature.
Note
Update the screen after each movement
of the potentiometer to see the current
reading.
3. Continue adjustment until the displayed

temperature is within ±0.2°C of the actual
temperature.
Close Card
Cage Cover
1. Connect the MECH LED cables to the SMC, SM
AC/DC and AC/DC board.
2. Close the card cage cover and secure using
Install Left
Rear Cover
1. Install the left rear cover.
Install Sample
Carousel
1. Remove probes from the water.
Temperature
2. Remove rubber band from probes.
Detector
3. Install temperature detector into the sample
carousel assembly.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install left front and left center front decks.
Note
Ensure that the cables to the switches are
placed behind the sample carousel bar
code reader. If the cables are placed in
front of the bar code reader, read errors
occur.
2. Close all doors.
ARCHITECT c16000 Service and Support Manual (Version 201980-105) • © 2006, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
P-504 Internal Instrument Temperature Detector Adjustment Version - 96756-111_301_2

P-504 Internal Instrument Temperature Detector Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the displayed Internal c16000 processing module Module c16000
Temperature.
Materials Standard Tool Kit Time 60 min
Required External thermometer (LN8C94-88)
50mL beaker
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution

1. Verify that the processing module has been
System status.
ON for at least 30 minutes prior to testing.
Stopped or Ready status.
Remove
Temperature
1. Loosen the four (4) captive screws securing
Detector for Water
the left rear cover and remove the cover.
Bath Heater
2. Loosen the screw on the clamp [2] securing
Assembly
the detector [1] at the base of the heater
assembly and slide the detector to the left
to remove.
3. Do not disconnect the temperature detector
from the connector.
Determine
Temperature of
1. Fill a beaker with 50mL of room
Water
temperature water.
2. Attach the removed temperature detector to
the external thermometer probe with a
rubber band and place the probes into the
water.
3. Wait for the readings to stabilize.
Determine Internal For further information on performing diagnostic

c16000 Processing procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Module Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
Maintenance screen under the System
Temperature Subsection: System diagnostics.
icon.
3. Read the status of the instrument internal
temperature.
Compare
Temperature
1. Internal Instrument temperature must be
Readings
within ±0.2°C of the reading of the external
thermometer in the water.
If it is correct, go to Install
Temperature Detector for Water
Bath Heater Assembly.
If not correct, continue with Open
Card Cage Cover.
Open Card Cage

Cover
the card cage cover and open the cover.
Adjust VR4
1. Disconnect the MECH LED cables from the
SMC board, SM AC/DC board and the
AC/DC controller board.
2. On AC/DC controller board, turn VR4
(potentiometer) clockwise to raise the
displayed temperature and counter-
clockwise to lower the displayed
temperature.
Note
Update the screen after each
movement of the potentiometer to
see the current reading.

temperature.
4. Connect the MECH LED cables to the
SMC, SM AC/DC and AC/DC board.
5. Close the card cage cover and secure
suing two (2) thumbscrews.
Install Temperature
Detector for Water
1. Remove probes from the water.
Bath Heater
2. Remove rubber band from probes.
Assembly
3. Slide the detector [1] in the clamp [2] on
the base of the heater assembly and
tighten the screw on the clamp to secure
the detector.
reserved.
P-505 Water Bath Temperature Detector Adjustment Version - 96756-111_302_1

P-505 Water Bath Temperature Detector Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the displayed Water Bath Temperature. Module c16000
External thermometer (LN8C94-88)
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Prerequisite
1. Verify that the processing module has been
ON for at least 30 minutes prior to testing.
2. The processing module must be in Stopped
or Ready status.
Perform 3526 For further information on performing diagnostic procedures,

Check Water refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section
Bath 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System
Maintenance screen under the System icon.
Temperature diagnostics.
2. Perform 3526 Check Water Bath
Temperature.
Note
Allows for correct positioning of the
temperature probe in the water bath.
Position
Probe in
1. Position the probe from the external
Water Bath
thermometer into the water bath in the
position specified by 3526 Check Water Bath
Temperature.
2. Wait at least 1 minute for readings to
stabilize.
Read status
of Water Bath
1. Using 3526 Check Water Bath Temperature
Temperature
read the status of the water bath temperature.
2. The reading should be within ±0.1°C of the
reading on the external thermometer.
If it is correct, go to Prepare for

Operation.
If the difference is more than ±0.1°C
go to Remove Left Rear Cover.
Remove Left
Rear Cover
1. Remove the left rear cover.
Open Card
Cage Cover
card cage cover and open the cover.
Adjust VR5
1. Disconnect the MECH LED cables from the
SMC board and the AC/DC controller board.
2. On AC/DC controller board, turn VR5
(potentiometer) clockwise to raise the
displayed temperature and counter-clockwise
to lower the displayed temperature.
Note
Update the screen after each
movement of the potentiometer to see
the current reading.

temperature.
Close Card
Cage Cover
1. Close the card cage cover and secure with
Install Left
Rear Cover
Prepare for
Operation
1. Complete 3526 Check Water Bath
Temperature and remove the external
thermometer probe.
3. Close all doors.
reserved.
P-518 ICT Alignment
Version - 201985-104_643_1
Purpose Perform this procedure to align the ICT probe positions. Module c16000
Alignment tool #1 & #2 from the Robotics Alignment Tool Assembly 89825
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
ICT Front/Back-Left/Right Alignment
Prerequisite 1. The processing module must be in Stopped or For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System
Ready status. Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function,
2. Remove the center rear and right rear decks. Subsection: System status.
Verify ICT 1. Select the Modules category from the Diagnostics For further information on performing diagnostic
Probe screen under the System icon. procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Centered 2. Perform 1101 Robotics Test Tool. Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
Over 3. From the main menu of 1101 Robotics Test Tool Subsection: System diagnostics.
Cuvette select 1. Reaction carousel.
1. Home
0. Exit
4. From the main menu of 1101 Robotics Test Tool
select 9 ICT.
a. L1 Home
5. Verify that the probe is centered over the cuvette
cell.
If properly centered, go to Step6.
If not properly centered, go to Adjust ICT
Head.
6. Select L4 Exit to return to the 1101 Robotics Test
Tool main menu.
7. Go to ICT Cuvette Down Position Adjustment.
Adjust ICT 1. If the ICT probe is not centered over the cuvette
Head cell [3] in a front to back relationship [1]. Loosen
the two (2) screws [2] under the water jacket tubing
at the bottom of the head section.
2. Make slight front to back [1] movements of the ICT
head to get the proper front to back position.
3. Tighten the two (2) screws [2].
4. Verify that the probe is centered clockwise or
counterclockwise over the cuvette cell.
If properly centered, go to ICT Cuvette Down
Position Adjustment.
If not properly centered, go to Step5.
5. Adjust the position of the ICT head using 1101
Robotics Test Tool, and selecting L1 Rotate. Then
position the probe using L1 CW (clockwise) and L2
CCW (counterclockwise)
6. Once the position is correct select L4 Exit three (3)
times to return to the 1101 Robotics Test Tool main
menu.
7. Once the proper ICT head alignment at the cuvette
is verified, go to ICT Cuvette Down Position
Adjustment.
8. Install the Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment
Tool.
ICT Cuvette Down Position Adjustment
Install 1. From the main menu of 1101

Alignment Tool Robotics Test Tool select 9 ICT.
and Check ICT a. L1 Home
Cuvette Down b. L2 Reaction Carousel
Position cuvette
c. L2 Down stepup/stepdown
2. Install Alignment Tool 1 [1] on top
of the flat surface of the cuvette
segment
Note
The Alignment Tool must
be placed on top of the
Cuvette Segment Robocal
Alignment Tool for proper
height measurement.
the tool fits under the plate [2] and Note
the high limit does not fit under Video contains no audio sound.
the plate [2].
a. If the down position meets
the specification, go to
Step4.
b. If the down position does
not meet the specification,
go to Adjust ICT Cuvette
Down Position
4. Select L4 Up/Exit (moves the ICT
probe out of the cuvette).
5. Go to ICT Reference Solution Cup
Alignment.
Adjust ICT 1. Adjust the height of the ICT using

Cuvette Down 1101 Robotics Test Tool
Position L1 Step up
L2 Step down
2. Go to Check ICT Cuvette Down
Position.
ICT Reference Solution Cup Alignment
Verify Probe 1. Select L3 ICT reference solution

Over cup in the 1101 Robotics Test Tool
Reference screen.
Solution Cup 2. Observe the probe position in
relation to the solution cup and
verify that it is centered over the
cup.
If the probe is centered over
the cup, go to Verify Probe
Down Position.
If the probe is not centered
over the cup, go to Adjust
Probe Over Reference
Solution Cup.
Adjust Probe 1. Perform 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
Over 2. Select L1 Rotate.
Reference 3. Position the probe using L1 CW
Solution Cup (clockwise) and L2 CCW
(counterclockwise).
4. Go to Verify Probe Over Reference
Solution Cup.
Verify Probe 1. Move the ICT probe to the down

Down position in the reference solution
Position cup [1] using 1101 Robotics Test
Tool and selecting L2 Down-step
up/step down.
2. Insert alignment tool #2 [2] between
the bottom surface of the ICT
mounting plate [3] and the top
surface of the clear plastic mounting
plate (for the reference solution
cup [1]).
the tool fits under the plate [3] and
the high limit does not fit under the
plate [3].
If the down position is within
specification, go to Exit 1101
Robotics Test Tool
Procedure. Note
If the down position is out of Video contains no audio sound.
specification, go to Adjust
Probe Down Position.
Adjust Probe 1. Adjust the height of the ICT using
Down 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
Position a. L1 Step up
b. L2 Step down
2. Perform Verify Probe Down
Position.
Exit 1101 1. Move the ICT probe out of the ICT

Robotics Test reference solution cup by selecting
Tool L4 Up/Exit.
Procedure 2. Select L4 Exit twice to return to
main menu of 1101 Robotics Test
Tool.
Robotics Test Tool select 1.
Reaction carousel.
1. Home
Close 1. Install the center rear and right rear

Cover/Doors decks.
2. Run an ICT Calibration.
reserved.
P-520 Mixer Alignment
Version - 201985-104_646_1
Purpose Perform this procedure to align the mixers. Module c16000

Alignment Tool (203628)
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Diagnostics screen under the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting
System icon. and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
carousel.
1. Home
0. Exit
Robotics Test Tool select 6. Mixer.
a. L1 Mixer 1
b. L1 A-line
c. L2 Wash Cup
d. L4 Exit
e. L1 Mixer 1
f. L1 B-line
g. L2 Wash cup
h. L4 Exit
i. L2 Mixer 2
j. L1 A-line
k. L2 Wash Cup
l. L4 Exit
m. L2 Mixer 2
n. L2 B-line
o. L2 Wash Cup
5. Verify that the mixers are centered
over the mixer wash cups.
Step6.
(clockwise) or CCW
6. Select L3 Cuvette for each of the
mixers.
7. Verify that mixers are centered over
the cuvette cells.
Verify Mixer Height.
(clockwise) or CCW
VIDEO - Note
Verify Mixer
Height Video contains no audio sound.
Verify Mixer 1. Position the low limit surface of

Height alignment tool under the mixer blade
tip of one of the mixers.
2. Verify that the low limit (6.5 mm)
surface of the alignment fits under the
mixer blade and the high limit (7.5
mm) does not pass beneath the
blade. (specification 7.0 ± .5 mm)
Adjust Mixer Height.
Adjust 1. Locate the four (4) support shafts [1]
Mixer supporting and securing the Mixer
Height Assembly.
Note
The fourth shaft is located
behind the Mixer Assembly
motor. On each shaft there is a
lock nut above and a lock nut
below the mounting bracket.
2. Loosen each top nut [2] away from

the mounting bracket.
Note
If needed, open up cable
clamps and remove cables to
gain access to the nut on the
shaft located behind the motor.
3. Use an adjustable or open-end

wrench to turn each shaft clockwise
(CW) effectively lowering the Mixer
Assembly. Lower the Mixer Assembly
until the mixer blade touches the
surface of the alignment block.
Note
Each shaft should be lowered
the same amount so that the
Mixer Assembly remains level
and parallel to the Cuvette
Assembly. The Mixer Assembly
probably will not lower until you
adjust the two inner shafts. As
you turn the shaft, the four (4)
top Allen head screws [3] may
have loosened.
Note
When these screws are
tightened this may lower the
Mixer Assembly even more.
4. Check the gap between each mixer

blade tip and the Cuvette Assembly
by moving the alignment block under
each mixer tip.
5. Tighten the Allen head screws [3] and
nuts to secure the adjustment, when
the Mixer Assembly is level.
Note
Verify height between the
mixer blade tip and the Cuvette
Assembly surface is the same
(7.0 ± 0.5mm) at each tip.
6. Install cables back into the cable

clamps and secure the clamps.
7. Verify proper Mixer height after
tightening the screws and nuts.
Prepare for 1. Close cover(s) and door(s).

Operation
reserved.
P-521 Cuvette Washer Alignment
Version - 201985-104_647_1
Purpose Perform this procedure to align the cuvette washer. Module c16000
Metric Ruler
Alignment tool #3 from the Robotics Alignment tool Assembly 89825
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Diagnostics screen under the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting
System icon. and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
carousel.
1. Home
0. Exit
4. Remove cuvette washer cover [1] by
loosening the cover screw [2].
5. Remove the cuvette wash nozzle
assembly [4] from the cuvette wash
elevator [5] by loosening the black
knurled knob [3].
Verify Dry 1. Verify that the dry tip is 61.5mm

Tip Position ±0.5 mm [1] from the bottom of the tip
to the underside surface of the nozzle
mounting plate.
Install 1. Install the cuvette wash nozzle
Nozzle assembly back on the cuvette wash
Assembly elevator and secure with the black
knurled knob.
Verify Tip 1. From the main menu of 1101

Rectangular Robotics Test Tool select 10. Wash
Orientation Station.
L2 Step Down
2. Using the black knurled knob, raise
and lower the cuvette washer.
3. Verify that the top of the dry tip
nozzle does not move as the washer
moves in and out of the cuvette.
Verify Nozzle Gap.
Adjust Tip Rectangular
Orientation.
Adjust Tip 1. Manually adjust the dry tip to ensure

Rectangular it is properly centered in the cuvette
Orientation cells.
2. Repeat Verify Tip Rectangular
Orientation.
Verify 1. With the cuvette in the up position,

Nozzle Gap note the position of where the plastic
aspiration tubing joins the stainless
steel tubing on the dry tip nozzle.
2. Lower the cuvette washer.
3. With the cuvette washer in the down
position, note that the position of
where the plastic aspiration tubing
joins the steel tubing of the dry nozzle
has been displace upward 1.5 mm. [2]
4. Go to Verify Nozzle Centering Over
Cuvette.
Adjust 1. Manually move the dry tip (up or

Nozzle Gap
down on the nozzle shaft) to meet the
1.5mm specification.
Verify 1. Select L1 up to move the cuvette

Nozzle washer to the up position, visually
Centering verify that all the washer nozzles are
Over centered over the cuvette cells.
Cuvette If specification is met, go to
Verify Nozzle Centering
Entering Cuvette.
Adjust Nozzle Centering Over
Cuvette.

Nozzle mounting plate for horizontal and
Centering left/right adjustment.
Over 2. Go to Verify Nozzle Centering Over
Cuvette Cuvette.
Verify 1. Select L2 Step Down to move washer

Nozzle to the down position, manually move
Centering the nozzle assembly up and down,
Entering and verify that the nozzles are
Cuvette centered when entering the cuvettes.
Verify Nozzle Entry.
Adjust Nozzle Centering
Entering Cuvette.

Nozzle mounting plate as required to ensure
Centering nozzles are centered.
Entering 2. Go to Verify Nozzle Entry.
Cuvette
Verify 1. While slowly lifting up on the washer
Nozzle assembly by hand, verify that the dry
Entry nozzle enters the cells smoothly, and
without any deviation to the left or to
the right.
Verify Final Alignment.
Adjust Nozzle Entry.
Adjust 1. Loosen the two (2) screws [2] at the

Nozzle top of the dry nozzle and move the
Entry nozzle [1] in the desired direction.
2. Go to Verify Final Alignment.
Verify Final 1. When the adjustment is complete,

Alignment tighten the nozzle and recheck all
nozzles on the cuvette washer to
verify final alignment.
2. Select L1 Up to position cuvette
washer in the up position and then
select L4 Exit to return to main screen
of 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
Robotics Test Tool, select 1. Reaction
carousel.
1. Home
4. Position the low limit surface of the
and verify height. Then move
and verify height. (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
5. With the height set properly, the low
limit surface of the alignment tool Note
#3 [1] should fit under the nozzle and Video contains no audio sound.
the high limit should not pass beneath
the blade.
Adjust Nozzle Level and
Height.
Adjust 1. If the height is not set properly adjust
Nozzle the screws [3] on the linear slide for
Level and horizontal level and height alignment.
Height
Prepare for 1. Select 1. Home to home the reaction
Operation carousel.
2. Remove Alignment Tool #3.
reserved.
P-546 Top Cover Counterbalance Adjustment Version - 96756-111_269_1

P-546 Top Cover Counterbalance Adjustment
Purpose Sets the correct tension on the counterbalances on the top covers Module c16000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Top Cover
Test.
1. Move the front top cover and the rear top cover
to the half way open position and release cover.
2. If the counterbalances are set correctly the top
covers should not move down. If covers move
down preform counterbalance adjustment.
Counterbalance
Adjustment
1. Remove the front top cover or the rear top
cover that requires adjustment.
2. While holding the nut [1] on the counterbalance
turn the bolt [2] clockwise two (2) turns. Repeat
for the other counterbalance on the top cover.
3. Replace top cover removed and retest.
reserved.
P-547 Performance Verification Test (PVT)
Version - 201985-104_727_7
At the completion of this VP: After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
Describes the tests and acceptance criteria for verifying the system performance of the c16000 analyzer at Module c16000
Purpose the time of installation.
Materials Standard Tool Kit Time 90 min
Required Also, see Materials/Equipment/Chemicals Required
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Materials/Equipment/Chemicals Required
Materials Quantity Needed
AST (LN7D81) 2 Cartridge of R1 and R2

LDH (2P56) 2 Cartridge of R1 and R2
Total Protein (TP), (LN7D73) 2 Cartridge of R1
ICT Reference Solution (LN1E49) 1 Bottle
ICT Sample Diluent (2P32) 1 Cartridge of R1
ICT Calibrator (LN1E46) 1 bottle of each Calibrator (L and H).
ICT Module (LN9D28) 1 Module
ICT Cleaning Fluid (LN1E50) 1 Bottle
Acid Wash Solution (2J42) 1 Bottle
Alkaline Wash Solution (LN9D31) 1 Bottle
Water Bath Additive (LN9D29) 1 Cartridge of R2
Multi-constituent Calibrators (LN1E65) 1 Bottle for each Calibrator level
Liquid Control, Level I I 2 Bottles
1. Prepare the solutions listed below.

Prepare
Solution
Load 1. Load the solutions listed below and update the system
Solutions supply status.
Verify 1. Verify that all Technical Service Bulletins (TSB) are
Completion competed.
of TSBs
Perform 1. Verify completion of all appropriate maintenance (daily,
Maintenance weekly, and monthly) and corresponding instrument log
Procedures entries.
Load PVT 1. Log on as FSE.

Assays from 2. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select
Assay CD Calibration order.
(for A-line) If Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP and AST are listed in
the Assays box, go to Edit A - Line LDH Assay.
If the assays are not listed, continue to step 3.
Diagnostics.
4. Select the Module 5 button (SCC).
F-5 Perform. Select OK.
7. Select Install.
8. Install the ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM into the
CD drive and select Proceed to continue.
9. Enter a 1 for the All groups option and select Continue.
10. Follow the on screen instructions and select the options
to install Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, TP, AST, LDH and select
Continue.
Note
The new LDH (2P56) assay file will not be
available on a cSystem Assay Disk until Version
13.00 or higher. Until then, the file and installation
instructions to create a LDH CD are available on
the GSS website at the following link:
http://gssweb.add.abbott.com/architect/205042.asp.
11. After the assays have loaded, select the page down
button in the Instructions box until you reach the end of
the assay list.
12. Enter the option to Return to the main menu and select
Continue.
13. Select Exit and then select Done.
Edit A - Line 1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select
LDH Assay Configuration
2. Select Assay settings.
3. Select LDH from the Assays list, and then select F6 -
Configure.
4. On the Configure assay parameters, General page,
select the Reagent/Sample button in the middle of the
page.
5. Select the UNDILUTED default dilution button.
6. Select Done to save the settings.
F-5 Perform. Select OK.
Load PVT Note

Assays from These assays (AST-B, LDH-B and TP-B are loaded on
Assays CD the B-line (inner carousel) on the R1 & R2 Reagent
(B-line) Supply Centers and must be imported from the disk
provided.
1. From the Snapshot screen, select System from the menu

bar, then Configuration.
2. On the Configuration screen, select the Assay settings
view.
3. Select F3-Import on the Configuration screen.
4. Insert the disk with the assays into the drive. Select OK.
The import assay window displays a list of the files on
the disk.
5. Select all the PVT assays and then select the Import
button. The selected assay files are copied to the system,
and the import assay window displays the status of the
imported files.
6. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
7. Remove the disk from the drive.
Edit B - Line 1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select
LDH Assay Configuration
2. Select Assay settings.
3. Select LDb from the Assays list, and then select F6 -
Configure.
4. On the Configure assay parameters, General page, edit
the Secondary wavelength to 404.
5. Edit the Last required read to 26.
6. Edit the Sample blank type to Self.
7. Edit the Main Read times to 21 - 26.
8. Edit the Color correction to 4 - 6.
9. Edit the Blank Read times to 10 - 16.
10. Select the Calibration button at the top of the page, and
then edit the Factor to 11180.
11. Select Done to save the settings.
Create PVT 1. From the Snapshot screen, select System from the menu
Panel for all bar, then Configuration.
Assays 2. On the Configuration screen, select the Assay settings
view.
3. Select Panel definitions from the Assay categories list on
the Configuration screen.
4. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure panel definitions
window displays.
5. Enter PVT in the New panel name data entry box. Select
the Patient panel check box. Select the PVT assays from
the Assays list.
Create PVT 1. Select Add to create the panel. The panel name displays
Panel for all in the Panels list.
Assays 2. Select Done to save.
(continued)
Create MCC 1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select
Calibrator Configuration.
Set and 2. Select the QC-Cal settings button and then select
Enable Calibrator Set in the QC-Cal categories window.
Assay 3. Select MCC from the Calibrator sets window.
4. Select F6 - Conf igure.
5. Select the lot number list button and then select New
Lot.
6. Enter the calibrator lot number in the Lot number data
entry box.
7. Enter the number of levels (2) and expiration date of the
Cal Set.
8. Highlight the TP and TP-B row and select Define Data.
9. Enter a value in the Concentration data entry box for
each calibrator level. (Refer to the MCC value sheet for
TP calibrator concentrations.)
10. Select Done to return to the Configure calibrator set
window.
11. Select Done to create the calibrator set.
Configuration.
13. Select the Assay Settings button and select Assay
Parameters in the Assay categories window.
14. Select TP in the Assays list.
16. Configure the Assay availability box to Enabled.
17. Select Done.
18. Repeat steps 14-17 for TP-B.
Configure 1. From the System Configuration screen, select Assay

Reagents settings from the Configure: options.
for B-line 2. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list.
3. Select the reagent (e.g. ASTB) from the Reagents
screen.
4. Select F6/Configure. The Configure reagent screen
displays.
5. Enter the Lot number (select New Lot), Serial number,
Expiration date, R1 cartridge size, and R2 cartridge size
(only if an R2 assay). Select Add kit and then Done.
6. Repeat for additional assays that need to be configured
for the B-line.
Load and Note R1 Outer Carousel:

Scan If the customer is not going to be running electrolytes
Reagents and the option is turned off in the system configuration, 1. ICT Sample Diluent
for A-line electrolytes do not have to be run as part of the PVT.
2. LDH - R1 Reagent Cartridge
1. Install the reagent R1 cartridges and R2 cartridges in the
outer reagent carousel positions. The reagents must be 3. Total Protein - R1 Reagent Cartridge
loaded in the following order: ICT Sample Diluent, LDH,
4. AST - R1 Reagent Cartridge
Total Protein and AST.
2. Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select
Reagent status and F4 Scan.
3. Verify the reagent cartridges read correctly and are in R2 Outer Carousel
the order above.
1. LDH - R2 Reagent Cartridge
2. AST - R2 Reagent Cartridge

Load and 1. From the Reagent status screen, select F6 - Assign
Assign location. The Assign location window displays.
Location for 2. Select ASTB reagent from the Reagent kits table.
Non-bar 3. Select Location D from Reagent supply center 1 option,
Coded B- and then enter the desired location in the data entry box.
line (ASTB:D4, LDHB:D5, TPB:D6)
Reagents
4. Select Location D from Reagent supply center 2 option,
and then enter the desired location in the data entry box.
Load and 1. Select Add. The assigned location(s) display in the

Assign Reagents kit table.
Location for 2. Continue assigning each reagent location, repeating
Non-bar steps 2-5, until all reagent locations for the B-line
Coded B- reagents have been assigned.
line 3. Select Done to return to the Reagent status screen. All
Reagents reagents display on the screen with an OK Reagent
(continued) status ready to be loaded and calibrated.
4. Remove the bar code labels off the reagents assigned to
the B-line (inner carousels) of R1 & R2 reagent supply
centers and load the reagents in the assigned positions.
Create a 1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select
Calibration Calibration order.
Order 2. Select the Carrier button on the Calibration order screen.
3. Enter the RSH carrier ID in the C: data entry box. (The
Carrier ID includes a letter and a number.)
4. Enter 1 for carrier position in the P: data entry box.
5. Select Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP, AST, AST-B, LDH-B,
and TP-B from the Assays list and then select F2-Add
order.
Print the 1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Order
Order List status.
Report 2. Select F4-Print and then select the Order List Report
option.
Load the 1. Determine the minimum sample volume required per the
Calibrators Order List Report.
into the 2. Pipette the appropriate calibrator into the sample cups
Sample and load in the correct C/P (carrier/position) per the
Carrier Order List Report.
3. Install the Carrier into position 1 in the Priority Bay.
Calibration Snapshot.
2. Ensure that the RSH and c16000 are in the Ready state.
3. Select the c16000 module and then select F8-Run.
4. When the c16000 enters the Running status, select the
RSH module and then select F8-RUN.
Verify 1. When the run has completed, select QC-Cal from the
Calibration menu bar, and then select Calibration status.
2. Verify that the Cal Status for Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP,
AST, AST-B, LDH-B, and TP-B are listed as Active.
Create a 1. Select Results from the menu bar, and then select
Patient Results review.
Order 2. If necessary, delete any results listed in the Results
review screen.
3. Remove any sample cups from positions 1-20 on the
Sample Carousel.
4. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Patient
order. Ensure that Single patient is selected.
5. Select the Carousel button.
6. Enter a 1 for the cup position in the P: data entry box.
7. Enter a number in the SID data entry box.
8. Select PVT Panel from the assays list and then select
F3-Add order. (After selecting F3-Add order, the cup
position in the P: data entry box will automatically
increment.)
9. Enter another number in the SID data entry box.
10. Select PVT Panel from the assays list and select F3-Add
order.
11. Repeat steps 7 through 10 until you have created a
patient order for PVT Panel for positions 1-20 on the
Sample Carousel.
Load Level 1. Pipette 125µl of Level II Control into 20 sample cups and
II Controls place them into positions 1-20 on the Sample Carousel.
into
Positions 1- Note
20 on the If necessary, allow the control material to thaw for
Sample 30 minutes and then gently tilt until mixed.
Carousel
2. Replace the Sample Carousel cover.
Note
The Order status will stay in Pending if the
Sample Carousel cover is not detected.
Run Snapshot.
2. Ensure that the c16000 is in the Ready state.
3. Select the c16000 module and then select F8-Run.
Print Results 1. When the run has completed, select Results from the
menu bar and then select Results review.
2. Select Assay in the Results review screen.
3. Select F-4 Print and then select the Results List Report
option.
Record and 1. Enter the processing module serial number and software
Evaluate configuration on the form below.
Results 2. Enter the PVT test results into the PVT Test Results
table.
3. Calculate and record the difference.
4. Use the PVT Test Acceptance Criteria to determine if the
PVT passed or failed.
5. Enter the results into the PVT Test Results table. See
below.
6. Sign and date.
Delete PVT 1. Delete patient results, exceptions and PVT assays from
Results and the processing module.
Assays
Note
You cannot delete the assays if there are pending
orders. Delete any pending orders prior to trying to
delete the PVT assays.

Diagnostics.
3. Select the Module 5 button (SCC) option on the
Diagnostics screen.
F-5 Perform.
6. Select OK to perform the procedure.
7. Select Delete.
8. Enter the assay numbers of the assays that are to be
deleted (e.g. 2500, 2501 and 2502).
9. Select Done to return to the Diagnostics screen.
Delete 1. Access the Configuration screen -Assay settings - Assay

Reagent parameters view.
Kits 2. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list
on the Configuration screen.
3. Select the reagent associated with the kit from the
Reagents list, and then select F6-Configure. The
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window
displays.
4. Select the desired kit (Lot Number, Serial Number and
Expiration Date displayed) from the Configured kits list,
and then select Delete kit.
5. Select Done to delete the kit.
Delete 1. Access the Configuration screen -Assay settings - Assay

Reagents parameters view.
2. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list
on the Configuration screen.
3. Select the desired reagent from the Reagents list, and
then select F7-Delete. A confirmation message displays.
4. Select OK to delete the reagent.
Processing Module SN: ________________________________

Software Configuration: ________________________________
PVT Test Results
Assay Highest Result Lowest Result Difference (High-Low) Acceptance Criteria Pass or Fail
AST/ less than or equal to 9 U/L

AST-B
LDH less than or equal to 19 U/L
TP less than or equal to 0.22 g/dL
Na-C less than or equal to 3.4 mmol/L
K-C less than or equal to 0.24 mmol/L
Cl-C less than or equal to 3.0 mmol/L
PVT Test Acceptance Criteria
Name of Test Assays Number of Replicates Acceptance Criteria (less than or equal to)
AST/AST-B 20 9*
LDH/LDH-B 20 19*
TP/TP-B 20 0.22*
Na-C 20 3.4*
Assay Within Run Precision Test K-C 20 0.24*
Cl-C 20 3.0*
*The difference between the highest and the lowest result in the run of 20 replicates.
Name: ______________________________________ Name: _______________________________________ Date: ____________

Printed Name Signature
ARCHITECT c16000 Service and Support Manual (Version 201980-106) • © 2006, 2011 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park,
IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Planned Maintenance
Process ISA Link
Preventive Maintenance Refer to ISA 116-128 (current version)
ABBOTT INSTRUMENT SERVICE ADVISORY
ADD ISA 116-128C
5132013-9228-JS
Active
Subject: Architect i2000SR Standardized Preventive Maintenance Document #: ISA 116-128C
and Total Call Procedures
Originator: Charlie Fang Product: ARCHITECT i2000SR (116)
Approved For Release: Heidi Syndergaard/ADD_DAL_HUB/ADD_HUB/ADD/US Site of Document Control: Dallas
Published Date: 05/13/2013 Effective Date:05/07/2012
Part / Kit #: See FSR Guide Procedures for Recommended Parts Part Availability: See Procedure
Classification: Preventive Maintenance (PM)

@ This document supersedes ISA 116-128B. @= Change to information in the section
I. Distribution:
Worldwide
@ II. Purpose:
The purpose of this ISA is to notify the Area Service & Support Organizations of the recommended Annual
Preventive Maintenance (PM) procedure and recommended Total Call procedure for the Architect i2000SR
System.
@ Summary of Changes:
Changed the subject line to Architect i2000SR Standardized Preventive Maintenance and Total
Call Procedures.
Removed frequency of performing preventative maintenance based on cycle counts.
Removed Interim PM.
Changed requirement to clean the entire process path once per year to a recommended action.
Removed required PM parts and added them to recommended on-hand parts.
Added "as needed" to the previous required PM parts replacement steps.
Updated the PM checklist (editable) and Total Call Guide (editable) accordingly.
@ III. Administrative notes:

An optional break point has been determined for the Annual PM. This optional break point will decrease the
customers single day downtime by allowing the Field Service personnel to complete the PM in (2) visits. The
2 site visits can be scheduled at 6 month intervals, back to back days or at any interval that is convenient for
the customer. The (1) one time visit still remains the ideal scenario.
Should the optional break point be utilized, the PM can be divided as follows:
First Site Visit:

Complete all steps associated with LATs (logically associated tasks) 1 - 18 and 20. Once task 20
is finished, the following Verification procedures in LAT 27 & 28, System checks / Verify
Performance, should be completed.
a. RV Loader Calibration (P-40)
b. M&D 2055 Wash Zone Valve Pressure Check
c. M&D 1020 Optics Background Test
d. Run customer controls as highlighted in LAT step 28
Second Site Visit:

Complete all steps associated with LATs 1-2, 19 and 21 - 30. The following Verification
procedures in LAT 27, System Checks, should be completed.
a. M&D 119 RSH Transport Calibration
b. Verify ARM / Transfer Pump Operation
Note: Activity items in the recommended PM can be performed in the optional steps listed above or in any
order that fits the needs of the customer and local country service organization.
IV. Parts:
@ All parts recommended to complete the Preventive Maintenance are included in the procedure guides
attached below.
@ V. Procedures:
Title Attachment @ Filename Filesize, Intended
Date, Time Use
& Zone
i2000SR i2000SR 1215KBytes, FSR Guide
Annual PM Annual-PM- 05/08/2013, for the
FSR Guide @ FSR-Guide.pdf 2:57 PM Annual
@ @ GMT-6 @ Preventative
Maintenance
of the
Architect
i2000SR by
Abbott
Personnel.
i2000SR PM i2000SR PM- 1209 For
Customer Customer- KBytes, distribution
Checklist @ @ Checklist.doc@ 05/06/2013, to customers
11:00 AM after
GMT-6@ completion
of the
Annual
Preventative
Maintenance
of the
Architect
i2000SR by
Abbott
Personnel
@
i2000SR i2000SR Total- 233 KBytes, FSR Guide
Total Call Call-FSR- 05/08/2013, for the Total
FSR Guide @ Guide.pdf @ 03:00 PM Call of the
@ GMT-6 @ Architect
i2000SR by
Abbott
Personnel
i2000SR i2000SR 144 KBytes, For
Customer Customer- 03/20/2012, distribution
Total Call Total-Call- 10:42 AM to customers
Checklist @ @ Checklist.doc GMT-6 @ after
@ completion
of the Total
Call of the
Architect
i2000SR by
Abbott
Personnel
Trademark: ARCHITECT, i2000, i2000SR, i1000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000 and ci16200 are registered trademarks
of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c4000, iSystem, cSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories.
All other trademarks, brands, product names and trade names are the property of their respective
companies. All rights reserved. This document is Confidential for use by Abbott trained personnel only.
Admin Maintenance & Document # History:
END OF DOCUMENT
Sub-Process Bar 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Reminders  See Tools & Materials table

Safety Warning – See Hazards  Picture/info below  Video Indicator  i2000sr Service Manual
Table
See Contact Information
Red Link = Live (Intranet)  See Information Details table
Blue Link = Local (DVD Set)
Overview i2000SR Annual Preventative Maintenance (@ISA 116-128C)  7 Hours

1 Pre-Site Investigative Procedures
1.1 Review Abbottlink logs (if applicable) for issues
1.2 Prior to site visit, interview 1 for any on-going problems / issues
1.3 Assemble necessary parts
2 Initial On-Site Investigative Procedures

2.1 Wear appropriate PPE & follow safety requirements for area
2.2 Review customer logs noting any discrepancies
2.3 Review QC and Calibration history
2.4 Verify TSB and ISA status of instrument
2.5 Verify customer has current back-up to Hard Drive and CD
3 RV Loader  (R&R A1.05---Live Link) / (R&R A1.05--Local Link)

3.1 Reference ISA 116-085(latest revision) for specific RV loader service / alignment as required
3.2 Clean (3) sensors on transport PCB  1  2  3
3.3 Inspect belts for alignment & cracks
3.4 Check bearing screw on loader wheel for tightness  4
3.5 Clean RV Wheel home sensor  4
3.6 When calibrating Loader (procedure on final pg.) ensure no RV’s are present in the transporter or at the process
path drop point
 1 3.2  2 3.2  3 3.2
 4 3.4 / 3.5
1
4 Wash Zone Diverter  (R&R B2.05---Live Link) / (R&R B2.05---Local Link)
4.1 Clean and verify arm movement  5
4.2 Inspect for cracks or wear
4.3 Clean home sensor  6
4.4 Verify motor screws are tight
4.5 Inspect sensor cable (W161) for damage
4.6 Inspect & Seal electrical connectors with silicone compound as needed 
 5 4.1  6 4.3
5 RV Load / Unload Diverter  R&R B2.07 / 2.15---Live) / (R&R B2.07 / 2.15---Local)

5.1 Identify diverter as old / new style
5.2 Clean Sensors  7
5.3 Clean underside ridge, rotator, & paddle area  8
5.4 Inspect wires for cracks & wear
5.6 NOTE: When mounted back to the PP cover, verify the R1 & Sample probes do not contact the wires when
moving through the diverter assembly
 7 5.2 Old Style  8 5.3 Old Style
 7 5.2 New Style  8 5.3 New Style
2
6 Stat Diverter  (R&R B2.19---Live Link) / (R&R B2.19---Local Link)
6.1 Identify diverter as old / new style
6.2 Clean Shutter & Sensors  9
6.3 Clean underside ARM & related area  10
 9 6.2 Old Style  10 6.3 Old Style
 9 6.2 New Style  10 6.3 New Style
7 Home Sensor  (R&R B1.05---Live Link) / (R&R B1.05---Local Link)

7.1 Clean Sensor  11
 11 7.1
3
8 Trigger / Pre-Trigger, WZ#1, WZ#2 Manifolds  (R&R G1.07---Live Link) /
(R&R G1.07--- Local Link)
8.1 Clean & remove buffer build-up  12
8.1a Reference ISA 116-126 (latest revision) for cleaning procedure
8.1b Utilize wooden cuticle stick for heavy build-up removal and a soft tooth brush for finer substances
8.1c Caution should be taken around nozzle area to avoid altering the factory set angle
8.1d Reference video link for manifold cleaning tips  ( Cleaning Washzone Manifold - Live Link)
8.2 Inspect for cracks, leakage, & broken components. Focus special attention to thermistor cables
8.3 Inspect Trigger / Pre-Trigger Valves ONLY for date code verification  13
8.3a Replace Trigger / Pre-Trigger valves with date code > 2yrs 
8.3b Example shown indicates a manufacturing date of November 2010
8.3c Write installation date on replacement Trigger / Pre-Trigger Valves for future 2 yr date verification  14
 12 8.1  13 8.3
 14 8.3c
9 Process Path
9.1 Inspect Process Path under Wash Zone Manifolds & Diverters for buffer build-up
9.2 IF excess build-up is found continue to STEP 10
9.3 IF no excess build-up is found continue to STEP 13
9.4 NOTE: @The entire Process Path is recommended to be cleaned once per year regardless of build-up found
10 Process Path Top Cover  (R&R B2.01--Live Link) / (R&R B2.01---Local Link)
10.1 Clean underside of buildup  15
10.2 Inspect for cracks & burrs
4
 15 10.1
11 Process Path Disc  (R&R B2.02---Live Link) / (R&R B2.02---Local Link)

11.1 Leave RV’s in disc(inner track & both lanes of outer track) & rotate CCW observing for erratic movement  16
11.1a Special attention to lane change & WZ areas
11.1b Areas of erratic movement should be noted for cleaning during step #11 (Process Path)  17
11.2 Inspect disc / gear teeth for grooves, etching & wear  18
11.3 Confirm all disc holes are open & free of debris  18
11.3a A hex wrench slightly smaller than the holes can be utilized to remove any debris
 16 11.1  17 11.1b
 18 11.2 11.3
12 Process Path
12.1 Clean entire process path  19  20
12.1a Special attention to areas causing erratic RV movement
12.1b Common problem areas: wash zones, vortexers, diverters, “S” curves, & optics
12.1c Reference video link for manifold cleaning tips  ( Cleaning Process Path - Live Link)
12.1d Commonly used tools: wooden cuticle sticks, lint free wipes, soft bristle tooth brush, DI water, & swabs
12.1e NOTE: DO NOT use metal tools in the process path as they may remove protective coating
12.2 Reference ISA 116-065 (latest revision) for details
5
 19 12.1
 20 12.1
13 Inner Reagent Carousel  (R&R D1.02---Live Link) / (R&R D1.02---Local Link)

13.1 Remove & clean carousel
13.2 Inspect V-Ridge area for wear, chips & cracks  21
13.3 If metal band is present, check for wear and separation of the band
 21 13.2
14 Dispersion Carousel  (R&R D1.03---Live Link) / (R&R D1.03---Local Link)

14.1 Remove Dispersion Carousel
14.2 Determine carousel drive type – (Gear vs. Chain)  22  23
14.2a IF Chain Drive go to STEP 15
14.2b IF Gear Drive go to STEP 16
 22 14.2  23 14.2
6
15 Chain Drive - Dispersion Carousel
15.1 @Inspect & Lubricate chain assembly. Replace as required. Reference ISA 116-098 (latest revision) 1 
15.1a Utilize silicone compound as lubricant 
15.2 @Inspect & Replace station bearings as required  24 
15.2a Spin sprocket assemblies identifying slow & erratic movement
15.2b Replace identified sprocket assembly bearings
15.3 Tighten all sprocket mounting screws  25
15.4 Inspect V-Ridge area for wear, chips & cracks. If metal band is present check for fit, wear, and band separation
 24 15.2  25 15.3
16 Gear Drive – Dispersion Carousel

16.1 @Inspect & Replace (3) Support Wheels as required. Reference portions of TSB 116-043B (latest revision)  26
2 
16.2 Inspect & Replace station bearings as required  27 
16.2a Spin sprocket assemblies identifying slow & erratic movement
16.2b Replace identified sprocket assembly bearings
16.3 Tighten all sprocket mounting screws  27
16.4 Lubricate ring gear with aqua lube grease 
16.5 Inspect V-Ridge area for wear, chips & cracks. If metal band is present check for fit, wear, and band separation
 26 16.1  27 16.2 16.3
17 Base Plate Area

17.1 Inspect (6) V-Wheels & replace as needed  28 
17.2 Inspect & Clean R1 / R2 LLS Antennas  29
17.3 Clean barcode reader with lint free tissue  29
17.4 Clean / Vacuum base plate
7
 28 17.1  29 17.2 17.3
18 Vortexers  (R&R B2.10---Live Link) / (R&R B2.10---Local Link)

18.1 Remove (4) i2000SR vortexers
18.2 Determine if vortexer is Stabilized or Original Design Cup type  30  31
18.2a IF Original Design Cup type
18.2b Remove (4) screws retaining motor cover & remove cover  32
18.2c If corrosion is found replace vortexer
18.3 Verify cup will fully extend & retract
18.4 Return Vortexers to their original positions.
18.4a If vortexer #3 at Pre-Trigger location is original style, ensure the cup is metal and NOT plastic
18.4b If original style is present and the cup is determine to be plastic, replace with new Stabilized style vortexer
 30 18.2  31 18.2  32 18.2b
19 Wash Cups  (R&R K1.14---Live Link) / (R&R K1.14---Local Link)

19.1 Remove & clean (4) wash stations
19.2 Inspect for cracks
19.3 Verify ground resistance utilizing ISA 116-122 (latest revision)
8
20 CMIA Reader / Shutter  (R&R C1.01---Live Link) / (R&R C1.01---Local Link)
20.1 Inspect CMIA Reader / Shutter with assemblies remaining attached to process path area
20.2 IF no residual build-up is noted continue to step 21
20.3 IF residual build-up is noted continue to step 20.4
20.4 Remove CMIA Reader

20.4a Ensure cap is added to light pipe ASAP.  33
20.4b Remove cap & clean Light Pipe with lint free wipes or swabs
20.4c Reinstall light pipe cap
20.5 Remove shutter
20.5a Clean home sensor & lubricate drive rod with Super Lube Grease  34
20.5b Verify / Straighten vertical fins  34
20.6 Inspect & Seal Shutter (NOT CMIA READER) electrical connector with silicone compound as needed 
20.7 Prior to installing shutter / CMIA reader, ensure optics drain is not occluded  35
 33 20.4a  35 20.7
 34 20.5a 20.5b
21 Pipettors
21.1 Inspect probes for obstructions & straightness
21.2 Inspect & clean probe clamps
21.3 Verify tightness of crash sensor locknut (underside of probe arm)
21.4 Clean & lubricate shafts  36
21.4a Clean shafts with methanol
21.4b Lubricate metal shafts with Super Lube Oil 
21.4c DO NOT lubricate Teflon (plastic) lead screw
21.5 Check (3) screws @ Z-nut for tightness  37
21.5a If Z-nut is worn it is available as an individual part to avoid replacement of entire pipettor assembly
21.6 Inspect Pressure Monitors for tubing tightness & leakage  38
9
21.6a If leaking -- replace – DO NOT apply teflon tape to attempt a fix
21.7 Inspect all tubing / fittings for tightness & leakage
 36 21.4  37 21.5  38 21.6
22 Syringes  (R&R E3.02---Live Link) / (R&R E3.02---Local Link)

22.1 Remove & inspect (4) syringes for leakage
22.2 Clean & Lubricate lead screw with Super Lube Grease  39 
 39 22.2
23 Pump Bay
23.1 Inspect all FMI / Buffer pumps for leakage  40
23.1a Verify tightness of pump tubings
23.1b Inspect & Seal electrical connectors with silicone compound as needed
23.2 Inspect gutters & entire pump bay for leakage  41
23.2a Utilize ISA 116-111 & TSB 116-079 (latest revisions) for leaking gutter repairs
23.3 Inspect drain manifold for leakage & cracks  42
23.3a Replace manifold foam plug if dirty or worn  43 
 40 23.1  41 23.2
10
 42 23.3
 43 23.3a
24 Vacuum System
24.1 Inspect tubing from vacuum vessels #1/#2 to vacuum accumulator  44
24.1a Remove tubing at vacuum vessel elbow and vacuum accumulator  45
24.1b Flush tubing & elbow with DI water and remove any build-up
24.2 Inspect vacuum accumulator for blockage and remove any water present
24.3 @Inspect vacuum pump, rebuild or replace as necessary. 
24.4 Inspect vacuum vessel fittings for leaks & blockage  46
24.5 Remove & clean vacuum vessel solenoids  47
24.5a Clean internal plunger / spring assembly  48
23.7 Remove & clean vacuum accumulator drain valve  49
 44 24.1  45 24.1a
 46 24.4  48 24.5a
11
 47 24.5  49 23.7
25 RSH
25.1 Clean RSH components utilizing M&D 6311
25.2 Perform pulley lubrication  50
25.2a Release belt tension & apply Super Lube Oil 
25.2b Retention belt
25.3 Clean transport sensors & rails  51
25.4 Vacuum bays & rack sensor area
 50 25.2  51 25.3
26 Miscellaneous
26.1 Clean refrigerator cooling fins  52
26.1a Located directly behind internal buffer storage tank
26.2 Clean card cage air filter
26.3 Clean card cage ventilation screen
26.3a Located above card cage filter & below card cage in certain units
26.3b NOTE: DO NOT use a vacuum in / around the card cage unless it is an anti-static model
26.4 Verify waste chute is free of debris & clean waste chute sensor  53
26.5 Inspect Trigger / Pre-Trigger straws and bulk solution connections  54
26.6 Verify lid shield grounding utilizing TSB-116-029 (latest revision)  55
26.7 Verify UPS system batteries are functional
12
26.7a Reference UPS operations manual delivered with system for procedures
 52 26.1  53 26.4
 54 26.5  55 26.6
27 System Checks
27.1 Calibrate RV Loader (P-40)
27.2 Perform M&D 1119 RSH Transport Calibration
27.3 Perform M&D 2055 Wash Zone Valve Pressure Check for Wash Zone Manifold Valves ONLY
27.3a Replace any valves that fail pressure check M&D
NOTE: TSB 116-099 (latest revision) must be installed to utilize M&D 2055
27.4 Perform M&D 1020 Optics Background Test
27.5 Verify ARM / Transfer Pump Operation
27.5a Verify Internal Buffer Tank has capacity to add buffer
27.5b ARM PRESENT: manually instruct ARM to fill internal buffer tank
27.5c ARM NOT PRESENT: mix external solution and transfer to internal buffer tank
28 Verify Performance
28.1 Complete QC run of one (2) step assay & one stat assay if available
28.1a Utilize all control levels for each assay
29 System Backup
29.1 Backup system to hard drive & CD (M&D 6004)
13
30 Exit Interview
30.1 Review PM checklist with customer
30.2 Review customers current consumable part inventory
30.3 Have customer verify instrument operation
 Pre-Checks (before starting this procedure) Hazards

Verify On-Hand Consumable Supplies Potential Biohazard- Identifies an activity or area
where potentially infectious materials may be
Verify On-Hand PM Parts present. Refer to Biological Hazard
 Tools & Materials Class 2 Laser Product - Warns against direct
viewing into the barcode laser beam or reflections
CONSUMABLE SUPPLIES
from the beam. Refer to Laser Hazard
(7-14233-01) Aqua Lube Grease Chemical Hazard - Identifies an activity or area
(7-204410-01) Silicone Compound (in 35ml syringe) where hazardous chemicals are present. Refer to the
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or package
(14237-015) Super Lube Oil
insert for specific safety information.
(2-94851-02) Super Lube Grease Refer to Chemical Hazard
(N/A) Canned Air / Source Locally Electrostatic Discharge - Identifies an activity or
area where operator must wear a ground strap while
servicing the system
Refer to Electrostatic Discharge
@RECOMMENDED ON-HAND PARTS
Hot Surface - Identifies an area where a hot surface
(7-78016-XX) Carousel Support Wheel Kit 2 is present. Refer to Hot Surface
(7-201782-XX) Vacuum Pump Kit
(7-200826-XX) 5 Strand Dispersion Chain 1
(7-200602-XX) Bearing Kit (25 Stations)
(7-90038-XX) Anti Foam Plug
(7-77612-XX) Manifold Valve
(7-64293-XX) V-Wheels (6 / pack)
People (required or to be notified)
1 Customer: Manager / Supervisor
 Information Details
1 Used only w/chain drive dispersion carousel system
2 Used only w/ gear drive dispersion carousel system
Talsico® Process Picture Maps™ & all associated intellectual property are owned by Talsico International, ABN 20 419 167 619, & subject to licensing Agreement
End of document
14
ARCHITECT i2000sr®
Preventive Maintenance Checklist
Customer Name Serial Number
Customer Number Ticket Number
City FSR Name
Telephone Date
Full PM including break points

Abbott recommends one PM per year at a minimum – 2 visits per Year
Full PM
6 Month PM 12 Month PM
LAT Or Or One per Year
1st Site Visit 2nd Site Visit
1.Pre-Site Investigative Procedures
Review AbbottLink logs (if applicable) for problems / issues
Interview customer for any on-going issues
Assemble necessary parts
2. Initial On-Site Investigative Procedures
Review customer logs noting any discrepancies
Review RC and Calibration history for trending / issues
Verify TSB and ISA status of instrument
Verify customer has current back-up
3. RV Loader
Clean (3) sensors on transport PCB
Inspect belts for alignment and cracks
Check bearing screw on loader wheel for tightness
Clean RV wheel home sensor
4. Wash Zone Diverter
Clean and verify arm movement
Inspect for cracks and wear
Clean home sensor
Verify motor screws are tight
Inspect sensor cable (W161) for damage
Inspect and seal electrical connector with silicone as needed
5. RV Load / Unload Diverter
Clean sensors
Clean underside ridge, rotator, and arm area
Inspect wires for cracks and wear
6. Stat Diverter
Clean shutter and sensor
Clean underside of arm and related area
The above comprehensive checklist of service procedures ensures applicable system checks and diagnostic tests have been
performed to verify proper instrument operation. This checklist should be used in conjunction with the Preventive
Maintenance guidelines contained within Abbott i2000SR Service Manual or appropriate Abbott Instrument Service
Advisory
Page 1 of 6
ARCHITECT i2000sr®

Full PM
– 2 visits per Year
Or Or One per Year
7. Home Sensor
Clean home sensor
8. Trigger / Pre-trigger, Wash Zone #1, Wash Zone #2 Manifolds
Clean and remove buffer build-up
Inspect for cracks, leakage, and broken components
Inspect Trigger / Pre-trigger Valve date codes & replace valves >2 yrs
9. Process Path Inspection
Inspect process path under wash zone manifolds and diverters for
buffer build-up
Excess buffer build-up found: Proceed to step 10
No Excess buffer build-up found: Proceed to step 13
10. Process Path Top Cover
Clean underside of build-up
Inspect for cracks and burrs
11. Process Path Disk
Inspect disc / gear teeth for grooves, etching and wear
Confirm all disc alignment holes are open and free of debris
12. Process Path
Clean entire process path of build-up and debris
13. Inner Reagent Carousel
Remove and clean carousel
Inspect V-Ridge area for wear, chips and cracks. If metal band is
present check for separation
14. Dispersion Carousel
Remove and determine carousel drive type
If Chain Drive is present: Proceed to step 15
If Gear Drive is present: Proceed to step 16
15. Chain Driven Carousel
@ Inspect chain assembly and replace as needed
Lubricate chain assembly
Inspect and replace station bearings as needed
Tighten all sprocket mounting screws
Advisory
Page 2 of 6
ARCHITECT i2000sr®

Full PM
Or Or One per Year
16. Gear Driven Carousel
@ Inspect (3) support wheels and replace as needed
Inspect and replace station bearings as needed
Lubricate ring gear
17. Base Plate Area
Inspect (6) V-Wheels and replace as needed
Inspect and clean R1 / R2 LLS antennas
Clean barcode reader
Clean / vacuum base plate
18. Vortexers
Remove and inspect (4) vortexers
If original style metal / plastic cup type is present, remove motor cover
and inspect for corrosion
Verify cup fully extends and retracts
19. Wash Cups
Remove and clean (4) wash cup assemblies
Inspect for cracks
Verify ground resistance
20. CMIA Reader / Shutter
Inspect CMIA Reader / Shutter
NO residual build-up present: Proceed to Step 21
Residual build-up present: Continue with Step 20
Remove CMIA Reader
Clean light pipe
Remove shutter
Clean shutter home sensor and lubricate drive rod
Verify shutter vertical fins are straight
Verify CMIA Reader drain is not occluded
Advisory
Page 3 of 6
ARCHITECT i2000sr®

Full PM
Or Or One per Year
21. Pipettors
Inspect probes for straightness and obstructions
Inspect and clean probe clamps
Verify crash sensor locknut is tight
Check (3) Z-Nut screws for tightness
Inspect pressure monitors for leakage and fitting tightness
Inspect all tubing for leakage and fitting tightness
Clean and lubricate shafts
22. Syringes
Remove and inspect (4) syringes
Clean and lubricate lead screw
23. Pump Bay
Inspect all pumps for leakage
Inspect gutters and entire pump bay for leakage
Inspect drain manifold for leakage and cracks
Inspect foam plugs for wear or clogs
24. Vacuum System
Inspect tubing from vacuum vessels to accumulator
Inspect vacuum accumulator for blockage and water build-up
Inspect vacuum vessel fittings for leaks or blockage
@Inspect vacuum pump, rebuild or replace as necessary
Remove and clean vacuum vessel solenoids
Remove and clean vacuum accumulator drain valve
25. RSH
Clean RSH components
Lubricate pulley
Clean transport sensors and rail
Vacuum bays and rack sensor area
Advisory
Page 4 of 6
ARCHITECT i2000sr®

Full PM
Or Or One per Year
26. Miscellaneous
Inspect Trigger / Pre-trigger straws & bulk solution connections
Clean card cage air filter
Clean card cage ventilation screen
Clean refrigerator cooling fins
Verify waste chute is free of debris and clean chute sensor
Verify lid shield grounding
Verify UPS system batteries
27. System Checks
Calibrate RV Loader
Perform M&D 1119 RSH Transport Calibration
Perform M&D 2055 Wash Zone Valve Pressure Check
Perform M&D 1020 Optics Background Check
Verify ARM / Transfer Pump Operation
28. Verify Performance
Complete QC run of one (2) step assay and one stat assay (if available)
utilizing all control levels
29. System Backup
Backup system to hard drive and CD
30. Exit Interview
Review PM checklist with customer
Review customers current consumable inventory
Customer verifies instrument operation
Additional Parts or Notes
Advisory
Page 5 of 6
ARCHITECT i2000sr®
Date: ____________________________________________
Service Engineer Signature: ____________________________________________
Customer Signature: _____________________________________________
Advisory
Page 6 of 6
Sub-Process Bar 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Reminders
Safety Warning – See Hazards Table  Picture/info below  See Information Details table  i2000sr Service Manual
Red Link = Live (Intranet)

Blue Link = Local (DVD Set)
Overview i2000SR Total Call (@ISA 116-128C)  Target 20 Minutes

1 Instrument Review
1.1 Wear appropriate PPE & follow safety requirements for area
1.2 Review Levi-Jennings for one assay from each of the four groups (if applicable) for trends / issues
1.2a One Step 25: Examples include Progesterone, T-Uptake, Vancomycin
1.2b One Step 25 (20-4) delayed: Examples include Estradiol
1.2c Two Step 18-4: Examples include TT3, TT4, TSH
1.2d Two step 4-4: Examples include B-hCG Stat, CK-MB Stat
1.3 Review maintenance is being completed on time & as required
1.4 Review message history for issues & trending
1.4a Note process path errors 5404, 5405, etc.
2 Inspect Fluidics & Vacuum

2.1 Pipettors for smooth movement
2.2 Syringes (4) for leaks  1 1
2.3 Pressure Monitors for leaks  2 2
2.4 Pump bay area for leaks
2.5 Vacuum accumulator for liquid & blockage
2.6 Vacuum vessel elbows  3
1 2.2  2 2.3  3 2.6
3 Inspect Process Path Area

3.1 Wash zone manifolds & valves for leaks
3.2 Under WZ manifolds for buffer build-up 3
3.3 Diverters (Load-Unload / WZ / Stat) for build-up
3.3a If “old style” Stat diverter is present, verify shutter block moves freely & is not adhered to plastic base  4
1
4 3.3a Old Style Stat Diverter 4 3.3a New Style Stat Diverter
4 Calibrate RV Loader  (P-40)

4.1 Utilize procedure P-40 to calibrate RV loader 4
5 Verify TSB Status

5.1 Verify all appropriate TSB’s are completed and documented
6 Exit Interview
6.1 Review Total Call checklist with customer
6.2 Customer confirms instrument operation
 Information Details  Checklist

1 If leakage found replace syringe assembly Review Instrument History
2 If leakage found replace pressure monitor. DO NOT
Inspect Fluidics & Vacuum
attempt to repair w/ Teflon tape
3 When cleaning in the WZ nozzle area, DO NOT alter Inspect Process Path Area
the preset factory angles of the nozzles. Utilize tools Calibrate RV Loader
highlighted in the recommended cleaning such as a
soft bristle brush. Hazards
Potential Biohazard- Identifies an activity or area
4 M&D 3131 automatically removes RV’s from the (3) where potentially infectious materials may be present.
loader sensor areas. Failure to remove these RV’s Refer to Biological Hazard
whether by M&D or manually will allow for potential
Class 2 Laser Product - Warns against direct
errors.
viewing into the barcode laser beam or reflections
from the beam. Refer to Laser Hazard
Chemical Hazard - Identifies an activity or area
where hazardous chemicals are present. Refer to the
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or package insert
for specific safety information.
Refer to Chemical Hazard
Electrostatic Discharge - Identifies an activity or
area where operator must wear a ground strap while
servicing the system
Refer to Electrostatic Discharge
Hot Surface - Identifies an area where a hot surface
is present. Refer to Hot Surface
Talsico® Process Picture Maps™ & all associated intellectual property are owned by Talsico International, ABN 20 419 167 619, & subject to licensing Agreement
End of document
2
ARCHITECT i2000sr®
Total Call Checklist
Customer Name Serial Number
Customer Number Ticket Number
City FSR Name
Telephone Date
Total Call
Completed
1. Perform Instrument Review
Review Levy Jennings for one assay from each of the four groups (if applicable) for trends / issues
- One Step 25
- One Step 25 (20-4) delayed
- Two Step 18-4
- Two Step 4-4
Review maintenance is being completed on time and as required
Review message history for issues and trending
2. Inspect Fluidics & Vacuum
Pipettors for smooth movement
Syringes (4) for leaks
Pressure Monitors for leaks
Pump Bay area for leaks
Vacuum Accumulator for liquid and blockage
Vacuum Vessel elbows for blockage
3. Inspect Process Path Area
Wash Zone Manifolds and Valves for leaks
Under Wash Zone Manifolds for buffer build-up
Diverters (Load-Unload / WZ / Stat) for build-up
4. Calibrate RV Loader
RV Loader calibration
5. Verify TSB Status
Verify all appropriate TSB’s are completed and documented
6. Exit Interview
Review Total Call checklist with customer
Customer confirms instrument operation
Parts(s) Replaced
Advisory
Page 1 of 2
ARCHITECT i2000sr®
Total Call Checklist
Comments:
Date: ____________________________________________
Service Engineer Signature: ____________________________________________
Customer Signature: _____________________________________________
Advisory
Page 2 of 2
System Specifications
reserved.
Pre-Site Checklist
This checklist is used for the i2000 series systems, the i2000SR, the c8000, and the ci8200 systems.
Obtain from Customer Additional

Customer Data
Purchase Order Comment
Account Name
Country
Delivery Address (Street)
City
State
Zip Code
Building and Floor
Laboratory Telephone
Laboratory Fax
Primary Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Second Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Hospital Maintenance Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
List the System Configuration to be Installed
List Optional/Country Specific Items to be Supplied by Customer or Abbott

(what, manufacturer, and model)
No, Does not

Yes,
meet
Description Meets Specification / Criteria
Criteria/Open
Criteria
Action Item
Space Required
Laboratory meets criteria according to instrument dimensions and required
clearances. Refer to Processing Module and SCC clearances in System
Specifications. Has adequate clearance for operator access.
The c8000 requires 31" (78.7 cm) wide openings for doorways and entryways
between the delivery area and the laboratory. Verify door width for each door from
c8000 Door and dock to lab is 31" (78.7 cm) or wider.
Entry
Requirements
For doors less than 31" (78.7 cm), an alternate method of getting the c8000 to the
lab will have to be found.
The i2000 and i2000SR require 36" (91.4 cm) wide openings for doorways and
entryways between the delivery area and the laboratory. Verify door width for each
door from dock to lab is 36" (91.4 cm) or wider.
i2000 and
i2000SR Door
and Entry For doors less than 36" (91.4 cm), but greater than 33.5" (85.1 cm), some
Requirements disassembly of the i2000 or i2000SR and removal of door and hinges will be
required.
For doors less than 33.5" (85.1 cm) wide, an alternate method of getting the i2000
or i2000SR to the lab will have to be found.
Adequate Benchtop space (within 10' of system) or Computer Stand required for
installing the SCC and UPS (if ordered).
SCC Weight = 55 lbs. (25 kg) SCC UPS Weight = 43 lbs (19.5 kg)
Printer to be used is compatible with ARCHITECT software. Printers should not be

plugged into the UPS.
HP Laserjet 6P/6MP
HP Deskjet 890C
Optional HP Deskjet 895CXi
Equipment HP Laserjet 1200 (C7044#ABA (110VAC))
Requirements
HP Laserjet 1200 (C7044A#ABB (220VAC))
List Type of Printer:
_____________________________________________________
If printer is supplied by customer, will printer be available for installation and

startup? (If not, Abbott representative must supply a printer to complete the
installation and startup.)
Analog telephone line available at SCC location. Direct line (no switchboard
interface) is required. Dedicated line is recommended, but is not required.
Modem line does not route through an internal facility switchboard.

Modem
Modem line does not have voice mail enabled.
Modem Phone Line Number: _________________________
SCC Electrical 110 VAC, 14 Amp

Supply Circuit
Requirements (90 - 132 VAC @
47 - 63 HZ)
Resettable Circuit
220 VAC, 12 Amp Circuit
Breaker
(180 - 284 VAC @ 47 - 63 HZ)
(For U.S. only -
Resettable Circuit Breaker
SCC should be
plugged into the
stand alone UPS
receptacles.)
US with UPS - Dedicated 30 Amp Line with 30 Amp Circuit Breaker or Fuse that is
identified as ABBOTT c8000.
US without UPS - Dedicated 20 Amp Line with 20 Amp Circuit Breaker or Fuse
that is identified as ABBOTT c8000.
EUR - 16 Amp Line with 16 Amp Circuit Breaker or Fuse that is identified as
ABBOTT c8000.
Verify no other electrical devices are attached to the line between the assay
module outlet and the circuit box. Line should be shielded with Metal Conduit and
wire size shall conform to local code.
Verified by Site Electrician:

c8000 Module __________________________________________________
Electrical Supply (name printed)
Requirements __________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
US - NEMA L6-30R (30A 250V Twist-Lock) - This is required for the UPS being
supplied. The instrument power cord is a NEMA L6-20R, which plugs into the UPS.
EUR - Requires IEC 309 (220V - 16A 250V)
Receptacle to be within 10' (3.0m) of the right side of the analyzer.

US with UPS - Dedicated 30 Amp Line with 30 Amp Circuit Breaker or Fuse that is
identified as ABBOTT i2000SR.
US without UPS - Dedicated 20 Amp Line with 20 Amp Circuit Breaker or Fuse
that is identified as ABBOTT i2000SR.
EUR - 16 Amp Line with 16 Amp Circuit Breaker or Fuse that is identified as
ABBOTT i2000SR.

i2000SR Module __________________________________________________
Requirements __________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
US - NEMA L6-30R (30A 250V Twist-Lock) - This is required for the UPS being
supplied. The instrument power cord is a NEMA L6-20R, which plugs into the UPS.
Assay Module Outlet within 7' (2.1m) of the assay module.
Dedicated/Isolated 30 Amp Line for each assay module. 30 Amp Circuit Breaker or
Fuse for each module (contact site electrician).
i2000 Module __________________________________________________

Requirements __________________________________________________
(per i2000) (name signature)
________________________
(date)
US - Requires NEMA L6-30, 250V, Twist Lock

Assay Module Outlet within 7' (2.1 m) of the assay module.

List the Breaker Closed Breaker Open
Measurement
taken at Room
60 Hz Power
Outlet
Measurements
Line 1 to Line 2 = 176 - 264 VAC (i2000SR) <0.5 VAC
180 - 264 VAC (c8000)
Line 1 to GND = 88 - 132 VAC <0.5 VAC
GND to Conduit = less than 0.5 VAC <0.5 VAC

List the Breaker Closed Breaker Open
Measurement
taken at Room
50 Hz Power Outlet
Measurements
Line to Neutral = 176 - 264 VAC (i2000SR) <0.5 VAC
180 - 264 VAC (c8000)
Line to Earth = 176 - 264 VAC (i2000SR) <0.5 VAC

180 - 264 VAC (c8000)
Neutral to Earth = less than 0.5 VAC <0.5 VAC
Neutral to Case = less than 0.5 VAC <0.5 VAC
Lab Operating
Temperature Cooling System able to maintain 15º C to 30º Cº (59º F to 86º F), and relative
humidity between 10% to 85% noncondensing with system installed.
c8000 = 2,200 watts; i2000SR = 2500 watts; ci8200 = 4700 watts;
i2000 = 2500 watts
Verified by Site Maintenance Engineer:
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
Water supply must have a minimum resistivity of 1 MegOhm-cm @ 25º C (77º F).
Verify 1 MegOhm Indicator Light is present and indicating good quality water
Customer has confirmed that less than 1000 colony forming units (CFU) of
bacteria per mL are present in water supply line.
Customer agrees to culture water supply bimonthly and confirm water quality of
1000 cfu/mL or less.
Regulator and pressure gauge located prior to c8000 water input. No brass fittings
at the water input line.
Note
Water Quality for The fitting on the back of the c8000 is not brass, it is a different alloy.
c8000
Water pressure set to 15-25 psi at 15º C (59º F) to 37º C (98.6º F). Maximum Flow
capacity for c8000 = 300 L/hour.
Water Connection: Provide tubing and a female connector to support a male

connector at the water input fitting of the analyzer. Tubing to be 3/8 (9.5mm) OD
hard tubing. Fitting to be 3/8 - 1/4 NPT (9.5 - 6.35mm) male thread (both ends)
compression fitting.
Flow Rate: The flow rate is determined by the water pressure and the tubing size.
If the regulator pressure, tubing and connectors meet specifications, the flow rate is
acceptable.
Average Consumption: 25 liters per hour.

Pressure gauge
located prior to
ARCHITECT 8 to 100 psi at 15º C (59º F) to 37º C (98.6º F)
ARM.
Water supply must have a minimum resistivity of 1 MegOhm-cm @ 25º C (77º F).
Verify 1 MegOhm Indicator Light is present and indicating good quality water
Customer has confirmed that less than 1000 colony forming units (CFU) of
bacteria per mL are present in water supply line.
Customer agrees to culture water supply bimonthly and confirm water quality of
1000 cfu/mL or less.
Water Quality Water temperature must be between 15º C (59º F) to 37º C (98.6º F).
(with or without
ARCHITECT ARM Static Pressure should be between 10 to 100 psi.
installed)
Caution
ARCHITECT ARM shuts off if minimum resistivity is < 1 MegOhm.
Flow Rate
Minimum flow rate should be 1.7 L/minute. (A suggested
method of measuring flow rate is to use a flowmeter or to use a
graduated container capable of holding a minimum of 2 liters.
With a watch that has a second hand, time the output of the
water. At the flow rate of 1.7 L/min, it should be at the 2-liter
mark in approximately 70 seconds.)
Water Connection
Provide a female connector to support a male connector - 3/8"
(9.5mm) OD Tube x 1/4-1/8 (6.4-3.2mm) NPT.
Floor level drain (no more than 4" (10cm) high) for gravity fed waste tubes (2) is
required. Drain must be located within 9.5 ft. (2.9 m) from the rear of the system
and be able to handle maximum flow rate of 300 liters per hour.
Liquid Waste -
c8000 (Options)
High concentration waste line can pump to an uphill drain if needed. If drain is not
available or not permitted, the optional high concentration waste container can be
utilized. (High concentration waste collection/handling as per local
requirements/regulations.)
If floor drain is not available and elevated drain (sink) is used, external Waste
Pump is required. Complete Waste Pump (if required).
This instrument uses products that contain sodium azide. Detailed information about
the potential hazards associated with azides in laboratory drains is available in the
NIOSH bulletin cdc.gov/niosh and at abbottdiagnostics.com.
Verify customer is aware of the CDC guidance to reduce to potential for the
Sodium Azide formation of metallic azides in plumbing.
Awareness
(i2000SR only) Customer has confirmed that the floor drain and associated plumbing for the
system does not contain pipes or solder containing lead, copper, silver, or brass.
Concern is limited to pipes that primarily carry instrument waste.
If the composition of the drain/plumbing is as described above or unknown,

the customer understands they should flush drains thoroughly with water several
times a day to prevent metal azides from forming.
External Container - To be located no more than 18" (45.7 cm) of liquid waste exit
at rear of assay module
Liquid Waste - Customer Provided External Container - To be located within 18" (45.7 cm) of liquid
i2000SR (Options) waste exit at rear of assay module - Should be less than 11" (38 cm) high,
List Volume of Container:_____________________________
Floor Level Drain

(no more than 4"
Within 4' (121.9 cm) of rear of assay module
(10 cm) high)
Elevated Drain
located in Sink
Waste Pump is Complete Waste Pump Required section below.
required.
Waste Pump Electrical Requirements
115 VAC
Operation 220 VAC Operation
1.6 Amp Circuit
(104-126 VAC) @
47-63 HZ 0.8 Amp Circuit 207-253 VAC @ 47-63 HZ Resettable Circuit
Resettable Circuit Breaker
Breaker
110V NEMA 5-15

220V IEC 320M grounded 3 - prong
Required Capacity
i2000
Waste Pump (if 5.5 L/hour
required)
i4000
11.0 L/hour
i6000
16.5 L/hour
i8000
22.5 L/hour
ARCHITECT ARM
18.4 L/hour
Maximum Flow Capacity with ARCHITECT ARM
132 L/hour (2.2 L/minute)
Who provides the waste pump (Abbott or Customer)?:
____________________________________________________________________
Storage
Requirements Refrigerated storage space (2-8º C) for Reagents, Calibrators, and Controls?
Non-refrigerated storage space for solutions, consumables, and disposables?
Is the bar code type listed below (ARCHITECT compatible bar code)? Circle bar
code type and obtain a sample.
Codabar
Code 3 of 9
Interleaved 2 of 5
Code 128 subset A, B, and C
Sample Bar Code
Labels Circle Features
used:
Start & Stop
Characters
Checksum
Maximum character length of the sample barcode label less than or equal to 20.
List the number of characters used: _____________________
Network LAN connection(s) available at the installation location
110 VAC outlet(s) available at the installation location
AbbottLink Internet access via port 80 available through the network
Installation of headless AbbottLink PC authorized
AbbottLink installation survey complete
Obtain from Customer Additional

LIS Interface Data
Purchase Interview Comments
Company Name
Primary LIS Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Secondary LIS Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Has the ARCHITECT System ABBOTT Standard Interface RS-232 Manual

been supplied to the LIS company?
Obtain from Customer Purchase Additional

LAS Interface Data
Interview Comments
Company Name
Primary LAS Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Secondary LAS Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Has an LAS Interface Specification (LN 8C96-97) been supplied to

LAS company?
Pre-Site Open Action Item Summary
List open action items that are required to be completed prior to system installation.
WHAT WHO PHONE NUMBER WHEN COMPLETE
(Describe action(s) required to (Who is (How to contact (When will the activity (Record date
meet specification.) responsible.) responsible person.) be completed.) completed.)
Customer Signature and Date:
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
Abbott Signature and Date:
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-122) • © 2002, 2010 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. i4000, i6000, i8000, c4000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
• Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Locator for Checklists
Links Instructions for Use
Editable Word copy of Click on the link to the left to launch an editable Word copy of the presite document. You can complete
Presite document this document and save it to your computer prior to printing it.
Acrobat copy of Click on the link to the left to launch an Acrobat copy of the presite document. If you have problems
Presite document using the Word document, the Acrobat copy can be printed and completed manually.
c 8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-110) • Copyright 2002, 2005 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, i 2000 SR, c 8000, and ci 8200 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
96750-110
Pre-Site Checklist
This checklist is used for the i 2000 series systems, the i 2000 SR, the c 8000, and the ci 8200 systems.
Customer Data Obtain from Customer Purchase Order Additional Comment

Account Name
Country
Delivery Address (Street)
City
State
Zip Code
Building and Floor
Laboratory Telephone
Laboratory Fax
Primary Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Second Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Hospital Maintenance Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
List the System Configuration to be

Installed
List Optional/Country Specific Items

to be Supplied by Customer or Abbott
(what, manufacturer, and model)
Pre-Site Specifications & Checklist Pre-site Checklist Page 1 of 10

96750-110
No, Does not

Yes, Meets meet
Description Specification / Criteria
Criteria Criteria/Open
Action Item
Space Required Laboratory meets criteria according to instrument dimensions and
required clearances. Refer to Processing Module and SCC
clearances in System Specifications. Has adequate clearance for
operator access.
c 8000 Door and The c 8000 requires 31" (78.7 cm) wide openings for doorways and
Entry Requirements entryways between the delivery area and the laboratory. Verify door
width for each door from dock to lab is 31" (78.7 cm) or wider.
For doors less than 31" (78.7 cm), an alternate method of getting the
c 8000 to the lab will have to be found.
i 2000 and The i 2000 and i 2000 SR requires 36" (91.4 cm) wide openings for
i 2000 SR Door and doorways and entryways between the delivery area and the
Entry Requirements laboratory. Verify door width for each door from dock to lab is 36"
(91.4 cm) or wider.
For doors less than 36" (91.4 cm), but greater than 33.5" (85.1 cm),
some disassembly of the i 2000 or i 2000 SR and removal of door
and hinges will be required.
For doors less than 33.5" (85.1 cm) wide, an alternate method of
getting the i 2000 or i 2000 SR to the lab will have to be found.
Optional Equipment Adequate Benchtop space (within 10' of system) or Computer Stand
Requirements required for installing the SCC and UPS (if ordered).
SCC Weight = 55 lbs. (25 kg) SCC UPS Weight = 43 lbs (19.5 kg)
Printer to be used is compatible with ARCHITECT software. Printers
should not be plugged into the UPS.
• HP Laserjet 6P/6MP
• HP Deskjet 890C
• HP Deskjet 895CXi
• HP Laserjet 1200 (C7044#ABA (110VAC))
• HP Laserjet 1200 (C7044A#ABB (220VAC))
List Type of Printer:
_____________________________________________________
If printer is supplied by customer, will printer be available for
installation and startup? (If not, Abbott representative must supply a
printer to complete the installation and startup.)
Modem Analog telephone line available at SCC location. Direct line (no
switchboard interface) is required. Dedicated line is recommended,
but is not required.
Modem line does not route through an internal facility switchboard.
Modem line does not have voice mail enabled.
Modem Phone Line Number: _________________________
SCC Electrical 110 VAC, 14 Amp Circuit 220 VAC, 12 Amp Circuit
Supply (90 - 132 VAC @ 47 - 63 HZ) (180 - 284 VAC @ 47 - 63 HZ)
Requirements Resettable Circuit Breaker Resettable Circuit Breaker
(For U.S. only – SCC should be
plugged into the stand alone UPS
receptacles.)

96750-110
No, Does not

Yes, Meets meet
Action Item
c 8000 Module US with UPS – Dedicated 30 Amp Line with 30 Amp Circuit Breaker
Electrical Supply or Fuse that is identified as ABBOTT c 8000.
Requirements US without UPS – Dedicated 20 Amp Line with 20 Amp Circuit
Breaker or Fuse that is identified as ABBOTT c 8000.
EUR – 16 Amp Line with 16 Amp Circuit Breaker or Fuse that is
identified as ABBOTT c 8000.
Verify no other electrical devices are attached to the line between the
assay module outlet and the circuit box. Line should be shielded with
Metal Conduit and wire size shall conform to local code.
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
US - NEMA L6-30R (30A 250V Twist-Lock) - This is required for the
UPS being supplied. The instrument power cord is a NEMA L6-20R,
which plugs into the UPS.
Receptacle to be within 10' (3.0m) of the right side of the analyzer.
i 2000 SR Module US with UPS – Dedicated 30 Amp Line with 30 Amp Circuit Breaker
Electrical Supply or Fuse that is identified as ABBOTT i 2000 SR.
Requirements US without UPS – Dedicated 20 Amp Line with 20 Amp Circuit
Breaker or Fuse that is identified as ABBOTT i 2000 SR.
EUR – 16 Amp Line with 16 Amp Circuit Breaker or Fuse that is
identified as ABBOTT i 2000 SR.
Verify no other electrical devices are attached to the line between the
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
US - Requires NEMA L6-20R, 250V, Twist Lock
Assay Module Outlet within 7' (2.1m) of the assay module.

96750-110
No, Does not

Yes, Meets meet
Action Item
i 2000 Module Dedicated/Isolated 30 Amp Line for each assay module. 30 Amp
Electrical Supply Circuit Breaker or Fuse for each module (contact site electrician).
Requirements (per
i 2000) Verify no other electrical devices are attached to the line between the
_________________________________________________
(name printed)
_________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
US - Requires NEMA L6-30, 250V, Twist Lock
Assay Module Outlet within 7' (2.1 m) of the assay module.
60 Hz Power List the Measurement taken Breaker Closed Breaker
Measurements at Room Outlet Open
Line 1 to Line 2 = 176 - 264 VAC (i 2000 SR) <0.5 VAC
180 - 264 VAC (c 8000)
GND to Conduit = less than 0.5 VAC <0.5 VAC
List the Measurement taken Breaker Closed Breaker
at Room Outlet Open
50 Hz Power
Line to Neutral = 176 - 264 VAC (i 2000 SR) <0.5 VAC
Measurements
180 - 264 VAC (c 8000)
Line to Earth = 176 - 264 VAC (i 2000 SR) <0.5 VAC
180 - 264 VAC (c 8000)
Neutral to Earth = less than 0.5 VAC <0.5 VAC
Neutral to Case = less than 0.5 VAC <0.5 VAC

96750-110
No, Does not

Yes, Meets meet
Action Item
Lab Operating Cooling System able to maintain 15º C to 30º Cº (59º F to 86º F),
Temperature and relative humidity between 10% to 85% noncondensing with
system installed.
c 8000 = 2,200 watts; i 2000 SR = 2500 watts; ci 8200 = 4700 watts;
i 2000 = 2500 watts
Verified by Site Maintenance Engineer:
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
Water Quality for Water supply must have a minimum resistivity of 1 MegOhm-cm @
c 8000 25º C (77º F).
Note
NCCLS Type II reagent grade water is acceptable.
 Verify 1 MegOhm Indicator Light is present and indicating good

quality water
 Customer has confirmed that less than 1000 colony forming

units (CFU) of bacteria per mL are present in water supply line.
 Customer agrees to culture water supply bimonthly and confirm

water quality of 1000 cfu/mL or less.
Regulator and pressure gauge located prior to c 8000 water input.
No brass fittings at the water input line.
Note
The fitting on the back of the c 8000 is not brass, it is a
different alloy.
Water pressure set to 15-25 psi at 15º C (59º F) to 37º C (98.6º F).
Maximum Flow capacity for c 8000 = 300 L/hour.
Water Connection: Provide tubing and a female connector to support
a male connector at the water input fitting of the analyzer. Tubing to
be 3/8 (9.5mm) OD hard tubing. Fitting to be 3/8 - 1/4 NPT (9.5 -
6.35mm) male thread (both ends) compression fitting.
Flow Rate: The flow rate is determined by the water pressure and
the tubing size. If the regulator pressure, tubing and connectors meet
specifications, the flow rate will be acceptable.
Average Consumption: 25 liters per hour.

96750-110
No, Does not

Yes, Meets meet
Action Item
Water Quality (with Pressure gauge located prior to 8 to 100 psi at 15º C (59º F) to
or without ARCHITECT ARM. 37º C (98.6º F)
ARCHITECT ARM
Water supply must have a minimum resistivity of 1 MegOhm-cm @
installed)
25º C (77º F).
Note
NCCLS Type II reagent grade water is acceptable.
 Verify 1 MegOhm Indicator Light is present and indicating good

quality water
 Customer has confirmed that less than 1000 colony forming

units (CFU) of bacteria per mL are present in water supply line.
 Customer agrees to culture water supply bimonthly and confirm

water quality of 1000 cfu/mL or less.
Caution
ARCHITECT ARM shuts off if minimum resistivity is < 1
MegOhm.
Flow Rate Minimum of 1.7 L/minute
Water Connection Provide a female connector to support a
male connector - 3/8" (9.5mm) OD Tube
x 1/4-1/8 (6.4-3.2mm) NPT.
Liquid Waste - Floor level drain (no more than 4" (10cm) high) for gravity fed waste
c8000 (Options) tubes (2) is required. Drain must be located within 9.5 ft. (2.9 m) from
the rear of the system and be able to handle maximum flow rate of
300 liters per hour.
High concentration waste line can pump to an uphill drain if needed.
If drain is not available or not permitted, the optional high
concentration waste container can be utilized. (High concentration
waste collection/handling as per local requirements/regulations.)
If floor drain is not available and elevated drain (sink) is used,
external Waste Pump is required. Complete Waste Pump (if
required).

96750-110
No, Does not

Yes, Meets meet
Action Item
This instrument uses products that contain sodium azide. Detailed
information about the potential hazards associated with azides in
laboratory drains is available in the NIOSH bulletin cdc.gov/niosh
and at abbottdiagnostics.com.
Verify customer is aware of the CDC guidance to reduce to

potential for the formation of metallic azides in plumbing.
Sodium Azide
Awareness Customer has confirmed that the floor drain and associated
(i2000SR only) plumbing for the system does not contain pipes or solder containing
lead, copper, silver, or brass. Concern is limited to pipes that
primarily carry instrument waste.
If the composition of the drain/plumbing is as described above

or unknown, the customer understands they should flush drains
thoroughly with water several times a day to prevent metal azides
from forming.
Liquid Waste – External Container - To be located no more than 18" (45.7 cm) of
i2000 SR (Options) liquid waste exit at rear of assay module
Customer Provided External Container - To be located within 18"
(45.7 cm) of liquid waste exit at rear of assay module - Should be
less than 11" (38 cm) high,
List Volume of Container:_____________________________

Floor Level Drain (no more than Within 4' (121.9 cm) of rear of
4" (10 cm) high) assay module
Elevated Drain located in Sink Complete Waste Pump Required
Waste Pump is required. section below.

96750-110
No, Does not

Yes, Meets meet
Action Item
Waste Pump (if Waste Pump Electrical Requirements
required)
115 VAC Operation 220VACOperation
1.6 Amp Circuit (104-126 VAC) 0.8 Amp Circuit 207-253
@ 47-63 HZ Resettable Circuit VAC @ 47-63 HZ Resettable
Breaker Circuit Breaker
110V NEMA 5-15 220V IEC 320M grounded 3 -
prong
Required Capacity
i 2000 5.5 L/hour
i 4000 11.0 L/hour
i 6000 16.5 L/hour
i 8000 22.5 L/hour
ARCHITECT ARM 18.4 L/hour
Maximum Flow Capacity with ARCHITECT ARM
132 L/hour (2.2 L/minute)
Who provides the waste pump (Abbott or Customer)?:
______________________________________________________
Storage Refrigerated storage space (2-8º C) for Reagents, Calibrators, and
Requirements Controls?
Non-refrigerated storage space for solutions, consumables, and
disposables?
Sample Bar Code Is the bar code type listed below (ARCHITECT compatible bar
Labels code)? Circle bar code type and obtain a sample.
• Codabar
• Code 3 of 9
• Interleaved 2 of 5
• Code 128 subset A, B, and C
Circle Features used:
Start & Stop Characters
Checksum
Maximum character length of the sample barcode label less than or
equal to 20.
List the number of characters used: _____________________
Network LAN connection(s) available at the installation location
110 VAC outlet(s) available at the installation location
AbbottLink Internet access via port 80 available through the network
Installation of headless AbbottLink PC authorized
AbbottLink installation survey complete

96750-110
LIS Interface Data Obtain from Customer Purchase Interview Additional Comments
Company Name
Primary LIS Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Secondary LIS Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Has the ARCHITECT System ABBOTT

Standard Interface RS-232 Manual
been supplied to the LIS company?
Obtain from Customer Purchase

LAS Interface Data Additional Comments
Interview
Company Name
Primary LAS Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Secondary LAS Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Has an LAS Interface Specification

(LN 8C96-97) been supplied to LAS
company?

96750-110
Pre-Site Open Action Item Summary

List open action items that are required to be completed prior to system installation.
WHAT WHO PHONE NUMBER WHEN COMPLETE

(Describe action(s) required to (How to contact (When will the activity (Record date
(Who is responsible.)
meet specification.) responsible person.) be completed.) completed.)
Customer Signature and Date:
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
Abbott Signature and Date:
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
c 8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-110) • Copyright 2002, 2005 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, i 2000 SR,
c 8000, and ci 8200 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Pre-Site Specifications & Checklist Pre-site Checklist Page 10 of

10
7.1 System Specifications (i 2000, i 2000 LAS, i 4000, i 6000, and i 8000)
The following system specifications are included in this section:
Approximate Physical Measurements

Clearance Measurements for Operation and Service
Dimensional Layout Drawings
Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Floor Loading Specifications
Operations Manual Use on the Lab Computer
Seismic Anchoring Specifications
Water and Waste Specifications
Operations Manual Use on the Lab Computer
Use Minimum System Requirements
A computer workstation should be available

in the lab for installation and use of the
ARCHITECT i System Operations Manual WINDOWS 95 or WINDOWS 2000 Operating
CD-ROM. System
This workstation is in addition to the SCC. PENTIUM II Processor
If an additional workstation is not available, 640 Mb RAM
a printed operations manual can be 24x CD-ROM Drive

i2000-i2000SR Service Manual PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

i2000-i2000SR Service Manual PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

ARCHITECT i System Service and Support Manual

Manual Revision Number

Front Matter Content Control Number

All other revision history is located in the following table.

96661- MAY/2015 ARCHITECT N/A N/A

96661- JUN/2012 ARCHITECT N/A N/A

96661- SEP/2007 ARCHITECT N/A N/A

96661- AUG/2005 ARCHITECT N/A N/A

96661- MAY/2003 i2000SR Revision N/A N/A

96661- JAN/2003 i2000SR Revision N/A N/A

96661- DEC/2002 i2000SR Revision N/A N/A

96661- SEP/2002 ALL (NEW N/A N/A

(Document Control Number 204669-102)

the copyright notice appears on all copies;

GLOBAL ALL Change "Allen" to "hex"

GLOBAL ALL Delete links to P-70 (found in S1.04, S1.05)

Front Title Change Manual Revision Number from 96661-101 to 96661-102

Front Title Add A1_8190

1 Change Section 1 Document Control Number from 96725-101 to 96725-102

1 1.2 Update A1_9270 and replace AMA-9115 with AMA-88238

1 1.3 Add "Temperature and Wash Aspirate Monitoring" to Links

1 1.3 Update A1_9296

1 1.3 In "immunoassy Processing Module" add A1_8190

1 1.3 In "immunoassy Processing Module" update AMA-9094

2 Change Section 2 Document Control Number from 96726-101 to 96726-102

2 2.6 In "Fluid/Waste Diagrams", AMA-9244 add Accumulator Tubing symbol

3 Change Section 3 Document Control Number from 96727-101 to 96727-102

3 Cable Locator Delete part number 94085

4 Change Section 4 Document Control Number from 96728-101 to 96728-102

4 A1 Change Document Control Number from 96729-101 to 96729-102

4 B1 Change Document Control Number from 96730-101 to 96730-102

4 B2 Change Document Control Number from 96731-101 to 96731-102

4 B2.17 Change Allen refs to hex

4 C1 Change Document Control Number from 96732-101 to 96732-102

4 D2 Change Document Control Number from 96734-101 to 96734-102

4 D2.01 Add part "93777", "Cover,Reagent Carousel I2000SR"

4 E1 Change Document Control Number from 96735-101 to 96735-102

4 E1.05 Incoporated numerous changes

4 E2 Change Document Control Number from 96736-101 to 96736-102

4 E2.01 Delete "Remove R2 LLS Antenna" Action

4 E2.01 Delete "Install R2 Reagent LLS Antenna Board" Action

4 E2.02 Add part "94047", "Bd,Antenna,LLS,R2 (i 2000 SR)"

4 E2.02 Delete "Remove Antenna Flex Circuit" Action

4 E2.02 Delete "Remove R1 Antenna Flex Circuit" Action

4 E2.02 Delete "Install R1 Antenna Flex Circuit Board" Action

4 E3 Change Document Control Number from 96737-101 to 96737-102

4 G1 Change Document Control Number from 96739-101 to 96739-102

4 G1.05 Add part "93882", "Manifold,WZ,ASM i200SR"

4 K1 Change Document Control Number from 96742-101 to 96742-102

4 K1.01 Add/rearrange parts "77798", "Vessel,Vacuum,Zone 2 ASM"; "96247", "Vessel,Vacuum,Zone 1

4 M1 Change Document Control Number from 96744-101 to 96744-102

4 M1.03 Add part "90370", "Bd,Indexer, i2000SR"

4 M1.06 Add part "78665", "Bd,Controller, i2000SR"; "78889 Wrist strap"

4 Q1.05 Change part number from "78801" to "78800"

5 5.1 Add (Document Control Number 96852-101)

5 5.1 Add 1245

5 5.1 In 2021, change "10 min" to "5 min"

5 5.1 In 2029, change "10 min" to "5 min"

5 5.1 In 2050, change "7 min" to "10 min"

5 5.1 In 3150, Options, delete "RV Load Shutter" and "All"

5 5.1 In 3150, Time, change "1 min" to "5 min"

5 5.1 Add 4080

5 5.1 Add 4090